Airbus Inf - Ccom - A321 - R - 10oct23

A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN CREW
9
:2
12
OPERATING MANUAL
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
The content of this document is the property of Airbus. It is supplied in confidence and commercial
ạm
security on its contents must be maintained. It must not be used for any purpose other than that for
Ph
which it is supplied, nor may information contained in it be disclosed to unauthorized persons. It must
not be reproduced in whole or in part without permission in writing from the owners of the copyright.
29
© AIRBUS 2005. All rights reserved.

:
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
àMy
Tr
REFERENCE: HVN A321 FLEET CCOM ISSUE DATE: 10 OCT 23

ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
Intentionally left blank

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
TRANSMITTAL LETTER
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Issue date: 10 OCT 23
This is the CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL at issue date 10 OCT 23 for the A321 and
29
replacing last issue dated 11 JUL 23
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET TRL P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
TRANSMITTAL LETTER
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET TRL P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FILING INSTRUCTIONS
A321
Please incorporate this revision as follow:
Localization Insert
Remove
Subsection Title Rev. Date
PLP-LESS
ALL 10 OCT 23
29
LIST OF EFFECTIVE SECTIONS/SUBSECTIONS
2:
PLP-LEDU
41
ALL 10 OCT 23
LIST OF EFFECTIVE DOCUMENTARY UNITS
2
20
PLP-LOM
ALL 10 OCT 23
4/
LIST OF MODIFICATIONS
0
9/
01-PLP-TOC
ALL 10 OCT 23
-2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
01-020
9-
ALL 10 OCT 23
AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS
y2
03-PLP-TOC àM ALL 10 OCT 23
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Tr
03-050-30-20
ALL 10 OCT 23
ạm
Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS)

Ph
03-100 - Baby Bassinet ALL

04-PLP-TOC
ALL 10 OCT 23
TABLE OF CONTENTS
9
:2
04-025
12
ALL 10 OCT 23
VISUAL AND AURAL ALERTS
4
02
08-PLP-TOC
ALL 10 OCT 23
/2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
04
08-10-40
9/
10 OCT 23
PED Power Outlet(s)
-2
12-PLP-TOC
ALL 10 OCT 23
9-
TABLE OF CONTENTS
y2
12-20-20
ALL 10 OCT 23
àM
Emergency Equipment Preflight Inspection

13-PLP-TOC
Tr
ALL 10 OCT 23
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ạm
13-070
Ph
ALL 10 OCT 23
SLIDE ARMING PROCEDURE
13-080
ALL 10 OCT 23
29
SLIDE DISARMING PROCEDURE

:
12
14-PLP-TOC
ALL 10 OCT 23
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4
02
14-020
/2
ALL 10 OCT 23
FIRE PROTECTION
04
9/
14-080-10
ALL 10 OCT 23
-2
EVACUATION AWARENESS
Continued on the following page
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET FI P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FILING INSTRUCTIONS
A321
Continued from the previous page

Localization Insert
Remove
Subsection Title Rev. Date
14-080-50
ALL 10 OCT 23
CABIN SMOKE/FUMES AWARENESS
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET FI P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
PRELIMINARY PAGES
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
PRELIMINARY PAGES
LIST OF EFFECTIVE CABIN CREW BULLETIN
A321
(1) (2)
M Identification T Rev. Date Title
CCB1 issue 1 W 28 SEP 07 Spurious FAP Message - Approval
Criteria: K8400
Applicable to: VN-A350, VN-A351, VN-A352, VN-A353, VN-A354
CCB3 issue 1 W 28 SEP 07 Loss Of The I-PRAM Audio Sound - Approval
29
Criteria: K8400
2:
41
CCB4 issue 1 W 28 SEP 07 Anomalies On The FAP Pages - Approval
2
20
Criteria: K8400
4/
0
9/
CCB5 issue 1 W 28 SEP 07 No Automatic Cabin Illumination - Approval
-2
Criteria: K10887, K8400
Applicable to: VN-A356, VN-A357
9-
y2
(1) Evolution code : N=New, R=Revised, E=Effectivity
(2) Ecam Importance Type àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET PLP-LECCB P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
LIST OF EFFECTIVE CABIN CREW BULLETIN
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET PLP-LECCB P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A321
00 INTRODUCTION
00A CABIN INSTRUCTIONS AND LIMITATIONS
01 AIRCRAFT GENERAL
29
2:
02 COCKPIT
41
2
20
03 CABIN LAYOUT
4/
0
9/
04 CABIN INTERCOMMUNICATION DATA SYSTEM (CIDS)
-2
9-
05 COMMUNICATION
y2
àM
06 CABIN SYSTEMS
Tr
ạm
07 CABIN OXYGEN
Ph
08 IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT (IFE)

9
:2
12
09 DOORS AND SLIDES

4
02
10 EVACUATION (EVAC) AND ALERT (ECAS) SYSTEMS

/2
04
9/
11 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
-2
9-
12 PREFLIGHT CHECKS
y2
àM
13 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

Tr
ạm
14 ABNORMAL/EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
Ph
17 CABIN CREW BULLETINS

:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET PLP-TOC P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET PLP-TOC P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
(1)
M Localization Subsection Title Rev. Date
PLP-LESS LIST OF EFFECTIVE SECTIONS/SUBSECTIONS 10 OCT 23
PLP-LETDU LIST OF EFFECTIVE TEMPORARY DOCUMENTARY UNITS 12 APR 22
00-010 GENERAL INTRODUCTION 11 JUL 22
00-050 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS 11 OCT 22
29
00-060 UNITS CONVERSION TABLE 30 OCT 08
2:
41
00A-010 GENERAL 11 OCT 22
00A-020 LIMITATIONS 10 JAN 23
2
20
00A-030 INSTRUCTIONS 01 JUL 20
4/
01-010 AIRCRAFT PRESENTATION 12 APR 22
0
9/
01-020 AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS 10 OCT 23
-2
01-030 PERFORMANCE 12 APR 22
9-
01-040 PRESSURIZATION 30 OCT 08
y2
01-050 FLIGHT CONTROLS 12 APR 22
01-060 LANDING GEARS àM 12 APR 22
Tr
01-070 CARGO COMPARTMENTS 12 APR 22
ạm
01-080 CABIN DOORS 12 APR 22

Ph
02-010 INTRODUCTION 03 JUL 19

02-030-10 General 03 JUL 19
02-030-20 Location and Description 03 JUL 19
9
:2
02-040-20 Location 03 JUL 19

12
02-040-30 Description and Operation 01 APR 20

4
02
02-050 ESCAPE ROPE 03 JUL 19

/2
02-060 COCKPIT DOOR 12 APR 22

04
02-090-10 Fixed Oxygen - Description 12 APR 22

9/
02-090-20 Fixed Oxygen - Location 20 JAN 20

-2
02-090-30 Fixed Oxygen - Operation 11 JAN 22

9-
02-090-40 Portable Oxygen - PBE 20 JAN 20

y2
03-010-10 Deck Configuration 12 APR 22

àM
03-010-30 Business Class Seat 06 JAN 21

Tr
03-010-40 Economy Class Seat 06 OCT 20

ạm
03-040-10 Location 03 JUL 19

Ph
03-040-20 Description 12 APR 22

03-050-10 General 12 APR 22
03-050-20 Location 11 APR 23
: 29
03-050-30-10 Cabin Crew Stations 12 APR 22

12
03-050-30-20 Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS) 10 OCT 23

4
02
03-060-10 General 08 JAN 20

/2
03-060-20 Description and Operation 10 JAN 23

04
03-070-10 Galley General 08 JAN 20

9/
-2
03-070-20 Location 12 APR 22

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET PLP-LESS P 1/6

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

(1)
03-070-30-10 Trolley 11 JUL 23
03-070-30-20 Container/Standard Unit 10 JAN 23
03-070-30-30 Latches 03 JUL 19
29
03-070-30-40 Faucet 03 JUL 19
2:
03-070-30-50 Manual Water Shutoff Valve 03 JUL 19
41
03-070-30-60 Waste Water Draining 03 JUL 19
2
20
03-070-40 Galley Inserts 11 JUL 23
4/
03-080-10 General 20 JAN 20
0
9/
03-080-20 Location 10 JAN 23
-2
03-080-30 Description and Operation 11 APR 23
9-
03-080-40-10 Recovery of Lavatory Functions 11 JAN 22
y2
03-080-40-20 Deactivation of Lavatory Functions 12 APR 22
03-080-40-30 àM
Abnormal/Emergency Operation of the Lavatory Doors 12 APR 22
Tr
03-100-10 General 08 JAN 20
ạm
03-100-20 Capability for Stretcher Loading 06 JAN 21

Ph
04-010 CIDS INTRODUCTION 03 JUL 19

04-020-10-A Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) 12 APR 22
04-020-10-B Additional Attendant Panel (AAP) 12 APR 22
9
:2
04-020-20-A Attendant Indication Panel (AIP) 03 JUL 19

12
04-020-20-B Area Call Panel (ACP) 03 JUL 19

4
02
04-020-20-C Passenger Service Unit (PSU) 08 JAN 20

/2
04-020-20-D Passenger Signs 08 JAN 20

04
04-025 VISUAL AND AURAL ALERTS 10 OCT 23

9/
04-030-10 CIDS Configuration 03 JUL 19

-2
04-030-20 Cabin Programming 03 JUL 19

9-
04-030-30 Layout Selection 03 JUL 19

y2
04-030-40 Level Adjustment 03 JUL 19

àM
04-030-60 Software Loading 03 JUL 19

Tr
04-030-70 FAP Set-Up 03 JUL 19

ạm
04-030-80 Lights Preset 03 JUL 19

Ph
04-030-90 Lights Programming 03 JUL 19

04-040 FUNCTION RECOVERY PROCEDURES (FRP) 03 JUL 19
05-010 GENERAL 03 JUL 19
29
05-015 HANDSET 12 APR 22

:
12
05-020-10 Cabin Interphone 11 APR 23

4
02
05-020-20 Service Interphone 03 JUL 19

/2
05-020-30 Function Recovery Procedure (FRP) 03 JUL 19

04
05-030 PASSENGER ADDRESS 12 APR 22

9/
-2
05-040 PASSENGER CALL SYSTEM 01 APR 21

-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

(1)
06-005 INTRODUCTION 08 JAN 20
06-010-10 General 11 OCT 19
06-010-20 Function Access 11 OCT 19
29
06-010-30 Description of the Cabin Music (Audio) Page on the FAP 12 APR 22
2:
06-010-40 Operation of the Cabin Music (Audio) Page 11 OCT 19
41
06-020-10 General 12 APR 22
2
20
4/
06-020-30 Description of the Prerecorded Announcements Function 12 APR 22
0
9/
06-020-40 Operation of the Prerecorded Announcements Function 11 OCT 19
-2
06-030-010-10 General 08 JAN 20
9-
06-030-010-20 Function Access 08 JAN 20
y2
06-030-010-30-10 Cabin Lighting Control via FAP 12 APR 22
06-030-010-30-20 àM
Cabin Lighting Control via AAP 08 JAN 20
Tr
06-030-010-30-50 Miscellaneous Lights 08 JAN 20
ạm
06-030-020 Emergency Lighting 12 APR 22

Ph
06-040-10 General 11 OCT 19

9
:2
06-050-10 General 20 JAN 20

12
06-050-20 Location 20 JAN 20

4
02
06-050-30 Function Access 08 JAN 20

/2
06-050-40 Description and Operation 20 JAN 20

04
06-050-50 Function Recovery Procedures 12 APR 22

9/
06-060-10 General 11 APR 23

-2
06-060-20 Location 11 APR 23

9-

y2
06-060-40 Operation 08 JAN 20

àM
06-060-50 Functional Recovery Procedures 20 JAN 20

Tr
06-070-10 General 11 OCT 19

ạm
06-070-22 Location 11 OCT 19

Ph

06-080-10 General 11 OCT 19
29

:
12
06-080-30 Description of the Seat Settings Page 11 OCT 19

4
02
06-080-40 Operation of the Seat Settings Page 11 OCT 19

/2
06-090-10 General 11 OCT 19

04

9/
-2
06-090-30 Description of the System Info Page 11 OCT 19

-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

(1)
06-100-10 General 11 OCT 19
06-100-30 Description of the Cabin Status Page 08 JAN 20
29
06-110-10 General 11 OCT 19
2:
41
06-110-30 Description of the Cabin Ready Page 11 JUL 23
2
20
06-120 GALLEY COOLING 03 JUL 19
4/
07-010 Description 11 APR 23
0
9/
07-020 Operation 20 JAN 20
-2
07-030 Location 12 APR 22
9-
08-10-10 General 12 APR 22
y2
08-10-20-10 Location 12 APR 22
08-10-20-20-10 Overview of the IFE Control Center àM 12 APR 22
Tr
08-10-20-20-20 IFE Control Center Components 11 OCT 22
ạm
08-10-30-10-A Passenger Control Unit 12 APR 22

Ph
08-10-30-20 Passenger Display Unit 12 APR 22

08-10-30-30 Connection Possibilities at the Seat 12 APR 22
08-10-40 PED Power Outlet(s) 10 OCT 23
9
:2
08-10-50 Function Recovery Procedures (FRP) 12 APR 22

12
08-010 IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM 12 APR 22

4
02
08-020 MUSIC 06 JAN 21

/2
08-030 VIDEO 06 JAN 21

04
08-040 AIRSHOW 02 MAR 20

9/
08-070 INTERACTIVE GAMES 10 MAY 16

-2
09-010-10 General 11 JUL 23

9-
09-010-20 Location 12 APR 22

y2
09-010-30-A Cabin Doors 1 and 4 11 APR 23

àM
09-010-30-B Cabin Doors 2 (if installed) and 3 11 APR 23

Tr
09-010-40 Function Recovery Procedures (FRP) 11 JUL 23

ạm
09-020-10 General 11 OCT 19

Ph
09-020-20 Location 12 APR 22

09-020-30-A Slides at Cabin Doors 1 and 4 06 JAN 21
09-020-30-B Slides at Cabin Doors 2 (if installed) and 3 12 APR 22
29
09-020-30-C Offwing Slides 11 APR 23

:
12
09-020-40 Operation 12 APR 22

4
02
09-020-50 Slides Use for Ditching 11 OCT 22

/2
09-030 AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION IN CRASH SITUATIONS 12 APR 22

04
10-010 EVACUATION ALERT (EVAC) 12 APR 22

9/
-2
11-010 PORTABLE EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT 11 APR 23

-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

(1)
11-020 EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT) 12 APR 22
11-030 SUPPLEMENTARY MEDICAL EQUIPMENT 12 APR 22
11-040 PROTECTIVE BREATHING EQUIPMENT (PBE) 10 JAN 23
29
11-050 PORTABLE OXYGEN CYLINDER 20 JAN 20
2:
12-10 Introduction 11 JUL 22
41
12-20-10 Emergency Equipment Cabin Overview 11 JUL 22
2
20
12-20-20 Emergency Equipment Preflight Inspection 10 OCT 23
4/
12-30-00 Introduction 11 JUL 22
0
9/
12-30-10 Galley Electrical Panel Preflight Check 11 JUL 22
-2
12-30-100 Trolleys Preflight Check 11 JUL 22
9-
12-30-120 GAINs 11 JUL 22
y2
12-40-10 Cabin Communication Preflight Check 11 JUL 22
12-40-20 àM
Emergency Lightning System Preflight Check 11 JUL 22
Tr
12-40-40 FAP Cabin System Status Preflight Check 11 JUL 22
ạm
12-50-10 Cabin Attendant Seat Preflight Check 11 JUL 22

Ph
12-50-20 PAX seat Preflight Check 11 JUL 22

12-50-40 Lavatory Preflight Check 11 JUL 22
13-010 INTRODUCTION 30 OCT 08
9
:2
13-015-010 CREW COMMUNICATION 08 JAN 20

12
13-015-020 EFFECTIVE BRIEFINGS FOR CABIN OPERATIONS 01 JUL 20

4
02
13-015-030 MANAGEMENT OF LIQUIDS IN THE COCKPIT 06 JAN 21

/2
13-020 PHASES OF FLIGHT 01 JUL 20

04
13-040 PREFLIGHT BRIEFING 14 SEP 20

9/
13-050 CABIN DOOR OPERATION 11 JUL 23

-2
13-060 CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES 11 JAN 22

9-
13-070 SLIDE ARMING PROCEDURE 10 OCT 23

y2
13-080 SLIDE DISARMING PROCEDURE 10 OCT 23

àM
13-100 ACCESS TO COCKPIT 02 MAR 20

Tr
13-110 PASSENGER SAFETY BRIEFING 02 MAR 20

ạm
13-130 REFUELLING DEFUELING 02 MAR 20

Ph
13-150 DANGEROUS GOODS 02 MAR 20

13-210 COCKPIT SLIDING WINDOW OPERATION 08 JAN 20
14-010 INTRODUCTION 30 OCT 08
29
14-020 FIRE PROTECTION 10 OCT 23

:
12
14-025 EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS 11 OCT 22

4
02
14-030 EMERGENCY CABIN EVACUATION 11 APR 23

/2
14-040 EMERGENCY COCKPIT EVACUATION 02 MAR 20

04
14-050 DEPRESSURIZATION 11 JAN 22

9/
-2
14-055 TURBULENCE MANAGEMENT 10 MAY 16

-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

(1)
14-070 MISCELLANEOUS 02 MAR 20
14-080-10 EVACUATION AWARENESS 10 OCT 23
14-080-20 TURBULENCE THREAT AWARENESS 04 SEP 13
29
14-080-30 CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION AWARENESS 02 MAR 20
2:
14-080-50 CABIN SMOKE/FUMES AWARENESS 10 OCT 23
41
14-080-60 MANAGING IN-FLIGHT FIRES 11 JAN 22
2
20
14-090 ADDITIONAL ABNORMAL/EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 03 JUL 19
4/
17-010 Introduction 03 JUL 19
0
9/
17-CCB1 Spurious FAP Message 02 MAR 20
-2
17-CCB3 Loss Of The I-PRAM Audio Sound 02 MAR 20
9-
17-CCB4 Anomalies On The FAP Pages 02 MAR 20
y2
17-CCB5 No Automatic Cabin Illumination in Case of Excessive Cabin 08 JAN 20
Altitude or Cabin Decompression àM
Tr
(1) Evolution code : N=New, R=Revised, E=Effectivity, M=Moved
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
LIST OF EFFECTIVE TEMPORARY DOCUMENTARY UNITS
A321
(1)
M Localization DU Title DU identification DU date
06-020-10 Prerecorded Announcements (Option) 00021821.0001001 17 FEB 22
Criteria: 23-1588, K19254
Applicable to: ALL
Impacted DU: NONE
29
Reason for issue:
2:
Recovery of the prerecorded announcement via the AUDIO page of the FAP.
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET PLP-LETDU P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
LIST OF EFFECTIVE TEMPORARY DOCUMENTARY UNITS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET PLP-LETDU P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
AIRCRAFT ALLOCATION TABLE
A321
This table gives, for each delivered aircraft, the cross reference between:
- The Manufacturing Serial Number (MSN).
- The Fleet Serial Number (FSN) of the aircraft as known by AIRBUS S.A.S.
- The registration number of the aircraft as known by AIRBUS S.A.S.
- The aircraft model.
29
2:
41
(1)
M MSN FSN Registration Number Model
2
20
02974 VN-A350 321-231
4/
0
03005 VN-A351 321-231
9/
-2
03013 VN-A352 321-231
9-
03022 VN-A353 321-231
y2
03198 àM
Tr VN-A354 321-231
03315 VN-A356 321-231
ạm
03355 VN-A357 321-231

Ph
03600 VN-A358 321-231

03737 VN-A359 321-231
9
:2
12
03964 VN-A361 321-231

4
02
03966 VN-A362 321-231

/2
04136 VN-A363 321-231

04
9/
04315 VN-A367 321-231

-2
04669 VN-A323 321-231

9-
y2
04703 VN-A324 321-231

àM
04737 VN-A325 321-231

Tr
04783 VN-A326 321-231

ạm
04826 VN-A327 321-231

Ph
04863 VN-A329 321-231

29
04945 VN-A331 321-231

:
12
04971 VN-A332 321-231

4
02
05164 VN-A334 321-231

/2
04
05241 VN-A335 321-231

9/
-2
05247 VN-A336 321-231

-

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET PLP-AAT P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

(1)
05251 VN-A338 321-231
05275 VN-A339 321-231
29
2:
05297 VN-A390 321-231
41
05306 VN-A392 321-231
2
20
05340 VN-A393 321-231
4/
0
9/
05385 VN-A395 321-231
-2
05392 VN-A396 321-231
9-
05418 VN-A397 321-231
y2
05427 àM
VN-A398 321-231
Tr
05438 VN-A399 321-231

ạm
05456 VN-A601 321-231

Ph
05469 VN-A602 321-231

9
05495 VN-A603 321-231

:2
12
05555 VN-A604 321-231

4
02
05699 VN-A605 321-231

/2
04
05709 VN-A606 321-231

9/
05916 VN-A608 321-231

-2
05958 VN-A609 321-231

9-
y2
05994 VN-A610 321-231

àM
06266 VN-A611 321-231

Tr
06344 VN-A612 321-231

ạm
Ph
06748 VN-A613 321-231

06810 VN-A614 321-231
29
06880 VN-A615 321-231

:
12
08501 VN-A616 321-272N

4
02
08545 VN-A617 321-272N

/2
04
08589 VN-A618 321-272N

9/
-2
08649 VN-A620 321-272N

-

29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

(1)
08669 VN-A501 321-272N
08678 VN-A619 321-272N
29
2:
08699 VN-A621 321-272N
41
08703 VN-A622 321-272N
2
20
08729 VN-A623 321-272N
4/
0
9/
08747 VN-A624 321-272N
-2
08753 VN-A625 321-272N
9-
08769 VN-A503 321-272N
y2
08924 àM VN-A505 321-272N
Tr
08985 VN-A506 321-272N

ạm
09051 VN-A507 321-272N

Ph
09108 VN-A508 321-272N

9
09161 VN-A509 321-272N

:2
12
09241 VN-A510 321-272N

4
02
09242 VN-A511 321-272N

/2
04
09294 VN-A512 321-272N

9/
(1) Evolution code : N=New, R=Revised

-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
(1)
M CRITERION Linked SB Incorp. Date Title
K0011 30 OCT 08 WATER/WASTE - DEFINE A320 BASIC SYSTEM
Applicable to: ALL
K10887 07 APR 12 COMMUNICATIONS - CABIN INTERCOMMUNICATION
DATA SYSTEM (CIDS) - INSTALL OBRM SOFTWARE
29
P/N Z064H000032A & CAM UPDATE
2:
Applicable to: VN-A323, VN-A324, VN-A325, VN-A326, VN-A327, VN-A329, VN-A331, VN-A332, VN-A334,
41
VN-A335, VN-A336, VN-A338, VN-A339, VN-A356, VN-A357, VN-A358, VN-A359, VN-A361, VN-A362, VN-A363,
2
20
4/
0
9/
VN-A616, VN-A617, VN-A618, VN-A619, VN-A620, VN-A621, VN-A622, VN-A623, VN-A624, VN-A625
-2
K11029 03 JUL 19 COMMUNICATION - IFE SYSTEM - INSTALL
9-
PROVISIONS FOR PAX SYS SWITCH TO CONTROL
y2
SHEDBUS
àM
VN-A512, VN-A616, VN-A617, VN-A618, VN-A619, VN-A620, VN-A621, VN-A622, VN-A623, VN-A624, VN-A625
Tr
K11238 30 OCT 08 COMMUNICATION - CIDS - DEFINE CABIN

ạm
INTERCOMMUNICATION DATA SYSTEM FOR HVN01

Ph
VERSION WITH A318 TYPE CIDS

9
VN-A361, VN-A362, VN-A363, VN-A367

:2
K11239 30 OCT 08 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHING-PAX COMPARTMENT:

12
ADAPT CABIN LAYOUT FOR HVN01 VERSION (D6

4
02
AND ON)
/2
04
VN-A361, VN-A362, VN-A363, VN-A367

9/
K11276 30 OCT 08 COMMUNICATION: REPLACE AIRSHOW 420 BY

-2
AIRSHOW 4200 INCL. VCC

9-
Applicable to: VN-A350, VN-A351, VN-A352, VN-A353, VN-A354, VN-A356, VN-A357, VN-A358, VN-A359
y2
K11797 12 JUN 18 COMMUNICATIONS - CABIN INTERCOMMUNICATIO

àM
N DATA SYSTEM (CIDS) - INSTALL OBRM

SOFTWARE P/N Z064H000032B
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
VN-A618, VN-A619, VN-A620, VN-A621, VN-A622, VN-A623, VN-A624, VN-A625

12
K12400 21 JAN 11 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - CABIN ATTENDANT

4
02
SEATS INTRODUCE NEW WALL-MOUNTED SINGLE

/2
CAS ACCORDING TO FAR 25.562

04
9/
-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET PLP-LOM P 1/8

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

(1)
VN-A611, VN-A612, VN-A613, VN-A614, VN-A615
29
SEATS-INTRODUCE NEW WALL-MOUNTED DOUBLE
2:
CAS (BENCH TYPE) ACCORDING TO FAR 25.562
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
SEATS-INTRODUCE NEW FLOOR-MOUNTED CAS
9-
ACCORDING TO FAR 25.562
y2
àM
Tr

ạm
K12403 16 JUN 10 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - CABIN ATTENDANT

Ph
SEATS - INTRODUCE NEW CAS-SWIVEL TYPE-

ACCORDING TO FAR 25.562
9
:2
12
4
02

/2
K12405 21 JAN 11 COMMUNICATIONS-CIDS-INTRODUCE HANDSET

04
SERIES N40A FROM VENDOR HOLMBERG

9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
VN-A622, VN-A623, VN-A624, VN-A625
Tr
K12824 12 JUN 18 COMMUNICATIONS - CIDS - INSTALL CIDS AND SDF

ạm
OBRM SOFTWARE P/N -33A AND CAM UPDATE

Ph
: 29
12
4
02
VN-A624, VN-A625
/2
K13138 20 JUL 09 COMMUNICATION: INSTALL PES WITH DS/C

04
(PANASONIC) FOR HVN01 VERSION

9/
Applicable to: VN-A361, VN-A362, VN-A363, VN-A367

-2

-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

(1)
K13140 29 JAN 09 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT ADAPT CABIN LAYOUT FOR HVN01
VERSION DUE TO ILFC REQUIREMENTS
29
2:
K13714 25 MAY 11 Communication: Install PES with DS/C (Panasonic)for
41
HVN02 version
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
K14724 21 JAN 11 COMMUNICATIONS - CIDS - DEFINE CABIN
INTERCOMMUNICATION DATA SYSTEM (CIDS) FOR
9-
HVN02 VERSION
y2
àM
Tr
K14725 21 JAN 11 Equipment/Furnishings - Pax Compartment Install a

ạm
2-Class Cabin Layout for HVN02 Version (Vietnam

Ph
Airlines)
9
:2

12
K15148 17 MAR 11 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - EMERGENCY -

4
02
INTRODUCTION OF CANOPY MAST REDESIGN OF

/2
SURVIVAL KITS
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
VN-A624, VN-A625
K15375 23-1492 00 12 JUN 18 COMMUNICATIONS - CIDS - INSTALL CIDS OBRM
Tr

ạm
Ph
: 29
12
VN-A624, VN-A625
4
02
K15680 11 JAN 12 Communication - Integrated IFE System - Install

/2
Panasonic X-Series (eFX) for HVN03 version

04
Applicable to: VN-A334, VN-A335, VN-A336, VN-A398, VN-A602, VN-A606, VN-A610

9/

-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

(1)
K15681 11 JAN 12 Communications - CIDS - Define Cabin
Intercommunication Data System (CIDS) for HVN03
Version
29
2:
K15682 11 JAN 12 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS-PAX COMPARTMENT
41
-INSTALL A 2-CLASS CABIN LAYOUT FOR HVN03
2
VERSION (VIETNAM AIRLINES)
20
4/
0
K16010 13 JUL 12 DOORS - PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FIXED
9/
-2
INTERIOR DOORS - INTRODUCE IMPROVED
KEYPAD FOR COCKPIT DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM
9-
y2
àM
Tr
VN-A622, VN-A623, VN-A624, VN-A625

ạm
K17059 05 OCT 21 OXYGEN - CREW OXYGEN - INTRODUCE COCKPIT

Ph
OXYGEN SEGREGATION FOR NEO A/C

9
:2
12
K17105 28 APR 15 COMMUNICATIONS - CIDS - INTRODUCE A

NEW FLIGHT ATTENDANT PANEL (FAP) P/N
4
02
Z133H053Y51E
/2
04
9/

-2
K17432 10 OCT 23 Communications Pax Entertainment Adapt

9-
IFE/SPSS/EEPMS STD provision to SA Universal

y2
Platform (A319, A320, A321)

àM
Tr
K17433 06 JAN 21 Communications ? Pax Entertainment ?Install Common

ạm
IFE provision for Universal Platform (A319, A320, A321)

Ph
29
K17434 03 JUL 18 Communications - Pax Entertainment (Video) - Install

:
Common OH-Video provision for Universal Platform

12
(A319, A320, A321)

4
02
/2
04

9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

(1)
SEATS - INTRODUCE NEW SWIVEL CAS (TYPE 2430)
29
2:
41
SEATS - INTRODUCE NEW FLOOR-MOUNTED
2
SINGLE CAS (TYPE 2427)
20
4/
0
9/
-2
SEATS - INTRODUCE NEW WALL-MOUNTED SINGLE
9-
CAS (TYPE 2428)
y2
àM
Tr
SEATS - INTRODUCE NEW WALL-MOUNTED
ạm
DOUBLE CAS (TYPE 2431)

Ph
9
K17759 12 JUN 18 COMMUNICATIONS - CIDS - INTRODUCE MULTI

:2
12
PURPOSE FLIGHT ATTENDANT PANEL (MP-FAP) PN

Z145H0x4z120
4
02
/2
04
K19254 23-1588 04 12 JUN 18 COMMUNICATIONS - CIDS - INSTALL CIDS OBRM

9/
SOFTWARE P/N Z064H000034C

-2
Applicable to: ALL

9-
K19505 28 APR 15 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - PAX COMPARTMENT -

y2
ADAPT CABIN LAYOUT FOR HVN02 VERSION

àM
Applicable to: VN-A613, VN-A614, VN-A615

Tr
K19514 28 APR 15 COMMUNICATIONS - CIDS - ADAPT CABIN

INTERCOMMUNICATION DATA SYSTEM (CIDS) FOR
ạm
HVN02 D26 VERSION

Ph

K19515 10 MAY 16 COMMUNICATIONS - PAX ENTERTAINMENT - ADAPT
29
IFE INSTALLATION DUE TO LAYOUT CHANGE FOR

:
12
HVN02 D26 VERSION

4
02
K19769 11 FEB 19 COMMUNICATIONS - CIDS - EVACUATION

/2
SIGNALLING DEACTIVATION
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

(1)
K20915 12 JUN 18 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT - INSTAL A TWO CLASS CABIN
LAYOUT FOR HVN04 VERSION
29
2:
41
K20916 12 JUN 18 COMMUNICATIONS - PAX ENTERTAINMENT -
2
INSTALL PANASONIC EXO/EXW ON UNIVERSAL
20
4/
PLATFORM FOR HVN04 VERSION
0
9/
-2
K2100 30 OCT 08 DOORS - EMERGENCY EXITS - DEFINE EMERGENCY
9-
EXITS
y2
Applicable to: ALL
K2108 àM
30 OCT 08 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - PAX COMPARTMENT -
Tr
ADAPT STANDARD CABIN INTERIOR ITEMS TO A321
DEFINITION
ạm
Applicable to: ALL

Ph
K2113 30 OCT 08 FUSELAGE - AFT SECTION - DEFINE A321 BASIC

STRUCTURE OF SECTION 16
9
Applicable to: ALL

:2
12
K2696 10 MAY 16 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION - MODIFIED

INSTALLATION OFVIDEO TAPPING UNITS
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
K32081 02 OCT 18 COMMUNICATIONS - CIDS - INTRODUCE CIDS OBRM

9-

y2
àM
Tr
K3241 11 OCT 19 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - PAX COMPART.

-INSTALL SLIDES FOR DOORS NR 1 TO NR 4 -
ạm
Applicable to: ALL

Ph
K3712 30 OCT 08 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - PAX COMPARTMENT -

DELETION OF LIFELINES
29
Applicable to: ALL

:
12
K3838 12 JUN 18 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - PAX COMPARTMENT -

INSTALL SLIDE RAFTS ON A321 AIRCRAFT
4
02
Applicable to: ALL

/2

04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

(1)
K5565 30 OCT 08 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - FWD/AFT CARGO
- INSTALL MINIMUM PROVISIONS FOR CLS,
MECHANISED BULK LOADING SYSTEMS (A321)
29
Applicable to: ALL
2:
K6290 30 OCT 08 COMMUNICATION - PASSENGER INFORMATION
41
SYSTEM - DEFINE INSTALLATION OF PFIS DIU 420
2
TYPE
20
4/
0
K7301 10 MAY 16 COMMUNICATIONS - GENERAL - PASSENGER
9/
-2
ENTERTAINMENT INSTALL COMMON PROVISIONS
FOR AN INTEGRATED IFE SYSTEM
9-
y2
K7755 30 OCT 08 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS PAX COMPARTMENT
àM
INTRODUCE A MODIFIED INTRUSION AND
Tr
PENETRATION RESISTANCE COCKPIT DOOR
Applicable to: ALL
ạm
K7790 30 OCT 08 DOORS PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FIXED

Ph
PARTITIONS INTERIOR DOOR-ELECTRICAL

COCKPIT DOOR RELEASE SYSTEM
9
Applicable to: ALL

:2
12
K8400 30 OCT 08 COMMUNICATIONS CABIN INTERCOMMUNICATION

MODIFY CABIN INTERCOMMUNICATION DATA
4
02
SYSTEM ON A319
/2
Applicable to: ALL

04
K8991 30 OCT 08 COMMUNICATION: INSTALL PES AUDIO

9/
-2
(MATSUSHITA) INCL. PRAM FOR HVN01 VERSION

9-
K8993 30 OCT 08 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS-PASSENGER

y2
COMPARTMENT: INSTALL A TWO CLASS CABIN

àM
LAYOUT FOR HVN01 VERSION

Tr
VN-A361, VN-A362, VN-A363, VN-A367
ạm
K9256 30 OCT 08 COMMUNICATIONS- CIDS ADAPTED ENHANCED

Ph
CIDS (A318TYPE) ON A321

Applicable to: ALL
29
P0040 30 OCT 08 4TH OCCUPANT SEAT

:
12
Applicable to: ALL

4
P12698 28 APR 15 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS - COCKPIT SEATS -

02
INSTALL NEW 4TH OCCUPANT SEAT

/2
04
9/
-2
VN-A623, VN-A624, VN-A625

-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

(1)
P2493 30 OCT 08 COCKPIT - INSTALL A340 TYPE PILOT SEATS
Applicable to: ALL
P4497 13 DEC 12 DOORS-EMERGENCY ESCAPE SLIDE RELEASE
29
AND OVERPRESSURE WARNING SYSTEMS-MODIFY
2:
CONTROL LOGIC OF THE OVERPRESSURE WARING
41
SYSTEM
2
Applicable to: ALL
20
4/
P7444 04 JUL 17 CREATE A NEW 80VU STANDARD TO COVER
0
INSTALLATION OF OLD AND NEW IFE CONCEPT
9/
-2
Applicable to: ALL
23-1492 00 12 JUN 18 COMMUNICATIONS - CIDS - INSTALL CIDS OBRM
9-
y2
Applicable to: VN-A323, VN-A324, VN-A325, VN-A326, VN-A327, VN-A329
23-1588 04 àM
11 OCT 19 CIDS - INSTALL CIDS OBRM SOFTWARE PN
Tr
Z064H000034C
ạm
Ph
9
VN-A610, VN-A611, VN-A612, VN-A613, VN-A614, VN-A615

:2
12
57-1204 14 10 OCT 23 WINGTIP - INSTALL NEO SHARKLET ON A319 A320

A321 CEO AIRCRAFT ALREADY CERTIFIED WITH
4
02
SHARKLET
/2
04
VN-A615
9/
-2

9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
INTRODUCTION
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
INTRODUCTION
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
00-010 GENERAL INTRODUCTION

AIRBUS COPYRIGHT............................................................................................................................................. A
Main CCOM Changes............................................................................................................................................. B
Anniversary.............................................................................................................................................................. C
FOREWORD .......................................................................................................................................................... D
29
COMMENTS AND ENQUIRY..................................................................................................................................E
2:
41
GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................... F
PRESENTATION ....................................................................................................................................................G
2
20
PAGINATION ..........................................................................................................................................................H
4/
REVISION/UPDATING .............................................................................................................................................I
0
9/
CUSTOMIZATION.................................................................................................................................................... J
-2
9-
00-050 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
y2
ABBREVIATIONS ................................................................................................................................................... A
àM
Tr
00-060 UNITS CONVERSION TABLE
ạm
UNITS CONVERSION TABLE ............................................................................................................................... A

Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-PLP-TOC P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 22
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 22
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
A321
AIRBUS COPYRIGHT
Applicable to: ALL
The content of this document is the property of Airbus. It is supplied in confidence. Commercial
security on its contents must be maintained. It must not be used for any purpose other than that for
which it is supplied, nor may information contained in it be disclosed to unauthorized persons. It must
29
not be reproduced in whole or in part without permission in writing from the owners of the copyright.
2:
41
© AIRBUS 2020. All rights reserved.
2
20
4/
MAIN CCOM CHANGES
0
9/
-2
Applicable to: ALL
9-
INTRODUCTION
y2
PURPOSE àM
Tr
The purpose of the present section, called "Main CCOM Changes" is to provide general
ạm
overview of the latest CCOM revisions.

Ph
Note: In addition, each Documentary Unit (DU) provides more detailed information about its
modification: highlights with the reason(s) for change and revision bars to identify the
9
:2
revised sections.
12
TIMEFRAME
4
02
/2
The subjects in the "Main CCOM Changes" sections are categorized by month and, are
04
published regardless of the revision cycle that is applicable to each Operator.

9/
-2
The CCOM revision of June 2022 contains a major update of the Chapter 12 "PREFLIGHT
9-
CHECKS".
y2
This chapter has been reviewed in the scope of CCOM harmonization:

àM
Sub chapter 100 "GROUND CHECK" has been replaced by:

Tr
ạm
‐ Sub chapter 10 "Introduction"

Ph
‐ Sub chapter 20 "Cabin Emergency Equipment"

‐ Sub Chapter 30 "Galley Equipment"
29
‐ Sub chapter 40 "Cabin System"

:
12
‐ Sub chapter 50 "Cabin Equipment"

4
02
This change is not linked to any technical change in the aircraft.

/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-010 P 1/8

à
Tr
CCOM A to B 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321
ANNIVERSARY
Applicable to: ALL
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
FOREWORD
4
02
/2
Applicable to: ALL

04
The CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL (CCOM) provides descriptive information on the standard
9/
-2
version of the aircraft, operating instructions and Function Recovery Procedures (FRP) guidelines
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-010 P 2/8

à
Tr
CCOM C to D → 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321
for items and/or equipment managed by the cabin crew, and operating instructions for normal and/or
emergency/abnormal operations.
"Standard aircraft" signifies the aircraft as delivered by Airbus, with all applicable Service Bulletins
(SBs) embedded. All airline-specific equipment can be added via the Customer Originated Change
(COC) procedure.
In keeping with the philosophy of the FLIGHT CREW OPERATING MANUAL (FCOM), only
29
information unique to this particular aircraft configuration is included.
2:
41
In case of conflict between this CCOM and the FCOM or the regulations of the Approved Authorities'
2
Procedures, the FCOM and the regulations of the Approved Authorities' Procedures will apply.
20
4/
0
9/
COMMENTS AND ENQUIRY
-2
Applicable to: ALL
9-
y2
All manual holders and users are encouraged to forward any questions and suggestions regarding
the Cabin Crew Operating Manual (CCOM) to : àM
AIRBUS
Tr
BP 33
ạm
Ph
1 ROND-POINT MAURICE BELLONTE

31707 BLAGNAC CEDEX - FRANCE
TELEFAX : 33 (0) 561.93.29.68
9
:2
ATTN. : FLIGHT OPERATIONS SUPPORT - STLC

12
EMAIL: fltops.cabin@airbus.com
4
02
/2
04
GENERAL
9/
-2
Applicable to: ALL
The CCOM must address the unique requirements dictated by its use in a cabin environment and,
9-
y2
possibly, by the conditions associated with abnormal or emergency situations. Some subjects are
àM
also included in the FCOM, but each manual is specific to the applicable crew.
The CCOM content and format shall also satisfy the requirements for use as a reference document
Tr
ạm
during cabin crew training.

Ph
The CCOM will be available in the following electronic formats :

‐ Extensible Markup Language (XML, World Wide Web specifications).
29
‐ Portable Document Format (PDF, open Adobe specification).

:
12
The CCOM is delivered on CD-ROM or, online using Airbus World.

4
02
No paper versions will be made available.

/2
04
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS AND NOTES

9/
-2
WARNING : An operating procedure, technique, etc., which may result in injury or loss of life, if
-
not carefully followed.

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-010 P 3/8

à
Tr
CCOM ← D to F → 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321
CAUTION : An operating procedure, technique, etc., which may result in damage to

equipment, if not carefully followed.
NOTE : An operating procedure, technique, etc., considered essential to emphasize.
PRESENTATION
29
Applicable to: ALL
2:
41
The CCOM is made up of one volume, which is divided into chapters. Each chapter is divided into
2
sections. Optional sections can be added to address, airline-specific requirements (Ex : airline
20
4/
requests...).
0
9/
Each section is made up of Documentary Units (DU), which are information segments containing
-2
technical data. Each DU is assigned an effectivity.
9-
▪ Chapter PLP: PRELIMINARY PAGES
y2
This chapter provides: The table of contents, the list of documentary units, the list of modifications
àM
and the aircraft allocation table.
Tr
▪ Chapter 00 : INTRODUCTION
ạm
This chapter provides general information about the CCOM.

Ph
▪ Chapter 00A: CABIN INSTRUCTION AND LIMITATIONS

Provides all the instructions and limitations related to the cabin and defined by airworthiness
9
:2
requirements during cabin certification.

12
▪ Chapter 01: AIRCRAFT GENERAL

4
02
This chapter presents an overview of the aircraft.

/2
▪ Chapter 02: COCKPIT

04
Short description of the cockpit items related to the cockpit.

9/
-2
▪ Chapter 03: CABIN LAYOUT

Descriptive and operational information about the cabin layout.
9-
y2
▪ Chapter 04: CABIN INTERCOMMUNICATION DATA SYSTEM (CIDS)

àM
Description and use of the CIDS.

▪ Chapter 05: COMMUNICATIONS
Tr
ạm
Description and use of the following functions: the passenger address (PA), cabin interphone,
Ph
service interphone, and passenger call.

▪ Chapter 06: CABIN SYSTEMS
Description and use of the cabin systems (eg.galley cooling, temperature control, cabin lighting,
29
:
cabin ready etc...).

12
▪ Chapter 07: CABIN OXYGEN

4
02
Description and operational information of the oxygen equipment and system.

/2
04
▪ Chapter 08: IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT (IFE)

9/
Description and use of the IFE control centers, of the cabin crew and passengers functions.
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-010 P 4/8

à
Tr
CCOM ← F to G → 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321
▪ Chapter 09: DOORS AND SLIDES

Description of the passenger doors, evacuation devices, controls and indicators and aircraft
configuration in crash situations.
▪ Chapter 10: EVACUATION (EVAC) AND ALERT (ECAS) SYSTEM
Description and use of the EVAC and ECAS system.
▪ Chapter 11: EMERGENCY AND MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
29
Description and use of the emergency and medical equipment.
2:
41
▪ Chapter 12: PREFLIGHT CHECKS
2
This chapter provides standard information to define cabin preflight check.
20
4/
▪ Chapter 13: STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES (SOPS)
0
9/
This chapter provides normal procedures for standard aircraft operations by the cabin crew. SOPS
-2
consist of cabin preparations and normal procedures.
9-
▪ Chapter 14: ABNORMAL/EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
y2
This chapter provides Abnormal/Emergency procedures to be applied by cabin crews in case of a
failure. àM
Tr
▪ Chapter 17: CABIN CREW BULLETINS (CCB)

ạm
This chapter contains Cabin Crew Bulletins (CCB), which supplement the information and
Ph
procedures given in the different CCOM sections. Each CCB will be managed like a section of the
previous chapters.
9
:2
12
PAGINATION
4
02
Applicable to: ALL

/2
FORMAT
04
9/
The "PDF" CCOM is designed with the following paper layout :

-2
‐ Page format and size : A5 (148.5 mm x 210 mm).

9-
‐ Orientation : Portrait
y2
‐ Left-Hand/Right-Hand.
àM
‐ Standard character type and size : Helvetica, 9 points.

Tr
ạm
The PDF CCOM page is composed of the following three zones :

Ph
‐ A header,
‐ A footer,
29
‐ A body.
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-010 P 5/8

à
Tr
CCOM ← G to H → 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321
HEADER
The header is composed of the following three parts :
‐ The left side : Includes the manual's title, the applicable aircraft program, and the applicable
logo (company logo, or Airbus logo by default).
‐ The middle : Indicates the title of the current chapter at the top of the zone, and the title of the
29
current section at the bottom of the zone.
2:
‐ The right side : Provides the sections's identification and revision date.
41
2
HEADER
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
FOOTER
9
:2
12
The footer contains such remaining Operating Manual identification data, not included in the
4
header, as : The extracted Document IDENT, and page numbering information (that is, the current
02
/2
page number and the total number of pages).

04
EXAMPLE : FLEET CCOM

9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-010 P 6/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←H 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321
REVISION/UPDATING
Applicable to: ALL
REVISION
For the CCOM, there will no longer be General Revisions, Intermediate Revisions, or Temporary
29
Revisions, since it is revised on a continuous, as needed, basis.
2:
The revision IDENT indicated the manual's date of the assembly.
41
A section is always revised in its entirety, and the changes are indicated in the List Of Effective
2
20
Section (LOS). Each section is identified by the date of its last revision.
4/
Changes made during a revision are identified by a "revision" mark in the left-hand margin.
0
9/
The blue numerical index at the top of the left-hand margin refers to the corresponding index of
-2
the highlight page, located at the preliminary page of each chapter. The revision mark is located in
9-
front of the modified object.
y2
The lines, which indicates effectivity changes, neither have indexes nor "Rs".
àM
UPDATING
Tr
ạm
In the List Of effective Sections (LOS), each line (section) will have :
Ph
‐ Section identifiers : Chapter (2 digits), and section (3 digits).

‐ The following codes to describe the update :
9
Blank = No change
:2
12
N = New section
4
R = Revised section
02
/2
D = Deleted section
04
‐ The revision date.

9/
-2
CUSTOMIZATION
9-
y2
Applicable to: ALL

àM
Several criteria are taken into account for the customization of a CCOM, and can be grouped
Tr
according to their function :

ạm
‐ Technical criteria : Represents the aircraft's technical definition, including the :

Ph
• Aircraft's identification, or model,

• Technical definition (Factory Modifications, Service Bulletins, etc.),
29
• COC (Customer Originated Changes).

:
12
‐ Operational criteria : Represents the aircraft's operational environment, including the :

4
• Operator,
02
/2
• Associated authorities.
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-010 P 7/8

à
Tr
CCOM I to J → 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321
CCOM customization is specified in the :

‐ Aircraft Allocation Table (AAT), and
‐ List of Modifications Table (LOM).
AIRCRAFT ALLOCATION TABLE (AAT)
29
The Aircraft Allocation Table (AAT) lists fleet characteristics and the relationship between different
2:
aircraft identifications.
41
‐ The Aircraft Table, which lists the applicable aircraft, along with their associated identification :
2
20
• Manufacter Serial Number (MSN),
4/
• Fleet Serial Number (FSN),
0
9/
• Registration number,
-2
• Aircraft model.
9-
This table dedicates one line per aircraft.
y2
LIST OF MODIFICATIONS (LOM) àM
Tr
The List of Modifications Table (LOM) lists the product's applicable Factory Modifications and
ạm
Service Bulletins, along with their various cross-references. SBs appear when embodied on at
Ph
least one aircraft within the fleet. The LOM contains the following information :
• Codes describing the update :
9
‐ N = New criteria for this revision

:2
12
‐ E = Effectivity change: SB change for an existing Change Identification Number (CIN), validity
4
change, or title change for the criteria.

02
/2
• Date corresponding to the revision date for which the criteria was incorporated.
04
• Validity information is optional, and is expressed the same format as on the manual's technical
9/
-2
pages (MSN, or Registration Number). Grouping is applied in the case of an MSN, or FSN.
9-
DU EFFECTIVITY
y2
Each DU is assigned an effectivity :

àM
‐ Effectivity can either be expressed in terms of MSN, or registration number (tail number),
Tr
depending on the customer's preference. However, MSN is the default.

ạm
‐ On the PDF CCOM, the effectivity appears above the DU (if different from the previous one),
Ph
and within a grey background.

:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-010 P 8/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←J 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
A321
ABBREVIATIONS
Applicable to: ALL
ABBREVIATION TERM
AA Airworthiness Authorities
AAP Additional Attendant Panel
29
AAT Aircraft Allocation Table
2:
ABN Abnormal
41
ABV Above
2
20
AC Alternating Current
4/
A/C, AC Aircraft
0
ACARS Aircraft Communication Addressing and Reporting System
9/
-2
ACP Area Call Panel (Cabin)
ACU Airshow Control Unit
9-
ADB Area Distribution Box
y2
ADIRS Air Data and Inertial Reference System
ADS àM
Automatic Dependent Surveillance
ADV Advisory
Tr
AEVC Avionic Equipment ventilation Computer

ạm
AFM Airplane Flight Manual

Ph
AIDS Aircraft Integrated Data System

AIP Attendant Indication Panel
9
ALNA AirLine Network Architecture

:2
ALT Altitude
12
ALTN Alternate
4
02
AMM Aircraft Maintenance Manual

/2
AMU Audio Management Unit

04
ANT Antenna
9/
APU Auxiliary Power Unit

-2
ARINC Aeronautical Radio Incorporated

9-
ARN Aircraft Registration Number

y2
ARPT Airport
àM
A/S Airspeed
ASAP As Soon As Possible
Tr
ASP Audio Selector Panel

ạm
ATC Air Traffic Control

Ph
ATR Audio Tape Reproducer

ATSU Air Traffic Service Unit
ATT Attitude
29
:
AVOD Audio/Video on Demand

12
AVNCS Avionics
4
02
AWY Airway
/2
BARO Barometric
04
BAT Battery
9/
B/C, BC Business Class

-2
BCL Battery Charge Limiter

-

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-050 P 1/10

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 OCT 22
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321

ABBREVIATION TERM
BFE Buyer Furnished Equipment
BGM Boarding Music
BITE Built-In Test Equipment
BMC Bleed Monitoring Computer
29
BRK Brake
2:
BRT Bright
41
BTL Bottle
2
BTS Base Transceiver Station
20
CAB Cabin
4/
0
CAPT Captain
9/
CAM Cabin Assignment Module
-2
CAT Category
9-
CAS Cabin Attendant Seat
y2
CAUT Caution
C/B Circuit Breaker àM
CBMU Circuit Breaker Monitoring Unit
Tr
CC Cabin Crew
ạm
CCB Cabin Crew Bulletin

Ph
CCL CIDS Caution Light

CCOM Cabin Crew Operating Manual
CCR Credit Card Reader
9
:2
CCS Cabin Communication System, Center Ceiling Stowage

12
CDR Compact Disc Reproducer

4
02
CECAM Centralized Cabin Monitoring

/2
CDU Control and Display Unit

04
CFDS Centralized Fault Display System

9/
CG Center of Gravity
-2
CHA Channel
9-
CHG Change
CHK Check
y2
CIDS Cabin intercommunication Data System

àM
CIL Cabin Instruction and Limitation

Tr
CIN Change Identification Number

ạm
CIP Cabin Interface Plug

Ph
CKPT Cockpit
C/L Check List
CLB Climb
29
CLG Ceiling
:
12
CLR Clear
4
CLSD Closed
02
CM Crewmember
/2
04
CMC Central Maintenance Computer

9/
CMD Command
-2
CMS Central Maintenance System

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-050 P 2/10

à
Tr
CCOM ←A→ 11 OCT 22

ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321

ABBREVIATION TERM
CMT Cabin Management Terminal
CNTOR Contactor
COC Customer Originated Changes
COMP Compartment
29
CPTR Computer
2:
COM Communication
41
CONT Continuous
2
CPCU Cabin Pressure Control Unit
20
CRC Continuous Repetitive Chime
4/
0
CRG Cargo
9/
CRS Course
-2
CRSD Crew Rest Smoke Detection
9-
CRZ Cruise
y2
CSTR Constraint
CSU Cassette Stowage Unit àM
CT Crew Terminal
Tr
CTL Control
ạm
CTL PNL Control Panel

Ph
CTLR Controller
CTR Center
CTU Cabin Telecommunication Unit
9
:2
CVR Cockpit Voice Recorder

12
CWLU Cabin Wireless LAN Unit

4
02
CWS Central Warning System

/2
DB Decibel
04
DBPS Display Based Passenger Signs

9/
DCC Digital Cockpit Controller

-2
DEG Degree
9-
DEOA Damper and Emergency Opening Actuator

DES Descent
y2
DEST Destination
àM
DET Detection
Tr
DEU Decoder/Encoder Unit

ạm
DFDR Digital Flight Data Recorder

Ph
DIM Dimming
DIR Direction
DISC Disconnect
29
DISCH Discharge
:
12
DISPL Display
4
DIST Distance
02
DSCS Door Slide Control System

/2
04
DSU Data Server Unit

9/
DU Display Unit
-2
DV Direct View
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-050 P 3/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321

ABBREVIATION TERM
DVD Digital Versatile Disc
E/C, EC Economy Class
ECAM Electronic Centralized Aircraft Monitoring
ECAS Emergency Crew Alerting System
29
EEPMS Emergency Escape Path Marking System
2:
ECS Environmental Control System
41
eDV Electronic Direct View
2
EIS Electronic Instruments System
20
ELEC Electricity
4/
0
ELEV Elevator, Elevation
9/
EMER Emergency
-2
EMER EXIT R Emergency Exit Right (Overwing)
9-
ENG Engine
y2
EOD Explosive Ordnance Disposal
EPSU Emergency Power Supply Unit àM
EVAC Evacuation
Tr
F/A First Aid

ạm
FAIL Failure
Ph
FAP Flight Attendant Panel

FAR Federal Aviation Regulations
F/C, FC First Class
9
:2
FCOM Flight Crew Operating Manual

12
FCU Flush Control Unit

4
02
FDAU Flight Data Acquisition Unit

/2
FDB Floor Disconnect Box

04
FDIU Flight Data Interface Unit

9/
FES Fire Extinguishing System

-2
FF Fast Forward
9-
FL Flight Level
FLT Flight
y2
F/O First Officer

àM
FPEEPMS Floor-Proximity Emergency Escape Path-Marking System

Tr
FRP Function Recovery Procedure

ạm
FRQ Frequency
Ph
FS Full Size (trolley)

FSB Fasten Seat Belt (sign)
FSM Fault System Management
29
FSN Fleet Serial Number

:
12
FT Foot, Feet
4
FT/MN Feet per Minute

02
FWC Flight Warning Computer

/2
04
FWD Forward
9/
FWS Flight Warning System

-2
G5 Galley 5
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-050 P 4/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321

ABBREVIATION TERM
GAIN Galley Insert
GCS Global Communications Suite
GEN Generator
GND Ground
29
GPRS General Packet Radio Service
2:
GRVTY Gravity
41
GS Ground Speed
2
GSM Global System for Mobile Communication
20
HI High
4/
0
HP High Pressure
9/
HPV High Pressure Valve
-2
HZ Hertz
9-
HS Handset
y2
ICAO International Civil Aviation organization
IDENT Identification àM
IFE In Flight Entertainment
Tr
IFEC In Flight Entertainment Center

ạm
IGN Ignition
Ph
IMM Immediate
IND Indication
INOP Inoperative
9
:2
INT Interphone
12
INTENS Intensity
4
02
IPRAM Integrated Prerecorded Announcement

/2
IR Inertial Reference
04
IRS Inertial Reference System

9/
ISDPL Inadvertent Slide Deployment Prevention Light

-2
ISPSS In-Seat Power Supply System

9-
JAR Joint Aviation Requirements

JB Junction Box
y2
KG kilogram
àM
KT Knot
Tr
LAV Lavatory
ạm
LAV34 Lavatory 34
Ph
LCD Liquid Crystal Display

LD Lower Deck
LDG Landing
29
LD LAV Lower Deck Lavatory

:
12
LED Light Emitting Diode

4
L/G Landing Gear

02
LGCIU Landing Gear Control Interface Unit

/2
04
LIM Limitation
9/
LH Left Hand
-2
LO Low
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-050 P 5/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321

ABBREVIATION TERM
LOM List Of Modifications
LONG Longitude
LOS List Of Sections
LP Low Pressure
29
LRBL Least Risk Bomb Location
2:
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
41
LSU Lavatory Service Unit
2
LT Light
20
LVL Level
4/
0
MAINT Maintenance
9/
MAN Manual
-2
MB Milibar
9-
MCDU Multipurpose Control and Display Unit
y2
MD Main Deck
MECH Mechanic, Mechanical àM
MED Medium
Tr
MEL Minimum Equipment List

ạm
MIC Microphone
Ph
MIN Minimum
MKR Marker (Radio) Beacon
MLW Maximum Design Landing Weight
9
:2
MMEL Master Minimum Equipment List

12
MMO Mach Max Operating Speed

4
02
MN Minute
/2
MRT Manual Release Tool

04
MSA Minimum Safe Altitude

9/
MSG Message
-2
MSU Minimum Safe Altitude

9-
MSU Media Server Unit

MSL Mean Sea Level
y2
MTOW Maximum Design Takeoff Weight

àM
MWP Manual Warning Panel

Tr
MZFW Maximum Design Zero Fuel Weight

ạm
N/A Not Applicable

Ph
NATS North American Telephone System

NAV Navigation
ND Navigation Display
29
NLG Nose Landing Gear

:
12
NM Nautical Mile
4
NORM Normal
02
NS No Smoking
/2
04
NTPD Normal Temperature Pressure Dry

9/
NTS Non Textile Surface

-2
O2 Oxygen
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-050 P 6/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321

ABBREVIATION TERM
OAT Outside Air Temperature
OBRM On Board Replaceable Module
OCCPD Occupied
OFF/R Off Reset
29
OFST Offset
2:
OHSC Overhead Stowage Compartment
41
OL Outboard Left
2
OMTS On-Board Mobile Telephony System
20
O/P Output
4/
0
OPP Opposite
9/
OPS Operations
-2
OPT Optional
9-
OR Outboard Right
y2
OSP Open Software Platform
OVBD Overboard àM
OVHD Overhead
Tr
OVHT Overheat
ạm
OVRD Override
Ph
OVSPD Overspeed
OXY Oxygen
PA Passenger Address
9
:2
PAT Primary Access Terminal

12
PAX Passenger
4
02
pb, PB Pushbutton
/2
pb sw Pushbutton Switch
04
PBE Portable Breathing Equipment

9/
PCB Passenger Call Button

-2
PCU Passenger Control Unit

9-
PDF Portable Document Format

PE/C, PEC Premium Economy Class
y2
PED Portable Electronic Devices

àM
PERF Performance
Tr
PES Passenger Entertainment System

ạm
PEW Portable Equipment and Wireless

Ph
PFIS Passenger Information System

PIM Programming and Indication Module
P/N Part Number
29
PNL Panel
:
12
POS Position
4
POXIP Passenger Oxygen Indication Panel

02
PR Pressure
/2
04
PRAM Prerecorded Announcement and Music

9/
PREV Previous
-2
PROC Procedure
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-050 P 7/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321

ABBREVIATION TERM
PRV Pressure Regulation Valve
PSI Pound per Square Inch
PSIU Passenger Service Information Unit
PSP Pre-Selected Passenger
29
PSU Passenger Service Unit
2:
PT Point
41
PTP Programming and Test Panel
2
PTT Push To Talk
20
PURS Purser
4/
0
PWR Power
9/
QCCU Quantity Calculation and Control Unit
-2
QT Quart (US)
9-
QTY Quantity
y2
RA Radio Altitude
RAD Radio àM
RADVR Random Access Digital Video Reproducer
Tr
RC Repetitive Chime
ạm
RCDR Recorder
Ph
RCL Recall
RCP Radio Control Panel
RCVR Receiver
9
:2
REG Regulation
12
REL Release
4
02
REV Reverse
/2
REW Rewind
04
RH Right Hand
9/
R/L Reading Light

-2
RQRD Required
9-
RS Reset Restore
RSVR Reservoir
y2
RTE Route
àM
RTS Return To Seat

Tr
RVC Remote Volume Control

ạm
RWY Runway
Ph
SAT Static Air Temperature

SB Service Bulletin
SC Single Chime
29
SCU System Control Unit

:
12
SDU Seat Display Unit

4
SDCU Smoke Detection Control Unit

02
SEB Seat Electronic Box

/2
04
SEL Selector, Select

9/
SELCAL Selective Calling System

-2
SEU Seat Electronic Unit

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-050 P 8/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321

ABBREVIATION TERM
SFE Seller Furnished Equipment
SMS Short Message Service
S/N Serial Number
SPD Speed
29
S/R Seat Row
2:
SSC Single Stroke Chime
41
SSID Service Set Indentifier
2
STAT Static
20
STBY Standby
4/
0
STD Standard
9/
STS Status
-2
SVCE INTPH Service Interphone
9-
SW Switch
y2
SYS System
TBC To Be Confirmed àM
TBD To Be Determined
Tr
T/C,TC Tourist Class

ạm
TCAS Traffic-Collision Alert System Avoidance System

Ph
TEL Telephone
TEMP Temperature
TK Tank
9
:2
TMR Timer
12
T.O. Take Off

4
02
TU Tapping Unit
/2
TSM Trouble Shooting Manual

04
TTL Taxi, Takeoff, and Landing

9/
UP Upper
-2
USB Universal Serial Bus

9-
UTC Universal Coordinated Time

VC Ventilation controller
y2
VCC Video Control Center

àM
VCP Video Cassette Player

Tr
VCR Video Cassette recorder

ạm
VCU Video Control Unit

Ph
VENT Ventilation
VHF Very High Frequency
VIB Vibration
29
VOL Volume
:
12
VLV Valve
4
VOD Video On Demand

02
VTR Video Tape Reproducer

/2
04
WARN Warning
9/
WBM Weight and Balance Manual

-2
WDB Wall Disconnect Box

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-050 P 9/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321

ABBREVIATION TERM
WDO Window
WLAN Wireless Local Area Network
WSHLD Windshield
WT Weight
29
WWP Update of the standard operating procedure to be in accordance with the A380 CCOM.
2:
Water Waste Page
41
XML Extensible Markup Language
2
XMTR Transmitter
20
Y/C, YC Yankee Class (Economy Class)
4/
0
Z Zone
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-050 P 10/10

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 11 OCT 22
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
UNITS CONVERSION TABLE
A321

Applicable to: ALL
DESIGNATION METRIC TO US US TO METRIC

1 millimeter (mm) = 0.0394 inch (in) 1 inch (in) = 25.4 millimeter (mm)
1 meter (m) = 3.281 feet (ft) 1 foot (ft) = .3048 meter (m)
LENGTH
29
1 meter (m) = 1.094 yard (yd) 1 yard (yd) = .914 meter (m)
2:
1 kilometer (km) = .540 nautical mile (nm) 1 nautical mile (nm) = 1.852 kilometer (km)
41
1 meter/second (m/s) = 3.281 feet/second (ft/s) 1 foot/second (ft/s) = .03048 meter/second (m/s)
2
SPEED
20
1 kilometer/hour (km/h) = .540 knot (kt) 1 knot (kt) = 1.852 kilometer/hour (km/h)
4/
1 gram (g) = 0.353 ounce (oz) 1 ounce (oz) = 28.35 grams (g)
0
9/
WEIGHT 1 kilogram (kg) = 2.2046 pounds (lb) 1 pound (lb) = .4536 kilogram (kg)
-2
1 ton (t) = 2 204.6 pounds (lb) 1 pound (lb) = 0.0004536 ton (t)
1 Newton (N) = .2248 pounds (lb) 1 pound (lb) = 4.448 Newtons (N)
9-
FORCE
1 deca Newton (daN) = 2.248 pounds (lb) 1 pound (lb) = .448 deca Newton (daN)
y2
PRESSURE 1 BAR = 14.505 pounds per square inch (P.S.I.) 1 pound per square inch (P.S.I.) = .0689 bar
àM
1 millibar (mbar) = 1 hpa = .0145 P.S.I. 1 P.S.I. = 68.92 millibars (mbar) = 68.92 hpa
Tr
VOLUME 1 liter (l) = .2642 US Gallons 1 US Gallon = 3.785 liters (l)

ạm
1 cubic meter (m3) = 264.2 US Gallons 1 US Gallon = 0.03785 cubic meter (m3)
Ph
1 liter (l) = 1.0568 Qt 1 Qt = 0.94625 liter (l)

1 cubic meter (m3) = 1056.8 Qts 1 Qt = 0.000946 cubic meter (m3)
1 meter x deca Newton (m. daN) = 88.50 pound x 1 pound x inch (lb. in) = .0113 meter x deca
9
MOMENTUM
:2
inch (lb. in) Newton (m. DaN)

12
TEMPERATURE t (°C) = 5/9 {t (°F) - 32} t (°F) = t (°C) x 1.8 + 32

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-060 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 30 OCT 08
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00-060 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 30 OCT 08
ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
AND LIMITATIONS
CABIN INSTRUCTIONS
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
CABIN INSTRUCTIONS AND LIMITATIONS
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
00A-010 GENERAL
GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................ A
00A-020 LIMITATIONS
Photo-luminescent floor path marking system........................................................................................................ A
29
2:
00A-030 INSTRUCTIONS
41
Pictogram on exit marking signs............................................................................................................................. A
2
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00A-PLP-TOC P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM 10 JAN 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00A-PLP-TOC P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 10 JAN 23
ạm
Ph
GENERAL
A321
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
The chapter Cabin Instructions and Limitations (CIL) contains instructions and limitations related to
the cabin.
Instructions and limitations are defined by the appropriate airworthiness requirements during cabin
29
certification.
2:
41
Operators must develop their operating manuals in compliance with the instructions and limitations
2
included in this chapter.
20
4/
The other chapters of the CCOM are supporting the CIL chapter by providing detailed characteristics
0
and operations of the cabin and its systems. They enable a crew to perform what is required by the
9/
-2
CIL.
9-
The information given in the chapter CIL is incorporated in the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) by
y2
reference in order to mandate the operators to comply with CIL items.
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00A-010 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 OCT 22
ạm
Ph
GENERAL
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00A-010 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 22
ạm
Ph
LIMITATIONS
A321
PHOTO-LUMINESCENT FLOOR PATH MARKING SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
For aircraft equipped with a photo-luminescent floor path marking system, the cabin lighting must be
set to :
29
‐ DIM1 (ie. 50% of brightness) for 30 mn or,
2:
‐ full bright for 15 mn
412
to ensure a sufficient charging time for the light strips.
20
4/
Note: For aircraft equipped with cabin lighting scenario, the cabin lighting must be set to white
0
9/
light prior to charge the photo-luminescent floor path marking.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00A-020 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 10 JAN 23
ạm
Ph
LIMITATIONS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00A-020 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 10 JAN 23
ạm
Ph
INSTRUCTIONS
A321
PICTOGRAM ON EXIT MARKING SIGNS

Applicable to: ALL
Pictogram on exit marking signs and their meaning must:

‐ be included into the pre-flight safety briefing and the safety cards
29
‐ be highlighted into the passenger safety briefing before each takeoff .
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00A-030 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 01 JUL 20
ạm
Ph
INSTRUCTIONS
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 00A-030 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 01 JUL 20
ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
01-010 AIRCRAFT PRESENTATION

GENERALITIES....................................................................................................................................................... A
01-020 AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS

DIMENSIONS...........................................................................................................................................................A
29
2:
01-030 PERFORMANCE
41
PERFORMANCE..................................................................................................................................................... A
2
20
4/
01-040 PRESSURIZATION
0
9/
UNPRESSURIZED COMPARTMENTS ................................................................................................................. A
-2
9-
01-050 FLIGHT CONTROLS
y2
GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................ A
àM
Tr
01-060 LANDING GEARS

ạm
LANDING GEARS................................................................................................................................................... A
Ph
01-070 CARGO COMPARTMENTS

9
CARGO COMPARTMENTS.................................................................................................................................... A
:2
12
CARGO DOORS......................................................................................................................................................B
4
02
01-080 CABIN DOORS

/2
04
CABIN DOORS........................................................................................................................................................A
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
AIRCRAFT PRESENTATION
A321
GENERALITIES
Applicable to: ALL
‐ General : The A321 is a short to medium range, single-aisle, subsonic, civil transport aircraft.
‐ Engines : The aircraft has two high bypass, turbofan engines, mounted underneath the wings.
‐ Cockpit : The cockpit is arranged for a two-member crew. It also has a place for one observer
29
(plus optionally an additional one).
2:
41
‐ Cabin :
2
20
• The passenger seating layout may be varied to suit operating requirements, up to a certified
4/
maximum of 230 seats.
0
9/
• Any combination of cabin crew seats may be provided, with a minimum of 5 seats.
-2
9-
CAUTION ‐ AS WITH THE FLIGHT CREW PROCEDURES, A TRIPPED CIRCUIT BREAKER
y2
MUST NOT BE RE-ENGAGED IN FLIGHT.
àM
‐ ON GROUND, THE CABIN CREW MAY RE-ENGAGE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER,
Tr
IF THE ACTION IS COORDINATED WITH MAINTENANCE AND THE CAUSE

ạm
OF THE TRIPPING IS IDENTIFIED.

Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 01-010 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
AIRCRAFT PRESENTATION
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 01-010 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS
A321
DIMENSIONS
Criteria: 57-1204, K2113, SA, 321-200N
Applicable to: VN-A501, VN-A503, VN-A505, VN-A506, VN-A507, VN-A508, VN-A509, VN-A510, VN-A511, VN-A512, VN-A605, VN-A606,
VN-A608, VN-A609, VN-A610, VN-A611, VN-A612, VN-A613, VN-A614, VN-A615, VN-A616, VN-A617, VN-A618, VN-A619, VN-A620,
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
Note: The overall cabin length of the A321 is 34.37 m (112.76 ft).
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 01-020 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS
A321
DIMENSIONS
Criteria: K2113, SA
VN-A367, VN-A390, VN-A392, VN-A393, VN-A395, VN-A396, VN-A397, VN-A398, VN-A399, VN-A601, VN-A602, VN-A603, VN-A604
The overall cabin length of the A321 is 34.37 m (112 ft, 9 in).
29
2:
AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 01-020 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
PERFORMANCE
A321
PERFORMANCE
Applicable to: ALL
The design weights of the A321 are as follows :

‐ MAX operating altitude: between 39 000 ft and 41 100 ft depending on aircraft certification
‐ MAX design speeds (VMO/MMO) : 350 kt ; M 0.82
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 01-030 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
PERFORMANCE
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 01-030 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
PRESSURIZATION
A321
UNPRESSURIZED COMPARTMENTS
Applicable to: ALL
UNPRESSURIZED COMPARTMENTS
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 01-040 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 30 OCT 08
ạm
Ph
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
PRESSURIZATION
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 01-040 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 30 OCT 08
ạm
Ph
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A321
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
The fly-by-wire control system was designed and certificated to render the new generation of aircraft
safer, more cost effective, and more pleasant to fly, or ride in, than a conventional aircraft.
29
BASIC PRINCIPLE
2:
41
All flight control surfaces are :
2
‐ Electrically controlled,
20
‐ Hydraulically activated.
4/
0
9/
The stabilizer and rudder can also be controlled mechanically.
-2
The pilots use the sidesticks to fly the aircraft in pitch and roll (and in yaw, indirectly, through turn
9-
coordination).
y2
Computers interpret pilot inputs and move the flight control surfaces, as necessary, to carry out
àM
these orders.
Tr
However, regardless of the pilot's inputs, computers prevent :

ạm
‐ Excessive maneuvers,
Ph
‐ Flight outside the safe-flight envelope.

9
FLIGHT CONTROL BASIC PRINCIPLE

:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 01-050 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A321
FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES

FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 01-050 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
LANDING GEARS
A321
LANDING GEARS
Applicable to: ALL
The landing gear of the A321 is comprised of :

‐ Two main landing gear assemblies, mounted in the wings, and retracting sideways into the
fuselage ;
29
‐ A nose landing gear, mounted under the nose, and retracting forwards into the fuselage.
2:
41
LANDING GEARS
2
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 01-060 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
LANDING GEARS
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 01-060 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
CARGO COMPARTMENTS
A321
CARGO COMPARTMENTS
Applicable to: ALL
Three cargo compartments are installed in the A321's lower deck.

CARGO COMPARTMENTS
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
The forward and aft cargo compartments are designed to carry containers and pallets.
Ph
CARGO DOORS
9
:2
Applicable to: ALL

12
There are three cargo compartment doors on the lower right side of the fuselage, below the cabin
4
02
floor.
/2
04
CARGO DOORS
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
The forward (FWD) and AFT cargo doors open outward and upward, and can only be opened from
4
02
the outside. They are hydraulically operated and mechanically locked.

/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 01-070 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A to B 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
CARGO COMPARTMENTS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 01-070 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
CABIN DOORS
A321
CABIN DOORS
Applicable to: ALL
The A321 is equipped with :

‐ 2 pairs of oversized Type "I" passenger/crew doors in 1 L/R and 4 L/R (also qualified as type "C"
doors)
29
‐ 2 pairs of oversized Type "I" emergency exits in 2 L/R and 3 L/R (also qualified as type "C" doors)
2:
41
‐ 2 cockpit window exits (1 on each side).
2
‐ 4 avionic compartment access doors.
20
4/
CABIN DOORS
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
DIMENSIONS DIMENSIONS
HEIGHT FROM
(height x width) (height x width)
Ph
DESIGNATION GROUND FLOOR

in meter (inch) in meter (inch)
meter (Feet)
LH RH
29
Door 1 L/R and 4 L/R (oversized Type "I") 1.85 x 0.81 (73 X 32) 1.85 x 0.81 (73 X 32) 3.400 (11)
:
12
Door 2 L (oversized Type "I") 1.85 X 0.76 (73 x 30) 3.400 (11)
4
Door 2 R and 3 L/R (oversized Type "I") 1.52 x 0.76 (60 x 30) 1.52 x 0.76 (60 x 30) 3.400 (11)
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 01-080 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
AIRCRAFT GENERAL
CABIN DOORS
A321
• The passenger doors located in the FWD, and AFT sections of the cabin are normally used to
embark/disembark passengers, and to service the aircraft.
Note: For customized layouts, according to the seating capacity and seats arrangement, doors
2 and 3 oversized type I (also qualified as type C doors) can be re-qualified as type I or
type III doors .
29
2:
• All doors are operated by interior and exterior handles. They are equipped with an evacuation
41
device, and become emergency exits in the event of an evacuation.
2
20
• The cockpit window exits are sliding windows. They can only be opened from the inside.
4/
• Four inward opening, manually operated, hinged doors give external access to the avionics
0
9/
compartments. These doors are in the lower fuselage, around the nose landing gear bay.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 01-080 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
COCKPIT 0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
COCKPIT
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
02-010 INTRODUCTION
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT...................................................................................................................................A
02-030 COCKPIT SEATS

02-030-10 General
29
seat layout .............................................................................................................................................................. A
2:
41
02-030-20 Location and Description
2
20
COCKPIT SEATS.................................................................................................................................................... A
4/
COCKPIT SEATS.................................................................................................................................................... B
0
9/
COCKPIT SEATS.................................................................................................................................................... C
-2
9-
02-040 COCKPIT WINDOWS
y2
02-040-20 Location
àM
Clearview Windows ................................................................................................................................................ A
Tr
02-040-30 Description and Operation

ạm
sliding windows........................................................................................................................................................ A
Ph
02-050 ESCAPE ROPE

9
:2
Escape rope.............................................................................................................................................................A
4 12
02-060 COCKPIT DOOR

02
/2
cockpit door..............................................................................................................................................................A
04
cockpit door description and operation................................................................................................................... B

9/
-2
02-090 COCKPIT OXYGEN

9-
02-090-10 Fixed Oxygen - Description

y2
àM
Cockpit Fixed Oxygen - General.............................................................................................................................A

Cockpit Fixed Oxygen - Stowage Box.................................................................................................................... B
Tr
Cockpit Fixed Oxygen - Mask.................................................................................................................................C

ạm
Cockpit Fixed Oxygen - Control Panel................................................................................................................... D

Ph
02-090-20 Fixed Oxygen - Location

29
Location....................................................................................................................................................................A
:
12
02-090-30 Fixed Oxygen - Operation

4
02
Cockpit Mask Operation.......................................................................................................................................... A

/2
02-090-40 Portable Oxygen - PBE

04
9/
Cockpit PBE - General............................................................................................................................................ A

-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
INTRODUCTION
A321
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
The cockpit is designed for maximum comfort and convenience, providing various types of
:2
12
equipment and stowage possibilities.

4
In addition, the cockpit is thermally and acoustically insulated.

02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-010 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
INTRODUCTION
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-010 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT SEATS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GENERAL
SEAT LAYOUT
Applicable to: ALL
seat layout
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
The cockpit is designed to accommodate two crewmembers, plus one or two other occupants
4
(depending on the aircraft configuration).

02
The two pilot seats are column-mounted.

/2
04
The third and fourth occupant (if installed) seats are folding seats.
9/
These seats are suitable for use during takeoff and landing.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-030-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT SEATS
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-030-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT SEATS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION
COCKPIT SEATS
Applicable to: ALL
CAPTAIN SEAT
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-030-20 P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT SEATS
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-030-20 P 2/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT SEATS
A321
COCKPIT SEATS
Applicable to: ALL
THIRD OCCUPANT SEAT
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-030-20 P 3/4

à
Tr
CCOM B 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT SEATS
A321
COCKPIT SEATS
Applicable to: ALL
FOURTH OCCUPANT SEAT
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-030-20 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM C 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT WINDOWS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LOCATION
CLEARVIEW WINDOWS
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
The cockpit is equipped with fixed and sliding windows, which are installed on the front and sides
29
of the cockpit.
2:
types of windows
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
(1) fixed windows

/2
04
(2) sliding windows

9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-040-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT WINDOWS
A321
DESCRIPTION
exterior perspective
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
There are four FIXED WINDOWS

:2
12
‐ two are located on each side of the cockpit, and are fitted with an anti-icing and defogging
4
system.
02
/2
‐ The other two are located on the front windshield, and are also of the integral security type,
04
specifically designed to protect against bird impact.

9/
-2
There are two SLIDING WINDOWS

9-
They are located on each side of the windshield, and can be used as crew emergency exits. If an
y2
emergency occurs, the cockpit crew can use descent ropes to exit the cockpit through the opened
àM
sliding windows.
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-040-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT WINDOWS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
SLIDING WINDOWS
Applicable to: ALL
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
OPENING
9/
-2
1. Simultaneously press the red unlocking push button and rotate the operating handle rearward
2. Push the operating handle backward to move the windows until it locks.
9-
y2
CLOSING
àM
1. Pull aft the locking lever

Tr
2. Move the window with the forward window handle until it reaches the closed position
ạm
3. Push the operating handle forward to lock the window.

Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-040-30 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 01 APR 20
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT WINDOWS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-040-30 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 01 APR 20
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
ESCAPE ROPE
A321
ESCAPE ROPE
Applicable to: ALL
A 5.5 m (17.04 ft) knotted rope is stored above each sliding window, on either side of the overhead
panel.
Both stowage coverplates are marked with red labels, and are held closed by magnets, which can be
29
quickly opened.
2:
41
The ropes and their brackets can support a load of 181 kg (400 lb).
2
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-050 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
ESCAPE ROPE
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-050 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT DOOR
A321
COCKPIT DOOR
Criteria: K16010, K7755, K7790
29
A forward-opening hinge door separates the cockpit from the passenger comportment. It has an
2:
41
electric-locking latch, controlled by pilots. In normal conditions, when the door is closed, it remains
2
locked. Upon cockpit entry request, the flight crew can authorize entry by unlocking the door, which
20
remains closed until it is pushed open.
4/
0
When the flight crew does not respond to request for entry , the door can be unlocked by the cabin
9/
-2
crew, by entering a two to seven digit code (programmed by the airline) on the keypad, installed on
the lateral side of the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP).
9-
y2
The door is bulletproof and fully compliant with rapid decompression requirements.
àM
A mechanical override enables the pilots to open the door from the cockpit side.
Refer to 13-100 COCKPIT DOOR OPERATION
Tr
ạm
Refer to 14-040 COCKPIT EVACUATION THROUGH COCKPIT DOOR

Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-060 P 1/10

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT DOOR
A321
cockpit door
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-060 P 2/10

à
Tr
CCOM ←A→ 12 APR 22

ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT DOOR
A321
Note: 1. The escape panel enables the flight crew to evacuate the cockpit, in case of an
emergency, when the door is jammed or stuck. This panel can only be removed from the
cockpit side by pulling the quick release pin towards the centre of the flap, and kicking
the panel open.
2. In case of an electrical supply failure, the door is automatically unlocked, but remains
29
closed.
2:
3. If installed and in the event that one locking latch strike fails, or in case of a total CDLS
41
failure, a deadbolt is located at the level of the center latch area of the cockpit door. This
2
20
deadbolt bolts the door from the cockpit side.
4/
0
4. In case of rapid decompression in the cockpit, the door is automatically unlocked.
9/
In case of a rapid decompression in the cabin, venting from the cockpit to the cabin is
-2
ensured via existing gaps between the cockpit and the cabin, and with additional grids
9-
installed in the ceiling panels .
y2
KEYPAD LOCATION AND OPERATION àM
Tr
The keypad is located at the lateral side of the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) and is used by the
ạm
cabin crew to request pilots to open the door.

Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-060 P 3/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT DOOR
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
(1) LOCKED/UNLOCKED DOOR INDICATOR

Ph
WHITE light ON : The light comes on briefly each time the cabin crew presses a key on
the keypad.
29
:
12
GREEN light : The door has been unlocked either by a flight crew action, or
4
ON automatically (during 5 s) when no flight crew action is performed during

02
the delay following an emergency access request. The door can be

/2
04
pushed open.
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-060 P 4/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT DOOR
A321
GREEN light : An emergency request to enter the cockpit has been made ; the buzzer
flashes will sound continuously in the cockpit, but no action has yet been taken
by the flight crew.
RED light ON : The flight crew has denied access, and the door remains locked.
(2) DIGITAL KEYPAD
29
The keypad is used to sound the buzzer in the cockpit for 1 to 9 s (3 s by default), by
2:
41
entering a zero to seven-digit code, as programmed by the airline, followed by the '#' key.
2
It is also used to enter the two to seven-digit emergency code, followed by the '#' key, when
20
the flight crew does not respond.
4/
0
9/
COCKPIT DOOR CONTROL PANEL
-2
Location
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
The secure cockpit door is controlled by a toggle switch, located on the central pedestal.
04
9/
Control panel
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
(1) COCKPIT DOOR toggle switch

4
02
UNLOCK : This position is used to enable the cabin crewmember to open the door.
/2
position The switch must be pulled and maintained in the unlock position until
04
the door is pushed open.

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-060 P 5/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT DOOR
A321
NORM position : All latches are locked, and EMERGENCY access is possible for the
cabin crew.
LOCK position : Once the button has been moved to this position, the door is locked;
emergency access, the buzzer, and the keypad are inhibited for a
preselected time (5 to 20 min).
29
Note: 1. If the LOCK position has not been used by the pilot, for at least 5 to 20 min, the
2:
41
cabin crew is able to request an emergency access to open the cockpit door.
2
2. The UNLOCK position overrides and resets any previous selection.
20
3. In case of electrical an supply failure, the cockpit door is automatically unlocked,
4/
0
but remains closed.
9/
-2
(2) COCKPIT DOOR Fault Open indicator
9-
OPEN light ON : The door is not closed, or not locked.
y2
OPEN light : The cabin crew has started an emergency access procedure. If there
àM
flashes is no reaction from the flight crew, the door will unlock at the end of the
Tr
adjustable time delay (15 to 120 s).

ạm
Ph
FAULT : This light comes when a system failure has been identified (Example :
latch, pressure sensors, control unit).
9
:2
12
COCKPIT DOOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

4
02

/2
04
9/
A forward-opening hinge door separates the cockpit from the passenger comportment. It has an
-2
electric-locking latch, controlled by pilots. In normal conditions, when the door is closed, it remains
9-
locked. Upon cockpit entry request, the flight crew can authorize entry by unlocking the door, which
y2
remains closed until it is pushed open.

àM
When the flight crew does not respond to request for entry , the door can be unlocked by the cabin
Tr
crew, by entering a two to seven digit code (programmed by the airline) on the keypad, installed on
ạm
the lateral side of the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP).

Ph
The door is bulletproof and fully compliant with rapid decompression requirements.
A mechanical override enables the pilots to open the door from the cockpit side.
29
Refer to 13-100 COCKPIT DOOR OPERATION

:
12
Refer to 14-040 COCKPIT EVACUATION THROUGH COCKPIT DOOR

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-060 P 6/10

à
Tr
CCOM ← A to B → 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT DOOR
A321
cockpit door
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-060 P 7/10

à
Tr
CCOM ←B→ 12 APR 22

ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT DOOR
A321
Note: 1. The escape panel enables the flight crew to evacuate the cockpit, in case of an
emergency, when the door is jammed or stuck. This panel can only be removed from the
cockpit side by pulling the quick release pin towards the centre of the flap, and kicking
the panel open.
2. In case of an electrical supply failure, the door is automatically unlocked, but remains
29
closed.
2:
3. If installed and in the event that one locking latch strike fails, or in case of a total CDLS
41
failure, a deadbolt is located at the level of the center latch area of the cockpit door. This
2
20
deadbolt bolts the door from the cockpit side.
4/
0
4. In case of rapid decompression in the cockpit, the door is automatically unlocked.
9/
In case of a rapid decompression in the cabin, venting from the cockpit to the cabin is
-2
ensured via existing gaps between the cockpit and the cabin, and with additional grids
9-
installed in the ceiling panels .
y2
KEYPAD LOCATION AND OPERATION àM
Tr
The keypad is located at the lateral side of the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) and is used by the
ạm
cabin crew to request pilots to open the door.

Ph
keypad
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
(1) LOCKED/UNLOCKED DOOR INDICATOR

29
GREEN light : The door has been unlocked either by a flight crew action, or
:
12
ON automatically (during 5 s) when no flight crew action is performed during

4
the delay following an emergency access request. The door can be

02
/2
pushed open.
04
GREEN light : An emergency request to enter the cockpit has been made ; the buzzer
9/
-2
flashes will sound continuously in the cockpit, but no action has yet been taken
by the flight crew.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-060 P 8/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT DOOR
A321
RED light ON : The flight crew has denied access, and the door remains locked.
(2) DIGITAL KEYPAD
The keypad is used to sound the buzzer in the cockpit for 1 to 9 s (3 s by default), by
entering a zero to seven-digit code, as programmed by the airline, followed by the '#' key.
It is also used to enter the two to seven-digit emergency code, followed by the '#' key, when
29
the flight crew does not respond.
2:
41
COCKPIT DOOR CONTROL PANEL
2
20
Location
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
The secure cockpit door is controlled by a toggle switch, located on the central pedestal.
:2
12
Control panel
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
(1) COCKPIT DOOR toggle switch

UNLOCK : This position is used to enable the cabin crewmember to open the door.
29
position The switch must be pulled and maintained in the unlock position until
:
12
the door is pushed open.

4
02
NORM position : All latches are locked, and EMERGENCY access is possible for the
/2
cabin crew.
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-060 P 9/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT DOOR
A321
LOCK position : Once the button has been moved to this position, the door is locked;
emergency access, the buzzer, and the keypad are inhibited for a
preselected time (5 to 20 min).
Note: 1. If the LOCK position has not been used by the pilot, for at least 5 to 20 min, the
cabin crew is able to request an emergency access to open the cockpit door.
29
2. The UNLOCK position overrides and resets any previous selection.
2:
3. In case of electrical an supply failure, the cockpit door is automatically unlocked,
41
but remains closed.
2
20
4/
(2) COCKPIT DOOR Fault Open indicator
0
9/
OPEN light ON : The door is not closed, or not locked.
-2
OPEN light : The cabin crew has started an emergency access procedure. If there
9-
flashes is no reaction from the flight crew, the door will unlock at the end of the
y2
adjustable time delay (15 to 120 s). àM
FAULT : This light comes when a system failure has been identified (Example :
Tr
latch, pressure sensors, control unit).

ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-060 P 10/10

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FIXED OXYGEN - DESCRIPTION
COCKPIT FIXED OXYGEN - GENERAL

Criteria: K17059, SA
The cockpit fixed oxygen system supplies oxygen to the cockpit occupants in the case of smoke, fire,
29
noxious gas emissions, or depressurization. The oxygen system is segregated into two sub-system.
2:
41
‐ One sub-system supplies oxygen to the Captain and the 3rd Occupants,
2
‐ One sub-system supplies oxygen to the First Officer and the 4th Occupant.
20
4/
The cockpit fixed oxygen system has:
0
9/
-2
‐ 4 full-face quick-donning masks stowed in the dedicated boxes.
‐ Two oxygen bottles located in the avionics compartment. The flight crew can monitor the status of
9-
the bottles via the ECAM
y2
‐ Two supply valves that are normally open, ready for use. The flight crew can manually close both
àM
valves to stop the oxygen flow, via the OXYGEN panel.
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-090-10 P 1/8

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A321
COCKPIT FIXED OXYGEN - GENERAL

Criteria: SA
29
The cockpit fixed oxygen system supplies oxygen to the cockpit occupants in the case of smoke, fire,
2:
41
noxious gas emissions, or depressurization.
2
The cockpit fixed oxygen system has:
20
4/
‐ 3 or 4 full-face quick-donning masks stowed in dedicated boxes.
0
9/
‐ One oxygen bottle located in the avionics compartment. The flight crew can monitor the status of
-2
the bottles via the ECAM.
9-
‐ A supply valve that is normally open, ready for use. The flight crew can manually close the valve to
y2
stop the oxygen flow, via the OXYGEN panel.
àM
Cockpit Oxygen
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
COCKPIT FIXED OXYGEN - STOWAGE BOX

/2
04
Applicable to: ALL

9/
-2
Each mask is stowed in a box that has the following elements:

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-090-10 P 2/8

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
OXYGEN FLOW INDICATOR

:2
12
The yellow indication blinks when oxygen is flowing in the mask.

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
This shows that oxygen is not flowing in the mask.

9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-090-10 P 3/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A321
PRESS TO TEST AND RESET PB

When pressed, the PRESS TO TEST AND RESET pb either tests, or
resets the oxygen system.
‐ If the mask has not been taken out of the stowage box, this pushbutton
tests the oxygen system. If the system operates correctly, the oxygen
29
flow indicator will be yellow for a few seconds.
2:
41
‐ If the mask has been taken out from the stowage box, this pushbutton
2
20
resets the oxygen system. In this case:
4/
0
‐ The oxygen flow in the masks stops,
9/
-2
‐ The mask microphone is deactivated, and
‐ The OXY ON flag disappears.
9-
y2
OXY ON FLAG àM
Tr
The OXY ON flag indicates that oxygen flows in the mask. The OXY ON
ạm
flag appears in two cases:

Ph
‐ The stowage box doors have been opened, or

‐ The PRESS TO TEST AND RESET pb is currently pressed to perform a
9
:2
test.
4 12
02
/2
COCKPIT FIXED OXYGEN - MASK

04
9/
Applicable to: ALL

-2
COCKPIT OXYGEN MASK OVERVIEW

9-
y2
The mask has the following elements:

àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-090-10 P 4/8

à
Tr
CCOM ← B to C → 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
REGULATOR
9
:2
12
The regulator enables the user to don, remove and control the mask:
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-090-10 P 5/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←C→ 12 APR 22

ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A321
RED GRIPS
When the red grips are pressed together,
the harness inflates. When the red grips are
released, the harness deflates.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
100% / N SELECTOR
y2
When the flight crew selects the "N" position (normal position), the
àM
system supplies the mask with a mixture of ambient air and pure oxygen.
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
When the flight crew selects the "100%" position, the oxygen system
04
supplies the mask with 100% pure oxygen.

9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
EMERGENCY SELECTOR
Tr
Overpressured Oxygen prevents smoke, noxious gas, ashes from

ạm
entering into the mask. the flight crew can either press or turn the
Ph
EMERGENCY selector:
‐ Temporary supply when the selector is pressed.
: 29
‐ Continuous supply when the selector is in the EMERGENCY position.

12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-090-10 P 6/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←C 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A321
COCKPIT FIXED OXYGEN - CONTROL PANEL

Applicable to: ALL
COCKPIT FIXED OXYGEN CONTROL ON THE OXYGEN PANEL.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
CREW SUPPLY PUSHBUTTON
ạm
Normal position in flight, the button is not illuminated, masks are supplied
Ph
with oxygen.
9
:2
12
The OFF indication goes on, the masks are not supplied with oxygen.
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-090-10 P 7/8

à
Tr
CCOM D 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-090-10 P 8/8

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FIXED OXYGEN - LOCATION
LOCATION
Applicable to: ALL
LOCATION OF MASKS
The cockpit oxygen masks are stowed adjacent to each flight crewmember's seat.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
CONTROLS
y2
The OXYGEN panel is located on the overhead panel.

àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-090-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FIXED OXYGEN - LOCATION
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-090-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FIXED OXYGEN - OPERATION
COCKPIT MASK OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
HOW TO DON THE MASK

STEPS 1 AND 2
29
Squeeze the red grips toward each other, and pull the mask out of its box. The harness inflates,
2:
41
oxygen flow starts and the mask microphone is active.
2
20
STEPS 3 AND 4
4/
0
Don the mask and release the red grips. The harness deflates.
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
HOW TO RESET THE MASK

29
When the flight crew no longer requires the mask, they must reset the mask to stop the oxygen
:
12
and switch off the mask microphone. To reset the mask:

4
02
‐ squeeze the grips to inflate the harness and remove the mask,
/2
‐ close the doors of the mask stowage box,

04
‐ press the PRESS TO TEST AND RESET pb. The OXY ON flag disappears.
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-090-30 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FIXED OXYGEN - OPERATION
CAUTION If one oxygen mask is not correctly reset:

‐ the microphone of the boomset and headset at the related position is
deactivated.
‐ The oxygen may continue to flow in the cockpit masks
29
It is possible to check that the mask is correctly reset by pressing briefly the EMERGENCY
2:
41
selector. The oxygen flow indicator should remain black.
2
The oxygen mask should be stowed by qualified personnel.
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-090-30 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PORTABLE OXYGEN - PBE
COCKPIT PBE - GENERAL

Applicable to: ALL
There is one or more PBE (Protective Breathing Equipment) in the cockpit. Refer to 11-010 Symbol
List for more information on the location.
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-090-40 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT
COCKPIT OXYGEN
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PORTABLE OXYGEN - PBE
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 02-090-40 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
CABIN LAYOUT
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
CABIN LAYOUT
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
03-010 CABIN LAYOUT

03-010-10 Deck Configuration
Main Deck................................................................................................................................................................ A
Main Deck................................................................................................................................................................ B
MAIN DECK.............................................................................................................................................................C
29
Main Deck................................................................................................................................................................D
2:
41
Lower Deck.............................................................................................................................................................. E
2
20
03-010-30 Business Class Seat
4/
Business Seat.......................................................................................................................................................... A
0
9/
03-010-40 Economy Class Seat
-2
Economy Class........................................................................................................................................................ A
9-
y2
03-040 CIRCUIT BREAKER (PANELS) àM
03-040-10 Location
Tr
VU Panel Location...................................................................................................................................................A
ạm
Ph
03-040-20 Description
Example of C/B Description.................................................................................................................................... A
9
C/B Description........................................................................................................................................................ B
:2
12
C/B Description........................................................................................................................................................C
4
02
03-050 CABIN CREW STATIONS

/2
04
03-050-10 General
9/
Cabin Crew Station..................................................................................................................................................A

-2
Required CAS and Minimum Cabin Crew...............................................................................................................B

9-
03-050-20 Location
y2
àM
Location....................................................................................................................................................................A
Location....................................................................................................................................................................B
Tr
Location....................................................................................................................................................................C
ạm
Ph

03-050-30-10 Cabin Crew Stations
29
Typical Purser Station............................................................................................................................................. A

:
12
Typical Rear CC Station LH....................................................................................................................................B

4
Typical Rear CC Station RH................................................................................................................................... C

02
Typical emergency exit CC Station ....................................................................................................................... D

/2
04

9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

03-050-30-20 Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS)
Typical Single CAS..................................................................................................................................................A
Typical Floor - mounted Single CAS.......................................................................................................................B
Typical Double CAS................................................................................................................................................ C
29
Typical Swivel CAS................................................................................................................................................. D
2:
Headrest Container  ....................................................................................................................................... E
41
Removable Headrest of a CAS for Stretcher Loading............................................................................................ F
2
20
4/
03-060 STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS
0
9/
03-060-10 General
-2
General Information about Stowage Compartments............................................................................................... A
9-
y2
àM
Overhead Stowage Compartments (OHSC) with Fixed Bins..................................................................................A
Tr
Stowage Compartment  ................................................................................................................................. B
ạm
Coat Stowage  ............................................................................................................................................... C

Ph
Doghouse  ....................................................................................................................................................... D
03-070 GALLEYS
9
:2
12
03-070-10 Galley General

4
Purpose of a Galley.................................................................................................................................................A
02
/2
Galley Types............................................................................................................................................................ B
04
Electrical Equipment - General............................................................................................................................... C

9/
Electrical Panel........................................................................................................................................................ D
-2
03-070-20 Location
9-
y2
Galley Location and Equipment.............................................................................................................................. A

Galley Location........................................................................................................................................................ B
àM
Galley Location and Equipment.............................................................................................................................. C

Tr
ạm

Ph
03-070-30-10 Trolley
Description of a Trolley........................................................................................................................................... A
29
How to Remove/Insert a Trolley..............................................................................................................................B

:
12
How to Operate the Parking Brake.........................................................................................................................C

4
How to Operate the Trolley Door............................................................................................................................D

02

/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

03-070-30-20 Container/Standard Unit
Description of a Container/Standard Unit................................................................................................................A
How to Open/Close a Container/Standard Unit...................................................................................................... B
How to Remove/Insert the Container......................................................................................................................C
29
03-070-30-30 Latches
2:
41
General Information about the Latches...................................................................................................................A
2
1/4-Turn Retainer.....................................................................................................................................................B
20
4/
Intermediate Latch................................................................................................................................................... C
0
Slam Latch/Sliding Latch.........................................................................................................................................D
9/
-2
Double Slam Latch.................................................................................................................................................. E
Kickload Retainer..................................................................................................................................................... F
9-
y2
03-070-30-40 Faucet
àM
Description and Operation of the Faucet................................................................................................................ A
Tr
03-070-30-50 Manual Water Shutoff Valve

ạm
Description of the Manual Water Shutoff Valve...................................................................................................... A

Ph
How to Operate the Manual Water Shutoff Valve...................................................................................................B
03-070-30-60 Waste Water Draining

9
:2
Description of the Wastewater Drainage System................................................................................................... A

12
How to Operate the Wastewater Drainage System................................................................................................ B

4
02
03-070-40 Galley Inserts

/2
04
Boiler........................................................................................................................................................................ A
9/
Water Heater............................................................................................................................................................B
-2
Coffee Maker........................................................................................................................................................... C
9-
Steam oven / Convection Oven.............................................................................................................................. D

y2
Steam Oven/Convection Oven................................................................................................................................ E

àM
Steam Oven............................................................................................................................................................. F
Tr
Beverage Maker...................................................................................................................................................... G
ạm
Waste Compartment................................................................................................................................................H
Ph
Sliding Work Table....................................................................................................................................................I

Folded Work Table...................................................................................................................................................J
29
03-080 LAVATORIES
:
12
03-080-10 General
4
02
General Information about the Lavatories...............................................................................................................A

/2
04
03-080-20 Location
9/
-2
Location of Lavatories............................................................................................................................................. A
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

Location of Lavatories A,D,E and L........................................................................................................................ B

Lavatory Door Types............................................................................................................................................... A
Lavatory Interior....................................................................................................................................................... B
29
2:
Smart Lavatories......................................................................................................................................................C
41
Lavatory with a Stretcher Loading Capability......................................................................................................... D
2
20
03-080-40 Function Recovery Procedures (FRP)
04/
03-080-40-10 Recovery of Lavatory Functions
9/
-2
How to Manually Drain the Washbasin...................................................................................................................A
How to Recover the Water Flow from an Electrical or Infrared Water Faucet........................................................B
9-
How to Shut OFF the Water in a Lavatory.............................................................................................................C
y2
How to Reduce Excessive Noise from an open toilet gate valve........................................................................... D
àM
03-080-40-20 Deactivation of Lavatory Functions
Tr
ạm
How Deactivate a Lavatory..................................................................................................................................... A

Ph
03-080-40-30 Abnormal/Emergency Operation of the Lavatory Doors

How to Open a Single-blade Door from the Outside when Locked........................................................................A
9
How to Open a Bi-folding Door from the Outside when LockeD............................................................................ B

:2
4 12
03-100 OTHER CABIN AREAS/ADDITIONAL CABIN EQUIPMENT

02
/2
03-100-10 General
04
General Information about Additional Equipment....................................................................................................A

9/
-2
03-100-20 Capability for Stretcher Loading

9-
Lavatory with a Capability for Stretcher Loading.................................................................................................... A

y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DECK CONFIGURATION
MAIN DECK
The aircraft cabin layout is divided in a main deck and a lower deck layout.
For more information about the lower deck layout:Refer to 03-010-10 Lower Deck
29
2:
CABIN LAYOUT - MAIN DECK
41
The aircraft is equipped with a total of 203 passenger seats:
2
20
‐ 8 Business Class (B/C) seats
4/
‐ 195 Economy Class (E/C) seats.
0
9/
-2
Furthermore the main deck is equipped with:
9-
‐ 3 Galleys (G)
y2
‐ 4 Lavatories (L)
‐ 2 Stowages (S). àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
MAIN DECK
ạm

Ph
The A/C cabin layout is divided into a main deck and a lower deck layout.
:29

12
4

02
/2
‐ 8 business class (B/C) seats

04
‐ 195 economy class (E/C) seats

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-010-10 P 1/6

à
Tr
CCOM A to B → 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN LAYOUT
A321

‐ 3 galleys (G)
‐ 4 lavatories (L)
‐ 2 coat stowages (C)
‐ 1 stowage (S)
29
Cabin Layout - Main Deck
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
MAIN DECK
4
02
Criteria: K15682
/2

04
9/
-2

9-
y2

àM

Tr

ạm

Ph
‐ 4 galleys (G)
29
‐ 1 coat stowage (C)

:
12
‐ 1 stowage (S)
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-010-10 P 2/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
MAIN DECK
Tr
ạm
Criteria: K14725
Ph
9
:2
12

4
02

/2

04

9/
-2

9-
‐ 3 galleys (G)
y2
àM
‐ 2 coat stowages (C)

Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-010-10 P 3/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
MAIN DECK
Tr
ạm
VN-A367
Ph
9
:2

12

4
02

/2
‐ 168 economy class (Y/C) seats

04
9/

-2
‐ 3 galleys (G)
9-
y2
‐ 2 coat stowage (C)

àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-010-10 P 4/6

à
Tr
CCOM ← C to D → 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-010-10 P 5/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←D 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
LOWER DECK
Applicable to: ALL
The lower deck is equipped with:

‐ 3 cargo compartments (FWD, AFT and BULK)
29
Cabin layout - lower deck
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-010-10 P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM E 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL BUSINESS CLASS SEAT
BUSINESS SEAT
VN-A367
The equipment of the business class seat consists of:

Business class seat (example)
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
WARNING Risk of injury to small children's fingers when operating the movable armrest.
04
Advise passengers travelling with small children of the potential risk related to the
9/
armrest movement.
-2
9-
SEAT BELT
y2
The seat belt is part of the seat and as an integrated safety feature of the seat it protects the
àM
passenger from injury while seated during:

Tr
ạm
‐ taxi, takeoff and landing,

Ph
‐ turbulences,
‐ and emergencies.
29
Note: Seat belts with an integrated airbag (inflatable seat belts) are located - if installed - at
:
12
seat rows in front of monuments, partitions, lavatories etc. This kind of seat belt improves
4
02
the passengers protection from serious head-impact injury during an emergency. Use
/2
the inflatable seat belt in the same way than the standard seat belt but do not close it on
04
empty seats. The self-contained seat belt airbag system does not interface to any aircraft
9/
-2
system and has built-in safety features to prevent inadvertent deployment.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-010-30 P 1/8

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
HOW TO OPERATE A TWO-POINT SEAT BELT

1. To close the seat belt insert the latch plate into the lift latch until it snaps into place with a
click.
2. To tighten the seat belt pull the free strap.
3. To open the seat belt lift and hold the release handle of the lift latch to unlock the latch plate,
29
then pull it out.
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
WARNING Ensure that the seat belt is correctly locked and tightened.
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-010-30 P 2/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←A→ 06 JAN 21

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
WARNING Do not use extension girts at seats with inflatable seat belts (belts with an
integrated airbag). Although it could be possible to use them, they will not
protect passengers from injury due to the following reasons:
‐ The airbag of an extended seat belt will always be at the wrong position
‐ The different seat belt locks will not fit properly
29
‐ The electrical circuit located inside the belt lock will be interrupted, which will
2:
41
prevent the airbag from releasing, even in an emergency situation.
2
20
Passengers who do not conform with the requirements of these seats, are
4/
required to be relocated by Cabin Crew members to seats with no inflatable
0
9/
seat belts.
-2
The vendor of the inflatable seat belt system DOES NOT RECOMMEND
9-
allowing lap-held children or children restrained by child belt loops during
y2
takeoff, landing and in-flight operations. Though this is not operationally
àM
restricted by the system itself: ALLOWING LAP-HELD CHILDREN IS
Tr
STRICTLY THE DECISION AND RESPONSIBILITY OF THE AIRCRAFT

ạm
OPERATOR.
Ph
DESCRIPTION OF THE THREE-POINT SEAT BELT 

9
:2
The business class seats can have three-point belts. These seat belts look like the safety belts in
12
cars. In fact, there is one important difference: In the aircraft it is possible to split the three-point
4
belt into a shoulder strap and a lap belt.

02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-010-30 P 3/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
For a maximum of safety, use the three-point belt for taxi and takeoff. When the FASTEN SEAT
4
02
BELT signs goes OFF during cruise, split off the shoulder strap and just wear the lap belt. The lap
/2
belt protects sufficiently from injury caused by unexpected turbulence. For the landing, attach the
04
shoulder strap to the lap belt again and wear the three-point belt until the aircraft reaches its park
9/
-2
position at the gate.

9-
HOW TO OPERATE A THREE-POINT SEAT BELT 

y2
HOW TO CLOSE THE LAP BELT

àM
Tr
1. To close the lap belt insert the latch plate into the lift latch until it snaps into place with a click.
ạm
2. To tighten the lap belt pull the free strap.

Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-010-30 P 4/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
HOW TO ATTACH THE SHOULDER STRAP

4
02
1. Grasp the connection plate and pull the shoulder strap towards the latch plate of the lap belt.
/2
04
2. Put the connection plate on the latch plate, in a manner that the connection plate encloses
9/
the pin.
-2
3. Pull back the shoulder strap until the connection plate attaches to the pin.
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-010-30 P 5/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
HOW TO RELEASE THE SHOULDER STRAP

4
02
1. Grasp the connection plate and push it away from the pin on the latch plate of the lap belt
/2
04
(see figure below).

9/
2. If the connection plate is released, lift the connection plate and remove the shoulder strap
-2
from the pin.

9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-010-30 P 6/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
HOW TO OPEN THE LAP BELT

4
02
1. To open the lap belt lift and hold the release handle of the lift latch to unlock the latch plate,
/2
04
then pull it out.

9/
2. Put the lap belt down on the seat to prevent other persons from tripping over the straps.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-010-30 P 7/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-010-30 P 8/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL ECONOMY CLASS SEAT
ECONOMY CLASS
Applicable to: ALL
Example of economy class seat features:
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
WARNING Risk of injury to small children's fingers when operating the movable armrest.
29
Advise passengers travelling with small children of the potential risk related to the
:
12
armrest movement.
4
02
Note: Ensure that all seats are in upright position and all meal tables as well as cup holders are
/2
04
stowed during Taxi, Take-Off and Landing. This is necessary for a trouble-free evacuation
9/
in case of an emergency.
-2
For the location and the quantity of the Y/C seats: Refer to CCOM 03-010-10 Deck Configuration..
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-010-40 P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 06 OCT 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
SEAT BELT
The seat belt is part of the seat and as an integrated safety feature of the seat it protects the
passenger from injury while seated during:
‐ taxi, takeoff and landing,
‐ turbulences,
29
‐ and emergencies.
2:
41
Note: Seat belts with an integrated airbag (inflatable seat belts) are located - if installed - at
2
20
seat rows in front of monuments, partitions, lavatories etc. This kind of seat belt improves
4/
the passengers protection from serious head-impact injury during an emergency. Use
0
9/
the inflatable seat belt in the same way than the standard seat belt but do not close it on
-2
empty seats. The self-contained seat belt airbag system does not interface to any aircraft
9-
system and has built-in safety features to prevent inadvertent deployment.
y2
HOW TO OPERATE A TWO-POINT SEAT BELT àM
Tr
1. To close the seat belt insert the latch plate into the lift latch until it snaps into place with a
ạm
click.
Ph
2. To tighten the seat belt pull the free strap.

3. To open the seat belt lift and hold the release handle of the lift latch to unlock the latch plate,
9
then pull it out.

:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-010-40 P 2/4

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
WARNING Ensure that the seat belt is correctly locked and tightened.
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-010-40 P 3/4

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
WARNING Do not use extension girts at seats with inflatable seat belts (belts with an
integrated airbag). Although it could be possible to use them, they will not
protect passengers from injury due to the following reasons:
‐ The airbag of an extended seat belt will always be at the wrong position
‐ The different seat belt locks will not fit properly
29
‐ The electrical circuit located inside the belt lock will be interrupted, which will
2:
41
prevent the airbag from releasing, even in an emergency situation.
2
20
Passengers who do not conform with the requirements of these seats, are
4/
required to be relocated by Cabin Crew members to seats with no inflatable
0
9/
seat belts.
-2
The vendor of the inflatable seat belt system DOES NOT RECOMMEND
9-
allowing lap-held children or children restrained by child belt loops during
y2
takeoff, landing and in-flight operations. Though this is not operationally
àM
restricted by the system itself: ALLOWING LAP-HELD CHILDREN IS
Tr
STRICTLY THE DECISION AND RESPONSIBILITY OF THE AIRCRAFT

ạm
OPERATOR.
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-010-40 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 06 OCT 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CIRCUIT BREAKER (PANELS)
A321
VU PANEL LOCATION
Applicable to: ALL
On the circuit breaker (C/B) panels 2000VU and 2001VU the circuit breakers for the different
electrical systems are located. These VU panels have different locations, 2000VU in the FWD and
2001VU in the AFT cabin area.
29
2:
VU panel location
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
They are installed to protect the electrical circuits of their related components.
9/
-2
A cover protects each circuit breaker panel to prevent unauthorized access.

9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-040-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-040-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLE OF C/B DESCRIPTION

The C/B panels (2000VU and 2001VU) have rows of circuit breakers. The related electrical circuit
is shown below each circuit breaker. The location of the circuit breaker is defined through a matrix
29
(Letter x Number):
2:
‐ a letter (A,B,C,...) for the circuit breaker row,
41
‐ a number (1,2,3,...) for the circuit breaker column.
2
20
4/
Example:
0
9/
If a circuit breaker is installed in row H on position 3 on column 8 the related location is called H3.
-2
In this case the circuit breaker H3 protects the electrical circuit which is responsible for the cabin light
9-
power at the window in the aft of the cabin area.
y2
CAUTION Do not reset a tripped C/B on the VU panel.àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-040-20 P 1/10

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
Circuit Breaker Panel 2000VU
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-040-20 P 2/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
C/B DESCRIPTION
04
9/
Criteria: K15682
-2

9-
The VU panels have rows of circuit breakers. The function of each circuit breaker is shown below
y2
the related circuit breaker. The location of the circuit breaker is defined through a matrix (Letter x
àM
Number):
Tr

ạm

Ph
Example:
If a circuit breaker is installed in row H on position 3 (column 8) the related location is called H3.
29
:
12

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-040-20 P 3/10

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-040-20 P 4/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
CAUTION It is not allowed to reset a tripped C/B. If you reset it, you can cause an overload to
/2
another system.
04
9/
-2
C/B DESCRIPTION
9-
Criteria: K14725
y2
àM
VN-A613, VN-A614, VN-A615
Tr
ạm
Ph
Number):
29

:

412
02
Example:
/2
04
9/
-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-040-20 P 5/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-040-20 P 6/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
another system.
04
9/
-2
C/B DESCRIPTION
9-
y2
VN-A367
àM
Tr
ạm
Number):
Ph

29
:
Example:
12
4
02
/2
04

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-040-20 P 7/10

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
Circuit breaker panel 2000VU
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-040-20 P 8/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
Circuit breaker panel 2001VU
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
4
02
another system.
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-040-20 P 9/10

à
Tr
CCOM ←C 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-040-20 P 10/10

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
CABIN CREW STATION

Applicable to: ALL
The illustration below shows the possible location of the Cabin Crew (CC) stations at the door areas.
For more information of the CC station Refer to 03-050-30-10 Typical Purser Station
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
REQUIRED CAS AND MINIMUM CABIN CREW

9
:2
12
Applicable to: ALL

4
02
REQUIRED CABIN ATTENDANT SEAT (CAS):

/2
04
Among all CAS that are installed in the cabin, some CAS are required to be occupied for take-off
9/
and landing to fulfill the Direct View and the Evacuation requirements.
-2
DIRECT VIEW REQUIREMENTS:

9-
y2
The Direct View requirements defines the CAS that must be occupied to ensure that the cabin
àM
zones, aisles and entries are visually covered by the cabin crew.
Tr
EVACUATION REQUIREMENT:
ạm
Ph
For evacuation purpose, during take-off and landing, at least one cabin crew must be seated at
each pair of doors.
29
Note: ‐ if one CAS is required for Direct View, this also complies with the Evacuation
:
12
requirement.
4
02
‐ if there is no CAS foreseen as a Direct View CAS, the cabin crew can occupy any
/2
CAS at each pair of doors to comply with the Evacuation requirement.

04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
ADDITIONAL CAS:
There may be more CAS than the ones required for Direct View and Evacuation. These seats are
designated as additional CAS.
MINIMUM CABIN CREW:
29
The minimum number of Cabin Crew must be the greater of the following:
2:
41
‐ the number of required CAS, or
2
‐ one cabin crew for every fraction of 50 passenger seats installed, as per operational
20
requirements ORO.CC.100.
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
LOCATION
Cabin Crew (CC) stations are located at Door 1, Door 2, Door 3 and Door 4. During taxi, takeoff and
landing the cabin crewmember must use the Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS).
29
2:
These CC stations are equipped with:
41
‐ single or double CAS
2
‐ Flight Attendant Panel (FAP)
20
4/
‐ Attendant Indication Panels (AIP)
0
9/
‐ Additional Attendant Panels (AAP)
-2
‐ Handsets (HS).
9-
Location of the CAS
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
DIRECT VIEW SEATS

àM
All CAS marked in RED are Direct View Seats and must be occupied during taxi, takeoff and
Tr
landing which enables the cabincrew to visually cover the cabin.

ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-20 P 1/8

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
LOCATION àM
Tr

ạm
Ph
9

:2
12

4

02
/2

04

9/
‐ Handsets (HS).
-2
9-
Location of the CAS

y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-20 P 2/8

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
DIRECT VIEW SEATS

29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
LOCATION
Criteria: K15682
9

:2
12
4
02
/2
04

9/

-2

9-

y2

àM
‐ Handsets (HS).
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-20 P 3/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
Location of the CAS
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
DIRECT VIEW SEATS àM
Tr
ạm

Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
LOCATION
29
Criteria: K14725
:
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-20 P 4/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321

29
‐ Handsets (HS).
2:
41
Location of the CAS
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
DIRECT VIEW CAS

02
/2
04

9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-20 P 5/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
LOCATION
VN-A367
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
‐ Handsets (HS).
9-
Location of the CAS
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
DIRECT VIEW SEATS

àM
Tr

ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-20 P 6/8

à
Tr
CCOM C→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-20 P 7/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←C 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-20 P 8/8

à
Tr
CCOM 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION - CABIN CREW STATIONS
TYPICAL PURSER STATION

Applicable to: ALL
The typical purser station is equipped as follows:

‐ 1 FAP located above the Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS)
29
‐ 1 AIP located in the door frame
2:
‐ 1 Handset located between the headrests
41
‐ 2 CAS with the relevant emergency equipment
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-10 P 1/6

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
Typical Purser Station
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
TYPICAL REAR CC STATION LH

: 29
Applicable to: ALL

12
4
The typical rear Cabin Crew (CC) Station LH is equipped as follows:

02
/2
‐ 1 AAP located in the door frame

04
‐ 1 AIP located in the door frame or above the galley

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-10 P 2/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
‐ 1 Handset located in the door frame

Typical Rear CC Station LH
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
TYPICAL REAR CC STATION RH

4
02
/2
Applicable to: ALL

04
The typical rear Cabin Crew (CC) Station RH is equipped as follows:

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-10 P 3/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
‐ 1 AIP located above in the overhead panel

‐ 1 Handset located at the headrest
Typical Rear CC Station RH
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
TYPICAL EMERGENCY EXIT CC STATION

4
02
Applicable to: ALL

/2
The typical Cabin Crew (CC) Station at the emergency exit is equipped as follows:
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-10 P 4/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
‐ 1 AIP located above in the PSU

‐ 1 Handset located at the headrest
Typical Emergency Exit CC Station
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-10 P 5/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←D 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-10 P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION - CABIN ATTENDANT SEAT (CAS)
TYPICAL SINGLE CAS

Criteria: SA
Applicable to: VN-A350, VN-A351, VN-A352, VN-A353, VN-A354, VN-A356, VN-A357, VN-A358, VN-A359, VN-A361, VN-A362, VN-A363
The equipment of the single cabin attendant seat CAS consist of:
Single CAS
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
For the location and the quantity of the single CAS, Refer to DU CCOM Location.
4
02
CAS OPERATION:
/2
04
1. Pull down the seat pan until it is level.

9/
2. While holding down the seat pan, apply body weight in the seat pan.
-2
3. Release of body weight, the seat return to the stowed position.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 1/26

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
OPERATION OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM

The restraint system has lap belt and two shoulder straps.
How to Close the Restraint System
1. Close the lap belt (1).
2. Pull the unlocked free strap end (2) and tighten the belt.
29
3. Pull down the shoulder straps (3).
2:
41
4. Insert the shoulder straps (3) into the lap belt fastener.
2
20
Loosen seat-belt procedure:
4/
Open the lap belt fastener through turning the cap of the fastener to the left or right side.
0
9/
-2
Fasten and Loosen of the Seat Belt
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
CAUTION The lap belt must be stowed correctly in the cavity located at the rear of the
9-
backrest in order to avoid a Damage of the belt after retraction of the seat pan.
y2
àM
CAUTION If there is no cavity located at the rear of the backrest , the lap belt must be
Tr
stowed in the Fasten seat-belt position.

ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 2/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
Stowage of the Lap Belt
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
TYPICAL SINGLE CAS

04
9/
Criteria: K12400, K17757, SA

-2
9-
y2
àM
The equipment of the single cabin attendant seat CAS consist of:
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 3/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
Single CAS
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
CAS OPERATION:
Ph
1. Pull down the seat pan until it is level.

29
2. While holding down the seat pan, apply body weight in the seat pan.
:
12
3. Release of body weight, the seat return to the stowed position.

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 4/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
How to fasten the seat belt:
‐ Put both parts of the restraint system over the shoulders
‐ To fasten the seat belt insert the seat belt latch into the buckle until a distinct click is heard
‐ To tighten the seat belt pull the loose seat belt ends.
29
How to unfasten the seat belt:
2:
41
‐ Turn the buckle in either direction to open the seat belt.
2
20
Unfasten the Seat Belt
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
How to stow the seat belt properly:

Ph
1. Put together both parts of the restraint system

2. Close the seat pan.
:29
CAUTION The seat belt must be stowed properly in the fasten seat belt position between the
12
backrest and the seat pan to avoid damage.

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 5/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
TYPICAL FLOOR - MOUNTED SINGLE CAS

29
2:
The equipment of the floor-mounted single cabin attendant seat CAS consist of:
41
2
Floor-Mounted Single CAS
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
CAS OPERATION:
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 6/26

à
Tr
CCOM B→ 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
‐ Pull down the seat pan until it is level

‐ While holding down the seat pan, apply body weight in the seat pan
‐ Release of body weight, the seat return to the stowed position.
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
29
How to fasten the seat belt:
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
How to unfasten the seat belt:
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12

4

02

/2
04
9/
-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 7/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←B→ 10 OCT 23

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
TYPICAL FLOOR - MOUNTED SINGLE CAS

Criteria: SA
The equipment of the single CAS consist of:

Floor-Mounted Single CAS
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
For the location and the quantity of the single CAS, Refer to DU CCOM Location .
4
02
CAS OPERATION:
/2
04
‐ Pull down the bench until it is level

9/
‐ While holding down the sat pan, apply body weight in the seat pan
-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 8/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
The restraint system consist of the seat belt and two shoulder straps integrated in the cabin
attendant seat.
Fasten seat-belt procedure:
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm

Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 9/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
4
02
/2
TYPICAL DOUBLE CAS

04
9/
Criteria: SA
-2
9-
The equipment of the double CAS consist of:

y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 10/26

à
Tr
CCOM ← B to C → 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
Double CAS
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
For the location and the quantity of the double CAS, Refer to DU CCOM Location.
ạm
CAS OPERATION:
Ph

29
‐ While holding down the bench, apply body weight in the bench
:
12

4
02
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
/2
04
9/
attendant seat.
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 11/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←C→ 10 OCT 23

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321

29
2:
41
2
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-

y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 12/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
TYPICAL DOUBLE CAS

04
9/

-2
9-
y2
àM
The equipment of the double CAS consist of:

Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 13/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
Double CAS
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
For the location and the quantity of the double CAS, Refer to DU CCOM Location.
ạm
CAS OPERATION:
Ph

29
‐ While holding down the bench, apply body weight in the bench
:
12

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 14/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
How to fasten the Seat belt:
29
How to unfasten the Seat belt:
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm

Ph

:29
12

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 15/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←C 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
TYPICAL SWIVEL CAS

Criteria: SA
The equipment of the swivel seat consist of:

Swivel CAS
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
For the location and the quantity of the swivel CAS, Refer to DU CCOM Location.
4
02
CAS OPERATION:
/2
04
CAUTION Always take care when taking up/vacating crew seats to prevent any injury to
9/
fingers/arms.
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 16/26

à
Tr
CCOM D→ 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
Deployment
‐ Lift up the seat-pan release-latch and turn the seat 90° counterclockwise,
‐ Push down the seat pan until it locks.
Retraction
29
‐ Lift up the seat-pan release-latch to unlock the seat pan,
2:
‐ The seat pan folds up automatically,
41
‐ Move the seat into the stored position until it locks.
2
20
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
4/
0
9/
-2
attendant seat.
9-
y2
1. Close the seat belt (1) àM
2. Pull the unlocked free strap end (2) and tighten the belt
Tr
3. Pull down the shoulder straps (3)

ạm
4. Insert the shoulder straps (3) into the seat belt fastener.
Ph

9
:2
12

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 17/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←D→ 10 OCT 23

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
TYPICAL SWIVEL CAS

04
9/

-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
The equipment of the swivel CAS (Cabin Attendant Seat) consists of:
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 18/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
Equipment of the Swivel CAS
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
For the location and the quantity of the swivel CAS: Refer to the chapter Cabin Crew Stations - CAS
ạm
Location.
Ph
CAS OPERATION
29
CAUTION Always take care when taking up/vacating a CAS to prevent an injury.
:
12
1. Pull the Opening Handle and turn the seat 90° counterclockwise.
4
02
2. Push down the seat pan into the Locking Mechanism.

/2
3. Pull the Closing Handle to move the seat automatically to the stowed position.
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 19/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Fasten the Seat Belt
1. Put both parts of the restraint system over the shoulders.
2. To fasten the seat belt, insert the seat belt latch into the buckle until there is a click.
3. To tighten the seat belt pull the loose seat belt ends.
29
2:
41
1. Turn the buckle in either direction to open the seat belt.
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
Stow the Seat Belt

ạm
1. Put together both parts of the restraint system.

Ph

CAUTION To avoid damage, the seat belt must be stowed properly in the "seat belt fastened
29
position" between the backrest and the seat pan.

:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 20/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
HEADREST CONTAINER 
02
/2
Applicable to: ALL

04
9/
To open the headrest container press the double latch as shown below.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 21/26

à
Tr
CCOM ← D to E → 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
Note: Items stowed in the headrest container are indicated by a placard on the top of the
4
02
headrest. Usually this is the Portable Breathing Equipment (PBE).

/2
04
REMOVABLE HEADREST OF A CAS FOR STRETCHER LOADING

9/
-2
Applicable to: ALL

9-
The aircraft may be equipped with a stretcher loading capability, typically at door 4L.
y2
For more information about stretcher loading: Refer to CCOM chapter 03-100-20: Capability for
àM
Stretcher Loading).
Tr
In order to use the stretcher loading capability, it may be necessary to remove the headrest of the
ạm
CAS at the respective folding wall/flap.

Ph
Depending on the aircraft configuration, the CAS has one of the following two headrest options:
‐ Headrest without a locking mechanism
: 29
‐ Headrest with a locking mechanism.

12
4
HEADREST WITHOUT A LOCKING MECHANISM

02
/2
In order to remove the headrest, pull the headrest up until it is free.

04
9/
HEADREST WITH A LOCKING MECHANISM

-2
-
Depending on the type of CAS, there are two different locking mechanisms:
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 22/26

à
Tr
CCOM ← E to F → 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
CAS WITH A REMOVABLE BACKREST CUSHION

In order to remove the headrest, follow the steps below:
1. Fold down the upper part of the backrest cushion.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
2. On each side of the CAS, pull at the handles of the locking mechanism.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 23/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←F→ 10 OCT 23

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
3. Pull the headrest up until it is free.

Ph
CAS WITH A FIXED BACKREST CUSHION

29
In order to remove the headrest, follow the steps below:

:
1. On each side of the CAS backrest cushion, press the locking mechanisms to unlock the
12
headrest.
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 24/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
2. Pull the headrest up until it is free.

4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 25/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←F 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
CABIN CREW STATIONS
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-050-30-20 P 26/26

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS

Applicable to: ALL
The purpose of stowage compartments is to stow items, for example:

‐ Emergency equipment
‐ Passenger coats
29
‐ Carry on baggage
2:
41
‐ Miscellaneous items.
2
20
Stowage compartments have a latching mechanism to keep them closed.
04/
WARNING Ensure that all stowage compartments are correctly closed and latched during:
9/
-2
‐ Taxi
‐ Take off
9-
y2
‐ Turbulences
‐ Landing. àM
Tr
Stowage compartments have a load limit. The limit is indicated by a placard inside the stowage.
ạm
Ph
WARNING Do not overload the stowage compartment!

Note: If a stowage compartment contains aircraft-related items such as emergency equipment, a
9
:2
placard on the corresponding stowage indicates the specific item (e.g. first aid kit).
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-060-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-060-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
OVERHEAD STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS (OHSC) WITH FIXED BINS

Applicable to: ALL
OHSC WITH A FIXED BIN

OverHead Stowage Compartments (OHSCs) have doors with a latch at the bottom edge of the
29
door.
2:
The OHSC doors open upwards and give access to the compartment from the aisle. Special
41
damper hinges control the opening and closing speed of the door and hold the door in the fully
2
20
open position.
4/
Each OHSC has a hand rail.
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
HOW TO OPEN AN OHSC WITH A FIXED BIN

ạm
Ph
1. Lift the latch.

2. Remove your hand so the OHSC door can open automatically.
29
HOW TO CLOSE AN OHSC WITH A FIXED BIN

:
12
1. Grasp the latch of the OHSC door and pull the door downwards.
4
02
2. Push the OHSC door into the frame until the latch snaps into place.
/2
3. Check that the door is closed correctly and ensure that the OHSC door is flush with the
04
9/
frame.
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-060-20 P 1/6

à
Tr
CCOM A 10 JAN 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
STOWAGE COMPARTMENT 
Applicable to: ALL
Typically, stowage compartment(s) are located near the cabin crew stations and the cabin doors.
Refer to 03-010-10 Cabin Layout.
Typical Stowage Compartment
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
HOW TO OPEN THE STOWAGE COMPARTMENT

4
02
In order to open the stowage compartment, follow the steps below:

/2
04
1. Open the latches and swing the stowage door up to the (coat stowage) wall.
9/
2. Secure the stowage door with the fastener on the wall.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-060-20 P 2/6

à
Tr
CCOM B→ 10 JAN 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
HOW TO CLOSE THE STOWAGE COMPARTMENT

In order to close the stowage compartment, follow the steps below:
1. Hold the door and open the fastener.
2. Lower the door until it is flush with the wall.
3. Latch the door.
29
2:
COAT STOWAGE 
41
2
20
Applicable to: ALL
4/
Typically, coat stowage(s) are located near the cabin crew stations and the cabin doors. Refer to
0
9/
03-010-10 Cabin Layout.
-2
Typical Coat Stowage
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
DOGHOUSE 
4
02
Applicable to: ALL

/2
A doghouse is a smaller stowage compartment , fixed on the aircraft floor (seat rails).Typically,
04
9/
doghouses are installed between the back of a seat row and a partition or lavatory wall. Depending
-2
on the type of doghouse their operation could differ.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-060-20 P 3/6

à
Tr
CCOM ← B to D → 10 JAN 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
Example of a Doghouse
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
Some doghouse have compartment doors like other stowage compartments, secured by similar
/2
latches.
04
Other doghouses are equipped with a drawer, secured by a slightly different latching system which
9/
-2
prevents it from opening caused by flight manoeuvres or turbulence.

Each doghouse drawer opens into the aisle and stowing items into it is possible only from above.
9-
y2
HOW TO OPERATE A DOGHOUSE

àM
Note: Do not let passengers operate a doghouse.

Tr
ạm
HOW TO OPEN A DOGHOUSE

Ph
WARNING An open doghouse drawer is an obstacle in the aisle. To prevent persons

walking through the aisle from tripping over the doghouse drawer, open a
: 29
doghouse only if these persons:

12
4
‐ either are not near the doghouse

02
/2
‐ or are instructed to stop and wait while the doghouse is open.

04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-060-20 P 4/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←D→ 10 JAN 23

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
1. Turn the latch handle of the sliding latch in any direction until the latch handle is horizontal (a
àM
1/4 turn). The locking indicator shows the green dot.

Tr
Note: Depending on the type of doghouse, there might be an opposite operation of

ạm
the sliding latch in step 2 (either move the sliding handle down or up, but always
Ph
towards the green dot).

2. Unlock the sliding latch by sliding the handle. The locking indicator shows the red dot.
: 29
3. Lift the handle of the slam latch until the doghouse is unlatched and hold the latch handle.
12
4. Using the latch handle, pull the doghouse drawer out.

4
02
/2
HOW TO CLOSE A DOGHOUSE

04
9/
1. Push the doghouse drawer entirely in.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-060-20 P 5/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
Note: The doghouse drawer is entirely in when the slam latch snaps into place. Depending
on the type of doghouse, there might be an opposite operation of the sliding latch in
step 2 (either move the sliding handle down or up, but always towards the red dot).
2. Lock the sliding latch by sliding the handle. The locking indicator shows the green dot.
3. Turn the latch handle of the sliding latch until the latch handle is vertical (a 1/4 turn).
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-060-20 P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←D 10 JAN 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GALLEY GENERAL
PURPOSE OF A GALLEY
Applicable to: ALL
DEFINITION
A galley is an area particularly designed for all of the following catering purposes in flight:
29
‐ To stow and prepare meals
2:
41
‐ To stow and prepare hot or cold drinks
2
‐ To hold removable galley items, for example trolleys and containers/standard units
20
‐ To accommodate electrical items, for example ovens, beverage makers, freezers, etc.
4/
0
‐ To stow catering equipment, for example cutlery, cups, towels, etc.
9/
-2
‐ To stow waste
‐ To drain liquids to the waste tanks or drain masts.
9-
y2
INTRODUCTION
àM
The operator configures the cabin based on its requirements. This configuration includes the
Tr
adaptation of the galleys in terms of the number, the location, and the configuration.
ạm
Ph
LIMITATION
When a galley compartment takes more than one trolley/trash compactor side by side, either all or
9
:2
no trolleys/trash compactors must be stowed in this compartment. A placard in the galley indicates
12
this limitation.
4
02
/2
GALLEY TYPES
04
9/
Applicable to: ALL

-2
There are two galley types:

9-
y2
‐ Wet Galleys
àM
A wet galley has connections to all of the following:

Tr
• The potable water system

ạm
• The waste water system

Ph
• The galley cooling system.

29
‐ Dry Galleys
:
12
A dry galley has no connection to any of the above-listed items. Food and equipment is stowed in,
and meals are prepared in dry galleys.
4
02
/2
All galleys (wet and dry) have connections to all of the following:
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-10 P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A to B → 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
• The air extraction system

• The cabin ventilation system
• The electrical power supply.
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT - GENERAL
29
2:
Applicable to: ALL
41
Galleys may have the following equipment:
2
20
‐ Work lights
04/
‐ An electrical panel that includes galley cooling control 
9/
-2
‐ Galley inserts (GAINs).
9-
The quantity, the location and the type of the electrical equipment depend on the individual galley
y2
configuration.
àM
Tr
ELECTRICAL PANEL
ạm
Applicable to: ALL

Ph
The electrical panel contains:

‐ Circuit Breakers (C/Bs)
9
:2
‐ A master switch 
12
‐ Control switches of the air chiller units 

4
02
‐ Control switches of the worklights

/2
04
‐ Electrical outlet  .
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-10 P 2/4

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
Example of a Galley Electrical Panel
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
Item Component Description

ạm
1 Air Chiller panel  The cabin crew uses the air chiller panel to control the air chiller.
Ph
The control light shows the condition of the air chiller system. After switching on the air
chiller, the ON light comes on. In case of malfunction, the respective FAIL light comes
29
on.
:
12
Note: Make an entry in the cabin logbook.

4
02
2 Electrical outlet  The cabin crew uses the outlet to charge devices.
/2
3 Master switch  The cabin crew can switch on/off the electrical power of the entire galley via the
04
9/
master switch.
-2
An indicator light next to the switch comes on when electrical power is available.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-10 P 3/4

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321

Item Component Description
4 ON/OFF sw  for The cabin crew can turn on/off the dedicated GAIN via the ON/OFF sw (e.g. hot cup).
GAIN Note: Not every GAIN has an ON/OFF sw on the galley electrical panel.
5 Worklight sw The cabin crew can control the worklight via the worklight sw.
29
The worklight has three intensities:
2:
41
‐ BRIGHT
‐ DIM
2
20
‐ OFF.
0 4/
6 Circuit Breaker (C/B) The C/B protects the related circuit from electrical overload.
9/
-2
WARNING Do not reset a tripped circuit breaker.
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-10 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←D 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
GALLEY LOCATION AND EQUIPMENT

Criteria: K20915
These galleys are on board the aircraft:
29
Location
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
EQUIPMENT
412
The aircraft has two wet galleys: G1 and G5.

02
/2
The following is a list of the typical equipment in a wet galley:

04
9/
‐ Oven
-2
‐ Water heater
9-
‐ Air chiller
y2
‐ Waste bin 
àM
‐ Electrical panel
Tr
‐ Water shut-off valves

ạm
‐ Sink
Ph
‐ Drain valve
‐ Trolley compartments for half-size  and full-size  trolleys, and waste trolleys  , and
29
folding trolleys 
:
12
‐ Container (standard units).

4
02
Note: The equipment list is an example and depends on the actual ordered equipment.
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-20 P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
GALLEY LOCATION
Criteria: K11239
VN-A367
These galleys are on board of the aircraft:
29
Galley Location
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
EQUIPMENT
-2
2 wet galleys and 1 dry galley are on board of the aircraft.

9-
y2
These galleys are typical equipped with the following devices:

àM
‐ Ovens for heating and preparing meals.

Tr
‐ Beverages Maker (e.g. coffee maker, water heater etc.)

ạm
‐ Water Boiler
Ph
‐ Water Shut-Off Valves (wet galleys only)

‐ Sink (wet galleys only)
29
‐ Drain Valve (wet galleys only)

:
12
‐ Trolley compartments for halfsize and fullsize trolleys

4
‐ Container (standard units)

02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-20 P 2/4

à
Tr
CCOM B 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
GALLEY LOCATION AND EQUIPMENT

These galleys are on board of the aircraft:
29
2:
Galley Location
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
EQUIPMENT
9-
2 wet galleys and 1 dry galley are on board of the aircraft.

y2
These galleys are typical equipped with the following devices:

àM
‐ Oven
Tr
‐ Water heater
ạm
‐ Water Shut-Off Valves (wet galleys only)

Ph
‐ Sink (wet galleys only)

‐ Drain Valve (wet galleys only)
: 29
‐ Trolley compartments for half size and full size trolleys

12
‐ Container (standard units).

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-20 P 3/4

à
Tr
CCOM C 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-20 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION - TROLLEY
DESCRIPTION OF A TROLLEY
Applicable to: ALL
A trolley is a mobile storage and transport unit with parking brakes. There are service-related trolleys
and waste-related trolleys.
There are trolleys with two different sizes:
29
2:
‐ Full-size trolleys
41
‐ Half-size trolleys.
2
20
The operation of both trolley types is the same.
4/
0
Both, the trolleys and the trolley compartments, have specific load limits indicated by placards.
9/
-2
CAUTION Do not overload the trolleys.
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-10 P 1/10

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
For more information about the trolley operation:

‐ Refer to 03-070-30-10 How to Remove/Insert a Trolley
‐ Refer to 03-070-30-10 How to Operate the Parking Brake
‐ Refer to 03-070-30-10 How to Operate the Trolley Door.
29
HOW TO REMOVE/INSERT A TROLLEY
2:
41
Applicable to: ALL
2
20
HOW TO REMOVE A TROLLEY FROM THE TROLLEY COMPARTMENT
04/
HOW TO REMOVE A FULL-SIZE TROLLEY
9/
-2
1. Open all the latches/doors of the trolley compartment.
9-
For more information about the operation of the latches: Refer to 03-070-30-30 General
y2
Information about the Latches.
àM
CAUTION For a galley aft of door 4R with chilled trolley compartments, make sure to
Tr
open the outboard door of the chilled trolley compartment first, and then the
ạm
inboard door.
Ph
Note: Ensure that the trolley compartment doors (if installed) remain closed when not in
9
use.
:2
12
2. Release the parking brake of the trolley.

4
02
For more information about the parking brake: Refer to 03-070-30-10 How to Operate the
/2
Parking Brake.
04
3. Pull the trolley out of its trolley compartment.

9/
-2
If it is not possible to pull the trolley out:

9-
a. Open the latches/doors of the inboard trolley compartment.

y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-10 P 2/10

à
Tr
CCOM ← A to B → 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
Example of Trolley Positions
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
b. Release the parking brake of the inboard trolley.

02
c. Pull the inboard trolley out of its trolley compartment.

/2
04
d. Pull the knob and slide the T-divider toward the inboard trolley compartment.
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-10 P 3/10

à
Tr
CCOM ←B→ 11 JUL 23

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
T-Divider Moved in Inboard Direction
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
e. Pull the outboard trolley out of its trolley compartment.

4
02
HOW TO REMOVE A HALF-SIZE TROLLEY

/2
04
1. Open all the latches/doors of the trolley compartment.

9/
-2
9-

y2
Note: Ensure that the trolley compartment doors (if installed) remain closed when not in
àM
use.
Tr
2. Release the parking brake of the front half-size trolley.

ạm
Ph
Parking Brake.
3. Carefully pull out the forward half-size trolley and engage the intermediate latch.
: 29
4. Pull the forward half-size trolley fully out of its compartment.

12
5. Disengage the intermediate latch and pull out the aft half-size trolley.
4
02
/2
If the trolley compartment has a trolley pullout device:

04
a. Grasp the pullout device handle, and pull it out smoothly and straight until you can reach
9/
the trolley handle.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-10 P 4/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
CAUTION Pull the pullout device handle in a straight line only.

Pullout Device in Stowed Position
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-10 P 5/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
Pullout Device in Extracted Position
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
b. Carefully return the pullout device handle as close as possible to its stowed position, to
02
avoid damage.
/2
04
c. Pull the half-size trolley out of its compartment.

9/
-2
HOW TO INSERT A TROLLEY IN THE TROLLEY COMPARTMENT

9-
HOW TO INSERT A FULL-SIZE TROLLEY

y2
àM
1. Check that all related latches/doors of the trolley compartment are open.
Tr
2. Ensure that the parking brake pedals are visible.

ạm
3. Carefully insert the trolley in its trolley compartment.

Ph
CAUTION Trolleys equipped with a grid, appropriate for the air cooling system, must be
pushed fully to the rear end of the compartment.
29
:
Make sure that there is sufficient room between the trolley and the
12
latch/trolley compartment door for a smooth latch operation.

4
02
/2
If it is not possible to insert the trolley:

04
a. Pull the knob and slide the T-divider to the trolley B compartment.
9/
b. Insert the trolley A in its trolley compartment.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-10 P 6/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
c. Slide the T-divider back to the center position and lock it.
d. Insert the trolley B in its trolley compartment.
4. Engage the parking brake.
For more information about the parking brakes: Refer to 03-070-30-10 How to Operate the
Parking Brake.
5. Close the latches/doors of the trolley compartment.
29
2:
CAUTION For a galley aft of door 4R with chilled trolley compartments, make sure to
41
close the inboard door of the chilled trolley compartment first, and then the
2
20
outboard door.
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
Note: Ensure that the trolley compartment doors (if installed) remain closed when not in use.
y2
HOW TO INSERT A HALF-SIZE TROLLEY àM
Tr
1. Check that all related latches/doors of the trolley compartment are open.
ạm
2. Ensure that the parking brake pedals are visible.

Ph
3. Carefully insert the aft half-size trolley in its compartment.

CAUTION Trolleys equipped with a grid, appropriate for the air through cooling system,
9
:2
the trolley must be pushed fully to the rear end of the compartment.
12
Make sure that there is sufficient room between the trolley and the
4
02
intermediate latch of the compartment for a smooth intermediate latch

/2
04
operation.
9/
-2
4. Engage the intermediate latch.

5. Carefully insert the forward half-size trolley.
9-
6. Disengage the intermediate latch and fully insert the forward half-size trolley.
y2
àM
CAUTION Make sure that there is enough space between the trolley and the
Tr
intermediate latch of the compartment for a smooth latch operation.

ạm
7. Engage the parking brake.

Ph
Parking Brake.
29
8. Close the latches/doors of the trolley compartment.

:
12
4
02

/2
04
Note: Ensure that the trolley compartment doors (if installed) remain closed when not in use.
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-10 P 7/10

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
HOW TO OPERATE THE PARKING BRAKE

Applicable to: ALL
WARNING Always engage the parking brakes when the trolley is not moved.
HOW TO ENGAGE THE TROLLEY BRAKE
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
Press down the red pedal using a foot to engage the brake. The red pedal will remain in the lower
:
12
position.
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-10 P 8/10

à
Tr
CCOM C→ 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
HOW TO RELEASE THE TROLLEY BRAKE
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
Press down the green pedal using a foot to release the brake.
ạm
L2 The red pedal will return to the upper position. After releasing the green pedal, it will also return to
Ph
the upper position.

:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-10 P 9/10

à
Tr
CCOM ←C 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
HOW TO OPERATE THE TROLLEY DOOR

Applicable to: ALL
Example of a Trolley Door Latch
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
HOW TO OPEN THE TROLLEY DOOR

9/
-2
1. Lift the latch to the OPEN position.

2. Open the trolley door using the handle.
9-
y2
HOW TO CLOSE AND LATCH THE TROLLEY DOOR

àM
1. Close the trolley door.

Tr
2. Ensure that the latch is in the OPEN position.

ạm
3. Push the door against the housing and lower the latch to the CLOSED position.
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-10 P 10/10

à
Tr
CCOM D 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION - CONTAINER/STANDARD UNIT
DESCRIPTION OF A CONTAINER/STANDARD UNIT

Applicable to: ALL
Containers/standard units are boxes to store service related items.

CAUTION Do not overload a container/standard unit.
29
Note: The load limit is indicated by placards inside the container.
2:
41
When a compartment takes more than one container/standard unit, either all or no
2
20
container/standard unit must be stowed in this compartment during taxi, takeoff, turbulences, and
4/
landing.
0
9/
Example of a Container/Standard Unit
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
HOW TO OPEN/CLOSE A CONTAINER/STANDARD UNIT

:
12
Applicable to: ALL

4
02
HOW TO OPEN A CONTAINER/STANDARD UNIT

/2
04
1. On the door of the container/standard unit: Lift and hold the slam latch to unlock the door.
9/
2. Using the slam latch, carefully open the door.

-2
3. Release the slam latch.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-20 P 1/4

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
HOW TO CLOSE A CONTAINER/STANDARD UNIT

1. Close the door.
2. Carefully push the door towards the housing until the slam latch snaps in.
HOW TO REMOVE/INSERT THE CONTAINER
29
2:
Applicable to: ALL
41
HOW TO REMOVE THE CONTAINER
2
20
For galleys that accommodate more than one container, there are two types of handling:
04/
‐ The pull-out device and
9/
-2
‐ The textile extractor.
9-
WARNING Do not remove any galley item during taxi, takeoff, landing and turbulence.
y2
1. Unlock the 1/4-turn retainer(s) which hold the container in place.
àM
2. Firmly grasp the handle.
Tr
3. Pull the container carefully out of the compartment and support it placing one hand under it.
ạm
4. To remove a container from the rear position of its compartment and if the compartment is
Ph
equipped with a container pull-out device/textile extractor:

9
a. Disengage the intermediate latch.

:2
12
b. Grasp the pull-out device/textile extractor handle and pull it out smoothly and straight until
4
you can reach the container handle.

02
/2
CAUTION Pull the container pull-out device/textile extractor handle in a straight line
04
only.
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-20 P 2/4

à
Tr
CCOM ← B to C → 10 JAN 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
Standard Position
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-20 P 3/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←C→ 10 JAN 23

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
Released Position
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
c. Carefully return the pull-out device/textile extractor handle as close as possible to its resting
4
position to avoid any damage.

02
/2
d. Pull the container carefully out of the compartment and support it, placing one hand under it.
04
9/
5. Safely put down the container on an even and wide surface.

-2
HOW TO INSERT THE CONTAINER

9-
y2
1. Ensure that the 1/4-turn retainer(s) are unlocked.

àM
2. Safely place the container unit in front of its compartment.

3. Slide it in the compartment entirely.
Tr
ạm
4. Lock the 1/4-turn retainer(s) to secure the container in place.

Ph
CAUTION Ensure that the containers are secured by all available latches when not in use.
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-20 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←C 10 JAN 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION - LATCHES
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE LATCHES

Applicable to: ALL
Latches secure galley items, equipment, and stowages.

WARNING Make sure that removable galley items are correctly stowed and latched and locked
29
when not in use.
2:
41
For more information about all of the following:
2
20
‐ The 1/4-turn retainers: Refer to 03-070-30-30 1/4-Turn Retainer
4/
‐ The intermediate latches: Refer to 03-070-30-30 Intermediate Latch
0
9/
‐ The slam latches/sliding latches: Refer to 03-070-30-30 Slam Latch/Sliding Latch
-2
‐ The double latches: Refer to 03-070-30-30 Double Slam Latch
9-
‐ The kickload retainers: Refer to 03-070-30-30 Kickload Retainer.
y2
àM
1/4-TURN RETAINER
Tr
ạm
Applicable to: ALL

Ph
1/4-turn retainers are available in different sizes and are used to secure galley items.
They can be double sided (referred to as butterfly latch) to latch two adjacent standard units
9
simultaneously.
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
To engage/disengage the latch, turn it 90 °.

29
INTERMEDIATE LATCH
:
12
Applicable to: ALL

4
02
Some galley compartments can accommodate more than one trolley or more than one standard unit
/2
04
one behind the other.

9/
Intermediate latches secure the rear trolleys or the rear standard units.
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-30 P 1/8

à
Tr
CCOM A to C → 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
CAUTION Do not operate the intermediate latches during all of the following:
Tr
ạm
‐ Taxi, takeoff, and landing

Ph
‐ Turbulence
‐ Climb or descent.
:29
To engage/disengage the latch, turn it 90 °.

12
4
02
SLAM LATCH/SLIDING LATCH

/2
04
Applicable to: ALL

9/
-2
Slam latches are used to close compartment doors.

Sliding latches are used to latch compartment doors.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-30 P 2/8

à
Tr
CCOM ← C to D → 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
HOW TO OPERATE A SLAM LATCH AND/OR A SLIDING LATCH
To Lock a Sliding Latch

1. Close the door.
2. Move the sliding latch in horizontal direction. A green dot indicates that the
door is locked.
29
To Lock a Slam Latch
2:
41
1. Use the slam latch to close the door.
2
2. Push the door against the housing until the slam latch snaps in.
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02

/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-30 P 3/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←D→ 03 JUL 19

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
To Unlock a Sliding Latch

1. Move the sliding latch in horizontal direction. A red dot indicates that the
door is unlocked.
2. The door is now ready to be opened.
29
To Unlock a Slam Latch
2:
1. Lift and pull the slam latch.
41
2. Open the door.
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
DOUBLE SLAM LATCH

/2
04
Applicable to: ALL

9/
-2
Slam latches are used to close compartment doors.

9-
Compartments may have vertical or horizontal double slam latches.

y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-30 P 4/8

à
Tr
CCOM ← D to E → 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
HOW TO OPERATE THE DOUBLE SLAM LATCH
How to Unlock a Double Slam Latch

1. Lift the double slam latch until the door is unlatched.
2. Use the double slam latch to open the door.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02

/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-30 P 5/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←E→ 03 JUL 19

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
How to Lock a Double Slam Latch

1. Use the double slam latch to close the door.
2. Push the door against the housing until the double slam latch snaps in.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
KICKLOAD RETAINER
/2
04
Applicable to: ALL

9/
-2
When there is no trolley compartment door, kickload retainer(s) are located at the lower front part of
9-
a trolley compartment. They give additional support to stowed trolleys and prevent them from slipping
y2
out of their compartment.

àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
To engage a kickload retainer, turn it 90 ° until the lower trolley part is blocked.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-30 P 6/8

à
Tr
CCOM ← E to F → 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
To disengage a kickload retainer, turn it 90 ° until the lower trolley part is unblocked.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-30 P 7/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←F 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-30 P 8/8

à
Tr
CCOM 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION - FAUCET
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE FAUCET

Applicable to: ALL
A water tap is a faucet located in wet galleys. The purpose of a faucet is to obtain water from the
potable water system of the aircraft.
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
HOW TO OPERATE THE FAUCET

9-
y2
Press and hold the operating button. The water flows out of the outlet.
àM
To stop the water flow, release the operating button.

Tr
ạm
Note: If the water flow does not stop, set the Manual Water Shutoff Valve to the OFF position.
Ph
For more information about the Manual Water Shutoff Valve: Refer to 03-070-30-50
Description of the Manual Water Shutoff Valve.
:29
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-40 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION - FAUCET
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-40 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION - MANUAL WATER SHUTOFF VALVE
DESCRIPTION OF THE MANUAL WATER SHUTOFF VALVE

Applicable to: ALL
The potable water system supplies water to the wet galleys. Each wet galley has at least one manual
water shutoff valve. This is in order to stop the water supply in the case of an emergency (e.g. water
leakage).
29
The water supply to the galley equipment (e.g. the faucet, the steam oven, the water boiler, etc.)
2:
41
stops if the manual water shutoff valve is set to the OFF position.
2
20
CAUTION If the manual water shutoff valve is set to the OFF position, switch off all electrical
4/
galley equipment connected to the water supply.
0
9/
-2
Some galleys have an additional water shutoff valve.  Airbus recommends to keep this water
shutoff valve always open. This ensures that the remaining water in the galley drains.
9-
y2
WARNING If the additional water shutoff valve  is closed, there is a risk of water within the
àM
galley to get stale.
Tr
ạm
HOW TO OPERATE THE MANUAL WATER SHUTOFF VALVE

Ph
Applicable to: ALL

9
In normal operating conditions, the manual water shutoff valve is in the ON position.
:2
12
In the case of an emergency (e.g. water leakage), the cabin crew must set the manual water shutoff
4
valve to the OFF position.

02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-50 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A to B → 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION - MANUAL WATER SHUTOFF VALVE
Example of Water Shut-Off Valve Operating Handles
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
HOW TO CLOSE THE MANUAL WATER SHUTOFF VALVE

29
Turn the manual water shutoff valve off.

:
12
The water flow stops.

4
02
HOW TO OPEN THE MANUAL WATER SHUTOFF VALVE

/2
04
Turn the manual water shutoff valve on.

9/
The water flows.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-50 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION - WASTE WATER DRAINING
DESCRIPTION OF THE WASTEWATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
The purpose of the wastewater drainage system is to drain liquids from the galley sinks overboard
via the drain masts.
L3 There is a drain valve in each drain line. This drain valve prevents the loss of cabin air through the
29
drain line, due to the differential pressure of the ambient air in the cabin.
2:
41
The drain valve has a flexible membrane that opens with the weight of the water column in the drain
2
line. The membrane automatically closes when the water column decreases.
20
4/
L1 The wastewater drainage system has all of the following:
0
9/
‐ Sinks
-2
‐ Drain valves
9-
‐ Drain masts
y2
‐ Manual Release Knobs to empty blocked drains. àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
HOW TO OPERATE THE WASTEWATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM

y2
àM
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
Tr
ạm
Usually the drain valve operates automatically.

Ph
In the case of a sink overflow, the cabin crew must operate the drain valve manually.
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-60 P 1/2

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION - WASTE WATER DRAINING
CAUTION Do not pour in the sink all of the following items. These items may block the
wastewater drainage system or contaminate the fuselage:
‐ Milk or Cream
‐ Thick liquids (e.g. tomato juice, soup)
‐ Dark liquids (e.g. coffee, tea, red wine)
29
‐ Acidic liquids (e.g. orange juice, apple juice, vinegar)
2:
41
‐ Coffee grounds
2
‐ Tea leaves
20
4/
‐ Food.
0
9/
-2
OPERATION
9-
Pull and hold the manual release knob.
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
The liquid in the drain line will be drained off through the drain mast until the drain line is empty or
-2
the manual release knob is released.

9-
After the liquids are drained, flush the sink with hot water.
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-30-60 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GALLEY INSERTS
BOILER
Criteria: K11239
VN-A367
GENERAL
29
The boiler is a water heater installed in a wet galley and is supplied from the aircraft water system
2:
41
and electrical system.
2
The function of the boiler is to boil water for in-flight catering.
20
A faucet is located at the bottom of the front panel for controlling the water flow through the boiler.
4/
0
With the faucet in the OPEN position, pressurized cold water flows into the bottom of the boiler
9/
-2
tank replacing the hot water which discharges through the outlet pipe.
A drain plug is located at the bottom of the front panel to ensure complete draining before removal
9-
y2
from its installed position.
àM
Boiler
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
OPERATION
29
:
WARNING When you open the hot water faucet:

12
‐ Keep your hands away from the water.

4
02
‐ Do not let the water splash.

/2
04
Hot water can cause serious burns.

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 1/26

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
CAUTION DANGER!
Monitor the Boiler during its operation!
Note: Depending on the configuration of the potable water system, low pressure can have an
effect on the performance of the unit. Therefore AIRBUS recommends to operate the unit
with APU or engines ON.
29
2:
1. Push the POWER ON pb, the CYCLE INDICATOR Light Emitting Diode (LED) will come ON.
41
The boiler automatically fills with water.
2
20
2. When the water has reached the pre-set temperature the CYCLE INDICATOR LED will go OFF
4/
indicating that the correct temperature has reached.
0
9/
3. When the LAMP TEST pb is pushed, all the serviceable LEDs come ON and thus check the
-2
circuits for function.
9-
y2
TAKING WATER OUT OF THE FAUCET
àM
1. Lift or lower the faucet handle to obtain a supply of water.
Tr
2. Release handle to stop flow.

ạm
Ph
Note: A water sensor prevents the elements from being energized whilst there is no water,
low water in the tank. The LOW WATER LED comes ON to reflect this condition.
The boiler will not operate with the LOW WATER LED ON.
9
:2
412
WATER HEATER
02
/2
04
Criteria: K14725, K15682, K20915

9/
-2
9-
y2
VN-A622, VN-A623, VN-A624, VN-A625

àM
GENERAL
Tr
The water heater is installed in a wet galley and it is supplied from the aircraft water system and
ạm
electrical system. It supplies hot water to the galley for catering purpose.
Ph
The following illustration shows two alternative water heaters.

One of the both water heaters is installed in the galley.
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 2/26

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
Water Heater
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
(1) Faucet handle

4
02
(2) HOT water- faucet

/2
04
(3) ON Light Emitting Diode (LED)

9/
-2
(4) ON/OFF pb
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 3/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
(5) WATER IS HOT LED

(6) FAIL/NO WATER LED
DESCRIPTION
29
The water heater heats 4.1 l (1.08 US Gal) of water to a temperature of 89 °C ±3 °C (192.2 °F
2:
41
±5.4 °F).
2
20
The water heater has these main components:
4/
1. Faucet handle
0
9/
2. HOT water- faucet
-2
3. ON LED
9-
4. ON/OFF pb
y2
5. WATER IS HOT LED
àM
6. FAIL/NO WATER LED
Tr
OPERATION
ạm
Ph
WARNING When you open the hot water faucet:

‐ Keep your hands away from the water.
9
‐ Do not let the water splash.

:2
12
Hot water can cause serious burns.

4
02
CAUTION DANGER!
/2
Monitor the water heater during its operation!

04
9/
-2
Note: Depending on the configuration of the potable water system, low pressure can have an
effect on the performance of the unit. Therefore AIRBUS recommends to operate the
9-
unit with APU or engines ON.

y2
àM
1. Push the ON/OFF pb (4). The ON LED (3) comes ON.

Tr
2. The WATER IS HOT LED (5) comes ON, when the water is hot and has the correct
ạm
temperature.
Ph
3. HOT water-faucet operation:

a. Make sure that the container (for example a hot-water can) you use is for hot water. Hold
29
the container below the outlet of the HOT water-faucet (2).

:
12
b. To open the HOT water-faucet, pull the faucet handle (1) towards you and hold it.
4
c. To close the HOT water-faucet, release the faucet handle (1). The water flow stops.
02
4. To stop the operation of the water heater, push the ON/OFF pb (4). The ON LED (3) goes
/2
04
OFF.
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 4/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
LOW WATER INDICATION

1. If there is not enough water in the water heater, the red FAIL/NO WATER LED (6) comes ON
and the heater does not operate:
Carry out the following steps:
a. Hold a container (for example a hot-water can) below the outlet of the HOT water-faucet
29
(2).
2:
41
b. Open the HOT water-faucet by pulling the faucet handle (1)90 ° towards you. Hold the
2
handle to bleed any air from the water heater until water flows out of the outlet of the HOT
20
4/
water-faucet (2).
0
9/
c. Release the red faucet handle (1). The water flow stops.
-2
d. Discard the water from the container through the sink of the galley.
9-
2. When the water heater is full of water the red FAIL/NO WATER LED goes OFF.
y2
àM
COFFEE MAKER
Tr
ạm
Ph
GENERAL
9
:2
12
The coffee maker provides:

4
‐ 1.3 l coffee per cycle in less than 4 min at 85 °C (185 °F).

02
‐ 1.3 l tea per cycle in less than 4 min at 85 °C (185 °F).

/2
04
‐ 0.2 l hot water in 20 s at 85 °C (185 °F).

9/
‐ 0.2 l cold water in 20 s at line temperature.

-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 5/26

à
Tr
CCOM ← B to C → 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
Coffee Maker
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
OPERATION
9
HOW TO START UP TO COFFEE MAKER

:2
12
To start-up the coffee maker press the ON/OFF key on the Front Panel. For approximately 5 s
4
02
all the Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) will blink, indicating that the software is executing a selftest.
/2
The ON LED will remain ON.

04
9/
-2
Note: If the coffee maker automatically shuts down three times in a row while attempting to
start it, the last time it will go into a FAIL state. If this occurs, turn the coffee maker
9-
OFF immediately and send it to the workshop.

y2
àM
After approximately 1 min the READY LED will turn ON, indicating that the heater has reached
Tr
the brewing temperature.

ạm
HOW TO MAKE COFFEE

Ph
1. Press the drawer latch down and pull out the drawer.
2. Gently pat or fluff the coffee pillow pack to loosen ground coffee, then place it into the drawer.
29
:
3. Slide the drawer back into the coffee maker and press firmly until it snaps into place. The
12
DRAWER UNLOCKED LED will turn OFF and the DRAWER LOCKED LED will l turn ON.
4
02
4. Place an empty pot into the coffee maker, which will be blocked by the spring-loaded
/2
04
retention bar.
9/
5. Press the COFFEE key on the Front Panel. The COFFEE LED will come ON, indicating that
-2
the brewing cycle has begun.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 6/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←C→ 11 JUL 23

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
6. The brewing cycle will stop after 3 to 4 min.

7. To remove the pot, press down the spring-loaded retention bar.
8. Remove the pillow pack from the drawer and rinse eventual coffee grains.
Note: If you want to abort during the cycle, press the COFFEE key again.
29
HOW TO MAKE TEA
2:
41
1. Place an empty pot into the Coffee Maker. The spring-loaded retention bar will block it.
2
2. Press the TEA key on the Front Panel. The TEA LED will turn ON, indicating that the brewing
20
cycle has begun.
4/
0
3. The brewing cycle will stop after 3 to 4 min.
9/
-2
4. To extract the pot, press the spring-loaded retention bar down.
9-
Note: If you want to abort during the cycle, press the TEA key again.
y2
HOW TO OBTAIN HOT WATER àM
Tr
1. Rotate the curved faucet for external water supply to a convenient position, and hold the cup
ạm
under its tip.

Ph
2. Press the HOT WATER key on the Front Panel. The HOT WATER LED will turn ON,
indicating that the cycle has begun.
9
:2
3. The cycle will stop after approximately 20 s.

12
4. It is recommended to rotate the curved faucet for external water supply into the coffee maker
4
02
when not used.

/2
04
Note: If you want to abort during the cycle, press the HOT WATER key again.
9/
-2
HOW TO OBTAIN COLD WATER

9-
1. Rotate the curved faucet for external water supply to a convenient position, and hold the cup
y2
under its tip.

àM
2. Press the COLD WATER key on the Front Panel. The COLD WATER LED will turn ON,
Tr
indicating that the cycle has begun.

ạm
3. The cycle will stop after approximately 20 s.

Ph
4. It is recommended to rotate the curved faucet for external water supply into the coffee maker
when not used.
: 29
12
Note: If you want to abort during the cycle, press the COLD WATER key again.
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 7/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←C 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
STEAM OVEN / CONVECTION OVEN

VN-A367
GENERAL
The steam convection oven is designed to reconstitute frozen food to its desired temperature.
29
2:
The oven can also be utilized for grilling chickens, steaks and for toasting. In the steam mode the
41
preparation times of the various types of meals are up to 25 % less than for the convection oven
2
operation.
20
4/
The steam convection oven consists of the oven with integrated control panel and shelves.
0
9/
The oven control module is installed on top of the oven.
-2
WARNING Danger of injury!
9-
USE THE OVEN only FOR designated PURPOSES!
y2
Steam Oven àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
(1) Control module panel

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 8/26

à
Tr
CCOM D→ 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
(2) Door knob

(3) Vapour outlet
Note: The oven is provided with a right or left side hinged door.
OVEN OPERATION
29
Before operating the oven, make sure that it is clean and serviceable.
2:
41
CAUTION Do not operate an empty oven. An empty oven in operation causes damage to the
2
20
equipment.
4/
0
During oven-operation make sure that the VAPOR OUTLET is free to let vapor out of the oven.
9/
-2
CAUTION Do not place anything in front of the vapor outlet. If vapor cannot escape, damage
9-
can occur to the equipment.
y2
OVEN DOOR OPERATION àM
Tr
The door latch is a spring loaded latching linkage.

ạm
Door
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
OPENING THE OVEN DOOR

4
02
1. Make sure that no items hinder or fall down during opening of the door.
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 9/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
WARNING Danger of Injury!

Be careful! falling items can cause injury!
2. Turn the 1/4-TURN RETAINER to the UNLOCKED position.
3. By turning the DOOR knob to the OPEN direction, the latching linkage disengages, then
carefully pull the operating knob to open the door.
29
2:
41
Be careful! Hot Air can escape from the oven. Hot meal can fall out of the
2
20
oven. Use adequate protection e.g. gloves.
4/
Be careful hot items can fall out of the oven.
0
9/
-2
CLOSING THE OVEN DOOR
9-
y2
WARNING Danger of clamping!
àM
Clamping of fingers between Door and housing is possible. Be careful!
Tr
a. Make sure that the 1/4-TURN RETAINER is in the UNLOCKED POSITION.

ạm
b. Make sure that no items hinder the closing of the door.

Ph
c. Close the door firmly and turn the DOOR KNOB to the LOCKED POSITION.
d. Turn the 1/4-TURN RETAINER to the LOCKED POSITION.
9
:2
CONTROL MODULE
4 12
Control module
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 10/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
1. Heating time indicator

2. Steam Selection
3. Steam On indicator
4. No Water indicator
5. Prog Selection
29
6. Temperature indicator
2:
7. Temperature - setting pushbutton
41
8. Temperature + setting pushbutton
2
20
9. Program selecting switch
4/
10. Start / Pause pushbutton
0
9/
11. Run indicator
-2
12. ON / OFF pushbutton
9-
13. Time setting pushbutton
y2
HOW TO OPERATE THE OVEN àM
Tr
1. Push the ON/OFF pb-sw to switch the oven on.

ạm
2. Select the desired mode:

Ph
‐ Convection mode: By pushing the steam selection sw (2) until the steam on light indicator (3)
is OFF.
9
:2
‐ Steam mode: By pushing on the steam selection sw (2) until the steam on light indicator (3) is
12
ON.
4
02
Note: In the steam mode, the NO WATER light indicator (4) will be energized, in case of
/2
04
no water available or low water pressure in the system.

9/
-2
3. Set the heating time by pressing the time setting pushbuttons (13). The new time appears on
the illuminated heating time indicator (1).
9-
y2
Note: The cooking time depends on quantity, loading temperature and kind of food.
àM
4. Set the cooking temperature by pushing the temperature +/- setting pushbutton (7) or (8).
Tr
5. Select the cooking programme by pressing the PROG ▴ pb (9), if desired.

ạm
6. Push the Start/Pause pb to start the cooking cycle. The RUN light indicator up to indicate a
Ph
running cooking cycle.

7. Standby mode: If it is necessary to change the above parameters press the Start/Pause pb
29
again and change the parameters. With the next pressing of the Start/Pause pb the program
:
12
continues with a lighted RUN light indicator.

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 11/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
HOW TO SWITCH OFF THE OVEN

At the end of the selected operation time, the oven is automatically switched off. The display
shows flashing dashes - - light. An acoustical signal sounds.
1. Push the button ON/OFF pb-sw to switch the oven off.
29
STEAM OVEN/CONVECTION OVEN
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
GENERAL
-2
The Steam Oven/Convection Oven is installed in a galley. It is supplied from the aircraft electrical
9-
y2
system.
àM
The oven is supplied with a right or a left hinged door. The oven is controlled by an Oven Control
Module (OCM) that is located on the upper front face of the oven.
Tr
ạm

Ph
There may be hot steam inside the oven. Open the door with care.
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 12/26

à
Tr
CCOM ← D to E → 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
Steam Oven/Convection Oven
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
DESCRIPTION
Ph
The oven is designed to heat or reconstitute precooked meals aboard aircraft. Depending on the
type of the oven, it can be used in convection mode or in steam mode.
:29
12
CONVECTION MODE:
4
02
The precooked meals are heated by using conventional circulating hot air.
/2
04
STEAM MODE:
9/
-2
The precooked meals are heated by using a water injection system and pressurized oven
cavity.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 13/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
OVEN CONTROL MODULE (OCM)

The OCM system is built to control an oven with a microprocessor based system. The OCM
contains 4 standard and 10 preprogrammed programs that can be customized by the customer.
The display indicates the cooking time settings, selected cooking functions and error messages.
Oven Control Module
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
(1) ON/OFF key: Turns ON/OFF the oven.

9
(2) ON/OFF Light Emitting Diode (LED): LED will flash in standby mode and continuously during
:2
12
operation.
4
02
(3) TIME MENU ▴ key: Scrolls a menu selection up and changes cooking time settings.
/2
04
(4) START/PAUSE LED: LED is ON during any program run. LED is flashing during the pause.
9/
-2
(5) START/PAUSE key: Starts a cooking cycle and confirms a selected program.
9-
(6) SELECT key: Selects a menu item.

y2
àM
(7) TIME MENU ▾ key: Scrolls a menu selection down and changes cooking time settings.
Tr
(8) FAIL LED: LED will flash when ERROR is detected (error message will appear in display).
ạm
Ph
(9) READY LED: LED will flash when program is finished.

(10) CLEAR/STOP key: Stops or resets a program any time.
29
:
HOW TO SWITCH ON THE OVEN

412
Press the ON/OFF key to switch ON the unit.

02
/2
The green ON/OFF LED will flash during the self test and the display backlight comes ON.
04
Display will show the oven mode (S = Steam, C = Convection), the airline logo and the software
9/
-2
version, while performing a self test. Message "selftest" appears on the display.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 14/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
HOW TO START A STANDARD PROGRAM

Press the TIME MENU ▴ key to access the standard programs menu. Press the TIME MENU ▴
or TIME MENU ▾ key to scroll to one of the standard programs "Steam Low", "Steam Medium",
"Dry Heat" or "Keep Warm" program.
Note: Depending on the OCM or oven the indication on the display may vary. The indication
29
could also be: "Low", "Medium" and "High" instead of "Low Steam", "Medium Steam"
2:
41
and "Dry Heat".
2
20
Press the START/PAUSE key to start the program. The START/PAUSE LED will come ON.
4/
0
Note: In case the oven is started with the door open or the door is in safe position, the oven
9/
-2
will beep twice to notify the user to close and lock the door.
9-
The display shows the progress of the program such as the remaining time, the temperature
y2
and the pressure.
àM
As soon as the program is ready, the READY LED is flashing and the display shows "Program
Tr
Ready". The OCM will give a beep.

ạm
The "Program Ready" message can be cleared by pressing the CLEAR/STOP key or by
Ph
opening the door.

HOW TO STOP A PROGRAM
9
:2
12
Press the CLEAR/STOP key to stop a running program. The oven will return to the standby
4
mode. The display will show the stand by screen.

02
/2
Note: It is not possible to resume the stopped program to restart cooking. A new program or
04
9/
menu has to be selected.

-2
Turn the door knob in safe position to release the pressure from the oven cavity. The
9-
door can now safely be opened by turning the door knob in the open position.
y2
HOW TO SELECT A STANDARD PROGRAM WITH A DELAYED START

àM
‐ Press the TIME MENU ▴ key to access the standard programs menu.
Tr
‐ Press or hold the TIME MENU ▴ or TIME MENU ▾ key to select the Preset time in the
ạm
Ph
Standard Programs menu.

‐ Press the SELECT key to change the preset time.
‐ Press or hold the TIME MENU ▴ or TIME MENU ▾ key to change the default preset time.
: 29
‐ Press the SELECT key to confirm.

12
‐ Press the TIME MENU ▴ or TIME MENU ▾ key to select a Standard Program.
4
02

/2
‐ Press the TIME MENU ▴ or TIME MENU ▾ key to change the default time.
04
9/
‐ Press the START/PAUSE key to start the program.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 15/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
HOW TO ALTER THE RUN TIME OF A PROGRAM (STANDARD PROGRAMS ONLY)

‐ Start a standard program.
‐ Press the TIME MENU ▴ or TIME MENU ▾ key during the program run. The remaining time
can now be altered. The maximum time is depending on the temperature of the program.
High temperature programs are limited in time. The oven will be immediately use the altered
29
time.
2:
41
HOW TO KEEP THE FOOD WARM
2
20
4/
‐ Press the TIME MENU ▴ or TIME MENU ▾ keys to select the keep warm function.
0
9/
‐ Press the START/PAUSE key to start the oven or press the SELECT key to change the
-2
default time.
9-
y2
PRE-PROGRAMMED PROGRAMS
àM
In addition, there are 10 preprogrammed programs, that can be customized by the customer.
Tr
ạm
STEAM OVEN
Ph
Criteria: K20915
9
:2

12
GENERAL
4
02
The Steam Oven/Convection Oven is installed in a galley. It is supplied from the aircraft electrical
/2
04
system.
9/
The oven is supplied with a right or a left hinged door. The oven is controlled by an Oven Control
-2
Module (OCM) that is located on the top of the oven.

9-

y2
There may be hot steam inside the oven. Open the door with care.
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 16/26

à
Tr
CCOM ← E to F → 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
Steam Oven/Convection Oven
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
DESCRIPTION
Tr
ạm
The Oven is designed to heat or reconstitute pre-cooked meals aboard aircraft. Depending on the
Ph
type of the oven, it can be used in convection mode or in steam mode.

CONVECTION MODE:
:29
12
The pre-cooked meals are heated by using conventional circulating hot air.
4
02
STEAM MODE:
/2
04
The pre-cooked meals are heated by using a water injection system and pressurized oven
9/
cavity.
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 17/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←F→ 11 JUL 23

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
OVEN CONTROL MODULE (OCM)

The OCM system is built to control an oven with a microprocessor based system. The OCM
contains four standard programs (Steam Low, Steam Medium, Dry Heat and Keep Warm) and 10
pre-programmed programs that can be customized by the customer.
Oven Control Module
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
(1) ON/OFF key: Turns the Oven ON or OFF.

9-
(2) ON/OFF light: Light will flash in standby mode and continuously during operation.
y2
àM
(3) INFRA RED READER: Allows to transfer settings / data to or from a computer.
Tr
(4) OCM Display: Shows the cooking time settings, selected cooking functions and error
ạm
messages.
Ph
(5) TIME MENU ▴key: Scrolls a menu selection up and changes cooking time settings.
29
(6) START/PAUSE light: Light is on during any program run. Light is flashing during the pause.
:
12
(7) START/PAUSE key: Starts a cooking cycle and confirms a selected program.
4
02
/2
(8) CLEAR/STOP key: Stops or resets a program any time.

04
9/
(9) READY light: Light will flash when program is finished.

-2
(10) FAIL light: Light will flash when ERROR is detected (error message will appear in display).
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 18/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
(11) TIME MENU ▾ key: Scrolls a menu selection down and changes cooking time settings.
(12) SELECT key: Selects a menu item.
SWITCH ON THE OCM
Press the ON/OFF key to switch on the unit.
29
The green ON/OFF light will flash during the self test and the display backlight illuminates.
2:
Display will show the oven mode (S = Steam, C = Convection), the airline logo and the software
41
version, while performing a self test. Message "selftest" appears on the display.
2
20
START A STANDARD PROGRAM
4/
0
9/
Press the TIME MENU ▴ key to access the standard programs menu. Press the TIME MENU ▴
-2
or TIME MENU ▾ key to scroll to one of the standard programs "Steam Low", "Steam Medium",
9-
"Dry Heat" or "Keep Warm" program. Press the START/PAUSE key to start the program. The
y2
START/PAUSE light will illuminate.
àM
Note: In case the oven is started with the door open or the door is in safe position, the oven
Tr
ạm
will beep twice to notify the user to close and lock the door.
Ph
The display shows the progress of the program such as the remaining time, the temperature
and the pressure.
9
As soon as the program is ready, the READY light is flashing and the display shows "Program
:2
12
Ready". The OCM will give a beep.

4
The "Program Ready" message can be cleared by pressing the CLEAR/ STOP key or by
02
/2
opening the door.

04
9/
HOW TO STOP A PROGRAM

-2
Press the CLEAR/STOP key to stop a running program. The oven shall return to the standby
9-
mode. The display will show the stand by screen.

y2
àM
Note: It is not possible to resume the stopped program to restart cooking. A new program or
Tr
menu has to be selected.

ạm
Turn the door knob in safe position to release the pressure from the oven cavity. The
Ph
door can now safely be opened by turning the door knob in the open position.
HOW TO SELECT A STANDARD PROGRAM WITH A DELAYED START
: 29
12
‐ Press or hold the TIME MENU ▴ or TIME MENU ▾ key to select the Preset time in the
4
02
Standard Programs menu.

/2

04
9/
‐ Press or hold the TIME MENU ▴ or TIME MENU ▾ key to change the default preset time.
-2
‐ Press the SELECT key to confirm.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 19/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
‐ Press the TIME MENU ▴ or TIME MENU ▾ key to select a Standard Program.
‐ Press the TIME MENU ▴ or TIME MENU ▾ key to change the default time.
‐ Press the START/PAUSE key to start the program.
HOW TO ALTER THE RUN TIME OF A PROGRAM (STANDARD PROGRAMS ONLY)
29
‐ Start a standard program.
2:
41
‐ Press the TIME MENU ▴ or TIME MENU ▾ key during the program run. The remaining time
2
can now be altered. The maximum time is depending on the temperature of the program.
20
4/
High temperature programs are limited in time. The oven will be immediately use the altered
0
9/
time.
-2
HOW TO KEEP YOUR FOOD WARM
9-
y2
‐ Press the TIME MENU ▴ key to access the standard programs menu
àM
‐ Press the TIME MENU ▴ or TIME MENU ▾ keys to select the keep warm function.
‐ Press the START/PAUSE key to start the oven or press the SELECT key to change the
Tr
default time.
ạm
Ph
PRE-PROGRAMMED PROGRAMS
In addition, there are 10 pre-programmed programs, that can be customized by the customer.
9
:2
12
BEVERAGE MAKER
4
02
/2
04
VN-A367
9/
GENERAL
-2
9-
The beverage maker is designed for use in aircraft galleys.

y2
The front casing houses the electrical controls, hot water faucet and server. Inside, there is a
àM
mechanism operated by a lever, which locks the server in position. Unless the lever is down, no
Tr
water can flow during the brew cycle.

ạm
Heated water passes through the brew head into a server where it mixes with the beverage
Ph
ingredients.
The water is heated in a single tank by immersion type heaters inserted in the base of the tank.
29
A heating pad is installed in the base of the beverage maker. The heater pad will maintain the
:
contents of the coffee pot at a temperature of 84 ± 1 °C.

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 20/26

à
Tr
CCOM ← F to G → 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
Beverage Maker
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
OPERATION
9
1.
:2
WARNING DO NOT OPERATE THE BEVERAGE MAKER WITHOUT THE SERVER IN

12
POSITION AND THE LEVER DOWN.

4
02
/2
CAUTION IF THE SERVER OVERFILLS, THE BEVERAGE MAKER SHOULD BE

04
SWITCHED OFF USING THE POWER ON BUTTON. IF THE LIQUID

9/
-2
CONTINUES TO FLOW, IT MAY BE STOPPED BY RAISING THE LEVER OR

BY PULLING THE BEVERAGE MAKER FORWARDS TO DISCONNECT IT
9-
FROM ITS WATER SUPPLY.

y2
àM
Note: If any lamp does not light as detailed below, it may be checked by pressing the LAMP
Tr
TEST button. All serviceable lamps should light when the LAMP TEST button is
ạm
pressed.
Ph
Note: If hot water is continuously drawn from the faucet the brew cycle time will increase and
the beverage temperature may be affected.
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 21/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←G→ 11 JUL 23

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
To draw water at tank temperature

‐ To draw water, raise or lower the faucet handle.
‐ To turn off water, release the faucet handle.
2. To start the beverage maker
‐ Press the POWER AND WARMER ON switch. Verify that the switches light. If the switches
do not light, press the LAMP TEST switch. If no other lamps light, check the galley circuit
29
breaker.
2:
41
‐ If the LOW WATER lamp is lit, wait for the tank to fill before proceeding. The LOW WATER
2
lamp will extinguish automatically when the tank is full.
20
4/
3. To brew beverage
0
9/
‐ Lift the lever and remove the server.
-2
‐ Place the beverage ingredients in the server covering the bottom as evenly as possible.
9-
‐ Insert the server, without lid, fully into the beverage maker. Fully lower the lever while
y2
ensuring that the two probes go into the server.
àM
‐ Momentarily press the BREW switch and check that the switch lights. When the server is fully
Tr
charged with hot water, the BREW switch extinguishes.

ạm
‐ When required, lift the lever and carefully remove the hot server from the beverage maker.
Ph
4. To warm beverage only

‐ Place the server in the unit. Secure the server by lowering the lever.
9
‐ Press the WARMER ON switch and check that the switch lights.
:2
12
5. To switch off the warmer

4
‐ Press the WARMER ON switch. Check that the switch extinguishes.

02
6. To switch off the beverage maker

/2
04
‐ Press the POWER ON switch. Check that the switch extinguishes.

9/
-2
CLEANING
9-
1.
CAUTION DO NOT USE PAPER TOWELS EXCEPT FOR MOPPING UP SPILLAGE.
y2
àM
AVOID WETTING SWITCHLIGHTS AND OTHER ELECTRICAL

COMPONENTS
Tr
ạm
Clean surfaces frequently during extended operation and at the end of every flight using a clean
Ph
damp cloth and a good quality detergent.

2. Dry with a lint free cloth.
: 29
12
WASTE COMPARTMENT
4
02
Applicable to: ALL

/2
04
Galleys can be optionally equipped with waste compartments. Inside of each waste compartment, a
9/
waste bin is installed to collect the waste that is disposed through the waste flap.
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 22/26

à
Tr
CCOM ← G to H → 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
To give access to the waste bin, the waste compartment has an inspection door that is secured by
a latch. Depending on the galley configuration, a waste compartment might be located next to a
passenger door. When the passenger door is closed, the inspection door can be opened max. 45 °
before it collides with the slide raft container.
Note: On ground, when the passenger doors are open, the inspection doors can be opened fully
29
to extract the waste bin and to empty it.
2:
41
Typical Waste Compartment Location
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
(1) Waste flap

04
9/
(2) Inspection door

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 23/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←H 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
SLIDING WORK TABLE

Applicable to: ALL
DESCRIPTION
A sliding work table is an additional working place integrated in the galleys.
29
WARNING Ensure that the sliding work table is correctly stowed and latched during taxi,
2:
41
takeoff, turbulence, and landing.
2
20
CAUTION Do not overload the sliding work table.
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 24/26

à
Tr
CCOM I→ 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
OPERATION
HOW TO TAKE THE SLIDING WORK TABLE INTO SERVICE
1. Open the 1/4-turn retainer(s).
For more information about the operation of the 1/4-turn retainer: Refer to 03-070-30-30
1/4-Turn Retainer.
29
2. Push the button. 
2:
41
3. Pull out the sliding work table.
2
20
HOW TO TAKE THE SLIDING WORK TABLE OUT OF SERVICE
4/
0
1. Make sure that no items are on the sliding work table.
9/
-2
2. Push the button. 
3. Push the sliding work table back in to the galley.
9-
y2
4. Close the 1/4-turn retainer(s).
àM
For more information about operation of the 1/4-turn retainer: Refer to 03-070-30-30 1/4-Turn
Retainer
Tr
ạm
Ph
FOLDED WORK TABLE

Applicable to: ALL
9
:2
DESCRIPTION
4 12
A folded work table is an additional working place integrated in the galleys that can be unfolded on
02
demand by the cabin crew.

/2
04
It is secured by both a slam latch and a sliding latch. For more information about the latches: Refer
9/
to 03-070-30-30 Slam Latch/Sliding Latch.

-2
WARNING Ensure that the folded work table is correctly stowed and latched during taxi,
9-
y2
takeoff, turbulence, and landing.

àM
CAUTION Do not overload the folded work table.

Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 25/26

à
Tr
CCOM ← I to J → 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
GALLEYS
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
OPERATION
àM
Tr
HOW TO TAKE THE FOLDED WORK TABLE INTO SERVICE

ạm
1. Open the sliding latch.

Ph
2. Open the slam latch and fold down the work table.
29
HOW TO TAKE THE FOLDED WORK TABLE OUT OF SERVICE

:
12
1. Make sure that no items are on the folded work table.

4
02
2. Fold up the work table and close the slam latch.

/2
3. Close the sliding latch.

04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-070-40 P 26/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←J 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE LAVATORIES

Applicable to: ALL
There are lavatories located throughout the cabin. Each lavatory has a toilet and washroom function.
Optionally, lavatories for Persons with Reduced Mobility (PRM) can be installed.
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
LOCATION OF LAVATORIES
Criteria: SA
Different types of lavatories can be installed in the cabin area at different positions, normally in the
29
forward and/or in the aft cabin area.
2:
For more information about the location: Refer to: "03-010-10 Cabin Layout".
41
2
20
LOCATION OF LAVATORIES A,D,E AND L
4/
0
9/
Criteria: K14725, K15682, K8993, SA
-2
9-
y2
àM
4 lavatories are installed in the cabin area at position A,D,E and L.
Tr
Location (A,D,E and L)

ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A to B 10 JAN 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 10 JAN 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
LAVATORY DOOR TYPES

Applicable to: ALL
DESCRIPTION OF THE SINGLE-BLADE LAVATORY DOOR

Outside features of the single-blade door:
29
‐ An ashtray
2:
41
‐ A door latch and its release mechanism in the door frame
2
‐ A flag with the indication green/red (VACANT/OCCUPIED)
20
‐ A coverplate, that hides the sliding lever
4/
0
‐ A sliding lever to lock/unlock the door from the outside.
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 1/22

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
Inside features of the single-blade door:

‐ A coat hook
‐ A door latch
‐ A sliding lever with the indication green/red (VACANT/OCCUPIED)
‐ An ashtray.
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
DESCRIPTION OF THE BI-FOLDING DOOR

4
02
Outside features of the bi-folding door:

/2
‐ An ashtray
04
9/
Note:
-2
Do not use the ashtray to open or close the lavatory door.

-
‐ A flag with the indication green/red (VACANT/OCCUPIED)

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 2/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
‐ A sliding lever to lock/unlock the door from the outside

‐ A coverplate that hides the sliding lever
‐ Latches that keep the door in place.
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
Inside features of the bi-folding door:

‐ A coat hook
29
‐ A handle
:
12
‐ A sliding lever with the indication green/red (VACANT/OCCUPIED)

4
‐ An ashtray.
02
/2
Note: Do not use the ashtray to open or close the lavatory door.
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 3/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 4/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
HOW TO LOCK AND UNLOCK A LAVATORY DOOR

HOW TO LOCK AND UNLOCK A LAVATORY DOOR FROM THE INSIDE
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
To unlock/lock the lavatory door, move the sliding lever to the unlocked (green) or locked (red)
-2
position.
9-
On the outside the related unlocked (green) or locked (red) flag is visible.
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 5/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
HOW TO LOCK AND UNLOCK A LAVATORY DOOR FROM THE OUTSIDE
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
To unlock/lock the lavatory door, pull up the coverplate, hold it, and move the sliding lever to the
/2
04
unlocked (green) or locked (red) position.

9/
On the inside the related unlocked (green) or locked (red) flag is visible.
-2
9-
HOW TO LOCK A BI-FOLDING DOOR IN THE OPEN POSITION

y2
1. Fully open the bi-folding door.

àM
2. Turn the safety pin to the vertical position and ensure that the safety pin moves and remains in
Tr
its maximum upward position.

ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 6/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 7/22

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
LAVATORY INTERIOR
Applicable to: ALL
TYPICAL LAVATORY INTERIOR

In the standard configuration each lavatory has:
29
‐ Washroom functions
2:
41
▪ A wash basin with a water faucet and a drain actuator
2
20
▪ Dispenser for liquid soap and paper towels.
04/
‐ Toilet functions
9/
-2
▪ A toilet bowl with flush
9-
▪ Toilet paper roll holders
y2
▪ Optional stowage for additional toilet paper rolls (inside washstand).
àM
‐ Additional features
Tr
ạm
▪ A RETURN TO SEAT sign

Ph
▪ A NO SMOKING sign
▪ An ATTENDANT CALL pb
9
▪ A smoke detector
:2
12
▪ An air supply
4
▪ An air extraction
02
▪ An oxygen container with minimum of two masks

/2
04
▪ A Loudspeaker
9/
▪ Lights
-2
▪ A mirror
9-
▪ A waste-bin with a self-closing waste flap and an integrated fire extinguisher

y2
▪ A handrail (optional)
àM
▪ A coat hook (optional)

Tr
▪ An ashtray (optional)
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 8/22

à
Tr
CCOM B→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
LAVATORY SERVICE UNIT

Tr
ạm
Each lavatory has a Lavatory Service Unit (LSU), installed below the mirror.
Ph
The LSU has these components:

‐ A RETURN TO SEAT sign
29
‐ A CALL button
:
12
‐ A power outlet (razor socket).

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 9/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
Example of a Lavatory Service Unit
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
Item of the Lavatory Service Unit Description

/2
RETURN TO SEAT Sign The RETURN TO SEAT sign comes ON when the FASTEN SEAT
04
BELTS signs are switched ON (automatically or manually by the flight

9/
-2
crew).
CALL Button
9-
Note: Depending on the configuration, the aircraft can be equipped

y2
with a blue or an amber CALL pb.

àM
The lavatory occupant can use the CALL button to call the cabin crew for
Tr
assistance. It has the same function as the ATTENDANT CALL buttons

at the seats.
ạm
For details: Refer to 03-080-30 How to Operate the Call Pushbutton.

Ph
Razor Socket The razor socket is optional.

It is supplied with 115 V and 60 Hz.
:29
12
WASTEBIN FIRE EXTINGUISHER

4
02
A wastebin fire extinguisher is installed on top of the wastebin in the washstand.

/2
04
In case of a fire in the wastebin, the fire extinguisher operates automatically.

9/
L2 When the temperature in the wastebin increases to approximately 77 °C (170.6 °F), the
-2
extinguishing agent flows automatically into the wastebin.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 10/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
L1 Note: To ensure a proper operation of the fire extinguisher, the waste bin flap and the
washstand door must be fully closed.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
L2 The fire extinguisher has an indicator that shows the pressure. The needle must be in the green
9/
-2
area for the extinguisher to operate effectively.

9-
The water heater is installed in each lavatory below the wash basin and provides hot water to the
y2
water faucet.
àM
Tr
The water heater has these main components:

ạm
‐ A Water inlet and a water outlet connection

Ph
‐ A water tank
‐ An ON/OFF switch
29
‐ An indicator light
:
‐ A pressure relief valve.

12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 11/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
Example of a Water Heater
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
A thermoswitch inside the water heater regulates the water temperature, so that the outlet
temperature is between 40 °C (104 °F) and 50 °C (122 °F ).
29
If the thermoswitch has a malfunction, an overheat switch cuts the electrical supply between 72 °C
:
12
(161.6 °F) and 82 °C (179.8 °F).

4
02
When the indicator light is ON, the water heater is supplied with electrical power.
/2
04
BABY NURSING TABLE

9/
-2
Some lavatories have a baby nursing table attached to the lavatory wall above the toilet unit.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 12/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
(1) Nursing table in stowed position

4
02
(2) Nursing table ready for use

/2
04
HOW TO TAKE THE NURSING TABLE INTO SERVICE

9/
-2
1. Close the toilet lid.

9-
2. Lift the latch until the nursing table is unlatched from the stop.
y2
3. Pull the nursing table from its position.

àM
4. Fold down the nursing table onto its supports.

Tr
HOW TO STOW THE NURSING TABLE

ạm
Ph
Note: Make sure that the nursing table is clean before stowing it.
1. Lift the nursing table and fold it to the lavatory wall.
29
2. Push the nursing table against the stop until the latch engages with a snap.
:
4 12
02
FOLDING SEAT FOR PERSONS WITH REDUCED MOBILITY (PRM)

/2
04
A PRM lavatory can be equipped with an optional folding seat.

9/
The folding seat is installed to assist the transfer of a PRM from the wheelchair to the toilet seat
-2
and vice versa.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 13/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
Note: To make the transfer easier, there are additional assist handles on the lavatory wall.
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
CAUTION The seat pan of the folding seat must be stowed and locked in the vertical position
ạm
for taxi, takeoff and landing.

Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 14/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
HOW TO OPERATE THE WATER FAUCET WITH INFRARED SENSOR
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
1. To start the water flow, place the hands below the water outlet. When the infrared sensor
y2
detects the hands, the water flow starts automatically.
àM
2. To adjust the water temperature, push the corresponding button (red to increase or blue to
Tr
decrease the water temperature).

ạm
3. To stop the water flow, remove the hands from below the water outlet.
Ph
HOW TO OPERATE THE WATER FAUCET WITH PUSHBUTTONS

9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
1. To start the water flow, push the white button. The water flow stops automatically after a certain
Ph
time (typically after 15 s).

2. To adjust the water temperature, push the corresponding button (red to increase or blue to
29
decrease the water temperature).

:
12
4
02
TOILET FLUSH PUSHBUTTON

/2
04
The FLUSH pb indicates different flush states of the toilet system:

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 15/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
Indication Status of the Toilet System

Steady blue light The flush cycle is in progress.
Steady amber light The toilet system is OFF.
Flashing blue light The automatic flush cycle after BOWL FULL condition is in progress.
Flashing amber light Maintenance is in progress.
FLUSH Pushbutton - Blue Light (Example)
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
FLUSH Pushbutton - Amber Light (Example)

9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
HOW TO FLUSH THE TOILET

ạm
CAUTION Do not press the FLUSH pb if it flashes amber.

Ph
1. Close the toilet lid.

29
2. Push the FLUSH pb.

:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 16/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
HOW TO OPERATE THE CALL PUSHBUTTON
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
Note: Depending on the configuration, the aircraft can be equipped with a blue or an amber
y2
CALL pb. àM
Tr
To call the cabin crew for help or assistance, press the CALL pb.
ạm
The following indications will come ON:

Ph
‐ The CALL pb light

‐ The amber light on the lavatory wall (steady ON)
9
:2
‐ The amber light on the related ACP (steady ON)

12
‐ A corresponding message on the related AIP(s) and the FAP

4
02
‐ A single chime.
/2
04
To reset the attendant call, press the CALL pb again.

9/
-2
HOW TO OPERATE THE FOLDING SEAT IN THE PRM LAVATORY

9-
CAUTION The seat pan of the folding seat must be stowed and locked in the vertical position
y2
for taxi, take off and landing.

àM
Tr
With the aid of the folding seat, there are two ways to assist a PRM to use the toilet, depending on
ạm
the size of the PRM:

Ph
‐ Via the standard operation

‐ Via the alternative operation (e.g. the PRM has long legs).
29
Note: When sitting on the toilet seat, the PRM can fold up the folding seat pan. A placard next
:
12
to the folding seat explains the PRM how to unlock the seat pan. The seat pan must lock
4
02
in its vertical position.

/2
For help from the cabin crew, the PRM can press the ATTENDANT CALL pb.
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 17/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 18/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
STANDARD OPERATION
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
1. Fully open the door of the PRM lavatory.

12
2. Check that the lavatory lighting is ON.

4
02
3. Push the folding seat latch to release the seat pan, and fully lower it until it is locked in its
/2
horizontal position.
04
4. Push the wheelchair with the PRM diagonally towards the seat pan so the left front wheel is
9/
-2
inside the lavatory. Make sure that the wheelchair is as close as possible to the seat pan.
5. Lock the break of the wheelchair.
9-
y2
6. Assist the PRM to move from the wheelchair to the seat pan. (1)
àM
Note: The PRM can use the additional ASSIST HANDLES to get up, to sit down and to
Tr
transfer from one seat to the other.

ạm
7. Remove the wheelchair and close the door.

Ph
8. The PRM can now move from the seat pan to the toilet seat. (2) & (3)
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 19/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
ALTERNATIVE OPERATION
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
1. Fully open the door of the PRM lavatory.

9
:2
2. Check that the lavatory lighting is ON.

12
3. Push the folding seat latch to unlatch the seat pan, and fully lower it until it is locked in its
4
02
horizontal position.
/2
4. Assist the PRM to sit sideways on the wheelchair.

04
5. Push the wheelchair with the PRM diagonally towards the seat pan so the left front wheel is
9/
-2
inside the lavatory. Make sure that the wheelchair is as close as possible to the seat pan.
9-
Note: One leg of the PRM is on the outside and one on the inside of the lavatory.
y2
6. Lock the break of the wheelchair.

àM
7. Assist the PRM to move from the wheelchair around the door post onto the seat pan. (1)
Tr
ạm
Note: The PRM can use the additional ASSIST HANDLES to get up, to sit down and to
Ph
transfer from one seat to the other.

8. Remove the wheelchair and close the door.
29
9. The PRM can now move from the seat pan to the toilet seat. (2) & (3)
:
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 20/22

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
SMART LAVATORIES
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
The aircraft is equipped with optimized size Smart Lavatories  .
29
The external shape of the lavatory modules and their interior design are space-optimized.
2:
41
L2 The Smart Lavatories are part of the Space-Flex concept.
2
There are Ds, Es, Hs, Ls, and Ms type lavatories.
20
4/
L1 LOCATION
0
9/
-2
Smart Lavatories can be located in the mid and aft cabin areas.
9-
y2
In order to enhance the seat capacity of the aircraft and to provide more space for the seat row in
àM
front of a Smart Lavatory, the shape of the wall of the Smart Lavatories allows an inclination of the
Tr
seat in front of the lavatory.

ạm
Ph
Example of a Smart Lavatory from Outside

9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 21/22

à
Tr
CCOM C→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321
Example of a Smart Lavatory from Inside
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
The interior and operation of the lavatory equipment is similar to other lavatories.
/2
04
FURTHER INFORMATION ABOUT THE LAVATORIES

9/
-2
‐ General description of the lavatory interior: Refer to 03-080-30 Typical Lavatory Interior
‐ Operation of the lavatory:
9-
y2
‐ How to operate the water faucet: Refer to 03-080-30 How to Operate the Water Faucet
àM
‐ How to operate the toilet flush: Refer to 03-080-30 How to Operate the Toilet Flush
Tr
‐ How to operate the attendant call pushbutton: Refer to 03-080-30 How to Operate the Call
ạm
Pushbutton.
Ph
29
LAVATORY WITH A STRETCHER LOADING CAPABILITY

:
12
Applicable to: ALL

4
02
For more information about this function: Refer to 03-100-20 Lavatory with a Stretcher Loading
/2
04
Capability.
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-30 P 22/22

à
Tr
CCOM ← C to D 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321 FUNCTION RECOVERY PROCEDURES (FRP)
- RECOVERY OF LAVATORY FUNCTIONS
HOW TO MANUALLY DRAIN THE WASHBASIN

Applicable to: ALL
The water in the washbasin does not drain
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
29
YES NO
2:
41
2
1. If the water in the washbasin does not drain:
20
Push the Drain Actuator several times.
4/
0
Is there still water in the washbasin? Go to 2. END
9/
-2
2. If there is still water in the washbasin:
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-10 P 1/8

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
1. Open the washstand access door.
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
2. Pull up the ring at the top of the drain valve.

9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
Did the water drain from the washbasin? END Go to 3.

02
/2
04
3. If the water has not drained from the washbasin:

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-10 P 2/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
1. Lock the lavatory door until the end of the flight:
a. Lift-up the spring loaded coverplate of the lavatory occupied
sign (located on the outside of the lavatory door).
29
b. Slide the sliding leverto the other side until the indicator
2:
41
shows "OCCUPIED".
2
20
2. Inform the rest of the crew and make an entry into the cabin
4/
logbook.
0
END END
9/
-2
9-
HOW TO RECOVER THE WATER FLOW FROM
y2
AN ELECTRICAL OR INFRARED WATER FAUCET
àM
Applicable to: ALL
Tr
There is no water flow from the faucet

ạm
Ph
YES NO
9
:2
12
1. Does water flow when the faucet is operated? Go to 2. END

4
02
/2
2. If there is no water flow, reset the control module assembly:

04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-10 P 3/8

à
Tr
CCOM ← A to B → 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
2. At the THERMOSTAT UNIT CONTROL DEVICE set the ON /

9
:2
OFF sw to the OFF position.

4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
3. Wait 5 s.
/2
4. Then set the ON / OFF sw back to the ON position.

04
9/
5. Close the washstand access door.

-2
6. Operate the water faucet.

END Go to 3.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-10 P 4/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←B→ 11 JAN 22

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
Does water flow when the faucet is operated?
3. The faucet is inoperative.
29
1. Consider to lock the lavatory door until the end of the flight:
2:
41
2
20
4/
b. Slide the sliding lever to the other side until the indicator
0
9/
shows "OCCUPIED".
-2
9-
logbook.
y2
END END
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-10 P 5/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
HOW TO SHUT OFF THE WATER IN A LAVATORY

Applicable to: ALL
Example of a Washstand and Water Shut-Off Valve
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
If the water flow cannot be stopped:

:
12
4
02
/2
YES NO
04
9/
-2
1. To shut off the water, follow the steps below:

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-10 P 6/8

à
Tr
CCOM C→ 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
2. Turn the lever of the WATER SHUT-OFF VALVE to the closed
position.
29
3. Switch OFF the water heater.
2:
41
CAUTION The water heater must be OFF when the
2
WATER SHUT-OFF VALVE is closed.
20
4/
0
4. Close the washstand door.
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
b. Slide the siding lever to the other side until the indicator
Tr
shows "OCCUPIED".
ạm
Ph
logbook.
END END
9
:2
12
HOW TO REDUCE EXCESSIVE NOISE FROM AN OPEN TOILET GATE VALVE

4
02
Applicable to: ALL

/2
Excessive noise level due to permanent suction in the toilet

04
9/
-2
YES NO
9-
y2
àM
1. Is there excessive noise in the lavatory? Go to 2. END

Tr
ạm
2. To reduce the noise:

Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-10 P 7/8

à
Tr
CCOM ← C to D → 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
1. Throw a blanket or a cushion into the toilet bowl.
29
2:
b. Slide the sliding lever to the other side until the indicator
41
shows "OCCUPIED".
2
20
04/
logbook.
9/
END END
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-10 P 8/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←D 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
- DEACTIVATION OF LAVATORY FUNCTIONS
HOW DEACTIVATE A LAVATORY

Applicable to: ALL
Some failures can't be recovered. For messages that are displayed on the FAP: Refer to 06-060-50
FAP - Messages.
In that case a lavatory has to be deactivated.
29
2:
In order to deactivate a lavatory, follow the steps below:
41
1. Lift the spring-loaded coverplate and hold it up.
2
20
2. Move the sliding lever to the locked (red) position.
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
- DEACTIVATION OF LAVATORY FUNCTIONS
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
A321 FUNCTION RECOVERY PROCEDURES (FRP) -
ABNORMAL/EMERGENCY OPERATION OF THE LAVATORY DOORS
HOW TO OPEN A SINGLE-BLADE DOOR FROM THE OUTSIDE WHEN LOCKED

Applicable to: ALL
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
A single-blade lavatory door is closed, locked and the lock may be jammed.
04
9/
-2
9-
YES NO
y2
àM
1. The flag on the lavatory door is red:

Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-30 P 1/12

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
1. Pull up the coverplate above the flag and hold it.
2. Move the sliding lever until the flag is entirely green.
Is it possible to open the lavatory door?
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
END Go to 2.
9-
y2
àM
2. Unlock the lock release mechanism:

Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-30 P 2/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
1. Insert a coin in the slit of the release mechanism.
2. Turn the release mechanism by 90°.
Lock Release Mechanism
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
3. Pull at the handle.

y2
Go to 3. Go to 4.
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-30 P 3/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
Standard Handle
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
Is it possible to open the lavatory door?

-2
9-
3. Together with a second crewmember (who will open the lavatory

y2
door from the outside, if necessary), check if the latch still jams
àM
when operated:
Tr
1. Go inside the lavatory.

ạm
Ph
2. Close the door.

3. Move the sliding lever entirely towards the red (OCCUPIED)
symbol.
:29
4. Move the sliding lever entirely towards the green (VACANT)

12
symbol.
4
02
/2
Is it possible to open the lavatory door? END Go to 5.

04
9/
4. Open the lavatory door with force.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-30 P 4/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
1. Strongly pull at the handle until the door opens.
Note: Now the folding catch is inoperative.
29
2. Close and lock the lavatory. The flag on the lavatory door must
2:
show red.
41
3. Placard the door ("Out of Order").
2
20
4. Make an entry into the cabin logbook.
4/
END END
0
9/
-2
5. The lavatory door latch is inoperative.
9-
1. If necessary, open the door as described in step 2.
y2
2. Close and lock the lavatory. The flag on the lavatory door must
àM
show red.
Tr

ạm

END END
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-30 P 5/12

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
HOW TO OPEN A BI-FOLDING DOOR FROM THE OUTSIDE WHEN LOCKED

Applicable to: ALL
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
A bi-folding lavatory door is closed, locked and the lock may be jammed.
04
9/
-2
9-
YES NO
y2
àM
1. The flag on the lavatory door is red:

Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-30 P 6/12

à
Tr
CCOM B→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
1. Pull up the coverplate above the flag and hold it.

9/
2. Move the sliding lever until the flag is entirely green.

-2
3. Push at the door.

9-
Is it possible to open the lavatory door? END Go to 2.

y2
àM
2. This procedure should be performed by two cabin crewmembers:

Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-30 P 7/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
Remove the bi-folding lavatory door:
1. To disengage the upper latch:
1. Turn the latch by approximately 90 °.
29
2. Slide down the latch entirely.
2:
41
2
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
2. If installed, disconnect the doorstop from the lavatory wall. Go to 3. Go to 3.

ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-30 P 8/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
3. To disengage the lower latch:

04
9/

-2
2. Slide up the latch entirely.

9-

y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-30 P 9/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
4. To disengage the second upper latch:

04
9/

-2
2. Slide down the latch entirely.

9-

y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-30 P 10/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
5. Remove the bi-folding lavatory door:

04
9/
1. Fold the bi-folding door.

-2
2. Pull the entire door toward the cabin, the bottom part of the
9-
door first.
y2
3. Remove the door and secure it.

àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-30 P 11/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
LAVATORIES
YES NO
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
3. Close the lavatory:

-2
1. Install the lavatory door lock all locks.

9-

y2

àM
END END
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-080-40-30 P 12/12

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
OTHER CABIN AREAS/ADDITIONAL CABIN EQUIPMENT
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT

Applicable to: ALL
Typically, there are the following types of additional equipment:

‐ Fixed equipment, usually already installed at aircraft delivery (hand-over to the airline)
‐ Loose equipment, already on board at aircraft delivery
29
‐ Loose equipment, brought on board after aircraft delivery.
2:
41
For further information about specific equipment, refer to the corresponding User Manual, issued by
2
20
the equipment's manufacturer.
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-100-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-100-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CAPABILITY FOR STRETCHER LOADING
LAVATORY WITH A CAPABILITY FOR STRETCHER LOADING

Applicable to: ALL
An optional folding wall increases the room for stretcher loading on the aircraft.
Typically, a folding wall is located at the aft lavatory (lavatory D or Ds, depending on the cabin
layout).
29
For information about the cabin layout: Refer to chapter 03-010: "Deck Configuration".
2:
41
The folding wall can be installed in lavatories with a single-blade door and with a bi-folding door.
2
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
Note: If a CAS is installed on the outside wall of the lavatory, it is necessary to remove the
àM
headrest. Refer to 03-050-30-20 Removable Headrest of a CAS for Stretcher Loading.

Tr
ạm
Depending on the type of lavatory, there are two types of latching for the folding wall:
Ph
‐ D-Ring Latch (Ds lavatory)

‐ 1/4-Turn Retainer (D lavatory).
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-100-20 P 1/10

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
HOW TO OPEN/CLOSE THE FOLDING WALL (DS LAVATORY)
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
HOW TO OPEN THE FOLDING WALL WITH A D-RING LATCH

ạm
1. Fully open the lavatory door.

Ph
Note: For lavatories with a bi-folding door, the door must be removed. Refer to
29
03-080-40-30 How to Open and Remove a Bi-folding Door from the Outside when
:
12
Locked.
4
02
2. Inside the lavatory:

/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-100-20 P 2/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
1. Use a coin (or a similar tool) to turn the D-Ring latch lock counterclockwise (1/4 turn).
(STEP 1).
2. Turn the D-Ring latch counterclockwise until the folding wall is released from the lavatory
wall. (STEP 2)
3. Pull the folding wall toward the inside lavatory wall.
29
CAUTION Do not force the folding wall if there is a resistance.
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
HOW TO CLOSE THE FOLDING WALL (DS LAVATORY)

9/
-2
1. Push the folding wall back into its closed position.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-100-20 P 3/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
Note: Make sure that the folding wall aligns with the lavatory wall.
1. Turn the D-Ring latch clockwise until it is in the locked position. (STEP 1)
2. Turn the D-Ring latch lock clockwise. (STEP 2)
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
3. Close the lavatory door.

4
02
Note: For lavatories with a bi-folding door, the door must installed again.
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-100-20 P 4/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
HOW TO OPEN/CLOSE THE FOLDING WALL (D LAVATORY)
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
HOW TO OPEN THE FOLDING WALL

ạm
1. Fully open the lavatory door.

Ph
Note: For lavatories with a bi-folding door, the door must be removed. Refer to
29
03-080-40-30 How to Open and Remove a Bi-folding Door from the Outside when
:
12
Locked.
4
02

/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-100-20 P 5/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
Sliding Latch
1. Turn the sliding latch clockwise (1/4 turn). (STEP 1).
2. Move the sliding latch down. (STEP 2)
3. When the bolt is released from the lavatory wall, turn the sliding latch counterclockwise (1/4
turn). The sliding latch is released and secured. (STEP 3).
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
1/4-Turn Retainer
02
/2
1. Turn the 1/4-turn retainer clockwise to unlock and release the folding wall. (STEP 4).
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-100-20 P 6/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
CAUTION If the folding wall is not released immediately, try different handle
positions.
Do not apply force.
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
3. Pull the folding wall toward the inside lavatory wall.

:
12
CAUTION Do not force the folding wall if there is a resistance.

4
02
/2
HOW TO CLOSE THE FOLDING WALL (D LAVATORY)

04
9/
1. Push the folding wall back into its closed position.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-100-20 P 7/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
Note: Make sure that the folding wall aligns with the lavatory wall.
1/4-Turn Retainer
1. Turn the 1/4-turn retainer counterclockwise. (STEP 1)
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
Sliding Latch
4
02
1. Turn the sliding latch with a counterclockwise (1/4 turn). (STEP 2).
/2
04
2. Move the sliding latch up. (STEP 3)

9/
3. Turn the sliding latch clockwise (1/4 turn). The sliding latch is locked and the folding door
-2
secured. (STEP 4).

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-100-20 P 8/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
3. Close the lavatory door.

Tr
ạm
Note: For lavatories with a bi-folding door, the door must installed again.
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-100-20 P 9/10

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
CABIN LAYOUT
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 03-100-20 P 10/10

à
Tr
CCOM 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
CABIN
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
DATA SYSTEM (CIDS)

INTERCOMMUNICATION
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
CABIN INTERCOMMUNICATION DATA SYSTEM (CIDS)
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
04-010 CIDS INTRODUCTION

Introduction of the CIDS..........................................................................................................................................A
Components of the CIDS in the Cabin................................................................................................................... B
04-020 CIDS COMPONENTS
29
04-020-10 Control Panels
2:
41
04-020-10-A Flight Attendant Panel (FAP)
2
20
Description of the Flight Attendant Panel............................................................................................................... A
4/
Customized FAP Layout..........................................................................................................................................B
0
9/
Location of the FAP................................................................................................................................................ C
-2
Description of the FAP Screen Layout................................................................................................................... D
9-
04-020-10-B Additional Attendant Panel (AAP)
y2
General Information about AAPs.............................................................................................................................A
àM
Location of the AAP(s) in the Cabin....................................................................................................................... B
Tr
Description of the Additional Attendant Panel........................................................................................................ C

ạm
Additional Attendant Panel...................................................................................................................................... D

Ph
04-020-20 Indication Panels

04-020-20-A Attendant Indication Panel (AIP)
9
:2
Attendant Indication Panel (AIP)............................................................................................................................. A

4 12
04-020-20-B Area Call Panel (ACP)

02
/2
Area Call Panel (ACP)............................................................................................................................................ A

04
Location of the ACPs.............................................................................................................................................. B

9/
-2
04-020-20-C Passenger Service Unit (PSU)

The Passenger Service Unit (PSU)........................................................................................................................ A
9-
y2
Loudspeakers...........................................................................................................................................................B
àM
04-020-20-D Passenger Signs

Tr
Passenger Signs......................................................................................................................................................A
ạm
Ph
04-025 VISUAL AND AURAL ALERTS

Visual and Aural Indications....................................................................................................................................A
:29
04-030 CABIN SETTINGS ON THE FAP

12
04-030-10 CIDS Configuration

4
02
CIDS Configuration.................................................................................................................................................. A
/2
04
04-030-20 Cabin Programming

9/
-2
Cabin Programming................................................................................................................................................. A
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

04-030-30 Layout Selection
Layout Selection...................................................................................................................................................... A
04-030-40 Level Adjustment

Level Adjustment..................................................................................................................................................... A
29
2:
04-030-60 Software Loading
41
Software Loading..................................................................................................................................................... A
2
20
4/
04-030-70 FAP Set-Up
0
9/
FAP Set-up.............................................................................................................................................................. A
-2
CIDS System Power-up...........................................................................................................................................B
9-
04-030-80 Lights Preset
y2
Lights Preset............................................................................................................................................................ A
àM
04-030-90 Lights Programming
Tr
ạm
Lights Programming.................................................................................................................................................A
Ph
04-040 FUNCTION RECOVERY PROCEDURES (FRP)

CIDS Reset after Cabin System Failure(s) with PAX on Board (in Flight/on Ground)............................................ A
9
:2
CIDS Reset after Cabin System Failure(s) with no PAX on Board (on Ground).................................................... B
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
CIDS INTRODUCTION
A321
INTRODUCTION OF THE CIDS

Applicable to: ALL
The Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS) enables all of the following:
‐ The control and monitoring of the cabin systems
29
‐ An interface between aircraft and cabin systems
2:
‐ Communication between all of the following:
41
2
‐ Cabin crew
20
‐ Flight crew
4/
0
‐ Maintenance
9/
-2
‐ Passengers.
9-
The CIDS detects and indicates failures and events (e.g. smoke).
y2
L2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
L1 All of the following components are connected to the CIDS:

4
02
‐ Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) (Refer to Description of the Flight Attendant Panel)
/2
04
‐ Additional Attendant Panels (AAPs) (Refer to General Information about the Additional Attendant
9/
Panels)
-2
‐ Cabin handsets (Refer to Description of the Handset)

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-010 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CIDS INTRODUCTION
A321
‐ Attendant Indication Panels (AIPs) (Refer to Description of the Attendant Indication Panel)
‐ Area Call Panels (ACPs) (Refer to Description of the Area Call Panel)
‐ Passenger Service Units (PSUs) (Refer to Description of the Passenger Service Unit)
‐ Smoke detectors (Refer to General Information about the Smoke Detection System).
COMPONENTS OF THE CIDS IN THE CABIN
29
2:
41
Applicable to: ALL
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-010 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ← A to B 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CONTROL PANELS - FLIGHT ATTENDANT PANEL (FAP)
DESCRIPTION OF THE FLIGHT ATTENDANT PANEL

Criteria: SA
29
2:
41
In the cabin, the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) is the main control panel for the CIDS.
2
20
Generally, It is located at the FWD attendant station FWD L.
4/
0
The FAP has the following:
9/
-2
‐ A touch screen
‐ A sub panel
9-
y2
L2 The sub panel provides direct access to specific functions. It includes all of the following:
‐ An optional CIDS  key àM
Tr
‐ An optional MENU  key

ạm
‐ A row of keys and plugs (that can be customized).

Ph
The row is protected by a plastic cover, in order to avoid inadvertent use.

9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-10-A P 1/12

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
Example of a Flight Attendant Panel
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
FAP KEYS
Tr
L1
ạm
Availability
Ph
FAP Key Function

on the FAP
The CIDS key switches the FAP screen from the Application Menu to the CIDS
CIDS  option
29
pages.
:
12
The MENU key switches the FAP screen from the CIDS pages to the Application
MENU  option
4
Menu screen.
02
EMER standard The EMER key switches ON or OFF the Emergency Lighting System.
/2
04
The PED POWER key switches ON or OFF the In-Seat Power Supply System
9/
PED POWER  option (ISPSS). The default is ON. For details: Refer to 08-080 In-Seat Power Supply
-2
System (ISPSS).
-

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-10-A P 2/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321

Availability
FAP Key Function
on the FAP
The LIGHTS MAIN OFF key switches ON or OFF the Cabin Lighting System (on
LIGHTS MAIN OFF standard
ground only).
The LAV MAINT key sets the lavatory lights to full brightness. It is an ON/OFF key
29
LAV MAINT standard
which turns the lavatory lights to 100 % brightness.
2:
SCREEN 30 sec The SCREEN 30 sec LOCK key sets the touch screen to sleep mode for 30 s for
41
standard
LOCK cleaning.
2
20
EVAC CMD  option
4/
Refer to 10-010 EVAC Signalling
EVAC RESET 
0
option
9/
The SMOKE RESET  key resets smoke alerts in the cabin.
-2
standard,
SMOKE RESET 
choice depends The SMOKE  indicator light indicates smoke alerts in the cabin.
9-
or
on the CAM For details: Refer to 06-070-10 General Information about the Smoke Detection
SMOKE 
y2
customization Function.
FAP-PC (or FAP)
àM
option The FAP-PC (or FAP) RESET key resets the PC inside the FAP.
Tr
RESET 
ạm
DECMP CHIME The DCMP CHIME RESET key resets the decompression chime alert in the
option
Ph
RESET  cabin.
The PAX SYS pb-sw shuts down the power to the passenger cabin systems (IFE,
seats, and optional systems (e.g. connectivity)).
9
:2
12
Note: ‐ An additional PAX SYS pb-sw can be installed in the cockpit and/or
4
the IFE control center.

02
PAX SYS  option ‐ Any PAX SYS pb-sw in the OFF position will shut down the power
/2
to the passenger cabin systems.

04
9/
CAUTION Regular use of the PAX SYS pb-sw may result in damage to
-2
the cabin systems.

9-
y2
MEMORY CARD READERS BEHIND THE FAP COVER

àM
Behind the FAP cover, there are three memory card readers. These readers can host software.
Tr
ạm
THE CABIN ASSIGNMENT MODULE (CAM)

Ph
L2 The Cabin Assignment Module (CAM) has the following functions:

‐ Customizes the FAP.
:29
‐ Stores the CIDS configuration data (e.g. cabin zoning, seat in relationship to loudspeakers,
12
passenger lighted signs, chime sequences, audio levels).

4
02
‐ Contains the configuration for all CIDS applications.

/2
04
L1 THE ONBOARD REPLACEMENT MODULE (OBRM)

9/
-2
L2 The Onboard Replaceable Module (OBRM) is the storage device for the system software (e.g.
-
for the Director S/W, for the FAP S/W).

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-10-A P 3/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
L1 THE INTEGRATED PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT & BOARDING MUSIC (IPRAM)

L2 The Integrated Prerecorded Announcement & Boarding Music (IPRAM) is an SD-card that
contains messages/announcements and audio data for boarding music.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
In the cabin, the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) is the main control panel for the CIDS.
-2
Generally, It is located at the FWD attendant station FWD L.
9-
The FAP has the following:
y2
‐ A touch screen àM
‐ A sub panel
Tr
ạm
L2 The sub panel provides direct access to specific functions. It includes all of the following:
Ph
‐ An optional CIDS  key

‐ An optional MENU  key
9
‐ A row of keys and plugs (that can be customized).

:2
12
The row is protected by a plastic cover, in order to avoid inadvertent use.

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-10-A P 4/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
Example of a Flight Attendant Panel
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
FAP KEYS
Tr
L1
ạm
Availability
Ph
FAP Key Function

on the FAP
The CIDS key switches the FAP screen from the Application Menu to the CIDS
CIDS  option
29
pages.
:
12
The MENU key switches the FAP screen from the CIDS pages to the Application
MENU  option
4
Menu screen.
02
EMER standard The EMER key switches ON or OFF the Emergency Lighting System.
/2
04
The PED POWER key switches ON or OFF the In-Seat Power Supply System
9/
PED POWER  option (ISPSS). The default is ON. For details: Refer to 08-080 In-Seat Power Supply
-2
System (ISPSS).
-

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-10-A P 5/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321

Availability
FAP Key Function
on the FAP
The LIGHTS MAIN OFF key switches ON or OFF the Cabin Lighting System (on
LIGHTS MAIN OFF standard
ground only).
The LAV MAINT key sets the lavatory lights to full brightness. It is an ON/OFF key
29
LAV MAINT standard
which turns the lavatory lights to 100 % brightness.
2:
SCREEN 30 sec The SCREEN 30 sec LOCK key sets the touch screen to sleep mode for 30 s for
41
standard
LOCK cleaning.
2
20
EVAC CMD  option
4/
EVAC RESET 
0
option
9/
The SMOKE RESET  key resets smoke alerts in the cabin.
-2
standard,
SMOKE RESET 
choice depends The SMOKE  indicator light indicates smoke alerts in the cabin.
9-
or
on the CAM For details: Refer to 06-070-10 General Information about the Smoke Detection
SMOKE 
y2
customization Function.
FAP-PC (or FAP)
àM
option The FAP-PC (or FAP) RESET key resets the PC inside the FAP.
Tr
RESET 
ạm
DECMP CHIME The DCMP CHIME RESET key resets the decompression chime alert in the
option
Ph
RESET  cabin.
The PAX SYS pb-sw shuts down the power to the passenger cabin systems (IFE,
seats, and optional systems (e.g. connectivity)).
9
:2
12
Note: ‐ An additional PAX SYS pb-sw can be installed in the cockpit and/or
4
the IFE control center.

02
PAX SYS  option ‐ Any PAX SYS pb-sw in the OFF position will shut down the power
/2
to the passenger cabin systems.

04
9/
CAUTION Regular use of the PAX SYS pb-sw may result in damage to
-2
the cabin systems.

9-
y2
MEMORY CARD READERS BEHIND THE FAP COVER

àM
Behind the FAP cover, there are three memory card readers. These readers can host software.
Tr
ạm
THE CABIN ASSIGNMENT MODULE (CAM)

Ph
L2 The Cabin Assignment Module (CAM) has the following functions:

‐ Customizes the FAP.
:29
‐ Stores the CIDS configuration data (e.g. cabin zoning, seat in relationship to loudspeakers,
12
passenger lighted signs, chime sequences, audio levels).

4
02
‐ Contains the configuration for all CIDS applications.

/2
04
L1 THE ONBOARD REPLACEMENT MODULE (OBRM)

9/
-2
L2 The Onboard Replaceable Module (OBRM) is the storage device for the system software (e.g.
-
for the Director S/W, for the FAP S/W).

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-10-A P 6/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
L1 THE INTEGRATED PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT & BOARDING MUSIC (IPRAM)

L2 The Integrated Prerecorded Announcement & Boarding Music (IPRAM) is an SD-card that
contains messages/announcements and audio data for boarding music.
CUSTOMIZED FAP LAYOUT
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-10-A P 7/12

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
CUSTOMIZED FAP LAYOUT

VN-A367
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-10-A P 8/12

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
LOCATION OF THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
LOCATION OF THE FAP
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
Note: In general, there is one FAP in the cabin. Its location is at Door 1L.
9
DESCRIPTION OF THE FAP SCREEN LAYOUT

:2
12
Applicable to: ALL

4
02
DESCRIPTION OF THE FAP SCREEN LAYOUT

/2
04
The FAP screen has all of the following areas:

9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-10-A P 9/12

à
Tr
CCOM C to D → 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
Navigation Areas in the CIDS Mode
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
LEFT AND RIGHT ARROWS

Tr
ạm
The area of Page Selection Buttons can contain up to 9 system page applications visible at any
Ph
time. They can be selected by touching the application buttons.

When the cabin crew presses the black RIGHT or LEFT arrow, another set of function selection
29
buttons appears.
:
12
4
02
/2
When the RIGHT or LEFT arrow button appears in gray instead of black, there are no more
04
function selection buttons to be displayed to the right or to the left of the present position.
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-10-A P 10/12

à
Tr
CCOM ←D→ 12 APR 22

ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
Example of Page Selection Buttons
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
The row of page selection buttons for CIDS configuration (Cabin Programming, Layout Selection,
Lights Programming, etc.) is for maintenance purposes. The respective pages require a password
9-
y2
to access them. Other application pages can be available, depending on the CAM programming.
àM
BUTTON STATUSES ON THE FAP SCREEN
Tr
ạm
Enabled Button, black Active Button, green Disabled Button

Ph
9
:2
12
The button can be pressed to The function or page related The button is disabled (the application
4
select a page or a function. to the button is active. is deactivated and cannot be activated).
02
/2
INFORMATION, CAUTIONS, AND ALERTS

04
9/
-2
Information Information that indicates normal handling processes in the

9-
/ Message system.
y2
àM
The CAUTION window displays caution messages on the

Tr
associated system pages.

ạm
Caution
Ph
Note: The CAUTION button is in the upper left corner of

the touch screen. In the case of a caution message,
the CAUTION button flashes amber.
:29
412
02
The Smoke page displays information on the status of the

Smoke
/2
smoke sensors (Refer to 06-070-10 General Information about

Alert
04
the Smoke Detection Function).

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-10-A P 11/12

à
Tr
CCOM ←D→ 12 APR 22

ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
PASSWORD PROTECTION
Some pages require passwords to access them to prevent from not authorized use of the screen.
As an option, a password can be used in order to reactivate the screen. In order to reactivate the
touch screen, touch it.
In the case of a SMOKE event, the screen will automatically come on, without the need to enter a
29
password.
2:
41
SCREEN SAVER FUNCTION
2
20
The SCREEN OFF button is in the top left corner of the touch screen. To switch off the screen,
4/
touch the SCREEN OFF button. If there are no inputs for a defined period of time, the screen
0
9/
automatically switches off. In this case, an optional screen saver or a black screen will appear.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-10-A P 12/12

à
Tr
CCOM ←D 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CONTROL PANELS - ADDITIONAL ATTENDANT PANEL (AAP)
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT AAPS

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crewmembers can control different functions when they push the associated buttons on
the Additional Attendant Panel (AAP). This is in addition to the FAP.
Refer to General Description of the Additional Attendant Panel
29
The following list shows some examples of functions that may be available on the AAP. According to
2:
41
the CAM programing, there may be variation to this following list:
2
20
‐ Light Control
4/
‐ Temperature Control 
0
9/
‐ Call Reset
-2
‐ Lavatory Smoke Warning
9-
‐ Evacuation (CMD) and Evacuation Reset (EVAC).
y2
Note: àM
‐ Depending on the customer definition, the cabin crew can control the cabin systems
(Lights, Temperature, etc.) in different cabin entries, zones (classes, galleys, or other
Tr
ạm
cabin units).
Ph
‐ Depending on the customer definition, the keys of the AAPs are customized. Therefore,
the availability of cabin systems and the denominations for several cabin zones can
vary (e.g. the Business Class can be called BC, B/C, J/C, PZ, ZONE 1, ZONE A, FWD
9
:2
CABIN, etc.).
4 12
02
LOCATION OF THE AAP(S) IN THE CABIN

/2
04
Applicable to: ALL

9/
-2
LOCATION OF THE AAP(S) IN THE CABIN (EXAMPLE)

9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-10-B P 1/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
Note: In general, there is one AAP in the cabin. Its location is usually at Door 4L. As an option,
there can be installed an AAP at the Emergency Exit Area  .
DESCRIPTION OF THE ADDITIONAL ATTENDANT PANEL

Criteria: SA
29
2:
41
The following illustration shows an example of the layout of the AAP:
2
20
4/
Example of an Additional Attendant Panel (AAP)
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
Depending on aircraft configuration and cabin functions, all of the following buttons may be installed
4
02
on the AAP:
/2
04
Function Examples of Buttons

9/
-2
Illumination
Activation of the illumination of cabin classes
9-
or zones (availability depends on the aircraft

y2
configuration) (e.g. CABIN, ENTRY or DOOR, AFT,

àM
B/C, Y/C, E/C, etc.)

Tr
Note: Depending on the aircraft configuration,

ạm
several gradations of illumination may be

Ph
controlled via the AAP (BRT: 100%, DIM

1: 50%, DIM 2: 10%, NIGHT or OFF:
0%, or + and -).
29
:
12
Note: All illumination related LEDs are green.

4
02

/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-10-B P 2/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
Activation of the
Illumination main cabin lighting
29
(available on ground
2:
only) (MAIN ON/OFF)
41
2
Note: The LED
20
is green.
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
Communication in the Cabin
y2
Reset of passenger
àM
calls (CALL RESET)
Tr
ạm
Ph
Reset of the Reset of the

evacuation signaling evacuation signaling
9
:2
(EVAC RESET) (RESET)

4 12
02
/2
Emergency / Evacuation
04
9/
Indication of the Activation of the

-2
evacuation signaling evacuation signaling

(EVAC) from the aft door area
9-
(CMD) (button may

y2
Note: The LEDs

be guarded)
àM
are red.
Note: The LED
Tr
is green.
ạm
Ph
: 29
Indication and Indication and reset

12
Emergency / Smoke reset of a lavatory of a lavatory smoke

4
02
smoke alert (SMOKE alert (SMOKE)

/2
RESET)
04
Note: The LED

9/
Note: The LED is red.

-2
is red.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-10-B P 3/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
Note: The control functions of the AAP are described in the chapters CABIN SYSTEMS and
EVACUATION.
ADDITIONAL ATTENDANT PANEL

Criteria: K14724, K15681, K19514, SA
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
The following cabin systems can be controlled from this AAP:

:2
12
‐ The illumination of the AFT entrance area (ENTRY BRT, ENTRY DIM 1, ENTRY DIM 2)
4
‐ The illumination of the AFT passenger zone (AFT BRT, AFT DIM 1, AFT DIM 2)
02
‐ The reset of the evacuation signaling chime (EVAC RESET)

/2
04
‐ The indication of the evacuation signaling (EVAC)

9/
‐ The indication of the lavatory smoke alert and the reset of the respective signaling chime (SMOKE
-2
RESET).
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-10-B P 4/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
ADDITIONAL ATTENDANT PANEL

VN-A367
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
The following cabin systems can be controlled from this AAP:
ạm
‐ The illumination of the aft entrance area (ENTRY BRT, ENTRY DIM 1, ENTRY DIM 2)
Ph
‐ The illumination of the passenger zone (AFT BRT, AFT DIM 1, AFT DIM 2)
‐ The reset of the evacuation signaling chime (EVAC RESET)
9
‐ The indication of the evacuation signaling (EVAC)

:2
12
‐ The reset of the smoke signaling (SMOKE RESET).

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-10-B P 5/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←D 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-10-B P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL INDICATION PANELS - ATTENDANT INDICATION PANEL (AIP)
ATTENDANT INDICATION PANEL (AIP)

Applicable to: ALL
DESCRIPTION OF THE ATTENDANT INDICATION PANEL (AIP)

The Attendant Indication Panels (AIPs) are LCD screens that display messages associated with all
29
of the following:
2:
41
‐ Passenger Call
2
‐ Evacuation Signaling
20
‐ Smoke Detection
4/
0
‐ Passenger Address
9/
-2
‐ Prerecorded Announcements
‐ Interphone
9-
y2
‐ Water/Waste
‐ ECAS  . àM
Tr
The AIPs consist of a two-row alphanumerical display and two indicator lights.
ạm
The upper row displays communication information (e.g. interphone calls) and the lower displays
Ph
system and emergency information (e.g. direct announcements). Each one has a length of 16
characters.
9
The two indicator lights (red/green) serve as attention getters. The red light is used for system and
:2
12
emergency information, the green light for communication information.

4
02
Attendant Indication Panel

/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
The AIPs are located near all cabin crew stations, and in the galleys.
:
412
PASSENGER ADDRESS AND INTERPHONE INDICATIONS

02
/2
During the dial procedure, the dial information is displayed in the upper row of the respective
04
Attendant Indication Panel (AIP).

9/
-2
Example: Perform the PA ALL function using the dual dial handset
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-20-A P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL INDICATION PANELS - ATTENDANT INDICATION PANEL (AIP)
Step Action (on the handset) Result on the calling AIP (upper Result on all the other AIPs
row) (lower row)
1 Hook off the handset # (flashing) (no result)
2 Press the PA key # # (flashing) (no result)
3 Press the ALL key PA ALL (no result)
4 Press PTT and start the > PA ALL PA ALL IN USE
29
announcement
2:
41
Additionally, the following handset operation related messages could appear in the upper row of
2
the calling AIP while the dialing procedure:
20
4/
Information Explanation
0
9/
BUSY Called station is engaged
-2
CNCL Communication is interrupted by a call with a higher priority
9-
OVER Station is connected to a call with a higher priority
y2
ERR A wrong code has been dialed
RST Reset push button is pressed àM
Tr
WAIT PA CALL Passenger Address system is already in use
ạm
If the dial procedure is finished the respective status information is indicated on all assigned AIPs.
Ph
To raise the attention for communication information, a chime is heard and the green AIP indicator
light comes on additionally. This light is located on the right side of the AIP.
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-20-A P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL INDICATION PANELS - AREA CALL PANEL (ACP)
AREA CALL PANEL (ACP)

Applicable to: ALL
The ACPs provide a visual indication associated with system information (e.g. Lavatory Smoke
Location, PAX Calls, interphone calls).
The ACPs can have four colored LED fields.
29
2:
Standard ACP (Amber/Red/Blue)
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
Optional ACP (Amber/Green/Red/Blue)

9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Note: The different indications (BLUE, AMBER, RED) are only visible when they are active.
Ph
Note: The "red" light may appear as "pink" when it is illuminated.

29
The following table shows the types of information visible on the ACP.
:
12
System Information Color on ACP Light Modus

4
02
PAX Call Blue Steady

/2
PAX Call (from Lavatory) Amber Steady

04
LAV Smoke Amber Flashing

9/
Attendant Call (from cabin) Green/Red Steady

-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-20-B P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL INDICATION PANELS - AREA CALL PANEL (ACP)

Attendant Call (from cockpit) Red Steady
EMER Exit Safe Guard Red Flashing
EMER Call from Cockpit Red Flashing
EVAC CMD  Red Steady
29
Note: If a PAX call was initiated from a lavatory, an additional amber light (similar to the ACP
2:
lights) comes on steady on the dedicated outside lavatory wall.
41
2
20
LOCATION OF THE ACPS
4/
0
Applicable to: ALL
9/
-2
LOCATIONS OF THE ACP(S) IN THE CABIN
9-
The location of the Area Call Panels (ACPs) is in the entrance areas and over the aisles. Some of
y2
the ACPs are included in the EXIT sign housing. àM
Example of the Locations of ACPs in the Cabin
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-20-B P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ← A to B 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL INDICATION PANELS - PASSENGER SERVICE UNIT (PSU)
THE PASSENGER SERVICE UNIT (PSU)

Applicable to: ALL
The Passenger Service Units (PSUs) are installed above the seat rows and have the following
CIDS-related components:
29
‐ Loudspeakers (Refer to Loudspeakers)
2:
‐ Passenger Signs (Refer to Passenger Signs)
41
‐ Passenger Call Pushbuttons (Refer to General Description of the Passenger Call System)
2
20
‐ Passenger Reading Lights (Refer to Description of the Passenger Reading Lights).
4/
0
Example of a PSU
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
LOUDSPEAKERS
/2
04
Applicable to: ALL

9/
LOUDSPEAKERS
-2
9-
Loudspeakers are located in all of the following areas:

y2
‐ In the Passenger Service Units (PSUs)

àM
‐ In the cabin crew stations

Tr
‐ In the galley ceilings

ạm
‐ In the lavatories.
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-20-C P 1/2

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL INDICATION PANELS - PASSENGER SERVICE UNIT (PSU)
Loudspeaker in a PSU
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-20-C P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL INDICATION PANELS - PASSENGER SIGNS
PASSENGER SIGNS
Applicable to: ALL
PASSENGER SIGNS
There are several signs in the cabin and in dedicated areas (e.g. in the lavatories).
29
The signs are controlled either by the flight crew or automatically in specific conditions (e.g.
2:
landing gear up/down).
41
2
THE PASSENGER SIGNS
20
4/
Passenger Signs can be installed on both of the following:
0
9/
-2
‐ The Passenger Service Unit (PSU) above passenger seats
‐ Door areas, and galleys (as standalone equipment).
9-
y2
The information on the Passenger Signs is customized and can contain the following signs:
àM
‐ Fasten Seat Belts (FSB)
Tr
‐ No Smoking (NS).
ạm
Ph
Examples of Passenger Signs

9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-20-D P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
Note: Depending on cabin requirements of the operators, other signs can be available in the
cabin (e.g. No PED (No Portable Electronic Devices), No Mobile signs).
THE LAVATORY OCCUPIED SIGNS
Function of the Lavatory Occupied Signs
29
The Lavatory Occupied Signs (LOSs) are located in the cabin and are either RED (Occupied)
2:
41
or GREEN (Vacant).
2
The LOS come ON in RED (occupied) if the lavatory door is locked.
20
4/
Note: When the lavatory door is locked, the LOS is RED. The lavatory door must be
0
9/
unlocked to switch the LOS to GREEN.
-2
Example of Lavatory Occupied Signs
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
THE EXIT SIGNS

-2
The EXIT signs indicate the exit locations of the aircraft.

9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
In the case of decompression, all Fasten Seat Belt (FSB), the No Smoking (NS), and the EXIT
9/
-2
signs automatically come ON.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-20-D P 2/4

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
Additionally, the EXIT signs come ON when the landing gear is down and locked. The EXIT
signs go OFF when the landing gear is retracted. (Refer to Exit Signs)
THE RETURN TO SEAT (RTS) SIGN
The Return to Seat sign is located in the lavatories and comes on during takeoff, landing, or
turbulence. The function of the RTS sign is linked to the FSB sign.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-20-D P 3/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CIDS COMPONENTS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-020-20-D P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
A321
VISUAL AND AURAL INDICATIONS

Applicable to: ALL
Each communication type and specific cabin event (e.g. decompression, evacuation command, etc.)
triggers visual and/or aural indications. The following table provides a summary of the different visual
29
and aural indications associated to each type of event.
2:
41
Aural Indication
Event Visual Indication on the ACP
2
(Chime or Announcement)
20
4/
PA Attention Chime (Hi1-Lo1) 
Passenger Address No
0
No sound available in the pdf format.
9/
-2
Emergency Call: Red Light, Flashing Emergency Call (Triple Hi1-Lo1)
Conference / Normal Call (Hi1-Lo1)
Conference Call, Normal Call: Red Light, Steady
9-
Cabin Interphone (Optional: Green Light, Steady) No sound available in the pdf format.
y2
Purser Calls (Hi2-Hi1-Lo1)
àM
Purser Call from Cockpit or Cabin: Red Light, Steady
Tr
Seat Row Call: Blue Light, Steady Passenger Calls (Hi1)

Passenger Calls
ạm
Lavatory Call: Amber Light, Steady No sound available in the pdf format.
Ph
Passenger Passenger Lighted Signs (Lo1)

No
Lighted Signs No sound available in the pdf format.
Smoke Alert
9
:2
Smoke Amber Light, Flashing (Triple Lo repeated every 30 sec)

12

4
02
Decompression Alert
/2
Decompression Alert No (Repetitive Hi Chime)

04

9/
Cabin Decompression Cabin Decompression Announcement

-2
No
Announcement No sound available in the pdf format.
9-
Evacuation EVAC Chime

Red Light, Steady (option)
y2
Command (EVAC) No sound available in the pdf format.

àM
Emergency Crew ECAS Chime

Red Light, Flashing
Alert (ECAS)  No sound available in the pdf format.
Tr
ạm
Wake Up Chime (4 times Lo2)

Wake Up  No
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-025 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-025 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN SETTINGS ON THE FAP
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CIDS CONFIGURATION
CIDS CONFIGURATION
Applicable to: ALL
The CIDS configuration is divided into several modules. The following FAP pages require a password
to access them.
29
Note: A password is not required to access the FAP internal settings on the FAP Set-up page.
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-030-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CIDS CONFIGURATION
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-030-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN PROGRAMMING
CABIN PROGRAMMING
Applicable to: ALL
The Cabin Programming function enables Operators to modify the predefined aircraft zones. This
function requires a password to access it. The maintenance crew can change the configuration of
these zones via the Cabin Programming pages on the FAP.
29
All of the following can be programmed:
2:
41
‐ Cabin Zones
2
20
‐ No Smoking Zones
4/
‐ Non Smoker Aircraft.
0
9/
-2
Example of a Cabin Programming Page (Access)
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-030-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN PROGRAMMING
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-030-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LAYOUT SELECTION
LAYOUT SELECTION
Applicable to: ALL
The Layout Selection function enables the Operators to select predefined aircraft layouts. The
maintenance crew can change the configuration of both of the following layouts:
‐ Cabin Zones
29
‐ Smoking Zones.
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-030-30 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LAYOUT SELECTION
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-030-30 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Applicable to: ALL
The Level Adjustment enables Operators to independently modify the volume of the
announcements/music and of the chimes in all defined cabin areas. This function requires a
password to access it.
29
2:
Example of a Level Adjustment Page on the FAP
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-030-40 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-030-40 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL SOFTWARE LOADING
SOFTWARE LOADING
Applicable to: ALL
The Software Loading function enables maintenance personnel to upload software of the CIDS
system. This function requires a password to access it. This page can be accessed on ground only.
Example of Software Download Page
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-030-60 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL SOFTWARE LOADING
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-030-60 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FAP SET-UP
FAP SET-UP
Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can change all of the following:

‐ The brightness of the FAP screen
29
‐ The volume of the built-in loudspeaker
2:
‐ The volume of the built-in headphone jack
41
‐ The touch screen click.
2
20
Example of an FAP Set-up Page
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
CIDS SYSTEM POWER-UP

4
02
Applicable to: ALL

/2
04
FAP POWER-UP PHASE

9/
-2
During the power-up phase of the CIDS, the FAP will display the CIDS system power-up page.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-030-70 P 1/2

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FAP SET-UP
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
FAP POWER-UP ERROR

9/
-2
If the system does not receive any data from the active CIDS director, the FAP will display a fault
page.
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-030-70 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LIGHTS PRESET
LIGHTS PRESET
Applicable to: ALL
The Lights Preset page on the FAP enables Operators to select preset lighting scenarios for an
entire flight. This function requires a password.
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-030-80 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LIGHTS PRESET
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-030-80 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LIGHTS PROGRAMMING
LIGHTS PROGRAMMING
Applicable to: ALL
The Lights Programming function enables Operators to program the cabin lighting. This function is
used on ground and is for maintenance use. This function requires a password.
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-030-90 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LIGHTS PROGRAMMING
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-030-90 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
FUNCTION RECOVERY PROCEDURES (FRP)
A321
CIDS RESET AFTER CABIN SYSTEM FAILURE(S)

WITH PAX ON BOARD (IN FLIGHT/ON GROUND)
Applicable to: ALL
A faulty cabin system may affect the operation of the cabin.
29
In this case, a CIDS reset may recover the faulty system or display.
2:
In order to recover the cabin system or display, the cabin crew should request the flight crew to perform
41
a CIDS reset, as described below.
2
20
A cabin system controlled and/or monitored by the FAP has failed.
4/
0
9/
-2
YES NO
9-
y2
1. Request the flight crew to perform a reset of the CIDS.
àM
1. After the Flight Crew confirms the CIDS reset, wait 1 min.
Tr
2. Randomly check the previously-failed system.

ạm
Ph
Does the system work again? Go to 2. Go to 3.

9
2. The CIDS is operative again.

:2
12
Enter the failure symptoms and the recovery process in the cabin
4
logbook. END END

02
/2
04
3. Inform the flight crew that the CIDS reset is not successful. The
9/
CIDS is inoperative, or partially inoperative.

-2
Report the failure to the flight crew and enter the failure in the cabin
9-
logbook. END END

y2
àM
CIDS RESET AFTER CABIN SYSTEM FAILURE(S) WITH NO PAX ON BOARD (ON GROUND)
Tr
ạm
Applicable to: ALL

Ph
A faulty cabin system may affect the operation of the cabin.

In this case, a CIDS reset may recover the faulty system or display.
29
In order to recover the cabin system or display, the cabin crew should request the flight crew to perform
:
12
a CIDS reset, as described below.

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-040 P 1/2

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
FUNCTION RECOVERY PROCEDURES (FRP)
A321
A cabin system controlled and/or monitored by the FAP has failed.
YES NO
1. Inform the flight crew that the CIDS, or a system controlled by the
29
CIDS, is inoperative. Request the flight crew to perform a reset of
2:
41
the CIDS.
2
20
1. When the Flight Crew has confirmed the reset, wait 6 min.
4/
2. Randomly check the system pages on the FAP (e.g. LIGHTS,
0
9/
CABIN TEMPERATURE, etc.)
-2
3. Establish an interphone and a PA communication link.
9-
y2
Are the system pages available and is the interphone and the PA
communication operative? àM Go to 2. Go to 3.
Tr
2. The system is operative again.

ạm
Enter the failure symptoms and the recovery process in the cabin
Ph
logbook. END END

9
:2
3. The system is still inoperative, or partially inoperative.

12
Report the failure to the flight crew and enter the failure in the cabin
4
02
logbook. END END

/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 04-040 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
COMMUNICATION
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
COMMUNICATION
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
05-010 GENERAL
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
05-015 HANDSET
Location of the Handsets........................................................................................................................................ A
29
Description of the Handset......................................................................................................................................B
2:
41
Operation of the Handset........................................................................................................................................C
Cockpit Handset...................................................................................................................................................... D
2
20
Cabin Handset......................................................................................................................................................... E
04/
9/
05-020 INTERPHONE
-2
05-020-10 Cabin Interphone
9-
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
y2
Description............................................................................................................................................................... B
àM
Operation: Interphone Calls from the Cabin........................................................................................................... C
Tr
Operation: Interphone Calls from the Cockpit.........................................................................................................D

ạm
05-020-20 Service Interphone

Ph
General ................................................................................................................................................................... A
Location of the Service Interphone Jacks...............................................................................................................B
9
:2
Operation................................................................................................................................................................. C
12
05-020-30 Function Recovery Procedure (FRP)

4
02
Cabin Interphone locked..........................................................................................................................................A

/2
04
9/
05-030 PASSENGER ADDRESS

-2
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
9-
Description............................................................................................................................................................... B
y2
Operation: Passenger Address from the Cabin...................................................................................................... C

àM
Operation from the Cockpit..................................................................................................................................... D

Tr
Operation: Volume Adjustment................................................................................................................................E

ạm
Passenger Address Locked.....................................................................................................................................F

Ph
05-040 PASSENGER CALL SYSTEM

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
:29
Operation by the Passengers..................................................................................................................................B

12
Operation by the Cabin Crew................................................................................................................................. C

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
GENERAL
A321
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
Main Communication Functions
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-010 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
GENERAL
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-010 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
HANDSET
A321
LOCATION OF THE HANDSETS

Applicable to: ALL
The handsets are used for many types of communication. They are installed in all of the following
locations:
29
‐ In the cockpit
2:
‐ At the cabin attendant stations.
41
2
20
DESCRIPTION OF THE HANDSET
4/
0
9/
Applicable to: ALL
-2
HANDSET DESCRIPTION
9-
A handset has all of the following:
y2
‐ A PRESS release button  àM
Tr
‐ A keyboard  with
ạm
‐ Up to 12 hardkeys  (e.g.:PA, INTPH, PURS, PRIO CAPT, EMER CALL, RESET, ...)
Ph
‐ Up to four numeric keys  (e.g.: 1/FWD, 2/MID, 3/EXIT, 4/AFT).

‐ A Push-to-Talk (PTT) key
9
:2
‐ A microphone
12
‐ An earphone.
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-015 P 1/10

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
HANDSET
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
Example of a Handset Keyboard

9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-015 P 2/10

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
HANDSET
A321
OPERATION OF THE HANDSET

Applicable to: ALL
HOW TO PICK UP THE HANDSET

To pick up the handset from its cradle either:
29
‐ Pick up the handset holding it from its sides, or
2:
41
‐ Press the PRESS button  and then remove the handset from its cradle.
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
HOW TO HOLD THE HANDSET

àM
Use the handset like a normal telephone to ensure an audible transmission.

Tr
Do not hold the handset upside-down during announcements, in order to prevent noise
ạm
interferences.
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-015 P 3/10

à
Tr
CCOM C→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
HANDSET
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
CAUTION Do not twist the cord, nor extend the cord more than two meters (6.5 ft).
9
:2
This may damage the cord and result in handset malfunction.

4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
HOW TO RETURN THE HANDSET IN THE CRADLE

4
02
To return the handset in the cradle, perform both of the following:

/2
04
‐ Put the lower part of the handset into the cradle

9/
‐ Push the upper part of the handset into the cradle until it clicks.
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-015 P 4/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
HANDSET
A321
CAUTION If the handset is not correctly returned, both of the following may occur:
‐ The communication may still be active.
‐ The handset may fall out of its cradle and may be damaged.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
Note: After communication, Airbus recommends that the user press the 'RESET' key before the
9/
-2
handset is returned to the cradle, to ensure that the call is ended.

9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-015 P 5/10

à
Tr
CCOM ←C 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
HANDSET
A321
COCKPIT HANDSET
Criteria: SA
Applicable to: VN-A350, VN-A351, VN-A352, VN-A353, VN-A354, VN-A356, VN-A357, VN-A358, VN-A359, VN-A361, VN-A362
Example of Cockpit Handset with PTT Pushbutton
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-015 P 6/10

à
Tr
CCOM D→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
HANDSET
A321
COCKPIT HANDSET
29
VN-A620, VN-A621, VN-A622, VN-A623, VN-A624, VN-A625
2:
Example of Cockpit Handset
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-015 P 7/10

à
Tr
CCOM ←D 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
HANDSET
A321
CABIN HANDSET
Criteria: SA
Example of a Cabin Handset
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-015 P 8/10

à
Tr
CCOM E→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
HANDSET
A321
CABIN HANDSET
Criteria: K14724, K15681, K19514, SA
Cabin Handset
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-015 P 9/10

à
Tr
CCOM ←E 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
HANDSET
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-015 P 10/10

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
INTERPHONE
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN INTERPHONE
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
The Cabin Interphone enables communications between the cabin attendant stations and the
cockpit.
29
Note: The Cabin Interphone may be customized per CAM programming, therefore not all
2:
functions may be available.
412
Each call is independent. Therefore, several calls can be simultaneously performed (e.g. a user can
20
make a call from Door 1 to Door 2 and another user can make a call from Door 3 to Door 4 at the
4/
0
same time, depending on cabin configuration).
9/
-2
A communication can be established between several stations (e.g. Conference Call or Emergency
Call).
9-
y2
Each communication is defined by a type and a priority.
àM
DESCRIPTION
Tr
ạm
Applicable to: ALL

Ph
PRIORITIES OF INTERPHONE CALLS

9
Interphone calls have different priorities that depend on the type of call, e.g. Emergency Call
:2
12
(EMER CALL), Priority Call (PRIO), or Conference Call (INTPH ALL or ALL ATT).
4
A call with more priority always interrupts a current call with less priority.
02
Use the handsets to perform interphone calls.

/2
04
The PRIO CAPT key on the handset  enables the increase of the priority of a call to the cockpit
9/
and overrides other calls.

-2
The Interphone priorities are all of the following:

9-
‐ Level 1 (highest priority): EMER CALL or PRIO CAPT calls

y2
àM
‐ Level 2: PRIO calls to Captain

‐ Level 3: INTPH ALL calls (Conference Calls)
Tr
‐ Level 4 (lowest priority): Normal calls to Captain, Purser, or any CAS.

ạm
Ph
In addition, the priority is linked to the source of the call. A call from the cockpit will interrupt a call
from the cabin.
29
FURTHER INFORMATION ABOUT HANDSETS

:
4 12
‐ Description of the handsets: Refer to Description of the handset

02
‐ Operation of the handsets: Refer to Operation of the handset.

/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-020-10 P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A to B 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
INTERPHONE
A321
OPERATION: INTERPHONE CALLS FROM THE CABIN

Applicable to: ALL
HOW TO INITIATE INTERPHONE CALLS

The following table shows the sequences of keys that must be pressed on the handset in order to
29
establish a call:
2:
41
Function Key Sequence Connection → To
2
EMER CALL to Cockpit (1) (8) EMER CALL Handset → Boomset in the cockpit
20
4/
Interphone Call to All Stations INTPH + ALL or
Handset → All handsets in the cabin (3)
0
All Attendant Call (2) ALL ATTND
9/
-2
Cockpit Call(8) CAPT Handset → Handset in the cockpit
Purser Call PURS Handset → Handset at the purser station
9-
INTPH + 1 (4)
y2
Forward Attendant Call Handset → Handsets at attendant stations 1L + 1R
FWD ATTND
INTPH + 2, or INTPH + 3,
àM
Middle Attendant Call (5) Handset → Handsets at attendant stations 2R or 3R
Tr
MID ATTND, or EXIT ATTND

ạm
Aft Attendant Call (6) INTPH + 4 or AFT ATTND Handset → Handsets at attendant stations 4L + 4R
Ph
Service Interphone Call SVCE INTPH (7) Handset → Service interphone jacks
(1) The EMER CALL call initiates an emergency call either from cabin to cockpit or cockpit to cabin.
9
:2
12
(2) The all attendant call includes all cabin stations.

4
02
(3) As an option, INTPH + ALL can be also connected to the cockpit handset.  .
/2
04
(4) The numeric keys 1 to 4 correspond to the cabin crew stations and the associated doors (e.g. 1
9/
corresponds to Door 1 LH/RH).

-2
(5) On A321 aircraft only.

9-
y2
(6) If a “Normal Call” is performed from the FWD station to the aft station, both AIPs in the aft door
àM
area will indicate the call.

Tr
However, if there are two handsets in the aft area, the interphone link can only be established to
ạm
one handset. So the handset that is picked up first, will establish the link. The interphone link for the
Ph
unhooked handset of the aft door area will be deactivated.

A conference call with all handsets can be performed via an ALL ATTND CALL.
29
(7) For more information about the Service Interphone: Refer to General Information about the Service
:
12
Interphone.
4
02
(8) The buzzer in the cockpit is inhibited during takeoff and landing.
/2
04
Note: The Cabin Interphone functions may be customized per CAM programming, therefore not
9/
-2
all functions may be available.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-020-10 P 2/4

à
Tr
CCOM C→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
INTERPHONE
A321
HOW TO RESPOND TO INTERPHONE CALLS

When the handset is in the cradle When the handset is NOT in the cradle
It will sound as engaged.
Note: ‐ The communication is established, ongoing
Pick up the handset to establish the communication.
calls are overridden.
29
‐ No action is required to answer an EMER call.
2:
41
INDICATIONS ON THE ATTENDANT INDICATION PANEL
2
20
During the dial procedure, the dial information is displayed on the respective Attendant Indication
4/
0
Panel (AIP) (Refer to Attendant Indication Panel).
9/
-2
If the dialing procedure is finished, the respective status information is indicated on all assigned
AIPs. To raise the attention for communication information, a (customizable) "HIGH" chime is
9-
y2
heard and the green AIP indicator light comes on additionally.
àM
HOW TO TRANSFER A PURSER CALL
Tr
A purser station call can be transferred to another station if the purser presses INTPH + PURS on
ạm
the keyboard of the related station handset.

Ph
HOW TO REJECT INTERPHONE CALLS

9
:2
On the handset press the RESET  key.

12
A selected call from the cockpit is cancelled, when all requested stations have reset the function
4
02
on the handset through pushing the Reset button.

/2
The call function is automatically reset after a time period of 5 min, if no requested handset
04
accepts the call.

9/
-2
Note: If a cabin crewmember resets a current EMER call, they must press the EMER key on
9-
the handset to enter again the call.

y2
àM
HOW TO END INTERPHONE CALLS

Tr
On the handset, press the RESET  key.

ạm
Note: For a Conference call, there are two methods to end a call:
Ph
‐ The cabin crew who accepted the conference call can press the RESET key, or
‐ The cabin crew who initiated the conference call resets the call via the RESET key on
: 29
their handset.
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-020-10 P 3/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←C 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
INTERPHONE
A321
OPERATION: INTERPHONE CALLS FROM THE COCKPIT

Applicable to: ALL
INTERPHONE CALLS FROM THE COCKPIT

The flight crew can use the cockpit handset or alternative equipment (the boomset, the cockpit
29
oxygen mask, or the hand mike) and panels (e.g. the CALLS panel) to communicate with the
2:
cabin.
41
L2 The CALLS Panel enables the flight crew to call a crew station. The communication is then
2
20
established via the Audio Control Panel.
4/
The voice transmission is then ensured in the cockpit by one of the following:
0
9/
-2
‐ A hand mike and cockpit loudspeakers, or
‐ A boomset, or
9-
y2
‐ The cockpit oxygen mask, to use in the case of a depressurization.
L1 àM
Tr
Destination Pushbutton on Chime Light on Information on the AIP

ạm
the CALLS Panel the ACP

Ph
All cabin attendants ALL 1 x Hi/Lo Steady RED "CALL ALL CAPT" + steady GREEN light
Purser station PURS 1x Steady RED "CALL CAPT" / "PURSER CALLED" + steady
9
Hi-Hi-Lo GREEN light

:2
12
Other attendant FWD, MID, EXIT, or 1 x Hi-Lo Steady RED "CALL CAPT" + steady GREEN light
4
stations AFT
02
Emergency call EMER CALL ON 3 x Hi-Lo Flashing "CALL PRIO CAPT" + flashing RED light
/2
04
RED
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-020-10 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM D 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
INTERPHONE
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL SERVICE INTERPHONE
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
The Service Interphone enables communication between the ground crew, the cabin crew and the
flight crew when the aircraft is on ground.
A service interphone call can be performed between:
29
2:
‐ The boomsets or the handset located in the cockpit
41
‐ The cabin handsets, and
2
20
‐ The boomsets of the ground crew.
4/
0
The ground crew must connect their boomsets to service interphone jacks that are outside the
9/
-2
aircraft, in order to communicate with the flight crew or the cabin crew.
9-
FURTHER INFORMATION ABOUT THE SERVICE INTERPHONE
y2
‐ Location of the service interphone jacks: Refer to Location of the service interphone jacks
àM
‐ Operation of the service interphone system: Refer to Operation of the service interphone
Tr
system.
ạm
Ph
LOCATION OF THE SERVICE INTERPHONE JACKS

9
:2
Applicable to: ALL

12
The following illustration shows the location of the jacks of the aircraft where ground crew can
4
02
connect their boomsets.

/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-020-20 P 1/4

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
INTERPHONE
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
1. FWD Avionics Compartment

4
02
2. Electrical Compartment
/2
3. Avionics Compartment
04
9/
4. Engine 1, Engine 2 (one jack on each engine)

-2
5. Belly Fairing Panel

9-
6. Aft Fuselage
y2
7. Auxiliary Power Unit (APU).

àM
Tr
OPERATION
ạm
Applicable to: ALL

Ph
HOW TO PERFORM A SERVICE INTERPHONE CALL FROM A HANDSET

29
To initiate a Service Interphone call from a handset, the cabin crew or the flight crew must press
:
12
the SVCE INTPH key  or twice the INTPH key.

4
A horn sounds outside the aircraft, to inform the ground crew about the call.
02
The same horn sounds outside the aircraft in the case of specific technical issues (APU fire, or
/2
L3
04
unexpected aircraft configuration, etc.).

9/
The ground crew connect their boomset to any jack. The communication is established as soon as
-2
L1
a boomset is connected to any jack.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-020-20 P 2/4

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
INTERPHONE
A321
Note: A service Interphone call is a conference call that involves the cockpit, the cabin, and all
ground crew connected outside the aircraft.
L2 Note: In addition, the cockpit crew can call the ground crew via the MECH pb-sw which is
located on the CALLS panel.
29
L1 COMMUNICATION LINK
2:
41
The following illustration indicates who can initiate a service interphone call and to which other
2
member.
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Note: Cabin crew can initiate a call to the ground crew, but the ground crew cannot initiate a
Tr
call to the cabin crew.

ạm
RESET OF SERVICE INTERPHONE CALL

Ph
To reset a service interphone call, the cabin crew or flight crew must press the RESET key of the
handset.
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-020-20 P 3/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←C 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
INTERPHONE
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-020-20 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
INTERPHONE
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FUNCTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE (FRP)
CABIN INTERPHONE LOCKED

Applicable to: ALL
It is not possible to use the cabin interphone.
29
YES NO
2:
412
1. When unhooking the handset, the standby mode must be active. Is
20
4/
the handset in the standby mode? Go to 2. Go to 5.
0
9/
-2
2. Using the interphone, request all cabin crewmembers to check if
9-
their interphone handset is correctly placed in its cradle. Does the
y2
interphone system work now? Go to 4. Go to 3.
àM
Tr
3. Request the cabin crewmembers to press the Reset button. Are

ạm
their handsets in the standby mode? Go to 4. Go to 5.

Ph
4. The cabin interphone system is working again.

9
Enter the failure symptoms and the recovery process into the cabin
:2
12
logbook. END END

4
02
/2
5. The cabin interphone system is inoperative.

04
Enter the failure into the cabin logbook. END END

9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-020-30 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
INTERPHONE
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FUNCTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE (FRP)
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-020-30 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
PASSENGER ADDRESS
A321
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
The Passenger Address (PA) function enables one direct public communication from the cockpit
and the crew stations to the cabin. The cabin crew uses the handset to make a PA. The PA function
can also be used to broadcast audio signal from cabin equipment, like the optional Prerecorded
29
Announcements and Boarding Music (PRAM)  and the IFE.
2:
41
Note: The Passenger Address is also referred to as Public Announcement.
2
20
Public Announcements are broadcast via the loudspeakers that are in all of the following areas:
4/
0
9/
‐ Cabin
-2
‐ Lavatories
9-
‐ Cabin crew stations, and
y2
‐ Galleys.
àM
PA messages can be independently broadcast in different zones. The zones are linked to the cabin
Tr
layout.
ạm
For example, there can be a PA from Door 1 in the business class, and a different PA from Door 4 in
Ph
the Economy class at the same time.

9
FURTHER INFORMATION ABOUT THE OPERATION OF THE PASSENGER ADDRESS

:2
12
‐ Operation of the PA from the Cabin: Refer to Operation of the Passenger Address from the
4
02
Cabin.
/2
04
9/
DESCRIPTION
-2
Applicable to: ALL

9-
FUNCTIONAL AND SOURCE PRIORITIES

y2
àM
Passenger Announcements have different priorities that depend on both of the following:
Tr
1. The function
ạm
2. The source.
Ph
The priorities are listed in the table below:

29
1 Functional The PA function with the higher priority overrides the function with lower priority.
:
12
Priorities
4
1. (highest) Any PA from the cockpit

02
/2
2. Direct PA
04
3. Normal PA
9/
4. (lowest) External (optional) PA sources (PRAM, i-PRAM on the FAP, IFE, or video-PA from the IFE) 
-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-030 P 1/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
PASSENGER ADDRESS
A321

2 Source Priorities A source with a higher PA priority overrides a PA from a source with a lower priority.
1. (highest) Audio Control Panel
2. Cockpit handset
3. Cabin handset assigned to the purser, in accordance with the system configuration
4. All other cabin handsets
29
5. (lowest) External (optional) PA sources (PRAM, i-PRAM on the FAP, IFE, or video-PA from the IFE) 
2:
41
Note: Any PA overrides the IFE entertainment.
2
20
For example:
4/
0
9/
‐ Any PA initiated from the cockpit interrupts any current PA initiated from a cabin attendant
-2
station.
9-
‐ Any PA from a cabin attendant station interrupts an i-PRAM announcement selected on the
y2
FAP.
àM
Tr
OPERATION: PASSENGER ADDRESS FROM THE CABIN

ạm
Applicable to: ALL

Ph
The cabin crew must use a handset to perform a Passenger Address announcement.
Further information about the operation of the handsets: Refer to Operation of the Handsets.
9
:2
12
HOW TO INITIATE A PASSENGER ADDRESS FROM A HANDSET

4
02
Note: The handset must first be in the standby mode (ready to use), in order to initiate a PA.
/2
04
The following table shows the sequences of keys that must be pressed on the handset in order to
9/
establish a call:
-2
Function Key Sequence Connection (From → To)

9-
y2
Direct PA PTT Handset → All loudspeakers

àM
PA ALL PA + ALL + PTT Handset → All loudspeakers in the cabin

PA 1 PA + 1 + PTT Handset → All loudspeakers in the business class
Tr
PA 2 PA + 2 + PTT Handset → All loudspeakers in the economy class

ạm
Ph
Note: The keys on the handsets are customized. Therefore, some connections may not be
available.
29
PASSENGER ADDRESS INDICATIONS ON THE ATTENDANT INDICATION PANEL

:
12
During the dial procedure, the dial information is displayed in the upper row of the respective
4
02
Attendant Indication Panel (AIP) (Refer to Attendant Indication Panel).

/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-030 P 2/6

à
Tr
CCOM ← B to C 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
PASSENGER ADDRESS
A321
OPERATION FROM THE COCKPIT

Applicable to: ALL
OPERATION OF THE PASSENGER ADDRESS FROM THE COCKPIT

The flight crew can perform all of the following PAs from the cockpit:
29
‐ The flight crew can use the cockpit handset to perform a PA.
2:
41
‐ The flight crew can use alternative equipment and panels to perform a PA: the Audio Control
2
Panel, in combination with the hand mike, the boomset, or the oxygen mask.
20
‐ When the cabin crew performs a PA in the cabin, the flight crew can listen to this PA via the
4/
0
handset or the Audio Control Panel and the audio equipment (e.g. boomset, oxygen mask, etc.).
9/
-2
This function enables the flight crew to be aware of possible current PAs from the cabin. The
flight crew must hook up the cabin handset and push the PTT key on the handset during the
9-
y2
Direct PA announcement.
àM
Note: To raise the attention before an announcement from the cockpit will be made, a
Tr
(customizable) "LOW-HIGH-LOW" chime is heard through the loudspeakers and the

ạm
related message Direct PA in use is displayed on all AIPs.

Ph
DIRECT PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) FROM THE COCKPIT HANDSET

9
If the keys on the handset are pushed in a specific sequence different connections for the
:2
12
respective PA announcements can be set.

4
The following table shows the functions which are available from the cockpit handset:
02
/2
Function Key Sequence Connection → To

04
9/
DIRECT PA PTT Handset → All loudspeakers in the cabin

-2
PA ALL  PA + ALL Handset → All loudspeakers in the economy class and in the
business class
9-
PA 1  PA + 1 Handset → All loudspeakers in the business class

y2
àM
PA 2  PA + 2 Handset → All loudspeakers in the economy class

Tr
Note: The keys on the handsets are customized. Therefore, some connections may not be
ạm
available.
Ph
Note: A chosen function related message is displayed on the respective AIP, e.g. PA ALL
in use will be displayed on all AIPs if the announcement is made through the PA ALL
:29
function.
412
DIRECT PA VIA COCKPIT AUDIO EQUIPMENT

02
/2
It is also possible to make Direct PA announcements via the acoustical equipment.

04
The following table shows the available equipment with its functions and the necessary handling
9/
-2
procedure during the announcement:

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-030 P 3/6

à
Tr
CCOM D→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
PASSENGER ADDRESS
A321
INT / RAD Push-to-talk

Equipment PA Transmission PA Reception
Switch on button on
connected to AMU P/B on ACP knob on ACP
the ACP Handmike
BOOMSET
or PRESSED OUT RAD ---
OXYGEN MASK
29
HANDMIKE PRESSED OUT --- PRESSED
2:
41
Note: When the rectangular PA Transmission pb is pressed, three green lines come on.
2
20
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) MONITORING
4/
0
9/
The cockpit crew can monitor the PA announcements in the cabin via:
-2
‐ The AMU by pushing the PA reception knob on an Audio Control Panel. Turning this knob
9-
clockwise or counterclockwise controls the volume of the announcement. Selecting another
y2
function stops the PA Monitoring procedure. àM
‐ Pushing the MON key  on the cockpit handset activates the PA monitoring function if the
Tr
handset is hooked off. The PA announcement which is performed by another source can be
ạm
heard through the handset.

Ph
OPERATION: VOLUME ADJUSTMENT

9
:2
12
Applicable to: ALL

4
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
02
/2
If the volume of the PA is too low or too high in the entire cabin or in some areas, the maintenance
04
9/
crew can adjust the level of the loudspeakers. This can be done via the Level Adjust FAP Page.
-2
This page requires a password, in order to access it.

9-
L2 AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT
y2
àM
In order to ensure a clear and audible PA in any condition, the level of the loudspeakers is
automatically increased in both of the following situations:
Tr
ạm
‐ When a cabin depressurization occurs

Ph
‐ When at least one engine is running.

When a PA is made, the level of the loudspeaker in the emitting station automatically decreases to
: 29
avoid noise feedback.

12
When the cockpit door is open, the level of the loudspeaker outside the cockpit automatically
4
02
decreases in order not to disturb the flight crew.

/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-030 P 4/6

à
Tr
CCOM ← D to E 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
PASSENGER ADDRESS
A321
PASSENGER ADDRESS LOCKED

Applicable to: ALL
It is not possible to perform a Passenger Address (PA) from any handset. It is not possible to
perform Normal PAs or Direct PAs from a handset.
29
2:
41
YES NO
2
20
4/
1. When unhooking the handset, it is not possible to dial. Is it possible
0
9/
to use the PA function? Go to 2. Go to 5.
-2
9-
2. Request all cabin crewmembers to check if their handset is correctly
y2
placed in its cradle. Does the PA system work now? Go to 4. Go to 5.
àM
Tr
3. If the PA is not working, it is possible to perform a PA using the

ạm
highest priority (Direct PA (pressing the PTT button))? Go to 4. Go to 5.

Ph
4. The PA system is working again.

9
Enter the failure symptoms and the recovery process into the cabin
:2
12
logbook. END END

4
02
/2
5. The PA system is inoperative.

04
Enter the failure into the cabin logbook. END END

9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-030 P 5/6

à
Tr
CCOM F 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
PASSENGER ADDRESS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-030 P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
PASSENGER CALL SYSTEM
A321
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
The passenger call function enables passengers to call a cabin crewmember, from both of the
following areas:
29
‐ From their seat
2:
‐ From the lavatories.
412
Further information about Operation by Passengers: Refer to Operation by the Passengers.
20
The cabin crew can reset, inhibit, and prevent passenger calls, Refer to Operation by the Cabin
4/
0
Crew.
9/
-2
Passenger calls are visually indicated via all of the following:
9-
‐ On the PSU above the passenger who calls
y2
‐ On the AIPs
àM
‐ On the ACPs
Tr
‐ On the lavatory wall, in the case of a call from a lavatory.

ạm
A passenger call is also indicated by a chime.

Ph
Further information about visual and aural indications: Refer to Chimes, Announcements, and Light
Indications.
9
:2
12
OPERATION BY THE PASSENGERS

4
02
/2
Applicable to: ALL

04
LOCATION OF PASSENGER CALL BUTTONS

9/
-2
Passengers can initiate a passenger call from:

9-
‐ The Passenger Service Unit (PSU)

y2
‐ The Passenger Control Unit (PCU) 

àM
‐ The Lavatory Service Unit (LSU).

Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-040 P 1/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
HOW TO INITIATE AND RESET A CALL

4
02
To initiate a call, the passenger presses the following button (the color may be different):
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
To reset/cancel a call, the passenger can press the following (the color may be different) on the
y2
PSU or LSU. The passenger can also press the Call Reset button on the PCU:
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
When the passenger resets the call, all visual and aural indications in the cabin disappear.
: 29
12
OPERATION BY THE CABIN CREW

4
02
Applicable to: ALL

/2
PASSENGER CALL/CHIME MANAGEMENT

04
9/
The cabin crew can reset current passenger calls in any cabin zone via:
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-040 P 2/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
A321
‐ The FAP Audio or Seat Settings  page

‐ The AAP.
The cabin crew can also inhibit the chimes of the passenger calls in the entire cabin, or in
dedicated zones. This can be also done via the FAP or the AAPs.
29
PASSENGER CALL/CHIME MANAGEMENT VIA THE AUDIO PAGE ON THE FAP
2:
41
Example of the Audio Page on the FAP
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
Legend:
1. Audio page button
29
2. Chime Inhibit button (option)

:
12
3. Call Reset button.

4
02
PASSENGER CALL/CHIME MANAGEMENT VIA THE SEAT SETTINGS PAGE ON THE FAP
/2
04
The cabin crew can prevent passengers from initiating passenger call chimes. The chimes only
9/
-2
are inhibited, so the passenger can still call and the visual indications remain but the chime
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-040 P 3/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
A321
is removed. The cabin crew can disable the call (AIP, ACP, chime) for individual passengers
(Passenger Call Settings: See Legend 2).
The cabin crew can disable the chime for the whole cabin zone (Chime Inhibit: See Legend 4).
Example of the Seat Settings Page on the FAP
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
Legend
àM
1. Seat Settings page button

Tr
ạm
2. Passenger Call menu button

Ph
3. Call Reset button for all seats

Note: Depending on the CAM configuration, the call reset can be available for the whole
29
cabin, or (as an option) for group of passengers  .

:
12
4. Chime Inhibit button for whole cabin zone.

4
02
/2
PASSENGER CALL RESET VIA THE AAP

04
9/
Depending on the CAM configuration, calls can be reset via the AAP for the whole cabin, or (as an
-2
option) for a group of passengers via the CALL RESET pb  .

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-040 P 4/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-040 P 5/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←C 01 APR 21
ạm
Ph
COMMUNICATION
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 05-040 P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM 01 APR 21
ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
CABIN SYSTEMS
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
CABIN SYSTEMS
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
06-005 INTRODUCTION
Introduction of the Cabin Systems.......................................................................................................................... A
06-010 CABIN MUSIC

06-010-10 General
29
General Information about the Cabin Music Function.............................................................................................A
2:
41
06-010-20 Function Access
2
20
Access to the Audio Page on the FAP................................................................................................................... A
0 4/
06-010-30 Description of the Cabin Music (Audio) Page on the FAP
9/
-2
Description of the Cabin Music (Audio) Page on the FAP......................................................................................A
9-
06-010-40 Operation of the Cabin Music (Audio) Page
y2
How to Activate the Boarding Music on the FAP................................................................................................... A
àM
Failure Messages on the FAP.................................................................................................................................B
Tr
ạm
06-020 PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS

Ph
06-020-10 General
General Information about Prerecorded Announcements.......................................................................................A
9
Prerecorded Announcements (Option).................................................................................................................... B

:2
12

4
02
Access to the Prerecorded Announcements Function on the FAP.........................................................................A

/2
04
06-020-30 Description of the Prerecorded Announcements Function

9/
Prerecorded Announcements (Option) on the FAP................................................................................................ A

-2
06-020-40 Operation of the Prerecorded Announcements Function

9-
y2
How to Activate the Prerecorded Announcements on the FAP.............................................................................. A

Failure Message of the Prerecorded Announcements on the FAP........................................................................ B
àM
Tr
06-030 LIGHTS
ạm
06-030-010 Cabin Lights

Ph
06-030-010-10 General
29
General Information about Cabin Lighting.............................................................................................................. A

:
Types of Cabin Light............................................................................................................................................... B

12
Definition of Cabin Lighting Areas.......................................................................................................................... C

4
02
Cabin Lighting Control.............................................................................................................................................D

/2
General Aspects of Cabin Lighting Control.............................................................................................................E

04
9/

-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

06-030-010-20 Function Access
Access to the Cabin Lights Page on the FAP........................................................................................................ A
06-030-010-30 Description and Operation

06-030-010-30-10 Cabin Lighting Control via FAP
29
2:
FAP CABIN LIGHTING Page Functions................................................................................................................. A
41
General Cabin Settings........................................................................................................................................... B
2
20
Entry Area Lighting Control via the FAP.................................................................................................................C
4/
Cabin Zone Lighting Control via FAP..................................................................................................................... D
0
9/
Room Lighting Control  .................................................................................................................................E
-2
06-030-010-30-20 Cabin Lighting Control via AAP
9-
Cabin Lighting Control via AAP...............................................................................................................................A
y2
06-030-010-30-50 Miscellaneous Lights àM
Tr
Work Lights.............................................................................................................................................................. A
ạm
Decor/Dot Lights  .............................................................................................................................................B

Ph
Reading Lights.........................................................................................................................................................C
Lavatory Lighting..................................................................................................................................................... D
9
06-030-020 Emergency Lighting

:2
12
Emergency Lighting Overview.................................................................................................................................A

4
02
Emergency Lighting - Exit Signs............................................................................................................................. B

/2
Cabin Emergency Lights......................................................................................................................................... C

04
Emergency Floor Path Marking ............................................................................................................................. D

9/
Slide Emergency Lights...........................................................................................................................................E

-2
Lavatory Emergency Lights..................................................................................................................................... F

9-
Emergency Lighting Control....................................................................................................................................G

y2
àM
06-040 DOORS/SLIDES
Tr
06-040-10 General
ạm
General Information about the DOORS/SLIDES FAP Page...................................................................................A

Ph

Access to the DOORS/SLIDES Page on the FAP..................................................................................................A
:29
12
4
Doors and Slides Monitoring from the Cabin..........................................................................................................A

02
/2

04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

06-050 AIR CONDITIONING/TEMPERATURE CONTROL
06-050-10 General
General Information about the Air Conditioning System and Temperature Control................................................ A
06-050-20 Location
29
2:
Cabin Temperature Zones.......................................................................................................................................A
41
2
20
Access to the Cabin Temperature Page on the FAP............................................................................................. A
04/
9/
-2
Temperature Control from the Cockpit....................................................................................................................A
9-
Cabin Temperature Control from the Cabin............................................................................................................B
y2
Floor Panel Heating System  .......................................................................................................................... C
àM
Passenger Individual Air Outlets............................................................................................................................. D
Tr
06-050-50 Function Recovery Procedures

ạm
FAP Failure Messages............................................................................................................................................ A

Ph
06-060 WATER/WASTE
9
:2
06-060-10 General
12
General Information about the Water/Waste System..............................................................................................A

4
02
06-060-20 Location
/2
04
Location of the Potable Water Tank and Waste Tank............................................................................................A

9/
-2
Potable Water System.............................................................................................................................................A
9-
Waste Disposal System...........................................................................................................................................B

y2
Water Ice Protection................................................................................................................................................C

àM
Access to the Water/Waste Page on the FAP....................................................................................................... D

Tr
Description of the Water/Waste FAP Page.............................................................................................................E

ạm
06-060-40 Operation
Ph
Operation of the Water/Waste FAP Page...............................................................................................................A

29
06-060-50 Functional Recovery Procedures

:
12
FAP Messages.........................................................................................................................................................A
4
Unexpected Waterflow in a Lavatory...................................................................................................................... B

02
/2
Unexpected Waterflow in a Galley..........................................................................................................................C

04

9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

06-070 SMOKE DETECTION
06-070-10 General
General Information about the Smoke Detection (SD) System.............................................................................. A
06-070-22 Location
29
2:
Location of the Smoke Detectors............................................................................................................................A
41
2
20
Access to the Smoke Detection Page on the FAP.................................................................................................A
0 4/
9/
-2
Smoke Detectors..................................................................................................................................................... A
9-
Description of the Smoke Detection Function.........................................................................................................B
y2
Smoke Reset........................................................................................................................................................... C
àM
Smoke Sensor Inoperative or No Sensor Data Available.......................................................................................D
Tr
SMOKE DETECTION Controls and Indicators on the FAP.................................................................................... E
ạm
Additional Smoke Indicators in the Cabin............................................................................................................... F

Ph
06-080 SEAT SETTINGS

9
06-080-10 General
:2
12
General Information about Seat Settings................................................................................................................ A

4
02

/2
Access to the Seat Settings Page on the FAP.......................................................................................................A

04
9/
06-080-30 Description of the Seat Settings Page

-2
Seat Settings - Passenger Call Settings.................................................................................................................A

9-
Seat Settings - Reading Lights Settings................................................................................................................. B

y2
06-080-40 Operation of the Seat Settings Page

àM
How to Inhibit All Seats Simultaneously................................................................................................................. A

Tr
How to Enable Inhibited Seats................................................................................................................................B

ạm
How to Reset PAX Call...........................................................................................................................................C

Ph
06-090 SYSTEM INFO

29
06-090-10 General
:
12
General Information about the System Info page................................................................................................... A

4
02

/2
04
Access to the System Info Page on the FAP......................................................................................................... A

9/

-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

06-090-30 Description of the System Info Page
Description of the System Info Page...................................................................................................................... A
06-100 CABIN STATUS
29
06-100-10 General
2:
41
General Information about the Cabin Status Page................................................................................................. A
2
20
4/
Access to the Cabin Status Page on the FAP........................................................................................................A
0
9/
06-100-30 Description of the Cabin Status Page
-2
Description of the Cabin Status Page.....................................................................................................................A
9-
y2
06-110 CABIN READY SIGNALING àM
06-110-10 General
Tr
General Information about the Cabin Ready Signaling Function  ..................................................................A

ạm
Ph

Access to the Cabin Ready Page on the FAP....................................................................................................... A
9
:2
06-110-30 Description of the Cabin Ready Page

12
Description of the Cabin Ready Function  ...................................................................................................... A

4
02
/2
06-120 GALLEY COOLING

04
9/
Galley Cooling  ...............................................................................................................................................A

-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
INTRODUCTION
A321
INTRODUCTION OF THE CABIN SYSTEMS

Applicable to: ALL
Most cabin systems are connected to the CIDS. They are displayed and controlled via the
corresponding FAP cabin system pages.
29
The most frequently used cabin system pages are e.g.:
2:
‐ Cabin Status (Refer to 06-100-10 General Information about the Cabin Status Function)
41
‐ Music (Refer to 06-010-10 General Information about the Cabin Music Function)
2
20
‐ Lights (Refer to 06-030-010-30-10 FAP CABIN LIGHTING Page Functions)
4/
‐ Doors/Slides (Refer to 06-040-10 General Information about the DOORS/SLIDES FAP Page)
0
9/
‐ Air Conditioning/Temperature Control (Refer to 06-050-10 General Information about the Air
-2
Conditioning and Temperature Control)
9-
‐ Water/Waste (Refer to 06-060-40 Operation of the Water/Waste FAP Page)
y2
‐ System Info (Refer to 06-090-10 General Information about the System Info Page)
àM
‐ Smoke Detection (Refer to 06-070-10 General Information about the Smoke Detection Function).
Tr
There are additional system pages that can be installed as an option, e.g.:
ạm
Ph
‐ Cabin Ready
‐ Galley Cooling
9
‐ Floor Temperature Setting.

:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-005 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
INTRODUCTION
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-005 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN MUSIC
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE CABIN MUSIC FUNCTION

Applicable to: ALL
The Cabin Music function is controlled and monitored via the Audio page on the FAP.
Note: As an option, the controlling and monitoring of the cabin music can be done via the IFE
29
system.
2:
41
The Audio page provides the controls and indications for all of the following cabin music functions
2
that can be selected via dedicated tabs:
20
4/
‐ Boarding Music
0
9/
‐ Prerecorded Announcements (Refer to General Information about Prerecorded Announcements)
-2
‐ Cabin Settings (Refer to General Information about Seat Settings).
9-
When the music is controlled from the FAP, the audio files are stored in a memory card. This
y2
L2
memory card is called the IPRAM and it is installed in the FAP sub panel, behind the cover.
Tr
àM
L1 FURTHER INFORMATION ABOUT THE CABIN MUSIC FUNCTION
ạm
‐ Refer to Access to the Audio Page on the FAP

Ph
‐ Refer to Description of the Cabin Music (Audio) Page on the FAP

‐ Refer to How to Activate the Boarding Music on the FAP.
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-010-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN MUSIC
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-010-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN MUSIC
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FUNCTION ACCESS
ACCESS TO THE AUDIO PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the Cabin Music (Audio) page via the Audio page selection button on the
FAP.
Access to the Cabin Music (Audio) Page on the FAP
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-010-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN MUSIC
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-010-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN MUSIC
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CABIN MUSIC (AUDIO) PAGE ON THE FAP
DESCRIPTION OF THE CABIN MUSIC (AUDIO) PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The Audio page on the FAP enables the cabin crew to monitor and control the music from the
optional Prerecorded Announcement Module (PRAM)  . The cabin music is distributed in the
cabin via loudspeakers and/or headsets.
29
2:
Example of a Cabin Music (Audio) Page on the FAP
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
Note: ‐ It is also possible to have only the Boarding Music (BGM) or the Prerecorded
Announcement (PRAM) tabs on this page.
29
If this is assigned to the CAM, the respective tabs are visible.

:
12
‐ If there is installed a second source for BGM, the number of controls and indications is
4
doubled and the second set is also displayed on the screen.

02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-010-30 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN MUSIC
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CABIN MUSIC (AUDIO) PAGE ON THE FAP
Nr Title Description
On the left hand side of the Audio page, there is an aircraft symbol which indicates the
1. Aircraft Symbol
selected audio channel and the music volume.
On the Audio page, up to three control pads for music groups may be displayed at a time.
There may be all of the following functions:
Selection Pads on
2. ‐ Boarding Music
29
the Audio Page
‐ Prerecorded Announcements
2:
‐ Cabin Settings.
41
2
The cabin crew select the type of music via the Boarding Music Group pad.
20
The upper BGM pad  shows the available channels. The lower BGM pad assigns a
4/
0
volume level for each channel.
9/
-2
The ON/OFF button starts or stops playing the selected music and is highlighted in green
3. Boarding Music
(enabled and active) when the corresponding cabin music is playing.
9-
The CHAN ▴/▾ icon scrolls up/down through the channels of Boarding Music Group.
y2
The VOL ▴/▾ icon enables the control of the music volume of the current boarding music.
àM
When the first / last item of the list is reached, the ▴/▾ icon is inhibited.
Tr
The cabin crew start or stop the selected announcement via the Prerecorded Announcement
pad (Refer to General Information about Prerecorded Announcements).
ạm
The STOP button stops playing the selected announcement and is highlighted in green when
Ph
the corresponding announcement is stopped.

The current announcement is indicated in a box called ON ANNOUNCE, located above the
9
list box (MEMO).

:2
12
Prerecorded Text messages for MEMO 1 and 2 will be displayed, if the selected messages are found,
4. Announcement missing, being played in the AUTO mode or in the case of an error. The message AUTO (in
4
02
Pad the ON ANNOUNCE field) appears in the case of an automatic announcement (e.g. cabin
/2
decompression announcement).
04
To change or clear an announcement, select the respective announcement with the UP

9/
pb and DOWN pb on the right side of the list box, then press the Clear Memo pb. It is also
-2
possible to clear all announcements at once via the Clear All pb.
9-
The Play All pb starts playing the selected announcements in a queue.

y2
The Play Next pb starts playing the next announcement.

àM
In the (optional) Cabin Settings menu, general adjustments can be done (Refer to General
Tr
Information about Seat Settings):

Cabin Settings Pad
ạm
5. ‐ Call Reset - Reset PAX calls (Refer to How to Reset PAX Calls)
(Option)
Ph
‐ Chime Inhibit - Inhibit the accompanying chimes of PAX calls (Refer to How to Inhibit
Seats).
29
Note: If audio data are not available, there will be a caution message displayed on the FAP: Refer
:
12
to Failure Messages on the FAP.

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-010-30 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN MUSIC
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL OPERATION OF THE CABIN MUSIC (AUDIO) PAGE
HOW TO ACTIVATE THE BOARDING MUSIC ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
HOW TO ACTIVATE THE BOARDING MUSIC ON THE FAP

To activate the Boarding Music follow the steps below:
29
1. Open the Audio page.
2:
2. Select the Boarding Channel on the Boarding Music tab.
41
3. Turn ON the music via the Music ON button.
2
20
4/
FAILURE MESSAGES ON THE FAP
0
9/
-2
Applicable to: ALL
9-
If the Integrated Prerecorded Announcement Module (IPRAM) audio data are not available, the
y2
following caution message displays on the FAP screen:
àM
Example of an IPRAM Function Error
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-010-40 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A to B → 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN MUSIC
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL OPERATION OF THE CABIN MUSIC (AUDIO) PAGE
The following caution message comes up, if prerecorded audio functions are called up during the
initialization phase of the IPRAM.
Example of an IPRAM Initialization Message
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-010-40 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS

Applicable to: ALL
The Prerecorded Announcements are controlled and monitored via the Audio page on the FAP.
Note: The cabin crew can start prerecorded announcements from the FAP or from the IFE.
29
However, these chapters deal with the FAP function only.
2:
41
The cabin crew can start announcements individually or in groups. Some prerecorded
2
announcements start automatically (e.g. decompression announcements). They have the highest
20
distribution priority.
4/
0
L2 The audio files which contain the prerecorded announcements are customized. The files are loaded
9/
-2
from a memory card, the Integrated Prerecorded Announcement Module (IPRAM). The IPRAM is
installed in a slot in the FAP sub panel.
9-
y2
L1 FURTHER INFORMATION ABOUT THE PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS
àM
‐ Refer to Access to the Prerecorded Announcements Function on the FAP
Tr
‐ Refer to Prerecorded Announcements on the FAP

ạm
‐ Refer to How to Activate the Prerecorded Announcements on the FAP.

Ph
PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS (OPTION)

9
:2
12
Applicable to: ALL

4
Impacted DU: NONE

02
/2
SUMMARY
04
9/
On A320 family aircraft equipped with CIDS OBRM software (-34C), the optional Prerecorded
-2
Announcement Module (PRAM)  may not work properly.

9-
EXPLANATION
y2
àM
A blue card on the AUDIO page of the FAP indicates that the prerecorded announcement does not
start correctly or is interrupted.
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-020-10 P 1/4

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
MITIGATION
4
02
To recover the prerecorded announcement apply the following procedure.

/2
04
HOW TO RECOVER THE PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT

9/
-2
1. Select the FAP SET-UP page.

9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-020-10 P 2/4

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
2. Press the "Remove" button on the I-PRAM pad.

-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
3. In the displayed blue card press the "Yes" button.

02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-020-10 P 3/4

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
4. In the displayed blue card press the "OK" button.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
5. In the displayed blue card press the "OK" button to return to the FAP SET-UP page.
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
6. Select the AUDIO page to start the prerecorded announcement again.

:
12
Note: If the PRAM does not start, depending on flight phase, consider to request a CIDS reset
4
02
to the flight crew.

/2
04
During a CIDS reset PA and interphone will not be available.

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-020-10 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
ACCESS TO THE PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS FUNCTION ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the Prerecorded Announcements function via the Audio page selection
button on the FAP.
Access to the Cabin Music (Audio) Page on the FAP
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-020-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-020-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION OF THE PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS FUNCTION
PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS (OPTION) ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The optional Prerecorded Announcements  function on the FAP enables the cabin crew
to monitor and control the prerecorded announcements, which are distributed in the cabin via
loudspeakers and headsets.
29
2:
Example of a Prerecorded Announcements Function on the FAP
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-020-30 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION OF THE PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS FUNCTION
1. SELECTION Announcement numbers are entered via the numeric panel.
The Enter button adds the highlighted announcements to the playlist. The currently highlighted item
in the playlist will be displayed in the playlist.
The ▴/▾ icon scrolls up/down though the Selection. If the first/last item of the list is reached, the ▴/▾
icon will be inhibited.
29
The Clear Memo button deletes an announcement from the selection list. The Clear All button
2:
deletes all announcements.
41
2. MEMO / The Playlist displays the currently selected announcements.
2
Playlist
20
Note: If an announcement group is selected, the different announcements of this group are
4/
listed in the playlist.
0
9/
The Clear Memo button clears the currently selected announcements from the playlist.
-2
The ▴/▾ icon scrolls up/down though the Playlist.
9-
3. ON The selected announcement number is displayed in a selection box and in a list box (Memo / Playlist)
y2
ANNOUNCE with all of the following messages:
/ Player àM
‐ AUTO: in the ON ANNOUNCE field, if an automatic announcement was triggered (e.g. cabin
Tr
decompression announcement)
ạm
‐ FOUND: in the MEMO 1 field, if the announcement is found by the PRAM

Ph
‐ MISSING: in the MEMO 1 and/or MEMO 2 field, if the announcement was not found by the PRAM
‐ ERROR: in all input fields (1 - 5), if the selected announcement is out of the selectable range.
9
The Start Next button plays the next announcement.

:2
The Start All button plays all announcements of the selected announcement group.
12
The Stop button stops the currently playing announcement.

4
02
Note: In the case, no announcement data are available, the following caution message displays
/2
04
on the FAP: Refer to Failure Message of the Prerecorded Announcements on the FAP.
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-020-30 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL OPERATION OF THE PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS FUNCTION
HOW TO ACTIVATE THE PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
HOW TO ACTIVATE THE PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS ON THE FAP

To activate the Prerecorded Announcements follow the steps below:
29
1. Open the Audio page.
2:
2. Select the announcements on the Prerecorded Announcement pad, on the Selection tab.
41
3. Turn ON the required announcement via the Start Next or Start All button on the Menu tab.
2
20
4/
FAILURE MESSAGE OF THE PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS ON THE FAP
0
9/
-2
Applicable to: ALL
9-
If the Integrated Prerecorded Announcement Module (IPRAM) announcement data are not available,
y2
the following caution message displays on the FAP screen:
àM
Example of an IPRAM Function Error
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-020-40 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A to B 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL OPERATION OF THE PRERECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS FUNCTION
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-020-40 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN LIGHTS - GENERAL
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT CABIN LIGHTING

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin lighting provides light in the:

‐ Cabin zone(s)
‐ Entry area(s)
29
‐ Room(s). 
2:
41
The cabin crew can control and monitor the cabin lighting via the following control panels:
2
20
4/
‐ Additional Attendant Panel (AAP).
0
9/
-2
For information about the cabin lighting control panels:
‐ Refer to 06-030-010-30-10 FAP CABIN LIGHTING Page Functions or
9-
y2
‐ Refer to 06-030-010-30-20 Cabin Lighting Control via AAP.
àM
For information about general aspects of the cabin lighting control: Refer to 06-030-010-10 General
Tr
Aspects of Cabin Lighting Control.

ạm
Ph
TYPES OF CABIN LIGHT

Applicable to: ALL
9
:2
12
The different types of cabin light are:

4
‐ Light strips
02
‐ Spot lights
/2
04
‐ Effect lights
9/
‐ Decor/Dot lights 
-2
‐ Work lights
9-
‐ Reading lights.
y2
àM
LIGHT STRIPS
Tr
The light strips are in the ceiling panels, window panels and optionally in the handrails. Light strips
ạm
are installed in locations that prevent a direct view into the light.
Ph
SPOT LIGHTS
29
Spot lights are installed in entry areas, and optionally in other areas.
:
12
Spot lights typically are monochrome LED lights.

4
02
EFFECT LIGHTS
/2
04
Effect lights are in lavatories as mirror lights and wash table lights. As an option, effect lights may
9/
emphasize cabin furniture.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-010-10 P 1/4

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
DECOR/DOT LIGHTS 
Decor/Dot lights are optional. Typically they are part of cabin furniture in entry areas or rooms  .
WORK LIGHTS
Work lights are in galleys or in the IFE control centers.
29
READING LIGHTS
2:
41
Reading lights are at the passenger seats and at the cabin attendant seats.
2
20
4/
DEFINITION OF CABIN LIGHTING AREAS
0
9/
-2
Applicable to: ALL
9-
ENTRY AREAS
y2
Entry areas include the cabin doors area and the area between opposite cabin doors.
àM
CABIN ZONES
Tr
ạm
Typically, a cabin zone consists of a passenger seating area. The cabin zones are defined by the
Ph
airline and depend on the individual cabin layout.

L2 The customized information is on the CAM (Cabin Assignment Module).
9
:2
L1 ROOMS
4 12
Rooms are:
02
/2
‐ Galleys
04
‐ Bars/lounges 
9/
‐ etc.
-2
9-
Note: Rooms on an aircraft are not necessarily closed compartments.

y2
LAVATORIES
àM
Lavatory Lighting is independent from the FAP controls, except for the 100 % lighting function for
Tr
ạm
cleaning.
Ph
Refer to 04-020-10-A Description of the Flight Attendant Panel.

For information about the Lavatory Lighting: Refer to 06-030-010-30-50 Lavatory Lighting.
: 29
CABIN LIGHTING CONTROL

12
4
02
Applicable to: ALL

/2
CONTROL PANELS
04
9/
FLIGHT ATTENDANT PANEL (FAP)

-2
On the FAP there is a dedicated page to control and monitor the cabin lighting.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-010-10 P 2/4

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
For details: Refer to 06-030-010-30-10 FAP CABIN LIGHTING Page Functions.

ADDITIONAL ATTENDANT PANEL (AAP)
Lighting control with limited functions is also available from the AAPs for the related cabin areas.
Typically, the cabin crew can control one cabin zone and one entry from the related AAP.
For details: Refer to 06-030-010-30-20 Cabin Lighting Control via AAP.
29
2:
CONTROL MODES
41
2
CLASSIC CONTROL
20
4/
Classic control is the standard lighting control with the following light intensities:
0
9/
‐ Bright (BRT)
-2
‐ Medium (DIM 1)
9-
‐ Low (DIM 2).
y2
àM
GENERAL ASPECTS OF CABIN LIGHTING CONTROL
Tr
ạm
Applicable to: ALL

Ph
POWER-UP
After the power-up of the Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS), all cabin lights come ON
9
:2
with a predefined brightness (typically 100 %).

12
The lavatory lights typically come ON with approximately 50 % brightness, when the lavatory doors
4
02
are closed and unlocked. Refer to 06-030-010-30-50 Lavatory Lighting.

/2
04
MAIN ON BUTTON / LIGHTS MAIN ON/OFF PUSHBUTTON-SWITCH

9/
-2
The cabin crew can switch ON/OFF the entire cabin lights via the:
‐ MAIN ON button on the Cabin LIGHTING page
9-
‐ LIGHTS MAIN ON/OFF pb-sw on the sub panel.

y2
àM
For details: Refer to 06-030-010-30-10 General Cabin Settings.

Tr
AUTOMATIC DIMMING AT COCKPIT DOOR

ạm
Ph
The lights in the forward entrance area dim automatically when the cockpit door is opened when at
least one engine is running.
29
DECOMPRESSION
:
12
In the case of decompression, all lights change automatically to 100 % brightness, regardless of
4
02
previously selected light settings.

/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-010-10 P 3/4

à
Tr
CCOM ← D to E → 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
BRIGHTNESS
The cabin lighting is dimmable. There are up to four levels of brightness:
‐ BRIGHT (BRT): 100 %
‐ MEDIUM (DIM 1): 50 %
‐ LOW (DIM 2): 10 %
29
‐ NIGHT  : 1 %.
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-010-10 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←E 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN LIGHTS - FUNCTION ACCESS
ACCESS TO THE CABIN LIGHTS PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the CABIN LIGHTING page via one of the following:
‐ The corresponding aircraft symbol on the CABIN STATUS page, or
‐ The CABIN LIGHTING page selection button on the FAP.
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
For more information about the page selection buttons on the FAP: Refer to 04-020-10-A Description
-2
of the Flight Attendant Panel.
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-010-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN LIGHTS - FUNCTION ACCESS
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-010-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Cabin Lighting Control via FAP
FAP CABIN LIGHTING PAGE FUNCTIONS

Applicable to: ALL
29
Typically, the CABIN LIGHTING page on the FAP has four main areas. A fifth area is optional.
2:
Typical CABIN LIGHTING Page
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
No. Title Description

1 Entry Area Control Pads Dedicated buttons on the control pads enable the cabin crew to control the
29
lighting in the selected entry area.

:
12
Refer to 06-030-010-30-10 Entry Area Lighting Control via the FAP.

4
2 Aircraft Symbol The aircraft symbol indicates the location and the brightness of the lighting in
02
the ZONES and ENTRIES. When the cabin crew increases or decreases the
/2
04
brightness in a ZONE or ENTRY, the color in the corresponding area changes

9/
accordingly on the aircraft symbol.

-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-010-30-10 P 1/6

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321

No. Title Description
3 General Settings Buttons Dedicated buttons on the control pad enable the cabin crew to control the
general lighting.
Refer to 06-030-010-30-10 General Cabin Settings.
4 Cabin Zone Control Pads Dedicated buttons on the control pads enable the cabin crew to control the
29
lighting in the selected cabin zone.
2:
Refer to 06-030-010-30-10 Cabin Zone Lighting Control via FAP.
41
5 Room Control Pads Dedicated buttons on the control pads enable the cabin crew to control the
2
lighting in the selected room.
20
4/
Refer to 06-030-010-30-10 Room Lighting Control via FAP.
0
9/
-2
GENERAL CABIN SETTINGS
9-
Applicable to: ALL
y2
The GENERAL CABIN SETTINGS menu is typically in the upper middle of the CABIN LIGHTING
àM
FAP page.
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
Button Description
12
MAIN ON/OFF The MAIN ON/OFF button turns ON or OFF all the lights in the entire cabin, rooms,
4
02
entry areas.
/2
Note: ‐ The MAIN ON/OFF button is available on ground, only.

04
‐ When the cabin lights are OFF (via the MAIN ON/OFF button) and the
9/
-2
cabin crew selects any specific light button (from either the FAP or the
AAP) or the LAV MAINT key on the FAP subpanel, this will switch the
9-
cabin lighting to the MAIN ON state.

y2
However, only the lights corresponding to the pushed light control

àM
button and the lavatory lighting will go ON.

Tr
AISLE/WDO The AISLE/WDO buttons enable the cabin crew to turn ON or OFF the all assigned
ạm
light (WINDOW, AISLE).

Ph
DOT/DECOR Lights  The optional DOT/DECOR lights buttons enable the cabin crew to turn ON or OFF
the optional dot/decor lights in the cabin.
29
R/L SET / R/L RESET The R/L SET / R/L RESET buttons enable the cabin crew to turn ON/OFF all reading
:
lights.
12
4
Note: ‐ The function of the R/L SET / R/L RESET buttons is available on
02
ground, only.
/2
04
‐ The R/L SET / R/L RESET buttons on the FAP do not show the status
9/
of the reading lights (i.e. no green button when activated).

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-010-30-10 P 2/6

à
Tr
CCOM ← A to B 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
ENTRY AREA LIGHTING CONTROL VIA THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
ENTRY AREA LIGHTING CONTROL VIA THE FAP

Entry Area Menu
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
Button Description
-2
BRT The BRIGHT button enables the cabin crew to set the light in the entry area to 100 %
9-
brightness.
y2
DIM 1 The DIM 1 button enables the cabin crew to set the light in the entry area to 50 %
brightness. àM
Tr
DIM 2 The DIM 2 button enables the cabin crew to set the light in the entry area to 10 %
brightness.
ạm
Ph
Note: There is no OFF button. However, when the cabin crew pushes the active (highlighted)
button, the lighting in the assigned area turns OFF.
9
:2
12
CABIN ZONE LIGHTING CONTROL VIA FAP

4
02
Applicable to: ALL

/2
04
CABIN ZONE LIGHTING CONTROL VIA FAP

9/
-2
Typical Cabin Zone Menu

9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Button Description
Ph
BRT The BRIGHT button enables the cabin crew to set the light in the corresponding
cabin zone to 100 % brightness.
29
DIM 1 The DIM 1 button enables the cabin crew to set the light in the corresponding cabin
:
12
zone to 50 % brightness.
4
DIM 2 The DIM 2 button enables the cabin crew to set the light in the corresponding cabin
02
zone to 10 % brightness.
/2
NIGHT  The optional NIGHT button enables the cabin crew to set the light in the
04
9/
corresponding cabin zone to 1 % brightness.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-010-30-10 P 3/6

à
Tr
CCOM C to D → 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
Note: There is no OFF button. However, when the cabin crew pushes the active (highlighted)
button, the lighting in the assigned area turns OFF.
ROOM LIGHTING CONTROL 

Applicable to: ALL
29
2:
Room lighting control is optional.
41
Typical Room Lighting Controls
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
Button Description
ạm
BRT The BRIGHT button enables the cabin crew to set the light in the corresponding room
Ph
to 100 % brightness.
DIM 1 The DIM 1 button enables the cabin crew to set the light in the corresponding room to
29
50 % brightness.
:
DIM 2 The DIM 2 button enables the cabin crew to set the light in the corresponding room to
12
10 % brightness.
4
02

/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-010-30-10 P 4/6

à
Tr
CCOM ← D to E → 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321

Button Description
ADJUST The ADJUST button displays an ADJUST control panel.
The active brightness is displayed in the INTENS. field on the corresponding room
control panel.
The +/- buttons on the ADJUST control panel enable the cabin crew to adjust the
29
brightness in the corresponding room by 1 % steps. The selected brightness is
2:
displayed at the top of the ADJUST control panel.
41
OFF The OFF button enables the cabin crew to switch OFF the lights of the corresponding
2
room.
20
4/
Note: If there is no OFF button, the cabin crew pushes the active (highlighted) button, to turn the
0
9/
lighting in the assigned area OFF.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-010-30-10 P 5/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←E 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-010-30-10 P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
Cabin Lighting Control via AAP
CABIN LIGHTING CONTROL VIA AAP

Applicable to: ALL
29
Lighting control is also available from the Additional Attendant Panels (AAPs).
2:
For more information about AAPs: Refer to 04-020-10-B General Information about AAPs.
41
Typical AAP Lighting Controls
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
Pushbutton Description
12
ENTRY BRT The ENTRY BRT pb typically enables the cabin crew to turn the lighting in the
4
corresponding entry area to 100 % brightness.

02
/2
ENTRY DIM 1 The ENTRY DIM 1 pb typically enables the cabin crew to turn the lighting in the
04

9/
ENTRY DIM 2 The ENTRY DIM 2 pb typically enables the cabin crew to turn the light in the
-2

9-
AFT BRT The AFT BRT pb typically enables the cabin crew to turn the lighting in the
y2

àM
AFT DIM 1 The AFT DIM 1 pb typically enables the cabin crew to turn the lighting in the
Tr
AFT DIM 2 The AFT DIM 2 pb typically enables the cabin crew to turn the light in the corresponding
ạm
cabin zone to 10 % brightness.

Ph
Note: There is no OFF button.

However, when the cabin crew pushes the active button (green LED is ON), the lighting in
29
:
the assigned area turns OFF.

4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-010-30-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-010-30-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
Miscellaneous Lights
WORK LIGHTS
Applicable to: ALL
29
The work lights for example are installed in:
2:
‐ In the ceiling panels of the cabin attendant station
41
‐ In cabin attendant work areas (e.g. galleys).
2
20
The cabin crew can adjust work lights manually and can turn ON and OFF the lights individually.
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
DECOR/DOT LIGHTS 
02
/2
04
Applicable to: ALL

9/
DECOR/DOT LIGHTS - GENERAL

-2
Typically, decor lights are at the following locations:

9-
‐ Entry Areas
y2
‐ Rooms (e.g. galleys, lounge bars, etc.).

àM
Tr
DECOR/DOT LIGHTS CONTROL

ạm
The cabin crew can control the decor lights via the General Cabin Settings control pad on the FAP
Ph
CABIN LIGHTING page.

29
:
READING LIGHTS
412
Applicable to: ALL

02
/2
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT READING LIGHTS

04
9/
Reading lights are part of the Passenger Service Unit (PSU).

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-010-30-50 P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A to C → 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
Each passenger can control the assigned reading light via a pushbutton on the PSU or by a
pushbutton on the seat-mounted Passenger Control Unit (PCU)  .
In addition, the cabin crew can turn ON/OFF the reading lights:
‐ In the entire cabin or in individual cabin areas via the controls on the CABIN LIGHTING page on
the FAP. Refer to 06-030-010-30-10 General Cabin Settings.
29
‐ Individual reading lights via the SEAT SETTINGS page on the FAP. Refer to 06-080-30 Seat
2:
Settings - Reading Lights Settings.
412
Note: When either button is deselected the passengers can switch the reading light individually
20
4/
again.
0
9/
READING LIGHTS CONTROLS VIA THE FAP CABIN LIGHTING PAGE
-2
On the CABIN LIGHTING page the cabin crew can control the reading lights via the R/L SET and
9-
y2
the R/L RESET buttons on the GENERAL CABIN SETTINGS control pad.
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
Note: ‐ The R/L SET / R/L RESET buttons do not show the status of the reading lights.
/2
‐ The R/L SET / R/L RESET control function is available on ground, only.
04
9/
-2
LAVATORY LIGHTING
9-
Applicable to: ALL

y2
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT LAVATORY LIGHTING

àM
Each lavatory typically has the following lights:

Tr
ạm
‐ A light strip in the lavatory ceiling (ceiling light)

Ph
‐ A light strip at the lavatory floor (floor light)

‐ A light strip above the wash stand (wash stand light)
‐ Mirror lights (optional)
: 29
‐ Amenity shelf light (optional).

12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-010-30-50 P 2/4

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
LAVATORY LIGHTING CONTROL

9
:2
12
Sensors in the lavatory door frame monitor the door status (door open, door LOCKED or door
4
UNLOCKED). The door status influences the brightness of the lavatory lights.
02
/2
Note: In lavatories for Persons with Reduced Mobility (PRM), the ceiling light is at the maximum
04
brightness
9/
-2
Door Status Brightness of the Ceiling Brightness of the Mirror Lights

9-
Light/Washstand Lights
y2
Door closed and UNLOCKED The ceiling/washstand lights dim to The mirror lights are OFF.
àM
approximately 50 % brightness.
Door closed and LOCKED The ceiling light turns to maximum The mirror and washstand lights are
Tr
brightness. ON.
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-010-30-50 P 3/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←D 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-010-30-50 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL EMERGENCY LIGHTING
EMERGENCY LIGHTING OVERVIEW

Applicable to: ALL
FUNCTION
The function of the emergency lighting is to supply light to the cabin, and mark the exits and
29
escape paths during emergencies.
2:
41
The emergency lighting has the following functions:
2
‐ In a normal situation:
20
‐ The exit signs come ON automatically when the landing gears or the flaps/slats are extended.
4/
0
‐ In an emergency situation the emergency lighting:
9/
-2
‐ Provides light to the cabin and the lavatories, if the general cabin light has failed
‐ Shows the way to the exits
9-
y2
‐ Provides light to the slides.
àM
The emergency lighting operates independently from the other light systems.
Tr
L2 The emergency lighting has active and passive components. The active components are LED
ạm
based whereas the passive components are photoluminescent.

Ph
L1 In the case of power loss on the aircraft there is a minimum of 12 min power supply from the
Emergency Power Supply Units (EPSUs) for the emergency lights.
9
:2
CONTROLS
4 12
The emergency light controls are in the cockpit as well as in the cabin.
02
/2
Note: The cabin crew can turn ON the emergency light regardless of the position of the cockpit
04
9/
control.
-2
For more information about the emergency lighting controls: Refer to 06-030-020 Emergency
9-
Lighting Control.
y2
àM
EMERGENCY LIGHTING - EXIT SIGNS

Tr
ạm
Applicable to: ALL

Ph
The purpose of the exit signs is to point out the exits to the passengers.
Exit signs include:
29
‐ Exit Locators
:
12
‐ Exit Markers
4
02
‐ Exit identifiers
/2
‐ Additional exit signs  .

04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-020 P 1/10

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
All emergency exit locators, markers and identifiers come ON automatically if the NO SMOKING sw
in the cockpit is in the ARM position and one or more of the following apply:
‐ Landing gear extended or flaps/slats extended
‐ Decompression
‐ Power failure.
29
EXIT LOCATORS
2:
41
Exit locators indicate the location of the exits and are in the cross-aisles ceiling, visible from the
2
20
aisles.
04/
Example of an Exit Locator
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
EXIT MARKERS
/2
04
Exit markers indicate the location of the exits and are installed either above or next to the exits.
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-020 P 2/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
Examples of Exit Markers
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
EXIT IDENTIFIERS
Tr
ạm
Exit identifiers indicate the location of an exit and are installed on one side of an exit, mounted in
Ph
the lower part of the door frame.

29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-020 P 3/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
Example of an Exit Identifier
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN EMERGENCY LIGHTS

: 29
Applicable to: ALL

12
4
There are different types of cabin emergency lights:

02
‐ Ceiling emergency lights

/2
04
‐ Emergency lights/emergency light panels at the exits.

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-020 P 4/10

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
CEILING EMERGENCY LIGHTS

The ceiling emergency lights are in the aisle.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
EMERGENCY LIGHTS/EMERGENCY LIGHT PANELS AT THE EXITS

Ph
Typically, there are emergency lights/emergency light panels in the entry area ceiling and
emergency lights above the emergency exit.
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-020 P 5/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
EMERGENCY FLOOR PATH MARKING

Tr
ạm
Applicable to: ALL

Ph
The emergency floor path marking will guide the passenger to an exit.
The emergency floor path marking consists of:
29
‐ Seat-mounted emergency light units on the aisle side

:
12
‐ Wall mounted floodlights for light in front of lavatories, galleys, stowages, dividers etc.
4
02
‐ Edge mounted floodlights for light in areas in front of lavatories, galleys, stowages, dividers etc.
/2
04
L2 All light units of the emergency floor path marking system use Light Emitting Diode (LED) technology.
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-020 P 6/10

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
Example of Seat-mounted Emergency Light Units
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
SLIDE EMERGENCY LIGHTS

Ph
Applicable to: ALL
The slide emergency lights provide light to show the evacuation path of a slide.
29
:
12
Note: The slide emergency lights come ON only when the slides deploy.
4
02
However, when the slides are detached from the aircraft the emergency lights will go OFF.
/2
Please refer to the slides chapter for details about slides.

04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-020 P 7/10

à
Tr
CCOM ← D to E 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
LAVATORY EMERGENCY LIGHTS

Applicable to: ALL
The lavatory emergency light is located in the lavatory ceiling panels and provides light with low
brightness when the emergency lighting is ON.
Example of a Lavatory Emergency Light
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-020 P 8/10

à
Tr
CCOM F 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
EMERGENCY LIGHTING CONTROL

Applicable to: ALL
In an emergency, all lights will only come ON automatically if the EMER EXIT LT sw in the cockpit is
in the ARM position.
29
Note: The cabin crew can turn ON the emergency light regardless of the position of the cockpit
2:
control.
41
2
So, if the EMER EXIT LT sw in the cockpit is in the OFF position, the emergency lights will come ON
20
when:
4/
0
‐ The flight crew switches the EMER EXIT LT sw to the ON position
9/
-2
‐ The cabin crew pushes the EMER pb-sw on the FAP.
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-020 P 9/10

à
Tr
CCOM G→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
LIGHTS
A321
EMER Pushbutton-Switch on the FAP
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-030-020 P 10/10

à
Tr
CCOM ←G 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
DOORS/SLIDES
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE DOORS/SLIDES FAP PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can monitor the status of the doors and slides via the DOORS/SLIDES page on the
FAP at any time.
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-040-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
DOORS/SLIDES
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-040-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
DOORS/SLIDES
A321
ACCESS TO THE DOORS/SLIDES PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the DOORS/SLIDES page via the DOORS/SLIDES page selection
button on the FAP.
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-040-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
DOORS/SLIDES
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-040-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
DOORS/SLIDES
A321
DOORS AND SLIDES MONITORING FROM THE CABIN

Applicable to: ALL
The doors and slides status can be checked at any time on the FAP. To display the DOORS/SLIDES
page on the FAP, push the DOORS / SLIDES button from the function selector.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
Door Characteristic Door Symbol on the FAP (depending on aircraft

ạm
configuration)
Ph
Open door Red rectangle outside the aircraft symbol

Closed door with disarmed evacuation device Amber rectangle inside the aircraft symbol with amber text
29
Closed doors with armed evacuation device Green rectangle inside the aircraft symbol
:
Doors / Slides Pressure, Slide Armed/Disarmed Amber rectangle inside the aircraft symbol with amber text
412
The DOORS / SLIDES menu will display the following messages:

02
/2
Situation Message (depending on aircraft configuration)

04
9/
Disarmed slide SLIDE DISARMED

-2
Low slide pressure CHECK SLIDE PRESSURE

-
Low door pressure CHECK DOOR PRESSURE

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-040-30 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
DOORS/SLIDES
A321
Other error messages can be the following:
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-040-30 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
AIR CONDITIONING/TEMPERATURE CONTROL
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE AIR

CONDITIONING SYSTEM AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Applicable to: ALL
The air conditioning system ensures that air temperature, air freshness and cabin pressure are
comfortable for the passengers and the crew. It provides a mix of fresh and recycled air via cabin and
29
individual air outlets.
2:
41
The flight crew can control the temperature via the cockpit controls (AIR panel).
2
The cabin crew can control the temperature via the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP).
20
4/
Note: A setting of 22 °C (72 °F) provides a comfortable cabin temperature for most operating
0
9/
conditions. Usually there is no need to change this temperature selection during a flight.
-2
TEMPERATURE CONTROL VIA THE CIDS CONTROL PANELS IN THE CABIN
9-
y2
Note: To control the temperature zones manually via the FAP, the CABIN selector on the AIR
àM
overhead panel in the cockpit must be set to PURS SEL.
Tr
The temperature of the different zones, rooms, entries and heated air outlets can be controlled
ạm
individually and independently from each other via the FAP.

Ph
How to control the temperature via the FAP:Refer to 06-050-30 Access to the Temperature Page
on the FAP.
9
:2
12
Note: The temperature zones depend on the aircraft configuration.

4
02
L2 TEMPERATURE SETTINGS ON GROUND, PRIOR TO FLIGHT

/2
04
It is recommended to set cockpit and cabin selections prior to a flight to 24 °C (75 °F). On ground,
9/
a lower temperature than the recommended 24 °C (75 °F) will unnecessarily increase the Auxiliary
-2
Power Unit (APU) load.

9-
y2
Note: In case of a temperature control failure in the cabin (temperature selection via FAP is not
àM
possible), a corresponding ECAM alert automatically informs the flight crew. The flight
crew can adjust the temperature manually from the cockpit.
Tr
ạm
L1 FLOOR PANEL HEATING (FPH) SYSTEM 

Ph
The FPH system includes Heated Floor Panels (HFP) in the forward entry areas.
For more information about the FPH system:Refer to 06-050-40 Floor Panel Heating (FPH)
29
:
System.
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-050-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-050-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
CABIN TEMPERATURE ZONES

Applicable to: ALL
Typically, the cabin is divided into 2 different independently adjustable temperature zones:
Area 1 (FWD) and Area 2 (AFT).
Typical Air Distribution in the Cabin
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
The temperature zones are displayed as rectangles, each one displays the selected temperature
ạm
value (°C or °F) on the CABIN TEMPERATURE page of the FAP: Refer to 06-050-40 Cabin
Ph
Temperature Control from the Cabin.

29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-050-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-050-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
ACCESS TO THE CABIN TEMPERATURE PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the CABIN TEMPERATURE page via the TEMP page selection button
on the FAP.
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-050-30 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-050-30 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
TEMPERATURE CONTROL FROM THE COCKPIT

Applicable to: ALL
For information about the cabin temperature control from the cockpit: 02-100 COCKPIT PANELS
related to CABIN SYSTEMS.
The cockpit and cabin temperature can be controlled via the related temperature selector "Cockpit"
29
or "Cabin", both are located on the cockpit overhead panel (30VU).
2:
41
The temperature is adjustable between 18 °C (64 °F) (Cold) and 30 °C (86 °F) (Hot).
2
20
4/
CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL FROM THE CABIN
0
9/
Applicable to: ALL
-2
In addition to the cabin temperature selection in the cockpit, the cabin temperature can be adjusted
9-
on the FAP.
y2
The temperature deviation is limited to plus or minus 2.5 °C (4.5 °F) from the general temperature
àM
pre-selection in the cockpit.
Tr
ạm
SYSTEM OPERATION FROM THE FAP

Ph
HOW TO CHANGE THE TEMPERATURE SELECTION

9
To change one cabin area temperature:

:2
12
1. Push one of the (FWD or AFT) Area buttons next to the aircraft symbol.
4
An additional (FWD or AFT) AREA control pad appears:

02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-050-40 P 1/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
Example of an AREA Temperature Control Pad
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
2. Touch the + button to increase or the - button to decrease the temperature of the selected
9-
temperature zone.
y2
All of the following is indicated on the thermometer:

àM
‐ The cockpit pre-selection (black line in the blue rectangle)

Tr
‐ The cabin selection (green arrow in the blue rectangle and indicated as SELECTED
ạm
TEMPERATURE)
Ph
‐ The current cabin temperature (the value in the bulb of the thermometer).
29
Note: The air conditioning system needs a certain time to reach the selected cabin
:
12
temperature.
4
02
HOW TO RESET THE TEMPERATURE SELECTION

/2
04
To reset the temperature deviations of the cabin areas back to the pre-selected cabin
9/
temperature in the cockpit, push the Reset button.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-050-40 P 2/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←B→ 20 JAN 20

ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
FLOOR PANEL HEATING SYSTEM 

9/
-2
Applicable to: ALL

9-
The Floor Panel Heating (FPH) system  is installed to increase the temperature of the cabin floor
y2
in the forward door entry areas (Door 1L/1R ).

àM
OPERATION
Tr
ạm
The operation of the FPH system is either automatic or manual.

Ph
The temperature setting of the Heated Floor Panels (HFPs) is not adjustable.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
29
:
After aircraft power on (cabin is supplied with electrical power) the FPH system is switched on
12
automatically. It remains on during the entire flight until power is switched off again.
4
02
/2
MANUAL OPERATION
04
9/
With a dedicated button FPH Door 1  (located on the FAP) it is possible to switch the FPH
-2
system ON and OFF manually.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-050-40 P 3/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
How to Switch the FPH System ON and OFF

1. Select the CABIN TEMPERATURE page on the FAP:
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
2. In the lower right corner of the FAP screen:

y2
Touch the FPH Door 1 button to switch the FPH system ON (the button comes on in
àM
green) or OFF (the button turns grey).

Tr
ạm
PASSENGER INDIVIDUAL AIR OUTLETS

Ph
Applicable to: ALL

29
There are individual air outlets installed for the passengers above their seats in the Passenger
:
12
Service Units (PSU) that are integrated into the Overhead Stowage Compartments (OHSC).
4
02
The air flow from the air outlets can be adjusted:

/2
04
‐ The air flow direction by adjusting the position of the outlet.

9/
‐ The amount of air by turning the valve. To close the air outlet turn the valve clockwise.
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-050-40 P 4/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
Air outlets are also installed in the different rooms and entries of the cabin:
4
02
‐ In the galleys,
/2
‐ In the lavatories,
04
‐ At the door areas, and

9/
-2
‐ At the attendant stations.

9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-050-40 P 5/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←D 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-050-40 P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FUNCTION RECOVERY PROCEDURES
FAP FAILURE MESSAGES

Applicable to: ALL
The FAP displays different failure messages (blue cards) in case of failure occurrence:
FAP Message Crew Action
29
NO TEMPERATURE DATA AVAILABLE Temperature control on the FAP is not available.
2:
NO TEMPERATURE SELECT AVAILABLE The cabin temperature can only be set via the FWD and
41
NO CABIN TEMPERATURE AVAILABLE AFT cabin temperature selectors on the cockpit overhead
2
panel (30VU).
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-050-50 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FUNCTION RECOVERY PROCEDURES
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-050-50 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE WATER/WASTE SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
The purpose of the chapter water/waste system is to describe the:

‐ Potable water system
29
‐ Waste disposal system
2:
‐ Water ice protection.
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
POTABLE WATER SYSTEM

àM
The potable water system enables to:

Tr
‐ Store potable water in the potable water tank

ạm
‐ Supply water from the potable water tank to the galleys and lavatories
Ph
‐ On ground, to drain the potable water at the potable water servicing panel and the FWD Drain
Panel, through the drain valves of the potable water system.
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-060-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A321
WASTE DISPOSAL SYSTEM

The waste disposal system features are the following:
• A toilet system
The toilet system enables to:
‐ Transport the waste from the toilet bowl to the waste tank
29
‐ Store the waste in the waste tank
2:
41
‐ On ground, to drain the waste at the waste servicing panel, through the drain valves of the
2
Toilet system.
20
4/
• A waste water drain
0
9/
-2
The waste water drain system enables to:
‐ Transport wastewater from the lavatory washbasins and galley sinks to the drain masts
9-
y2
‐ In flight and on ground, to drain the wastewater overboard through the drain masts.
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
WATER ICE PROTECTION

:
12
The water ice protection prevents potable water, toilet waste and wastewater from freezing on
4
02
ground and during the flight.

/2
04
The cabin crew can monitor and control the water/waste system via the WATER/WASTE page on
9/
the FAP: Refer to 06-060-30 Description of the Water/Waste FAP Page.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-060-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A321
LOCATION OF THE POTABLE WATER TANK AND WASTE TANK

Applicable to: ALL
Example of the Potable Water Tank and the Waste Tank Location
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-060-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-060-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A321
POTABLE WATER SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
The potable water system supplies potable water to:

‐ Lavatories
‐ Wet galleys.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
L2 Water filters minimize the possibility of microbiological contamination of the water from the galley
9-
faucets and, optionally, from the lavatory faucets.

y2
Microbiological contamination may be due to the airport ground services tools, and/or to the quality of
àM
the local potable water.

Tr
L1 Lavatories and wet galleys have manual shutoff valves to stop the potable water supply.
ạm
Ph
POTABLE WATER TANK

There is one potable water tank onboard the aircraft.
29
The total capacity is 170 l (45 US Gal) or 200 l (52 US Gal).

:
L2
12
WATER QUANTITY INDICATION

4
L1
02
/2
Sensor transmits the water quantity to the CIDS.

04
The water quantity is displayed on the WATER/WASTE page of the FAP. Refer to 06-060-30
9/
-2
Function Access.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-060-30 P 1/6

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A321
WATER PRESSURIZATION
The water pressurization system provides a steady water flow at the faucets.
L2 The water tank is pressurized via bleed air and the Potable Water Compressor (optional).
L1 Note: A green (activated) WATER DEPR button (optional) on the WATER/WASTE page
indicates that the potable water system is not pressurized. After the deactivation of the
29
water depressurization function, it takes several minutes for the potable water system to
2:
41
provide water to the faucets.
2
20
L2 WATER DRAINING
4/
0
For maintenance purposes, it is possible to drain the potable water system from outside of the
9/
-2
aircraft.
9-
y2
WASTE DISPOSAL SYSTEM
àM
Applicable to: ALL
Tr
Example of the Waste Disposal System

ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
The waste disposal system includes:

/2
04
‐ The toilet system

9/
‐ The wastewater draining system.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-060-30 P 2/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A321
VACUUM TOILET SYSTEM

The vacuum toilet system uses:
‐ Potable water to flush the toilets
‐ A vacuum to transport waste materials and liquids to the waste tank
‐ A waste tank, to store the waste, materials and liquids.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
The toilet system has the following components:

‐ Waste lines and connections to each toilet
9-
‐ One waste tank located behind the bulk cargo area.

y2
àM
L2 The waste tank has a capacity of: 170 l (44 US Gal) or 250 l (66 US Gal)
‐ One vacuum generator
Tr
‐ One waste drain valve.

ạm
Ph
L1 WASTE QUANTITY INDICATION

Sensors transmit the waste quantity to the CIDS.
29
The waste quantity is displayed on the WATER/WASTE page of the FAP. Refer to 06-060-30
:
12
Function Access.
4
02
WASTE-WATER DRAINING SYSTEM

/2
04
The waste-water draining system transports the waste water from the washbasins (in the
9/
-2
lavatories) and the sinks (in the galleys) outside the aircraft, via the drain masts.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-060-30 P 3/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A321
Example of the Waste-Water Draining System
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
The aircraft has two drain masts:

12
‐ The forward drain mast that is connected to the galleys and lavatories in the forward area
4
02
‐ The aft drain mast that is connected to the galleys and lavatories in the aft area.
/2
04
9/
WATER ICE PROTECTION

-2
Applicable to: ALL

9-
y2
All lines (potable water system, toilet system and wastewater system) installed close, or in contact
àM
with the aircraft fuselage, are protected by foam and heaters.

The configuration of the heaters can be different, depending on the operators operational
Tr
ạm
requirements.
Ph
The drain masts are heated, as they are installed outside of the aircraft.
Note: In the case of ice protection failure, Refer to 06-060-50 FAP - Messages for the ICE
29
Protection System.
:
12
It might be necessary to locally shut off the water supply, to avoid the drainage of the
4
02
wastewater system.
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-060-30 P 4/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A321
ACCESS TO THE WATER/WASTE PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
Push the WATER/WASTE page selection button on the FAP to get access to the WATER/WASTE
page.
Access to the WATER/WASTE Page on the FAP
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
DESCRIPTION OF THE WATER/WASTE FAP PAGE
9-
Applicable to: ALL
y2
The WATER/WASTE page on the FAP enables the cabin crew to monitor and control the
àM
WATER/WASTE system.
Tr
Access the WATER/WASTE page with the WATER/WASTE page selection button on the FAP.
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-060-30 P 5/6

à
Tr
CCOM D to E → 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A321
Example of the Water/Water FAP Page
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
Title Description
9-
WASTE QUANTITY Indicator The WASTE QUANTITY indicator shows the current waste quantity in the waste tank.
y2
WATER QUANTITY Indicator The WATER QUANTITY indicator shows the current water quantity in the potable water
àM
tank.
PRE-SELECT Button  The optional PRE-SELECT button opens the PRE-SELECT control pad.
Tr
ạm
RESET WARN Button The RESET WARN button resets the rinse valve warning.
AUTO FLUSH Button 
Ph
The optional AUTO FLUSH button flushes all toilets.

WATER DEPR Button  The optional WATER DEPR. button activates or deactivates the water depressurization
function.
: 29
12
Note: After the climb/descent phases, the water quantity indication may temporarily not be
4
correct. Therefore, it is important to compare the displayed values with their condition on
02
ground. After 20 min on ground, the water quantity indication will be correct again.
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-060-30 P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←E 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL OPERATION
OPERATION OF THE WATER/WASTE FAP PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
WATER AND WASTE QUANTITY INDICATION

The cabin crew can use the WATER/WASTE page of the FAP to display the quantity of potable
29
water for the next flight prior to ground servicing.
2:
Example of the Water/Waste FAP Page
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
The WATER/WASTE page displays:

‐ The waste quantity in %
29
‐ The potable water quantity in %.

:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-060-40 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-060-40 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FUNCTIONAL RECOVERY PROCEDURES
FAP MESSAGES
Applicable to: ALL
WATER AND WASTE SYSTEM FAP MESSAGES:

Messages shown on FAP WATER/WASTE PAGE.
29
FAP Message ACTION Cabin Crew INFORMATION
2:
41
BASELINE DEFINITION
WWP-list box: Information during servicing on On ground, vacuum system disabled.
2
20
WATER SERVICE DOOR OPEN. ground.
4/
WWP-list box: Report message to flight deck and Indicates a malfunction of the vacuum
0
9/
VACUUM SYSTEM DISABLED ON make an entry in the logbook. generator. The toilet will work normally
-2
GROUND. at high altitude with cabin differential
9-
pressure.
y2
WWP-list box: Information Toilets INOP due to servicing.
VACUUM SYSTEM DISABLED - àM
GROUND SERVICING.
Tr
WWP-list box: C/B CHECK: INFO MCDU for maintenance action.

ạm
CHECK LAVATORY - POWER SUPPLY:

Ph
CAUTION It is not allowed

LAV XX
to reset a tripped
C/B. If you reset
9
:2
it, you can cause

12
an overload to
4
another system.
02
/2
Make an entry in the logbook to

04
record the tripped C/B.

9/
Check proper function of the

-2
lavatory (e.g. Flush cycle, no leak

9-
from rinse valve etc.). If necessary

y2
deactivate the lavatory.

àM
WWP-list box: Deactivate the affected lavatories. INFO MCDU for maintenance action.
VACUUM SYSTEM DISABLED - WASTE
Tr
TANK FULL
ạm
WWP-list box: Information INFO MCDU for maintenance action.

Ph
VACUUM SYSTEM DISABLED - WASTE

TANK FULL
29
blue card:
:
NO WASTE QUANTITY DATA

12
AVAILABLE
4
02
WWP-list box: Only on ground: servicing required. Waste tank not empty (30 %) ground
/2
WASTE TANK NOT EMPTY - CHECK service required.

04
LEVEL - GROUND SERVICE REQUIRED

9/
-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-060-50 P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A321

FAP Message ACTION Cabin Crew INFORMATION
BASELINE DEFINITION
WWP-list box: NO ACTION INFO MCDU for maintenance action.
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED - WASTE (Last Leg Report)
WATER
29
WWP-list box: Check lavatory for correct function INFO MCDU for maintenance action.
2:
SHUT OFF WATER SUPPLY : LAV X, .... (rinse valve failure).
41
If necessary deactivate the
2
lavatory.Refer to 03-080-40-20 How
20
4/
Deactivate a Lavatory.
0
WWP-list box: Information Toilets INOP due to water
9/
VACUUM SYSTEM DISABLED - WATER depressurization..
-2
DEPRESS ACTIVE
9-
WATER and WASTE SYSTEM FAP Messages
y2
WATER AND WASTE SYSTEM FAP MESSAGES ICE PROTECTION SYSTEM àM
Tr
Messages shown on FAP SYSTEM INFO PAGE under the button 'ice prot.'.
ạm
Ph
FAP Message (BASELINE DEFINITION) ACTION Cabin Crew INFORMATION

WWP-list box
DRAINMAST HEATER FWD FAIL. FWD lavatories and galleys must INFO MCDU
9
:2
not be used.
12
Deactivate the lavatories.Refer to

4
03-080-40-20 How Deactivate a

02
/2
Lavatory.
04
Do not discard liquids through the

9/
galley sink.
-2
DRAINMAST UNIT FWD FAIL FWD lavatories and galleys must INFO MCDU
not be used.
9-
Deactivate the lavatories. Refer to

y2

àM
Lavatory.
Tr

ạm
galley sink.
Ph

:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-060-50 P 2/4

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A321

FAP Message (BASELINE DEFINITION) ACTION Cabin Crew INFORMATION
WWP-list box
DRAINMAST HEATER AFT FAIL AFT lavatories and galleys must not INFO MCDU
be used.
29
2:
Lavatory.
41
2
galley sink.
20
DRAINMAST UNIT AFT FAIL AFT lavatories and galleys must not INFO MCDU
4/
0
be used.
9/
-2
9-
Lavatory.
y2
galley sink. àM
Tr
WATER and WASTE SYSTEM FAP messages ICE PROTECTION SYSTEM

ạm
Ph
UNEXPECTED WATERFLOW IN A LAVATORY

Applicable to: ALL
9
:2
Unexpected waterflow in a lavatory

4 12
02
/2
YES NO
04
9/
-2
1. Operate the manual shut-off valve.

9-
In the related lavatory, open the access door and turn control
y2
handle of the manual shut-off valve to the closed position.

àM
CAUTION Switch off the water heater after the manual water
Tr
shut-off valve has been closed. This will prevent

ạm
the water heater from heating up while empty and

Ph
will avoid the risk of potential hazards.

29
Please lock the lavatory for the rest of the flight.

:
END END
12
Make an entry in the logbook to record the deactivation.

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-060-50 P 3/4

à
Tr
CCOM ← A to B 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
WATER/WASTE
A321
UNEXPECTED WATERFLOW IN A GALLEY

Applicable to: ALL
Unexpected waterflow in a galley
29
YES NO
2:
412
1. Operate the manual shut-off valve.
20
In the related galley, turn the control handle of the manual shut-off
4/
0
valve to the closed position. For more information: Refer to
9/
-2
03-070-30-50 Description of the Manual Water Shutoff Valve.
9-
CAUTION Switch off the beverage makers after the manual
y2
water shut-off valve has been closed.
àM
Make an entry in the logbook to record the deactivation. END END
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-060-50 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM C 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE SMOKE DETECTION (SD) SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
The Smoke Detection Function (SDF) is part of the Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS).
The SDF detects smoke via smoke detectors and provides visual and aural alerts via the CIDS
indicators if smoke is detected.
29
2:
There is a dedicated SMOKE DETECTION page on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) that:
41
‐ Appears automatically, if smoke is detected
2
20
‐ Shows an INOP message of the smoke sensor that has a defect.
04/
The cabin crew can reset the alerts on the CIDS control panels.
9/
-2
L2 If smoke is detected, there are also alerts in the cockpit.
9-
L1 Note: All smoke alerts and reset functions are defined in the Cabin Assignment Module (CAM).
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
LOCATION OF THE SMOKE DETECTORS

Applicable to: ALL
Smoke detectors are installed in the lavatories, and optionally at the IFE control centers  .
The location of the smoke detectors is indicated on the SMOKE DETECTION page on the FAP.
The smoke detectors are typically installed in the ceiling.
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-22 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-22 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
ACCESS TO THE SMOKE DETECTION PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The SMOKE DETECTION page displays automatically on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) screen if
smoke is detected.
However, the cabin crew can also access the SMOKE DETECTION page via the SMOKE DETECT
29
page selection button on the FAP.
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
SMOKE DETECTORS
Applicable to: ALL
The smoke detectors monitor the amount of smoke (particles) in the air. If smoke is detected, the
connected SDF will trigger the smoke alerts in the cabin and in the cockpit.
29
Note: Spray (e.g. hair spray) used near a smoke detector may trigger a smoke alert.
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-30 P 1/14

à
Tr
CCOM A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
DESCRIPTION OF THE SMOKE DETECTION FUNCTION

Applicable to: ALL
CABIN SMOKE ALERTS

The table below provides an overview of the different types of smoke alerts.
29
Type of Alert Indicator Indication
2:
41
Cabin and Crew
Loudspeakers, or
2
Aural alert A triple lo chime every 30 s.
20
optionally Crew
4/
Loudspeakers, only
0
9/
The CAUTION light comes ON steady amber.
-2
Flight Attendant The automatically displayed SMOKE DETECTION page shows the affected
9-
Panel (FAP) location.
y2
The SMOKE RESET key below the screen comes ON steady red.
Additional Attendant
The SMOKE RESET pb comes ON steady red.
àM
Panel (AAP)
Tr
Additional Indication The affected location is indicated, e.g. "SMOKE LAV A". (maximum 16 digits).
ạm
Panel (AIP) The red indicator comes ON flashing.

Ph
On the ACP (typically nearest to the activated smoke detector) the corresponding
Visual alerts amber segment comes ON flashing.
9
:2
Note: The configuration of the ACPs may be customized:

12
Area Call Panel

(ACP)
4
‐ The amber segment comes ON flashing on all ACPs, near to the

02
area of the detected smoke.

/2
‐ The amber segment comes ON flashing on all ACPs in the cabin.

04
9/
-2
An amber smoke indicator comes ON flashing at the affected location.

Local Smoke
9-
Note: The definition for the word "indicator" may vary. E.g. the Smoke
Indicator
y2
Indicator on a lavatory is also know as Lavatory Call Light.

àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-30 P 2/14

à
Tr
CCOM B 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
SMOKE RESET
Applicable to: ALL
SMOKE RESET
To reset the smoke alert, there are the following reset possibilities, depending on the aircraft
29
customization:
2:
‐ Via FAP
41
2
‐ The SMOKE RESET button  on the SMOKE DETECTION page (the button is Cabin
20
Assignment Module (CAM) defined)
4/
0
‐ The SMOKE RESET key on the subpanel.
9/
-2
‐ Via AAP
9-
The SMOKE RESET pb.
y2
‐ Via EVAC Panel
àM
The RESET pb.
Tr
Note: All of the following visual alerts remain active until smoke is no longer detected:
ạm
‐ On the FAP
Ph
‐ On the AAP(s).
9
SMOKE RESET VIA THE FAP (CAM DEFINED)

:2
12
When the cabin crew pushes the SMOKE RESET button  or the SMOKE RESET key:
4
02
‐ The aural alert resets

/2
‐ The visual alerts on all ACPs, AIPs and the local smoke indicator reset.
04
9/
SMOKE RESET FROM THE AAP (OPTIONAL AND CAM DEFINED)

-2
When the cabin crew pushes the SMOKE RESET pb:

9-

y2
àM
‐ The visual alerts on the ACPs, AIPs and the local smoke indicator reset.
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-30 P 3/14

à
Tr
CCOM C→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
SMOKE RESET FROM THE EVAC PANEL (CAM DEFINED)

Typical EVAC Panel
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
When the cabin crew pushes the RESET pb:
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
SMOKE SENSOR INOPERATIVE OR NO SENSOR DATA AVAILABLE

Applicable to: ALL
9
:2
12
SMOKE SENSOR INOPERATIVE OR NO SENSOR DATA AVAILABLE

4
02
SMOKE SENSOR INOPERATIVE

/2
04
If a smoke detector is inoperative, the following is indicated on the FAP:

9/
‐ The amber CAUTION light comes ON flashing and changes to steady when the cabin crew
-2
selects the SMOKE DETECTION page.

9-
‐ On the SMOKE DETECTION page:

y2
‐ The affected smoke sensor is indicated in amber.

àM
‐ On the right hand side of the display a SENSOR INOP message is displayed.
Tr
For details regarding the SENSOR INOP message on the FAP: Refer to 06-070-30 Sensor Inop
ạm
Information on the SMOKE DETECTION Page.

Ph
NO SENSOR DATA AVAILABLE

29
If the smoke detection system does not send any signal, the following is indicated on the FAP:
:
12
‐ The amber CAUTION light comes ON flashing and changes to steady when the SMOKE
4
02
DETECTION page is displayed.

/2
‐ On the SMOKE DETECTION page:

04
‐ All smoke sensors are amber.

9/
-2
‐ On the right hand side of the display a NO DATA AVAILABLE message is displayed.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-30 P 4/14

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
For details regarding the NO DATA AVAILABLE message on the FAP: Refer to 06-070-30 No
Data Available Information on the SMOKE DETECTION Page.
SMOKE DETECTION CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
29
2:
SMOKE DETECTION CONTROL AND INDICATOR ON THE SUBPANEL OF THE FAP
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
SMOKE DETECTION PAGE ON THE FAP

àM
The SMOKE DETECTION page enables the cabin crew to:

Tr
‐ Locate the area where smoke is detected

ạm
‐ Reset smoke alerts in case of smoke detection 

Ph
‐ Monitor the status of the smoke detectors in the cabin.

29
The example below shows the SMOKE DETECTION page when there is no smoke detected..
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-30 P 5/14

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
INDICATORS ON THE SMOKE DETECTION PAGE

9/
-2
The color of the indicator changes according to the status of the smoke detectors (sensors).
9-
Button/Indication Description
y2
Gray Square No smoke is detected and the smoke detector is operating.

àM
Tr
‐ A smoke sensor fault is detected, or

ạm
Amber Square
‐ No data are available from the smoke detectors.
Ph
Red Square Smoke is detected.

29

:
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-30 P 6/14

à
Tr
CCOM ←E→ 12 APR 22

ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321

Button/Indication Description
Amber The amber CAUTION button comes ON steady on the automatically displayed SMOKE
CAUTION DETECTION page if smoke is detected.
Button The amber CAUTION button comes ON flashing on any displayed FAP page, if either
one or both of the following apply:
29
‐ A smoke detector is inoperable
2:
‐ There are no data available from a smoke detector.
41
2
SMOKE
20
RESET Button When the cabin crew pushes the SMOKE RESET button  :
4/
‐ The aural alert resets.
0
9/
-2
For details about the smoke reset: Refer to 06-070-30 Smoke Reset.
9-
y2
Note: The visual alerts on the FAP and the AAP(s) remain active until smoke is no
longer detected. àM
Tr
ạm
SMOKE WARNING ON THE SMOKE DETECTION PAGE

Ph
The example below shows the SMOKE DETECTION page with a smoke warning and the optional
SMOKE RESET button.
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-30 P 7/14

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
SENSOR INOP INFORMATION ON THE SMOKE DETECTION PAGE

-2
The example below shows the SMOKE DETECTION page with a SENSOR INOP information.
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-30 P 8/14

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
NO DATA AVAILABLE INFORMATION ON THE SMOKE DETECTION PAGE

-2
The example below shows the SMOKE DETECTION page with a NO DATA AVAILABLE
9-
message.
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-30 P 9/14

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
ADDITIONAL SMOKE INDICATORS IN THE CABIN

-2
9-
Applicable to: ALL

y2
ADDITIONAL SMOKE INDICATORS IN THE CABIN

àM
Tr
If smoke is detected in the cabin, in addition to the smoke indications on the FAP there are also
ạm
indications on the:
Ph
‐ Additional Attendant Panel (AAP)

Refer to 06-070-30 Smoke Indication on the Additional Attendant Panel (AAP)
29
‐ Additional Indication Panel (AIP)

:
12
Refer to 06-070-30 Smoke Indication on the Additional Indication Panel (AIP)

4
02
‐ Area Control Panel (ACP)

/2
Refer to 06-070-30 Smoke Indication on the Additional Call Panel (ACP)

04
‐ Local Smoke Detector Indications (e.g. on the exterior wall of the lavatories)
9/
-2
Refer to 06-070-30 Smoke Indication on the Local Smoke Indicator.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-30 P 10/14

à
Tr
CCOM ← E to F → 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
SMOKE INDICATION ON THE ADDITIONAL ATTENDANT PANEL (AAP)

Example of an AAP
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
Typical Pushbutton/ Description àM
Indicator
Tr
ạm
SMOKE RESET
Ph
If smoke is detected, the SMOKE RESET pb/indicator comes ON steady red.

pb/indicator
9
:2
12
SMOKE INDICATION ON THE ADDITIONAL INDICATION PANEL (AIP)

4
02
If smoke is detected:
/2
‐ The red Light Emitting Diode (LED) of the related Attendant Indication Panel (AIP) comes ON
04
flashing.
9/
-2
‐ The display area of the AIP indicates the affected area (e.g. Smoke Lav A).
9-
Additional Indication Panel (AIP)

y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
SMOKE INDICATION ON THE AREA CONTROL PANEL (ACP)

/2
04
If smoke is detected, the corresponding amber segment flashes on the ACP, typically nearest to
9/
the activated smoke detector.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-30 P 11/14

à
Tr
CCOM ←F→ 12 APR 22

ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
Note: The configuration of the ACPs may be customized:

‐ The amber segment comes ON flashing on all ACPs, near to the area of the detected
smoke.
‐ The amber segment comes ON flashing on all ACPs in the cabin.
29
Standard ACP (Amber/Red/Blue) Optional ACP (Amber/Green/Red/Blue)
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
SMOKE INDICATION ON THE LOCAL SMOKE INDICATOR

9
:2
If smoke is detected in a lavatory, the related local smoke indicator (lavatory call light) comes ON
12
flashing amber.
4
02
Typically, the lavatory call light is on the exterior lavatory wall.

/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-30 P 12/14

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-30 P 13/14

à
Tr
CCOM ←F 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SMOKE DETECTION
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-070-30 P 14/14

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT SEAT SETTINGS

Applicable to: ALL
The Cabin Settings function  is controlled and monitored via the Audio and the Seat Settings
page on the FAP.
The cabin crew can access the Audio page  and the Seat Settings page both, on ground and in
29
flight.
2:
41
FURTHER INFORMATION ABOUT SEAT SETTINGS
2
20
The cabin crew can control the following cabin settings (depending on the customized CAM
04/
configuration):
9/
-2
Via the AUDIO Page  Via the SEAT SETTINGS Page
9-
Passenger Address Level Reading Lights Management
y2
(Sets the volume level for the Passenger Address system) (Refer to Reading Lights Settings)
Call Reset àM
Passenger Calls Management
Tr
(Resets or enables passenger calls (Resets or enables passenger calls
ạm
(Refer to How to Reset PAX Calls)) (Refer to Passenger Call Settings))

Ph
Chime Inhibit Chime Inhibit

(Suppresses the chimes of passenger calls (Suppresses the chimes of passenger calls (zonewise or
(Refer to How to Inhibit Seats)) seatwise)
9
:2
(Refer to How to Reset PAX Calls))

12
A/R OVRD
4
(Manually overrides the audio reproducer)

02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-080-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-080-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A321
ACCESS TO THE SEAT SETTINGS PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the Seat Settings page via the Seat Setting selection button (or via the
Audio button  ) on the FAP.
Access to the Seat Settings Page on the FAP
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
If installed in the CAM, the Cabin Settings function can be accessed via the Audio button.
-2
Access to the Cabin Settings Function via the Audio Page on the FAP
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-080-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-080-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION OF THE SEAT SETTINGS PAGE
SEAT SETTINGS - PASSENGER CALL SETTINGS

Applicable to: ALL
The Seat Settings page on the FAP enables the cabin crew to inhibit (or to enable) passenger calls
per seat, per class, per room, or from all seats (depending on CAM definition).
Example of a Passenger Call Settings Page on the FAP
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
1. Passenger Call Pad This tab selects the Passenger Call part of the Seat Settings.
2. Reading Lights Pad This tab selects the Reading Lights part of the Seat Settings.
29
3. Aircraft-wide Adjustment Reset This is for an area-wide reset of the pax call settings. The reset can be by
:
class or by room (e.g. Call Reset for ALL aircraft, for B/C, or for T/C).
12
4. Chime Inhibit This is for an area-wide set or reset of the chime inhibit function. The set or
4
02
reset can be done by class or by room.

/2

04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-080-30 P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A321

5. Inhibited Seats This indication box indicates the inhibited seats.
Enable All Button This button enables all seats on the aircraft.
Inhibit All Button This button inhibits all seats on the aircraft.
6. Inhibited Seats Navigation Controls This is to select an individual seat via. An individual passenger seat can be
29
selected via the seat row and the seat letter via the scroll up or scroll down
2:
icon.
41
If there are no further entries above or below the colored bar, the respective
2
scroll up / scroll down button is disabled.
20
4/
0
SEAT SETTINGS - READING LIGHTS SETTINGS
9/
-2
Applicable to: ALL
9-
The Reading Lights pad enables the cabin crew to switch on/off (set/reset) reading lights per seat.
y2
àM
Example of a Reading Light Settings Page on the FAP
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-080-30 P 2/4

à
Tr
CCOM ← A to B → 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A321
1. Reading Lights tab This displays the Reading Lights Settings control pad.
2. Reading Lights, Seats to Switch This enables the cabin crew to select an individual seat via the scroll
On/Off Navigation Controls up/down icons or the keyboard icon.
If there are no further entries above or below the colored bar (highlight
position) the respective scroll up / down icon is disabled.
29
The keyboard button will open the keyboard on the screen. This enables the
2:
cabin crew to enter the desired seat on the list.
41
The Seat Select button confirms the selection of the desired seats.
2
The R/L Set button turns ON the reading lights for individual passenger
20
seats.
4/
0
The R/L Reset button turns OFF the reading lights for individual passenger
9/
seats.
-2
L2 The initial status for the indication of the selection boxes and buttons is:
9-
y2
‐ The selection box for the seat row numbers indicates all CAM assigned seat rows. All related
controls are available/enabled. àM
Tr
‐ The target seat window is empty.

ạm
‐ The Set/Reset and the Select buttons are deactivated.

Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-080-30 P 3/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-080-30 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL OPERATION OF THE SEAT SETTINGS PAGE
HOW TO INHIBIT ALL SEATS SIMULTANEOUSLY

Applicable to: ALL
Follow the steps below to inhibit all seats with a single operation:
1. Press the Chime Inhibit button on the ALL pad. A confirmation screen will display the message
29
that all seats will be inhibited.
2:
41
Example of How to Inhibit All Seats Simultaneously
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
HOW TO ENABLE INHIBITED SEATS

29
:
12
Applicable to: ALL

4
Follow the steps below to enable a single seat or enable all seats for which the passenger chime is
02
inhibited:
/2
04
1. To enable a single seat, select the inhibited seat via the Seat Row Select and Seat Identifier
9/
-2
Select buttons.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-080-40 P 1/4

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A321
‐ Press the corresponding seat button to enable a previously inhibited seat via the Enable button.
Disabled seats are marked gray. The selected seat will be marked as enabled.
‐ To enable all inhibited seats, press the Enable All button. All seats will be cleared from the
selection box.
29
Example of How to Enable Inhibited Seats
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Note: If there are no entries (no inhibited seats) in the inhibited seats selection box, the Enable
Ph
and Enable All button will be inhibited (ghosted).

29
HOW TO RESET PAX CALL

:
12
Applicable to: ALL

4
02
The buttons for the corresponding seats are located on different class buttons for the cabin zones
/2
04
and rooms (customized).

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-080-40 P 2/4

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A321
To reset the passenger calls in a cabin zone or room, press the buttons of the corresponding seat of
the desired zone or room.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-080-40 P 3/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←C 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SEAT SETTINGS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-080-40 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE SYSTEM INFO PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
The System Info page provides to the cabin crew the status indication of several cabin systems.
FURTHER INFORMATION ABOUT THE SYSTEM INFO PAGE
29
‐ Refer to Access to the System Info Page on the FAP
2:
41
‐ Refer to System Info Page.
2
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-090-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-090-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
A321
ACCESS TO THE SYSTEM INFO PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the System Info page via the System Info page selection button on the
FAP.
Access to the System Info Page on the FAP
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-090-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-090-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEM INFO PAGE
DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEM INFO PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
SYSTEMS AND FUNCTIONS ON THE SYSTEM INFO PAGE

The following (customized) systems/functions are incorporated in the System Info page:
29
‐ CIDS Internals (See CIDS Internals)
2:
41
‐ Power Management (See Power Management)
2
‐ Miscellaneous Messages (See Miscellaneous Messages on the FAP).
20
4/
Example of the System Info Page on the FAP
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
CIDS INTERNALS LIST BOX

:
412
When the System Info page appears, the CIDS Internals list box is displayed first: The CIDS
02
Internals button is indicated in the active/green status.

/2
04
New messages are listed in the first row of the list-box.

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-090-30 P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
A321
Example of the CIDS Internals List Box
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
Note: If there are new messages/failures, an exclamation mark (CIDS Internals!) appears
9
:2
above the CIDS Internals button.

412
EXAMPLES OF MESSAGES ON THE FAP

02
/2
The SYSTEM INFO page provides messages in the Miscellaneous list-box. This is shown in the
04
examples below.
9/
-2
Example of Messages on the FAP Cabin Crew Action

9-
SYSTEM OK No cabin crew action is needed.

y2
IFE CENTER LOSS OF COOLING The cabin crew must shut down the IFE Center (IFEC) via the IFE Power
àM
page on the FAP.

Tr
IFE CENTER NO COOLING DATA The cabin crew must check the Crew Terminal (CT) for failure messages.
ạm
If the message persists the cabin crew must shut down the IFEC via the IFE
Ph
Power page on the FAP.
A special indicator appears if there are messages/failures (except for the SYSTEM OK message)
29
for the available systems/functions.

:
12
EXAMPLES OF MESSAGES RELATED TO CIDS POWER MANAGEMENT

4
02
CIDS Power Management Example of Displayed Message on the FAP

/2
04
Identifier
9/
VCS Automatic Power Saving Active: Degradation in Air Conditioning System

-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-090-30 P 2/4

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
A321

Galley Feeder Automatic Power Saving Active: Degradation in Galley Heating
or
Automatic Power Saving Active: Degradation of Galley Catering System (e.g.
GU12)
Lights Automatic Power Saving Active: Degradation in General Cabin Illumination
29
System
2:
IFE Automatic Power Saving Active: Degradation in IFE System (Seat Power
41
Supply)
2
20
BLUE CARD
4/
0
If the CIDS is not supplied with full power supply, the systems/functions are not accessible. This is
9/
-2
indicated by a blue card on the FAP screen.
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-090-30 P 3/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
SYSTEM INFO
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-090-30 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN STATUS
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE CABIN STATUS PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can use the Cabin Status page to receive a general overview of the current status of
the cabin systems.
Each system status appears as a different aircraft symbol (e.g. Lights, Temperature, Doors/Slides,
29
Water/Waste, and Smoke Detection).
2:
41
Note: Depending on CAM configuration, up to five aircraft symbols may appear on the Cabin
2
20
Status page.
04/
FURTHER INFORMATION ABOUT THE CABIN STATUS FUNCTION
9/
-2
‐ Refer to Access to the Cabin Status Page on the FAP
9-
‐ Refer to Description of the Cabin Status Page.
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-100-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN STATUS
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-100-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN STATUS
A321
ACCESS TO THE CABIN STATUS PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the Cabin Status page via the Cabin Status page selection button on the
FAP.
Access to the Cabin Status Page
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-100-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN STATUS
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-100-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN STATUS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CABIN STATUS PAGE
DESCRIPTION OF THE CABIN STATUS PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
The Cabin Status page gives the cabin crew an overview of the status of all related cabin systems.
Note: On the left side of the FAP page, the Cabin Ready button  is available and
29
enabled/inhibited depending on the flight phase.
2:
41
Example of a Cabin Status Page
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
Typically, the cabin status provides the status information about:

‐ Cabin Lighting: Refer to Cabin Lighting
29
:
‐ Temperature: Refer to Cabin Temperature Control from the Cabin

12
‐ Doors / Slides: Refer to General Information about the DOORS/SLIDES FAP Page
4
02
‐ Water / Waste: Refer to System Functions

/2
‐ Smoke Detection:Refer to General Information about the Smoke Detection Function.

04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-100-30 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN STATUS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CABIN STATUS PAGE
Note: ‐ This group of symbols is defined in the CAM and can be customized.
‐ If the cabin crew touch an aircraft symbol, the related cabin system page appears.
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-100-30 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
CABIN READY SIGNALING
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE CABIN READY SIGNALING FUNCTION 

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew members use the Cabin Ready function  to inform the flight crew that the cabin is
ready for take-off or landing.
29
Note: The Cabin Ready button  can be located either on a separate page from the drop down
2:
menu or can be on the Cabin Status page.
412
FURTHER INFORMATION ABOUT THE CABIN READY FUNCTION
20
4/
‐ Refer to Access to the Cabin Ready Page on the FAP
0
9/
‐ Refer to Description of the Cabin Ready Function.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-110-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-110-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
ACCESS TO THE CABIN READY PAGE ON THE FAP

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can access the Cabin Ready page  via the Cabin Ready selection button  on
the FAP.
Cabin Ready Signaling
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
Button Description / Color Function

4
02
/2
The Cabin Ready

04
Ghosted
function is unavailable.
9/
-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-110-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
The Cabin Ready function

Gray
is available, but inactive.
29
Green The Cabin Ready function is active.
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-110-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CABIN READY PAGE
DESCRIPTION OF THE CABIN READY FUNCTION 

Applicable to: ALL
CABIN READY FUNCTION AVAILABILITY

The Cabin Ready function is available for take-off and landing during a predefined period of time,
29
depending on the CIDS customization. Within this period of time, the Cabin Ready function can be
2:
activated at any time.
41
One of the two following solutions is pre-defined in the CAM programming:
2
20
‐ Solution 1: The function is controlled by a timer.
4/
0
When activated, the Cabin Ready signal remains active for a customized duration of time, and
9/
-2
will be deactivated automatically after this duration.
9-
L2 Note: The timer duration can be selected between 1 min to 9 min. This is defined in the CAM
y2
programming. Optionally, the extension of the nose landing gears can be taken into
àM
account to automatically reset the Cabin Ready at landing.
Tr
‐ Solution 2: The availability of the Cabin Ready function is activated/deactivated by flight phases.
ạm
L1
It is reset automatically and is unavailable during predefined flight phases, in order to avoid
Ph
unintentional operation.
9
The Cabin Ready function is available under the following conditions:

:2
L2
12
‐ Before takeoff:
4
02
• After CIDS power-up and 2 engines running (high oil pressure)

/2
• As long as the aircraft speed is below 80 kt.

04
9/
‐ Before landing:
-2
• Slats/flaps activation in flight phases 6 and 7

9-
• Until aircraft speed after landing is below 80 kt.

y2
àM
Tr
L1 HOW TO USE THE CABIN READY FUNCTION

ạm
When the entire cabin is ready for take-off or landing, the purser presses the Cabin Ready button
Ph
on the FAP to inform the flight crew.

As soon as the purser activates the Cabin Ready function, the Cabin Ready button turns to green
29
to confirm that Cabin Ready is indicated in the cockpit.

:
412
HOW TO RESET THE CABIN READY FUNCTION

02
/2
The Cabin Ready signaling can be reset in different ways:

04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-110-30 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CABIN READY PAGE
‐ Manual reset: When Cabin Ready is activated, the cabin crew can manually reset the Cabin
Ready signal by pressing the Cabin Ready button a second time.
‐ Automatic reset:
• During takeoff after the aircraft speed exceeds 80 kt
• After landing when the aircraft speed is below 80 kt.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-110-30 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
GALLEY COOLING
A321
GALLEY COOLING 
Applicable to: ALL
DESCRIPTION OF THE GALLEY COOLING SYSTEM

The main purpose of the galley cooling system is to provide and distribute the cooling to the
29
galleys.
2:
The galley cooling system uses Air Cooling Units (ACUs) in designated galleys to cool the trolleys
41
and/or trolley compartments.
2
20
The cabin crew can control the galley cooling system via the electrical panels in the galleys.
4/
For more information about the galley electrical panel: Refer to 03-070-10 Electrical Panel.
0
9/
-2
GALLEY COOLING PRINCIPLES
9-
In cooled galleys, the trolley compartments are cooled with the air over principle or the air through
y2
principle.
àM
AIR OVER PRINCIPLE
Tr
ạm
With the air over principle, the ACU provides cooled air to the designated trolley compartments.
Ph
The cooled air enters the trolley compartment at the rear wall and circulates around the trolley.
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-120 P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
GALLEY COOLING
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
Note: The trolley compartment door must be closed immediately after removal or installation
àM
of the trolley.
Tr
AIR THROUGH PRINCIPLE

ạm
Ph
With the air through principle, the ACU provides cooled air directly in the trolley.
The cooled air enters the trolley at the rear wall and circulates inside the trolley. Subsequently,
the heated air is led back to the ACU.
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-120 P 2/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←A→ 03 JUL 19

ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
GALLEY COOLING
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
OPERATION
àM
HOW TO SWITCH ON THE GALLEY COOLING

Tr
ạm
In order to start the galley cooling in a designated galley, the cabin crew must switch on the
Ph
corresponding ACU via the galley electrical panel in the related galley.
Switch on the ON/OFF pb-sw to turn on the ACU.
29
Note: All ACUs have to be switched on individually via the galley electrical panel in the
:
12
related galley.
4
02
The galley cooling is ready for cooling after approximately 15 min.

/2
HOW TO SWITCH OFF THE GALLEY COOLING

04
9/
The cabin crew can switch off the ACU individually via the electrical panel in the related galley.
-2
Switch off the ON/OFF pb-sw to turn off the ACU.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-120 P 3/4

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN SYSTEMS
GALLEY COOLING
A321
Note: The cabin crew must switch off each ACU separately.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 06-120 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
CABIN OXYGEN
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
CABIN OXYGEN
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
07-010 Description
Fixed Cabin Oxygen System...................................................................................................................................A
Oxygen Container.................................................................................................................................................... B
Oxygen Mask...........................................................................................................................................................C
Test Port.................................................................................................................................................................. D
29
Depletion Indication................................................................................................................................................. E
2:
Cabin Oxygen Options.............................................................................................................................................F
2 41
20
07-020 Operation
4/
Container and mask operation................................................................................................................................ A
0
9/
Manual opening via MRT........................................................................................................................................ B
-2
9-
07-030 Location
y2
OXYGEN UNITS LOCATION.................................................................................................................................. A
àM
OXYGNE UNITS LOCATION.................................................................................................................................. B
Tr
OXYGEN UNITS LOCATION..................................................................................................................................C
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN OXYGEN
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN OXYGEN
DESCRIPTION
A321
FIXED CABIN OXYGEN SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
The fixed cabin oxygen system provides oxygen to cabin occupants in the case of a
depressurization. The system operates automatically in the case of a depressurization.
The main components of the system are:
29
2:
‐ Oxygen masks and chemical oxygen sources that are stored in containers,
41
‐ Computers that automatically activate the system if required, and
2
20
‐ Controls and indicators in the cockpit that enable flight crew to manually activate the complete
4/
system.
0
9/
-2
The number and location of oxygen masks is customized according to the cabin layout.
9-
y2
OXYGEN CONTAINER
Applicable to: ALL
àM
Tr
Oxygen masks are stowed in containers. The containers are installed above the passenger seats,
ạm
the Cabin Attendant Seats (CAS), and in the ceiling of the galleys and of the lavatories. The
Ph
containers are normally closed.

Each container has 2 to 4 oxygen masks.
9
:2
Each container has a cylinder which is the oxygen source. The oxygen source is a chemical
12
generator.
4
02
Note: In the lavatories gaseous cylinders may be installed instead of chemical cylinders.
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 07-010 P 1/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN OXYGEN
DESCRIPTION
A321
Example of opened container
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
OXYGEN MASK
04
9/
Applicable to: ALL

-2
The oxygen mask has:

9-
‐ an elastic band to maintain the mask on the user's face,

y2
‐ a reservoir bag,
àM
‐ a face mask, and

Tr
‐ a flow indicator.
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 07-010 P 2/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN OXYGEN
DESCRIPTION
A321
Example of oxygen mask
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
TEST PORT
04
9/
Applicable to: ALL

-2
Maintenance personnel perform periodical tests of the oxygen containers opening. In this case, they
9-
prevent the masks to drop down in order to avoid long repacking times. Each container has a test
y2
mode. When a container is in test mode, the container door and the masks are retained when the
àM
system is activated. There is a test port on each container to set it in the test mode. There are two
Tr
models of test ports. Both models must be flush with the container in normal operation of the aircraft.
ạm
CAUTION If a container is in test mode, the related masks will not drop down in the case of a
Ph
depressurization. Report to the Purser.

29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 07-010 P 3/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN OXYGEN
DESCRIPTION
A321
Example of test port in normal and test position
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
Alternate model of test port
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
DEPLETION INDICATION
-2
9-
Applicable to: ALL

y2
Containers with decentralized gaseous oxygen have a depletion mechanism. In the case of oxygen
àM
depletion, a red string is visible from the test port. This indicates that there is no more oxygen
Tr
available, due to a fault.

ạm
Note: On aircraft fitted with chemical or centralized gaseous oxygen, the lavatories may be fitted
Ph
with decentralized gaseous oxygen..

29
CAUTION If the test port is opened and the depletion indication appears, report to the Purser.
:
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 07-010 P 4/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
CABIN OXYGEN
DESCRIPTION
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
CABIN OXYGEN OPTIONS

02
/2
Applicable to: ALL

04
9/
This aircraft is fitted with a chemical oxygen system, that supplies oxygen for a minimum of 15 min
-2
(optionally 22 min).
9-
The chemical oxygen has the following specificities:

y2
‐ Once the system is initiated, it cannot be stopped,

àM
‐ The oxygen supplies are located inside the containers, and

Tr
‐ When a user pulls on one mask, oxygen will supply all masks of the same container.
ạm
Ph
Note: In the lavatories gaseous cylinders may be installed instead of chemical cylinders.
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 07-010 P 5/6

à
Tr
CCOM ← E to F 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN OXYGEN
DESCRIPTION
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 07-010 P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN OXYGEN
OPERATION
A321
CONTAINER AND MASK OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
SYSTEM ACTIVATION
When the system detects a cabin altitude of approx. 14 000 ft, all the cabin oxygen containers
29
open simultaneously to present the masks to the cabin occupants. The flight crew can also
2:
activate the system manually via the MASK MAN ON pb located on the OXYGEN panel.
41
There is an optional automatic Passenger Address (PA) announcement when the system is
2
20
activated.
4/
0
OPERATION
9/
-2
When a container opens, the masks drop down and hang by the lanyards.
9-
Note: Due to the height of the ceiling in some locations, the lanyard may be fitted with a flag
y2
marked "PULL" to ease the grasping of the mask.
àM
Tr
The user must grasp the oxygen mask or the "PULL" flag (if installed) and pull down sharply. This
ạm
will pull the lanyard. Pulling the lanyard will initiate the oxygen flow in the mask.
Ph
The user must place the mask over the mouth and nose, and adjust the elastic band around the
head.
9
:2
FLOW INDICATOR
4 12
Each mask has a flow indicator to confirm the oxygen flow. The flow indicator can be located on
02
the bag or on the flexible hose.

/2
04
Flow indicator located on the reservoir bag:

9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 07-020 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN OXYGEN
OPERATION
A321
Flow indicator located on the flexible hose
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
MANUAL OPENING VIA MRT
y2
Applicable to: ALL àM
Tr
Each container can be opened individually with a Manual Release Tool (MRT). Insert the pin-end of
ạm
the MRT into the dedicated opening of the container door, and push. The door opens.
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 07-020 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ← A to B 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN OXYGEN
LOCATION
A321
OXYGEN UNITS LOCATION

ARRANGEMENT
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 07-030 P 1/6

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN OXYGEN
LOCATION
A321

Criteria: K15682
ARRANGEMENT
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 07-030 P 2/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN OXYGEN
LOCATION
A321

Criteria: K14725
ARRANGEMENT
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 07-030 P 3/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
CABIN OXYGEN
LOCATION
A321

ARRANGEMENT
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 07-030 P 4/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN OXYGEN
LOCATION
A321
OXYGNE UNITS LOCATION

Criteria: K11239
Applicable to: VN-A350, VN-A351, VN-A352, VN-A353, VN-A354, VN-A356, VN-A357, VN-A358, VN-A359, VN-A363, VN-A367
ARRANGEMENT
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 07-030 P 5/6

à
Tr
CCOM B 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
CABIN OXYGEN
LOCATION
A321

Arrangement
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 07-030 P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM C 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0
IN-FLIGHT 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
ENTERTAINMENT (IFE)
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT (IFE)
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
08-10 In-Flight Entertainment

08-10-10 General
General Information about the IFE System.............................................................................................................A
08-10-20 IFE Control Center(s)
29
08-10-20-10 Location
2:
41
Location of the IFE Control Center(s)..................................................................................................................... A
2
08-10-20-20 Description
20
4/
08-10-20-20-10 Overview of the IFE Control Center
0
9/
Description of the IFE Control Centers................................................................................................................... A
-2
08-10-20-20-20 IFE Control Center Components
9-
y2
IFE Control Terminals..............................................................................................................................................A
àM
Keyboard.................................................................................................................................................................. B
Card Reader/Payment Module  .......................................................................................................................C
Tr
ạm
IFE Switches on the IFE Switch Panel/FAP........................................................................................................... D

Ph
Switches for Connectivity on the Multipurpose Panel/FAP..................................................................................... E

Outlets in the IFE Control Center............................................................................................................................F
Smoke Detection in the IFE Control Center........................................................................................................... G
9
:2
12
08-10-30 Passenger Functions

4
08-10-30-10 Passenger Handset/Passenger Control Unit

02
/2
08-10-30-10-A Passenger Control Unit

04
9/
Passenger Control Unit (If installed)....................................................................................................................... A

-2
08-10-30-20 Passenger Display Unit

9-
Overview of the in-Seat Display Units.................................................................................................................... A

y2
Functions of in-Seat Display Units.......................................................................................................................... B

àM
08-10-30-30 Connection Possibilities at the Seat

Tr
ạm
Overview of the Outlets at the Passenger Seat..................................................................................................... A

USB Port  ........................................................................................................................................................ B
Ph
Audio Port  ...................................................................................................................................................... C

Ethernet Port  .................................................................................................................................................. D
:29

12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

08-10-40 PED Power Outlet(s)
PED Power Outlets..................................................................................................................................................A
AC Power Outlet......................................................................................................................................................B
USB Power Outlet................................................................................................................................................... C
29
Double USB Power Outlet...................................................................................................................................... D
2:
Combined AC Power and USB Power Outlet.........................................................................................................E
41
PED POWER IN USE Indicator.............................................................................................................................. F
2
20
0 4/
How to Recover an Inoperative Card Reader.........................................................................................................A
9/
-2
How to Recover a PED Power Malfunction............................................................................................................ B
How To Reset a Frozen Seat Display Unit.............................................................................................................C
9-
How to Recover a Frozen IFE Control Terminal.................................................................................................... D
y2
How to Recover a Frozen IFE Control Center........................................................................................................E
àM
How to Recover an IFE System Failure with Black Screens.................................................................................. F
Tr
How to Exchange a Failed Seat Display Unit (hot Spare)  ............................................................................ G

ạm
How to Manually Retract an Overhead Display Unit, if installed............................................................................ H

Ph
08-010 IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

9
In-Flight Entertainment System & In-Seat Power Supply System  - Introduction............................................ A

:2
12
Entertainment System - General............................................................................................................................. B

4
02
In-Flight Entertainment - General............................................................................................................................C

/2
Entertainment System - General.............................................................................................................................D

04
Component Location................................................................................................................................................E
9/
-2
08-020 MUSIC
9-
Music System...........................................................................................................................................................A
y2
àM
08-030 VIDEO
Tr
Video System Description....................................................................................................................................... A

ạm
Video System - Description.....................................................................................................................................B

Ph
Video System - Operation.......................................................................................................................................C

Programmable Video System Control Unit (PVSCU) Monitor................................................................................ D
29
Video........................................................................................................................................................................ E
:
Video - Operation by the Passenger.......................................................................................................................F

12
How to Manually Retract an Overhead Display Unit, if installed............................................................................ G

4
02
/2
08-040 AIRSHOW
04
9/
AIRSHOW System Description................................................................................................................................A

-2

-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

08-070 INTERACTIVE GAMES
Interactive Functions Control - Description............................................................................................................. A
29
2:
241
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE IFE SYSTEM

The purpose of the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) system is to provide passengers with in-flight
entertainment services.
29
2:
IFE COMPONENTS
41
The IFE system typically has the following components:
2
20
‐ An IFE Control Center, e.g. Video Control Center (VCC) or Video Control Inserts (VCI)
4/
‐ Passenger handsets/Passenger Control Units
0
9/
‐ In-Seat Display Units (SDUs)/overhead display units.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL IFE CONTROL CENTER(S) - LOCATION
LOCATION OF THE IFE CONTROL CENTER(S)

The aircraft has one IFE control center. The Video Control Center (VCC) is aft of door 1L.
LOCATION OF THE VIDEO CONTROL CENTER (VCC)
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL IFE CONTROL CENTER(S) - LOCATION
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL IFE CONTROL CENTER(S) - DESCRIPTION
Overview of the IFE Control Center
DESCRIPTION OF THE IFE CONTROL CENTERS

29
2:
EQUIPMENT IN THE VCC
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
IFE Control Center Components
IFE CONTROL TERMINALS

29
2:
The aircraft has at least one IFE control terminal to control and monitor the IFE.
41
2
20
Note: The following illustration is for reference only.
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
INTERACTIVE CABIN MANAGEMENT TERMINAL

ạm
Ph
The aircraft has at least one IFE control terminal, referred to as the Interactive Cabin Management
Terminal (ICMT). The ICMT provides an IFE interface for the cabin crew. A touch screen function
and/or a connected keyboard  enable the user to interact with the IFE system.
29
:
12
The software on the ICMT enables the cabin crew to:

4
‐ Assign entertainment services to passenger zones or seats (e.g. Audio/Video On Demand

02
/2
(AVOD), Moving Map, Pay Access, etc.)

04
‐ Control cabin services (e.g. video announcements, map control, broadcast to overhead video,
9/
-2
connectivity  , etc.)
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 1/22

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 OCT 22
ạm
Ph
A321
‐ Manage passenger services related to passenger seats (e.g. Attendant Call, service requests,
etc.)
‐ Manage crew services (e.g. log entries, broadcast messages, crew/PAX text messages, etc.).
Example of an Interactive Cabin Management Terminal
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
Title Description
9-
Lock/Unlock pbs Typically, the Lock/Unlock pbs enable the cabin to block the access to the functions of the ICMT.
y2
Power pb
The Power pb enables the cabin crew to:
àM
‐ Turn the ICMT on or set it to standby mode.

Tr
‐ Reset the ICMT.

ạm
Ph
Volume pbs If a headset is connected to the IFE control center, the Volume pbs enable the cabin crew to adjust
the volume in the headset.
Menu pb Typically, the Menu pb enables the cabin crew to go directly to the MENU screen on the ICMT.
29
Home pb Typically, the Home pb enables the cabin crew to go directly to the HOME menu screen on the
:
12
ICMT.
4
Back pb The Back pb enables the cabin crew to return to the previously selected screen.
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 2/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
CREW TERMINAL
The aircraft has at least one IFE control terminal, referred to as Crew Terminal (CT). Typically, a
CT is located in an IFE control center (eg. VCC/VCI) and provides an IFE interface for the cabin
crew and the maintenance personnel. A touch screen function and/or a connected keyboard 
enable the user to interact with the IFE system.
29
2:
The software on the CT enables the cabin crew to:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
etc.)
y2
àM
Example of a Crew Terminal
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 3/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
Title Description
Universal Serial Bus The USB ports enable the cabin crew to connect USB devices to the CT. Refer to 08-10-20-20-20
(USB) USB Port
Ethernet Port The Ethernet Port (RJ45) is for maintenance purpose only. Refer to 08-10-20-20-20 Ethernet Port
Audio Port The audio port enables the cabin crew to connect a headset to the CT. Refer to 08-10-20-20-20
Audio Port
29
2:
CREW PANEL
41
2
The aircraft has at least one IFE control terminal, referred to as Crew Panel (CP). A CP is located
20
4/
in an IFE Control Center (e.g. VCC/VCI) and provides an IFE interface for the cabin crew and the
0
9/
maintenance personnel. A touch screen function and/or a connected keyboard  enable the
-2
user to interact with the IFE system.
9-
The software on the CP enables the cabin crew to:
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
etc.)
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 4/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
Example of a Crew Panel
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
Title Description
/2
Universal Serial Bus The USB ports enable the cabin crew to connect USB devices to the CT. Refer to 08-10-20-20-20
04
(USB) USB Port

9/
-2
Audio Port The audio port enables the cabin crew to connect a headset to the CT. Refer to 08-10-20-20-20
Audio Port
9-
y2
àM
KEYBOARD
Tr
ạm

Ph
The cabin crewmembers use either the on-screen virtual keyboard or the hardware keyboard  to
enter data at the IFE Control Center (e.g. VCC/VCI) in order to control the IFE system.
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 5/22

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
A321
Example of an On-Screen Keyboard
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 6/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
Example of a Hardware Keyboard
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
CARD READER/PAYMENT MODULE 

4
02
/2
04

9/
If installed, a card reader/payment module enables the cabin crew to:

-2
‐ Log on to the IFE system, and/or

9-
‐ Make payments.
y2
àM
Example of a Payment Module Logo Example of a Card Reader Logo

Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 7/22

à
Tr
CCOM ← B to C 11 OCT 22
ạm
Ph
A321
IFE SWITCHES ON THE IFE SWITCH PANEL/FAP

OVERVIEW IFE SWITCHES
29
The VCC/VCI has a switch panel with (pushbutton-) switches to remove or to supply power to
2:
different parts of the IFE system.
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
VCC/VCI MAIN POWER PUSHBUTTON-SWITCH 

04
9/
The VCC/VCI MAIN POWER pb-sw enables the cabin crew to turn ON or OFF the electrical power
-2
to the VCC/VCI.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 8/22

à
Tr
CCOM D→ 11 OCT 22
ạm
Ph
A321
Example of a VCC/VCI MAIN POWER Pusbutton-Switch
29
2:
412
20
Note: The label of the switch depends on the kind of IFE control center (VCC/VCI).
4/
0
9/
VCC/VCI PED POWER PUSHBUTTON-SWITCH 
-2
The VCC/VCI PED POWER pb-sw enables the cabin crew to turn ON or OFF the electrical power
9-
to the PED power outlet in the VCC/VCI.
y2
àM
Example of a VCC/VCI PED Power Pushbutton-Switch
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
Note: The label of the switch depends on the kind of IFE control center (VCC/VCI).
/2
04
9/
PED POWER PUSHBUTTON-SWITCH/KEY 

-2
9-
By default the power to the outlets for Portable Electronic Devices (PED) is ON.
y2
However, via the PED POWER pb-sw or key, the cabin crew can manually control the power
àM
supply for the PED power outlets. For more information about PED power outlets:Refer to
Tr
08-10-40 PED Power Outlets.

ạm
L12
Ph
Note: The PED POWER pb-sw/key is only installed in aircraft with high power outlets.
And if high power outlets are installed, there are PED Power In Use indicators on the
29
aisle side of the seat rows.

:
12
A high power outlet is and outlet with:

4
02
‐ A voltage higher or equal to 42 V, or

/2
‐ A power higher than 10 W, or

04
9/
‐ A current higher than 2.1 A.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 9/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
LOCATION
The PED POWER pb-sw/key may be installed at the following locations:
‐ A PED POWER pb-sw, installed in the VCC/VCI, or
‐ A PED POWER key on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP).
Note: There may also be a PED POWER pb-sw in the cockpit.
29
2:
DESCRIPTION
41
2
When the PED POWER pb-sw/key is in the ON position, the indicator light is green and the
20
power outlets have power.
4/
0
When the PED POWER pb-sw/key is in the OFF position, the indicator light is amber and the
9/
-2
power outlets have no power.
9-
Note: PED power (if high power outlets are installed) automatically turns OFF:
y2
‐ During cabin decompression
àM
‐ Optional: When the aircraft slats are fully extended (e.g. for landing).
Tr
Example of a PED POWER Pushbutton-Switch on the VCC/VCI

ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
Example of a PED POWER Key on the FAP Sub-panel

-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
OPERATION
4
02
/2
The cabin crew can switch OFF the power for the PED power outlets at any time.
04
Use the PED POWER pb-sw/key to deactivate the power supply for the PED power outlets
9/
during critical flight phases, for example takeoff and landing.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 10/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
PAX SYS KEY/PUSHBUTTON-SWITCH 

The PAX SYS pb-sw/key controls the power supply for the passenger (PAX) cabin systems,
including the entire In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) system.
Note: Power for the PAX cabin systems is only available if all PAX SYS pb-sw/key(s) are ON,
29
including the PAX SYS pb-sw if installed in the cockpit.
2:
41
LOCATION
2
20
The PAX SYS pb-sw/key may be installed at the following locations:
4/
‐ A PAX SYS pb-sw, installed in the VCC/VCI, and/or
0
9/
‐ A PAX SYS key on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP).
-2
Note: There may also be a PAX SYS pb-sw in the cockpit.
9-
y2
DESCRIPTION
àM
The PAX SYS pb-sw/key removes the power from the PAX cabin systems:
Tr
‐ IFE control center (VCC/VCI) equipment

ạm
‐ Video/Audio equipment (in-seat display, handset/passenger control unit)

Ph
‐ Passenger seat functions

‐ Outlets for Portable Electronic Devices (PED)
9
:2
‐ IFE Center equipment (in the Electronic Equipment bay (EEbay) in the avionics compartment)
12
‐ Cabin Connectivity equipment

4
02
‐ Other PAX cabin equipment.

/2
04
Note: Depending on the configuration of the aircraft, not all of the above listed equipment
9/
may be installed.
-2
Example of a PAX SYS Pushbutton-Switch on the VCC/VCI

9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 11/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
Example of a PAX SYS Key on the FAP Subpanel
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
OPERATION
9-
The intended use of the PAX SYS pb-sw/key is to remove the power from the passenger PAX
y2
cabin systems in an emergency (e.g. smoke).
àM
However, and if in accordance with the airline policy, the cabin crew can use the PAX SYS
Tr
pb-sw/key to reset the PAX cabin systems via a power cycle.

ạm
Note: A reset via the PAX SYS pb-sw/key will affect all PAX cabin systems (see list above).
Ph
Check all other possibilities for individual resets, i.e. via hardware switches or via
software, before the use of the PAX SYS pb-sw/key. Refer to the Function Recovery
9
:2
Procedures (FRP) for the cabin systems in this manual.

12
4
For a reset (power cycle), the cabin crew must push the PAX SYS pb-sw/key to remove power
02
from the systems. Then the cabin crew must push the PAX SYS pb-sw/key a second time, to
/2
04
supply power to the systems again. When to push the pushbutton-switch/key depends on the
9/
system to be reset. For details, refer to the table below.

-2
It takes approximately 10 min until all systems are fully functional again.
9-
y2
System to be Operation
Reset
àM
IFE system
Tr
Passenger seat
ạm
Push the PAX SYS pb-sw/key for a second time within the next 5 s.
functions
Ph
PED outlets
Cabin Push the PAX SYS pb-sw/key for a second time after more than 5 s.
29
connectivity
Note: If the cabin crew pushes the PAX SYS pb-sw/key again within 5 s, the cabin connectivity
:
system
12
system will not be reset.

4
02
/2
CAUTION If a second power cycle is necessary, there must be a pause of at least 10 min.
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 12/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
SERVER RESET PUSHBUTTON-SWITCH 

The SERVER RESET pb-sw enables the cabin crew to reset the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE)
System in the event of a frozen VCC/VCI or a software malfunction.
Note: The use of the SERVER RESET pb-sw temporarily interrupts the entertainment services
29
to all passengers, and the cabin announcement services initiated from the IFE control
2:
terminal.
412
Example of a Server Reset Pushbutton-Switch
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
IFE AND SEAT POWER PUSHBUTTON-SWITCH

Ph
The IFE and Seat Power pb-sw controls the power supply for the passenger (PAX) cabin systems,
including the entire In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) system.
9
:2
12
Note: ‐ The cabin connectivity equipment is not affected by this pushbutton.

4
02
‐ Power for the PAX cabin systems is only available if the IFE and Seat Power pb-sw is
/2
ON.
04
9/
DESCRIPTION
-2
The IFE and Seat Power pb-sw removes the power from the PAX cabin systems:
9-
‐ IFE control center (VCC/VCI) equipment

y2
‐ Video/Audio equipment (in-seat display, handset/passenger control unit)

àM

Tr

ạm
‐ IFE Center equipment (in the Electronic Equipment bay (EEbay) in the avionics compartment)
Ph
‐ Other PAX cabin equipment.

29
Note: Depending on the configuration of the aircraft, not all of the above listed equipment
:
12
may be installed.
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 13/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
Example of a IFE and Seat Pushbutton-Switch on the VCC/VCI
29
2:
41
2
20
Note: A reset via the IFE and Seat Power pb-sw will affect all PAX cabin systems (see list
4/
above). Check all other possibilities for individual resets, i.e. via hardware switches or
0
9/
via software, before the use of the IFE and Seat Power pb-sw.
-2
For a reset (power cycle), the cabin crew must push the IFE and Seat Power pb-sw to remove
9-
power from the systems. Then the cabin crew must push the IFE and Sea Power pb-sw a
y2
second time, to supply power to the systems again. àM
It takes approximately 10 min until all systems are fully functional again.
Tr
ạm
IFE MASTER SWITCH 

Ph
The IFE Master sw enables the cabin crew to cut the power to:
• The IFE Server
9
:2
• The VCC
12
• the IFE WAPs.

4
02
/2
04
SWITCHES FOR CONNECTIVITY ON THE MULTIPURPOSE PANEL/FAP

9/
-2
9-

y2
OVERVIEW OF THE IFE CONNECTIVITY SWITCHES 

àM
Tr
Depending on the aircraft configuration, there are connectivity switches in the VCC/VCI or next to
ạm
the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP).

Ph
The IFE connectivity pushbutton-switches enable the cabin crew to turn OFF or reset the related
connectivity functions.
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 14/22

à
Tr
CCOM ← D to E → 11 OCT 22
ạm
Ph
A321
Example of Connectivity Switches
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
PAX COM PUSHBUTTON-SWITCH 

4
02
The PAX COM pb-sw enables the cabin crew to turn OFF or reset the IFE connectivity system in
/2
04
the cabin.
9/
Example of a PAX COM Pushbutton-Switch

-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
EXPHONE PUSHBUTTON-SWITCH 
:
12
The EXPHONE pb-sw enables the cabin crew to turn OFF/ON the mobile telephony system in the
4
02
cabin.
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 15/22

à
Tr
CCOM ←E→ 11 OCT 22

ạm
Ph
A321
Example of an EXPHONE Pushbutton-Switch
29
2:
41
2
20
WIFI RESET PUSHBUTTON-SWITCH 
4/
0
9/
The cabin crew can use the WiFi pb-sw to reset the WiFi system.
-2
Example of an WiFi Pushbutton-Switch
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
CABIN WIRELESS PUSHBUTTON-SWITCH 

4
02
The CABIN WIRELESS pb-sw enables the cabin crew to turn ON or OFF the wireless function
/2
(WIFI).
04
9/
Example of an CABIN WIRELESS Pushbutton-Switch

-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
CNX MASTER PUSHBUTTON-SWITCH 

:
12
The CNX Master pb-sw enables the cabin crew to turn ON or OFF the power for the connectivity
4
02
antenna and the wireless function (WIFI).

/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 16/22

à
Tr
CCOM ←E→ 11 OCT 22

ạm
Ph
A321
Example of an CNX MASTER Pushbutton-Switch
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
OUTLETS IN THE IFE CONTROL CENTER
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
OVERVIEW OF THE OUTLETS IN THE VCC/VCI
àM
The outlets in the IFE Control Center enable the cabin crew to connect devices to the VCC/VCI.
Tr
ạm
Note: The type and location of the outlets may vary. The following illustration is for reference
Ph
only.
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 17/22

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
A321
POWER OUTLET 
The AC power outlet supplies 110 V at 60 Hz. The power outlet is compatible with North American
and European standard connectors.
The AC power outlet has the following protection features:
29
‐ Electrical shock prevention (e.g. due to insertion of foreign objects into an outlet).
2:
‐ A sensor that allows the AC power outlet to release power only when a plug is fully engaged.
41
‐ An LED indicator that indicates the current power status.
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
Note: Depending on the manufacturer of the power outlet, there are different possibilities of
ạm
status per indication.

Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 18/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
Color of the LED

Power Status of the Power Outlet
Indicator
Power is available. Power is available.
29
2:
41
2
Power is limited (temporarily). Electronic
20
equipment will not work until the power system
4/
-
0
has stabilized.
9/
This is an optional indication.
-2
9-
y2
Power is not available, (PED PWR pb-sw is àM
Power is not available (due to a failure).
Tr
OFF).
ạm
Ph
9
:2
Power is not available (aircraft power is OFF or Power is not available (the PED PWR pb-sw is OFF
12
due to a failure). or the aircraft power is OFF).

4
02
/2
04
9/
AUDIO PORT 
-2
The audio port enables the cabin crew to connect a headset in order to listen to audio media
9-
before they broadcast it to the cabin.

y2
àM
Note: The following illustration is for example only. Depending on the configuration, one of
Tr
these ports is installed.

ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 19/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
Examples of Audio Ports
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
USB PORT 
y2
àM
The Universal Serial Bus (USB) port enables the user to connect devices such as a printer or
Tr
keyboard to the VCC/VCI.
ạm
Example of a USB Port

Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ETHERNET PORT 
ạm
The Ethernet port enables the cabin crew to connect a Portable Electronic Device (PED) to the
Ph
VCC/VCI.
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 20/22

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
Example of an Ethernet Port
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
SMOKE DETECTION IN THE IFE CONTROL CENTER
àM
Tr
ạm
If a smoke detection system is installed and smoke is detected, this triggers several indications in the
Ph
cabin and in the cockpit.

For information about the smoke detection system: Refer to 06-070-10 General Information about the
9
:2
Smoke Detection Function.

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 21/22

à
Tr
CCOM ← F to G 11 OCT 22
ạm
Ph
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-20-20-20 P 22/22

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 22
ạm
Ph
A321 PASSENGER FUNCTIONS - PASSENGER
HANDSET/PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT
Passenger Control Unit
PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT (IF INSTALLED)

29
2:
The following illustration is an example of a basic Passenger Control Unit (PCU). The PCU enables
41
the passenger to control passenger service functions.
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-30-10-A P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321 PASSENGER FUNCTIONS - PASSENGER
HANDSET/PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT
Title Description
Attendant Call/Call Reset Keys The Attendant Call/Call Reset keys enable the passenger to call a cabin crewmember, or
to cancel the call.
When the passenger presses the Attendant Call key, all of the following
indications/chimes will come ON:
‐ The call light on the Passenger Service Unit (PSU) comes ON.
29
‐ The call light on the Area Control Panel (ACP) comes ON.
2:
‐ The Additional Indication Panel (AIP) indicates the seat row.
41
‐ A chime sounds in the cabin.
2
20
‐ An indication appears on the SEAT SETTINGS page on the Flight Attendant Panel
4/
(FAP).
0
9/
When a user presses the Attendant Call Reset key, the above indications will go OFF.
-2
Reading Light Key The Reading Light key enables the passenger to turn the reading light ON or OFF.
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-30-10-A P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PASSENGER FUNCTIONS - PASSENGER DISPLAY UNIT
OVERVIEW OF THE IN-SEAT DISPLAY UNITS

The IFE system transmits audio and video entertainment to the in-Seat Display Unit (SDU) at the
passenger seat.
29
2:
The touch screen of each SDU enables the passenger to select and operate the following functions,
41
if installed:
2
‐ Passenger entertainment (audio and video)
20
4/
‐ Passenger services (ATTENDANT CALL and READING LIGHT)
0
9/
‐ Interactive services (games, etc.).
-2
9-
FUNCTIONS OF IN-SEAT DISPLAY UNITS
y2
àM
Tr
In-Seat Display Units (SDUs) typically have a touch screen and a sensing control to display a
ạm
function menu.
Ph
As shown in the examples below, the SDUs may have additional controls/outlets.
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-30-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PASSENGER FUNCTIONS - PASSENGER DISPLAY UNIT
Title Description
Touch Screen (LCD) The touch screen of the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) enables the passenger to make selections
on the screen.
Sensing Control pb The Sensing Control pb displays a menu on the SDU when the passenger touches it.
Typical menu items would be:
‐ Headset volume control
29
‐ Screen brightness
2:
‐ Screen ON/OFF
41
‐ Attendant call
2
20
‐ Reading light control.
4/
0
Infrared Proximity The infrared proximity sensor activates the SDU when it senses that a passenger's hand is
9/
Sensor near.
-2
Universal Serial Bus The USB ports enable the passenger to connect USB devices to the SDU.
9-
(USB) Ports
y2
Audio Port The audio port enables the passenger to connect a headset to the SDU.
Credit Card Reader àM
The credit card reader enables the passenger to pay for onboard services.
Tr
Reading Light pb The Reading Light pb enables the passenger to turn the reading light ON or OFF.
ạm
Attendant Call/Call The Attendant Call pb/Call Reset pb enable the passenger to call a cabin crewmember, or to
Ph
Reset pbs cancel the call.

When the passenger pushes the Attendant Call pb, all of the following indications/chimes will
9
come ON:
:2
‐ The call light on the Passenger Service Unit (PSU) comes ON.
12
‐ The call light on the Area Control Panel (ACP) comes ON.
4
02
‐ The Additional Indication Panel (AIP) indicates the seat row.

/2
‐ A chime sounds in the cabin.

04
‐ An indication appears on the SEAT SETTINGS page on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP).
9/
-2
When a user pushes the Attendant Call Reset pb, the above indications will go OFF.
Ambient Light Sensor The ambient light sensor automatically adjusts the brightness level of the SDU screen.
9-
Power pb The Power pb enables the passenger to turn the LCD backlight ON or OFF.
y2
àM
Note: Depending on the type of SDU, the Power pb enables the cabin crew to reset the
SDU. Refer to 08-10-50 How to Reset a Frozen Seat Display Unit.
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-30-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PASSENGER FUNCTIONS - CONNECTION POSSIBILITIES AT THE SEAT
OVERVIEW OF THE OUTLETS AT THE PASSENGER SEAT

The outlets at the seat enable the passenger to connect their devices.
Note: The type and location of the outlets may vary. The following illustration is for reference only.
29
2:
Typical Outlets at a Passenger Seat
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
USB PORT 
ạm
Ph
The Universal Serial Bus (USB) port enables the passengers to connect an external USB device at
29
their seat.
:
12
The USB port is in the armrest or next to the in-Seat Display Unit (SDU).
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-30-30 P 1/4

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
A321
Example of a USB Port
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
AUDIO PORT 
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
The audio port enables the passengers to connect a headset at their seat.
Ph
The audio port is in the armrest or next to the in-Seat Display Unit (SDU), depending on the type of
seat, and the class.
9
:2
Note: The following illustration is for example only. Depending on the configuration, one of these
12
ports is installed.
4
02
Examples of Audio Ports

/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
ETHERNET PORT 
4
02
/2

04
9/
The Ethernet port enables the passenger to connect a Personal Electronic Device (PED) to the
-2
in-flight broadband service.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-30-30 P 2/4

à
Tr
CCOM ← B to D → 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
The Ethernet port is in the armrest or next to the in-Seat Display Unit (SDU), depending on the type
of seat, and the class.
Example of an Ethernet Port
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-30-30 P 3/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←D 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-30-30 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PED POWER OUTLET(S)
PED POWER OUTLETS

Cabin crew and passengers can charge their Portable Electronic Devices (PEDs), e.g. notebooks,
tablets or smart phones at the PED power outlets.
29
2:
CAUTION The cabin crew should coordinate and control the use of PED to avoid misuse of the
41
outlets or any effects to the aircraft systems.
2
20
For example:
4/
0
‐ There should be no parallel charging of a PED via two USB power outlets.
9/
‐ Only one PED may be connected to a USB power outlet.
-2
9-
LOCATION
y2
àM
The PED power outlets can be installed at the following locations:
Tr
‐ Passenger seats
ạm
‐ Cabin units (e.g. galleys, stowages).

Ph
OPERATION
There is an optional automatic control of the PED power, triggered by flight phases and the status
9
:2
of the slats.
12
It is possible to manually switch OFF the electrical power to the power outlets any time via a PED
4
02
POWER override switch.

/2
04
Depending on the aircraft customization, at least one of the following override switches is
9/
available:
-2
‐ A PED POWER pb-sw in the Video Control Center (VCC) or the Video Control Insert (VCI)
9-
‐ A PED POWER hardkey on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP)

y2
‐ A PED POWER hardkey above the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP)

àM
‐ A PED POWER sw in the cockpit.

Tr
ạm
Note: Deactivate the power supply for the PED power outlet during critical flight phases such
Ph
as takeoff and landing.

A PED Power In Use indicator on the aisle side of the seat row comes ON (blue or white), when
29
one or more passengers in the related seat row use their PED power outlet.
:
12
Seat group switches  enable the cabin crew to turn OFF/ON the power of the PED power
4
02
outlets for individual seat groups.

/2
04
Note: The location and number of seat group switches depends on the cabin definition.
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-40 P 1/8

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
A321
TYPICAL POWER OUTLETS
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
AC POWER OUTLET àM
Tr
ạm

Ph
AC POWER OUTLET
The AC power outlet supplies 110 V at 60 Hz.
9
:2

12
4
02
‐ A sensor that allows the AC power outlet to release power only when a plug is fully engaged.
/2
04

9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-40 P 2/8

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
4
02

/2
04
Color of the LED

9/
Indicator
-2
9-
y2

àM
Tr
ạm
Ph

-
has stabilized.
29

:
12
4
02

/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-40 P 3/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321

Color of the LED
Indicator
Power is not available, (PED PWR pb-sw is

29
OFF).
2:
41
2
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
USB POWER OUTLET
Tr
ạm
Ph
USB POWER OUTLET

9
The USB power outlet can be a high or low power outlet.

:2
12
L3 A high power outlet is an outlet with:

4
02

/2

04

9/
-2
Examples of a USB Power Outlet

9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
L1 The USB power outlet has a sensor and only releases power when the sensor detects that a plug
9/
is fully engaged.
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-40 P 4/8

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
A321
When the USB power outlet is in use, the light in the frame around the port comes ON.
DOUBLE USB POWER OUTLET

29
DOUBLE USB POWER OUTLET
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
Example of a Double USB Power Outlet
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
L1 The USB power outlets have a sensor and only releases power when the sensor detects that a
4
02
plug is fully engaged.

/2
When a USB power outlet is in use, the light in the frame around the port comes ON.
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-40 P 5/8

à
Tr
CCOM ← C to D 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
A321
COMBINED AC POWER AND USB POWER OUTLET

COMBINED AC POWER AND USB POWER OUTLET

Example of a Combined AC Power and USB Power Outlet
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
AC POWER OUTLET
-2
The AC power outlet supplies 110 V at 60 Hz.

9-
y2

àM
Tr
‐ A sensor that only allows the AC power outlet to release power when a plug is fully engaged.
ạm

Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-40 P 6/8

à
Tr
CCOM E→ 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
A321
Color of the LED

Indicator
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
-
0
has stabilized.
9/
-2
9-
y2
Power is not available, (PED PWR pb-sw is àM
Tr
OFF).
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12

4
02
/2
04
USB POWER OUTLET

9/
-2

9-

y2

àM

Tr

ạm
Ph
L1 The USB power outlet has a sensor and only releases power when the sensor detects that a
plug is fully engaged.
When the USB power outlet is in use, the light in the frame around the port comes ON.
:29
12
PED POWER IN USE INDICATOR

4
02
/2
04

9/
-2
The PED POWER IN USE indicator is on the aisle side of the seat rows.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-40 P 7/8

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
A321
The indicators come ON (white or blue) when AC power outlets or high power USB power outlets are
in use.
L3 A high power outlet (USB) is an outlet with:
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-40 P 8/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←F 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FUNCTION RECOVERY PROCEDURES (FRP)
HOW TO RECOVER AN INOPERATIVE CARD READER

If the card reader has a malfunction (Reader Error), perform the following function recovery
procedure:
29
2:
41
YES NO
2
20
4/
0
1. Does the card reader read the inserted card? END Go to 2.
9/
-2
2. Clean the card reader:
9-
y2
1. Slide the card reader cleaner card in the indicated direction.
àM
2. Slide a card through the card reader and check for correct
Tr
functions.
ạm
Is the card reader function available again? END Go to 3.

Ph
3. The card reader function is not available. Make an entry in the

9
:2
cabin logbook including the following information:

12
‐ Faulty IFE center component(s), if identified

4
02
‐ Action(s) taken.
/2
END END
04
9/
-2
HOW TO RECOVER A PED POWER MALFUNCTION

9-
y2

àM
If it is not possible to operate a PED via the in-seat power outlet, perform the following function
Tr
recovery procedure:
ạm
Ph
YES NO
29
:
12
1. Is the PED Power switch at the FAP and the optional switch on the
4
IFE control center in the ON position? Go to 3. Go to 2.

02
/2
04
2. At the FAP:
9/
-2
Turn the PED Power switch ON.

Is PED power available? END Go to 3.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-50 P 1/12

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
A321
YES NO
3. Is the LED black for the entire seat column? Go to 13. Go to 4.
29
4. Is the LED black for only one seat? Go to 15. Go to 5.
2:
41
5. Is the LED green, when the PED is not plugged in? Go to 7. Go to 6.
2
20
4/
6. If the LED amber, when the PED is not plugged in:
0
9/
Temporarily there is no power available for PED usage.
-2
As soon as the total power load of the aircraft decreases, PED
9-
power will be automatically reactivated. END END
y2
àM
7. At the seat:
Tr
Re-plug the PED quickly into the outlet unit.

ạm
Is the PED supplied with power? END Go to 8.

Ph
8. At the seat:
9
:2
Check the outlet unit LED. Go to 9. Go to 9.

4 12
02
9. Is the LED green? Go to 10. Go to 11.

/2
04
10. Power is available.

9/
-2
If the PED is not working, there must be a bad contact.

Do you want to retry? Go to 7. END
9-
y2
àM
11. Is the LED amber? Go to 6. Go to 12.

Tr
ạm
12. The LED is red or black.

Ph
The PED drains more power than available per outlet.

Do not connect this PED to the outlet. END END
29
:
13. Contact the flight crew and inform them about the malfunction:
12
Ask for further assistance:

4
02
/2
It is the responsibility of the flight crew or the Maintenance Control

04
Center (MCC) to authorize a reset via the PAX-SYS switch,

9/
depending on airline policy.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-50 P 2/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
YES NO
Has the flight crew/MCC authorized a reset via the PAX-SYS
switch?
Note: A PAX-SYS switch reset affects a lot of seats
29
(passengers). Hence, consider assigning other seats to
2:
the affected passengers, if enough unoccupied seats are
41
available.
2
Go to 14. Go to 15.
20
4/
0
9/
14. Perform a complete IFE system reset via the PAX-SYS switch:
-2
1. Inform the passengers via a PA that:
9-
y2
‐ The IFE system needs to be reset and
àM
‐ The system will be inoperative for up to 10 min.
Tr
2. In the Video Control Center (VCC): Switch the PAX SYS switch
ạm
OFF and wait for 3 min.

Ph
3. Switch the PAX SYS switch ON and wait for at least 10 min to
ensure a complete IFE system boot up.
9
:2
Is PED power available again? END Go to 15.

4 12
02
15. It is not possible to recover the fault.

/2
04
1. If possible, move the passenger to another seat.

9/
2. Make an entry into the cabin logbook about the IFE faults
-2
mentioning the:
9-
‐ Faulty IFE component(s), if identified (e.g. from the IFE

y2
SYSTEM STATUS screen)

àM
‐ Affected seats
Tr
ạm
END END
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-50 P 3/12

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
HOW TO RESET A FROZEN SEAT DISPLAY UNIT

If a single Seat Display Unit (SDU) is frozen or black, perform the following function recovery
procedure:
29
2:
41
YES NO
2
20
4/
0
1. Is more than one SDU frozen or black? Go to 2. Go to 3.
9/
-2
2. Refer to 08-10-50 How to Recover an IFE System Failure with
9-
Black Screens.
y2
And follow the steps described in the referenced Function àM
Recovery Procedure. END END
Tr
ạm
Ph
3. Check the SDU: Is there a POWER pb? Go to 4. Go to 5.
4. At the frozen or black SDU:

9
:2
12
1. Push and hold the POWER pb for 15 s.

4
2. Wait for the SDU to start again.

02
/2
Does the SDU operate normally? END Go to 6.

04
9/
-2
5. Is the SDU a replaceable (hot spare)? Go to 7. Go to 6.

9-
y2
6. The SDU is not operational.

àM
If possible, move the passenger to another seat. Go to 8. Go to 8.

Tr
ạm
7. If the SDU is a hot spare: Refer to 08-10-50 How to Exchange a

Ph
Failed Seat Display Unit.

And follow the steps described in the referenced Function
29
Recovery Procedure. END END

:
12
4
8. Make an entry in the cabin logbook that describes the:

02
/2
‐ Faulty IFE component(s)

04
9/
END END
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-50 P 4/12

à
Tr
CCOM C 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
HOW TO RECOVER A FROZEN IFE CONTROL TERMINAL

Example of an IFE Control Terminal
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
If the IFE control terminals screen freezes or is shut down, perform the following function
y2
recovery procedure:
àM
Tr
ạm
YES NO
Ph
1. Is the screen frozen (does not respond to touch) or did the IFE
29
control terminal shut down? Go to 2. END

:
412
2. Dose the IFE control terminal have POWER pb? Go to 3. Go to 4.

02
/2
04
3. Perform the following at the IFE control terminal:

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-50 P 5/12

à
Tr
CCOM D→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
YES NO
1. Push and hold the POWER pb for 15 s.
2. Wait approx. 7 min for the IFE control terminal to start and to
return to normal operation.
29
2:
Note: The IFE system does not shut down and entertainment
41
services are not interrupted.
2
20
Does the IFE control terminal operate normally? END Go to 3.
4/
0
9/
4. Make an entry in the cabin logbook about the IFE faults that
-2
describes the:
9-
y2
‐ Faulty IFE component(s), if identified
‐ Action(s) taken. àM
END END
Tr
ạm
HOW TO RECOVER A FROZEN IFE CONTROL CENTER

Ph
9
:2
If the IFE control center is frozen, perform the following function recovery procedure:
412
02
/2
YES NO
04
9/
-2
1. Is the IFE control center frozen (does not respond to input) or shut
9-
down? Go to 2. END
y2
àM
2. At the IFE control center:

Tr
1. Push and release MAIN POWER pb-sw.

ạm
2. Wait for the IFE control center to reset and return to normal
Ph
operation.
29
Note: The use of the MAIN POWER pb-sw temporarily

:
12
interrupts the entertainment services to all the

4
passengers, and of the optional Pre-Recorded

02
/2
Announcements and Music (PRAM)  initiated from the

04
IFE control panel.

9/
-2
Does the IFE control center operate normally? END Go to 3.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-50 P 6/12

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
A321
YES NO
3. Make an entry in the cabin logbook about the IFE control center
faults:
29
‐ Faulty IFE component(s), if identified
2:
41
END END
2
20
4/
HOW TO RECOVER AN IFE SYSTEM FAILURE WITH BLACK SCREENS
0
9/
-2
9-
If the in-seat displays, and the IFE screens on the partition walls are black throughout the cabin,
y2
perform the following function recovery procedure: Tr
àM
ạm
YES NO
Ph
1. Does the IFE control terminal still work? Go to 4. Go to 2.

9
:2
12
2. If the screen of the IFE control terminal screen does not work or the
4
02
display is frozen: Refer to 08-10-50 How to Recover a Frozen IFE

/2
Control Terminal.
04
9/
Note: Apply the instructions of the frozen display reset, then

-2
return to this Function Recovery Procedure (FRP).

9-
Is the display of the IFE control terminal still frozen? Go to 8. Go to 3.

y2
àM
3. Do the in-seat displays and the IFE screens on the partition walls
Tr
ạm
throughout the cabin work now? END Go to 4.

Ph
4. On the screen of the IFE control terminal screen:

Check the corresponding page(es), e.g. FUNCTIONS page and/or
29
:
SYSTEM STATUS page.

412
Note: For details of the IFE software, refer to the supplier

02
/2
documentation, however not part of this manual.

04
9/
Are there any error messages/indications? Go to 5. Go to 6.

-2
-
5. On the FUNCTIONS page (screen of the IFE control terminal):

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-50 P 7/12

à
Tr
CCOM ← E to F → 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
YES NO
Reset the corresponding function.
Note: For details of the IFE software, refer to the supplier
documentation, however not part of this manual.
29
Do the in-seat displays and the IFE screens on the partition walls
2:
41
2
20
4/
6. If in accordance with the airline policy, perform an IFE reset via the
0
9/
PAX SYS key on the FAP:
-2
1. Push the PAX SYS key to shut OFF the power to the entire IFE
9-
system.
y2
2. Wait for 5 min. àM
3. Push the PAX SYS key again to turn ON the power to the entire
Tr
IFE system.
ạm
Ph
9
:2
7. If the in-seat displays and the IFE screens on the partition walls are
12
still black throughout the cabin:

4
02
Apply the CIDS reset FRP (Refer to 04-040 CIDS Reset after Cabin
/2
04
System Failure(s) with PAX on Board (In Flight/On Ground)), then

9/
return to this FRP.

-2
9-

y2
àM
8. The IFE system is inoperative.

Tr
Inform the flight crew, and make an entry in the cabin logbook
ạm
about:
Ph
‐ The details of the failure

‐ Actions taken.
29
END END
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-50 P 8/12

à
Tr
CCOM ←F 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
HOW TO EXCHANGE A FAILED SEAT DISPLAY UNIT (HOT SPARE) 

If the in-Flight Entertainment (IFE) system has independent in-seat display units (SDUs), the IFE
content is stored locally on Secure Digital (SD) cards. Therefore, the failure of one SDU does not affect
29
2:
the other SDUs.
41
If the SDUs are so called hot spares, the cabin crew can remove or exchange a failed SDU during the
2
flight.
20
4/
0
Note: If the Crew Terminal (CT) is also a hot spare, the cabin crew can also exchange it with a
9/
-2
passenger SDU of similar size.
9-
If an in-Seat Display Unit has failed, perform the following function recovery procedure to
y2
exchange it:
àM
Tr
ạm
YES NO
Ph
1. Is the SDU inoperative? Go to 2. END

9
:2
12
2. Is the SDU a hot spare? Go to 3. Go to 4.

4
02
3. Follow the steps below to exchange the failed SDU with another
/2
04
one.
9/
Use the removal key to remove the failed SDU from its cradle.
-2
Choose an unoccupied seat and remove its SDU with the removal
9-
key.
y2
Put the failed SDU in the cradle of the unoccupied seat.

àM
Put the working SDU in the cradle of the occupied seat.

Tr
Does the SDU work now? Go to 5. Go to 4.

ạm
Ph
4. The IFE equipment at the seat is inoperative.

If possible, move the passenger to another seat.
29
Make an entry in the cabin logbook about the IFE failure. Describe
:
12
the failed IFE component(s), the affected seat, and the actions
4
02
taken. END END

/2
04
5. The IFE equipment is operative.

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-50 P 9/12

à
Tr
CCOM G→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
YES NO
Make an entry in the cabin logbook about the IFE failure that
describe the:
‐ Faulty IFE component(s) and the affected seat, if identified
29
END END
2:
41
2
20
HOW TO MANUALLY RETRACT AN OVERHEAD DISPLAY UNIT, IF INSTALLED
4/
0
9/
-2
Prior to takeoff or landing some overhead display units remain deployed.
9-
y2
ACTION àM RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
Tr
ạm
1. Are some of the overhead display units still deployed instead of

Ph
automatically retracted ? Go to 2. END

9
:2
2. Go to an affected overhead display unit and perform the following

12
operation:
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-50 P 10/12

à
Tr
CCOM ← G to H → 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
YES NO
Manually turn OFF the power: Insert a clip or a pin into the hole
behind to the affected overhead display unit and push the POWER
pb. This will cut the power to the overhead display unit.
29
Typical Access to the POWER
2:
Pushbutton of the Overhead Display Unit
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Note: The POWER pb is normally only for maintenance

Tr
purposes.
ạm
Go to 3. Go to 3.
Ph
3. Has the affected overhead display unit retracted? Go to 4. Go to 5.

: 29
12
4. If the manual power cut off successfully retracted the affected

4
overhead display unit:

02
/2
Repeat the action for any other deployed overhead display unit. Go to 7. Go to 7.
04
9/
5. Manually close the affected overhead display unit:

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-50 P 11/12

à
Tr
CCOM ←H→ 12 APR 22

ạm
Ph
A321
YES NO
Forcibly push and pull the affected overhead display unit until it is
fully stowed and latched. Go to 6. Go to 6.
29
6. Are there any other affected overhead display units? Go to 2. Go to 7.
2:
41
7. When all affected overhead display units have been retracted:
2
20
Make an entry into the cabin logbook mentioning the:
04/
‐ Defect
9/
-2
‐ Number and location of the affected overhead display units
9-
END END
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-10-50 P 12/12

à
Tr
CCOM ←H 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
A321
IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM & IN-SEAT

POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM  - INTRODUCTION
29
2:
The purpose of the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) system is to provide passengers with in-flight
41
entertainment services.
2
20
The purpose of the In-Seat Power Supply System (ISPSS) is to provide passengers with power for
4/
their Personal Electronic Devices (PED)
0
9/
-2
Note: Depending on the taxi mode and aircraft equipment, IFE and ISPSS may not be available
during taxi.
9-
y2
SYSTEM USERS
àM
The system users are:
Tr
‐ Cabin crewmembers who configure and maintain the operation of the system(s) during flight
ạm
‐ Passengers who use the system(s)

Ph
‐ Maintenance personnel who configure, troubleshoot, and repair the system(s) during
maintenance periods.
9
:2
12
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM - GENERAL

4
02

/2

04
9/
The aircraft has an in-Flight Entertainment system (IFE) with:

-2
‐ Prerecorded music
9-
‐ Prerecorded videos.
y2
Each passenger seat in the business class has a Passenger Control Unit (PCU).
àM
For information about the PCU: Refer to 08-020 Music System.

Tr
Audio signals are transmitted to the passenger headsets and/or to the loudspeakers of the
ạm
Passenger Address (PA).

Ph
Video signals are transmitted to the overhead display units (retractable).

29
:
IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT - GENERAL

4 12
Criteria: K13138
02

/2
04
The aircraft is equipped with an entertainment system including prerecorded music and prerecorded
9/
videos.
-2
Each passenger seat has a Passenger Control Unit (PCU) installed.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-010 P 1/8

à
Tr
CCOM A to C → 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
For information on the PCU Refer to 08-020 Music System and Refer to 08-030 Video - Operation by
the Passenger.
The audio is transmitted to the seat connected headsets as well as the passenger address
loudspeakers. The video signals are transmitted to the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screens
(retractable as well as wall mounted).
29
Note: When the cabin crew pushes the PAX SYS pb-sw  the entire In-Flight Entertainment
2:
(IFE) system will shut down. This will include the GSM on board system  .
41
2
20
IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT - GENERAL
4/
0
9/
Criteria: K8991
-2
9-
The aircraft has an entertainment system including prerecorded music and prerecorded videos.
y2
The cabin crew can control and monitor the entertainment system via the Video Control Center
àM
(VCC). For more information about the VCC: Refer to 08-010 Component Location.
Tr
Each passenger seat has a Passenger Control Unit (PCU).
ạm
For information about the PCU: Refer to 08-020 Music System and Refer to 08-030 Video -
Ph
Operation by the Passenger.

Passengers can listen to the audio via the seat connected headsets and/or the passenger
9
address loudspeakers. Passengers can watch videos via the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screens
:2
12
(retractable and wall mounted).

4
02

/2
04
9/
Criteria: K13714
-2
9-
y2
videos.
àM
Each passenger seat has a Passenger Control Unit (PCU) installed.

Tr
For information on the PCU Refer to 08-020 Music System .

ạm
Ph
loudspeakers. The video signals are transmitted to the retractable Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
screens.
29
:
12

4
02
/2
Criteria: K15680
04

9/
-2
videos.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-010 P 2/8

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
A321
Each business class seat has a handset installed for Audio Video on Demand (AVOD).
Each economy class seat has a Passenger Control Unit (PCU) installed.
For information about the handset and the PCU Refer to 08-020 Music System and Refer to 08-030
Video - Operation by the Passenger.
loudspeakers. The video signals are transmitted to the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screens
29
(retractable).
2:
41
The business class seats are equipped with in-Seat Display Units (SDUs).
2
20
Note: When the cabin crew pushes the PAX SYS pb-sw  the entire In-Flight Entertainment
4/
0
(IFE) system will shut down. This will include the GSM on board system  .
9/
-2
COMPONENT LOCATION
9-
y2
àM
Tr
Location of the VCC
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-010 P 3/8

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
A321
COMPONENT LOCATION
Criteria: K13138
Location of the VCC
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-010 P 4/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
COMPONENT LOCATION
Criteria: K15680
Location of the VCC
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-010 P 5/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
Equipment in the VCC
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
PAX SYS PUSHBUTTON-SWITCH FUNCTION

/2
04
The PAX SYS pb-sw controls the power supply for the cabin PAX systems, including the In-Flight
9/
Entertainment (IFE) systems.

-2
CAUTION The PAX SYS pb-sw is an emergency pushbutton-switch! A regular use of this
9-
y2
pushbutton-switch can result in damage of passenger system components.

àM
If installed, the PAX SYS pb-sw is located in the VCC/VCI.

Tr
In an emergency and if in accordance with the airline policy, the cabin crew can use the PAX SYS
ạm
pb-sw to reset all cabin PAX system:

Ph
‐ VCC/VCI equipment
‐ Video/Audio equipment (in-seat display, handset/PCU)
: 29

12

4
02
‐ Other PAX equipment, if installed.

/2
04
For a reset, the cabin crew must push the PAX SYS pb-sw to remove power from the systems,
9/
and push the PAX SYS pb-sw again to supply power to the systems again. It takes approx. 10 min
-2
until all systems have rebooted and are running again.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-010 P 6/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
CAUTION Wait at least 10 min until pushing the PAX SYS pb-sw to supply power again, to
avoid computer corruption.
COMPONENT LOCATION
Criteria: K13714
29
2:
41
VN-A613, VN-A614, VN-A615
2
20
Location of the Video Control Center (VCC)
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-010 P 7/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
Equipment in the VCC
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-010 P 8/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←E 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
MUSIC
A321
MUSIC SYSTEM
The passenger In-Flight Entertainment system (IFE) provides music programs to the passenger
seats.
29
Each passenger in the business class can select audio entertainment programs via the Passenger
2:
Control Unit (PCU),installed at each seat.
41
The passengers can listen to the audio entertainment programs via the headsets.
2
20
4/
Note: Passenger Address (PA) announcements will override any program.
0
9/
CREW PANEL
-2
9-
The Crew Panel (CP) is a system interface for the cabin crew.
y2
The cabin crew uses the touch screen of the CP to select and distribute video and audio signals to
àM
the passenger cabin zones. The CP can also output the audio signals from video sources as PA
Tr
video audio signals.
ạm
Crew Panel
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
(1) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Unit

-2
The LCD touch screen enables the cabin crew to make selections on the menu screens.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-020 P 1/8

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
MUSIC
A321
(2) Audio Jacks

The audio jacks enable the cabin crew to connect headsets.
(3) BRIGHTNESS Pushbuttons
The BRIGHTNESS pbs enable the cabin crew to adjust the brightness level.
(4) Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port
29
The USB port enables the cabin crew to connect USB devices.
2:
41
(5) Ethernet Port
2
20
The ethernet port enables the cabin crew to connect to the system.
4/
0
9/
PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT IN THE BUSINESS CLASS
-2
The PCU enables the passenger to control the music entertainment system.
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
(1) VOLUME Keys

:
12
The VOLUME keys enable the passenger to adjust the volume of the audio in the headset.
4
02
(2) Channel Indicator

/2
04
The channel indicator enables the passenger to see the selected channel.
9/
-2
(3) CHANNEL Keys

The CHANNEL keys enable the passenger to select a channel.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-020 P 2/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
MUSIC
A321
(4) Audio Output

The stereo audio output enables the passenger to connect the headset to the PCU..
MUSIC SYSTEM
29
2:
41
VN-A399, VN-A601, VN-A603, VN-A604, VN-A605, VN-A608, VN-A609, VN-A611, VN-A612
2
The audio passenger entertainment system transmits prerecorded audio entertainment programs to
20
4/
the passengers. Each passenger can select audio programs via the Passenger Control Units (PCUs)
0
9/
installed at each seat. The passengers can listen to these programs via the headsets at each seat.
-2
Business Class and Economy Class have the same PCUs, which are described below:
9-
PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT
y2
To control the music system, use the PCU. àM
Tr

ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
(1/6) Volume Control

Tr
To increase the headset volume, press the VOLUME ▴ key (1).

ạm
To decrease the headset volume, press the VOLUME ▾ key (6).

Ph

29
The selected channel is displayed on the channel indicator (2).

:
12
(3/5) Channel Control

4
02
To select an available music channel, press the CHANNEL ▴ key (3) or the CHANNEL ▾
/2
key (5). The selected channel is shown on the channel indicator (2).
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-020 P 3/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
MUSIC
A321
(4) Headset Jacks

Connect the headset pins to the jacks on the PCU.
MUSIC SYSTEM
Criteria: K13138
29
2:
The audio passenger entertainment system transmits pre-recorded audio entertainment programs to
41
the passengers. Each passenger can select entertainment programs via the passenger control units
2
20
(PCUs) installed at each seat. The passengers can hear these programs through headsets.
4/
The PCU is described below.
0
9/
-2
9-
To control the music system, use the PCU.
y2
Passenger Control Unit àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2

àM
To increase the headset volume, press the VOLUME ▴ key (1).

Tr
To decrease the headset volume, press the VOLUME ▾ key (6).

ạm

Ph

29

:
12
To select an available music channel, press the CHANNEL ▴ key (3) or the CHANNEL ▾
4
key (5). The selected channel is shown on the channel indicator (2).
02
/2
(4) Headset Jacks

04

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-020 P 4/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
MUSIC
A321
MUSIC SYSTEM
Criteria: K15680
In-seat audio provides audio to the economy class passengers and Audio and Video On Demand
(AVOD) to the business class passengers.
29
The business class passenger has a handset. The economy class passenger has a Passenger
2:
Control Unit (PCU).
412
HANDSET IN THE BUSINESS CLASS
20
4/
Handset in the Business Class
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
(1) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)

This display shows the selected channel number.
29
:
(2) MONITOR Key

12
The MONITOR key turns ON or OFF the monitor.

4
02
/2
(3) CHANNEL ▴/▾ Keys

04
The CHANNEL ▴/▾ keys increase/decrease the channel.

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-020 P 5/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
MUSIC
A321
(4) VOLUME ▴/▾ Keys

The VOLUME ▴/▾ keys increase/decrease the volume of the audio in the headsets.
(5) HOME Key
The HOME key takes the user to the home menu screen on the SDU.
(6) Cursor Key
29
The cursor key controls the cursor and the navigation for the service and entertainment
2:
41
applications on the SDU.
2
20
(7) Passenger Service Keys
4/
0
The passenger service keys control the passenger service functions (ATTENDANT
9/
CALL/CANCEL, READING LIGHT).
-2
9-
(8) ENTER Key
y2
The ENTER key confirms the menu choice on the SDU.
àM
(9) AUDIO/VIDEO Control Keys
Tr
The AUDIO/VIDEO control keys control the playback of the passenger entertainment
ạm
(REWIND, PLAY or PAUSE, FAST FORWARD, STOP).

Ph
PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT IN THE ECONOMY CLASS

9
:2
To control the music system, use the PCU.

12

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
(1/2) CHANNEL Control

4
To select an available music channel, press the CH + key (1) or the CH - key (2). The
02
selected channel is displayed on the channel indicator (5).

/2
04
(3/4) VOLUME Control

9/
-2
To increase the headset volume, press the VOL + key (4).

To decrease the headset volume, press the VOL - key (3).
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-020 P 6/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
MUSIC
A321
(5) CHANNEL Indicator

29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-020 P 7/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
MUSIC
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-020 P 8/8

à
Tr
CCOM 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
VIDEO
A321
VIDEO SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The system uses a tape reproducer to replay pre-recorded programs stored on video tapes. The
programs are converted by the tape reproducers into video and audio signals which are transmitted
29
to the System Control Unit (SCU).
2:
The video signals are transmitted to the LCD units.
41
The audio signals are transmitted via the Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS) directors
2
20
and the Passenger Entertainment System (PES) so that the program sound can be heard over the
4/
0
passenger address loudspeakers and the PES headsets.
9/
-2
Note: PA announcements will override the video sound.
9-
VIDEO CASSETTE PLAYER
y2
àM
The VCP is designed to play a normal or Hi8 8-mm video cassette prerecorded with video
Tr
programs.
ạm
Video Cassette Player

Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
Front-Panel Controls and Indicators

29
(1) EJECT Button and TAPE IN Indicator

:
12
The TAPE IN indicator is ON when the VCP is on and it is loaded with a video cassette.
4
Pressing the EJECT button causes the VCP to unthread the tape from the tape transport
02
mechanism and eject the video cassette.

/2
04
The TAPE IN indicator blinks until the cassette is fully ejected, then it goes off.
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-030 P 1/14

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
VIDEO
A321
If the VCP is in PLAY, FF or REW mode, pressing the EJECT button stops the VCP (STOP
mode). Then, the cassette is ejected. The EJECT button can not be used when the VCP is
off.
(2) STOP Button
Press this button to stop the VCP (stop mode). The STOP indicator is on during stop mode
29
or pause mode.
2:
41
(3) FF Button
2
When the VCP is in the rewind or the stop mode, pressing this button puts the VCP into the
20
4/
fast forward mode. The FF indicator is on during the FF mode.
0
9/
When the VCP is in the play mode, pressing this button puts the VCP into the cue mode.
-2
Releasing the button returns the VCP to the play mode. The PLAY and the FF indicator are
9-
on in the cue mode.
y2
(4) PLAY Button àM
Press this button to put the VCP into play mode.
Tr
The PLAY indicator is on during play mode or pause mode.

ạm
Ph
(5) REW Button and Indicator

When the VCP is in fast forward or stop mode, pressing this button puts the VCP into the
9
rewind (REW) mode.

:2
12
The REW indicator is on during rewind mode.

4
When the VCP is in play mode, pressing this button puts the VCP into review mode.
02
Releasing the button returns the VCP to play mode.

/2
04
Both, the PLAY and the REW indicator are on in review mode.
9/
-2
(6) POWER Button and Indicator

Press this button to turn the VCP ON. Press it again to turn it OFF (toggle function).
9-
y2
The POWER indicator is lit when power is on.

àM
Note: The POWER button is not a primary power on-off switch. Part of the VCP circuitry
Tr
is always energized as long as 115 V AC, 400 Hz primary power is supplied to the
ạm
VCP.
Ph
If the VCP is loaded with a video cassette and the Power button is pressed, one of the
following sequences takes place before the VCP turns off:
: 29
‐ VCP mode is REW, PLAY or FF: VCP goes into stop mode. The STOP and POWER
12
indicators go off.
4
02
‐ VCP mode is STOP: The STOP and POWER indicators go off.

/2
04
(7) Video Cassette Insertion Opening

9/
-2
The opening for video cassette insertion is protected by a flap. The opening is located above
the mode control buttons.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-030 P 2/14

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
VIDEO
A321
The flap is spring-loaded, but does not interfere with the insertion of a video cassette,
provided the VCP is ON and the TAPE IN indicator is OFF (no video cassette loaded).
If a video cassette is already loaded, the flap prevents the insertion of another cassette.
When the VCP is turned OFF, the cassette is mechanically ejected.
Insert a video cassette horizontally into the opening, with the label side up and the arrow
mark pointing toward the VCP. Incorrect insertion of a cassette is mechanically prevented.
29
When a video cassette is fully inserted (past the flap position), it is automatically drawn
2:
41
into the VCP. Pressing the EJECT button opens the cassette insertion flap and the loaded
2
cassette is ejected from the VCP.
20
4/
PROGRAMMABLE VIDEO SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
0
9/
-2
The Programmable Video System Control Unit (PVSCU) is a component of aircraft passenger
9-
entertainment system and is a central control unit for distribution of video and audio signals to the
y2
passenger cabin zones.
àM
The PVSCU switches the paths for the video and audio signals, controls the power of the
Tr
monitors, controls the video cassette players (VCPs) and camera.
ạm
The PVSCU also communicates with the video distribution units (VDUs), passenger flight
Ph
information system (PFIS), cabin intercommunication data system (CIDS) and prerecorded
announcement and boarding music (PRAM), and interfaces with the PA system.
9
The PVSCU contains a color LCD monitor with a touch-panel for selection of the video/audio
:2
sources and passenger cabin zones. The PVSCU distributes the selected video/audio signal to
12
the selected zone. The PVSCU can also output the audio signals from video sources as PA video
4
02
audio signals.
/2
04
Programmable Video System Control Unit

9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-030 P 3/14

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
VIDEO
A321
VIDEO SOURCES
VCP
The PVSCU sends commands to a VCP to control the operational mode of the VCP (play,
stop, rewind, etc.), to make the VCP search and locate a specific program on a multi-program
video cassette, or to get the status (current operational mode, etc.) from the VCP.
29
2:
Passenger Information System (PFIS)
41
2
AIRSHOW is supported. It can be selected as a video source.
20
4/
PASSENGER CABIN ZONES
0
9/
-2
The passenger cabins are grouped into two columns (FWD and AFT) for video/audio
entertainment system. Each column has three zone (ZONE-1, ZONE-2 and ZONE-3). The
9-
same video signal is distributed to the zones with same zone number in different columns. In
y2
accordance with the zoning information obtained from the CIDS, the PVSCU programs the
àM
distribution of the video signal for individual monitors in ZONE-1, ZONE-2 and ZONE-3.
Tr
ạm
VIDEO SWITCHER CONTROL

Ph
Select any desired zone-source combinations on the LCD screen of the PVSCU; different video
sources for individual zones or a single video source for two zones, etc.
9
:2
12
VIDEO SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION

4
02
/2
Criteria: K13138, K13714, K15680

04
9/
-2
VN-A615
9-
The system uses customized digital video files stored on internal hard drives. The programs are
y2
converted into video and audio signals which are transmitted to the System Controller (SC).
àM
The video signals are transmitted to the overhead display units (retractable and/or wall-mounted 
Tr
)
ạm
Ph
and the Passenger Entertainment System (PES). The program are distributed to the passenger
address loudspeakers and/or the PES headsets at each seat.
29
:
12
Note: Passenger Address (PA) announcements will override any program.

4
02
The SC switches the paths for the video and audio signals and controls the power of the display units
/2
in the cabin.
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-030 P 4/14

à
Tr
CCOM ← A to B → 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
VIDEO
A321
OPERATION BY THE CABIN CREW VIA THE CREW PANEL

The cabin crew can operate and monitor the distribution of video/audio signals to a selected
zone via the Crew Panel (CP). The CP is a color LCD display unit with a touch-panel. The CP
distributes the selected video/audio signal to the selected zone.
Crew Panel
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
(1) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Unit

y2
The LCD touch screen enables the cabin crew to make selections on the menu screens.
àM
Tr
(2) Audio Jacks

ạm
The audio jacks enable the cabin crew to connect headsets.

Ph
(3) BRIGHTNESS Pushbuttons

The BRIGHTNESS pbs enable the cabin crew to adjust the brightness level.
29
:
12
(4) Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port

4
The USB port enables the cabin crew to connect USB devices.
02
/2
(5) Ethernet Port

04
9/
The ethernet port enables the cabin crew to connect to the system.
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-030 P 5/14

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
VIDEO
A321
VIDEO SYSTEM - OPERATION

EXAMPLE FOR VIDEO CASSETTE PLAYBACK (NORMAL MODE)

1. Insert a video cassette in the Video Cassette Player (VCP).
29
Note: The control functions PLAY, REW, FF, EJECT and STOP are active.
2:
41
2. Press the PLAY button to start the playback.
2
20
3. Press the STOP button to stop the playback.
4/
4. Press the REW button to rewind the VCP to the start of the tape.
0
9/
5. Press the FF button to fast forward the VCP to the end of the tape.
-2
9-
PROGRAMMABLE VIDEO SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT (PVSCU) MONITOR
y2
àM
Tr
The PVSCU contains a color LCD monitor with touch-panel for selection of the video/audio sources
ạm
and passenger cabin zones.

Ph
PVSCU Monitor Main Screen - Example

9
:2
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-030 P 6/14

à
Tr
CCOM C to D 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
VIDEO
A321
VIDEO
VN-A367
The system uses a reproducer to replay pre-recorded programs stored on DVDs. The programs
29
are converted by the reproducers into video and audio signals which are transmitted to the System
2:
Control Unit (SCU).
41
The video signals are transmitted to the LCD units.
2
20
4/
and the Passenger Entertainment System (PES) so that the program sound can be heard over the
0
9/
passenger address loudspeakers and the PES headsets.
-2
Note: PA announcements will override the video sound.
9-
y2
àM
To control the video system, use the passenger control unit (PCU).
Tr
ạm

Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr

ạm
To increase the headset volume, push the VOL ▴ key (1).

Ph
To decrease the headset volume the passenger has to push the VOL ▾ key (6).
29
:
The selected channel is indicated on the channel indicator (2).

4 12
02

/2
To select an available music channel, push the CH ▴ key (3) or the CH ▾ key (5). The
04
selected channel is shown on the channel indicator (2).

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-030 P 7/14

à
Tr
CCOM E→ 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
VIDEO
A321
(4) Headset Jacks

VIDEO - OPERATION BY THE PASSENGER

Criteria: K15680
29
2:
The video system transmits audio as well as video audio entertainment programs to the business
41
class passenger seats.
2
20
The passengers can listen to these programs via seat connected headsets.
4/
0
9/
HANDSET IN THE BUSINESS CLASS
-2
Handset in the Business Class
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
(1) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)

:
12

4
02
(2) MONITOR Key

/2
04
The MONITOR key turns ON or OFF the monitor.

9/
-2
(3) CHANNEL ▴/▾ Keys

The CHANNEL ▴/▾ keys increase/decrease the channel.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-030 P 8/14

à
Tr
CCOM ← E to F → 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
VIDEO
A321
(4) VOLUME ▴/▾ Keys

The VOLUME ▴/▾ keys increase/decrease the volume of the audio in the headsets.
(5) HOME Key
The HOME key takes the user to the home menu screen on the SDU.
(6) Cursor Key
29
2:
41
2
20
(7) Passenger Service Keys
4/
0
The passenger service keys control the passenger service functions (ATTENDANT
9/
CALL/CANCEL, READING LIGHT).
-2
9-
(8) ENTER Key
y2
The ENTER key confirms the menu choice on the SDU.
àM
(9) AUDIO/VIDEO Control Keys
Tr
The AUDIO/VIDEO control keys control the playback of the passenger entertainment
ạm
(REWIND, PLAY or PAUSE, FAST FORWARD, STOP).

Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-030 P 9/14

à
Tr
CCOM ←F→ 06 JAN 21

ạm
Ph
VIDEO
A321
SMART MONITOR IN THE BUSINESS CLASS

Smart Monitor
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
(1) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Touch Screen

9/
The LCD touch screen enables the passengers to make selections on the screen.
-2
(2) BRIGHTNESS ▴/▾ Pushbuttons

9-
y2
The BRIGHTNESS ▴/▾ pushbuttons increase or decrease the brightness level on the screen.
àM
(3) POWER Pushbutton

Tr
The POWER pushbutton turns the LCD backlight ON or OFF.

ạm
Ph
(4) MODE/LANGUAGE Pushbutton

The MODE/LANGUAGE pushbutton enables the passengers to select the mode or the
language.
29
:
12
(5) Credit Card Reader

4
02
The credit card reader is used to swipe a card through the reader.
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-030 P 10/14

à
Tr
CCOM ←F 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
VIDEO
A321
HOW TO MANUALLY RETRACT AN OVERHEAD DISPLAY UNIT, IF INSTALLED

Prior to takeoff or landing some overhead display units remain deployed.
29
2:
41
2
YES NO
20
4/
0
9/
1. Are some of the overhead display units still deployed instead of
-2
automatically retracted ? Go to 2. END
9-
y2
2. Go to an affected overhead display unit and perform the following
operation: àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-030 P 11/14

à
Tr
CCOM G→ 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
VIDEO
A321
YES NO
Manually turn OFF the power: Insert a clip or a pin into the hole
behind to the affected overhead display unit and push the POWER
pb. This will cut the power to the overhead display unit.
29
Typical Access to the POWER
2:
Pushbutton of the Overhead Display Unit
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Note: The POWER pb is normally only for maintenance

Tr
purposes.
ạm
Go to 3. Go to 3.
Ph
3. Has the affected overhead display unit retracted? Go to 4. Go to 5.

29
:
12
4. If the manual power cut off successfully retracted the affected

4
overhead display unit:

02
/2
Repeat the action for any other deployed overhead display unit. Go to 7. Go to 7.
04
9/
5. Manually close the affected overhead display unit:

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-030 P 12/14

à
Tr
CCOM ←G→ 06 JAN 21

ạm
Ph
VIDEO
A321
YES NO
Forcibly push and pull the affected overhead display unit until it is
fully stowed and latched. Go to 6. Go to 6.
29
6. Are there any other affected overhead display units? Go to 2. Go to 7.
2:
41
7. When all affected overhead display units have been retracted:
2
20
Make an entry into the cabin logbook mentioning the:
4/
0
‐ Defect
9/
-2
‐ Number and location of the affected overhead display units
‐ Countermeasures taken.
9-
END END
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-030 P 13/14

à
Tr
CCOM ←G 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
VIDEO
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-030 P 14/14

à
Tr
CCOM 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
AIRSHOW
A321
AIRSHOW SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

AIRSHOW is part of the Passenger Flight Information System (PFIS). AIRSHOW provides visual
in-flight information to the passengers.
29
The following information is displayed on the cabin monitors via the video system:
2:
‐ Maps, which indicate the aircraft's position and track
41
‐ Flight information such as altitude, ground speed, outside temperature and distance from
2
20
destination.
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-040 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
AIRSHOW
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-040 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
INTERACTIVE GAMES
A321
INTERACTIVE FUNCTIONS CONTROL - DESCRIPTION

The following options are available from the ON-DEMAND SERVICES home screen:
‐ Games
‐ Movies
29
‐ Music.
2:
41
Activate the on-demand services by using the back side of the passenger handset (turn over the
2
20
passenger handset) and press the HOME key.
4/
During the ON-DEMAND SERVICES mode, the cross cursor key works like a computer mouse.
0
9/
Move the cursor on the in-Seat Display Unit (SDU) by using the cross cursor. Make any selections by
-2
clicking the cross cursor key or by pressing the SELECT key.
9-
When a service option is selected from the ON-DEMAND SERVICES home screen, titles are
y2
displayed on the SDU. These represent the selections available under that particular entertainment
àM
category.
Tr
For the GAMES option, turn over the passenger handset. The passenger handset controls are in
ạm
accordance with standard video game key mapping.

Ph
PASSENGER HANDSET
9
Passenger Handset
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-070 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 10 MAY 16
ạm
Ph
INTERACTIVE GAMES
A321
(1) START Key (back side)

The START key starts the selected application.
(2) LEFT/RIGHT Keys
The LEFT/RIGHT keys are active for games or interactive functions. The detailed information
about the key function is given in the application.
29
(3) Cross Cursor Key (back side)
2:
41
The cross cursor key controls internet and interactive applications.
2
20
(4) A, B, X, Y Keys (back side)
4/
0
The A, B, X, Y keys are active for the game or interactive functions. The detailed information
9/
about the key functions is given in the application.
-2
9-
(5) SELECT Key (back side)
y2
The SELECT key selects an interactive option in the menu.
àM
(6) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) (front side)
Tr

ạm
Ph
(7) VOLUME ▴/▾Keys (front side)

The VOLUME ▴/▾ keys increase/decrease the VOLUME of the audio in the headsets.
9
:2
(8) HOME Key (front side)

12
The HOME key takes the user to the HOME menu screen on the SDU.
4
02
(9) Cursor Key (front side)

/2
04
9/

-2
(10) ENTER Key (front side)

9-
y2
The ENTER key selects the menu choice on the SDU.

àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 08-070 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 10 MAY 16
ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
DOORS AND SLIDES
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
DOORS AND SLIDES
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
09-010 CABIN DOORS

09-010-10 General
Doors and Exits in the Cabin.................................................................................................................................. A
09-010-20 Location
29
Location of the Doors and Exits..............................................................................................................................A
2:
41
2
09-010-30-A Cabin Doors 1 and 4
20
4/
Description of the Cabin Doors 1 and 4................................................................................................................. A
0
9/
Operation of the Cabin Doors 1 and 4................................................................................................................... B
-2
09-010-30-B Cabin Doors 2 (if installed) and 3
9-
Description of the Cabin Door 2 and 3................................................................................................................... A
y2
Operation of the Cabin Doors 2 and 3................................................................................................................... B
àM
Tr
ạm
Door Control Handle Partially Lifted in Flight..........................................................................................................A

Ph
09-020 SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
09-020-10 General
9
:2
General Information about the Slides......................................................................................................................A

4 12
09-020-20 Location
02
/2
Type and Location................................................................................................................................................... A

04
9/
-2
09-020-30-A Slides at Cabin Doors 1 and 4

9-
Slideraft.................................................................................................................................................................... A
y2
Slide Indicators at Cabin Doors 1 and 4.................................................................................................................B

àM
09-020-30-B Slides at Cabin Doors 2 (if installed) and 3

Tr
Escape Slide at Cabin Door 2 and 3...................................................................................................................... A

ạm
Escape Slide Pressure Indicator............................................................................................................................. B

Ph
09-020-30-C Offwing Slides

29
Life Lines [If Installed]............................................................................................................................................. A

:
12
09-020-40 Operation
4
02
Automatic Slide Deployment................................................................................................................................... A

/2
Manual Slide Deployment........................................................................................................................................B

04

9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

09-020-50 Slides Use for Ditching
Disconnection of the Slides.....................................................................................................................................A
Survival Kit............................................................................................................................................................... B
29
09-030 AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION IN CRASH SITUATIONS
2:
41
AIRCRAFT CRASH POSITION...............................................................................................................................A
2
AIRCRAFT CRASH POSITION A321 IAE.............................................................................................................. B
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321
DOORS AND EXITS IN THE CABIN

Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft has:

‐ 8 cabin doors.
29
In case of an emergency evacuation all doors and exits are used as emergency exits.
2:
41
CABIN DOORS
2
20
All cabin doors are equipped with emergency evacuation equipment (escape slides/sliderafts),
4/
stowed in a container hinged to the lower part of each cabin door 1 and 4, or stowed inside the
0
9/
aircraft structure below cabin doors 2 and 3.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321
LOCATION OF THE DOORS AND EXITS

Applicable to: ALL
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION - CABIN DOORS 1 AND 4
DESCRIPTION OF THE CABIN DOORS 1 AND 4

Applicable to: ALL
OUTSIDE VIEW OF THE CABIN DOOR
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-A P 1/12

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321
INSIDE VIEW OF THE CABIN DOOR
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
1. Door Control Handle

29
2. Observation Window with:

:
12
‐ Cabin Pressure Indicator

4
02
‐ Slide Armed Indicator

/2
04
3. Frame Assist Handle

9/
4. Door Assist Handle

-2
5. Door Locking Indication

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-A P 2/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321
6. Slide Arming System with:

‐ Slide Arming Lever
‐ Safety Pin
7. Gust Lock
8. Hinge Arm
29
9. Escape Slide/Slideraft Container
2:
41
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE
2
20
On a cabin door there is one DOOR CONTROL HANDLE on the inside and one on the outside.
4/
0
The DOOR CONTROL HANDLE locks or unlocks a cabin door.
9/
-2
OBSERVATION WINDOW
9-
Beneath the OBSERVATION WINDOW, integrated in the cabin door lining, there are two
y2
indicators: àM
Tr
‐ a CABIN PRESSURE indicator

ạm
‐ a SLIDE ARMED indicator.

Ph
The indicators are visible from the inside and from the outside of the aircraft.
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-A P 3/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
CABIN PRESSURE Indicator

àM
WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE CABIN DOOR IF THE CABIN

Tr
PRESSURE INDICATOR FLASHES RED.

ạm
This is an indication of residual cabin pressure.

Ph
The CABIN PRESSURE indicator flashes red when:

29
‐ The CABIN PRESSURE differential is above 2.5 mbar

:
12
‐ The related slide is disarmed

4
‐ At least one engine is off.

02
/2
SLIDE ARMED Indicator

04
9/
The SLIDE ARMED indicator comes ON steady white when the SLIDE ARMING LEVER is
-2
in the Armed position and the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is lifted.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-A P 4/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321
The SLIDE ARMED indicator remains OFF when the SLIDE ARMING LEVER is in the
Disarmed position and the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is lifted.
Slide Armed Aural Alert (Buzzer) 
A buzzer (optional) sounds when the SLIDE ARMING LEVER is in the Armed position and
the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is lifted.
29
2:
ASSIST HANDLES
41
2
Each cabin door has one door and two frame assist handles. The cabin crew use the door
20
assist handle to move the cabin door while the frame assist handles are used to secure the
4/
0
cabin crew when they operate the door.
9/
-2
DOOR LOCKING INDICATOR
9-
The DOOR LOCKING indicator shows the current status of the cabin door.
y2
The indicator shows LOCKED when the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is fully down or
àM
UNLOCKED when the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is lifted.
Tr
ạm
ARMING SYSTEM
Ph
The slide arming system consists of a SLIDE ARMING LEVER and a SAFETY PIN with a red
flag.
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-A P 5/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
Note: An optional transparent plastic cover  protects the SLIDE ARMING LEVER against
àM
inadvertent movement. This cover must be closed during all phases of the flight. To
Tr
get access to the SLIDE ARMING LEVER, the cabin crew must manually open the
ạm
plastic cover.
Ph
Note: According to the aircraft configuration, the safety pin can be stowed in one of the
following locations:
29
‐ A hole located on the door support arm

:
12
‐ A pouch inside the stowage compartment of the nearest CAS

4
02
‐ A pocket located on the door or next to the door window.

/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-A P 6/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321
GUST LOCK RELEASE PUSHBUTTON

The GUST LOCK secures the cabin door in the fully open position. To disengage the cabin door
from its fully open position, there is a GUST LOCK RELEASE pushbutton located on the hinge
arm.
ESCAPE SLIDE/SLIDERAFT CONTAINER
29
2:
The ESCAPE SLIDES/SLIDERAFTS are door mounted and folded in a container installed at
41
each cabin door 1 and 4.
2
20
DAMPER AND EMERGENCY OPENING ACTUATOR
4/
0
9/
Each cabin door has a pneumatic Damper and Emergency Opening Actuator (DEOA) hidden in
-2
the cabin door hinge, also known as CABIN DOOR POWER ASSIST.
9-
The DEOA keeps the cabin door from slamming open in normal operation, under windy conditions.
y2
In an emergency operation, the DEOA will support the door opening operation with a pneumatic
àM
boost.
Tr
When the cabin door is open, the pressure of the DEOA can be checked via a pressure gauge
ạm
which has either a colored or a numeric indication:

Ph
Pressure Gauge (Colored Indication)

9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
The pressure gauge is divided in three distinct areas: green, yellow and red.
-
L3
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-A P 7/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321
Indication Action
Green The aircraft can be dispatched.
Yellow The aircraft can be dispatched. Additional information is given (Pressure
has decreased from the correct value and a maintenance action
is mandatory in the next few days). Inform the maintenance crew
immediately.
29
Yellow and an additional FAP warning The aircraft can be dispatched for flight in this condition, but the door bottle
2:
pressure must be checked before the next flight. Inform the maintenance
41
crew immediately.
2
20
Red The actuator and the door are inoperative. Maintenance action is
4/
mandatory before this flight. Inform the maintenance crew immediately.
0
9/
Pressure Gauge (Numeric Indication)
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
The pressure depends on the ambient temperature.

/2
04
9/
Indication Status of the Door Damper / Cylinder

-2
TEMP (°C) PRESSURE (PSI ±5%)

+50 1950
9-
+40 1880
y2
+30 1810
àM
+20 1740
Tr
+10 1660
ạm
Operative
0 1610
Ph
-10 1540
-20 1465
29
-30 1395
:
12
-40 1325
4
The displayed pressure deviates from the Inoperative

02
above values.
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-A P 8/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321
L1 SAFETY STRAP OF THE CABIN DOOR

Inside of each cabin door frame there is a safety strap, visible when the door is open. The cabin
crew must install the safety strap whenever a cabin door is open with no stairs or no gateway in
position. The safety strap is striped in black and yellow to indicate an open cabin door.
WARNING Do not leave an open cabin door unattended. A safety strap will NOT prevent
29
passengers or crewmembers from falling out!
2:
41
Installation of the Safety Strap
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-A P 9/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321
Note: The safety strap rolls up automatically during removal procedure. The cabin crew must
ensure that the safety strap is fully retracted into its recess before closing the door.
OPERATION OF THE CABIN DOORS 1 AND 4

Applicable to: ALL
29
2:
HOW TO OPEN THE CABIN DOORS 1 AND 4 FROM INSIDE
412
WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE CABIN DOOR IF THE CABIN PRESSURE
20
INDICATOR FLASHES RED.
4/
0
9/
-2
1. Fully lift up the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.
9-
The DOOR LOCKING indicator changes from LOCKED to UNLOCKED.
y2
Note: Ensure that the escape slide/slideraft is disarmed before operating the cabin door.
àM
Tr
2. Push the cabin door outward and forward until the GUST LOCK engages.
ạm
Please refer to the procedure 13-20 (Door Operation From Inside).

Ph
HOW TO CLOSE THE CABIN DOORS 1 AND 4 FROM INSIDE

9
:2
1. Press the GUST LOCK RELEASE pb to disengage the cabin door from its fully open position.
12
2. Pull the cabin door into the door frame.

4
02
3. Fully lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.

/2
The DOOR LOCKING indicator changes from UNLOCKED to LOCKED.

04
9/
Please refer to the procedure 13-20 (Door Operation From Inside).

-2
HOW TO OPEN THE CABIN DOORS 1 AND 4 FROM OUTSIDE

9-
y2
WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE CABIN DOOR IF THE CABIN PRESSURE
àM

Tr

ạm
1. Push the flap and grasp the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.

Ph
2. Lift the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE fully up.

29
Note: If the escape slide/slideraft is armed, it will automatically disarm when the cabin door is
:
12
opened from the outside.

4
02
3. Pull the cabin door outward and forward until the GUST LOCK engages.
/2
4. Lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE into the recess.

04
9/
Please refer to the procedure 13-20 (Door Operation From Outside).

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-A P 10/12

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321
HOW TO CLOSE THE CABIN DOORS 1 AND 4 FROM OUTSIDE

3. Press the GUST LOCK RELEASE pb to disengage the cabin door from its fully open position.
4. Move the cabin door toward the door frame.
29
5. When the cabin door is in front of the door frame, push the cabin door into the door frame.
2:
6. Fully lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE into the recess.
41
2
Note: The cabin door is closed and locked when all of the below apply:
20
4/
‐ The cabin door is flush with the door frame.
0
9/
‐ The DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is fully in its recess (closed position).
-2
‐ The FLAP of the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is flush with the DOOR CONTROL
9-
HANDLE.
y2
àM
Please refer to the procedure 13-20 (Door Operation From Outside).
Tr
HOW TO OPEN THE CABIN DOORS 1 AND 4 IN AN EMERGENCY

ạm
WARNING When the slideraft is in the ARMED mode, the red CABIN PRESSURE indicator
Ph
and the aural warning will not trigger in order to indicate the residual cabin
pressure.
9
:2
12
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE CABIN DOOR IF THERE IS AT LEAST ONE

4
OF THE FOLLOWING INDICATIONS OF RESIDUAL CABIN PRESSURE:

02
/2
‐ Resistance in the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE when it is being lifted to the

04
OPEN position, using normal force, and/or

9/
‐ A hissing noise in the immediate door area.

-2
9-
Rapidly fully lift up and release the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.

y2
àM
WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO HOLD THE CABIN DOOR CLOSED WHEN THIS
Tr
PROCEDURE HAS BEEN INITIATED.

ạm
An emergency door opening is always power-assisted.

Ph
Note: The cabin door opens automatically and locks in its fully open position. Should the
pneumatic assistance of the cabin door fails, push the cabin door open manually.
: 29
Please refer to the procedure 14-30 (Emergency Passenger Door Operation).

12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-A P 11/12

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-A P 12/12

à
Tr
CCOM 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION -
CABIN DOORS 2 (IF INSTALLED) AND 3
DESCRIPTION OF THE CABIN DOOR 2 AND 3

Applicable to: ALL
OUTSIDE VIEW OF THE CABIN DOOR
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-B P 1/10

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
INSIDE VIEW OF THE CABIN DOOR
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
1. Door Control Handle Cover

ạm
2. Door Control Handle

Ph
3. Frame Assist Handle

4. Door Assist Handle
29
5. Door Locking Indication

:
12
6. Observation Window with:

4
02
‐ Cabin Pressure Indicator

/2
‐ Slide Armed Indicator

04
9/
7. Slide Arming System with:

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-B P 2/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
‐ Slide Arming Lever

‐ Safety Pin
8. Gust Lock
9. Hinge Arm
29
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE
2:
41
On a cabin door there is one DOOR CONTROL HANDLE on the inside and one on the outside.
2
The DOOR CONTROL HANDLE locks or unlocks a cabin door.
20
4/
Note: The DOOR CONTROL HANDLE on the inside has a cover to avoid inadvertent
0
9/
opening of the door.
-2
ASSIST HANDLES
9-
y2
Each cabin door has one door and two frame assist handles. The cabin crew use the door
àM
assist handle to move the cabin door while the frame assist handles are used to secure the
Tr
cabin crew when they operate the door.

ạm
DOOR LOCKING INDICATOR

Ph
The DOOR LOCKING indicator shows the current status of the cabin door.
9
The indicator shows LOCKED when the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is fully down or
:2
12
UNLOCKED when the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is lifted.

4
02
OBSERVATION WINDOW
/2
04
Beneath the OBSERVATION WINDOW, integrated in the cabin door lining, there are two
9/
indicators:
-2
‐ a CABIN PRESSURE indicator

9-
‐ a SLIDE ARMED indicator.

y2
àM
The indicators are visible from the inside and from the outside of the aircraft.
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-B P 3/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
CABIN PRESSURE Indicator

àM
WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE CABIN DOOR IF THE CABIN

Tr
PRESSURE INDICATOR FLASHES RED.

ạm

Ph
The CABIN PRESSURE indicator flashes red when:

29
‐ The CABIN PRESSURE differential is above 2.5 mbar

:
12
‐ The related slide is disarmed

4
‐ At least one engine is off.

02
/2
SLIDE ARMED Indicator

04
9/
The SLIDE ARMED indicator comes ON steady white when the SLIDE ARMING LEVER is
-2
in the Armed position and the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is lifted.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-B P 4/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
The SLIDE ARMED indicator remains OFF when the SLIDE ARMING LEVER is in the
Disarmed position and the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is lifted.
Slide Armed Aural Alert (Buzzer) 
A buzzer (optional) sounds when the SLIDE ARMING LEVER is in the Armed position and
the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is lifted.
29
2:
ARMING SYSTEM
412
The slide arming system consists of a SLIDE ARMING LEVER and a SAFETY PIN with a red
20
flag.
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
Note: An optional transparent plastic cover  protects the SLIDE ARMING LEVER against
inadvertent movement. This cover must be closed during all phases of the flight. To
get access to the SLIDE ARMING LEVER, the cabin crew must manually open the
: 29
plastic cover.
12
4
Note: According to the aircraft configuration, the safety pin can be stowed in one of the
02
/2
following locations:
04
‐ A hole located on the door support arm

9/
-2
‐ A pouch inside the stowage compartment of the nearest CAS

‐ A pocket located on the door or next to the door window.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-B P 5/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
GUST LOCK RELEASE PUSHBUTTON

The GUST LOCK secures the cabin door in the fully open position. To disengage the cabin door
from its fully open position, there is a GUST LOCK RELEASE pushbutton located on the hinge
arm.
DAMPER AND EMERGENCY OPENING ACTUATOR
29
2:
Each cabin door has a pneumatic Damper and Emergency Opening Actuator (DEOA) hidden in
41
the cabin door hinge, also known as CABIN DOOR POWER ASSIST.
2
20
The DEOA keeps the cabin door from slamming open in normal operation, under windy conditions.
4/
In an emergency operation, the DEOA will support the door opening operation with a pneumatic
0
9/
boost.
-2
When the cabin door is open, the pressure of the DEOA can be checked via a pressure gauge
9-
which has either a colored or a numeric indication:
y2
Pressure Gauge (Colored Indication)àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
L3 The pressure gauge is divided in three distinct areas: green, yellow and red.
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-B P 6/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
Indication Action
Green The aircraft can be dispatched.
Yellow The aircraft can be dispatched. Additional information is given (Pressure
has decreased from the correct value and a maintenance action
is mandatory in the next few days). Inform the maintenance crew
immediately.
29
Yellow and an additional FAP warning The aircraft can be dispatched for flight in this condition, but the door bottle
2:
pressure must be checked before the next flight. Inform the maintenance
41
crew immediately.
2
20
Red The actuator and the door are inoperative. Maintenance action is
4/
mandatory before this flight. Inform the maintenance crew immediately.
0
9/
Pressure Gauge (Numeric Indication)
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
4
02
The pressure depends on the ambient temperature.

/2
04
9/
Indication Status of the Door Damper / Cylinder

-2
TEMP (°C) PRESSURE (PSI ±5%)

+50 1950
9-
+40 1880
y2
+30 1810
àM
+20 1740
Tr
+10 1660
ạm
Operative
0 1610
Ph
-10 1540
-20 1465
29
-30 1395
:
12
-40 1325
4
The displayed pressure deviates from the Inoperative

02
above values.
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-B P 7/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
L1 SAFETY STRAP OF THE CABIN DOOR
Inside of each cabin door frame there is a safety strap, visible when the door is open. The cabin
crew must install the safety strap whenever a cabin door is open with no stairs or no gateway in
position. The safety strap is striped in black and yellow to indicate an open cabin door.
WARNING Do not leave an open cabin door unattended. A safety strap will NOT prevent
29
passengers or crewmembers from falling out!
2:
41
Installation of the Safety Strap
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-B P 8/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
Note: The safety strap rolls up automatically during removal procedure. The cabin crew must
ensure that the safety strap is fully retracted into its recess before closing the door.
OPERATION OF THE CABIN DOORS 2 AND 3

Applicable to: ALL
29
2:
Typically the cabin doors 2L/2R  and 3L/3R are not used for boarding, disembarkation etc. Their
41
purpose is to function as emergency exits in case of an emergency evacuation.
2
20
However, these doors can be operated like the other cabin doors.
4/
0
HOW TO OPEN THE CABIN DOORS 2 AND 3 FROM INSIDE
9/
-2
WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE DOOR IF THE CABIN PRESSURE
9-
y2
àM
1. Pull the COVER of the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE aside.
Tr

ạm
The DOOR LOCKING indicator changes from LOCKED to UNLOCKED.

Ph
Note: Ensure that the escape slide is disarmed before operating the emergency exit .
9
:2
3. Push the door outward and forward until the GUST LOCK engages.
4 12
Note: There is a damping resistance during the door opening after the initial opening
02
movement.
/2
04
HOW TO CLOSE THE CABIN DOORS 2 AND 3 FROM INSIDE

9/
-2
1. Press the GUST LOCK RELEASE pb to disengage the door from its fully open position.
9-
2. Pull the door into the door frame.

y2
3. Fully lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.

àM
The DOOR LOCKING indicator changes from UNLOCKED to LOCKED.

Tr
HOW TO OPEN THE CABIN DOORS 2 AND 3 FROM OUTSIDE

ạm
Ph
WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE DOOR IF THE CABIN PRESSURE

29

:
12

4
02
2. Lift the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE fully up.

/2
04
Note: If the escape slide is armed, it will automatically disarm when the door is opened from
9/
the outside.
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-B P 9/10

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
3. Pull the door outward and forward until the GUST LOCK engages.
4. Lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE into the recess.
HOW TO CLOSE THE CABIN DOORS 2 AND 3 FROM OUTSIDE
29
3. Press the GUST LOCK RELEASE pb to disengage the door from its fully open position.
2:
41
4. Move the door toward the door frame.
2
5. When the door is in front of the door frame, push the door into the door frame.
20
4/
6. Fully lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE into the recess.
0
9/
Note: The cabin door is closed and locked when all of the below apply:
-2
‐ The cabin door is flush with the door frame.
9-
‐ The DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is fully in its recess (closed position).
y2
‐ The FLAP of the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is flush with the DOOR CONTROL
àM
HANDLE.
Tr
ạm
HOW TO OPEN THE CABIN DOORS 2 AND 3 IN AN EMERGENCY

Ph
WARNING When the slide is in the ARMED mode, the red CABIN PRESSURE indicator and
the aural warning will NOT trigger in order to indicate the residual cabin pressure.
9
:2
12
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE DOOR IF THERE IS AT LEAST ONE OF

4
THE FOLLOWING INDICATIONS OF RESIDUAL CABIN PRESSURE:

02
/2
‐ Resistance in the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE when it is being lifted to the

04
OPEN position, using normal force, and/or

9/
‐ A hissing noise in the immediate door area.

-2
9-
1. Pull the COVER of the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE aside.

y2
2. Rapidly fully lift up and release the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.

àM
Tr
WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO HOLD THE DOOR CLOSED WHEN THIS PROCEDURE
ạm
HAS BEEN INITIATED.

Ph
An emergency door opening is always power-assisted.

Note: The door opens automatically and locks in its fully open position. Should the pneumatic
29
assistance of the door fails, push the door open manually.

:
12
There is a 2 - 3 seconds delay in the door opening after the initial opening movement.
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-30-B P 10/10

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE PARTIALLY LIFTED IN FLIGHT

Applicable to: ALL
If a door control handle was partially lifted in flight:

‐ Do not move the door control handle as this may damage the door
29
‐ Report to the flight crew.
2:
41
CAUTION Do not attempt to lower the door handle to the initial closed position in flight.
2
20
Note: Prior to disarm the door, the door handle must be lowered fully down.
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-40 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
CABIN DOORS
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-010-40 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE SLIDES

Applicable to: ALL
Each cabin door/exit is equipped with a slide to enable both passengers and crewmembers to leave
the aircraft in case of an emergency evacuation.
There are different types of slides installed:
29
2:
‐ Escape Slide
41
‐ Slideraft
2
20
‐ Offwing Escape Slide
04/
The following location illustration shows which kind of slides are installed and at which door.
9/
-2
Note: All slides deploy automatically when the related door/exit is in the armed mode and the
9-
offwing emergency exits are opened.
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 19
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
TYPE AND LOCATION

Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft has:

‐ 4 dual-lane sliderafts, one at each cabin door: 1L / 1R and 4L / 4R.
The sliderafts can evacuate 2 passengers at the same time, one on each lane.
29
In the case of ditching the sliderafts may be used as rafts.
2:
41
‐ 4 single-lane escape slides, one at each cabin door: 2L / 2R and 3L / 3R.
2
The escape slides can evacuate 1 passenger at a time.
20
4/
Note: The escape slides at the cabin doors 2L / 2R and 3L / 3R cannot be used as a flotation
0
9/
device because they cannot be disconnected from the aircraft.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION - SLIDES AT CABIN DOORS 1 AND 4
SLIDERAFT
Applicable to: ALL
The slideraft is fully inflated within 10 s after the door opening is initiated.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
(1) Head End

4
02
The head end of the slideraft is attached to the girt bar.

/2
04
(2) LED Lights

9/
The LED lights provide lighting to the sliding surface and at the end of the slide.
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-30-A P 1/6

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
(3) Toe End

The toe end of the slideraft touches the ground during on-ground evacuation.
(4) Deceleration Strips
There are deceleration strips at the end of the slide. These strips decrease the speed of
evacuees, before ground contact.
29
(5) Life Line
2:
41
Note: In case that the slideraft is damaged or deflated it can still be used as a hand held
2
20
escape chute.
4/
0
9/
(6) Sliding Surface
-2
(7) Side and Center Tubes
9-
The inflated tubes stabilize the slideraft structure. The center tube additionally separates the
y2
sliding lanes. àM
Tr
ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS OF A SLIDERAFT FOR USE IN WATER
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
(1) Life Line

02
/2
The life lines are installed along each side of the slideraft to enable passengers to hold onto
04
the slideraft when in water.

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-30-A P 2/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
(2) Boarding Ladder

The boarding ladders are installed for passengers to climb into the slideraft.
(3) Boarding Handle
The boarding handle support passengers to climb into the slideraft.
(4) Heaving Ring
29
The heaving ring can be thrown to passengers in the water to pull them towards the slideraft.
2:
41
(5) Sea Anchor
2
20
The sea anchor is attached to the raft to stabilize the raft and act as a brake.
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-30-A P 3/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
SLIDE INDICATORS AT CABIN DOORS 1 AND 4

Applicable to: ALL
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
(1) Girt Bar Floor Visual Indicator

Each slide status can be checked by means of a red indicator located on the bottom of the
29
door. When the slide is armed the indicator aligns with a arrow located on the floor.
:
12
(2) Slide Pressure Indicator

4
02
Each slide at door 1 and 4 has a PRESSURE indicator inside the slide container. The
/2
04
PRESSURE indicator is visible through a window of the slide cover. The position of the window
9/
depends on the slide.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-30-A P 4/6

à
Tr
CCOM B→ 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
The PRESSURE indicator indicates whether the gas in the gas reservoir is sufficient to deploy
the slide: The indication needle (red) must be in the GO zone (green).
Note: If the pressure indicator is subjected to large temperature differences the indication
needle may be in the NO-GO zone (red). If there is sufficient gas, the indication
needle returns to GO zone within approximate 30 min.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-30-A P 5/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-30-A P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION - SLIDES AT CABIN DOORS 2 (IF INSTALLED) AND 3
ESCAPE SLIDE AT CABIN DOOR 2 AND 3

Applicable to: ALL
The escape slide is fully inflated within 10 s after the door opening is initiated.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
(1) LED Lights

4
02
The LED lights provide lighting to the sliding surface and at the end of the slide.
/2
04
(2 / 4) Forward Rail / Aft Rail

9/
The rails provide physical barriers to maintain the evacuees on the slide.
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-30-B P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
(3) Head End

The head end of the escape slide is attached to the girt bar.
(5) Side Tubes
The inflated tubes stabilize the escape slide structure.
(6) Sliding Surface
29
2:
(7) Deflated Use Handle
41
2
Note: In case that the escape slide is damaged or deflated it can still be used as a hand
20
4/
held escape chute.
0
9/
(8) Toe End
-2
The toe end of the escape slide touches the ground during on-ground evacuation.
9-
y2
ESCAPE SLIDE PRESSURE INDICATOR àM
Tr
Applicable to: ALL
ạm
Each escape slide at door 2  and 3 has a PRESSURE indicator above the door in the overhead
Ph
bin. The PRESSURE indicator is visible through a window.

The PRESSURE indicator indicates whether the gas in the gas reservoir is sufficient to deploy the
9
slide: The indication needle (red) must be in the GO zone (green).

:2
12
Note: If the pressure indicator is subjected to large temperature differences the indication needle
4
02
may be in the NO-GO zone (red). If there is sufficient gas, the indication needle returns to
/2
GO zone within approximate 30 min.

04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-30-B P 2/4

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
Example of the Pressure Level Indicator
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-30-B P 3/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-30-B P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION - OFFWING SLIDES
LIFE LINES [IF INSTALLED]

Applicable to: ALL
In the case of ditching, life lines should be installed from the overwing emergency exit frame to the
center of the wing surface.
29
Note: The life lines provide a handhold to people standing on the wing.
2:
41
The life lines are stowed in the overhead stowage bin above the overwing emergency exits.
2
20
HOW TO INSTALL A LIFE LINE
4/
0
1. Attach the snaphook on one end of the life line to the yellow attachment point (frame fitting) on
9/
-2
the upper corner of the overwing exit.
2. Attach the snaphook on the other end of the life line to the yellow wing attachment point (wing
9-
fitting) at the center of the wing surface.
y2
3. Pull firmly at the life line pull tab to tighten the life line.
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-30-C P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL DESCRIPTION - OFFWING SLIDES
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Note: Install a second life line for a double overwing emergency exit.
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-30-C P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
AUTOMATIC SLIDE DEPLOYMENT

Applicable to: ALL
The deployment and inflation of the slide is automatically initiated when the door is opened in the
armed mode.
29
2:
MANUAL SLIDE DEPLOYMENT
41
2
20
Applicable to: ALL
4/
0
If the slideraft does not inflate automatically, the cabin crew must pull the manual inflation handle
9/
-2
located on the right side of the girt extension.
9-
Manual Inflation
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
Note: In case that the slideraft is damaged or deflated it can still be used as a hand held escape
4
chute.
02
/2
04
If the escape slide does not inflate automatically, the cabin crew must pull the manual inflation handle
9/
installed in the door frame of the cabin door. The manual inflation handle is protected by a plastic
-2
cover.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-40 P 1/2

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
How to inflate the escape slide:

1. Remove the plastic cover.
2. Pull the manual inflation handle.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-40 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL SLIDES USE FOR DITCHING
DISCONNECTION OF THE SLIDES

Applicable to: ALL
How to disconnect the slideraft from the aircraft:

1. Lift the girt flap.
29
2. Pull the disconnect handle to separate the escape slide from the aircraft.
2:
41
Note: The slideraft is still attached to the aircraft via the mooring line.
2
20
Disconnection - Step 1
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
3. To disconnect the slideraft fully from the aircraft cut the mooring line with the knife.
Ph
:29
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-50 P 1/8

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 OCT 22
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
Disconnection - Step 2
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
The following table indicates the capacity of each slideraft.

04
9/
Evacuation Device Rated Capacity Overload Capacity

-2
Door 1 Dual Lane Slideraft 44 55

9-
Door 4 Dual Lane Slideraft 44 55

y2
àM
SURVIVAL KIT
Tr
ạm
Applicable to: ALL

Ph
HOW TO ATTACH THE SURVIVAL KIT TO THE SLIDERAFT

Remove the survival kit from the Overhead Stowage Compartment (OHSC), and attach it to the
29
slideraft with the white lanyard.

:
12
1. Detach the white lanyard from the girt bar handle.

4
02
2. Grab the solid loop of the loose end and pull the white lanyard fully out of the girt bar cover.
/2
3. Attach the loop of the white lanyard to the snap hook of the survival kit.
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-50 P 2/8

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
SURVIVAL KIT EQUIPMENT

9
:2
12
The following items are in a typical survival kit:

4
02
Basic Module:
/2
‐ Dehydrated sponge
04
‐ Bailing bucket
9/
-2
‐ Whistle
‐ Raft repair kit
9-
‐ Sea dye marker

y2
àM
‐ Signaling mirror
‐ Survival manual
Tr
‐ Knife
ạm
‐ First aid equipment

Ph
‐ Water pouches
‐ Hand pump
:29
‐ Canopy
12
‐ Canopy support mast

4
02
/2
Age Limited Module:

04
‐ Signaling device (e.g. aerial flares)

9/
‐ Water purification tablets

-2
‐ Ammonia inhalant
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-50 P 3/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
‐ Burn ointment
‐ Flashlight(s) (2 with a standard bulb or 1 with an LED)
Example of Survival Kit Equipment
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
HAND PUMP
-2
The use of the hand pump is to add air to the air chambers of the slideraft. The pump valves on
9-
y2
the slideraft are clearly marked.

àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-50 P 4/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
Criteria: K3838, SA
4
02
/2
VN-A367
04
The canopy has a highly visible orange/yellow color. It protects the occupants from different
9/
-2
environmental conditions.
9-
HOW TO INSTALL THE CANOPY:

y2
1. Remove canopy and Mast from survival kit.

àM
2. Unfold canopy.
Tr
3. Join velcro on inflatable post and tie down.

ạm
4. Erect mast in center of roof using grommet provided and secure to velcro patch on floor.
Ph
5. Pull green elastic over each corner of the raft.

6. Tie down outside perimeter using loops provided.
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-50 P 5/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
Fix-Up of the Canopy
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12

4
02
/2
04
9/
VN-A622, VN-A623, VN-A624, VN-A625

-2
1. Remove the canopy and the mast from the survival kit.
9-
2. Unfold the canopy.

y2
3. Join the velcro to the inflatable post and tie it down.

àM
4. Erect the mast in the center of the roof using grommet and secure it to the velcro patch on the
Tr
floor.
ạm
5. Pull the green elastic over each corner of the raft.

Ph
6. Use the loops to tie down the outside perimeter.

29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-50 P 6/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-50 P 7/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 11 OCT 22
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
SLIDE/SLIDERAFT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-020-50 P 8/8

à
Tr
CCOM 11 OCT 22
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION IN CRASH SITUATIONS
A321
AIRCRAFT CRASH POSITION

Criteria: IAL, 321-200N
29
2:
241
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
1- SILL HEIGHTS ALL GEARS DOWN

29
:
12
RH LH
4
Door 1 3.39 m (11.12 ft) 3.39 m (11.12 ft)

02
/2
Door 2 3.39 m (11.12 ft) 3.39 m (11.12 ft)

04
Door 3 3.39 m (11.12 ft) 3.39 m (11.12 ft)

9/
Door 4 3.39 m (11.12 ft) 3.39 m (11.12 ft)

-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-030 P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
A321

RH LH
Incline of the longitudinal axis 0° 0°
Rotation around the longitudinal axis 0° 0°
2- SILL HEIGHTS MAIN GEARS UP AND NOSE GEAR DOWN
29
RH LH
2:
41
Door 1 3.37 m (11.06 ft) 3.37 m (11.06 ft)
2
Door 2 2.95 m (9.68 ft) 2.95 m (9.68 ft)
20
Door 3 2.40 m (7.87 ft) 2.40 m (7.87 ft)
4/
0
Door 4 1.78 m (5.84 ft) 1.78 m (5.84 ft)
9/
-2
Incline of the longitudinal axis 2.90 ° 2.90 °
9-
y2
3- SILL HEIGHTS MAIN GEARS DOWN AND NOSE GEAR UP
àM
RH LH
Tr
Door 1 1.46 m (4.79 ft) 1.46 m (4.79 ft)

ạm
Door 2 2.44 m (8.00 ft) 2.44 m (8.00 ft)

Ph
Door 3 3.65 m (11.98 ft) 3.65 m (11.98 ft)

Door 4 4.93 m (16.17 ft) 4.93 m (16.17 ft)
9
Incline of the longitudinal axis -6.31 ° -6.31 °

:2
12

4
02
4- SILL HEIGHTS ALL GEARS UP

/2
04
RH LH
9/
Door 1 3.94 m (12.93 ft) 3.94 m (12.93 ft)

-2
Door 2 3.14 m (10.30 ft) 3.14 m (10.30 ft)

9-
Door 3 2.10 m (6.89 ft) 2.10 m (6.89 ft)

y2
Door 4 0.93 m (3.05 ft) 0.93 m (3.05 ft)

àM

Tr

ạm
5- SILL HEIGHTS ONE MAIN GEAR UP ,ONE MAIN GEAR DOWN AND NOSE GEAR UP
Ph
(AIRCRAFT LEANING FORWARD AND ON ONE SIDE)

RH LH
29
:
Door 1 3.23 m (10.60 ft) 3.52 m (11.55 ft)

12
Door 2 3.09 m (10.14 ft) 3.38 m (11.09 ft)

4
02
Door 3 2.91 m (9.55 ft) 3.20 m (10.50 ft)

/2
Door 4 2.73 m (8.96 ft) 2.95 m (9.68 ft)

04
9/

-2
Rotation around the longitudinal axis 4.35 ° 4.35 °

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-030 P 2/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
A321
AIRCRAFT CRASH POSITION A321 IAE

Criteria: IAE, 321-200
29
AIRCRAFT CRASH POSITION A321 IAE
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
CRASH POSITION CHART A321 IAE

-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
Introductive text if necessary.

02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-030 P 3/4

à
Tr
CCOM B 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
DOORS AND SLIDES
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 09-030 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
ALERT (ECAS) SYSTEMS
EVACUATION (EVAC) AND
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
EVACUATION (EVAC) AND ALERT (ECAS) SYSTEMS
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
10-010 EVACUATION ALERT (EVAC)

EVAC Alert...............................................................................................................................................................A
29
2:
241
20
0 4/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
EVACUATION ALERT (EVAC)
A321
EVAC ALERT
GENERAL
29
2:
The evacuation (EVAC) alert notifies all the crewmembers and the passengers to evacuate the
41
aircraft.
2
20
4/
LOCATION
0
9/
It is possible to activate the EVAC alert from both, the cockpit and the cabin.
-2
CONTROLS IN THE COCKPIT
9-
y2
The flight crew can control the EVAC alert via the EVAC panel on the overhead panel in the
àM
cockpit.
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 10-010 P 1/6

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
A321
CONTROLS IN THE CABIN

The cabin crew can control the EVAC alert from the following CIDS control panels:
‐ The Flight Attendant Panel (FAP)
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
‐ The EVAC Panel (reset, only)

29
‐ Any Additional Attendant Panel (AAP).

:
12
THE EVAC ALERTS IN THE CABIN

4
02
/2
The visual alerts are indicated on the following CIDS panels:

04
‐ The Flight Attendant Panel (FAP)

9/
‐ The Additional Attendant Panel(s) (AAP(s))

-2
‐ The EVAC Panel

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 10-010 P 2/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
‐ The Additional Indication Panel (AIP)

‐ All Area Call Panels (ACPs) (optional).
The aural alerts are via the passenger and/or crew loudspeakers.
DESCRIPTION
29
The EVAC alert has aural and visual indications in the cockpit and in the cabin.
2:
It is possible to activate, reset or cancel an EVAC alert.
41
The flight crew has the possibility to authorize the cabin crew to activate an EVAC alert.
2
20
If the cabin crew is not authorized to activate the EVAC alert, they can still send an EVAC alert
4/
request to the cockpit.
0
9/
-2
Note: The controls and indications of the EVAC alert are customer defined.
9-
EVAC KEYS ON THE FAP
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 10-010 P 3/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
Typical Key Description

EVAC CMD key
The cabin crew can use the EVAC CMD key on the FAP to:
‐ Activate an EVAC alert if authorized by the flight crew (CAPT & PURS sw in
the cockpit)
‐ Cancel an EVAC alert, if the EVAC command was initiated from the FAP.
29
The EVAC CMD key label comes ON steady green when the EVAC alert is
2:
active.
41
EVAC RESET key The cabin crew can use the EVAC RESET key to turn OFF the aural and visual
2
alerts in the assigned cabin zone.
20
4/
Note: The indications on the CIDS control panels stay ON.
0
9/
The key label flashes red when the EVAC alert is active.
-2
EVAC KEYS ON A TYPICAL AAP
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
Typical Description
-2
Key/Indicator
9-
EVAC indicator When the cabin crew has activated/requested an EVAC alert, the indicator
y2
lights flash red.

àM
Tr
EVAC RESET key The cabin crew can use the EVAC RESET key to turn OFF the aural and
ạm
visual alerts in the assigned cabin zone.

Ph

29
CMD key
Note: The CMD key on the AAP is optional and may be guarded.
:
12
The cabin crew can use the CMD key to activate/cancel an EVAC alert, if
4
02
authorized by the flight crew.

/2
When the cabin crew has activated/requested an EVAC alert, the indicator
04
light comes ON steady green.

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 10-010 P 4/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
EVAC KEYS ON THE EVAC PANEL

Typical EVAC Panel
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
Typical Description
Key/Indicator àM
Tr
EVAC indicator When the cabin crew has activated an EVAC alert, the indicator lights flash
ạm
red.
Ph
RESET key The cabin crew can use the RESET key to turn OFF the aural and visual alerts
9
:2
in the assigned cabin zone.

12

4
02
/2
INDICATIONS
04
9/
The indications of an EVAC alert are customer defined.

-2
Typically, when the EVAC alert is active, there are the following indications in the cabin:
9-
‐ An EVAC aural indication continuously sounds in the cabin and at the crew stations via the
y2
loudspeakers
àM
‐ On the FAP, the EVAC CMD key label comes ON steady green
Tr
‐ On the FAP, the EVAC RESET key label flashes red

ạm
‐ On all AAPs, the optional CMD key comes ON steady green

Ph
‐ On all AAPs, the EVAC key flashes red

‐ On the EVAC panel, the EVAC indicator lights flash red
29
‐ On all AIPs, a message (e.g. EVACUATION ALERT) appears

:
12
‐ ON all ACPs the red segment comes ON steady (option).

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 10-010 P 5/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
OPERATION
HOW TO ACTIVATE OR REQUEST AN EVAC ALERT FROM THE CABIN
To activate an EVAC alert:
‐ On the FAP, press the EVAC CMD key on the subpanel, or
‐ On any AAP, press the CMD key  .
29
2:
Depending on the EVAC alert setting in the cockpit, either:
41
‐ The EVAC alert immediately activates, or
2
20
‐ The EVAC alert activates when confirmed by the flight crew.
4/
0
HOW TO CANCEL AN EVAC ALERT FROM THE CABIN
9/
-2
If an EVAC alert is cancelled, all EVAC indications go OFF.
9-
The flight crew can cancel the EVAC alert at any time via the EVAC COMMAND pb in the
y2
cockpit.
àM
Note: The cabin crew can only cancel an EVAC alert if it was activated from the cabin.
Tr
ạm
To cancel the EVAC alert:

Ph
‐ Press the EVAC CMD/CMD key, from which the EVAC alert was activated/requested (FAP or
AAP).
9
:2
HOW TO RESET THE EVAC ALERT INDICATIONS IN THE CABIN

4 12
The cabin crew can reset the aural and visual indications of an EVAC alert in the assigned cabin
02
area.
/2
04
To reset the EVAC alert in the assigned cabin zone press the following:
9/
-2
‐ The EVAC RESET key, on the FAP

‐ The EVAC RESET key, on the AAP(s)
9-
‐ The RESET key on the EVAC panel.

y2
àM
The following indications stop in the assigned cabin zone:

Tr
‐ The EVAC aural alert

ạm
‐ The message on the assigned AIP(s)

Ph
‐ The lighted segments of the ACP(s).

Typically, the visual indications on the CIDS control panels remain active until the cabin crew or
29
the flight crew cancels the EVAC alert.

:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 10-010 P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
11-010 PORTABLE EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT

General Information about Emergency Equipment................................................................................................. A
Symbol List.............................................................................................................................................................. B
Location - General Overview...................................................................................................................................C
Location in the Cockpit - FWD Area.......................................................................................................................D
29
Location in the Cockpit - AFT L Area..................................................................................................................... E
2:
Location in the Cockpit - AFT R Area.....................................................................................................................F
41
Location in the Cabin - All Areas............................................................................................................................G
2
20
Location in the Cabin - FWD Area......................................................................................................................... H
4/
Location in the Cabin - MID Area.............................................................................................................................I
0
9/
Location in the Cabin - AFT Area............................................................................................................................J
-2
First Aid Kit .............................................................................................................................................................K
9-
Flashlights.................................................................................................................................................................L
y2
Megaphones............................................................................................................................................................ M
àM
Portable Fire Extinguisher....................................................................................................................................... N
Tr
Portable Fire Extinguishers..................................................................................................................................... O
ạm
General Information about Life Vests......................................................................................................................P

Ph
Life Vests Crew....................................................................................................................................................... Q

Life Vests Passenger.............................................................................................................................................. R
Life Vests Infant.......................................................................................................................................................S
9
:2
Life Raft....................................................................................................................................................................T
12
Survival Kit...............................................................................................................................................................U
4
02
Demonstration Kit.................................................................................................................................................... V
/2
Crash Axe............................................................................................................................................................... W
04
Fireproof Gloves...................................................................................................................................................... X
9/
-2
11-020 EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT)

9-
General Information about Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT)......................................................................... A

y2
Emergency Radio Beacon.......................................................................................................................................B

àM
Fixed Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT)..........................................................................................................C

Tr
ạm
11-030 SUPPLEMENTARY MEDICAL EQUIPMENT

Ph
Supplementary Medical Equipment......................................................................................................................... A

Location of the Medical Panel.................................................................................................................................B
29
Description and Operation of the Medical Panel.................................................................................................... C

:
12

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

11-040 PROTECTIVE BREATHING EQUIPMENT (PBE)
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
PBE 802300 series..................................................................................................................................................B
PBE 15-40F series.................................................................................................................................................. C
29
PBE 119003-11 series............................................................................................................................................ D
2:
PBE E28180-20 series............................................................................................................................................ E
41
PBE MR100-series...................................................................................................................................................F
2
20
4/
11-050 PORTABLE OXYGEN CYLINDER
0
9/
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
-2
POCA 5500 and 9700 series.................................................................................................................................. B
9-
POCA 3552 series...................................................................................................................................................C
y2
POCA AV201 series................................................................................................................................................D
àM
POCA 3559 series...................................................................................................................................................E
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
PORTABLE EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT

Applicable to: ALL
This chapter provides descriptive and operational information on the emergency equipment.
The location of emergency equipment on board the aircraft is usually indicated by placards.
29
Note: The location of emergency equipment is certified, therefore, emergency equipment must
2:
not be relocated, and emergency equipment stowage must not be used for a different
41
purpose.
2
20
4/
SYMBOL LIST
0
9/
-2
Applicable to: ALL
9-
The portable emergency equipment is stowed or installed at different locations throughout the
y2
aircraft.
àM
The following table shows all symbols which are used to identify the installed portable emergency
Tr
equipment.
ạm
Note: ‐ Depending on the airline's choice and/or airworthiness requirements, some of these
Ph
items may be not installed in this particular aircraft.

‐ Items installed after delivery are marked with an * in the location illustrations. These
9
:2
items are under customer responsibility.

4 12
Symbol Designation
02
Crash Axe
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
First Aid Kit

àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
Automated External Defibrillator (AED)

29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 1/52

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

Symbol Designation
Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT)
29
2:
41
2
Flashlight
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
Survival Kit
Jungle Survival Kit àM
Tr
Uninhibited Terrain (UT) Kit
ạm
Ph
Crew Life Vest

9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
Adult Life Vest

-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
Infant Life Vest

ạm
Ph
: 29
12
Demo Kit
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 2/52

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

Symbol Designation
Oxygen Cylinder and/or Mask
29
2:
41
Manual Release Tool
2
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
Extension Seat Belt
y2
Child Seat Belt or
Handicapped Seat Belt àM
Tr
Animal Belt
ạm
Ph
Emergency Medical Kit (EMK)

9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
Portable Breathing Equipment (PBE)

9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Fire Extinguisher (Halon, Halon-free)

Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
Fire Extinguisher (Water)

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 3/52

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

Symbol Designation
Megaphone
29
2:
41
Fireproof Gloves
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
Baby Survival Cot
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
CPR Face Mask / LAERDAL Mask

Pocket Mask and Gloves Kit
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
Resuscitator
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Dangerous Goods Kit

Tr
ạm
Ph
29
Life Line
:
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 4/52

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

Symbol Designation
Crowbar
Jemmy
29
2:
41
Signalling Kit
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
Crew Tabard
y2
Day-Glo Hat
Luminescent Vest àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
Life Raft
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
Eyewash Bottle
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
Universal Precaution Kit (UPK)

ạm
Ph
: 29
12
Door Closing Tool (DCT)

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 5/52

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

Symbol Designation
Wheelchair
29
2:
41
Fire Containment Bag (FCB)
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
Restrain Kit
y2
Handcuff
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
Infection Kit
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
Retaining Kit
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Trauma Kit
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
Emergency Response Kit

:
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 6/52

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

Symbol Designation
Protective Latex Gloves
29
2:
41
Splint Pack
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Kit
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
Spare Linen Kit

9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
Fire Sock Kit

9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Body Bag
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
Personal Transfer Kit

:
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 7/52

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

Symbol Designation
Crew Rest Strap
29
2:
41
Door Safety Pin Pouch
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
Reposition Kit
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
Life Kit
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
Telemedicine System
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Search Mirror
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
Other Medical Kit

:
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 8/52

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

Symbol Designation
Door Blocking Kit
29
2:
41
Security Kit
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
LOCATION - GENERAL OVERVIEW
àM
Tr
Applicable to: ALL
ạm
Overview
Ph
9
:2
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 9/52

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
LOCATION IN THE COCKPIT - FWD AREA

Criteria: K8993, SA
VN-A367
Cockpit - FWD Area
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 10/52

à
Tr
CCOM D→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
LOCATION IN THE COCKPIT - FWD AREA

Criteria: K14725, K15682, K20915, SA
29
VN-A622, VN-A623, VN-A624, VN-A625
2:
Cockpit - FWD Area
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 11/52

à
Tr
CCOM ←D 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
LOCATION IN THE COCKPIT - AFT L AREA

Criteria: SA
Cockpit - AFT L Area
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
Note: The illustration shows the typical emergency equipment in this area. The location and the
type of emergency equipment may vary. Placards indicate the location and the type.
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 12/52

à
Tr
CCOM E→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
LOCATION IN THE COCKPIT - AFT L AREA

29
Cockpit - AFT L Area
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 13/52

à
Tr
CCOM ←E 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
LOCATION IN THE COCKPIT - AFT R AREA

VN-A613, VN-A614, VN-A615
Cockpit - AFT R Area
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 14/52

à
Tr
CCOM F→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

Criteria: SA
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
Note: The illustration shows the typical emergency equipment in this area. The location and the
-2
type of emergency equipment may vary. Placards indicate the location and the type.
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 15/52

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

Criteria: K8993, SA
VN-A367
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 16/52

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
LOCATION IN THE CABIN - ALL AREAS

9/
-2
Applicable to: ALL

9-
In all cabin areas the adult life vests are stowed under each passenger seat, independent of the seat
y2
type, which is installed.

àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 17/52

à
Tr
CCOM ← F to G → 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
Location of Adult Life Vest
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 18/52

à
Tr
CCOM ←G 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
LOCATION IN THE CABIN - FWD AREA

Criteria: K20915
Cabin - FWD Area
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 19/52

à
Tr
CCOM H→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

Cabin - FWD Area
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 20/52

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

Criteria: K8993
VN-A367
Cabin - FWD Area
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 21/52

à
Tr
CCOM ←H 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
LOCATION IN THE CABIN - MID AREA

Criteria: K20915
Cabin - MID Area
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 22/52

à
Tr
CCOM I→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

Cabin - MID Area
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 23/52

à
Tr
CCOM ←I→ 11 APR 23

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

Criteria: K8993
VN-A367
Cabin - MID Area
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 24/52

à
Tr
CCOM ←I 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
LOCATION IN THE CABIN - AFT AREA

Criteria: K20915
Cabin - AFT Area
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 25/52

à
Tr
CCOM J→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

Cabin - AFT Area
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 26/52

à
Tr
CCOM ←J→ 11 APR 23

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

VN-A367
Cabin - AFT Area
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
FIRST AID KIT

/2
04
9/
Applicable to: ALL

-2
The aircraft is equipped with first aid kits. A list of the content is in each first aid kit.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 27/52

à
Tr
CCOM ← J to K → 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
Typical First Aid Kit
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
FLASHLIGHTS
y2
Tr
The aircraft is equipped with flashlights stored in brackets. The flashlights are at all cabin crew
ạm
stations and in the cockpit, if installed.

Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
DESCRIPTION OF THE FLASHLIGHT

-2
The flashlight is battery-powered. The batteries are not rechargeable.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 28/52

à
Tr
CCOM ← K to L → 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
The flashlight is water resistant and designed to float beam-up if it falls into water.
The red LED on the flashlight indicates the status of the batteries when the flashlight is stored or in
use.
‐ The flashing intervals are less than 10 s :
The batteries are OK, the flashlight is operable.
29
‐ The flashing intervals are longer than 10 s:
2:
The batteries need replacement, the flashlight is not reliably operable.
41
‐ The LED is off:
2
20
The flashlight is inoperable.
4/
0
9/
Maximum operating time: 4 h.
-2
HOW TO OPERATE THE FLASHLIGHT
9-
y2
The flashlight comes on automatically when removed from the bracket and goes off automatically
when returned into the bracket. àM
Tr
ạm
MEGAPHONES
Ph
Criteria: SA
9
:2
12
4
02
The purpose of the megaphone for the cabin crew is to give instructions to the passengers e.g. in
/2
case of Passenger Address PA system failures.

04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 29/52

à
Tr
CCOM ← L to M → 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
L2 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
4
02
The megaphone is battery-powered.

/2
04
L1 HOW TO USE A MEGAPHONE

9/
-2
1. Remove the megaphone from the bracket.

9-
2. Hold the megaphone to the mouth.

y2
Note: Do not place the hand around the mouthpiece.

àM
Tr
3. Direct the megaphone toward the passengers.

ạm
WARNING DO NOT OPERATE THE MEGAPHONE CLOSE TO SOMEONE'S EARS.

Ph
4. Press and hold the switch of the handle and speak.

29
:
12
MEGAPHONES
4
02
/2
04

9/
The purpose of the megaphone for the cabin crew is to give instructions to the passengers e.g. in
-2
case of Passenger Address PA system failures.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 30/52

à
Tr
CCOM ←M→ 11 APR 23

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
L2 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
4
02
The megaphone is battery powered.

/2
04
L1 HOW TO USE A MEGAPHONE

9/
-2
1. Remove the megaphone from the bracket.

9-
Note: If the optional anti-theft alarm sounds, re-place the alarm pin into the hole.
y2
àM
2. Hold the megaphone to the mouth.

Tr
Note: Do not place the hand around the mouthpiece.

ạm
Ph
3. Direct the megaphone towards the passengers.

WARNING DO NOT OPERATE THE MEGAPHONE CLOSE TO SOMEONE'S EARS.
:29
4. Press and hold the squeezing handle and speak.

12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 31/52

à
Tr
CCOM ←M 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

Criteria: K20915
GENERAL
29
The purpose of this Halon Alternative Fire Extinguisher (HAFEX) is to extinguish a small fire in the
2:
41
aircraft.
2
20
DESCRIPTION
4/
0
Main Parts of the Fire Extinguisher (Example)
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
The maximum operating time of the fire extinguisher is approx. 9 s - 10 s.

ạm
Ph
HOW TO REMOVE THE FIRE EXTINGUISHER FROM THE BRACKET

1. Open the first strap.
29
2. Grasp the fire extinguisher with one hand.

:
12
3. Open the second strap with the other hand.

4
02
4. Remove the fire extinguisher from the bracket.

/2
04
Note: To carry the fire extinguisher safely, use the handle only.
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 32/52

à
Tr
CCOM N→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
HOW TO FIGHT THE FIRE

WARNING Always follow the operating instructions placarded on the bottle of the fire
extinguisher.
For self-protection, it is recommended to wear a smoke hood when fighting a fire.
Never expose persons to the direct jet of the extinguishing agent. Keep a distance
29
of at least 1 m / 3.25 ft, if the a fire on a persons is to be extinguished.
2:
41
1. Hold the fire extinguisher upright with one hand and remove the safety pin with the other hand.
2
2. Aim the nozzle of the fire extinguisher at the base of the fire.
20
4/
0
Note: The optimum distance to the fire-base is 1.5 m – 2.0 m / 5 ft - 6.5 ft.
9/
-2
3. Press the lever.
The discharge starts immediately.
9-
y2
4. Sweep the agent stream from side to side, until the fire is extinguished.
5. To stop the agent stream, release the lever. àM
6. Keep an eye on the area, and be prepared to repeat the process if the fire re-ignites.
Tr
ạm
HOW TO CHECK THE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

Ph
Check the pressure gauge. At room temperature the needle must be in the green sector.
9
Note: If the needle is in the red section, the fire extinguisher is not operable.
:2
412
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

02
/2
04
Criteria: K14725, K15682, K8993

9/
-2
9-
y2
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

àM
1. DESCRIPTION
Tr
The portable fire extinguisher is filled with HALON 1211 and extinguishes small fires as such its
ạm
capacity is limited. The instruction for operation of the fire extinguisher is shown on a placard
Ph
bonded on the body of the extinguisher.

2. OPERATION
:29
12
WARNING It is recommended to use a smoke hood when fighting a fire. Smoke from
4
fire and gas from the fire extinguisher may cause irritation of the eyes and
02
respiratory organs.
/2
04
9/
1. Remove the portable fire extinguisher from the bracket.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 33/52

à
Tr
CCOM ← N to O → 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
CAUTION Read the Instruction, Cautions and Warnings bonded on the fire
extinguishers bottle.
2. Carry the extinguisher holding it on the CARRYING HANDLE.
3. To operate, hold the extinguisher upright and lift the CARRYING HANDLE.
4. Bent down SAFE GUARD (black) and remove SEAL WIRE.
29
5. Stand at least 1.8 m (6 ft) away from the fire and aim the nozzle at the base of flame.
2:
41
6. To start the flow of extinguishant, depress TRIGGER (red) and use a sweeping motion from
2
side to side at the base of fire.
20
4/
Remarks
0
9/
-2
a. Only the fully developed cloud of extinguishant is effective, not the stream from the
discharge-hose outlet. If the cloud does not developed around the fire, move back.
9-
b. NEVER point the full stream into liquid fires. Start at the base and always fight the front of
y2
the fire and follow the flames. àM
c. When fighting fires on burning solids, apply the extinguishant in sharp bursts.
Tr
ạm
7. To stop the flow of extinguishant, release the TRIGGER (red) lever.

Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 34/52

à
Tr
CCOM ←O→ 11 APR 23

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
Operation HALON Portable Fire Extinguisher
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT LIFE VESTS

Ph
Applicable to: ALL

29
GENERAL INFORMATION
:
12
Life vests for crew and passenger (adults and infants) are provided onboard the aircraft.
4
02
Each life vest is packed into a sealed pouch. This pouch is designed for easy opening.
/2
The life vests are red/orange for the crew and yellow for the passenger.
04
9/
As an option, baby survival cot/raft can be installed.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 35/52

à
Tr
CCOM ← O to P → 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
LOCATION OF THE CREW LIFE VESTS

The life vests are stowed at each flight and cabin crew seat.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
LOCATION OF THE PASSENGER LIFE VESTS

Ph
Passenger life vests are installed:

29
‐ under/next to each passenger seat

:
12
‐ in stowage compartments (additional adult/infant life vests).

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 36/52

à
Tr
CCOM ←P→ 11 APR 23

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
Example for the Location of Passenger Life Vest
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
LIFE VESTS CREW

ạm
Ph

29
:
12
DESCRIPTION OF THE CREW LIFE VESTS

4
02
‐ A chamber attached to a harness securing the life vest to the wearer

/2
04
‐ Two carbon dioxide cylinders attached to the manual inflation systems

9/
‐ Two oral tube inflation systems

-2
‐ A light system assembly and a battery attached to the harness

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 37/52

à
Tr
CCOM ← P to Q → 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
‐ An optional sea dye marker

‐ An optional whistle.
Main Parts of Life Vest
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
MAIN PARTS OF THE LIFE VEST

ORAL INFLATION SYSTEMS
:29
12
Each oral inflation system has a tube connected to the buoyancy cell. The end of the tube is
4
fitted with a valve.

02
/2
The oral inflation systems are used to add or remove pressure as necessary.
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 38/52

à
Tr
CCOM ←Q→ 11 APR 23

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
MANUAL INFLATION SYSTEMS

Each manual inflation system consists of a carbon dioxide cylinder attached to an inflator
mechanism and the inflator tag.
When the wearer activates the manual inflation system(s), the compressed carbon dioxide gas
is released and fills the chamber(s).
29
LIGHT SYSTEM ASSEMBLY
2:
41
The light system assembly consists of a light and a battery attached to the harness.
2
20
The light system assembly is automatically activated when the battery is immersed in water.
4/
0
HARNESS ASSEMBLY
9/
-2
The harness assembly consists of a harness and a buckle. The harness assembly secures the
9-
life vest to the wearer.
y2
OPERATION àM
Tr
1. Remove the life vest from its pouch and unroll the life vest.
ạm
2. Place the life vest over the head and pull it down around the neck.
Ph
3. Wrap the harness around the waist and pull them to the front.
4. Secure the life vest by the harness. To adjust the harness pull on the loose end.
9
5. Pull the red inflator tags to inflate the life vest outside of the aircraft.
:2
12
6. Inflation:
4
02
CAUTION ORAL INFLATION PRIOR TO GAS INFLATION WILL CAUSE EXCESSIVE

/2
PRESSURE WHICH MAY BURST THE LIFE VEST.

04
9/
Use the oral inflation systems if more or less pressure in the life vest is necessary:
-2
‐ Blow into the tubes to inflate

9-
y2
‐ Press the valves to deflate the life vest.

àM
Tr
LIFE VESTS CREW

ạm
Ph

29

:
12
DESCRIPTION OF THE COCKPIT AND CREW LIFE VEST

4
02
The life vest consists of:

/2
04
‐ A dual chamber attached to a harness securing the life vest to the wearer
9/

-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 39/52

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph

:29
12
4

02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 40/52

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
HARNESS ASSEMBLY
9/
-2
9-
y2
OPERATION àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
4. Close the buckle. To adjust the harness pull on the loose end.
9
5. Pull the red inflator tag to inflate the life vest outside of the aircraft.
:2
12
6. Inflation:
4
02

/2

04
9/
Use the oral inflation system if more or less pressure in the life vest is necessary:
-2
‐ Blow into the tube to inflate

9-
y2
‐ Press the valve to deflate the life vest.

àM
Tr
LIFE VESTS PASSENGER

ạm
Ph

29
:
12
DESCRIPTION
4
02

/2
04
‐ A chamber attached to a harness securing the life vest to the wearer

9/

-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 41/52

à
Tr
CCOM ← Q to R → 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

‐ An optional sea dye marker
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph

:29

12
4
02
/2

04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 42/52

à
Tr
CCOM ←R→ 11 APR 23

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
HARNESS ASSEMBLY
9/
-2
9-
y2
OPERATION àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
6. Inflation:
4
02

/2

04
9/
-2

9-
y2

àM
Tr
LIFE VESTS PASSENGER

ạm
Ph

29

:
12
DESCRIPTION OF THE PASSENGER LIFE VEST

4
02

/2
04
‐ A dual chamber attached to a harness securing the life vest to the wearer
9/

-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 43/52

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph

:29
12
4

02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 44/52

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
HARNESS ASSEMBLY
9/
-2
9-
y2
OPERATION Tr
àM
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
6. Inflation:
4
02

/2

04
9/
-2

9-
y2

àM
Tr
LIFE VESTS INFANT

ạm
Ph
29
:
VN-A622, VN-A623, VN-A624, VN-A625

12
CHILD/INFANT LIFE VEST

4
02
/2
Each CHILD LIFE VEST shows the instruction for its use:
04
1. Grasp the poly bag and tear the pull-tab free of the bag, thus opening the sewn end.
9/
-2
2. Hold the child life vest on each side of the neck opening and put the head through the opening.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 45/52

à
Tr
CCOM ← R to S → 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
3. Place one child's leg over waistbelt harness loop and pull the harness-adjust-tab so that this
strap is snug but not tight.
4. Run the waistbelt harness around back of the child's waist and back to the front.
5. Hold the buckle ends:
WARNING Danger of finger clamping by closing the buckle!
29
Close the buckle below the life vest.
2:
41
6. Pull the harness-pull-tab to tighten snugly.
2
7. Inflation:
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
Pull the red JERK TO INFLATE tags to inflate the buoyancy chambers with the gas inflation
y2
system.
àM
a. With the ORAL INFLATOR system you can inflate the life vest yourself. Inflation is done by
Tr
blowing into the end of the tubes by mouth.

ạm
b. If more or less pressure in the life vest is necessary, use the ORAL INFLATOR system.
Ph
Note: The oral inflation system in each inflatable cell can also be used to release gas by
9
depressing the valves at the tube ends.

:2
12
8. Light System Assembly Activation:

4
02
a. Pull the ring and the light system will be activated automatically when it is immersed in water.
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 46/52

à
Tr
CCOM ←S→ 11 APR 23

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
Child/Infant Life Vest
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
LIFE RAFT
4
02
/2
Applicable to: ALL

04
LOCATION OF THE LIFE RAFT

9/
-2
At least one life raft is stowed on board the aircraft:

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 47/52

à
Tr
CCOM ← S to T → 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
Placards show where they are stowed.

DESCRIPTION
The Life RAFT is for 25 persons normal capacity, 38 persons overload capacity and has these
main components:
‐ Sea anchor
29
‐ Boarding ladder
2:
41
‐ Hook knife
2
‐ Life line
20
4/
‐ Locator light
0
9/
‐ Mooring line
-2
‐ Inflation assembly.
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 48/52

à
Tr
CCOM ←T→ 11 APR 23

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
Life Raft
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
OPERATION
:
12
Each Life RAFT shows the instruction for its use:

4
02
1. The life raft must be prepared for launching, including the survival kit attached.
/2
04
2. The mooring line must be attached to a fixed part of the aircraft.

9/
3. Throw the life raft out of the aircraft, the life raft will inflate automatically.
-2
4. If the life raft does not inflate automatically, pull on the mooring line to inflate the life raft.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 49/52

à
Tr
CCOM ←T→ 11 APR 23

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
5. Board the raft.

6. Cut the mooring line.
SURVIVAL KIT
Applicable to: ALL
29
At least one survival kit is stowed on board the aircraft.
2:
41
Placards on the cabin furniture show the exact location of the survival kit(s).
2
Each survival kit has a content list inside.
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
DEMONSTRATION KIT
4
02
Applicable to: ALL

/2
04
The aircraft is equipped with demonstration kits which contain typically the following:
9/
‐ demo life vest

-2
‐ demo oxygen mask

9-
‐ demo seat belt.

y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 50/52

à
Tr
CCOM ← T to V → 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Note: The illustration shows a typical demonstration kit. The content of the kit may vary.
Tr
ạm
CRASH AXE
Ph
Applicable to: ALL

29
The aircraft is equipped with a minimum of one crash axe, which is used to:
:
12
‐ cut through light structures

4
‐ remove panels
02
‐ get access to hidden areas for fire fighting.

/2
04
Their handles are insulated in order to protect against electric shocks.

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 51/52

à
Tr
CCOM ← V to W → 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
FIREPROOF GLOVES
Ph
Applicable to: ALL
Fireproof Gloves protect crew members during fire fighting. The gloves are heat resistant.
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-010 P 52/52

à
Tr
CCOM ← W to X 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT)
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT)

Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) are used for transmitting distress signals and location
29
information.
2:
There are two types of Emergency Locator Transmitters (ELT):
41
2
‐ Portable Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT)
20
‐ Fixed Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT)
4/
0
9/
-2
EMERGENCY RADIO BEACON
9-
Criteria: K11239, K14725, K15682
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE EMERGENCY RADIO BEACON

Ph
1. Description
The emergency radio beacon (referred to as the beacon) operates in water or on land.
9
:2
Operating instructions are given on the operating-instruction plate bonded on the beacon's
12
housing.
4
02
/2
The beacon is a compact, buoyant, emergency locator transmitter and consist of:
04
‐ A ARM/OFF/ON TOGGLE sw with the following positions:

9/
-2
▪ The ARM position is used for normal flight operations.

9-
▪ The cabin crew switch the ELT to the ON position to activate the transmission of the ELT
y2
manually.
àM
▪ The maintenance crew switch the ELT to the OFF position before maintenance.
Tr
‐ A red LED which indicates

ạm
Ph
▪ with a periodic flash the transmission of the 121.5 MHz and 243 MHz distress frequencies
▪ with a long flash the transmission of the 406.025 MHz COSPAS-SARSAT frequency.
29
‐ A buzzer which gives aural information

:
12
▪ with 2 beeps per second during 121.5 MHz and 243 MHz transmission
4
02
▪ and silence during 406.025 MHz transmission.

/2
04
‐ An identification plate.
9/
-2
‐ An operating instruction plate.

‐ A battery plate.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-020 P 1/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
‐ An electronic assembly.
‐ A float and an antenna.
‐ A lanyard.
The beacon transmits distress signals simultaneously on three frequencies:
‐ 121.5 MHz for civil distress frequency.
29
‐ 243 MHz for military distress frequency.
2:
‐ 406.025 MHz COSPAS-SARSAT frequency.
41
2. Operation
2
20
4/
Operation in Water
0
9/
1. Unwind the lanyard beginning with the snap hook.
-2
2. Connect the snap hook with the lanyard securely to the raft.
9-
3. Carefully pull the antenna from the opening and position the antenna.
y2
4. Put the emergency radio beacon into the water.
àM
Note: The emergency radio beacon operates automatically in a few seconds and drifts out
Tr
to the end of the lanyard.

ạm
Ph
5. Check if the buzzer operates and the red LED flashes.

Operation on Land
9
:2
1. Look for an area clear of obstruction such as trees.

12
2. Choose the highest point for best transmission.

4
02
3. Carefully pull the antenna from the opening and position the antenna.
/2
4. Activate the beacon by pulling to release the ARM/OFF/ON TOGGLE sw and switching the
04
ARM/OFF/ON TOGGLE sw to the ON position. This switch is placed on the front face of the
9/
-2
electronic assy.
5. Place the beacon.
9-
y2
Note: The emergency radio beacon operates automatically in a few seconds.

àM
6. Check if the buzzer operates and the red LED flashes.

Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-020 P 2/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
Emergency Radio Beacon
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
EMERGENCY RADIO BEACON

4
02
Criteria: K20915
/2
04

9/
DESCRIPTION
-2
The emergency radio beacon (referred to as beacon) operates in the water or on the land. The
9-
y2
beacon has an emergency locator transmitter, is equipped with a transmitter board and an
àM
activation/identification module, including the water detector. The assembly is powered by battery
packs.
Tr
ạm
The beacon transmits distress signals on three frequencies simultaneously:

Ph
‐ 121.5 MHz (civil distress frequency)

‐ 243 MHz (military distress frequency)
29
‐ 406.025 MHz (COSPAS-SARSAT frequency).

:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-020 P 3/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
Emergency Radio Beacon
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
(1) Front plate

04
9/
(2) Activation/identification module

-2
(3) Identification plate

9-
y2
(4) Part number and serial number

àM
(5) Red Light Emitting Diode (LED), indicates beacon action

Tr
ạm
(6) TOGGLE sw (ARMED/OFF/ON) to activate the beacon

Ph
(7) Antenna
29
(8) TEST pb
:
12
(9) Fastening bows

4
02
OPERATION IN THE WATER

/2
04
1. Unwind the lanyard beginning with the snap hook.

9/
-2
2. Connect the snap hook with the lanyard securely to the raft.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-020 P 4/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
3. Activate the beacon by pulling to release the ARMED/OFF/ON TOGGLE sw and switching the
ARMED/OFF/ON TOGGLE sw (6) to the ON position. In the ARMED position the beacon will be
activated automatically by water contact.
4. The red LED (5) goes on steady state and indicates that the beacon works.
5. To improve the transmission power, pull out the antenna (7) into upright position.
29
OPERATION ON THE LAND
2:
41
1. Look for an area clear of obstructions such as trees.
2
2. Choose the highest point for best transmission.
20
4/
3. Activate the beacon by pulling to release the ARMED/OFF/ON TOGGLE sw and switching the
0
9/
ARMED/OFF/ON TOGGLE sw (6) to the ON position.
-2
4. The red LED (5) indicates that the beacon works.
9-
5. To improve the transmission power, pull out the antenna (7) into upright position.
y2
6. Place the beacon at the previously chosen place.
àM
SELF-TEST OF THE BEACON
Tr
ạm
CAUTION A 5-SECOND REAL SIGNAL IS TRANSMITTED ON THE TWO FREQUENCIES

Ph
(121.5 AND 243 MHz) DURING THE SELF-TEST. THE NEAREST CONTROL
TOWER MAY NEED TO BE INFORMED ABOUT THE TEST.
9
:2
Note: This type of transmission is not considered as a false alert when made during the first
12
5 min of each hour. If possible, make the tests during this time.
4
02
1. Push the TEST pb (8).

/2
2. After 3 s of silence, the red LED (5) comes ON and a buzzer sounds for about 6 s (self-test
04
9/
duration).
-2
3. Result of the self-test:

9-
‐ O.K.: The red LED (5) comes ON for 10 s.

y2
‐ Not O.K.: The red LED (5) flashes for 10 s.

àM
Tr
FIXED EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT)

ạm
Applicable to: ALL

Ph
DESCRIPTION OF THE FIXED EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT)

29
The fixed ELT is used to transmit a distress signal on the following three frequencies:
:
12
L2 1. 121.5 MHz frequency for civil distress.

4
02
2. 243 MHz frequency for military distress.

/2
3. 406.025 MHz frequency COSPAS-Sarsat.

04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-020 P 5/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
L1 The fixed ELT is automatically activated in case of impact, or can manually activated from the ELT
panel in the cockpit.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-020 P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←C 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
SUPPLEMENTARY MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
A321

Criteria: K14725, K15682, K20915
29
VN-A622, VN-A623, VN-A624, VN-A625
2:
This chapter gives information about the location and description of the supplementary medical
41
equipment.
2
20
4/
MEDICAL KIT
0
9/
1. Location
-2
Placards are pointing to the location of the part's installation.
9-
2. Description
y2
The medical kit is used by first-aid administrators. àM
The medical kit is a box with:
Tr
ạm
‐ An upper case lid.

Ph
‐ A lower base.
‐ A miscellaneous box.
9
3. Operation
:2
12
Note: Only authorized persons who are familiar with the doctor's medical kit may use it.
4
02
/2
Operation takes place by the airline.

04
9/
Medical Kit
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-030 P 1/6

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321

Criteria: K11239
VN-A367
This chapter gives information about the location and description of the supplementary medical
29
equipment.
2:
41
SPECIAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
2
20
The special medical equipment as follows is on board the aircraft:
4/
0
Defibrillator
9/
-2
1. Location
Placards on the cabin furniture show the exact location of the defibrillator.
9-
y2
2. Description
àM
The defibrillator is used by first-aid administrators in the case of cardiac emergencies.
3. Operation
Tr
ạm
Note: Only authorized persons who are familiar with operation of the defibrillator may use
Ph
this device.
CAUTION Before you use the defibrillator the captain must be informed.
9
:2
The use of the defibrillator can have effects to the radio communication,
12
navigation system and other sensitive equipment of the aircraft.

4
02
/2
Instructions are either on the defibrillator or stowed adjacent to it.

04
9/
-2
LOCATION OF THE MEDICAL PANEL

9-
y2
àM
GENERAL
Tr
ạm
The medical panels supply medical equipment with electrical power.

Ph
Two medical panels are installed in the aft area.

Each medical panel has one 230 V AC receptacle.
29
The 230 V AC receptacles are switched ON/OFF by switches on the C/B panel.
:
12
LOCATION
4
02
The following illustration shows the location of the medical panels in the aft area and the C/B panel
/2
04
2001VU.
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-030 P 2/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
Location of the Medical Outlets and the C/B Panel
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OF THE MEDICAL PANEL

ạm
Ph
29
MEDICAL PANEL COVER AND ACCESS

:
412
The medical panels are installed in the passenger service unit PSU.
02
The following illustration shows the medical panel with a closed cover.
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-030 P 3/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
Medical Panel Cover
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
(1) Medical panel cover

4 12
(2) Hole for Manual Release Tool

02
/2
(3) PSU panel

04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-030 P 4/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
HOW TO OPEN THE MEDICAL PANEL COVER

How to open the Medical Panel Cover
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
1. Insert the Manual Release Tool into the hole to release the cover.
02
/2
2. Open the cover.

04
9/
230 V AC/50 HZ MEDICAL RECEPTACLE

-2
CAUTION Only authorized persons who are familiar with the operation of the medical
9-
equipment may use this device.

y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-030 P 5/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
Medical Receptacle
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
(1) Medical panel cover

4 12
(2) Receptacle 230 V AC

02
/2
HOW TO OPERATE THE 230 V AC RECEPTACLE

04
9/
1. Connect the 230 V AC medical equipment to the related receptacle.

-2
2. Switch the ON/OFF toggle switch on the C/B panel to the ON position.
9-
3. Switch on the medical equipment.

y2
àM
HOW TO TAKE THE MEDICAL RECEPTACLES OUT OF OPERATION

Tr
1. Switch of the medical equipment.

ạm
2. Switch the ON/OFF toggle switch on the C/B panel to the OFF position.
Ph
3. Disconnect the medical equipment from the receptacle.

4. Close the medical panel cover.
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-030 P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←C 12 APR 22
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
PROTECTIVE BREATHING EQUIPMENT (PBE)
A321
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE) are installed in the aircraft. The PBE protects the user's face
and respiratory system from heat, smoke and noxious gases.
Different models of PBE's can be installed onboard the aircraft.
29
Each model:
2:
41
‐ has oxygen generator that supply oxygen into the PBE,
2
20
‐ has a triggering mechanism to initiate the oxygen flow,
4/
‐ supplies oxygen for a minimum of 15 minutes,
0
9/
‐ has a visor and a hood,
-2
‐ has a neck seal to prevent oxygen from leaking outside the PBE,
9-
‐ is stowed in a vacuum bag in a container that has means to do preflight check (seal, observation
y2
window and/or condition indicator), and àM
‐ is no more operative after use
Tr
PBE are stowed in containers located in several places of the cabin (Refer to 11-010 Symbol List for
ạm
Ph
the location).
PBE 802300 SERIES

9
:2
12
Applicable to: ALL

4
02
DESCRIPTION
/2
04
The PBE PN 802300 series is stored in a container that has an observation window to do the
9/
preflight check.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-040 P 1/12

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
OPERATION
To don the PBE:
1. Remove the vacuum bag from the container.
2. Tear off the pull-strip and remove the PBE from the bag.
3. Pull the actuation ring to start the oxygen flow. You can hear the flow noise.
29
4. Hold the PBE with the oxygen generator away from user, and widen the neck seal.
2:
41
5. Pass the PBE over the head. the wearer should hear the oxygen flowing
2
6. Ensure hair is inside the PBE.
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
END OF OPERATION
Tr
When the sound of the oxygen flow stops, remove the PBE. Place the PBE in a dry place away
ạm
from any fire or source of heat.

Ph
Note: When oxygen supply is activated, it cannot be stopped. If the user removes the PBE
29
before the end of the supply time, it will continue to supply oxygen.
:
12
WARNING Do not smoke or expose yourself to fire after removing the PBE, because hair
4
02
may be saturated with oxygen.

/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-040 P 2/12

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 10 JAN 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
PBE 15-40F SERIES

Applicable to: ALL
DESCRIPTION
The PBE is stored in a container that has a condition indicator for preflight checks. The condition
29
indicator should be green.
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
OPERATION
4
02
To don the PBE:

/2
04
1. Open the container

9/
-2
2. Remove the vacuum bag from the container

3. Open the bag by pulling the tear-off strips, and remove the hood
9-
4. Shake the PBE downwards

y2
5. Place the thumbs on the orange marks and widen the neck seal.
àM
6. Pass the PBE over the head, starting from back to front. The oxygen supply will start
Tr
automatically. The user can hear a slight click and the oxygen flow when the supply is activated.
ạm
Adjust the mask on nose and mouth and ensure hair is inside the PBE
Ph
Note: The temperature inside the PBE increases progressively to reach 40 °C

29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-040 P 3/12

à
Tr
CCOM C→ 10 JAN 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
END OF OPERATION
Ph
When the sound of the oxygen flow stops, remove the PBE which is no longer operational. Place
9
the PBE in a dry place and away from any fire or source of heat.
:2
12
4
02
/2
04
9/

-2
9-
PBE 119003-11 SERIES

y2
àM
Applicable to: ALL

Tr
DESCRIPTION
ạm
The PBE is stored in a a container that has a seal and transparent opening for preflight checks.
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-040 P 4/12

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
OPERATION àM
Tr
To don the PBE:

ạm
1. Remove the vacuum bag from the container and open the bag by pulling downwards the tear-off
Ph
strip from the bag,

2. Hold the PBE and widen the neck seal,
9
:2
3. Pass the PBE over the head and ensure hair is inside the neck-seal,
12
4. Pull the black straps forward to initiate the oxygen flow. The user can hear the oxygen flow, and
4
02
notice an inflation of the PBE,

/2
5. Make sure the mask is correctly placed in front of the mouth, and pull the black straps rearwards
04
9/
to adjust the PBE.

-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-040 P 5/12

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
END OF OPERATION
9
:2
12
4
the PBE in a dry place and away from any fire or source of heat. After cooling, place the PBE in an
02
airtight container until the end of the flight.

/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2

àM
Tr
PBE E28180-20 SERIES

ạm
Ph
Applicable to: ALL
DESCRIPTION
29
The PBE is stored in a container that has a mean to conduct preflight checks: a condition indicator
:
12
and/or an observation window.

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-040 P 6/12

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
Main components of the PBE
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
The PBE is stored in a container. The container exists in different versions that are shown in the
/2
illustration below.
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-040 P 7/12

à
Tr
CCOM ←E→ 10 JAN 23

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
OPERATION
9
:2
12
To don the PBE:

4
02
1. Open the container,

/2
2. Remove the vacuum bag from the container and open it,
04
3. Pull out the PBE and unfold it,

9/
-2
4. Widen the neck seal and pass the PBE over the head. Ensure the masks covers the mouth and
the nose and hair is inside the PBE,
9-
5. Pull down the lanyard to activate the oxygen flow,

y2
àM
Note: After pulling the lanyard, there is a slight hissing sound that stops after approximatively
Tr
50 s,
ạm
6. Fasten the body belt.

Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-040 P 8/12

à
Tr
CCOM ←E→ 10 JAN 23

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
END OF OPERATION
Ph
Indication that the supply time has finished and that the PBE must be removed are:
9
:2
‐ Increase of the temperature inside the PBE,

12
‐ Increase of the breathing resistance, and

4
02
‐ The PBE deflates

/2
04
9/
the PBE in a dry place and away from any fire or source of heat.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr

ạm
Ph
PBE MR100-SERIES
29
Applicable to: ALL

:
12
DESCRIPTION
4
02
The PBE is stored in containers. Through the container opening, a condition indicator can be used
/2
for preflight checks. The condition indicator must be blue. If the indicator is pink, the PBE is not
04
operative.
9/
-2
The PBE has an end-of-service indicator located inside the hood. The indicator:
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-040 P 9/12

à
Tr
CCOM ← E to F → 10 JAN 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
‐ flashes green when PBE is working correctly

‐ flashes red when there is no more oxygen
There are two variants of the oxygen triggering device shown on the operation sequence. the PBE
has two oxygen generators, both must be triggered.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
OPERATION
:2
12
To don the PBE:

4
02
1. The vacuum bag of the PBE from container, and open it by pulling tear-off strips,
/2
04
2. Hold the PBE using the two cylinders and unfasten it,
9/
3. Depending on the type of triggering device

-2
‐ a: device with a red ball: sharply pull the red ball, this will initiate both generators
9-
‐ b: device without red ball: sharply separate the generators to initiate both generators
y2
àM
4. Widen the neck seal,

Tr
5. Don the PBE and ensure hair are inside PBE. The user should hear the oxygen flow.
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-040 P 10/12

à
Tr
CCOM ←F→ 10 JAN 23

ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
END OF OPERATION
9
:2
12
When the sound of the oxygen flow stops or when the end-of-services flashes red, remove the
4
PBE which is no longer operational. Place the PBE in a dry place and away from any fire or source
02
of heat.
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2

àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-040 P 11/12

à
Tr
CCOM ←F 10 JAN 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-040 P 12/12

à
Tr
CCOM 10 JAN 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
PORTABLE OXYGEN CYLINDER
A321
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
Portable oxygen cylinders with oxygen masks stowed in a bag are installed on the aircraft. These are
also called POCA, Portable Oxygen Cylinder Assembly. These cylinders can be used for first aid to
cabin occupants and in the case of a depressurization. The cylinders are installed in brackets with
29
quick release clamps.
2:
41
There are different models of cylinders that can be installed on the aircraft.
2
20
Each model:
4/
‐ has a mask attached , ready-to-use,
0
9/
‐ can supply oxygen at different flows: 2 liters per minute (Low flow) or 4 liters per minute (Hi flow),
-2
Note: If the cylinder is used for a depressurization, the Hi flow must be used.
9-
y2
‐ has a regulator to deliver oxygen at the required pressure and flow,
àM
‐ has a refill port to enable maintenance personnel to refill the cylinder when needed,
Tr
‐ has a pressure gauge that enables cabin crew and maintenance personnel to check if there is
ạm
enough oxygen in the cylinder,

Ph
‐ has means to stop and deliver oxygen at the required flow, and
‐ exists in different cylinder capacities.
9
:2
Refer to 11-010 Symbol List for the portable cylinder location.

4 12
WARNING Prevent pressurized oxygen from coming in contact with any oil, grease, or
02
/2
combustible material to avoid risk of fire or explosion

04
9/
CAUTION ‐ Avoid using excessive force when turning the control knobs. Excessive force may
-2
damage the POCA

9-
‐ When transporting the POCA, grasp the bottle firmly in order not to drop it
y2
àM
POCA 5500 AND 9700 SERIES

Tr
Applicable to: ALL

ạm
Ph
DESCRIPTION
The 5500 and 9700 series oxygen cylinder has fixed flow outlets that provide oxygen at a flow of 2
29
Liters per Minutes (LPM) or 4 LPM. The regulator has the following elements:
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-050 P 1/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
OPERATION àM
Tr
The cabin crew should use the portable cylinder unit as follows:
ạm
1. Remove the mask from the stowage bag,

Ph
2. Ensure the mask is connected to the outlet that provides the required oxygen flow,
3. Put the mask on the user's face, covering nose and mouth,
9
:2
4. Turn the ON-OFF knob to the ON position,

12
Note: The cabin crew should periodically monitor the pressure gauge and the flow indicator
4
02
of the mask (Refer to 07-020 Container and mask operation).

/2
04
5. When no more required, turn off the ON-OFF knob and put the mask back in its stowage bag.
9/
-2
POCA 3552 SERIES

9-
y2
Applicable to: ALL

àM
DESCRIPTION
Tr
The regulator of the 3552 series oxygen cylinder has the following elements:
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-050 P 2/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
OPERATION àM
Tr
The cabin crew should use the portable oxygen unit as follows:
ạm
1. Remove the mask from the stowage bag,

Ph
2. Ensure the mask is attached to the oxygen outlet,

3. Put the mask on the user's face, covering nose and mouth,
9
:2
4. Turn the ON-OFF control knob to the 2 LPM or 4 LPM position to start the oxygen flow. The
12
selected flow is indicated in the Flow Indication Window.

4
02
Note: The cabin crew should monitor the gauge and the flow indicator of the mask (Refer to
/2
04
07-020 Container and mask operation) periodically.

9/
-2
WARNING When used, the number "2" or "4" must be centered in the flow indicator
window to ensure that oxygen flows correctly.
9-
y2
5. When the user no longer requires oxygen, turn the ON-OFF control knob clockwise, until a red
àM
band appears in the flow indicator window and put the mask back in its stowage bag.
Tr
ạm
POCA AV201 SERIES

Ph
Applicable to: ALL
DESCRIPTION
29
:
12
The regulator of the Integra AV201 series has the following elements:
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-050 P 3/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
OPERATION àM
Tr
The cabin crew should use the portable oxygen as follows:

ạm
1. Remove the mask from its stowage bag,

Ph

3. Put the mask on user's face, covering nose and mouth,
9
:2
4. Turn the flow selector knob to the required oxygen flow,

12
5. Turn the ON-OFF control knob fully to the ON position,

4
02
/2
04

9/
-2
9-
y2
6. When the user no longer requires oxygen, turn the ON-OFF control knob to the OFF position
àM
and put the mask back in its stowage bag.

Tr
ạm
POCA 3559 SERIES

Ph
Applicable to: ALL
DESCRIPTION
:29
12
The regulator of 3559 series portable oxygen unit has the following elements:
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-050 P 4/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
OPERATION àM
Tr
The cabin crew should use the portable oxygen unit as follows:
ạm
1. Remove the mask from its stowage bag,

Ph

3. Put the mask on user's face, covering nose and mouth,
9
:2
4. Turn the flow selector knob to the required oxygen flow,

12
5. Turn the ON-OFF control knob fully to the ON position,

4
02
/2
04

9/
-2
9-
y2
6. When the user no longer requires oxygen, turn the ON-OFF control knob to the OFF position
àM
and put the mask back in its stowage bag.

Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-050 P 5/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←E 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 11-050 P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM 20 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
12-10 Introduction
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................A
12-20 Cabin Emergency Equipment

12-20-10 Emergency Equipment Cabin Overview
29
Emergency Equipment Cabin Overview..................................................................................................................A
2:
41
12-20-20 Emergency Equipment Preflight Inspection
2
20
Emergency Equipment Preflight Inspection.............................................................................................................A
0 4/
9/
12-30 Galley Equipment
-2
12-30-00 Introduction
9-
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................A
y2
12-30-10 Galley Electrical Panel Preflight Check àM
Galley Functions Preflight Check............................................................................................................................ A
Tr
ạm
12-30-100 Trolleys Preflight Check

Ph
Trolley Preflight Check............................................................................................................................................ A
12-30-120 GAINs
9
:2
<< GAINs Check >>................................................................................................................................................ A

4 12
02
12-40 Cabin Systems

/2
12-40-10 Cabin Communication Preflight Check

04
9/
<< Cabin Interphone Preflight Check >>................................................................................................................ A

-2
<< Passenger Address (PA) Preflight Check >>.................................................................................................... B

9-
<< Passenger Call Test Preflight Check >>........................................................................................................... C

y2
12-40-20 Emergency Lightning System Preflight Check

àM
<< Emergency Light System Preflight Check >>.................................................................................................... A

Tr
12-40-40 FAP Cabin System Status Preflight Check

ạm
Ph
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................A
<< CABIN STATUS PAGE PREFLIGHT CHECK >>..............................................................................................B
<< Safety Video Preflight Check (if installed) >>....................................................................................................C
29
<< FAP WATER/WASTE STATUS PREFLIGHT CHECK >>.................................................................................D

:
12
FAP Doors and Slides page preflight check........................................................................................................... E

4
02
/2
12-50 Cabin Equipment

04
12-50-10 Cabin Attendant Seat Preflight Check

9/
-2
<< Cabin Attendant Seat Preflight Check >>..........................................................................................................A

-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

12-50-20 PAX seat Preflight Check
<< PAX Seat Preflight Check >>............................................................................................................................ A
12-50-40 Lavatory Preflight Check

<< Lavatory Preflight Check >>.............................................................................................................................. A
29
2:
2 41
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
INTRODUCTION
A321
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
Preflight checks are performed in accordance with Operator policies, procedures and local Aviation
Authority requirements.
The preflight check must be completed before the departure of the base station and transit stops
29
when a crew change occurs.
2:
41
The preflight checklists were developed to ensure that specific cabin items and systems are fully
2
operational.
20
4/
These checklists can be divided in two categories: safety related items, and commercial items.
0
It is important that items are checked correctly, and are fully operational. Any inoperative item
9/
-2
must be reported, as some may affect Flight Operations as it can be part of the Master Minimum
9-
Equipment List (MMEL).
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
INTRODUCTION
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT CABIN OVERVIEW
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT CABIN OVERVIEW

Applicable to: ALL
The illustrations noted below provide the location of the emergency equipment. Refer to CCOM
11-010 PORTABLE EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT.
‐ Location in the Cockpit – FWD Area
29
‐ Location in the Cockpit - AFT L Area
2:
41
‐ Location in the Cockpit - AFT R Area
2
‐ Location in the Cabin – FWD Area or FWD Cabin
20
4/
‐ Location in the Cabin - MID Area
0
‐ Location in the Cabin – AFT Area
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-20-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT CABIN OVERVIEW
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-20-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT PREFLIGHT INSPECTION
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT PREFLIGHT INSPECTION

Applicable to: ALL
Note: For additional information about the emergency equipment listed below: Refer to CCOM
11-010 PORTABLE EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT .
29
Note: Expiry date of emergency equipment may be performed during the preflight checks as per
2:
operator policy.
412
FIRST AID KIT AND DOCTOR KIT
20
4/
• Location
0
9/
• Quantity
-2
• Seal intact 
9-
• Secured
y2
• Expiry date
àM
Tr
ạm
FLASHLIGHT
Ph
: • Location
• Quantity
9
:2
• Serviceability
12
• Tamper shield intact 

4
02
• Secured
/2
04
9/
-2
MEGAPHONE
9-
: • Location
y2
• Quantity
àM
• Operable
Tr
• Secured
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-20-20 P 1/6

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A321
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

: • Location
• Quantity
• Safety device status
• Pressure gauge 
29
• Secured
2:
• Expiry date
412
20
WATER FIRE EXTINGUISHER (OPTIONAL)
4/
0
: • Location
9/
-2
• Quantity
• Safety device status
9-
y2
• Pressure gauge 
• CO2 cartridge àM
• Secured
Tr
ạm
• Expiry date
Ph
LIFE VEST PASSENGER

: • Location
9
:2
• Quantity
12
• Bag intact
4
02
• Secured
/2
• Expiry date
04
9/
-2
9-
LIFE VEST CREW

y2
: • Location
àM
• Quantity
Tr
• Bag intact
ạm
• Secured
Ph
• Expiry date
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-20-20 P 2/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A321
LIFE VEST CHILD/INFANT

: • Location
• Quantity
• Bag intact
• Secured
29
• Expiry date
2:
41
2
20
BABY SURVIVAL COT
4/
0
: • Location
9/
-2
• Quantity
• Bag intact
9-
y2
• Secured
• àM
Expiry date
Tr
ạm
CRASH AXE
Ph
: • Location
9
:2
Note: There is no placard to indicate the location

12
of the crash axe.

4
02
• Quantity
/2
04
• Secured
9/
-2
FIREPROOF GLOVES
9-
y2
: • Location
àM
• Quantity
• Secured
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-20-20 P 3/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A321
PROTECTIVE BREATHING EQUIPMENT

: • Location
• Quantity
• Condition indicator 
• Tamper seal intact 
29
• Secured
2:
• Expiry date
41
2
20
PORTABLE OXYGEN
4/
0
: • Location
9/
-2
• Quantity
• Pressure gauge
9-
y2
• Mask attached 
• Secured àM
• Expiry date
Tr
ạm
DEMO KIT
Ph
: • Location
9
:2
Note: Demo kit location depends on Operator

12
configuration..
4
02
• Quantity
/2
04
• Content (seat belt, life vest, oxygen mask)

9/
-2
EXTENSION SEAT BELT

9-
y2
: • Location
àM
• Quantity
• Secured
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-20-20 P 4/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A321
LIFE RAFT
: • Location
• Quantity
• Secured
• Expiry date
29
2:
41
2
20
SURVIVAL KIT
4/
0
: • Location
9/
-2
• Quantity
• Seal intact 
9-
y2
• Secured
• àM
Expiry date
Tr
ạm
UNIVERSAL PRECAUTION KIT

Ph
: • Location
9
• Quantity
:2
12
• Secured
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
MANUAL RELEASE TOOL

9-
y2
: • Location
àM
• Quantity
• Secured
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-20-20 P 5/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
A321
ELT
: • Location
• Quantity
• Switch status (if installed)
• Secured
29
2:
412
20
0 4/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-20-20 P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
This section focuses on the checks of the various types of equipment located in the aircraft galleys to
ensure that they are fully operational before departure. Inoperative equipment can affect the quality
of the in-flight service.
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-30-00 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL INTRODUCTION
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-30-00 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GALLEY ELECTRICAL PANEL PREFLIGHT CHECK
GALLEY FUNCTIONS PREFLIGHT CHECK

Applicable to: ALL
GALLEY CONTROL PANEL

Check that the following items are operative:
29
ELECTRICAL PANEL.............................................................................................................CHECK
2:
41
Refer to 03-070-10 Electrical Panel.
2
WORKING LIGHT.................................................................................................................. CHECK
20
4/
CHILLER.................................................................................................................................CHECK
0
9/
Refer to 03-070-40 Galley Inserts
-2
WATER AND WASTE:
9-
y2
WATER FLOWS FROM FAUCET......................................................................................... CHECK
àM
WATER DRAINS FROM THE SINK...................................................................................... CHECK
Tr
Galleys latches:
ạm
LATCHES CONDITION AND OPERATIVE........................................................................... CHECK

Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-30-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GALLEY ELECTRICAL PANEL PREFLIGHT CHECK
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-30-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL TROLLEYS PREFLIGHT CHECK
TROLLEY PREFLIGHT CHECK

Applicable to: ALL
Trolley
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
TROLLEY................................................................................................................................... CHECK
9/
-2
Check all trolleys are clean, have no damage, sharp edges, etc.
TROLLEY OPERATION............................................................................................................. CHECK
9-
y2
1. Disengage the retainer and pull the trolley out of its compartment.
àM
2. Check that the trolley moves correctly.

Tr
3. Engage the brake, and ensure that the trolley does not move.
ạm
4. Unlock and open the door and ensure that the door magnet holds the door fully open.
Ph
5. Close and lock the door.

6. Return the trolley to its compartment, engage the brake, and engage the retainer latches.
29
:
CAUTION All trolleys must be correctly secured during taxi, takeoff, turbulence , landing, and
12
when not in use.

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-30-100 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL TROLLEYS PREFLIGHT CHECK
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-30-100 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GAINS
<< GAINS CHECK >>

Applicable to: ALL
All GAINs are operative............................................................................................................. CHECK

Refer to 03-070-40 Galley Inserts
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-30-120 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
GALLEY EQUIPMENT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL GAINS
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-30-120 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN COMMUNICATION PREFLIGHT CHECK
<< CABIN INTERPHONE PREFLIGHT CHECK >>

Applicable to: ALL
<< INTERPHONE CALL TEST >>

From the calling station
29
HANDSET.................................................................................................................................. TAKE
2:
"ALL ATTND" CALL....................................................................................................................DIAL
41
2
Check that "ALL ATTND" indication appears in the upper line of the AIP.
20
4/
At the receiver station:
0
9/
Check that a HI1/LO1 chime sounds in the passenger cabin.
-2
Check that the red/pink light comes on steady on the ACP.
9-
Check that the "CALL ATTND XX" message appears and that the steady green indicator comes
y2
on, on the AIP. Tr
àM
HANDSET.................................................................................................................................. TAKE
ạm
COMMUNICATION..................................................................................................................START
Ph
RESET KEY............................................................................................................................PRESS
9
<< PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) PREFLIGHT CHECK >>

:2
12
Applicable to: ALL

4
02
<< PASSENGER ADDRESS TEST >>

/2
04
From any station:

9/
This PA is from handset to all cabin zones and attendant stations.

-2
HANDSET.................................................................................................................................. TAKE
9-
y2
PTT PUSHBUTTON.............................................................................................PRESS and HOLD

àM
The "DIRECT PA" or "PA CALL" message appears in the upper line of the AIP.
Tr
ANNOUNCEMENT.................................................................................................................. START
ạm
Ph
At other stations:
On the AIP, the "DIRECT PA IN USE" or "PA ALL IN USE" message appears in the lower line.
:29
12
<< PASSENGER CALL TEST PREFLIGHT CHECK >>

4
02
Applicable to: ALL

/2
<< PASSENGER CALL TEST >>

04
9/
From cabin:
-2
On the PSU, PASSENGER CALL BUTTON..........................................................................PRESS

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-40-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A to C → 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN COMMUNICATION PREFLIGHT CHECK
On the PSU, check that the corresponding PASSENGER CALL BUTTON comes on.
On the corresponding ACP, check that the blue light comes on.
On the corresponding AIP(s), check that the "CALL SR XX LH/RH" message appears in the lower
line.
At the cabin crew stations and in the cabin, check that a HI1 chime sounds
Repeat this check at random from all cabin zones.
29
2:
From each lavatory:
41
2
On the LSU, ATTENDANT CALL BUTTON........................................................................... PRESS
20
4/
On the outside of the lavatory, check that the amber light comes on.
0
9/
On the corresponding ACP, check that the amber light comes on.
-2
On the corresponding AIP(s), check that the "LAV XX" message appears in the lower line.
9-
At the cabin crew stations and in the cabin, check that a HI1 chime sounds.
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-40-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←C 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL EMERGENCY LIGHTNING SYSTEM PREFLIGHT CHECK
<< EMERGENCY LIGHT SYSTEM PREFLIGHT CHECK >>

Applicable to: ALL
<< EMERGENCY LIGHT ACTIVATION >>

This check should be performed with one cabin crew located near the FAP, and the others located
29
at each evacuation area:
2:
On the FAP subpanel:
41
2
EMER PUSHBUTTON ...........................................................................................................PRESS
20
MAIN ON/OFF ......................................................................................... PRESS TO SWITCH OFF
4/
0
9/
The cabin crew should check if the emergency lighting system is operative in all zones. The check
-2
includes exit signs, exit lights, emergency ceiling lights, escape path marking system, etc.
9-
CABIN CREW...................................................................................................................... REPORT
y2
On the FAP sub panel: àM
Tr
MAIN ON/OFF............................................................................................ PRESS TO SWITCH ON

ạm
EMER PUSHBUTTON ...........................................................................................................PRESS

Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-40-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL EMERGENCY LIGHTNING SYSTEM PREFLIGHT CHECK
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-40-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FAP CABIN SYSTEM STATUS PREFLIGHT CHECK
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
Before the departure of each flight, the Purser should check all FAP pages.
This check must include the following pages.
29
• Cabin Status page
2:
• Doors/Slides page
41
• Waste/Water page
2
20
• Lights page
4/
• Temperature page
0
9/
• Smoke Detection page.
-2
9-
<< CABIN STATUS PAGE PREFLIGHT CHECK >>
y2
Tr
<< CABIN STATUS PAGE >>

ạm
The cabin crew should check the CAUTION button:

Ph
 If the CIDS caution button is flashing:

9
A message is displayed in the INFO ROW.

:2
12
CABIN CREW.............................................................CHECK THE RELATED SYSTEM PAGE

4
02
CABIN CREW................................................................................................................REPORT
/2
04
9/
<< SAFETY VIDEO PREFLIGHT CHECK (IF INSTALLED) >>

-2
Applicable to: ALL

9-
From IFE or FAP:

y2
àM
SAFETY VIDEO....................................................................................................................... LAUNCH

AUDIO and VIDEO in the CABIN.............................................................................................. CHECK
Tr
ạm
Refer to 06-020-10 General Information about Prerecorded Announcements

Ph
<< FAP WATER/WASTE STATUS PREFLIGHT CHECK >>

29
:
Applicable to: ALL

12
<< WATER/WASTE QUALITY >>

4
02
/2
The cabin crew should check the water and waste quantity after water and waste servicing.
04
WASTE QUANTITY................................................................................................................CHECK
9/
-2
The waste tank should be empty before departure.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-40-40 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A to D → 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN SYSTEMS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL FAP CABIN SYSTEM STATUS PREFLIGHT CHECK
WATER QUANTITY............................................................................................................... CHECK

Ensure that the water quantity is sufficient for the flight.
WATER QUANTITY and WASTE QUANTITY ................................................................... REPORT
FAP DOORS AND SLIDES PAGE PREFLIGHT CHECK
29
Applicable to: ALL
2:
41
The doors and slides preflight checks are performed via the DOORS AND SLIDES page on the FAP.
2
20
Refer to 06-040-10 General Information about the DOORS/SLIDES FAP Page
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-40-40 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ← D to E 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN EQUIPMENT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN ATTENDANT SEAT PREFLIGHT CHECK
<< CABIN ATTENDANT SEAT PREFLIGHT CHECK >>

Applicable to: ALL
The Cabin Attendant Seat preflight check includes:

SEAT CONDITION AND STRUCTURE ....................................................................................CHECK
RESTRAINT SYSTEM OPERATION AND CONDITION........................................................... CHECK
29
2:
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT STOWAGE DOOR AND LATCHES OPERATION AND
41
CONDITION................................................................................................................................CHECK
2
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-50-10 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN EQUIPMENT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN ATTENDANT SEAT PREFLIGHT CHECK
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-50-10 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN EQUIPMENT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PAX SEAT PREFLIGHT CHECK
<< PAX SEAT PREFLIGHT CHECK >>

Applicable to: ALL
SEAT CONDITION AND STRUCTURE ....................................................................................CHECK

RESTRAINT SYSTEM OPERATION AND CONDITION........................................................... CHECK
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-50-20 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN EQUIPMENT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL PAX SEAT PREFLIGHT CHECK
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-50-20 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN EQUIPMENT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LAVATORY PREFLIGHT CHECK
<< LAVATORY PREFLIGHT CHECK >>

Applicable to: ALL
The preflight check of the lavatories includes a safety–related check, and an operational equipment
check of the following:
AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHER GAUGE ..........................................................................CHECK
29
2:
WASTE FLAP STATUS AND OPERATION .............................................................................CHECK
41
WASTEBIN DOOR STATUS AND OPERATION ..................................................................... CHECK
2
20
FAUCET OPERATION ON/OFF AND HOT/COLD....................................................................CHECK
4/
WATER DRAINS FROM THE WASHBASIN............................................................................. CHECK
0
9/
TOILET FLUSH .........................................................................................................................CHECK
-2
LAVATORY LIGHT ................................................................................................................... CHECK
9-
The door status (open, closed, unlocked and locked) modifies the brightness of the lavatory lights.
y2
Refer to Chapter 06-030-010-30-50 Miscellaneous Lights – Lavatory Lighting.
àM
LAVATORY DOOR OPERATION .............................................................................................CHECK
Tr
ạm
LAVATORY DOOR NORMAL/OVERRIDE LOCKING/UNLOCKING ........................................CHECK

Ph
The associated lavatory occupied sign comes on.

LAVATORY SMOKE DETECTOR:
9
:2
SMOKE DETECTOR IS FREE OF OBSTRUCTION ................................................................CHECK

412
Note: Obstruction for example paper, plastic bags, etc.

02
/2
SMOKE DETECTOR IS NOT TAMPERED WITH.....................................................................CHECK

04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-50-40 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
CABIN EQUIPMENT
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL LAVATORY PREFLIGHT CHECK
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 12-50-40 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 22
ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
PROCEDURES 29
STANDARD OPERATING
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
13-010 INTRODUCTION
GENERAL INFORMATION......................................................................................................................................A
PRESENTATION..................................................................................................................................................... B
13-015 GENERAL GUIDANCE
29
13-015-010 CREW COMMUNICATION
2:
41
Crew communication .............................................................................................................................................. A
2
20
13-015-020 EFFECTIVE BRIEFINGS FOR CABIN OPERATIONS
4/
Effective Briefings for Cabin Operations................................................................................................................. A
0
9/
-2
13-015-030 MANAGEMENT OF LIQUIDS IN THE COCKPIT
Management of liquids in the cockpit......................................................................................................................A
9-
y2
13-020 PHASES OF FLIGHT àM
STERILE COCKPIT................................................................................................................................................. A
Tr
ạm
13-040 PREFLIGHT BRIEFING

Ph
PREFLIGHT BRIEFING...........................................................................................................................................A
9
13-050 CABIN DOOR OPERATION

:2
12
PASSENGER DOOR OPERATION FROM INSIDE .............................................................................................. A

4
DOORS 2 and 3 OPERATION FROM INSIDE.......................................................................................................B

02
/2
PASSENGER DOOR OPERATION FROM OUTSIDE .......................................................................................... C

04
DOORS 2 and 3 OPERATION FROM OUTSIDE...................................................................................................D

9/
-2
13-060 CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES

9-
Cabin Crew Safety-Related Duties Pre-Passenger Boarding................................................................................. A

y2
Cabin Crew Safety-Related Duties during Boarding...............................................................................................B

àM
Cabin Crew Safety-Related Duties before Pushback............................................................................................. C

Tr
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING TAXI BEFORE TAKEOFF.................................................D

ạm
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING TAKEOFF AND INITIAL CLIMB........................................ E

Ph
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING FINAL CLIMB.................................................................... F

CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING CRUISE............................................................................ G
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES FROM TOP OF DESCENT.............................................................. H
:29
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING DESCENT.......................................................................... I

12
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING FINAL APPROACH AND LANDING.................................. J

4
02
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING TAXI AFTER LANDING.....................................................K

/2
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING DISEMBARKATION...........................................................L

04
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES AFTER LAST PASSENGER DISEMBARKS................................... M

9/
-2

-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

13-070 SLIDE ARMING PROCEDURE
SLIDE ARMING PROCEDURES.............................................................................................................................A
13-080 SLIDE DISARMING PROCEDURE
29
SLIDE DISARMING PROCEDURES.......................................................................................................................A
2:
41
13-100 ACCESS TO COCKPIT
2
20
COCKPIT DOOR OPERATION...............................................................................................................................A
04/
9/
13-110 PASSENGER SAFETY BRIEFING
-2
PASSENGER SAFETY BRIEFING......................................................................................................................... A
9-
y2
13-130 REFUELLING DEFUELING
àM
REFUELING/DEFUELING PROCEDURE WITH PASSENGERS ON BOARD...................................................... A
Tr
ạm
13-150 DANGEROUS GOODS

Ph
Dangerous Goods....................................................................................................................................................A
13-210 COCKPIT SLIDING WINDOW OPERATION

9
:2
12
COCKPIT SLIDING WINDOWS OPERATION........................................................................................................A

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION
Applicable to: ALL
The CCOM's Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) and Abnormal/Emergency Procedures are
those recommended by Airbus as operational guidelines.
Standard Operating Procedures should be developed in accordance with Operator policies,
29
procedures and local Aviation Authority requirements.
2:
41
If an airline wishes to integrate its customized procedures, the airline can do so by using the "XML
2
version" of the CCOM.
20
4/
SOPs are normal cabin crew procedures for standard aircraft operations.
0
Aviation Authorities do not certify the SOPs.
9/
-2
SOPs are continuously updated. Revisions take into account the feedback received from all
9-
Operators, in addition to the results of continuous monitoring of the aircraft's in-service life.
y2
SOPs are composed of inspections, cabin preparations, and normal procedures.
àM
Tr
PRESENTATION
ạm
Applicable to: ALL

Ph
When inserted in the procedure, expanded information appears in italics.

9
This information :
:2
12
‐ Explains actions for which the reason is not evident.

4
‐ Furnishes additional background info.

02
/2
If an action depends on a precondition, a black dot identifies the precondition. For example :
04
9/
BLACK DOT
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-010 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A to B 30 OCT 08
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-010 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 30 OCT 08
ạm
Ph
GENERAL GUIDANCE
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CREW COMMUNICATION
CREW COMMUNICATION
Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Effective communication between cabin crew and flight crew is essential. It is a key element in
29
setting the tone for the management of the flight. Communication enables cabin crew to contribute
2:
to the decision-making process and to enhance situational awareness in normal and abnormal
41
situations.
2
20
Communication is essential for the safe operation of the aircraft as many accident analyses have
4/
indicated that communicating information between the cabin and the cockpit is vital to flight safety.
0
9/
-2
STATISTICAL DATA - BACKGROUND INFORMATION
9-
STATISTICAL DATA
y2
A survey of pilot safety representatives and cabin crew stated that:
àM
Tr
• 37 % of the Cabin Crew

ạm
• 60 % of the pilots
Ph
Thought that communication between flight and cabin crew was adequate.
9
CREW RESOURCE MANAGEMENT (CRM)

:2
12
CRM can be defined as the effective use of all available resources (e.g. all crew, aircraft
4
02
systems and supporting facilities), to achieve safe and efficient operations (EU-OPS and ICAO)
/2
Initially, CRM was for flight crew only. Today, it is a mandatory part of all cabin crew training in
04
EASA and FAA operating regions and many countries throughout the world.
9/
-2
It helps crew to be:

9-
• Objective
y2
• Effective
àM
CRM reviews topics such as:

Tr
ạm
• Situational awareness
Ph
• Effective communication
• Planning and decision-making
29
• Stress awareness
:
12
• Human factors
4
02
COMPANY CULTURE
/2
04
The company should encourage good communication between the flight crew and the cabin
9/
crew and provide all employees with:

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-015-010 P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
GENERAL GUIDANCE
A321
• The marketing policy (e.g. service-orientation)

• The operator safety policy (e.g. Procedures)
The company also has responsibility in promoting:
• The feeling of cooperation and mutual respect and understanding
29
• Effective communication between flight and cabin crew
2:
• Joint pre-flight briefings for flight and cabin crew to review operational procedures
41
• Joint debriefings for safety-related occurrences
2
20
• Update of Standard Operating Procedures
4/
0
9/
CREW COMMUNICATION / COORDINATION
-2
9-
y2
Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) are a set of written instructions that document a routine
àM
or a repetitive activity during the normal course of their duty. They detail the work processes that
Tr
are conducted.
ạm
SOPs are a form of communication that is provided by the operators to crew. When the
Ph
procedures are understood and adhered to, they provide a common ground and understanding
between the entire crew.
9
Many operators have crew of different cultures and nationalities who are sometimes based in
:2
12
various parts of the world. The common language of SOPs enables all crew to work together
4
and communicate.
02
SOPs are structured in a specific format and should be followed in a concise, step-by-step
/2
04
manner. They are designed to ensure that cabin crew go through the correct process when
9/
performing actions such as operating doors and arming/disarming slides.

-2
Emergency procedures are essential when unusual events occur (e.g. oven smoke, etc). Crew
9-
can coordinate following the written procedures and be reactive and effective.
y2
àM
COMMUNICATION WITH ALL GROUND

Tr
Communication with maintenance personnel is important when a technical malfunction occurs.

ạm
All technical incidents must be reported to them as maintenance personnel ensure the good
Ph
working condition of an aircraft.

When catering personnel are onboard the aircraft, cabin crew should be present in the galley
29
area to monitor catering operations. It enables the cabin crew to ensure that all equipment is in
:
12
good working order and clean (e.g. trolleys/brakes, ovens, handles and latches). This gives the
4
cabin crew the opportunity to have the equipment replaced if possible.

02
/2
The boarding of the aircraft is a very coordinated task between the flight crew, cabin crew and
04
boarding staff. In order to avoid confusion and the boarding of the passengers before the cabin
9/
-2
preparation is complete, cabin crew should communicate with the boarding staff.
REPORTING
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-015-010 P 2/4

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
GENERAL GUIDANCE
A321
Reporting is another means of communication that enables the cabin crew to inform the flight
crew, safety management or maintenance crew when an unusual event occurs. It is a good way
to reduce or eliminate the risk of incidents/accidents or deviations to procedures.
The cabin crew should function as an extension of the flight crew, to ensure safety in the cabin
and should never hesitate to report to the flight crew when they think that the safety of the cabin
is threatened.
29
They should raise their situational awareness during operations such as:
2:
41
DE/ANTI-ICING OPERATIONS:
2
20
‐ A very light coating of snow or ice on the wings can lead a dramatic outcome.
4/
0
FUELING/DEFUELING :
9/
-2
‐ Threat of fuel leaks, fire
9-
y2
Passengers can also be a great source of information, and may sometimes be the first to bring
information to cabin crew regarding: àM
Tr
• The cabin (noise, fumes, smoke, fire, loose objects…)

ạm
• Other passengers behavior

Ph
• Aircraft condition (window seals, wings, fuselage…)

Any event or incident should also be reported if it is believed that:
9
:2
12
• The safety of the operation can be improved

4
• SOPs are not efficient enough

02
• Some events/incidents should be reviewed during training in order to reduce their

/2
04
occurrences.
9/
-2
The report of an event/incident can be delivered in different ways:

AURAL:
9-
y2
‐ The content of the report must be concise, as precise as possible with a clear terminology to
àM
report problems and the actions taken (e.g. oven fire)

Tr
WRITTEN:
ạm
Ph
‐ The reporting process in the logbook should be as simple as possible and well documented,
including details as to what, where and when (e.g. oxygen used during the flight and needs to
29
be replaced)
:
12
4
OPERATIONAL AND HUMAN FACTORS AFFECTING CREW COMMUNICATION

02
/2
Several factors can deteriorate communication between crew:

04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-015-010 P 3/4

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
GENERAL GUIDANCE
A321
DIFFICULTIES IN THE TRANSMISSION • Distortion of information due to background noise, excessive feedback
OF COMMUNICATION (and volume) on the Passenger Announcement and interphone.
• Sterile Cockpit rule when the flight crew should only be disturbed for safety
SOPs related issues.
Poor communication due to the reinforced cockpit door policy.
FATIGUE • Long flight times, early check-in, late checkout.
29
STRESS • Company pressure, high workload.
2:
• Crew flying together may be from different nationalities and the company
41
CULTURAL DIFFERENCES language may not be their mother tongue. Cultural differences are not just
2
limited to different countries of origin, but education, upbringing and values.
20
4/
• Some operators do not encourage communication between flight and
COMPANY CULTURE
0
cabin crew.
9/
-2
• One of the parties “assumes” that the other party knows or is aware of a
situation, and there is no communication at all.
9-
ASSUMPTIONS
The sender of a message may assume that the person receiving the
y2
message understands the content and context.
PERCEPTION àM
• Bad or poor perception of each other’s duties.
Tr
LACK OF CONFIDENCE • A lack of confidence in the abilities of the other members of the crew.
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-015-010 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
GENERAL GUIDANCE
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL EFFECTIVE BRIEFINGS FOR CABIN OPERATIONS
EFFECTIVE BRIEFINGS FOR CABIN OPERATIONS

Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
A safe flight starts with good planning, and good planning for a flight starts with briefings. Briefings
29
are a very important part of any flight preparation.
2:
Different briefings take place before the flight:
41
2
The Purser to cabin crew preflight briefing The flight crew to cabin crew preflight briefing
20
4/
The passenger preflight safety briefing
0
9/
-2
Note: The passenger preflight safety briefing is addressed in the Planned Ground Evacuation
9-
Flight Operations Briefing Notes
y2
There may also be other briefings during the flight for example during unusual, abnormal or
àM
emergency situations.
Tr
The aim of briefings is to establish a clear plan of action, communicate and exchange information
ạm
and ensure there is a common understanding between all crewmembers .

Ph
The aim of this effective briefings is to enable the cabin crew to:
1. Plan and prepare briefings
9
:2
2. Perform successful briefings

12
3. Improve communication and coordination onboard the aircraft

4
02
/2
Note: The word ‘Purser’ refers to Senior Cabin Crewmember.

04
9/
BACKGROUND INFORMATION
-2
Briefings are identified as being a crucial ingredient to effective crew resource management to:
9-
y2
‐ Ensure open communication between the flight crew, the cabin crew and the passengers
àM
‐ Promote teamwork
Tr
‐ Ensure that task sharing and the workload is evenly distributed

ạm
‐ Set the expectations and standards for the flight.

Ph
The lack of some of these elements has been cited in many accident and incident reports as a
contributing factor, for example:
:29
‐ A lack of communication and coordination between the flight crew and the cabin crew
12
‐ Misunderstandings due to ineffective communication

4
02
‐ Errors, due to heavy workload

/2
04
‐ Errors, due to intentional/unintentional deviation from procedures.

9/
-2
An effective briefing is a valuable tool for cabin crew and flight crew to help manage errors and
achieve a successful outcome.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-015-020 P 1/6

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 01 JUL 20
ạm
Ph
GENERAL GUIDANCE
A321
OBJECTIVES OF CREW BRIEFINGS

The briefing should provide a clear picture of the flight and build a common understanding
amongst the crew of the expectations of the flight.
A successful briefing should be short, interesting and detailed, and should include teamwork,
communication, coordination, planning and anticipating possible events:
29
Many cabin crew and flight crew are faced with the challenge
2:
41
of constantly working with different colleagues, often with
colleagues that they have never met or worked with before.
2
20
However, they are expected to work in very close proximity
4/
for long periods of time. In this case, it is important to quickly
0
9/
establish teamwork and synergy.
-2
Good team performance depends on synergy, which means
working together. Synergy is a vital ingredient to effective
9-
teamwork.
y2
The conditions for synergy are:
àM
‐ A shared goal
Tr
TEAM BUILDING AND TEAMWORK ‐ A clear crew structure

ạm
‐ Clear task allocation

Ph
‐ Team spirit
‐ Good Leadership.
9
:2
The structure of the cabin crew ensures that each cabin crew
12
member has a specific role and specific duties related to that

4
role. The application of good Crew Resource Management

02
(CRM) within a crew creates the right balance for the crew to
/2
04
work as an effective team.

9/
For a team to be successful, they must be able to talk to each

-2
other, share information, listen to each other and be assertive,

when necessary.
9-
A good briefing must encourage open, interactive

y2
communication between all crewmembers, emphasizing

àM
ENCOURAGE OPEN COMMUNICATION

the importance of questions, input from crewmembers, and
Tr
exchanging information.
ạm
The briefing establishes the chain of command and identifies

Ph
the leadership. The Purser organizes the workload and duties

of the cabin crew, and ensures that each cabin crewmember
CREW COORDINATION AND WORKLOAD
understands their responsibilities.
29
DISTRIBUTION
The workload must be evenly distributed amongst the
:
12
crewmembers to avoid individuals from work overload, which

4
may distract attention from critical tasks, and lead to errors.

02
/2

04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-015-020 P 2/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
GENERAL GUIDANCE
A321

Cabin crew activities should be planned, based on the flight
time, the expected flight conditions, the Standard Operating
PLANNING AND TIME MANAGEMENT Procedures of the Operator, and the service requirements.
Cabin crew should be encouraged to prioritize tasks during
periods of heavy workload, and according to flight conditions.
29
Briefings are the ideal moment for cabin crew and flight crew
2:
to discuss the importance of safety duties and responsibilities,
41
to ensure crew communication, coordination and crew
2
awareness during unplanned events. Highlight the need for the
20
UNPLANNED EVENTS cabin crew to:
4/
0
9/
‐ Respond promptly and efficiently to any unusual, abnormal
-2
or emergency situation
‐ Communicate with flight crew and Purser.
9-
y2
WHEN TO PERFORM THE CABIN CREW BRIEFING àM
Tr
Cabin crew preflight briefings and flight crew to cabin crew preflight briefings should be
ạm
performed before each duty period. In most countries, cabin crew briefings are mandatory and
Ph
are required by the national aviation authority regulations.

Sufficient time should be spent on the briefing to ensure that all crewmembers are familiar with
9
their operating position and duties. The time will vary depending on the number of crew, size of
:2
12
aircraft, area of operation, etc.

4
When possible, the preflight briefings should be held in a designated briefing room. If this is not
02
/2
possible, the briefing may be performed onboard the aircraft, before passenger boarding begins.
04
9/
BRIEFING TECHNIQUES
-2
The briefing is addressed to all cabin crewmembers, and is performed by the Purser (senior cabin
9-
crewmember). The expectations, tone and the standards for the flight are set during this briefing.
y2
The Purser must keep in mind the main objectives of the briefing, as well as important information
àM
specific to the flight.

Tr
A good tip to conduct an effective briefing is to use the A, B, C rule:

ạm
A for Appropriate:
Ph
The briefing should be relevant and appropriate to the flight. It should highlight the specific details
of the flight. A briefing should be prepared for each individual flight otherwise it may become
29
routine and repetitive.

:
12
The Purser should:

4
02
‐ Plan and prepare the briefing

/2
04
‐ Select the relevant information before the briefing.

9/
-2
B for Brief:
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-015-020 P 3/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
GENERAL GUIDANCE
A321
A briefing should be as the word suggests, “brief”. The Purser should keep the briefing short to
ensure that the attention of all cabin crew is focused on the most important points.
C for Clear and Concise:
The briefing must be understood by all cabin crew. It should be interactive, and encourage cabin
crew to share information and ask questions. The Purser should adopt good communication
methods to encourage feedback.
29
2:
SETTING THE TONE FOR EFFECTIVE TEAMWORK
41
2
The briefing is the starting point for a high performance team. The Purser must create an
20
4/
environment where open, interactive communication is encouraged. The Purser can use some
0
9/
practical communication skills to create such an environment, using positive language and
-2
appropriate body language. For example, the use of the word “we” encourages all cabin crew to
9-
participate and contribute to the flight.
y2
The purser should:
àM
• Use professional and friendly language
Tr
• Listen with patience and not interrupt others

ạm
• Ask the cabin crew if they have any questions or comments

Ph
• Encourage the cabin crew to exchange information and ideas at all times
• Ensure all cabin crew are involved in the briefing
9
:2
• Answer questions directly

12
• Use eye contact, as appropriate.

4
02
THE PURSER TO CABIN CREW PREFLIGHT BRIEFING

/2
04
As previously mentioned the briefing should focus on the most important points relevant to the
9/
-2
flight.
The cabin crew briefing should cover the following points:
9-
y2
• Introductions: The preflight briefing must always start with professional, respectful
àM
introductions, It is important that the Purser invites the cabin crew to introduce themselves,
Tr
particularly as they may not already know each other.

ạm
• Flight details: For example, the flight number, destination(s), departure time, estimated time of
Ph
arrival, aircraft registration.

• Special flight information: For example, passenger loads, special requirements for
29
passengers, any identified maintenance issues that may affect the flight.
:
12
• Workload distribution, task sharing and responsibilities: Clearly define the duties and
4
responsibilities for each member of the cabin crew, to ensure that they are all aware of their
02
own, and each others, role. The Purser should take into account the rank and operating
/2
04
experience of the cabin crew when distributing the tasks. The Purser should ask safety related
9/
questions to ensure that each cabin crew understands their position on board the aircraft.
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-015-020 P 4/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
GENERAL GUIDANCE
A321
• Crew Communication and Coordination: Encourage the cabin crew to immediately report and
communicate any unusual, abnormal or emergency situation to the Captain and the Purser. The
Purser should then ensure that each crew member has a clear picture of the situation.
• Review of the operating procedures: To ensure that the cabin crew understand the
importance of performing their duties in accordance with the Operator’s Standard Operating
Procedures (SOPs) and emergency procedures. When the procedures are understood and
29
adhered to, they provide a common ground and understanding for the entire crew, and ensure
2:
41
crew coordination at all times.
2
• Questions: It is important to provide the cabin crew with the opportunity to ask questions,
20
4/
in order to clarify that the entire cabin crew has understood the items discussed during the
0
9/
briefing. Many Operators have cabin crew based in different locations throughout the world. The
-2
Purser should take into account such cultural aspects and remember that not all crewmembers
9-
may have the same understanding.
y2
Note: Cabin crew must be encouraged to report to the Purser, or the flight crew, anything that
àM
they feel may compromise the safety of the flight.
Tr
ạm
THE FLIGHT CREW TO CABIN CREW PREFLIGHT BRIEFING

Ph
Although the work of the flight crew and cabin crew is very different in nature, the flight crew and
the cabin crew work as one crew, with a common goal, the safe completion of the flight.
9
:2
The sharing of information from the cockpit to the cabin, and from the cabin to the cockpit is
12
essential to the safety of the flight.

4
02
The most important Standard Operating Procedure an Operator can adopt to ensure flight
/2
crew and cabin crew communication and coordination is a flight crew to cabin crew preflight
04
briefing. The flight crew to cabin crew briefing should encourage open two-way communication,
9/
-2
teamwork and coordination.

The pre-flight briefing should include the following topics:
9-
y2
• Introductions: The flight crew to cabin crew preflight briefing must always start with
àM
professional, respectful introductions,

Tr
• The en-route weather: To determine if areas of turbulence are anticipated during the flight and
ạm
to manage and secure the cabin in a timely manner.

Ph
• The estimated flight time: The flight time may be shorter or longer than expected. This
information will help the Purser with time management to organize cabin activities.
29
• Unusual Situations: For example, armed escorts traveling onboard.

:
12
• Cockpit entry procedures: Use of interphone and Cockpit Door Surveillance System (CDSS).
4
Dimming the lights before entry.

02
/2
• Sterile cockpit rule: The sterile cockpit procedures should be discussed, for example the
04
signals and procedures to be applied when the sterile cockpit rule is in effect. During this
9/
briefing, the Purser and Captain should establish the circumstances in which it is acceptable to
-2
call the flight crew when the sterile cockpit rule is in effect.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-015-020 P 5/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
GENERAL GUIDANCE
A321
• Emergency and communication procedures: Use of call/alert system and interphone.

• Anything that the flight crew or the cabin crew need to discuss related to the flight: Any
training taking place in the cockpit. The number of Persons with Reduced Mobility (PRMs)
expected on board and where they will be seated.
SUMMARY OF KEY POINTS
29
• Operators should allocate a specific period of time and area to ensure that a detailed cabin crew
2:
41
preflight briefing is performed.
2
• Operators should include a flight crew to cabin crew preflight briefing as part of their Standard
20
4/
Operating Procedures (SOPs).
0
9/
• An effective briefing should be short, interesting and detailed. The briefing should include
-2
teamwork, communication, and coordination, planning and anticipating possible problems.
9-
• Operators should ensure that Pursers receive appropriate training, and have the necessary
y2
skills to perform their tasks, including leadership and briefing skills.
àM
• Operators should ensure that all cabin crew receive Crew Resource Management (CRM)
Tr
training. Cabin crew and flight crew should be encouraged to use CRM as part of their work
ạm
practice, to enhance team performance, and more importantly, reduce the risk of errors.
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-015-020 P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 01 JUL 20
ạm
Ph
GENERAL GUIDANCE
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL MANAGEMENT OF LIQUIDS IN THE COCKPIT
MANAGEMENT OF LIQUIDS IN THE COCKPIT

Applicable to: ALL
The cockpit includes a large quantity of electronic equipment. Therefore, appropriate handling of
liquids inside the cockpit is very important.
The following recommendations intend to reduce the probability of hazards when handling liquids in
29
the cockpit:
2:
41
‐ Deliver beverage upon authorization from the flight crew
2
20
‐ Do not use glass or ceramics
4/
‐ Always use bottles and cups with lids/caps
0
9/
‐ Use cups that safely fit into the cockpit cup holders (easy to install/remove)
-2
‐ Always inform the flight crew before you put any liquids into their hands
9-
‐ Always serve liquids (cups, bottles) from the outboard/lateral side
y2
‐ Trays should not contain any liquids, when served/removed/exchanged
àM
In the case of expected turbulence or dynamic maneuvers, the cabin crew must delay service to the
Tr
cockpit.
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-015-030 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
GENERAL GUIDANCE
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL MANAGEMENT OF LIQUIDS IN THE COCKPIT
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-015-030 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 06 JAN 21
ạm
Ph
PHASES OF FLIGHT
A321
STERILE COCKPIT
Applicable to: ALL
CABIN CREW TO FLIGHT CREW COMMUNICATION DURING CRITICAL PHASES OF FLIGHT

The critical phases of flight, refers to all ground operations involving taxi, takeoff, and landing and
29
all flight operations when the aircraft is below 10 000 ft.
2:
The aim of the sterile cockpit policy is to enable the flight crew focus on their duties without being
41
distracted by non-flight related matters.
2
20
During the critical phases of flight, the sterile cockpit policy is applied.
4/
Therefore, calls from the cabin crew or entry into the cockpit are restricted to:
0
9/
-2
SAFETY AND SECURITY RELATED MATTERS
9-
The following are some examples of safety-related situations:
y2
‐ Fire or smoke in the cabin
àM
‐ Abnormal noises or vibrations
Tr
‐ Observation of fuel or other fluid leaks.

ạm
Ph
Note: In normal operations, the Purser communicates with the flight crew on behalf of the
cabin crew. In the case of an abnormal or emergency situation being discovered, the
first cabin crewmember to discover a safety-related situation must report it the flight
9
:2
crew.
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-020 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 01 JUL 20
ạm
Ph
PHASES OF FLIGHT
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-020 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 01 JUL 20
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT BRIEFING
A321
PREFLIGHT BRIEFING
Applicable to: ALL
The Pre-Flight Briefing is the starting Block for a high-performance crew. The aim of the briefing is to
organize the crew activities, to ensure that the workload is evenly distributed amongst the crew.
29
WHO
‐ The Purser conducts the Pre-Flight Briefing
2:
41
‐ The entire cabin crew attends the Pre-Flight Briefing
2
20
WHY
‐ To highlight:
4/
0
• Safety and security standards
9/
-2
• Cabin crew performance expectations
• The chain of command
9-
y2
‐ To encourage:
• A high level of safety àM
Tr
• Communication/Crew Resource Management (CRM)
• Teamwork
ạm
• Crew coordination
Ph
WHAT the
‐ Cabin crewmember introduction and welcome
9
Pre-Flight Briefing
:2
‐ An introduction to the flight crew, if possible. (If it is not possible to meet the flight crew during the
12
must include
cabin crew briefing, the Purser must brief with the flight crew on board the aircraft)
4
02
‐ Flight information (aircraft type, aircraft status, flight number, flight destination, flight duration)
/2
‐ The allocation of cabin crewmember briefing areas and responsibilities. The Purser should take
04
into consideration the rank and operating experience of the cabin crewmember.
9/
‐ The allocation of cabin crewmember commercial tasks (galleys, I...)

-2
‐ Cabin crew cooperation aspects:

9-
• Discipline, responsibilities, chain of command and reporting

y2
• Importance of crew coordination and communication

àM
‐ An in-flight safety review includes :

Tr
Exit-row seating requirements / identifying Able-Bodied Passengers (ABP)

ạm
• The need for constant situational awareness

Ph
• The importance of silent review

• Sterile cockpit rules and guidelines
29
• A reminder to report unusual occurrences

:
412
WHERE
02
‐ In a designated briefing room, or

/2
‐ On board the aircraft

04
9/

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-040 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 14 SEP 20
ạm
Ph
PREFLIGHT BRIEFING
A321

WHEN
‐ At the beginning of each duty period
‐ At a time that is specifically reserved for this purpose
HOW it must be
‐ The Purser must prepare the safety briefing in advance, the briefing should be relevant, and
done
appropriate to the flight.
29
‐ The Purser must welcome the crew
2:
‐ All cabin crewmembers should be able to see and hear the Purser
41
‐ The Purser should speak clearly
2
20
‐ It is important that every cabin crewmember knows their allocated work position, and their safety
4/
responsibilities.
0
9/
‐ The briefing should be understood by all the cabin crewmembers.
-2
‐ Give the cabin crewmembers the opportunity to ask question
‐ The Purser must respect time constraints
9-
y2
Refer also toRefer to 13-015-020 EFFECTIVE BRIEFINGS FOR CABIN OPERATIONS
Tr
àM
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-040 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 14 SEP 20
ạm
Ph
CABIN DOOR OPERATION
A321
PASSENGER DOOR OPERATION FROM INSIDE

Applicable to: ALL
OPENING FROM THE INSIDE

cabin crew responsible for door
FRAME ASSIST HANDLE..................................................................................................... GRASP
29
2:
SLIDE ARMING LEVER DISARMED.....................................................................................CHECK
41
SAFETY PIN INSTALLED......................................................................................................CHECK
2
20
CABIN PRESSURE INDICATOR OFF.................................................................................. CHECK
4/
 If the CABIN PRESSURE indicator is flashing red
0
9/
DOOR ................................................................................................................DO NOT OPEN
-2
9-
WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE DOOR
y2
The CABIN PRESSURE visual warning is the first indication of residual cabin
pressure. àM
Tr
FLIGHT CREW .............................................................................................................. ADVISE

ạm
Ph
OUTSIDE CONDITIONS........................................................................................................ CHECK

GIRT BAR FLOOR VISUAL INDICATION............................................................................. CHECK
9
A girt bar floor visual indication is installed at doors 1 and 4.

:2
12
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE........................................................................................... LIFT FULLY

4
DOOR ASSIST HANDLE....................................................................................................... GRASP

02
/2
DOOR ......................................................................................PUSH OUTWARD AND FORWARD

04
GUST LOCK ENGAGED ...................................................................................................... CHECK

9/
-2
CLOSING FROM THE INSIDE

9-

y2

àM
Note: Check that the door area is clear of any obstruction or debris.
Tr
ạm
GUST LOCK.................................................................................................................. DISENGAGE

Ph
The gust lock is located on the support arm.

DOOR.................................................................................................................................PULL AFT
29
By using the support arm, then the door assist handle, move the door aft.
:
412
Note: Do not use the control handle to move the door.

02
/2
 When the door is facing the door frame :

04
DOOR.................................................................................................................. PULL INWARD

9/
-2
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE...............................................................................LOWER FULLY

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-050 P 1/6

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
A321
DOOR.............................................................................................................. CHECK LOCKED

The door is locked when the mechanical door locking indicator, located on the upper part of
the door, displays a green LOCKED .
DOORS 2 AND 3 OPERATION FROM INSIDE
29
Applicable to: ALL
2:
41
OPENING FROM THE INSIDE
2
20
4/
0
9/
SLIDE ARMING LEVER DISARMED.....................................................................................CHECK
-2
SAFETY PIN INSTALLED......................................................................................................CHECK
9-
y2
 If the CABIN PRESSURE indicator is flashing red: àM
DOOR................................................................................................................. DO NOT OPEN
Tr
ạm
WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE DOOR.

Ph
The CABIN PRESSURE visual indicator is the first indication of residual cabin
pressure.
9
:2
FLIGHT CREW................................................................................................................ADVISE
12
OUTSIDE CONDITIONS..................................................................................................CHECK
4
02
CONTROL HANDLE COVER.......................................................................................REMOVE

/2
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.....................................................................................LIFT FULLY

04
DOOR ASSIST HANDLE.................................................................................................GRASP

9/
-2
DOOR ............................................................................... PUSH OUTWARD AND FORWARD

9-
Note: There is a resistance during the initial opening movement of the door.
y2
GUST LOCK ENGAGED................................................................................................. CHECK

àM
Tr
CLOSING FROM THE INSIDE

ạm

Ph

29
:
12

4
DOOR.................................................................................................................................PULL AFT
02
/2
By using the support arm, then the door assist handle, move the door aft.
04
9/
Note: Do not use the control handle to move the door.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-050 P 2/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
A321
 When the door is facing the door frame :

DOOR.................................................................................................................. PULL INWARD
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE...............................................................................LOWER FULLY
DOOR.............................................................................................................. CHECK LOCKED
The door is locked when the mechanical door locking indicator, located on the upper part of
the door , displays a green LOCKED .
29
2:
CONTROL HANDLE COVER.......................................................................................... CLOSE
41
2
20
PASSENGER DOOR OPERATION FROM OUTSIDE
04/
9/
Applicable to: ALL
-2
OPENING FROM THE OUTSIDE
9-
cabin crew
y2
àM
The cabin pressure indicator can be seen through the observation window.
Tr
ạm
 If the CABIN PRESSURE indicator is flashing red:

Ph
DOOR................................................................................................................. DO NOT OPEN

WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE DOOR.
9
:2
12
pressure.
4
02
The CABIN PRESSURE visual warning flashes in case of a cabin differential

/2
pressure above 2.5 mbar (0.0362 PSI), when at least one engine is shut down
04
and the related door is disarmed.

9/
-2
FLIGHT CREW .............................................................................................................. ADVISE

9-
FLAP.....................................................................................................................................PUSH IN
y2
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.....................................................................GRASP AND LIFT FULLY

àM
The handle must be fully lifted up to the horizontal green line.

Tr
ạm
Note: The slide is automatically disarmed when the doors are opened from the outside.
Ph
DOOR......................................................................................... PULL OUT and PUSH FORWARD

29
The door control handle should only be used to guide the door.
:
12
GUST LOCK ENGAGED........................................................................................................CHECK

4
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE....................................................LOWER FULLY INTO THE RECESS

02
/2
CLOSING FROM THE OUTSIDE

04
9/
cabin crew
-2
FLAP.....................................................................................................................................PUSH IN
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-050 P 3/6

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
A321
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.....................................................................GRASP AND LIFT FULLY

GUST LOCK .................................................................................................................DISENGAGE
DOOR..................................................................................PUSH TOWARDS THE DOOR FRAME
29
2:
 When the door is facing the door frame
41
DOOR............................................................................................................................ PUSH IN
2
20
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE............................................. LOWER FULLY INTO THE RECESS
4/
DOOR.............................................................................................................. CHECK CLOSED
0
9/
-2
The door is closed and locked when the door is flush with the door frame and the door control
handle is in the closed position.
9-
y2
DOORS 2 AND 3 OPERATION FROM OUTSIDE Tr
àM
Applicable to: ALL
ạm
OPENING FROM OUTSIDE

Ph
cabin crew
9
:2
 If the CABIN PRESSURE visual indicator is flashing red

12
DOOR................................................................................................................. DO NOT OPEN

4
02
/2
WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE DOOR

04
9/
-2
pressure.
The CABIN PRESSURE visual warning flashes in case of a cabin differential
9-
pressure above 2.5 mbar (0.0362 PSI), when at least one engine is shut down
y2
and the related door is disarmed.

àM
Tr
FLIGHT CREW................................................................................................................ADVISE
ạm
FLAP.....................................................................................................................................PUSH IN
Ph
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE...............................................................GRASP AND LIFT UP FULLY

The handle must be fully lifted UP to the horizontal green line.
29
:
DOOR..........................................................................PULL OUTWARDS and PUSH FORWARDS

4 12
Do not use the handle to move the door.

02
/2
GUST LOCK ENGAGED........................................................................................................CHECK

04
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE........................................................LOWER FULLY INTO IT RECESS

9/
-2
Note: Doors automatically disarm, when opened from the outside.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-050 P 4/6

à
Tr
CCOM ← C to D → 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
A321
CLOSING FROM OUTSIDE

cabin crew
FLAP.....................................................................................................................................PUSH IN
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE...............................................................GRASP AND LIFT UP FULLY
29
2:
41
DOOR................................................................................. MOVE TOWARDS THE DOOR FRAME
2
20
04/
 When the door is facing the door frame
9/
-2
DOOR............................................................................................................................ PUSH IN
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE............................................. LOWER FULLY INTO THE RECESS
9-
DOOR.............................................................................................................. CHECK CLOSED
y2
àM
The door is closed and locked when the door is flush with the door frame and the door control
handle is stowed into the recess.
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-050 P 5/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←D 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-050 P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES
A321
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES PRE-PASSENGER BOARDING

Applicable to: ALL
PRE-PASSENGER BOARDING
PURSER CABIN CREWMEMBER
29
‐ Perform security checks, if required.
2:
Note: Security checks must be performed with the cabin lighting set on full brightness with white light to detect
41
shadows of potential hidden objects.
2
20
4/
0
‐ Pre-flight check of emergency equipment.
9/
-2
‐ Report to Captain: Emergency equipment ‐ Report to Pursers: Emergency equipment discrepancies
9-
discrepancies found during the pre-flight checks. found during the pre-flight checks.
y2
End of Pre- Passenger Boarding
Tr
àM
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING BOARDING

ạm
Ph
Applicable to: ALL
BOARDING
9
:2
PURSER CABIN CREWMEMBER

12
‐ Go to assigned boarding position

4
02
‐ Assist unaccompanied minors, Persons with Reduced Mobility (PRMs), families

/2
‐ Monitor the amount of baggage and ensure correct stowage (overhead bins, under seats)
04
‐ Check that exit and paths are clear of obstruction

9/
‐ Check that aisles and cross-aisles are clear of obstruction

-2
‐ Distribute extension and/or baby seat belts, if necessary

9-
‐ Manage the passenger flow

y2
‐ Ensure that passengers comply with "No Smoking" regulations, as applicable

àM
‐ Ensure that passenger seating complies with seating regulations, as applicable

‐ Check that Able-Bodied Passengers (ABPs) are seated at exits.
Tr
ạm
‐ Report to Captain: confirm passenger count ‐ Report to Purser: confirm passenger count
Ph
‐ Report to Captain: Any unusual or abnormal situations ‐ Report to Purser: Any unusual or abnormal situations
29
End of BOARDING
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-060 P 1/8

à
Tr
CCOM A to B 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES BEFORE PUSHBACK

Applicable to: ALL
BEFORE PUSHBACK
PURSER CABIN CREWMEMBERS
29
‐ Go to assigned door
2:
41
‐ Perform the door closing, the slide arming procedure, and cross check the opposite door
2
20
4/
‐ Acknowledge that door checks have been received ‐ Report to Purser that doors are closed and slides armed
0
‐ Check FAP Door and Slides page. and crosschecked.
9/
-2
Check that:
9-
‐ Passengers are seated
y2
‐ Stowage of passengers and crew baggage complies
àM
with regulations
Tr
‐ Lavatories are vacant and secured
ạm
‐ Cabin curtains are open and secured.

Ph
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING TAXI BEFORE TAKEOFF

9
:2
Applicable to: ALL

412

02
/2
‐ Go to assigned boarding station ‐ Go to assigned boarding station

04
‐ Request crewmembers to take their "Passenger Safety ‐ Take "Passenger Safety Briefing" position
9/
Briefing" position
-2
9-
‐ Perform the "Passenger Safety Briefing" announcement ‐ Perform the "Passenger Safety Briefing"
y2
Note: For aircrafts equipped with pictograms on exit

àM
marking signs and on exit location signs, the

Tr
cabin crew in charge of the safety briefing should

ạm
highlight these pictograms to the passengers.

Ph

: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-060 P 2/8

à
Tr
CCOM C to D → 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
A321

Check that :
‐ Passengers are seated with their seat belts fastened
‐ Stowage of passenger and crew baggage complies with
regulations,
29
‐ All pre-departure service items are removed
2:
‐ Tray tables are in upright and locked position and cup
41
holders are stowed
2
20
‐ Seat backs are in upright position, armrests and footrests
4/
are correctly stowed
0
9/
-2
‐ Infant life vests are distributed
‐ Social areas are vacant and secured
9-
‐ Crew rest areas are vacant, crew rest doors are closed
y2
and locked
àM
‐ Galleys are secured, and all catering items are correctly
Tr
stowed
ạm
‐ TV monitors and In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) equipment

are stowed
Ph
‐ Passengers comply with Portable Electronic Devices

(PED) restrictions
9
‐ Any equipment items are stowed as required

:2
12
‐ Exits and escape paths are clear of obstructions

‐ Aisles and cross-aisles are clear of obstructions
4
02
/2
‐ Adjust the cabin lighting ‐ Report to Purser "Cabin ready for takeoff"
04
9/
‐ Report to Captain "Cabin ready for takeoff" or Press the Take designated crew seat and secure harness for
-2
CABIN READY pb  on the FAP takeoff

9-
‐ Take crew seat and secure harness for takeoff

y2
àM
Note: For crew seat installed on lavatory door and

Tr
equipped with TTL indicator, check that the

indicator reflect the TTL position.
ạm
Ph
‐ Perform the silent review ‐ Perform the silent review

29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-060 P 3/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←D 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING TAKEOFF AND INITIAL CLIMB

Applicable to: ALL

‐ Remain seated. ‐ Remain seated.
29
2:
Note: However in accordance with airline policies and procedures, it may be acceptable for cabin
41
crew to leave their seats for safety related event.
2
20
4/
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING FINAL CLIMB
0
9/
-2
Applicable to: ALL
9-
y2
‐ Adjust cabin lighting ‐ Check lavatories
àM
‐ Close cabin curtains
Tr
ạm
‐ Report to Purser ‐ Report to Purser

Ph
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING CRUISE

9
:2
12
Applicable to: ALL

4

02
/2
‐ Purser may decide, in the absence of instructions from ‐ Frequently monitor lavatories, galleys and cabin (at least
04
the cockpit crew, to discontinue non-safety related tasks every 15 min)

9/
during turbulence ‐ Check that the fire detection systems have not been
-2
‐ Check regularly FAP disabled or tampered with

9-
‐ Regularly report to Purser

y2
‐ Ensure passenger and crew compliance with all lighted

àM
signs, placards and crewmembers instructions

‐ Ensure that passengers use only permitted electronic
Tr
devices
ạm
Ph
‐ Maintain communication with cockpit crew, Purser and ‐ Maintain communication with Purser
cabin crewmembers ‐ Inform purser of cabin maintenance items or use of any
29
‐ Enter cabin maintenance items and any emergency emergency equipment that should be entered in the
:
12
equipment use into the cabin logbook. cabin logbook

4
02
‐ Report to cockpit crew : Any unusual or abnormal ‐ Report to Purser: Any unusual or abnormal situations
/2
situations
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-060 P 4/8

à
Tr
CCOM E to G 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES FROM TOP OF DESCENT

Applicable to: ALL

‐ Make top of descent announcement .
29
2:
‐ Complete and close the cabin Logbook. ‐ Report to Purser: Any cabin maintenance items and use
41
of any emergency equipment.
2
20
‐ Ask for any special ground assistance
4/
0
‐ Request all updated arrival information
9/
-2
9-
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING DESCENT
y2
Applicable to: ALL
àM
Tr
ạm
When the Fasten Seat Belt signs come on (At approximately When the Fasten Seat Belt signs come on (At approximately
Ph
10 000ft): 10 000ft), ensure that:

‐ Ensure cabin crew secure the cabin for landing ‐ Cabin curtains are secured in the open position
‐ Perform Landing announcement. ‐ Passengers are seated with seat belts fastened
9
:2
‐ Stowage of passenger and crew complies with

12
regulations
4
‐ Ensure passenger and crew compliance with all lighted

02
/2
signs, placards and crewmember instructions

04
‐ Tray tables are in the in upright position and cup holders

9/
are stowed
-2
‐ Seat backs are in the upright position, armrests and

foot-rests are correctly stowed.
9-

y2
‐ Social areas are vacant and secured

àM
‐ Galleys are secured, and all catering items are correctly

Tr
stowed
ạm
‐ TV monitors and In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) equipment

Ph
are stowed
‐ Passengers comply with Portable Electronic Devices
(PED) restrictions
29
‐ Any equipment items are stowed, as required

:
12
‐ Exits and escape paths are clear of obstructions

4
‐ Aisles and cross-aisles are clear of obstructions

02
/2
04
‐ Report to the cockpit crew "Cabin ready for landing" or ‐ Report to Purser "Cabin ready for landing" Take
9/
Press the CABIN READY pb  on the FAP designated crew seat and secure harness for landing.
-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-060 P 5/8

à
Tr
CCOM H to I → 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
A321
‐ Adjust the cabin lighting

‐ Take designated crew seat and secure harness for
landing.
Note: For crew seat installed on the lavatory door
29
and equipped with TTL indicator, check that
2:
the indicator reflect the TTL position.
412
20
‐ Perform silent review ‐ Perform silent review
04/
9/
-2
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING FINAL APPROACH AND LANDING
9-
Applicable to: ALL
y2
àM
Tr
‐ Remain seated. ‐ Remain seated.
ạm
‐ Perform the silent review ‐ Perform the silent review

Ph
Note: However in accordance with airline policies and procedures, it may be acceptable for cabin
9
:2
crew to leave their seats for safety related event.

412
02
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING TAXI AFTER LANDING

/2
04
Applicable to: ALL

9/
-2
CAUTION The cabin crew must remain seated (except to perform a safety related duty) until
the aircraft arrives on to the stand.
9-
y2

àM
‐ Remain seated at designated crew station ‐ Remain seated at designated crew station
Tr
ạm
Perform the Door Disarming procedure and cross check Perform the Door Disarming procedure and cross check
Ph
with the opposite door. with the opposite door.

‐ Acknowledge doors checks when received ‐ Report to Purser: Confirm that doors are disarmed and
‐ Check the FAP to verify all doors are disarmed. crossed checked.
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-060 P 6/8

à
Tr
CCOM ← I to K 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES DURING DISEMBARKATION

Applicable to: ALL

‐ Go to disembarking station ‐ Go to assigned disembarking station
‐ Manage the flow of passengers
29
2:
‐ Ensure that passengers comply with "No Smoking"
41
regulations, as applicable
2
‐ Disembarkation. of disabled passengers
20
4/
0
9/
CABIN CREW SAFETY-RELATED DUTIES AFTER LAST PASSENGER DISEMBARKS
-2
Applicable to: ALL
9-
y2
àM
‐ perform general cabin check (galleys, lavatories)
Tr
ạm
‐ Report to Captain: Any unusual or abnormal situations. ‐ Report to Purser: Any unusual or abnormal situations.
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-060 P 7/8

à
Tr
CCOM L to M 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-060 P 8/8

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
A321
SLIDE ARMING PROCEDURES

Applicable to: ALL

DOORS CLOSED AND LOCKED..............................................................................................CHECK
29
Note: The door locking indicators are displayed.
2:
41
Purser
CABIN CREW AT DOORS, ARM SLIDES AND CROSS CHECK............................................ORDER
2
20
4/
ARMING PROCEDURE
0
9/
-2
SAFETY PIN (with red flag)................................................................................................ REMOVE
9-
SLIDE ARMING LEVER..................................................................MOVE TO "ARMED" POSITION
y2
The slide arming lever must be moved fully down. àM
Note: When the door is in the "ARMED" mode, the "cabin pressure warning light" does not
Tr
ạm
illuminate to indicate cabin differential pressure.

Ph
SAFETY PIN (with red flag).....................................................................................................STOW

9
:2

12
The door is now ready for flight.

4
02
SLIDE ARMING LEVER....................................................................CHECK IN ARMED POSITION

/2
04
SLIDE ARMED.......................................................................................................... CROSSCHECK

9/
SLIDE ARMED AND CROSSCHECKED...................................................... REPORT TO PURSER

-2
9-
Note: For aircraft equipped with overwing exits, these exits remain armed at all times.
y2
DOORS/SLIDES FAP CHECK

àM
DOORS/SLIDES FAP PAGE................................................................................................ SELECT

Tr
ALL DOORS LOCKED and ALL SLIDES ARMED................................................................ CHECK

ạm
Ph
CABIN READY NOTIFICATION

When the cabin is ready for take off, the purser must notify the cockpit crew.
29
:
12
Purser
CABIN READY............................................................................................. NOTIFY THE CAPTAIN
4
02
/2
Or
04
9/
 On the FAP, if the CABIN READY function is available :

-2
CABIN STATUS PAGE.................................................................................................. SELECT

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-070 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN READY PUSHBUTTON....................................................................................... PRESS
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-070 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
A321
SLIDE DISARMING PROCEDURES

Applicable to: ALL
Purser
CABIN CREW AT DOORS, DISARM SLIDES AND CROSS CHECK...................................... ORDER
DOORS DISARMING PROCEDURE
29
2:
41
cabin crew responsible for the door
SAFETY PIN (with red flag hanging)................................................... REMOVE FROM STOWAGE
2
20
SLIDE ARMING LEVER.............................................................. MOVE TO DISARMED POSITION
04/
9/
The slide arming lever must be moved fully up.
-2
SAFETY PIN (with red flag hanging)................................................................................... INSTALL
9-
The safety pin must be fully inserted.
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
SLIDE ARMING LEVER..............................................................CHECK IN DISARMED POSITION

Ph
SLIDES DISARMED.................................................................................................. CROSSCHECK

SLIDES DISARMED AND CROSSCHECKED.............................................. REPORT TO PURSER
9
:2
DOORS/SLIDES FAP CHECK

12
Purser check the status of the slides on the FAP.

4
02
/2
Purser
04
DOORS/SLIDES PAGE........................................................................................................ SELECT

9/
SLIDES DISARMED...............................................................................................................CHECK
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-080 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-080 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
ACCESS TO COCKPIT
A321
COCKPIT DOOR OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
DOOR OPENING FROM THE CABIN

CABIN CREW ROUTINE ACCESS............................................................ REQUEST ON KEYPAD
29
CABIN CREW.............................................................................................................. PRESS N + #
2:
"N" represents an Operator-defined figure between 0 and 7 digits.
41
2
CABIN CREW..............................................................................STAND IN COCKPIT DOOR AXIS
20
4/
The cabin crew should stand in the axis of the cockpit door.
0
9/
A buzzer sounds in cockpit.
-2
 If entry is NOT authorized by the flight crew :
9-
‐ The flight crew locks the door via the DOOR LOCK switch.
y2
‐ The keypad's red light comes on steady, and indicates that the door is locked.
àM
Emergency access, the buzzer, and the keypad are inhibited for a preselected time between
Tr
5 and 20 min.
ạm
Ph
 If entry is authorized by the flight crew :

‐ The flight crew unlocks the door via the DOOR LOCK switch.
9
:2
‐ The keypad's green light comes on steady, and indicates that the door is unlocked.
12
CABIN CREW...............................................................................PUSH THE DOOR TO OPEN

4
02
/2
 If there is no reaction from the flight crew :

04
CABIN CREW SECOND ACCESS.......................................................REQUEST ON KEYPAD

9/
-2
Repeat the above procedure.

9-
 If there is no reaction from the flight crew, after the second request :
y2
CABIN CREW............................................................................................CALL THE COCKPIT

àM
To establish contact with the flight crew and request access to the cockpit.
Tr
 If there is no reaction from the flight crew, after a cabin crew interphone call :
ạm
CABIN CREW........................................................................................................................
Ph
.................................... APPLY THE FOLLOWING EMERGENCY ACCESS PROCEDURE

EMERGENCY ENTRY CODE.........................................................ENTER, AND PRESS #
29
:
12
The emergency entry code is an Operator-defined figure between 2 and 7 digits.

4
A buzzer will sound continuously in the cockpit and the keypad's green light flashes. After
02
a preselected time between 15 and 120 s, the keypad's green light comes on steady, and
/2
04
the cabin crew can then push the door open.

9/
-2
CABIN CREW.......................................................................................PUSH DOOR TO OPEN

-
The cockpit door unlocks for 5 s.

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-100 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
ACCESS TO COCKPIT
A321
The buzzer stops and indicates that the door is unlocked.

DOOR OPENING FROM THE COCKPIT
D-RING HANDLE......................................................................................................................TURN
COCKPIT DOOR....................................................................................................................... PULL
29
2:
41
2
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-100 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
PASSENGER SAFETY BRIEFING
A321

Applicable to: ALL
The safety briefing will prepare passengers for an emergency by providing them with information
regarding the location and operation of emergency equipment that they may have to operate in the
case of en emergency.
29
Passengers who are well briefed are better prepared for an emergency.
2:
41
HOW
2
‐ A verbal announcement made by the Purser and a demonstration performed by the cabin
20
crewmembers or,
4/
0
‐ By an audio visual presentation
9/
-2
HOW it must be
Passenger briefings and safety demonstrations must be performed in a standardized manner:
done
9-
‐ The speaker must clearly enunciate passenger briefings, and should pause between sentences
y2
‐ Cabin crewmembers must simultaneously perform the safety demonstration, and their gestures
àM
should reflect the speaker's step-by-step instructions in real time.
To clearly point out areas or safety items within the aircraft: The cabin crewmember should ensure
Tr
that their fingers (on both hands) are together, and point towards the indicated area.
ạm
Ph
WHAT the
The Passenger Safety Briefing should include the following:
Passenger Safety
‐ Smoking regulations
Briefing must
9
‐ Back of the seat to be in the upright position and the tray table stowed
:2
include
12
‐ Location of the emergency exits

‐ Location and the use of floor proximity escape path markings
4
02
‐ Stowage of hand baggage

/2
‐ Restrictions on the use of portable electronic devices

04
‐ The location and contents of the safety briefing card

9/
-2
Passengers must receive a demonstration of the following:

‐ The use of safety belts and/or safety harnesses, including how to fasten and unfasten the seat
9-
belts and/or safety harnesses

y2
‐ The location and use of oxygen equipment. Passengers must also be briefed to extinguish all
àM
smoking materials when oxygen is used.

Tr
‐ The location and use of life vests, if required.

ạm
Individual safety briefings

Ph
An individual safety briefing must be provided to a passenger who is unable to receive information
contained in the standard safety briefing.
29
These passengers may be:

:
12
‐ Visually impaired
4
‐ Hearing impaired
02
/2

04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-110 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
A321

WHERE When the cabin crewmembers perform a demonstration, they should stand in their assigned brief and
secure areas, in the cabin.
When an audio visual presentation is provided cabin crewmembers should stand in their assigned
brief and secure area in the cabin and point to the exits.
WHEN After takeoff
29
Passengers are reminded of the following:
2:
41
‐ The use of seat belts including the safety benefits of keeping seat belts fastened irrespective of
2
20
the Fasten Seat Belt sign status.
4/
In-flight
0
9/
Due to turbulence passengers must be instructed to return to their seats and fasten their seat
-2
belts.
In an emergency in-flight, passengers are instructed in the emergency action that is appropriate to
9-
the circumstances.
y2
Before landing àM
Tr
ạm
‐ Use of seat belts and/or safety harnesses
Ph
‐ Back of the seat to be in the upright position and tray table stowed
‐ Restrictions on the use of portable electronic devices
9
‐ Restore and secure hand baggage in the correct locations

:2
12
After landing
4
02

/2
04
‐ To remain seated with seat belts securely fastened until the aircraft has come to a complete stop
9/
-2
and the Fasten Seat Belt signs have been switched off.
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-110 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
REFUELLING DEFUELING
A321
REFUELING/DEFUELING PROCEDURE WITH PASSENGERS ON BOARD

Applicable to: ALL
CAUTION The ground area beneath the exits intended for emergency evacuation and slide
deployment must be kept clear.
29
The cockpit crew must notify the cabin crew before beginning to refuel/defuel.
2:
41
CABIN PREPARATION BEFORE REFUELING/DEFUELING
2
20
The cabin crew must coordinate actions with the cockpit crew to ensure that:
4/
captain
0
9/
-2
FASTEN SEAT BELT SIGNS......................................................................................................OFF
NO SMOKING SIGNS...................................................................................................................ON
9-
y2
Purser
àM
CABIN LIGHTING..........................................................................................................................ON
Tr
The cabin crew must check the following:

ạm
Cabin crewmembers
Ph
CABIN CURTAINS........................................................................................ OPEN AND SECURED

9
EXITS......................................................................................... CLEAR OF ANY OBSTRUCTIONS

:2
12
AISLES AND CROSS-AISLES................................................... CLEAR OF ANY OBSTRUCTIONS

4
02
PASSENGER BRIEFING BEFORE REFUELING/DEFUELING

/2
04
Purser
9/
PASSENGER BRIEFING..................................................................................................PERFORM
-2
Cabin crewmembers
9-
y2
PASSENGER COMPLIANCE................................................................................................ CHECK

àM
DOOR AND EXIT PREPARATION DURING REFUELING/DEFUELING

Tr
ạm
Cabin crewmembers
Ph
AT DOORS........................................................................................................................... REMAIN
At least one cabin crewmember must be stationed at each pair of door, and must be prepared for
29
an emergency, if required.
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-130 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
REFUELLING DEFUELING
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-130 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
DANGEROUS GOODS
A321
DANGEROUS GOODS
Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
many everyday items and substances can be dangerous when transported by air. due to the
29
variations in temperature and pressure during a flight, some of these items may leak or break,
2:
generating toxic fumes or possibly starting a fire.
41
Employee's who may come into contact with dangerous goods need to be aware of the nature of
2
20
such goods, their potential for causing incidents and accidents and how they should be dealt with.
4/
0
DEFINITION
9/
-2
The International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) defines dangerous goods as;
9-
“Articles or substances which are capable of posing a risk to health, safety, property or the
y2
environment and which are shown in the list of dangerous goods in the technical instructions or
àM
which are classified according to those instructions”.
Tr
DANGEROUS GOODS REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS RECOMMENDATIONS

ạm
Ph
The International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) and the International Air Travel Association
(IATA) provide guidance material for Operators who wish to develop their dangerous goods
9
training programs. The ICAO and IATA guidance material is updated annually and provides
:2
12
Operators with an excellent source of information on dangerous goods.

4
EASA, the FAA and Many Aviation authorities require that Operators provide dangerous goods
02
training for cabin crew during initial and recurrent training.

/2
04
This training Should include :

9/
-2
1. The risks involved in carrying dangerous goods by air.

2. How to deal with a dangerous goods incident onboard the aircraft.
9-
y2
DANGEROUS GOODS CLASSIFICATION

àM
Dangerous goods are classified into hazard classes. Each hazard class is divided into several
Tr
sections and specific labels are applied to each one of these classes and/or sections.
ạm
A system of diamond-shaped placards and labels are used to identify dangerous goods. Different
Ph
colors and symbols, such as a flame for flammables or skull and crossbones for poisons, identify
the dangers associated with the product.
:29
12
Note: These symbols are as Known at the time of the publication and are subject to revision.
4
Operators should refer to the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations.

02
/2
Class 1 : Explosives
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-150 P 1/10

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
DANGEROUS GOODS
A321
Explosive substances, explosive articles, and pyrotechnic devices, for

example, ammunition, and fireworks
29
2:
Class 2: Gases
41
2
Class 2.1 Flammable Gas: Gases, which ignite on contact with an ignition
20
source, such as acetylene and hydrogen
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Class 2.2 Non-Flammable Gases: Gases, wich are neither flammable
Tr
nor poisonous.
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
Class 2.3 Poisonous Gases :Gases liable to cause death or serious

02
/2
injury to humans if inhaled for example hydrogen cyanide

04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Class 3: Flammable liquids

Tr
Examples are petrol, alcohol, and perfume.

ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
Class 4: Flammable Solids

/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-150 P 2/10

à
Tr
CCOM ←A→ 02 MAR 20

ạm
Ph
DANGEROUS GOODS
A321
Class 4.1 Flammable Solids Examples are matches, flammable
29
2:
41
Class 4.2: Spontaneous Combustibles
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
Class 4.3: Dangerous When Wet Solid substances that emit a flammable
àM
gas when wet or react with water when wet, such as sodium and
Tr
potassium.
ạm
Ph
9
:2
Class 5 : Oxidizing Agents and Organic peroxides

4 12
Class 5.1 Oxidizing Agent oxidizing agents, which are not organic such
02
/2
as ammonium nitrate and chemical oxygen generators.

04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Class 5.2 Organic Peroxides Are thermally unstable substances that

Tr
may undergo heat generating, self-accelerating decomposition. These

ạm
substances are sensitive to impact or friction, or may create a dangerous

Ph
reaction when in contact with other substances. These substances may

be explosive and burn rapidly. Some examples are, fertilizers and pool
29
chemicals.
:
12
Class 6: Toxic (poisonous) and infectious substances

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-150 P 3/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DANGEROUS GOODS
A321
Class 6.1 Toxic substances Those substances that are liable to cause
death or injury if swallowed, inhaled or absorbed through the skin.
Examples are pesticides, poisons and mercury.
29
2:
41
Class 6.2 Infectious substances Those known to contain, or reasonably
2
expected to contain, pathogens, such as Bacteria, Viruses and medical
20
waste (used needles).
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
Class 7: Radioactive materials
àM
Radioactive materials-I Symbol
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
Class 8: Corrosives
4
02
/2
Corrosive substances can dissolve organic tissue or severely corrode

04
certain metals for example, hydrochloric acid or sulfuric acid contained in

9/
batteries.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
Class 9: Miscellaneous
ạm
Hazardous substances such as dry ice and magnets.

Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
DANGEROUS GOODS ACCEPTED IN THE CABIN

9/
-2
Passengers and cabin crew are permitted to carry a limited amount of classified dangerous goods
for personal use in their carry-on baggage, such as:
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-150 P 4/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DANGEROUS GOODS
A321
• Toiletry articles: e.g. perfume, nail polish and nail polish remover.
• Small lithium and lithium-ion batteries, such as those found in portable electronic devices.
• Alcoholic beverages, with an alcohol content of less than 70%
• Dry ice.
29
Note: The types of items that are authorized onboard the aircraft may vary in each country,
2:
depending on the local aviation authority and security regulations.
41
2
20
Other classificated dangerous goods that are permitted in the cabin include required emergency
4/
equipment, in airworthiness regulations, such as :
0
9/
-2
• Oxygen
• Fire extinguisher
9-
• CO2 gas cylinders to inflate the life vests.
y2
PROHIBITED DANGEROUS GOODS àM
Tr
The discovery of the following items in the cabin must be considered as a dangerous goods
ạm
incident as the items below are strictly prohibited for transport in the cabin:
Ph
EXPLOSIVES Fireworks, Fares, Toy gun caps

9
COMPRESSED GASES Filled or partly filled aqualung cylinders (including camping

:2
gas cylinders)
12
FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS AND SOLIDS Lighter fuel, Non-Safety matches, Paints, Thinner, Fire
4
02
lighters
/2
OXIDIZERS Some bleaching powders

04
ORGANIC PEROXIDES Some types of solid hydrogen peroxide

9/
-2
POISONS Arsenic, Cyanide and weed-killer

IRRITATING MATERIALS Tear gas devices
9-
INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCES Live virus materials

y2
RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS Medical or research samples which contain radioactive

àM
sources
Tr
CORROSIVES Acids, alkalis, wet cell type car batteries and caustic soda
ạm
MAGNETIZED MATERIALS Instruments containing magnets

Ph
DANGEROUS GOODS HANDLING

29
Operator’s should provide dangerous goods response kits onboard the aircraft to enable the cabin
:
12
crew to deal with a dangerous goods incident. A dangerous goods response kit usually contains
4
the following minimum equipment:

02
/2
• Large, heavy quality polyethylene bags

04
• Bag ties to seal the bags correctly after use

9/
-2
• Long rubber gloves.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-150 P 5/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DANGEROUS GOODS
A321
If a dangerous goods response kit is not provided onboard the aircraft, the cabin crew must
improvise using the equipment that is available. There are many pieces of equipment in the cabin
that the cabin crew may use in this case, such as:
• Oven gloves/fire gloves that can be covered with plastic bags to protect the hands.
• Large and small polyethylene bags, e.g. waste bin bags, duty free bags or airsickness bags
29
• Absorbent materials, e.g. paper towels, newspapers or headrest covers
2:
• Catering boxes
41
• Towel
2
20
• Blankets.
4/
0
DISCOVERY OF DANGEROUS GOODS IN THE CABIN
9/
-2
The first alert to dangerous goods spillage of leak may be form a passenger who notices an
9-
unusual odor or fumes or who simply identifies an item that is leaking from cabin baggage. When a
y2
dangerous good is discovered in the cabin, crew must notify the flight crew immediately.
àM
The cabin crew should ask the passenger concerned to identify the item. The passenger may be
Tr
able to provide the cabin crew with some guidance on the hazard involved. The cabin crew should
ạm
try to collect as much information as possible, e.g. check for:

Ph
• A dangerous goods label

• Numbers on the packaging
9
:2
• Written information on the packaging

12
• Odors
4
02
• Fumes
/2
04
• Smoke
9/
• An effect on passengers
-2
In the case of a spill of known or suspected dangerous goods in powder from:

9-
y2
• Leave everything undisturbed.

àM
• Do not use a fire extinguisher or water.

Tr
• Cover the area with polyethylene, plastic bags and blanket.

ạm
• Isolate the area until after landing.

Ph
CREW COMMUNICATION AND COORDINATION

The cabin should provide the flight crew with an accurate description of the item, and the effects in
:29
the cabin, in order to help the fight crew to apply the appropriate procedure. It is essential that the
12
cabin crew and flight crew coordinate their actions and that they keep each other fully informed of
4
02
their actions and intentions.

/2
04
Refer to 14-020 GUIDELINES FOR IN-FLIGHT SMOKE AND FIRE MANAGEMENT

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-150 P 6/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DANGEROUS GOODS
A321
PROTECTION
The cabin crew should put on gloves before they touch leaking, suspicious packages or items in
order to protect their hands. If rubber gloves are not provided, fire-resistant gloves or oven gloves
covered by polyethylene bags are a suitable alternative.
The cabin crew should also use Portable Breathing Equipment (PBE) to protect themselves from
29
fumes or smoke.
2:
If there are fumes or smoke, the cabin crew should take prompt action and move passengers
41
away from the affected area, provide wet towels or cloths to passengers, and instruct passengers
2
20
to breathe through them.
4/
If the item or substance is emitting fumes or smoke, or if there is a fire, the cabin crew must apply
0
9/
the proceduresRefer to 14-020 BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE
-2
Water should not be used on a spillage or when fumes are present as it may spread
9-
the spillage or increase the fumes. Consideration should also be given to the possible
y2
presence of electrical components when using water extinguishers.
àM
Tr
DANGEROUS GOODS REMOVAL
ạm
The dangerous good and the associated contaminated materials should be removed from the
Ph
cabin.
The dangerous good should be placed in a dangerous goods bag or a polyethylene bag, with
9
:2
the broken part or opening facing upwards. Put all materials that become contaminated when
12
removing the dangerous good in the same bag.

4
02
Close the bag and expel excess air, twist the open end of the bag, and seal it by tying a knot or
/2
using a bag tie.

04
9/
Note: The cabin crew must not make the bag airtight. It must be tight enough to be secure, but
-2
not so tight that pressure equalization cannot take place.

9-
Take off the gloves, and avoid skin contact with any contaminants. Put the gloves in the second
y2
bag. Place the first bag into the second dangerous goods bag using the same procedure.
àM
All contaminated materials, such as seat covers and sections of carpet should be treated in the
Tr
same manner as a dangerous good.

ạm
Ph
STOWING DANGEROUS GOODS ITEMS

After the cabin crew clean up the dangerous goods spill, they must ensure that the polyethylene
29
bags containing the dangerous goods are safely stowed and secured.
:
12
If a catering box is available, the cabin crew can use it to store the bags containing the dangerous
4
02
goods.
/2
Dangerous goods should be stored in a location that is as far away from the cockpit and
04
passengers as possible. The cabin crew may use an aft galley or aft lavatory, if possible. However,
9/
-2
boxes or plastic bag(s) must not be stored against the pressure bulkhead or fuselage wall.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-150 P 7/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DANGEROUS GOODS
A321
If the cabin crew uses a lavatory to store dangerous goods, boxes should be put on the floor,
bag(s) should be stowed in an empty waste container, and the lavatory door should be locked from
the outside. Using the lavatory to store the dangerous goods will prevent fumes from entering the
cabin.
Note: In a pressurized aircraft, if a lavatory is used, any fumes will be vented away from
29
passengers.
2:
41
When moving a box that contains dangerous goods, the cabin crew must ensure that the opening
2
remains upward. When moving a bag, the cabin crew must ensure that the receptacle containing
20
4/
the dangerous goods remains upright.
0
9/
Regardless of the location of the catering box or bag, the cabin crew must secure them firmly to
-2
prevent them from moving.
9-
REPORTING A DANGEROUS GOODS INCIDENT
y2
àM
The cabin crew and flight crew should coordinate to complete an Air Safety Report following a
dangerous goods incident. In many countries this report is mandatory.
Tr
This report should include:

ạm
Ph
The date of the incident or accident, or the discovery of undeclared or incorrectly declared
dangerous goods
9
The flight number and flight date

:2
12
A description of the goods and the location found in the cabin

4
The type of packaging, and the packaging specification marking on it

02
/2
Passenger details, e.g. seat number, name, address

04
Crew actions
9/
-2
Any other relevant information

9-
The cabin crew must enter the details of the incident in the aircraft maintenance logbook, so
y2
that the maintenance personnel can replace the dangerous goods kit (if installed) and repair any
àM
damage to the cabin caused by the incident.

Tr
On Arrival
ạm
After landing, notify the ground personnel of all the known facts about the Dangerous Goods item
Ph
and where it is stowed.

OPERATIONAL AND HUMAN FACTORS INVOLVED IN AN IN-FLIGHT DANGEROUS GOODS
29
INCIDENT
:
12
When dangerous goods are discovered in the cabin, this may be an indication of other problems,
4
02
such as:
/2
04
A lack of security screening on ground

9/
-2
A lack of dangerous goods awareness training for passenger handling staff and security staff
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-150 P 8/10

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
DANGEROUS GOODS
A321

Not adhering to the Operator’s policy regarding the transportation of dangerous goods in the cabin
A lack of visible information provided to passengers regarding dangerous goods that may be carried onboard, e.g. at check-in
desks or on the tickets.
PREVENTION STRATEGIES
29
Dangerous goods are regularly and routinely carried on passenger and all cargo aircraft and
2:
present little hazard in transport provided they are correctly identified, packaged and handled. But,
41
Dangerous Goods can be potentially harmful to passengers and crew if they release smoke or
2
20
fumes in the cabin or develop into an on-board fire.
4/
0
9/
Therefore, both the operator and the cabin crew should take the following preventive
-2
actions
9-
‐ Display notices for passengers at check-in areas, ticket sales desks, etc.
y2
‐ Ensure that the regulations regarding the transportation of dangerous goods are strictly adhered
àM
to by ground personnel, passengers and the cabin crew and flight crew
Tr
‐ Provide detailed and precise procedures for dangerous goods handling and emergencies to all
ạm
employees who may come into contact with dangerous goods.

Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-150 P 9/10

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
DANGEROUS GOODS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-150 P 10/10

à
Tr
CCOM 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT SLIDING WINDOW OPERATION
A321
COCKPIT SLIDING WINDOWS OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
OPENING
OPERATING LEVER..................................................................................................PRESS FULLY
29
This will disengage the locking pins from their latches. As soon as the operating lever is pressed, a
2:
red indicator appears to show that the window is unlocked.
41
2
OPERATING LEVER....................................................................................................ROTATE AFT
20
4/
This will release the window from its fixed structure.
0
9/
Pull backwards to slide the window panel aft.
-2
At the end of travel, the window is locked in the open position.
9-
y2
CLOSING
àM
To unlock the window :
Tr
ạm
LOCKING PIN................................................................................................. UNLOCK (PULL AFT)

Ph
OPERATING LEVER............................................................................................ PUSH FORWARD

The operating lever must be pushed until the window panel is in its fixed frame.
9
OPERATING LEVER........................................................................................ROTATE FORWARD

:2
12
This will move the window panel into its frame.

4
02
The window is closed and locked, when the red indicator on the handle is no longer visible.
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-210 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
COCKPIT SLIDING WINDOW OPERATION
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 13-210 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
PROCEDURES 29
ABNORMAL/EMERGENCY
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
ABNORMAL/EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
14-010 INTRODUCTION
GENERAL INFORMATION .................................................................................................................................... A
PRESENTATION..................................................................................................................................................... B
14-020 FIRE PROTECTION
29
GUIDELINES FOR IN-FLIGHT SMOKE/FUMES AND FIRE MANAGEMENT ...................................................... A
2:
41
CLASSES OF FIRE.................................................................................................................................................B
AWARENESS TO SMOKE/FUMES IN HIDDEN AREAS.......................................................................................C
2
20
AREA SPECIFIC FIRES......................................................................................................................................... D
4/
Definition and Description of Fire fighting Roles ....................................................................................................E
0
9/
Basic Cabin Fire Fighting Procedure.......................................................................................................................F
-2
Cabin Smoke/Fumes/Fire Procedure Hidden Area or Unknown Source................................................................G
9-
Lavatory Smoke/FUMES/Fire Procedure................................................................................................................ H
y2
PAX SEAT SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE............................................................................................................................I
àM
Galley Smoke/Fumes/Fire Procedure...................................................................................................................... J
Tr
Oven Smoke/Fumes/Fire Procedure....................................................................................................................... K
ạm
OVERHEAD BIN Smoke/Fumes/Fire Procedure.....................................................................................................L

Ph
HEATED FLOOR PANEL (HFP) SMOKE/FUMES.................................................................................................M

LITHIUM BATTERY SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE............................................................................................................N
STORAGE PROCEDURE AFTER A LITHIUM BATTERY FIRE............................................................................O
9
:2
12
14-025 EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS

4
02
Emergency Calls......................................................................................................................................................A
/2
PLANNED EMERGENCY LANDING.......................................................................................................................B

04
UNPLANNED EMERGENCY LANDING................................................................................................................. C

9/
-2
14-030 EMERGENCY CABIN EVACUATION

9-
y2
EVACUATION GUIDELINES...................................................................................................................................A
Cockpit Assigned Duties For Evacuation................................................................................................................ B
àM
CABIN CREW-ASSIGNED AREAS FOR EVACUATION ...................................................................................... C

Tr
EMERGENCY PASSENGER DOOR OPERATION................................................................................................D

ạm
Cabin Preparation For Planned On Ground Evacuation.........................................................................................E

Ph
On Ground Evacuation............................................................................................................................................ F
CABIN PREPARATION FOR DITCHING............................................................................................................... G
29
EVACUATION ON WATER.....................................................................................................................................H
:
12
4
14-040 EMERGENCY COCKPIT EVACUATION

02
/2
COCKPIT EVACUATION THROUGH WINDOW ................................................................................................... A

04
COCKPIT EVACUATION THROUGH COCKPIT DOOR .......................................................................................B

9/

-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321

14-050 DEPRESSURIZATION
ABNORMAL CABIN ALTITUDE.............................................................................................................................. A
DEPRESSURIZATION WARNINGS........................................................................................................................B
CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION................................................................................................................................ C
29
2:
14-055 TURBULENCE MANAGEMENT
41
TURBULENCE MANAGEMENT..............................................................................................................................A
2
20
CABIN CREW PROCEDURES............................................................................................................................... B
4/
ANTICIPATED TURBULENCE PROCEDURES..................................................................................................... C
0
9/
UNANTICIPATED TURBULENCE PROCEDURES................................................................................................D
-2
POST TURBULENCE DUTIES............................................................................................................................... E
9-
y2
14-070 MISCELLANEOUS
àM
FLIGHT CREW INCAPACITATION.........................................................................................................................A
Tr
BOMB ON BOARD ................................................................................................................................................ B
ạm
SINGLE BLADE LAVATORY DOOR EMERGENCY OPERATION........................................................................C

Ph
BI-FOLDING LAVATORY DOOR EMERGENCY OPERATION............................................................................. D

REJECTED TAKEOFF ........................................................................................................................................... E
9
:2
14-080 SAFETY OPERATIONAL AWARENESS

12
14-080-10 EVACUATION AWARENESS

4
02
GROUND EVACUATION.........................................................................................................................................A
/2
04
DITCHING................................................................................................................................................................ B
9/
SURVIVAL............................................................................................................................................................... C
-2
14-080-20 TURBULENCE THREAT AWARENESS

9-
TURBULENCE THREAT AWARENESS ................................................................................................................A

y2
àM
14-080-30 CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION AWARENESS

Tr
CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION AWARENESS ....................................................................................................... A

ạm
14-080-50 CABIN SMOKE/FUMES AWARENESS

Ph
CABIN SMOKE/FUMES AWARENESS.................................................................................................................. A
14-080-60 MANAGING IN-FLIGHT FIRES

:29
12
Managing In-Flight fires ..........................................................................................................................................A

4
02
14-090 ADDITIONAL ABNORMAL/EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

/2
04
Slide Raft Transportation.........................................................................................................................................A

9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321
GENERAL INFORMATION
Applicable to: ALL
Abnormal/Emergency procedures are actions that must be taken by the cabin crew after a failure.
The CCOM's Abnormal/Emergency procedures are those recommended by Airbus as operational
guidelines.
29
Standard operating procedures and Abnormal/Emergency procedures should be developed in
2:
41
accordance with Operator policies, procedures and local Aviation Authority requirements.
2
Abnormal/Emergency procedures are synchronized with the FCOM PRO/ABN (Flight Crew
20
4/
Operating Manual) procedures, requiring flight and cabin crews to communicate and cooperate.
0
Abnormal/Emergency procedures, specific to the cabin crew, concern smoke/fire fighting,
9/
-2
depressurization, etc.
9-
Aviation Authorities do not certify the Abnormal/Emergency procedures.
y2
They are continuously updated. Revisions take into account the feedback received from all
àM
Operators, in addition to the results of continuous monitoring of the aircraft's in-service life.
Tr
Each Abnormal/Emergency Procedure is considered to be a separate DU, which is updated
ạm
according to its validity criteria.

Ph
PRESENTATION
9
:2
Applicable to: ALL

12
Emergency procedure titles are displayed within a rectangle, that has two black squares on each
4
02
side.
/2
Abnormal procedure titles are displayed within a rectangle, but there are no black square on each
04
9/
side.
-2
PROCEDURE TITLES
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
When inserted in the procedure, expanded information appears in italics.

Ph
This information :
‐ Identifies the failure.
29
:
‐ Explains actions for which the reason is not evident.

12
‐ Furnishes additional background info.

4
02
/2
When several procedures appear under the same title, a black square indicates the beginning of
04
each procedure.
9/
-2
Only one procedure is applicable at a time. For example :

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-010 P 1/2

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321
BLACK SQUARE
29
2:
412
20
Black squares also indicate various possible procedures, among which only one is applicable. For
4/
example :
0
9/
BLACK SQUARES
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
If an action depends on a precondition, a black dot identifies the precondition. For example :
9
:2
BLACK DOT
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-010 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 30 OCT 08
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
GUIDELINES FOR IN-FLIGHT SMOKE/FUMES AND FIRE MANAGEMENT

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew is responsible for effectively dealing with in-flight emergencies that involve
smoke/fumes/fire. The following factors are important to enable cabin crew to correctly manage a
29
smoke/fumes or fire event in-flight.
2:
The QRH procedure SMOKE/FUMES/AVNCS SMOKE covers all the events related to fire smoke
41
and fumes with or without odors : it is the reference for the flight crews to address all of these
2
20
events.
4/
0
FIGHT THE FIRE
9/
-2
The cabin crew must be aware of the importance of taking immediate and aggressive action to
9-
determine the source of the smoke/fumes/fire.
y2
The cabin crew must take action to: àM
‐ Rapidly evaluate the situation
Tr
‐ Determine the source of the smoke/fumes/fire

ạm
‐ Access the fire, if necessary

Ph
‐ Fight the fire, using firefighting equipment, and/or any other appropriate item that is rapidly
available (e.g. non-alcoholic beverages, including carbonated drinks, coffee, tea, juice)
9
:2
‐ Smother the fire by using wet pillows, or wet blankets, in order to stop the fire from igniting
12
again.
4
02
/2
COMMUNICATE AND COORDINATE

04
9/
The cabin crew must be aware of the importance for the need for on effective crew
-2
communication and coordination. When smoke/fumes/fire is detected, the cabin crew must
9-
immediately inform:
y2
‐ The flight crew

àM
‐ The Purser
Tr
FIRE PREVENTION
ạm
Ph
The cabin crew must be vigilant and pay attention to any unusual fumes, noises, unusual system
behavior that may be an indication of a possible fire.
‐ Lavatories, including the associated smoke detector and wastebin fire extinguisher.
29
:
‐ Galleys, ensuring that no flammable materials, such as paper napkins, and towels are not left
12
near or in heated galley equipment. The cabin crew monitor the galley electrical panels for
4
02
fault indications and tripped circuit breakers.

/2
04
‐ The cabin must regularly monitored for fire hazards.

9/
-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 1/24

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
GUIDELINES FOR IN-FLIGHT SMOKE/FUMES AND FIRE MANAGEMENT (Cont'd)

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Circuit breakers are designed to provide protection from overheating, due to an abnormal
electrical load on a piece of equipment. The circuit breaker will trip automatically when a
predetermined electrical load is detected. When the circuit breaker trips this will result in the total
29
2:
or partial deactivation of the affected electrical installation.
41
Circuit breakers that relate to cabin items, such as lights, and entertainment systems, etc..., may
2
20
be used to isolate equipment in the event of smoke/fumes/fire, in accordance with the operator's
4/
policy.
0
9/
-2
WARNING Do not reset a tripped circuit breaker. Resetting a tripped circuit breaker may
cause more damage to the equipment and affect other electrical equipment. This
9-
may cause overheat and/or smoke/fumes.
y2
àM
Cabin reports of tripped circuit breakers should be reported to the flight crew immediately, and
Tr
entered in the maintenance logbook.

ạm
LITHIUM BATTERIES FIRES

Ph
Lithium batteries are commonly used to power aircraft cabin equipment (Defibrillators, passenger
9
inflatable seat belts, flashlights, Electronic Flight Bag (EFB) ...etc) and consumer equipment
:2
12
(PEDs). These batteries can be either lithium batteries (disposable) and lithium-ion batteries
4
(rechargeable).
02
Both types are capable of ignition and subsequent explosion due to overheating. The resulting
/2
04
fire can flare repeatedly as each cell ruptures and releases its contents.
9/
Based on testing by the Fire Safety Branch of the FAA, the following procedures are
-2
recommended for fighting a fire of a lithium type battery-powered PED regardless if the battery is
9-
disposable or rechargeable:
y2
àM
‐ Relocate passenger away from the device, use halon, halon replacement or water fire
extinguisher to prevent the spread of the fire to adjacent battery cells and materials
Tr
‐ Pour water , or other non-alcoholic liquid , from any available source over the cells
ạm
immediately after extinguishing the fire.

Ph
Note: Only water or other non-alcoholic liquid can provide sufficient cooling to prevent
29
re-ignition and/or spreading of the fire to adjacent batteries. Significant cooling is

:
12
needed to prevent the spread of fire to additional cells in a battery pack.

4
02
WARNING
/2
‐ Do not attempt to pick up and move a smoking or burning device

04

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 2/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
GUIDELINES FOR IN-FLIGHT SMOKE/FUMES AND FIRE MANAGEMENT (Cont'd)

‐ Do not cover the device or use ice to cool down the device. Ice or other
materials insulate the device increasing the likelihood that additional battery
cells will ignite.
‐ Do not use fire resistant burn bags to isolate burning lithium type batteries.
29
Transferring a burning appliance into a burn bag may be extremely
2:
41
hazardous.
2
‐ Mass stowage of tablets used as IFE or cabin crewmember tablets must be
20
prohibited in closed compartments such as OHSC, galleys standard units
4/
0
etc... unless the compartment is designed for this particular use.
9/
-2
If an electrical burning smell from a Portable Electronic Device (PED) is detected or, if a PED is
9-
suspected of overheating, the passenger should be asked to switch off the device immediately.
y2
If the PED is plugged to the aircraft power supply, the power supply must be disconnected if safe
àM
to do so and, the ISPSS must be switched off.
Tr
Although the PED is switched off, unstable/damaged batteries can still ignite and therefore, the
ạm
PED must remain off and be closely monitored for the reminder of the flight.
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 3/24

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
CLASSES OF FIRE
Applicable to: ALL
Class A fires involve the following types of material:

‐ Wood
29
‐ Cloth
2:
‐ Paper
41
‐ Rubber
2
20
‐ Plastic
4/
Fires from these materials require the cooling effects of quantities of water. Use
0
9/
a water extinguisher or liquids containing a large quantity of water, (e.g. tea,
-2
coffee, juice).
9-
WARNING Do not use liquids that have alcohol.
y2
àM
Class B fires involve flammable liquids, for example:
Tr
‐ Oils
ạm
‐ Grease
Ph
‐ Aircraft fuel
‐ Hydraulic fluid
9
‐ Tar
:2
‐ Oil -based paints

12
‐ Lacquers
4
02
‐ Flammable gases
/2
Fires from these materials require an extinguishing agent that have a blanketing
04
9/
effect.
-2
WARNING Do not use a water extinguisher for class B fires. Use a

9-
halon or halon-free extinguisher.

y2
àM
Class C fires involve electrical equipment, for example:

Tr
‐ Coffeemakers,
ạm
‐ Ovens
Ph
‐ Wiring
‐ Circuit breakers
29
WARNING Do not use a water extinguisher on electrical fires, because

:
12
this may cause electric shock and damage other electrical

circuits. Use a halon or halon-free extinguisher.
4
02
A halon or halon-free extinguisher would be required.

/2
04

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 4/24

à
Tr
CCOM B→ 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
CLASSES OF FIRE (Cont'd)
Class D fires involve combustible metals, for example:

‐ Magnesium
‐ Titanium
‐ Zirconium
29
‐ Sodium
2:
41
WARNING Do not use a halon or halon-free extinguisher or water for a
2
class D fire.
20
4/
Special dry powder extinguishers are used on these types of fire, because of
0
9/
the possible chemical reaction between the extinguishing agent and the burning
-2
metal.
9-
Note: For lithium batteries fires Refer to 14-020 LITHIUM BATTERY FIRES
y2
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS APPLICABLE TO EACH THE CLASS OF FIRE
àM
Tr
The cabin crew should select the appropriate fire extinguisher according to the type of fire, class
ạm
A, B, C or D:
Ph
1. Carbon Dioxide Extinguisher - For class B or C fires

2. Water Extinguisher - For class A fires
9
3. Dry Chemical Extinguishers - For class A, B, or C fires

:2
4. Halon, Halon free or BCF - For class B, or C

412
02
WARNING When a halon or halon-free extinguisher is used on a class A fire, the

/2
affected area must be dampened with water afterward to prevent the fire from
04
re-ignition.
9/
-2
5. Specialized Dry Powder Extinguishers - For class D fires.

9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 5/24

à
Tr
CCOM ←B 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
AWARENESS TO SMOKE/FUMES IN HIDDEN AREAS

Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew must be aware of the potential sources of smoke/fumes onboard the aircraft, and
must familiarize themselves with these areas, in order for crewmembers to determine the source of
29
the smoke/fumes, and take immediate action. Hidden area include:
2:
41
‐ Crown Area: This area is above the ceiling panels. This overhead area includes wiring bundles,
2
control surface cables, passenger emergency oxygen system, parts of the air conditioning
20
4/
system, and components of the aircraft In-Flight Entertainment System (IFE).
0
‐ Dado Panels: These are the vents that are at the foot of the sidewall panels, on each side of the
9/
-2
passenger cabin. Most aircraft air conditioning systems supply conditioned air from the cabin
ceiling. This conditioned air then flows from the top of the cabin to the bottom, exits via the return
9-
y2
grills, and finally leaves the aircraft via the outflow valves.
àM
‐ Triangle Area: This area is below the floor outboard of the cargo area. This area hosts hydraulic
lines, electrical components and wiring bundles.
Tr
ạm
AIR DISTRIBUTION
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 6/24

à
Tr
CCOM C 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
AREA SPECIFIC FIRES

Applicable to: ALL
Firefighting methods are different depending on the location and the source of the fire.
However, there are some general guidelines that the cabin crew should apply.
29
FIRES IN HIDDEN AREAS
2:
41
Smoke/fumes emissions from sidewall panels and ceiling panels may indicate a hidden fire. In
2
20
some cases, smoke/fumes may appear some distance from the source.
4/
When the cabin crew suspects a fire in a hidden area, for example, behind a panel, they should
0
9/
try to locate a "hot spot". A "hot spot" is an abnormally warm area. A "hot spot" is usually a good
-2
indicator as to where the source of the fire is.
9-
y2
Note: To find the "hot spot", the cabin crew should move the back of their hand along the
panels to find the hottest area. àM
This is because, the skin on the back of the hand is thinner and, is more sensitive to
Tr
ạm
temperature changes than the palm.

Ph
It may be necessary to remove or lever panels to insert the nozzle of the fire extinguisher. Use a
crash axe that has an insulated handle to lever panels.
9
:2
CAUTION Be very careful when removing, or levering panels, because some of these
12
areas may contain essential wiring or aircraft systems.

4
02
/2
FIRES IN ENCLOSED AREAS

04
9/
When a fire occurs in an enclosed area such as, a lavatory, an overhead bin, a closet or a crew
-2
rest area, before opening the door, always check the door panel for heat.
9-
Note: The cabin crew should check for heat using the back of the hand.
y2
àM
 If the cabin crew suspects a fire in an enclosed area, they must:

Tr
‐ Open the door or the overhead bin slightly (just enough to pass the nozzle of the fire
ạm
extinguisher).
Ph
 If the fire is visible, the cabin crew must:

29
‐ Discharge the fire extinguisher at the base of the fire in a sweeping motion.
:
12
 If the source of the fire has not been located, do not randomly discharge the fire
4
02
extinguisher into an enclosed area:

/2
04
‐ The cabin crew must actively search the entire area to locate the source of the fire.
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 7/24

à
Tr
CCOM D 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
DEFINITION AND DESCRIPTION OF FIRE FIGHTING ROLES

Applicable to: ALL
Firefighting procedures require a team of at least three cabin crewmembers, because a team effort
is the most effective way fight a fire. The firefighting roles are defined as follows:
29
• The Firefighter
2:
41
• The Communicator
2
• The Assistant Firefighter
20
4/
The three roles are complimentary because tasks are performed simultaneously, in order to
0
9/
optimize the firefighting effort.
-2
• The Firefighter: The first cabin crewmember to find the fire becomes the Firefighter. This cabin
9-
crewmember must:
y2
àM
‐ Alert other cabin crewmembers
Tr
‐ Obtain the nearest fire extinguisher (consider the use of a PBE)

ạm
‐ Immediately locate the source of the fire

Ph
‐ Fight the fire

• The Communicator: The second cabin crewmember to arrive on the scene becomes the
9
:2
communicator, this cabin crewmember must:

4 12
‐ Inform the flight crew of the fire, give the following information:
02
/2
▪ Location of the fire

04
▪ Source of the fire

9/
-2
▪ Severity/Density of the fire (color of the smoke/odor, and how it is effecting people)
▪ Firefighting progress
9-
y2
▪ Number of extinguishers used

àM
▪ Time that the firefighting action began

Tr
‐ Maintain the communication link between the cabin and the flight crew, via an interphone that
ạm
is near the fire fighting scene.

Ph
‐ Provide the flight crew with an accurate description of the firefighting effort, and of the situation
in the cabin
: 29
• The Assistant Firefighter: The third cabin crewmember to arrive on the scene, becomes
12
The Assistant Firefighter, and must:

4
02
/2
‐ Provide extra firefighting equipment

04
9/
‐ Support and coordinate the firefighting effort

-2
‐ Remove flammable material from the area

-

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 8/24

à
Tr
CCOM E→ 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
DEFINITION AND DESCRIPTION OF FIRE FIGHTING ROLES (Cont'd)

‐ Must be prepared to replace the Firefighter, and exchange roles with the Firefighter, if
required.
• Support cabin crewmembers: These cabin crewmembers are not directly involved in the
firefighting effort, will be required to provide assistance (e.g. to relocate passengers, administer
29
first-aid, calm and reassure passengers).
2:
41
After any fire or smoke/fumes occurrence, one crewmember should be assigned to monitor the
2
affected area for the remainder of the flight, and should regularly report to the Chief Purser.
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 9/24

à
Tr
CCOM ←E 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
BASIC CABIN FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE

Applicable to: ALL
The Firefighter, the Communicator and the Assistant Firefighter perform their roles and actions
SIMULTANEOUSLY.
29
FIREFIGHTER
2:
41
OTHER CREWMEMBERS....................................................................................................ALERT
2
20
FIREFIGHTING EQUIPMENT.............................................................................................OBTAIN
4/
0
Take the nearest appropriate fire extinguisher. Consider the use of a PBE.
9/
-2
SOURCE OF THE FIRE.................................................................................................... LOCATE
FIRE EXTINGUISHER................................................................ DISCHARGE AT BASE OF FIRE
9-
FIREFIGHTING EFFORT................................................................................................ MAINTAIN
y2
 When the fire is out: àM
Tr
AFFECTED AREA...................................................................................................... DAMPEN
ạm
The affected area should be dampened to prevent the fire from re-ignition.
Ph
WARNING Do not dampen electrical equipment.

9
COMMUNICATOR
:2
12
FLIGHT CREW...........................................................NOTIFY IMMEDIATELY VIA INTERPHONE

4
02
Use the interphone, to prevent smoke from contaminating the cockpit. Give the following
/2
information:
04
9/
‐ Location of the fire

-2
9-
‐ Source of the fire

y2
‐ Severity/Density (color of smoke/odor, and how it is affecting people)

àM
‐ Firefighting progress
Tr
‐ Number of extinguishers used

ạm
‐ Time firefighting action began.

Ph
COMMUNICATION WITH FLIGHT CREW..................................................................... MAINTAIN

INSTRUCTIONS FROM FLIGHT CREW.............. COMMUNICATE TO CABIN CREWMEMBERS
:29
12
ASSISTANT FIREFIGHTER
4
02
FIREFIGHTING EQUIPMENT.......................................................................................... PROVIDE

/2
FIREFIGHTING............................................................................. SUPPORT AND COORDINATE

04
9/

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 10/24

à
Tr
CCOM F→ 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
BASIC CABIN FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE (Cont'd)

 If necessary:
REPLACE FIREFIGHTER........................................................................................ PREPARE
PBE.....................................................................................................................................DON
SUPPORT CREWMEMBERS
29
2:
PASSENGERS AND PORTABLE OXYGEN..............................MOVE FROM IMMEDIATE AREA
41
FIREFIGHTING EFFORT......................................................................... ASSIST AND SUPPORT
2
20
PASSENGERS..........................................................................................CALM AND REASSURE
4/
0
 When the fire is out
9/
-2
DEDICATED CREWMEMBER.............. MONITOR FOR THE REMAINDER OF THE FLIGHT
9-
The affected area must be monitored for the remainder of the flight. Regular reports must be
y2
made to the Chief Purser.
àM
END OF PROC
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 11/24

à
Tr
CCOM ←F 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
CABIN SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE PROCEDURE HIDDEN AREA OR UNKNOWN SOURCE

Applicable to: ALL
Smoke/fumes that come from sidewall panels, ceiling panels and vents may indicate a hidden fire.
In some cases, smoke/fumes may appear far from the real source
29
CC
2:
BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE....................................................................................APPLY
41
2
FIREFIGHTER
20
SOURCE OF SMOKE/FUMES.............................................................................................. LOCATE
4/
0
9/
FIREFIGHTER
-2
REASON FOR SMOKE/FUMES....................................................INVESTIGATE AND DETERMINE
9-
Note: To determine the source of a potential fire, crewmembers should check for "hot spots" on
y2
panels. Move the back of the hand along the panels to find unusually hot areas.
àM
 WHEN "HOT SPOT" IS LOCATED
Tr
ạm
FIREFIGHTER
Ph
AREA......................................................................................................... ACCESS WITH CARE

CAUTION When gaining access behind panels, be aware of the presence of wiring
9
:2
bundles. Make a careful incision in the panel to insert extinguisher nozzle, or

12
lever the panel to gain access.

4
02
FIREFIGHTER
/2
04
FIRE EXTINGUISHER..............................................................................................DISCHARGE
9/
CC
-2
DEDICATED CREWMEMBER.................. MONITOR FOR THE REMAINDER OF THE FLIGHT

9-
The affected area must be monitored for the remainder of the flight. Regular reports must be
y2
made to the Chief Purser.

àM
Tr
END OF PROC
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 12/24

à
Tr
CCOM G 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
LAVATORY SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE PROCEDURE

Applicable to: ALL
Smoke/fires in the lavatories may be due to:

‐ Passengers smoking
29
‐ Electrical malfunctions
2:
41
‐ Burning materials .
2
20
 When smoke is detected in a lavatory:
04/
Visual alerts
9/
-2
‐ On the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP):
9-
• the SMOKE DETECTION page automatically appears and displays the location of the
y2
affected lavatory, the SMOKE RESET key comes on steady red àM
• The SMOKE RESET hard key comes on steady.
Tr
ạm
‐ In the cabin:
Ph
• All AIPs indicate the affected lavatory in a red flashing alert info box
• The related ACP flashes amber
9
• The related lavatory smoke/call indicator flashes amber

:2
12
• The SMOKE RESET key on the related AAP comes on steady red.
4
02
Aural alert
/2
04
‐ a triple low chime sounds every 30 seconds in the cabin (or CAM assignment value).
9/
-2
........................................................................................................................................................
9-
BASIC FIREFIGHTING PROCEDURE.............................................................................. APPLY

y2
àM
COMMUNICATOR
CABIN CREW / COCKPIT CREW COMMUNICATION............................................. ESTABLISH
Tr
ạm
The cabin crew must update the flight crew on the progress of the event.
Ph
On either the FAP or related AAP:

FIREFIGHTER
29
AFFECTED LAVATORY..................................................................................................LOCATE
:
12
LAVATORY DOOR .......................................................................................CHECK FOR HEAT

4
02
Note: For aircraft equipped with spaceflex V3 lavatories, the cabin crew can check for heat
/2
04
on the separation wall of the adjacent lavatory.

9/
-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 13/24

à
Tr
CCOM H→ 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
LAVATORY SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE PROCEDURE (Cont'd)
WARNING Do not open the door before checking for heat. Move the back of the hand
along the door to evaluate the presence/severity of the fire.
SUPPORT CREWMEMBER
29
SMOKE RESET key.......................................................................................................... PRESS
2:
41
To silence the chime and to reset all visual warnings.
2
20
Note: The Smoke reset on the FAP and the AAPs, and the indications on the FAP SMOKE
4/
DETECTION page remain on as long as smoke is detected.
0
9/
 If the door is not hot:
-2
9-
FIREFIGHTER
LAVATORY DOOR ...........................................................................OPEN WITH CAUTION
y2
SOURCE OF SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE........................................................................ LOCATE
àM
Tr
Search thoroughly for the presence of smoke/fumes/fire and check the wastebin fire
ạm
extinguisher.
Ph
 If fire is visible:
BASIC FIREFIGHTING PROCEDURE................................................................. APPLY
9
:2
 If smoke/fumes or fire is not visible:

12
CABIN SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE IN HIDDEN AREA OR UNKNOWN SOURCE

4
02
PROCEDURE........................................................................................................ APPLY
/2
04
 If the door is hot:

9/
-2
Note: If the door panel is hot, the fire is at a critical stage. Have extra fire fighting
9-
equipment available and ready to use.

y2
FIREFIGHTER..............................................................................................SELF PROTECT
àM
Stay low and crouch down, using the door panel as protection against smoke and heat.
Tr
ạm
FIREFIGHTER
(*)LAVATORY DOOR................................................................................. OPEN SLIGHTLY
Ph
The door must be opened just enough to pass the nozzle of the extinguisher
29
(*)FIRE EXTINGUISHER................................................................................... DISCHARGE

:
12
(*)LAVATORY DOOR..................................................................................................CLOSE
4
02
(*)Repeat last three steps of the procedure, as necessary.

/2
 when safe:
04
9/
LAVATORY DOOR .................................................................... OPEN WITH CAUTION

-2
SOURCE OF SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE..................................................................LOCATE
-

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 14/24

à
Tr
CCOM ←H→ 10 OCT 23

ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
LAVATORY SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE PROCEDURE (Cont'd)

Search thoroughly for the presence of smoke/fumes/fire and check the wastebin fire
extinguisher
 If fire is visible:
FIRE EXTINGUISHER.......................................................................... DISCHARGE
29
2:
 If smoke/fumes or fire is not visible:
41
CABIN SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE IN HIDDEN AREA OR UNKNOWN SOURCE
2
20
PROCEDURE................................................................................................. APPLY
04/
 When situation is cleared
9/
-2
CC
9-
AFFECTED LAVATORY..................... MONITOR FOR THE REMAINDER OF THE FLIGHT
y2
To ensure that the lavatory remains clear of smoke/fumes.
àM
END OF PROC
Tr
ạm
Ph
PAX SEAT SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE

Applicable to: ALL
9
:2
12
The type of smoke/fumes/fire from a passenger seat/seat area will determine the class of fire that
4
02
must be dealt with.

/2
The source of smoke/fumes/fire may come from the IFE screen, ISPSS outlet, the seat boxes
04
9/
located under the passenger seats, seat mounted battery or a PED being trapped within the seat.
-2
9-
..............................................................................................................................................................
y2
àM
 when smoke/fumes/fire is detected in the seat/seat area:

Tr
BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE............................................................................. APPLY

ạm
PAX SYS sw  ..................................................................................................................OFF

Ph
The PAX SYS switch is located in the cockpit, on the VCC and optionally on the FAP.
CABIN CREW/COCKPIT CREW COMMUNICATION............................................... ESTABLISH
29
The cabin crew must update the cockpit crew on the progress of the event.
:
12
 If the smoke/fumes/fire is still present:

4
02
BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE............................................................... CONTINUE

/2
04
 If the smoke/fumes/fire is coming from a seat mounted battery or a PED:

9/
LITHIUM BATTERY FIRE PROCEDURE....................................................................APPLY

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 15/24

à
Tr
CCOM ← H to I 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
GALLEY SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE PROCEDURE

Applicable to: ALL
Galley smoke/fumes/fire occurrences can be caused by electrical equipment malfunction for
29
example, coffee makers, water boilers etc..
2:
41
..............................................................................................................................................................
2
20
 If the source of the smoke/fumes/fire is identified from an electrical equipment:
04/
FIREFIGHTER
9/
-2
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT........................................................................................ TURN OFF
 If there is circuit breaker installed:
9-
y2
FIREFIGHTER
àM
APPLICABLE CIRCUIT BREAKER (If installed)............................................................PULL
Tr
Circuit breakers are located on the galley's centralized electrical panel.

ạm
 If the smoke/fumes/fire persists or If the source of the smoke/fumes/fire cannot be

Ph
identified:
9
FIREFIGHTER
:2
MAIN GALLEY POWER pb (if installed)................................................................................ OFF

4 12
 If the smoke/fumes/fire continues:

02
/2
CREWMEMBERS
04
BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE ............................................................................APPLY

9/
-2
END OF PROC
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 16/24

à
Tr
CCOM J 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
OVEN SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE PROCEDURE

Applicable to: ALL
Oven smoke/fumes/fires occurrences may be caused by:

‐ the oven contents, such as, food or grease deposits
29
‐ electrical malfunctions.
2:
41
2
..............................................................................................................................................................
20
4/
 When smoke/fumes/fire is detected:
0
9/
FIREFIGHTER
-2
OVEN DOOR........................................................................................................KEEP CLOSED
9-
Note: By keeping the oven door closed, the fire will usually extinguish itself.
y2
FIREFIGHTER àM
OVEN ......................................................................................................................... TURN OFF
Tr
ạm
FIREFIGHTER
Ph
RELATED CIRCUIT BREAKER (If installed)........................................................................PULL

Circuit breakers are located on the galley's centralized electrical panel.
9
:2
 If SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE is still present:

12
All CC
4
02
BASIC FIREFIGHTING PROCEDURE............................................... APPLY IF REQUIRED

/2
04
Refer to 14-020 BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE

9/
-2
FIREFIGHTER
PBE AND FIRE GLOVES............................................................................................... DON
9-
FIREFIGHTER
y2
(*) OVEN DOOR.........................................................................................OPEN SLIGHTLY

àM
Tr
Note: Open the oven door slightly, just enough to insert the nozzle of the fire
ạm
extinguisher into the oven.

Ph
FIREFIGHTER
(*) FIRE EXTINGUISHER.................................................................................. DISCHARGE
29
FIREFIGHTER
:
12
(*) OVEN DOOR......................................................................................................... CLOSE

4
02
(*) Repeat last three steps of the procedure, as necessary.

/2
04
 If the SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE persists

9/
-2
FIREFIGHTER
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 17/24

à
Tr
CCOM K→ 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
OVEN SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE PROCEDURE (Cont'd)

MAIN GALLEY POWER pb (If installed)................................................................... OFF
END OF PROC
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 18/24

à
Tr
CCOM ←K 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
OVERHEAD BIN SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE PROCEDURE

Applicable to: ALL
Smoke/fumes/fire in overhead bins may be caused by the contents (i.e. electronic device, spare
lithium battery) or electrical malfunction in the Passenger Service Unit (PSU).
29
The firefighter, the assistant firefighter, the communicator and the support crewmembers must
2:
conduct their tasks simultaneously.
41
 When smoke/fumes/fire is coming from an overhead bin:
2
20
4/
FIREFIGHTER AND ASSISTANT FIREFIGHTER
0
PBE........................................................................................................................................ DON
9/
-2
FIREFIGHTER
9-
FIRE EXTINGUISHER..........................................................................................................TAKE
y2
Note: Consider the use of fire gloves. Tr
àM
WATER OR NON-ALCOHOLIC LIQUID.............................................................................. TAKE
ạm
Ph
Note: Water or non-alcoholic liquid is required if the fire involves lithium battery.
SUPPORT CREWMEMBERS
9
:2
PASSENGERS........................................................................................................... RELOCATE
12
COMMUNICATOR
4
02
FLIGHT CREW........................................................ NOTIFY IMMEDIATELY VIA INTERPHONE

/2
04
FIREFIGHTER
9/
OVERHEAD BIN............................................................................................CHECK FOR HEAT

-2
Using the back of the hand, feel the overhead bin to determine the temperature and presence
9-
of fire.
y2
(*)OVERHEAD BIN........................................................................................... OPEN SLIGHTLY

àM
Enough to pass the nozzle of the fire extinguisher.

Tr
ạm
CAUTION Opening the overhead bin more than necessary can cause contamination of
Ph
the cabin with smoke/fumes, and can result in smoke/fumes inhalation.

(*)FIRE EXTINGUISHER .........................................................................................DISCHARGE
29
:
12
Note: The fire extinguisher must be discharged into the overhead bin, away from the seat, to
4
prevent debris from contaminating the cabin.

02
/2
(*)OVERHEAD BIN ..................................................................................... CLOSE AND LATCH

04
FIREFIGHTING.................................................................................. REPEAT AS NECESSARY

9/
-2
(*)Repeat last three steps of the procedure, as necessary.

-

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 19/24

à
Tr
CCOM L→ 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
OVERHEAD BIN SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE PROCEDURE (Cont'd)

 When the flames are suppressed:
FIREFIGHTER
OVERHEAD BIN.......................................................................CHECK THE SOURCE OF FIRE
29
Note: The assistant firefighter must support the firefighter in the case of re-ignition by using
2:
fire extinguisher.
41
2
 If source of smoke/fumes/fire is coming from a visible PED and/or Spare batteries:
20
4/
FIREFIGHTER
0
9/
ON PED OR SPARE LITHIUM BATTERIES..........................................................................
-2
..................................................................... POUR WATER OR NON-ALCOHOLIC LIQUID
9-
The PED or Spare lithium batteries must be cooled down by pouring water or non-alcoholic
y2
liquids.
àM
 If the source of smoke/fumes/fire is coming from an identified item:
Tr
ạm
FIREFIGHTER
IDENTIFIED ITEM.................................................................................................TAKE OUT
Ph
ON IDENTIFIED ITEM..................................POUR WATER OR NON-ALCOHOLIC LIQUID

9
The identified item must be cooled down by pouring water or non-alcoholic liquids.
:2
12
 If the source of smoke/fumes/fire is coming from a non-identified item:

4
02
FIREFIGHTER
/2
OVERHEAD BIN............................................................................. EMPTY WITH CAUTION

04
9/
Note: Empty the overhead bin until the source of smoke/fumes/fire is identified.
-2
ON IDENTIFIED ITEM..................................POUR WATER OR NON-ALCOHOLIC LIQUID

9-
y2
The identified item must be cooled down by pouring water or non-alcoholic liquids.
àM
STORAGE PROCEDURE AFTER A LITHIUM BATTERY FIRE ...................................... APPLY

Tr
ạm
END OF PROC
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 20/24

à
Tr
CCOM ←L 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
HEATED FLOOR PANEL (HFP) SMOKE/FUMES

Applicable to: ALL
Heated Floor Panels (HFP) smoke/fumes/fire can be caused by the electrical equipment
malfunction, a shock or objects left unattended on the HFP (EG. plastic bags).
29
2:
..............................................................................................................................................................
41
 When a smoke/fumes/fire is detected from an HFP
2
20
 If the HFP can be switched off from the FAP
04/
CORRESPONDING HFP................................................................................................. OFF
9/
-2
 If the Galley has a main ON/OFF switch
9-
CORRESPONDING GALLEY.......................................................................................... OFF
y2
This will switch off the HFPs àM
CABIN CREW/COCKPIT CREW COMMUNICATION............................................... ESTABLISH
Tr
ạm
 If the smoke/fumes/fire continues

Ph
BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE.......................................................................APPLY

When situation is cleared
9
:2
AFFECTED HFP....................................... MONITOR FOR THE REMAINDER OF THE FLIGHT

4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 21/24

à
Tr
CCOM M 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
LITHIUM BATTERY SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE

Applicable to: ALL
The roles of the firefighter, assistant firefighter and communicator must be distributed according to
the basic firefighting procedure.
29
2:
41
In the case of PED , IFE based tablet, spare lithium battery, equipment or seat mounted battery
2
smoke/fumes/fire in the cabin or when notified by the flight crew:
20
4/
FIREFIGHTER
0
POWER SOURCE ...............................................................................................................REMOVE
9/
-2
When possible, the cabin crew must unplug the device (eg: PED, IFE based tablet etc...) or switch
9-
off the power source .
y2
 If there are flames: àM
FIREFIGHTER
Tr
FIREFIGHTING EQUIPMENT.............................................................................................. TAKE

ạm
Ph
Consider the use of a PBE and fire gloves.

FIREFIGHTER
FIRE EXTINGUISHER..............................................................................................DISCHARGE
9
:2
12
Halon or Halon free extinguisher must be discharged to suppress the flames prior to cool down
4
the PED or the Spare lithium battery.

02
/2
 When the flames are suppressed or if there are no flames:

04
9/
-2
ON PED or spare lithium battery.........................POUR WATER OR NON-ALCOHOLIC LIQUID

9-
The PED or spare lithium batteries must be cooled down by pouring water or non-alcoholic
y2
Liquids
àM
WARNING Liquids may turn into steam when applied to a hot battery.
Tr
ạm
 When the device has cooled:

Ph
FIREFIGHTER
STORAGE PROCEDURE AFTER A LITHIUM BATTERY FIRE ..................................................
29
.................................................................................................................... APPLY IF POSSIBLE

:
12
WARNING ‐ Do not attempt to pick up and move a smoking or burning device

4
02
‐ Do not cover the device or use ice to cool down the device. Ice or other
/2
04
materials insulate the device increasing the likelihood that additional battery
9/
cells will ignite.

-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 22/24

à
Tr
CCOM N→ 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
LITHIUM BATTERY SMOKE/FUMES/FIRE (Cont'd)

‐ Do not use fire resistant burn bags to isolate burning lithium type batteries.
Transferring a burning appliance into a burn bag may be extremely hazardous.
END OF PROC
29
2:
STORAGE PROCEDURE AFTER A LITHIUM BATTERY FIRE
41
2
20
Applicable to: ALL
4/
0
 When the PED or the spare battery can be safely moved:
9/
-2
FIREFIGHTER
9-
FIRE GLOVES................................................................................................................. PUT ON
y2
àM
RECEPTACLE...................................................................................................................... TAKE
Tr
Consider the use of any suitable empty receptacle (e.g. standard unit or lavatory waste bin ...)
ạm
Ph
RECEPTACLE............................................. FILL WITH WATER OR NON-ALCOHOLIC LIQUID

FIREFIGHTER
9
:2
PED OR SPARE BATTERY......................................................................................... IMMERSE

4 12
Total immersion of the PED or the spare battery will prevent fire re-ignition.
02
/2
04
RECEPTACLE...........................................................STORE INTO THE NEAREST LAVATORY

9/
-2
LAVATORY..............................................................................................SET AS INOPERATIVE
9-
y2
CC
àM
AFFECTED LAVATORY............................................................................................... MONITOR

Tr
The affected lavatory must be regularly monitored for the remainder of the flight to ensure that
ạm
the device remains immersed.

Ph
END OF PROC
:29
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 23/24

à
Tr
CCOM ← N to O 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
FIRE PROTECTION
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-020 P 24/24

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS
A321
EMERGENCY CALLS
Applicable to: ALL
In the event if an abnormal or an emergency situation in the cabin, any cabin crewmember may
make this call.
29
EMERGENCY CALL TO FLIGHT CREW
2:
41
Cabin Crew Flight Crew
2
20
In the event if an abnormal or an emergency situation in the
‐ The flight crew must reply
4/
cabin:
0
9/
‐ Press the EMER CALL key
-2
Note: The EMER CALL key must be pressed and
9-
held for at least 1 second.
y2
‐ Wait for the flight crew to reply àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-025 P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 OCT 22
ạm
Ph
A321
PLANNED EMERGENCY LANDING

Applicable to: ALL
EMERGENCY ALERT
CAPTAIN PURSER CABIN CREW
29
2:
‐ Using the PA announce "Purser to ‐ Go immediately to the cockpit to be ‐ Stop all activities, secure any
41
Cockpit, please!" briefed by the captain equipment that is being used
2
‐ Go to designated crew station and
20
standby the interphone ready for
4/
0
Purser's briefing.
9/
-2
CAPTAIN PURSER CABIN CREW
9-
Brief the Purser
y2
Ask the captain for the following
information: àM
‐ Nature of the emergency and
Tr
intentions
ạm
‐ Time available to prepare the cabin

Ph
(synchronize watches)
‐ Signal to brace
‐ Signal to remain seated (if no
9
:2
evacuation is required. On ground

12
emergency only)
4
‐ Special instructions (for example,

02
/2
exits that may be unusable)

04
‐ Acknowledge the captains briefing

9/
‐ Ask the captain who will make the

-2
initial announcement and when.

9-
y2
Note: The captain should, if time ‐ Brief the cabin crew using the ‐ Acknowledge Purser's briefing.
permits, allow the Purser PRIO CONF Call function on the
àM
time to brief the cabin crew. interphone handset.

Tr
ạm
PASSENGER PREPARATION
Ph
FLIGHT CREW PURSER

If the captain's duties permit, the captain will make the
29
‐ Turn on the NO SMOKING/FASTEN SEAT BELT signs

initial announcement.
:
12
‐ If duties permit, make a PA announcement to the

passengers of the nature of the emergency If this is not possible for the captain to make the
4
02
announcement, the Purser will make the initial

/2
Note: For psychological reasons, the flight crew

announcement to the passengers stating:
04
should make the initial announcement to the

‐ The nature of the emergency and the captains intentions
9/
passengers.
‐ The need to prepare the cabin
-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-025 P 2/4

à
Tr
CCOM B→ 11 OCT 22
ạm
Ph
A321
PLANNED EMERGENCY LANDING (Cont'd)

FLIGHT CREW PURSER
‐ Follow the instructions of cabin crew member.
Make the Emergency Announcement containing the
29
following:
2:
‐ Brace positions
41
‐ Locations of exits
2
‐ Loose items
20
‐ ABPs
4/
0
‐ Safety card review
9/
‐ Flotation devices (Ditching Only).
-2
9-
BRACE FOR IMPACT
y2
FLIGHT CREW àM
Tr CABIN CREW
‐ Announce using the PA system "BRACE FOR IMPACT" ‐ Shout "BRACE, BRACE , BRACE" until aircraft comes
ạm
to complete stop.
Note: The flight crew will make the "Brace for
Ph
impact" command approximately 1 minute

before landing.
9
:2
12
INITIATING THE EVACUATION

4
02
FLIGHT CREW CABIN CREW

/2
04
‐ Using the PA system announce "EVACUATE, Shout evacuation commands:

9/
EVACUATE" ‐ "EVACUATE, EVACUATE" "OPEN SEAT BELTS"

-2
‐ Press the EVAC CMD pb to sound the evacuation horn. ‐ "LEAVE BAGGAGE"
9-
‐ "COME THIS WAY".

y2
 If there is no communication from the flight crew and, a catastrophic situation exists
àM
in the cabin, the cabin crew should initiate the evacuation.

Tr
ạm
PURSER/CABIN CREWMEMBER
Ph
To initiate an evacuation use whatever means are available:

‐ Use the PA system, megaphone or shout the evacuation commands "EVACUATE, EVACUATE" "OPEN SEAT
29
BELTS " "LEAVE BAGGAGE" "COME THIS WAY".

:
12
‐ Press the EVAC CMD pb on the FAP

4
02
Note: The evacuation horn will sound in the cabin only if the switch in the cockpit is set to CAPT/PURS position.
/2
04

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-025 P 3/4

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
PLANNED EMERGENCY LANDING (Cont'd)

EVACUATION NOT REQUIRED
In the case of a planned emergency landing, when the passengers have been prepared to
anticipate evacuating the aircraft. If no evacuation is required after the aircraft has landed it will
be necessary for the flight crew must inform the cabin crew and passengers as soon as possible
29
2:
in order to prevent an unnecessary evacuation from being initiated.
41
2
20
The Purser should reinforce this message using the PA to
4/
When an evacuation is not required the flight crew must
announce to passengers that an evacuation of the aircraft
0
make an immediate announcement
9/
is not necessary, and ask passengers to remain in their
-2
‐ Using the PA system announce "REMAIN SEATED".
seats
9-
y2
UNPLANNED EMERGENCY LANDING àM
Tr
Applicable to: ALL

ạm
Ph
In the case of an abnormal or emergency situation during the takeoff or landing such as:
‐ Imminent impact or,
9
:2
‐ Aircraft damage.
12
The command to brace for impact should be given as a minimum warning to passengers.
4
02
The brace command can be initiated by the flight crew or the cabin crew.
/2
04
BRACE COMMANDS - UNPLANNED EMERGENCY LANDING

9/
-2

9-
If the flight crew are aware of imminent impact: If the cabin crew are aware of imminent impact, or on the
y2
‐ Using PA announce "BRACE FOR IMPACT" command of the flight crew:

àM
‐ Cabin crew must adopt their brace position and shout

Tr
"HEADS DOWN, STAY DOWN"

ạm
‐ Repeat the brace commands until the aircraft has come

Ph
to a complete stop.
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-025 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM ← B to C 11 OCT 22
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY CABIN EVACUATION
A321
EVACUATION GUIDELINES
Applicable to: ALL
There are many factors that contribute to the successful evacuation of an aircraft:
‐ The procedural knowledge of the cabin crew ( training and recurrent training)
29
‐ The aircraft configuration, the layout of the cabin (seat arrangement, seat adjacent to an exit etc...)
2:
41
‐ The environment inside and outside the aircraft (e.g., the presence of smoke, fire, the cabin
2
lighting, and outside conditions)
20
‐ The preparation, behavior and motivation of the passengers
4/
0
9/
During an emergency, it is essential for the cabin crew to be able to apply their knowledge of
-2
procedures, and rapidly adapt to the situation.
9-
In the case of a life threatening situation onboard the aircraft, it is essential that the aircraft is
y2
evacuated quickly and efficiently to increase the occupants chances of survival.
àM
Tr
The key objective in any evacuation is to maximise the use of all usable exits , and maintain a
ạm
balance and rapid passenger flow from each usable exit in order to evacuate the aircraft as quickly
Ph
as possible.
CABIN CREW OBJECTIVES
9
:2
12
Cabin crew must:

4
02
‐ have situation awareness

/2
‐ be assertive in passenger and cabin management

04
‐ quickly establish a passenger flow at usable exits or redirect passengers to usable exits
9/
-2
‐ provide clear and assertive communication to passengers and other cabin crew
‐ establish a quick and efficient assessment of the situation to enable rapid and effective decision
9-
y2
making.
àM
Tr
THE SILENT REVIEW

ạm
The use of the Silent Review, Or the 30 s review , is excellent tool that the cabin crew can use to
Ph
prepare for the unexpected. The Silent Review helps the cabin crew focus their attention duties
and responsibilities and on safety.
29
The cabin crew should perform the Silent Review during the takeoff and landing phases of flight.
:
12
This review helps the cabin crew prepare themselves and enables them to react rapidly.
4
02
The Silent Review should contain all of the elements needed to review evacuation duties and
/2
responsibilities. It may include, but is not limited to,

04
the following subjects:

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 1/26

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
A321
• Brace for impact

• Commands
• Number of passengers in assigned area including any
special needs passengers
• Identifying Able Bodied Passengers (ABPs)
• How much of the cabin can be seen from assigned station
29
and assist space
2:
THE SILENT REVIEW • Initiating evacuation, if necessary (i.e. Identify under what
41
circumstances the cabin crew will initiate an evacuation:
2
20
catastrophic situation involving the passengers, aircraft or
4/
crew)
0
• Operating exits
9/
-2
• Assessing outside conditions
• Self-protection
9-
• Locating the manual inflation handle for the slide/slideraft
y2
àM
The following is an example of a Silent Review that uses the first word of each subject to form a
Tr
word that is easy to remember. This example is “OLDABC”:
ạm
• Operation of exits
Ph
• Location of equipment
• Drill ( Brace for impact )
9
:2
• Able-Bodied Passengers and persons wilth reduced mobility

12
• Brace Position
4
02
• Commands.
/2
04
WHEN CAN THE CABIN CREW INITIATE AN EVACUATION?

9/
-2
When waiting for takeoff and landing, the cabin crew should be alert to any indication of a possible
9-
emergency. Such indications may include fire, smoke, scraping metal, unusual noises, the force of
y2
impact or an unusual aircraft attitude.

àM
Many evacuations are unplanned, and occur without warning. In most cases, the decision to
Tr
evacuate is made by the flight crew.

ạm
Information received from the cabin crew played an important role in the flight crew’s decision to
Ph
evacuate.
In some cases, it may be necessary for the cabin crew to initiate an evacuation, when there is a
29
catastrophic situation, such as:

:
12
• Uncontrollable fire
4
02
• Dense smoke
/2
04
• Severe structural damage

9/
• Emergency landing on water

-2
• No communication from the flight crew.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 2/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
When the cabin crew decide to initiate an evacuation, they must evaluate the level of danger and
the consequences that a delay in decision-making may have. Smoke or fire that is out of control
requires a rapid decision, because of the danger it presents to the occupants of the aircraft, its
ability to incapacitate rapidly, impair judgment and restrict vision, therefore making the evacuation
a process difficult. In these cases, delaying the evacuation reduces the chances of survival.
If the cabin crew consider that an evacuation is necessary, they must attempt to contact the flight
29
crew in order to inform them of the situation.
2:
41
An evacuation requires cabin crew coordination. Therefore, all cabin crew must be informed that a
2
life-threatening situation exists. There are many ways to inform cabin crewmembers, such as via:
20
4/
• An evacuation alarm
0
9/
• A Public Address
-2
• An interphone
9-
• A megaphone.
y2
àM
The actions and commands of the cabin crew will influence the performance of the passengers
Tr
during the evacuation.

ạm
Ph
COMMANDS
The cabin crew must use assertive and positive verbal commands and body language in order to
9
:2
efficiently manage the passengers and communicate to other cabin crew.

12
Their body language will clearly indicate to the passengers the actions to follow even if the
4
02
passengers don't understand the language being spoken

/2
The commands used by the cabin crew should be:

04
9/
‐ Assertive
-2
‐ Positive
9-
‐ Short
y2
‐ Loud
àM
‐ Clear.
Tr
ạm
Note: Cabin crew must also be prepared to use some physical force, if necessary, to evacuate
Ph
some passengers from the aircraft.

SITUATION AWARENESS
29
Situation awareness will play a large part in the evacuation process.

:
12
The cabin crew must be able to assess not only what is happening at their exit, but also have an
4
02
overview of the overall evacuation.

/2
The cabin crew must be able to:

04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 3/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
‐ Assess the flow of passengers from the exits and be aware of changes in the passenger flow
rate
‐ To rapidly adapt their actions and commands when some cabin areas are congested or an exit
is dried up
‐ Be aware of the status of the other exits, especially when redirecting the passengers
29
‐ Consider redirecting passengers to bypass an active exit in order to maintain a balanced
2:
passenger flow to all usable exits.
41
2
20
PASSENGER BEHAVIOR
4/
0
9/
Each passenger will be individually motivated during an evacuation when the primary survival
-2
instinct takes over.
9-
Passengers may have different behaviors and attitude, such as:
y2
‐ Stress àM
‐ Panic
Tr
‐ Fear
ạm
Ph
Which can result in:

‐ Disorientation
9
‐ Inaction
:2
‐ Baggage retrieval.
4 12
02
Therefore it is the cabin crew responsibility to maintain assertive management with the
/2
passengers.
04
9/
-2
BRACE COMMANDS
9-
The brace command is the first and most important instruction that cabin crew must provide to
y2
passengers in an unplanned emergency. The purpose of instructing passengers to take the brace
àM
position is to reduce injuries during impact, in order to increase the chances of survival.
Tr
The brace position has two functions:

ạm
‐ it reduces the extent of body movement, due to the fact that passengers must lean or bend over
Ph
their legs.
‐ it protects passengers from hitting their head on a hard surface.
29
:
This position must be adapted if:

412
‐ the seat is facing at seat back or a bulkhead

02
‐ Forward facing or aft facing with a safety belt and a shoulder harness (crewmenber seats only)
/2
04
‐ If passenger are obese, pregnant or traveling with infants.

9/
-2
The passengers need to know that more than one impact can occur and that they must
maintain the brace position until the aircraft comes to a full stop.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 4/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
In a cabin preparation, when the crew demonstrate the brace position they should:
‐ Point it out on the safety card.
‐ Move along the aisle, so that all passengers can see it.
‐ Check all passengers.
Once the brace position has been explained, the next step is to inform the passengers when to
29
assume the brace position, for example:
2:
41
"When you hear the cabin crew shouting "Brace, Brace," , this will be your signal to take the
2
brace position, you must remain in this position until the aircraft has come to a complete stop".
20
4/
0
ABLE BODIED PASSENGERS (ABP)
9/
-2
The cabin crew should receive training to identify ABPs during the passenger boarding process..
9-
The role of the ABPs is also to help people that require assistance including:
y2
ABPs can assist and protect the cabin crew while they open the exit and wait for slide inflation.
àM
They can also assist other passengers (e.g.: single adults that travel with more than one child,
Tr
PRMs, etc.)
ạm
Ph
USE OF THE ASSIST SPACE

Each aircraft has a dedicated assist space located on either side of the door. If possible use the
9
:2
assist space facing the majority of the passengers. The cabin crew must firmly grasp the frame
12
assist handle and position themselves correctly in the assist space. This will:
4
02
‐ Prevent the cabin crewmember from being pushed out of the exit
/2
04
‐ Prevent the cabin crewmember from interfering with evacuating passengers.

9/
-2
CARRY-ON BAGGAGE
9-
y2
Many studies and investigation reports document the fact that in some cases, it was necessary
àM
for the cabin crew to argue with passengers because passengers attempted to take their baggage
Tr
with them during emergencies (in one case, the evacuating passenger tried to exit with his guitar).
ạm
Cabin crew should instruct passengers to leave their baggage at the beginning of the evacuation,
Ph
otherwise carry-on baggage brought to the exits can cause a blockage and congestion at the exit
and in the aisles and reduce the efficiency of the evacuation.
29
EXAMPLE Possible commands are ‘Open seatbelts, leave everything’ , ‘Open seatbelts,
:
12
no baggage’
4
02
The cabin crew can also include this information in the passenger pre-flight safety briefing in
/2
04
order to reinforce the message, i.e.: ‘If an emergency evacuation is necessary, leave all your
9/
belongings behind’.
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 5/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CONFIGURATION
The cabin configuration can have an impact on the evacuation.
To enhance the situational awareness, cabin crew should be familiar with the cabin layout and in
particular areas where congestion may occur or areas where exits may be under utilized , due to:
‐ The passenger seating density (high or low)
29
‐ The location of galleys, lavatories, etc..
2:
41
‐ The size of the exit and the size of the slide/slideraft
2
‐ Passengers arriving from different directions to the exits.
20
4/
Cabin configuration may also impact visibility, this is particularly important where the exits are
0
9/
obstructed from view (bulkheads, lavatories etc...)
-2
9-
ASSESSING THE OUTSIDE CONDITIONS:
y2
Before opening the door the cabin crew must assess the outside conditions.
àM
Check that the slide deployment area is clear of:
Tr
ạm
‐ Smoke
Ph
‐ Fire
9
‐ Obstacles and,
:2
12
‐ Debris.
4
02
CABIN CREW ACTIONS AT USABLE EXITS:

/2
04
The cabin crew must visually check that the slide is fully deployed and inflated once the exit has
9/
-2
been opened.
Once the slide has deployed and inflated, the cabin crew must stand in the dedicated assist space
9-
in order to keep the evacuation path clear and hold onto an assist handle.
y2
àM
The cabin crew should use commands, such as:

Tr
‐ “Come this way”

ạm
‐ “ Jump, jump”
Ph
Some passengers may try to sit on the door sill before going down the slide. This must be avoided,
as it will delay the flow of passengers from the exit.
29
Therefore, the cabin crew must use whatever force is necessary to evacuate the passengers (e.g.
:
12
a push in the lower back etc...).

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 6/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
The cabin crew must be aware of any changes (inside and outside the aircraft) that would make
the exit unusable and be ready to adapt and redirect passengers should the situation require.
Developments that would make the exit unusable are, for example :
‐ Slide damage and deflation
‐ Fire in the area
29
‐ External hazard.
2:
41
CABIN CREW ACTIONS AT UNUSABLE EXITS:
2
20
An exit may be unusable at the beginning of an evacuation or may become unusable during the
4/
evacuation.
0
9/
-2
1. An exit may be unusable at the beginning of the evacuation, for example:
9-
‐ The exit is jammed, and will not open
y2
‐ The slide does not deploy correctly or the slide is damaged
àM
‐ There are external hazards (e.g. Smoke/fire, engines running etc...).
Tr
The cabin crew who is responsible for the unusable exit must inform the passengers and other
ạm
cabin crew that the exit is blocked, and redirect the passengers to the most appropriate usable
Ph
exit.
9
Note: The cabin crew must protect the unusable exit to prevent the exit from being used.
:2
12
When redirecting passengers, the cabin crew should listen for the other cabin crew giving the
4
02
command to "Come this way" or "Jump" for confirmation that another exit is usable.
/2
The cabin crew should use commands, such as :

04
9/
‐ “Go ahead, go straight”

-2
‐ “Go that way” with the appropriate gesture

9-
‐ “Go across”
y2
àM
2. An exit may become unusable during the evacuation, for example:

Tr
‐ The slide becomes damaged

ạm
‐ A fire develops in the area

Ph
‐ There are other external hazards.

The cabin crew must be aware of the environment inside and outside the cabin. If the situation
29
changes during the evacuation, the cabin crew at the unusable exit must :
:
12
4
‐ Stop the evacuation

02
‐ Block the exit and redirect passengers to the most appropriate usable exit.
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 7/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
DRIED UP EXIT
An exit may dry up sooner due to several factors such as:
‐ Passenger seating configuration and in particular low density seating configuration in certain
cabin zones
29
‐ Monument arrangement.
2:
41
If the flow to an exit reduces or has dried up, it is necessary for the cabin crew to attract
2
passengers to the dried up exit in order to maintain a balanced evacuation flow.
20
4/
0
CONGESTED EXIT
9/
-2
An exit may become congested due to several factors such as:
9-
‐ Passenger seating configuration and in particular high density seating configuration in certain
y2
cabin zones àM
‐ Accessibility of exits for passengers.
Tr
ạm
If an exit become congested , it is necessary for the cabin crew to redirect passengers to a less
Ph
congested exit in order to maintain a balanced evacuation flow.
EXIT BYPASS
9
:2
12
Exit bypass is a means of maintaining a balance in the passenger evacuation flow by directing
4
passengers to all alternate usable exits (not necessarily the closest) which are under utilized.
02
/2
This method speeds up the evacuation process and alleviate exits that may become congested.
04
9/
Cabin crew must:

-2
‐ Make a rapid assessment of the situation then a rapid decision making

9-
‐ Be aware of changes in the passenger flow rate

y2
‐ Be aware of the status of other exits when redirecting

àM
‐ Maintain the evacuation flow at all exits

Tr
‐ Assertively manage the passengers.

ạm
Ph
PRE CABIN CREW EVACUATION:

When the flow of passengers to the exit begins to slow down, the cabin crew should call remaining
29
passengers to the exits.

:
12
When the flow of passengers has stopped, the cabin crew should check their assigned area for
4
02
any remaining passengers.

/2
When the assigned area is empty, or it is no longer safe to remain onboard the aircraft, the cabin
04
9/
crew should evacuate through the most appropriate usable exit.

-2
If an evacuation occurs away from an airfield, the cabin crew should take their assigned
-
emergency equipment from the aircraft, if the situation permits.

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 8/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
Note: Cabin crew should consider taking a megaphone from the aircraft to assist with crowd
management post evacuation.
POST CABIN CREW EVACUATION:
The cabin crew will be responsible for the passengers until they are assisted by the rescue and
29
emergency services personnel.
2:
Crewmembers should also receive specific survival training
41
2
‐ Desert areas
20
4/
‐ Tropical areas
0
9/
-2
‐ Polar regions
9-
‐ Mountainous areas
y2
For additional information, please refer to chapter àM
Tr
‐ Refer to 14-080-10 CREW RESPONSABILITIES AFTER EVACUATION
ạm
‐ Refer to 14-080-10 CREW RESPONSABILITIES AFTER EVACUATION

Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 9/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
A321
COCKPIT ASSIGNED DUTIES FOR EVACUATION

Applicable to: ALL
 If it is possible to reach the passenger cabin

CAPT
29
‐ The Captain is the last person to leave the
2:
cockpit: The Captain proceeds to the cabin and helps with passenger evacuation, as necessary.
41
‐ The Captain is the last person to leave the aircraft: The Captain checks that all persons have evacuated
2
20
the aircraft.
4/
0
‐ The Captain evacuates the aircraft through the aft doors if, the situation in the cabin permits. If the
9/
Captain cannot reach the aft doors, the Captain must evacuate the aircraft through the nearest usable
-2
exit.
9-
‐ On the ground, the Captain takes command of operations until rescue units arrive.
y2
F/O àM
‐ The First Officer, proceeds to the cabin, and takes the designated emergency equipment.
Tr
‐ Evacuates the aircraft, using the nearest available exit.

ạm
Ph
‐ Helps passengers on ground, and directs them away from the aircraft.
 If it is not possible to reach the passenger cabin

9
:2
The flight crew should evacuate the aircraft via the cockpit emergency escape hatch, by using
12
the escape rope.

4
02
On ground, each crewmember must help passengers, and direct them away from the aircraft.
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 10/26

à
Tr
CCOM B 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW-ASSIGNED AREAS FOR EVACUATION

Applicable to: ALL
CABIN CREW ASSIGNED JUMPSEAT

ASSIGNED JUMPSEAT ASSIGNED AREA
DESIGNATION AND DOOR
29
1 PURSER DOORS 1 (LH/RH) FWD INBOARD FWD/MID
2:
1 CABIN CREW DOORS 2 (LH/RH) FWD/MID FWD/MID
41
1 CABIN CREW DOORS 3 (RH/LH) AFT/MID MID/AFT
2
1 CABIN CREW DOOR 4 LH AFT LH MID/AFT
20
1 CABIN CREW DOOR 4 RH AFT RH MID/AFT
04/
9/
Note: These procedures are established for the minimum required number of 5 cabin crews.
-2
For customized seating configurations of 200 passenger seats or less, the minimum
9-
required cabin crew can be reduced to 4 (ORO.CC.100).
y2
When the minimum required cabin crew is reduced to 4, occupancy of AFT RH seat is not
required. àM
Tr
However, one cabin crew must be seated on the center swivel cabin attendant seat (if
ạm
installed).
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 11/26

à
Tr
CCOM C 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
A321
EMERGENCY PASSENGER DOOR OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
CC
FRAME ASSIST HANDLE....................................................................................................... GRASP
29
CC
2:
SLIDE ARMED.........................................................................................................................CHECK
41
2
CC
20
OUTSIDE CONDITIONS............................................................................................... CHECK SAFE
04/
9/
Use the door window to ensure that slide deployment area is clear of:
-2
‐ Fire
9-
‐ Smoke
y2
‐ Obstacle
àM
 If outside conditions are safe:
Tr
ạm
CC
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE......................................RAPIDLY LIFT FULLY UP AND RELEASE
Ph
For doors 1 and 4 , the door unlocks then moves up . Then the door opens automatically and
9
locks in the open position.

:2
12
For doors 2 and 3, the door unlocks, moves up and remains in that position for 3 s, to allow
4
the slide located in the fuselage to deploy. Then the door opens automatically and locks in
02
/2
the open position.

04
9/
WARNING When the door is in the "ARMED" mode, the "Cabin Pressure Warning Light"
-2
does not illuminate to indicate cabin differential pressure.

9-
Indications of cabin differential pressure may be:

y2
‐ Resistance in the Door Control Handle when it is being lifted to the open
àM
position, using normal force, and/or

Tr
‐ A Hissing noise around the immediate door area,

ạm
Ph
If circumstances permit, fully lower the door control handle to the closed
position. Notify the flight crew immediately.
29
WARNING Do not attempt to hold the door closed when the automatic door opening has
:
12
been initiated.
4
02
 If the door power assist fails the door will not open automatically:
/2
04
CC
9/
DOOR ......................................................................................................... PUSH TO OPEN

-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 12/26

à
Tr
CCOM D→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
A321
EMERGENCY PASSENGER DOOR OPERATION (Cont'd)

CC
GUST LOCK...................................................................................................CHECK ENGAGED
CC
SLIDE DEPLOYED AND INFLATED.................................................................. VISUAL CHECK
29
 If the slide is not inflated:
2:
41
Note: The Cabin Crew must pull the red manual inflation handle if the slide is not
2
20
inflated but is fully deployed.
4/
0
CC
9/
-2
RED, MANUAL INFLATION HANDLE........................................................................... PULL
9-
For doors 1 and 4, this red, manual inflation handle is located on the right side of the gird
y2
bar.
àM
For doors 2 and 3, this red, manual inflation handle is located on the right side of the
Tr
door frame.
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 13/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←D 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN PREPARATION FOR PLANNED ON GROUND EVACUATION

Applicable to: ALL
CAPTAIN .................................................................................................................. BRIEF PURSER

1. Nature of the emergency and intentions
29
2. Time available to prepare the cabin
2:
41
Note: Synchronize watches for time management
2
20
3. The signal to brace
04/
4. Signal to remain seated (if an evacuation is not required)
9/
-2
5. Special instructions
9-
PURSER
y2
CAPTAIN'S BRIEFING ............................................................................................ACKNOWLEDGE
àM
PURSER
Tr
ALL CABIN CREWMEMBERS.................................................................................................. BRIEF

ạm
ALL CC
Ph
DEMONSTRATION POSITIONS............................................................................................... TAKE

PURSER
9
:2
EMERGENCY ANNOUNCEMENT..................................................................................... PERFORM

412
Note: When reading the announcement, the Purser should pause at key points in order to allow
02
the cabin crewmembers time to demonstrate, and check passenger compliance.

/2
04
The emergency announcement contains the following instructions:

9/
-2
‐ Brace positions
9-
‐ The location of exits

y2
‐ Removal of sharp objects and high heels shoes

àM
‐ Review of the safety information card

Tr
‐ Passenger assistance, ABPs.

ạm
ALL CC
Ph
DEMONSTRATION.............................................................................................................PERFORM
29
‐ Demonstrate the instructions to the passengers as it is being read

:
12
‐ Use the safety information card to illustrate the information

4
02
ALL CC
/2
CABIN.................................................................................................................................... SECURE
04
In addition, the cabin crew must :

9/
-2
‐ Remove all service equipment ( cups, pillows, headsets etc..) from the cabin
-

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 14/26

à
Tr
CCOM E→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN PREPARATION FOR PLANNED ON GROUND EVACUATION (Cont'd)

‐ Secure all galleys (trolleys and containers stowed and latched)
‐ Switch off galley power
‐ Lock all lavatory doors.
ALL CC
29
PASSENGERS .................................................................................................. BRIEF AND ASSIST
2:
41
‐ Move and re-seat passengers as required.
2
20
‐ Brief passengers assisting UMs , elderly and PRMs.
04/
ALL CC
9/
-2
ABPs SEATED AT EXIT............................................................................................................BRIEF
9-
The Able Bodied Passengers (ABPs) seated at the exit will assist the cabin crewmembers during
y2
the evacuation.
ALL CC
àM
Tr
SLIDERAFT IN ARMED POSITION........................................................................................ CHECK

ạm
Ensure that the area around the exits is free from all obstructions.
Ph
ALL CC
CABIN .....................................................................................................................CHECK SECURE
9
:2
ALL CC
12
CABIN SECURE COMPLETED.............................................................................INFORM PURSER

4
02
ALL CC
/2
DESIGNATED CREW SEAT........................................................... TAKE AND SECURE HARNESS

04
9/
PURSER
-2
CABIN READY ..................................................................................................... INFORM CAPTAIN

9-
PURSER
y2
DESIGNATED CREW SEAT .......................................................... TAKE AND SECURE HARNESS

àM
ALL CC
Tr
SILENT REVIEW................................................................................................................ PERFORM

ạm
Ph
Review evacuation commands, duties and responsibilities.

ALL CC
29
BRACE POSITION.................................................................... ADOPT ON CAPTAIN'S COMMAND

:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 15/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←E 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
A321
ON GROUND EVACUATION
Applicable to: ALL
CC
EVACUATION ORDER...................................................................................................... RECEIVED
29
Note: The order to evacuate is usually given by the flight crew, however, in a catastrophic
2:
41
situation any cabin crewmember may initiate an evacuation.
2
20
CC
4/
"EVACUATE, EVACUATE, OPEN SEAT BELTS "................................................................. SHOUT
0
9/
CC
-2
"LEAVE BAGGAGE, REMOVE HIGH HEELS, COME THIS WAY"........................................ SHOUT
9-
CC
y2
FRAME ASSIST HANDLE....................................................................................................... GRASP
àM
CC
Tr
SLIDE ARMED.........................................................................................................................CHECK
ạm
Ph
CC
OUTSIDE CONDITIONS ..............................................................................................CHECK SAFE
9
Check through the observation window to ensure that the slide deployment area is clear of:
:2
12
‐ Fire
4
02
‐ Smoke
/2
04
‐ Obstacles
9/
-2
 If outside conditions are unsafe:

9-
CC
y2
PASSENGERS TO THE MOST APPROPRIATE USABLE EXIT............................... REDIRECT

àM
CC
Tr
EXIT ............................................................................................................................. PROTECT

ạm
Ph
 If outside conditions are safe:

CC
29
DOOR WITH SLIDE ARMED.............................................................................................. OPEN

:
12
 If the door power assist fails the door will not open automatically;
4
02
CC
/2
DOOR ......................................................................................................... PUSH TO OPEN

04
9/
Note: Manual opening will require a physical effort.

-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 16/26

à
Tr
CCOM F→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
A321
ON GROUND EVACUATION (Cont'd)

CC
GUST LOCK............................................................................................ CHECK ENGAGED
CC
SLIDE DEPLOYED AND INFLATED.................................................................. VISUAL CHECK
29
2:
 If the slide does not inflate automatically:
41
CC
2
20
RED, MANUAL INFLATION HANDLE........................................................................... PULL
4/
The Cabin Crew must only pull the red manual inflation handle if the slide is not inflated but
0
9/
is fully deployed.
-2
The red manual inflation handle is located on the right-hand side of the girt bar extension.
9-
For the emergency exit: the red manual inflation handle is located on the right-hand side of
y2
the upper door frame. àM
CC
Tr
ASSIST SPACE....................................................................................................................TAKE
ạm
Ph
CC
“COME THIS WAY, JUMP, JUMP”...................................................................................SHOUT
9
:2
Note: According to the slide configuration, cabin crewmembers should instruct passengers
12
to jump 1 by 1.
4
02
CC
/2
PASSENGER EVACUATION.......................................................................................EXPEDITE
04
9/
Note: In windy conditions, a slide/slideraft used for evacuation may not touch the ground.
-2
However the weight of evacuees and/or at least one person holding the slide/slideraft
9-
toe end can maintain the slide/slideraft on the ground.

y2
àM
 If the slide becomes not usable:

Tr
CC
ạm
PASSENGER EVACUATION........................................................................................ STOP

Ph
CC
PASSENGER TO THE MOST APPROPRIATE USABLE EXIT........................... REDIRECT
29
CC
:
12
ASSIGNED AREA .........................................................................CHECK FULLY EVACUATED

4
02
CC
/2
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT................................................................................................ TAKE

04
9/
Time permitting, each cabin crewmember takes their designated safety and survival equipment
-2
before leaving the aircraft.

-

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 17/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
ON GROUND EVACUATION (Cont'd)

CC
CABIN CREW.............................................................................................................EVACUATE
CC
PASSENGERS AWAY FROM THE AIRCRAFT.............................................................. DIRECT
29
2:
CC
41
ON GROUND ............................................................CONDUCT POST EVACUATION DUTIES
2
20
END OF PROC
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 18/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←F 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN PREPARATION FOR DITCHING

Applicable to: ALL
CAPTAIN....................................................................................................................BRIEF PURSER
1. Nature of the emergency
29
2. Intentions
2:
41
3. Time available to prepare the cabin
2
20
Note: Synchronize watches, to assist with time management
4/
0
4. Special instructions
9/
-2
PURSER
9-
CAPTAIN'S BRIEFING.............................................................................................ACKNOWLEDGE
y2
PURSER
àM
ALL CABIN CREWMEMBERS.................................................................................................. BRIEF
Tr
CC
ạm
DEMONSTRATION POSITIONS................................................................................................ TAKE

Ph
Cabin crew must take their own lifevests. The cabin crew will don their lifevests during the
demonstration.
9
:2
12
PURSER
EMERGENCY ANNOUNCEMENT..................................................................................... PERFORM
4
02
The Purser will brief passengers using the PA.

/2
04
Note: When reading the announcement, the Purser should pause at key points in order to allow
9/
-2
the cabin crew time to demonstrate, and check passenger compliance.

9-
The emergency announcement contains the following information:

y2
‐ Lifevests (location and use)

àM
‐ Brace position
Tr
‐ The location of exits

ạm
‐ Removal of sharp objects and high heels shoes

Ph
‐ Review of the safety information card

‐ Passenger assistance, able bodied passengers, and assistance in fitting infant lifevests.
29
CC
:
12
DEMONSTRATION.............................................................................................................PERFORM
4
02
Demonstrate the information to the passengers as per emergency announcement.

/2
04
CC
9/
CABIN.................................................................................................................................... SECURE
-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 19/26

à
Tr
CCOM G→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN PREPARATION FOR DITCHING (Cont'd)
The cabin secure must also include the following :

‐ Ensure that all passengers are wearing their lifevest
‐ Secure all galleys (trolleys and containers stowed and latched)
‐ Switch off galley power
29
2:
‐ Lock all lavatory doors.
41
CC
2
20
PASSENGERS .................................................................................................. BRIEF AND ASSIST
04/
9/
‐ Move and re-seat passengers as required
-2
‐ Brief passengers assisting UMs, elderly, PRMs and infants.
9-
CC
y2
ABPs...........................................................................................................................................BRIEF
àM
The Able Bodied Passengers (ABPs) must be seated at the exit to assist the cabin crewmembers
Tr
during the evacuation.

ạm
CC
Ph
SLIDERAFT IN ARMED POSITION AT DOORS 1 AND 4..................................................... CHECK

9
:2
12
CC
SURVIVAL KIT FROM STOWAGE...................................................................................... REMOVE
4
02
The survival kit must be removed from the overhead stowage and attached to the slideraft using the
/2
04
white lanyard.
9/
-2
CC
ESCAPE SLIDE AT DOORS 2 AND 3.................................................................................. DISARM
9-
y2
Note: 1. Door 2 and 3 escape slides cannot be disconnected from the aircraft.
àM
2. These exits can be used as a launching station for portable rafts.

Tr
ạm
Ph
CC
CABIN .....................................................................................................................CHECK SECURE
29
CC
:
CABIN SECURE COMPLETED.............................................................................INFORM PURSER

4 12
CC
02

/2
04
PURSER
9/
CABIN READY...................................................................................................... INFORM CAPTAIN

-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 20/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←G→ 11 APR 23

ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN PREPARATION FOR DITCHING (Cont'd)

PURSER
all CCs
SILENT REVIEW................................................................................................................ PERFORM
29
Review evacuation commands, actions, and responsibilities.
2:
41
all CCs
2
BRACE POSITION.................................................................... ADOPT ON CAPTAIN'S COMMAND
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 21/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←G 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
A321
EVACUATION ON WATER
Applicable to: ALL
When evacuation is initiated, each cabin crewmember must proceed as follow:

CC
29
“ EVACUATE, EVACUATE, OPEN SEAT BELTS, LIFEVEST ON”........................................ SHOUT
2:
41
CC
2
“ LEAVE BAGGAGE, REMOVE HIGH HEELS, COME THIS WAY”.......................................ORDER
20
4/
CC
0
9/
DOOR FRAME ASSIST HANDLE........................................................................................... GRASP
-2
CC
9-
OUTSIDE CONDITIONS ..............................................................................................CHECK SAFE
y2
 If outside conditions are not safe: àM
CC
Tr
PASSENGERS TO THE MOST APPROPRIATE USABLE EXIT............................... REDIRECT

ạm
EXIT.............................................................................................................................. PROTECT
Ph
 If DOOR 1 and 4 outside conditions are safe:

9
:2
CC
12
DOOR WITH SLIDERAFT ARMED.....................................................................................OPEN

4
02
 If door power assist fails:

/2
04
CC
9/
DOOR ......................................................................................................... PUSH TO OPEN

-2
CC
9-
GUST LOCK ................................................................................................. CHECK ENGAGED

y2
CC
àM
RED, MANUAL INFLATION HANDLE..................................................................................PULL

Tr
Do not wait for automatic inflation of the slideraft, however, make sure that the door is fully
ạm
open.
Ph
CC
SLIDERAFT DEPLOYED AND INFLATED....................................................................... CHECK
:29
12
 If the water level is close to the door sill

4
02
CC
/2
SLIDERAFT..........................................................LEAVE ATTACHED TO THE DOOR SILL

04

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 22/26

à
Tr
CCOM H→ 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
A321
EVACUATION ON WATER (Cont'd)

 If the water level is far away from the door sill
CC
SLIDERAFT.............................................................DISCONNECT FROM THE DOOR SILL
The slideraft remains attached to the aircraft with the mooring line.
29
2:
CC
41
MOORING LINE............................................................................................................ HOLD
2
20
To keep the slideraft close to the exit.
04/
CC
9/
-2
9-
CC
y2
CC
àM
Tr
“COME THIS WAY"...........................................................................................................SHOUT

ạm
CC
Ph
“GO,GO, INFLATE LIFEVEST"......................................................................................... SHOUT

Note: 1. According to the slideraft configuration ,cabin crewmembers should instruct
9
:2
passengers to board 1 by 1
12
2. Instruct passengers to "inflate lifevests" when leaving the aircraft.

4
02
/2
CC
04
NUMBER OF PASSENGERS BOARDING THE SLIDERAFT..................................... MONITOR

9/
Ensure that the number of passengers does not exceed the overload capacity of the slideraft.
-2
CC
9-

y2
àM
CC
Tr
ạm
Ph

CC
29
LIFEVEST........................................................................................................................INFLATE
:
12
CC
4
02
SLIDERAFT....................................................................................................................... BOARD
/2
 If the slideraft is attached to the door sill

04
9/
CC
-2
SLIDERAFT......................................................................................................DISCONNECT
-

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 23/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321

CC
MOORING LINE............................................................................................................ RELEASE
CC
SURVIVAL KIT.............................................................................................................RETRIEVE
29
2:
 If DOOR 2 and 3 outside conditions are safe:
41
CC
2
20
ESCAPE SLIDE............................................................................................ CHECK DISARMED
04/
CC
9/
DOOR ................................................................................................................................. OPEN
-2
 If door power assist fails:
9-
y2
CC
àM
DOOR ......................................................................................................... PUSH TO OPEN
Tr
Note: If applicable, doors 3 can be used as a launching station for portables rafts.
ạm
Ph
CC
GUST LOCK ................................................................................................. CHECK ENGAGED
9
CC
:2
4 12
CC
02
/2
04
CC
9/
“COME THIS WAY"...........................................................................................................SHOUT

-2
9-
CC
"INFLATE AND HOLD LIFEVEST"................................................................................... SHOUT
y2
àM
CC
Tr
"JUMP, JUMP"...................................................................................................................SHOUT
ạm
CC
Ph

CC
29

:
12
4
02

/2
04
CC
9/
LIFEVEST........................................................................................................................INFLATE
-2
CC
-

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 24/26

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321

CREWMEMBER......................................................................................................... EVACUATE
 If the aircraft is equipped with portable raft:
Locate and open the portable raft compartment; remove the raft pack
29
Carry the raft pack to the exit.
2:
Place it on the floor near exit.
41
2
Firmly tie the end of the mooring line to a fixed part of the aircraft (a passenger seat, or one of
20
the frame assist handles).
4/
0
9/
Throw the portable raft out of the aircraft the raft will inflate automatically.
-2
 If the portable raft does not inflate automatically
9-
Pull on the mooring line to inflate the portable raft.
y2
Assist passengers to board the raft. àM
Tr
Note: Passengers should be distributed evenly to prevent the raft from capsizing.
ạm
When all passengers have boarded the portable raft, the crewmember must board.
Ph
Separate the portable raft from the aircraft by cutting the mooring line.
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 25/26

à
Tr
CCOM ←H 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-030 P 26/26

à
Tr
CCOM 11 APR 23
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY COCKPIT EVACUATION
A321
COCKPIT EVACUATION THROUGH WINDOW

Applicable to: ALL
OPENING THE SLIDING WINDOW

CC
29
HANDLE.......................................................................................PUSH DOWN AND PULL BACK
2:
41
Pulling the handle backwards, opens the sliding window.
2
20
COCKPIT EVACUATION WITH ESCAPE ROPE
04/
CC
9/
-2
ESCAPE ROPE STOWAGE.................................................................................................. OPEN
The escape rope stowage is located above the sliding window, on either side of the overhead
9-
y2
panel.
CC àM
Tr
ESCAPE ROPE................................................................................................................. UNROLL
ạm
Unroll the escape rope until the red flag appears, and throw it through the window.
Ph
CC
SEAT.................................................................................................................................STEP ON
9
:2
CC
12
ESCAPE ROPE................................................................................................................... GRASP

4
02
Grasp the escape rope firmly with both hands, and slide down along the rope.
/2
04
9/
COCKPIT EVACUATION THROUGH COCKPIT DOOR

-2
9-
Applicable to: ALL

y2
CC
àM
QUICK RELEASE PINS.......................................... PULL TOWARDS THE CENTER OF THE FLAP

Tr
ạm
CC
ESCAPE PANEL.......................................................................................... KICK TOWARDS CABIN
Ph
CC
THROUGH ESCAPE PANEL............................................................................................EVACUATE
:29
12
CC
4
ON HANDS AND KNEES ......................................................................... MOVE TOWARDS CABIN

02
/2
Refer to Cockpit door Refer to 02-060 Cockpit Door

04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-040 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A to B 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
EMERGENCY COCKPIT EVACUATION
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-040 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
DEPRESSURIZATION
A321
ABNORMAL CABIN ALTITUDE

Applicable to: ALL
Immediately after the Flight Crew informs the Cabin Crew of possible abnormal cabin pressure the
Cabin Crew must apply the following abnormal cabin altitude procedure :
29
CC
2:
ACTIVITIES.................................................................................................................................STOP
41
2
CC
20
DESIGNATED CABIN CREW SEAT............................................... TAKE AND SECURE HARNESS
04/
9/
PURSER
-2
CABIN TO COCKPIT COMMUNICATION.......................................................................... MAINTAIN
9-
 If cabin depressurization occurs :
y2
CC àM
CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION........................................................................................... APPLY
Tr
ạm
Note: The Cabin Crew must apply the CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION procedure upon any
Ph
indication of CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION .

Refer to 14-050 CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION
9
END OF PROC
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-050 P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
DEPRESSURIZATION
A321
DEPRESSURIZATION WARNINGS
Applicable to: ALL
A loss of pressurization can be slow - in the case of a small air leak - while a rapid or explosive
depressurization occurs suddenly within a few seconds.
29
In the case of excessive cabin pressure/depressurization, indications in the cabin alert the cabin
2:
crew to a pressurization malfunction.
41
2
CABIN INDICATIONS
20
4/
When the cabin altitude reaches >11 300 ft the following will happen:
0
9/
‐ The cabin lighting comes on 100 % or (CAM assigned value)
-2
‐ The EXIT signs will come on
9-
‐ The FASTEN SEAT BELT and NO SMOKING signs or NO PED  come on
y2
Note: àM
In the case of depressurization, the lavatory RETURN TO SEAT signs do not come on.
Tr
 If the flight crew does not communicate with the cabin crew:
ạm
PURSER
Ph
CABIN/COCKPIT COMMUNICATION....................................................................ESTABLISH
9
When the cabin altitude reaches 14 000 ft the following will happen:
:2
12
‐ The oxygen masks will drop down

4
‐ The PA volume increases

02
/2
‐ The emergency depressurization messages will be broadcast (if installed).

04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-050 P 2/4

à
Tr
CCOM B 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
DEPRESSURIZATION
A321
CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION
Applicable to: ALL
 If oxygen masks drop:

CC
29
NEAREST OXYGEN MASK.................................................................................................. DON
2:
41
CC
2
NEAREST SEAT..........................................................................................................SIT DOWN
20
4/
CC
0
9/
SEATBELT....................................................................................................................... FASTEN
-2
WARNING Do not remove your oxygen mask until it is safe to do so. Removing your
9-
oxygen mask during a depressurization may lead to a total incapacitation
y2
caused by hypoxia Tr
àM
 If no seat is available:
ạm
CC
Ph
FIXED OBJECT................................................................................GRASP AND HOLD ON

When no seat is available, the cabin crew should wedge themselves between passengers
9
:2
and hold on.

12
 If the flight crew does not communicate with the cabin crew:
4
02
/2
CC
04
CABIN/COCKPIT COMMUNICATION....................................................................... ESTABLISH

9/
The cabin crew should, as soon as possible, inform the flight crew of the situation by
-2
appropriate means and confirm that the flight crew wear their oxygen masks.
9-
 If no reply from the cockpit:

y2
àM
CC
CABIN CREW............................................................... EQUIP YOURSELF WITH OXYGEN
Tr
ạm
CC
Ph
CABIN CREW............................................................................................ ENTER COCKPIT

CC
29
CABIN CREW......................................... PROVIDE ASSISTANCE TO THE FLIGHT CREW

:
12
 If the flight crew communicates with the cabin crew:

4
02
CC
/2
04
"DON OXYGEN MASKS - FASTEN SEAT BELTS".......................... INSTRUCT PASSENGERS

9/

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-050 P 3/4

à
Tr
CCOM C→ 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
DEPRESSURIZATION
A321
CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION (Cont'd)

From your location, speak through your mask, or use gestures to demonstrate the donning of
masks.
CC
ANNOUNCEMENT...................................................................................... MAKE, IF POSSIBLE
29
2:
Although the bag does not inflate, oxygen is flowing to the mask.
41
Note: In the case of a cabin depressurization, the lavatory "return to seat" signs do not come
2
20
on. For passengers located in the lavatories, 2 masks will immediately drop down
4/
0
from the lavatory ceiling. Passengers should apply the mask over their nose and
9/
mouth.
-2
9-
 When notified by the flight crew (PA) that a safe flight level has been reached:
y2
CC
àM
CABIN CREW .................................................................TRANSFER TO PORTABLE OXYGEN
Tr
Note: To prevent crew incapacitation due to hypoxia, the cabin crew must transfer to
ạm
portable oxygen, and consider their post decompression oxygen needs. when
Ph
deciding to remove oxygen masks, the cabin crew must use good judgement and
must be alert to any sign of hypoxia.
9
:2
12
CC
FLIGHT CREW .................................................................................................................CHECK
4
02
The cabin crewmember nearest to the cockpit should check on the flight crew in case
/2
04
assistance is needed.
9/
-2
CC
PASSENGERS AND CABIN............................................................................................. CHECK
9-
y2
The cabin crew should check for passenger injuries and damage to the cabin.
àM
CC
FIRST AID AND OXYGEN ........................................................................ GIVE AS REQUIRED
Tr
ạm
PURSER
Ph
CABIN STATUS..............................................................................REPORT TO FLIGHT CREW

Report the nature of injuries and the cabin damage to the flight crew.
29
END OF PROC
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-050 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←C 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
TURBULENCE MANAGEMENT
A321
Applicable to: ALL
The following levels of turbulence can be encountered during a flight:

‐ Light turbulence
29
‐ Moderate turbulence
2:
41
‐ Severe turbulence.
2
20
The cabin crew should always use these terms when communicating turbulent conditions to the
4/
flight crew or other cabin crewmembers.
0
9/
The following table provides the definition and the cabin conditions associated with each of the
-2
three levels of turbulence.
9-
y2
LIGHT TURBULENCE MODERATE TURBULENCE SEVERE TURBULENCE
Light turbulence momentarily causes àM
Moderate turbulence, causes rapid Severe turbulence causes large abrupt
slight, rapid, and rhythmic bumpiness bumps or jolts. changes in the aircraft altitude and
Tr
without noticeable changes in the attitude.

ạm
aircraft altitude or attitude.

Ph
Cabin Conditions Cabin Conditions Cabin Conditions

• Liquids are shaking but are not • Liquids splashing out of cups • Items falling or lifting off the floor
9
:2
splashing out of cups • Trolleys difficult to manoeuvre • Loose items are tossed about the
12
• Trolleys can be maneuvered with • Difficult to walk in the cabin cabin

4
little difficulty • Difficult to stand without holding on • Impossible to walk

02
• Passengers may feel a slight strain to something • Passengers are forced violently
/2
04
against their seat belts. • Passengers feel definite strain against their seat belts
9/
against their seat belts.

-2
CABIN GUIDELINES
9-
y2
It is important that the cabin crew perform frequent cabin checks and correctly manage the
àM
galleys to ensure safety and reduce the probability of injuries.

Tr
Therefore, the cabin crew should:

ạm
‐ Check the cabin frequently and ensure that the cabin is kept tidy
Ph
‐ Minimize the amount of service equipment left on galley and bar (when installed) surfaces.
When items must remain available they should be placed inside draws that are easily
29
accessible
:
12
‐ Ensure that galleys are correctly secured and latched after each service/use
4
02
‐ Ensure that trolleys and equipment should be correctly stowed after use.
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-055 P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A 10 MAY 16
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW PROCEDURES

Applicable to: ALL
SECURING THE CABIN AND PASSENGER COMPLIANCE

The table below provides the cabin crew procedures in the case of turbulence.
29
2:
41
2
‐ Visually check that all passengers ‐ When the cabin crew are returning ‐ The cabin crew must not attempt
20
are seated with their seat belts to their crew seats, check that all to visually check passenger
4/
fastened and hand baggage is passengers are seated with their compliance
0
9/
stowed seat belts securely fastened and ‐ If trolleys are in the cabin, set the
-2
‐ Infants must be removed from hand baggage is stowed brakes on all trolleys that are in use
9-
bassinets and secured with an in the current location
Infants must be removed from
y2
infant seat belt (if applicable) on ‐ Place jugs/pots of hot beverages on
bassinets and secured with an
the guardians lap, or secured in an àM the floor
infant seat belt (if applicable) on
approved car seat ‐ The cabin crew must immediately
Tr
the guardians lap, or secured in an
‐ Give the "cabin secure" to the sit down. Take the nearest seat
approved car seat
ạm
Purser (including passenger seat ) and

Give the "cabin secure" to the Purser
Ph
‐ Purser informs the flight crew that fasten seatbelt/harness.

Purser informs the flight crew that the
the cabin is secure.
cabin is secure. WARNING Cabin crew
9
must not risk

:2
12
personal injury by
continuing service
4
02
during turbulent
/2
conditions. The
04
personal safety of
9/
-2
the cabin crew is

the priority
9-
y2
GALLEY AREAS
àM

Tr
ạm
‐ Ensure that trolleys and galley ‐ Ensure that trolleys and galley ‐ Set the brakes on all trolleys that
Ph
equipment that is not in use are equipment that is not in use are are in use in their current location
correctly stowed and secured. correctly stowed and secured ‐ Place jugs/pots of hot beverages on
‐ If the turbulence is expected for the floor
29
a long duration, stow and secure ‐ The cabin crew must immediately sit
:
12
galley items down. Fasten seat belt/harness.

4
‐ Cabin crewmembers working in the

02
WARNING Cabin crew

galley areas must take their seats
/2
must not risk

04
when the galley is secured.

personal injury by
9/
continuing service
-2
during turbulent
-

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-055 P 2/4

à
Tr
CCOM B→ 10 MAY 16
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW PROCEDURES (Cont'd)

conditions. The
personal safety of
the cabin crew is
the priority.
29
2:
412
20
ANTICIPATED TURBULENCE PROCEDURES
04/
9/
Applicable to: ALL
-2
When turbulence is anticipated the cabin crew will have a certain amount of time before the
9-
turbulence is encountered to secure the cabin and themselves.
y2
FLIGHT CREW PREFLIGHT àM
PURSER PREFLIGHT CABIN CREW PREFLIGHT
Tr
‐ Include as part of the pre-flight ‐ Inform all the cabin crew of any ‐ Acknowledge information from
ạm
briefing with Purser, expected areas turbulence information received Purser.

Ph
of turbulence during the flight. from the flight crew during the
pre-flight briefing
9
:2
FLIGHT CREW IN-FLIGHT PURSER IN-FLIGHT CABIN CREW IN-FLIGHT

12
‐ When turbulence is expected during ‐ When the service is interrupted as ‐ Once the cabin crew are advised
4
02
the flight, the flight crew must advise a precautionary measure, a PA of anticipated turbulence, the cabin
/2
the cabin crew how much time is announcement should be made to crew should prioritize their duties
04
available to secure the cabin, the the passengers explaining WHY the based on the time available before
9/
level and expected duration of the service is interrupted the turbulence encounter.
-2
turbulence encounter ‐ Ensure that all passengers and ‐ Stow and secure large items first,
9-
‐ The captain or first officer will cabin crew are secured such as, trolleys
y2
make a PA announcement to the ‐ Inform the flight crew that all ‐ Remove bottles from the cabin and
àM
passengers instructing them to passengers and cabin crew are galley surfaces. Throw away any
return to their seats and fasten their secured. hot liquids
Tr
seatbelts. ‐ Secure the cabin, ensure that the

ạm
lavatories are unoccupied

Ph
‐ Secure the galleys

‐ The cabin crew should then secure
themselves
29
:
‐ Inform Purser that passengers and

12
cabin crew are secured.

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-055 P 3/4

à
Tr
CCOM ← B to C 10 MAY 16
ạm
Ph
A321
UNANTICIPATED TURBULENCE PROCEDURES

Applicable to: ALL
FLIGHT CREW PURSER CABIN CREW

‐ Switch on the Fasten Seatbelt signs ‐ The Purser must Immediately ‐ The cabin crew must immediately
29
and make a PA to passengers and sit down. Take the nearest seat sit down. Take the nearest seat
2:
cabin crew to "Fasten Seatbelts (including passenger seat) and (including passenger seat) and
41
Immediately". fasten seatbelt and harness. fasten seatbelt/harness.
2
20
WARNING Cabin crew
4/
0
must not risk
9/
personal injury by
-2
continuing service
9-
during turbulent
y2
conditions. The
àM personal safety of
the cabin crew is
Tr
the priority.
ạm
Ph
POST TURBULENCE DUTIES

9
:2
12
Applicable to: ALL

4
02
FLIGHT CREW PURSER CABIN CREW

/2
04
‐ Advise cabin crew when it is safe to ‐ Resume duties ‐ Check for passenger injuries, give
9/
resume duties. ‐ Report any passenger injuries first aid if necessary

-2
and/or cabin damage to the flight ‐ Calm and reassure passengers

9-
crew. ‐ Check for cabin damage

y2
‐ Report to Purser any passenger

àM
injuries and/or cabin damage.

Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-055 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM D to E 10 MAY 16
ạm
Ph
MISCELLANEOUS
A321
FLIGHT CREW INCAPACITATION

Applicable to: ALL
 When the remaining flight crew requests help from the cabin crew:
CC
29
NEAREST CABIN CREWMEMBER................................ IMMEDIATELY GO TO THE COCKPIT
2:
41
CC
2
FLIGHT CREW SHOULDER HARNESS AND LAP BELT......................... TIGHTEN AND LOCK
20
4/
Ensure that the incapacitated flight crew does not interfere with the controls of the aircraft.
0
9/
CC
-2
FLIGHT CREW SEAT.................................................................. MOVE THE SEAT FULLY AFT
9-
CC
y2
FLIGHT CREW SEAT BACK.............................................................................FULLY RECLINE
àM
CC
Tr
ASSISTANCE/FIRST AID.............................................................................................. PROVIDE

ạm
Ph
CC
INSTRUCTIONS FROM THE REMAINING FLIGHT CREW..........................................FOLLOW
9
Get instruction from the remaining flight crew such as:

:2
12
‐ Move the incapacitated flight crew to the cabin or stay in the cockpit to take care of him/her
4
‐ Request medical assistance from a medically qualified passenger

02
/2
‐ Request assistance from an airline pilot qualified on type , to replace the incapacitated flight
04
crewmember.
9/
-2
END OF PROC
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-070 P 1/8

à
Tr
CCOM A 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
MISCELLANEOUS
A321
BOMB ON BOARD
Applicable to: ALL
CABIN PROCEDURES
If a suspect device is found in the cabin:
29
2:
WARNING do not cut or disconnect any wires and do not open or attempt to gain entry to
41
internal components of a closed or concealed suspect device. any attempt may
2
20
result in an explosion. booby-trapped closed devices have been used on aircraft
4/
in the past.
0
9/
-2
WARNING alternate locations must not be used without consulting with an aviation
explosives security specialist. never take a suspect device to the flight deck.
9-
y2
CAUTION The least risk bomb location for aircraft structure and systems is center of the
àM
RH aft cabin door.
Tr
ạm
PURSER
EOD PERSONNEL ON BOARD..........................................................................................CHECK
Ph
Announce : "Is there any EOD personnel on board ?". By using the initials, only persons familiar
9
with EOD (Explosive Ordnance Disposal) will be made aware of the problem.
:2
12
CC OR EOD
4
BOMB................................................................................................................................................
02
...........DO NOT OPEN, DO NOT CUT WIRES, SECURE AGAINST SLIPPING, AVOID SHOCKS
/2
04
Secure in the attitude found and do not lift before having checked for an anti-lift ignition device.
9/
-2
CC
PASSENGERS.................................................................................... LEAD AWAY FROM BOMB
9-
y2
Move passengers at least 4 seat rows away the bomb location. On full flights, it may be
àM
necessary to double up passengers to achieve standoff from the suspect device.

Tr
Passengers near the bomb should protect their heads with pillows, blankets.
ạm
All passengers must remain seated with seatbelts on and, if possible, head below the top of the
Ph
head rest. Seat backs and tray tables must be in their full upright position.
Service items may need to be collected in order to secure tray tables.
29
CC
:
12
CREW REST AREAS................................................................................................... EVACUATE

4
02
For aircraft equipped with crew rest areas (FCRC, LDMCR, BCRC).
/2
CC
04
PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICES....................................................................... SWITCH OFF

9/
-2
The cabin crews must command passengers to switch off all portable electronic devices.
-

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-070 P 2/8

à
Tr
CCOM B→ 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
MISCELLANEOUS
A321
BOMB ON BOARD (Cont'd)

CC or EOD
BOMB............................................................................................CHECK NO ANTI-LIFT DEVICE
To check for an anti-lift switch or lever, slide a string or stiff card (such as the emergency
information card) under the bomb, without disturbing the bomb.
29
If the string or card cannot be slipped under the bomb, it may indicate that an anti-lift switch or
2:
41
lever is present and that the bomb cannot be moved.
2
If a card is used and can be slid under the bomb, leave it under the bomb and move together
20
with the bomb.
4/
0
If it is not possible to move the bomb, then it should be surrounded with a single thin sheet of
9/
-2
plastic (e.g. trash bag), then with wetted materials, and other blast attenuation materials such as
seat cushions and soft carry-on baggage. Move personnel as far away from the bomb location as
9-
y2
possible.
CC àM
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENTS......................................................................REMOVE AND STOW
Tr
ạm
Emergency equipments (PBE, fire extinguisher, ...) located close to the LRBL must be removed
Ph
and stowed in alternate location.

CC
9
GALLEY/IFE POWER................................................................................................................OFF
:2
12
All galley and IFE equipments located close to the LRBL must be switched off.
4
02
 If the bomb can be moved :

/2
04
CC
9/
RH AFT CABIN DOOR SLIDE.................................................................................... DISARM

-2
CC
9-
LEAST RISK BOMB LOCATION (LRBL)................................................................. PREPARE

y2
Build up a platform of solid baggage against the door up to about 25 cm (10 in) below the
àM
middle of the door.

Tr
On top of this, build up at least 25 cm (10 in) of wetted material such as blankets and pillows.
ạm
Place a single thin sheet of plastic (e.g. trash bag) on top of the wetted materials. This
Ph
prevents any possible short circuit.

29
CAUTION DO NOT OMIT THE PLASTIC SHEETS, AS THE SUSPECT DEVICE

:
12
COULD GET WET AND POSSIBLY SHORT CIRCUIT ELECTRONIC

4
COMPONENTS CAUSING INADVERTENT DEVICE ACTIVATION.

02
/2
CC
04
BOMB INDICATION LINE.........................................................................................POSITION

9/
-2

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-070 P 3/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←B→ 02 MAR 20

ạm
Ph
MISCELLANEOUS
A321
Note: A bomb location indicator line is a 6- to 8- foot (1.8 to 2.4 m) line (e.g. neckties,
headset cord, or belts connected together) preferably of contrasting color, that
helps the responding bomb squad find the precise location of the suspect device
within the LRBL stack once constructed.
29
2:
Position the bomb indication line from the location on the platform where you will place the
41
suspect device, EXTENDING outward into the aisle.
2
20
4/
CC or EOD
0
BOMB..............................................................................................................MOVE TO LRBL
9/
-2
Carefully carry in the attitude found and place on top of the wetted materials in the same
9-
attitude and as close to the door structure as possible.
y2
CAUTION Ensure that the suspect device, when placed on the stack against the door,
àM
is above the slide pack but not against the door handle, and if possible,
Tr
avoid placement in the view port.

ạm
Ph
CC or EOD
LEAST RISK BOMB LOCATION (LRBL)...............................................................COMPLETE
9
Place an additional single thin sheet of plastic over the bomb.

:2
12
CAUTION DO NOT OMIT THE PLASTIC SHEETS, AS THE SUSPECT DEVICE

4
02
COULD GET WET AND POSSIBLY SHORT CIRCUIT ELECTRONIC

/2
COMPONENTS CAUSING INADVERTENT DEVICE ACTIVATION.

04
9/
Build up at 25 cm (10 in) of wetted material around the sides and on top of the bomb.
-2
DO NOT PLACE ANYTHING BETWEEN THE BOMB AND THE DOOR, AND MINIMIZE
9-
AIRSPACE AROUND THE BOMB.

y2
The idea is to build up a protective surrounding of the bomb so that the explosive force is
àM
directed in the only unprotected area into the door structure.

Tr
Fill the area around the bomb with seat cushions and other soft materials such as hand
ạm
luggage (saturated with water or any other nonflammable liquid) up to the cabin ceiling,
Ph
compressing as much as possible. Secure the LRBL stack in place using belt, ties or other
appropriate materials. The more material stacked around the bomb, the less the damage will
29
be.
:
12
USE ONLY SOFT MATERIAL. AVOID USING MATERIALS CONTAINING ANY

4
INFLAMMABLE LIQUID AND ANY METAL OBJECTS WHICH COULD BECOME

02
/2
DANGEROUS PROJECTILES.
04

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-070 P 4/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
MISCELLANEOUS
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
CC
Tr
PASSENGERS.................................................................................................. MOVE/ADVISE
ạm
Move passengers to at least 4 seat rows away from the least risk bomb location (RH aft
Ph
cabin door). On full flights, it may be necessary to double up passengers to achieve standoff
from the suspect device.
29
Passengers near the bomb should protect their heads with pillows, blankets.
:
12
All passengers must remain seated with seatbelts on and, if possible, head below the top of
4
the head rest. Seat backs and tray tables must be in their full upright position.
02
/2
CC
04
COCKPIT CREW ............................................................................................................... NOTIFY

9/
-2
Cabin crew notify the flight crew that the bomb is secured at the LRBL.
-

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-070 P 5/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
MISCELLANEOUS
A321

CC
EVACUATION/DISEMBARKATION.................................................................................EXECUTE
Evacuate through normal and emergency exits on the opposite side of the "bomb" location. Do
not use the door just opposite the "bomb".
29
Use all available airport facilities to disembark without delay.
2:
41
2
20
SINGLE BLADE LAVATORY DOOR EMERGENCY OPERATION
04/
Applicable to: ALL
9/
-2
In case of an emergency, the single-blade lavatory door may be unlocked from the cabin.
9-
CC
y2
LAVATORY SIGN COVER........................................................................................................... LIFT
àM
The spring-loaded lavatory sign cover is located above the door's VACANT/OCCUPIED indicator.
Tr
ạm
CC
Ph
KNOB.................................................................................................................SLIDE TO THE SIDE

Sliding the knob to the side will unlock the lavatory door, and the indicator will show: "VACANT".
9
:2
CC
12
LAVATORY DOOR.......................................................................................................... PULL OPEN

4
02
 If the lavatory door still does not open:

/2
04
CC
9/
UPPER AND LOWER OUTSIDE LATCHES OF THE DOOR........................................ UNLOCK

-2
CC
9-
LAVATORY DOOR .................................................................................................. PULL OPEN

y2
WARNING After releasing the lavatory door:

àM
Hold on to the lavatory door to prevent injury .

Tr
ạm
END OF PROC
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-070 P 6/8

à
Tr
CCOM ← B to C 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
MISCELLANEOUS
A321
BI-FOLDING LAVATORY DOOR EMERGENCY OPERATION

Applicable to: ALL
In case of an emergency, the bi-folding lavatory door may be unlocked from the cabin.
CC
29
LAVATORY SIGN COVER........................................................................................................... LIFT
2:
41
The spring-loaded lavatory sign cover is located above the door's VACANT/OCCUPIED indicator.
2
20
CC
4/
KNOB.................................................................................................................SLIDE TO THE SIDE
0
9/
Sliding the knob to the side will unlock the lavatory door, and the indicator will show: "VACANT".
-2
CC
9-
LAVATORY DOOR.......................................................................................................... PULL OPEN
y2
 If the lavatory door still does not open: Tr
àM
CC
UPPER AND LOWER OUTSIDE LATCHES OF THE DOOR........................................ UNLOCK
ạm
Ph
CC
LAVATORY DOOR .................................................................................................. PULL OPEN
9
:2
WARNING After releasing the lavatory door:

12
Hold on to the lavatory door to prevent injury .

4
02
END OF PROC
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-070 P 7/8

à
Tr
CCOM D 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
MISCELLANEOUS
A321
REJECTED TAKEOFF
Applicable to: ALL
In the event of a rejected takeoff, the cabin crew should proceed as follows:
CC
29
DESIGNATED CREW SEAT................................... REMAIN SEATED WITH HARNESS SECURED
2:
41
The cabin crew must remain seated in their jump seats, until the aircraft comes to a complete stop.
2
20
CC
4/
COCKPIT CREW INSTRUCTIONS...........................................................WAIT FOR AND FOLLOW
0
9/
 If the cabin crew suspects or notices the development of an emergency situation (based
-2
on passenger reactions, smoke, noises, odors, aircraft attitude...):
9-
CC
y2
CABIN CONDITIONS...................................................................................................... ASSESS
àM
When the aircraft comes to a complete stop, and if necessary, the cabin crew can leave their
Tr
jump seats to further assess any conditions and/or passenger reactions.

ạm
Ph
 If the cabin crew determines that there is an emergency situation:

CC
9
COCKPIT CREW.....................................................................................IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY

:2
12
The cabin crew must immediately notify the cockpit crew of the cabin conditions, and of the
4
02
nature of the emergency.

/2
CC
04
COCKPIT CREW INSTRUCTIONS................................................................................ FOLLOW

9/
-2
END OF PROC
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-070 P 8/8

à
Tr
CCOM E 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
SAFETY OPERATIONAL AWARENESS
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL EVACUATION AWARENESS
GROUND EVACUATION
Applicable to: ALL
The primary responsibility of the cabin crew during an evacuation is to direct passengers to
evacuate the aircraft using all of the available exits. The aim of an evacuation is to ensure that
29
passengers and crewmembers leave the aircraft as rapidly and as safely as possible.
2:
41
Many factors contribute to the successful evacuation of the aircraft:
2
20
• The procedural knowledge of the cabin crew: This includes training, experience and behavior
4/
• The environment inside and outside the aircraft (e.g., the presence of smoke, fire, the cabin
0
9/
lighting and outside conditions)
-2
• The passengers’ behavior, age, level of fitness and motivation
9-
• The aircraft configuration and the layout of the cabin.
y2
During an emergency, it is essential for the cabin crew to be able to apply their knowledge of
àM
procedures and rapidly adapt to the situation.
Tr
ạm
UNPLANNED GROUND EVACUATION

Ph
In the event of an unplanned emergency, the cabin crew may only have time to give very short
9
commands to the passengers. In this situation, the command to use the brace position may come
:2
12
from the flight crew or from the cabin crew.

4
The crew should repeat the commands loud and clear, until the aircraft comes to a complete stop.
02
Following are some examples of possible brace commands for an unplanned emergency:
/2
04
‐ Heads down
9/
-2
‐ Stay down or Heads down

‐ feet back
9-
y2
The brace position is essential for the passengers under these circumstances, as it
àM
increases protection from injuries.

Tr
PASSENGER SAFETY BRIEFINGS

ạm
Ph
Safety briefings should focus the passengers’ attention on safety, and make passengers aware
that it is in their interest to pay attention.
29
When introducing a safety briefing, the cabin crew can increase passenger awareness by using
:
12
phrases such as ‘For your safety’ or ‘As your safety is important to us’.
4
The cabin crew should emphasize the importance of:

02
/2
• Listening to or watching the safety briefing

04
9/
• Being aware of the location and use of safety equipment: i.e. safety cards, exits and seatbelts
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 1/24

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
A321
When cabin crew are required to perform a safety demonstration, they must speak slowly and
clearly on the PA and pause at key points during the announcement to give the cabin crew
sufficient time to demonstrate.
The cabin crew should be animated and try to make eye contact with as many passengers as
possible in order to attract the passengers attention to the safety briefing. This also applies to
the cabin crew when they provide audiovisual safety presentations. When using an audiovisual
29
presentation, the cabin crew should take their positions in the cabin and point to the exits.
2:
41
FACTORS AFFECTING OPERATIONAL
2
20
4/
Analysis of in-service events reveal that operational standards may not be effective or applicable
0
9/
in the following situations:
-2
A procedure is not applied correctly:
9-
‐ Cabin crew are not at their designated exit during takeoff and landing or leave the exit
y2
unattended àM
Cabin crew training is not sufficient:
Tr
ạm
‐ The cabin crew do not have the skills to efficiently evacuate an aircraft
Ph
‐ The cabin crew lack training in crew communication and coordination skills
Operational procedures are not sufficient:
9
:2
12
‐ The Operator does not permit the cabin crew to initiate an evacuation
4
‐ The Operator does not provide guidelines to the cabin crew that explain
02
‐ The Operator does not include the Silent Review in the standard operating procedures
/2
04
The communication with passengers is not effective:

9/
-2
‐ The cabin crew do not provide assertive commands

9-
‐ The cabin crew commands are negative or complicated

y2
àM
Tr
It is impossible to prevent a necessary unplanned evacuation. However, if an unplanned

ạm
evacuation is required, it is possible to take preventive steps that will help in achieving an efficient
Ph
evacuation
The cabin crew should :
29
‐ Be regularly trained and demonstrate proficiency in the use of emergency procedures and
:
12
equipment
4
02
‐ Ensure that the communication and coordination between the flight and cabin crew is effective
/2
when an emergency event occurs

04
9/
‐ Attract passengers attention to safety briefings

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 2/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
‐ Remember the importance of assertive commands and gestures during an evacuation

‐ Be aware of their surroundings and implement an appropriate evacuation technique depending
on the exit, the number of passengers in their assigned area and the situation.
PLANNED GROUND EVACUATION
29
A planned ground evacuation is an emergency in which the cabin crew can revise procedures,
2:
inform and prepare the passengers, and secure the cabin. The cabin crew provide passengers
41
with safety instructions (e.g.: brace position and information on how to operate the exits).
2
20
Appropriate communication between the flight crew, the cabin crew and the passengers is
4/
0
essential for a fast and organized response. The flight and cabin crew coordination has a high
9/
-2
impact on the success of a planned ground evacuation.
9-
THE EMERGENCY CHECKLIST
y2
àM
Emergency checklist are designed to support the cabin crew in a planned emergency.
Tr
Emergency checklist should be short, consistent, and contain all the required steps to prepare the
ạm
cabin in order of priority.

Ph
Many operators provide checklists in the form of cards. These checklists are either kept by all the
cabin crew, or stowed near the cabin crew stations.
9
Following are the contents of a typical checklist.

:2
12
THE BRACE POSITION

4
02
In a cabin preparation, when the crew demonstrate the brace position they should:
/2
04
‐ Point it out on the safety card

9/
-2
‐ Move along the aisle, so that all passengers can see it

‐ Check all passengers.
9-
y2
The cabin crew must advise the passengers that they will be informed when they need to brace.
àM
For example: when they hear “Brace, Brace”.

Tr
EMERGENCY EXIT
ạm
Ph
The cabin crew must indicate the location of all the emergency exits and the floor path marking
lights to the passengers.
29
OVERWING EXIT
:
12
The cabin crew should demonstrate how to evacuate an overwing exit.

4
02
/2
LOOSE ITEMS
04
9/
All loose and sharp items must be secured. Loose items may cause injury during landing
-2
(become projectile) or block access to exits. Sharp items (e.g.: high heels) may damage the
-
slides during an evacuation:

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 3/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
• Carry on baggage
• Shoes without laces or heeled shoes
• Handbags
• Laptops
• Briefcases.
29
These items must be stowed in overhead bins, stowage compartments or under the seats.
2:
41
These objects must not be stowed in the seat pockets, as they may injure passengers when
2
they take the brace position. Seat pockets should only be used for small objects (e.g.: pens and
20
4/
eyeglasses).
0
9/
Cabin crew should also remove pens, badges, pins and any other sharp objects from their
-2
uniforms.
9-
y2
àM
The International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) defines able-bodied passengers as
“passengers selected by crewmembers to assist in managing emergency situations if
Tr
and as required”.
ạm
Ph
The selection of Able Bodied Passengers may be based on their ability to understand
instructions, their physical ability, and their ability to stay calm.
9
They can be chosen from people such as:

:2
12
• Deadheading crewmembers
4
02
• Military personnel
/2
• Police
04
• Fire personnel
9/
-2
• Medical personnel
• People who respond to instruction.
9-
y2
The ABP should be reseated at exits. The reseating action should not separate families, as the
àM
ABP will be more concerned about their family than about the aircraft evacuation.
Tr
The crewmembers should select three ABPs for each exit and they should be briefed as
ạm
follows:
Ph
• To replace the cabin crewmember in case the crewmember becomes incapacitated

• How to assess conditions outside the aircraft, for example, identify exit usable/unusable
:29
(determined by water level)

12
• How to open the exit

4
02
• How to protect oneself from going overboard, and to remain in the assist space
/2
04
• To manually inflate the slide.

9/
• Commands to be used during evacuation,

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 4/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
Disabled, Elderly, Unaccompanied minors, People traveling alone with more than one child.
PLANNED EVACUATION BRIEFING

In any abnormal or emergency situation, communication and coordination is essential and all
available information must be known by all crewmembers
29
Successful evacuations depend on good communication between the flight crew, the cabin crew
2:
and the passengers.
41
It is important for Operators to establish specific procedures for an emergency briefing, as these
2
20
will provide guidance to flight crew and cabin crew. If the flight crew need to inform the cabin crew
4/
of an emergency, there may be a specific alert in the cabin. For example:
0
9/
-2
• A sequence of chimes
• A specific PA (e.g.: “Purser to cockpit”)
9-
y2
• Etc.
àM
These specific alerts inform the other crewmembers that there is an emergency situation, and that
Tr
they must start to secure the galleys. They will then wait at their stations for a Purser briefing.
ạm
THE FLIGHT CREW/CABIN CREW BRIEFING

Ph
The flight crew briefing to the purser should be clear, precise and short, and it should provide
9
the following information

:2
12
• Nature of the emergency (the situation)

4
02
• Intentions (landing/ditching, diversion, etc..)

/2
• Time available (check watch)

04
• Special instructions
9/
-2
• Brace signal.
9-
THE PURSER/CABIN CREW BRIEFING

y2
àM
The Purser will communicate the information provided by the flight crew to all cabin crew and
request them to:
Tr
ạm
• Grab their emergency checklists

Ph
• Go to their emergency briefing positions

• Be prepared for the emergency announcement and demonstration.
29
Time management is essential and the aim is to complete as many tasks on the checklist,
:
12
as time permits. The steps of the cabin preparation should be completed in order of their
4
02
importance.
/2
04
THE CABIN CREW/PASSENGER BRIEFING

9/
-2
For psychological reasons, it is recommended that the flight crew make the initial
announcement. However, due to the high workload during an emergency, the Purser may be
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 5/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
required to make it. The situation should be announced to passengers. The flight crew should
make the announcement but in case of workload in the cockpit it may be delegated to the
Purser.
The Purser informs passengers about:
• The nature of the emergency
29
• The coming preparation of the cabin
2:
• The attention and respect of passengers to cabin crewmembers instructions.
41
2
20
When the instructions and demonstrations are performed some conditions should be
4/
respected:
0
9/
• The cabin dividers should be open
-2
• The cabin lighting should be turned to bright
9-
• The entertainment system switched off.
y2
The cabin crew should be ready to demonstrate the Emergency Briefing in their assigned area.
àM
The crewmembers must have their own life vest before starting the briefing.
Tr
ạm
In order to deliver an effective briefing, the crewmembers should respect some

Ph
conditions:
• Stay in the assigned area
9
:2
• Ensure all passengers can see the demonstration

12
• Do not talk during the announcements

4
• Coordinate the demonstration with the announcement.

02
/2
When reading the announcement, the Purser should speak slowly, distinctly and pause at key
04
9/
points in order to give cabin crewmembers time to don their life vests, demonstrate, and check
-2
passenger compliance.
9-
FINAL CABIN SECURE

y2
àM
After the passenger briefing, the cabin crew must perform a final cabin secure. They must
Tr
ensure that:
ạm
• All seat belts are fastened

Ph
• The seat backs are in the upright position

• The seat backs are in the upright position
29
• The armrests are down

:
12
• All carry-on baggage is stowed and secure

4
02
• The overhead bins are closed and latched

/2
• The aisles are clear from obstruction

04
• All service items are cleared

9/
-2
• The cabin dividers are open

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 6/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
• The lavatories should be vacated and locked and the galley equipment should be secured as
follow
• the galley equipment should be secured: containers and trolleys are closed, stowed and
locked, switch off all galley power and pull all galley circuit breakers
When all the checklist items are complete, the Purser will notify the flight crew, receive updates
29
on the situation, and confirm how much time remains.
2:
After this, the Purser (or any crewmember) should switch on the emergency lights and switch off
41
the cabin lights.
2
20
All cabin crew should take their seats, adjust the harness, begin a Silent Review and prepare
4/
to brace. The command to brace comes from the flight crew, approximately 1 minute before
0
9/
ditching.
-2
9-
SIGNAL TO EVACUATE
y2
The flight crew will initiate the evacuation with commands via PA (e.g.: “Evacuate, Evacuate”),
àM
and/or the EVAC COMMAND alert.
Tr
Note: A cabin preparation for an emergency does not always result in an evacuation. If the flight
ạm
crew decide that no evacuation is required, they may announce it (e.g.: “Passengers and crew
Ph
remain seated”).
In this situation, the cabin crew must be assertive in order to ensure that passengers remain
9
:2
seated and follow all instructions.

12
CABIN EVACUATION PROCESS

4
02
/2
The evacuation must begin immediately after the evacuation signal. Positive and assertive
04
actions and commands from the cabin crew will directly affect the flow of passengers to the exits
9/
-2
and down the slides.

For additional information, please refer to:
9-
y2
• Refer to 14-030 Managing Exits during an Evacuation

àM
• Refer to 14-030 Dried Up Exit

Tr
• Refer to 14-030 Congested Exits

ạm
• Refer to 14-030 Exit Bypass

Ph
PRE-EVACUATION OF THE CABIN CREW

29
When the flow of passengers to the exit begins to slow down, the cabin crew should check the
:
12
cabin and call all remaining passengers to the exits.

4
02
/2

04
9/
When the cabin crewmember’s assigned area is empty, or it is no longer safe to remain onboard
-2
the aircraft, the cabin crew should evacuate through the first usable exit.
-
The nearest cabin crew should check the cockpit.

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 7/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
If an evacuation occurs away from an airfield, the cabin crew should take emergency equipment
from the aircraft, if the situation permits.
Whether evacuating off airport or at an airfield, it is extremely useful for cabin crew to have
a megaphone to manage passengers on the ground after the evacuation.
POST-EVACUATION RESPONSIBILITIES
29
2:
Most emergency evacuation happen at, or near an airport. During the evacuation of the aircraft,
41
the Airport Emergency Plan (AEP) is implemented. The AEP deploys emergency services, as the
2
20
airport rescue fire fighting, ambulances and police to the location.
4/
When the cabin crew are outside the aircraft, they are responsible for the passengers until they
0
9/
are relieved by the emergency services or by the authorities.
-2
The cabin crew should perform the following actions to ensure passenger safety:
9-
y2
‐ Direct passengers upwind and away from the aircraft
‐ Assemble passengers and keep them together àM
‐ Direct passengers away from fuel, fire and vehicles
Tr
‐ Assist passengers and provide first aid, if necessary

ạm
Ph
‐ Enforce a NO SMOKING policy

‐ Make a passenger headcount, if possible.
9
:2
FACTORS AFFECTING OPERATIONAL STANDARDS

4 12
02
Analysis of in-service events reveal that operational standards may not be effective or applicable
/2
in the following situations:

04
A procedure is not applied correctly:

9/
-2
‐ Cabin crew are not at their designated exit during takeoff and landing or leave the exit
9-
unattended
y2
Cabin crew training is not sufficient:

àM
Tr
‐ The cabin crew do not have the skills to efficiently evacuate an aircraft
ạm
‐ The cabin crew lack training in crew communication and coordination skills
Ph
Operational procedures are not sufficient:

29
‐ The Operator does not permit the cabin crew to initiate an evacuation
:
‐ The Operator does not provide guidelines to the cabin crew that explain
12
‐ The Operator does not include the Silent Review in the standard operating procedures
4
02
/2
The communication with passengers is not effective:

04
9/
‐ The cabin crew do not provide assertive commands

-2
‐ The cabin crew commands are negative or complicated

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 8/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
It is impossible to prevent a necessary unplanned evacuation. However, if an unplanned
evacuation is required, it is possible to take preventive steps that will help in achieving an efficient
evacuation
The cabin crew should :
29
2:
‐ Be regularly trained and demonstrate proficiency in the use of emergency procedures and
41
equipment
2
20
‐ Ensure that the communication and coordination between the flight and cabin crew is effective
4/
when an emergency event occurs
0
9/
‐ Attract passengers attention to safety briefings
-2
‐ Remember the importance of assertive commands and gestures during an evacuation
9-
‐ Be aware of their surroundings and implement an appropriate evacuation technique depending
y2
on the exit, the number of passengers in their assigned area and the situation.
Tr
àM
ạm
DITCHING
Ph
Applicable to: ALL

9
UNPLANNED DITCHING
:2
12
There are several reports of inadvertent landings on water (referred to as unplanned ditching). An
4
02
NTSB study of ditching related accidents demonstrated that:

/2
04
‐ They are usually unplanned, with no time for preparation.

9/
‐ Most occur during the takeoff and landing phases of flight and close to airports.
-2
‐ Several occur during the night.

9-
‐ There is usually significant damage to the aircraft.

y2
‐ In some cases, the aircraft sunk within minutes.

àM
In an unplanned ditching, there is no time for the cabin crew to advise the passengers to don
Tr
their life vests or to show them the brace position. In this situation, the command to use the brace
ạm
position may come from the flight crew or from the cabin crew.
Ph
The crew should repeat the commands loud and clear. Following are some examples of possible
brace commands for an unplanned emergency:
29
:
12
‐ Heads down
4
‐ Grab ankles
02
/2
‐ Stay down
04
9/
The brace position is essential for the passengers under these circumstances, as it
-2
increases protection from injuries.

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 9/24

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
A321
OPERATIONAL STANDARDS FOR AN UNPLANNED DITCHING

In any unprepared emergency the reaction of the cabin crew will depend largely on their situational
awareness skill and their ability to identify an abnormal situation and react accordingly.
THE EVACUATION PHASE
29
The cabin crew will assess outside conditions:
2:
‐ If the aircraft is floating or sinking
41
‐ If the water level is present at exits
2
20
4/
There can be 2 different situations and the cabin crew will have to react accordingly:
0
9/
The cabin crew will shout the commands for the life vests:
-2
− “Life vests under your seats”
9-
− “Tear open the pouch”
y2
− “Place over your heads”
SITUATION I − “Fasten straps tight around waist” àM
− “Inflate when leaving the aircraft”
Tr
• They will direct passengers to the usable exits or redirect them if the exits become
ạm
unusable
Ph
• Passengers will board the slideraft.

The following actions will be taken if the aircraft is sinking rapidly:
9
• The crewmembers will direct passengers out the nearest opening, exit
:2
• Instruct passengers to support themselves, by holding anything that will keep them afloat
12
SITUATION II
(seat cushions for example)
4
02
• Find as much flotation equipment (live vests) as time permits and distribute it to passengers
/2
• Leave the aircraft.

04
9/
-2
PLANNED DITCHING
9-
Planned ditching in commercial aviation is a rare occurrence. During a planned ditching, the
y2
cabin crew may have prior notice, and therefore, sufficient time to prepare the cabin, or to advise
àM
passengers and secure the cabin. The cabin crew provide passengers with safety instruction.
Tr
These are, for example: the brace position, how to don the life vests and how to operate the exits.
ạm
Appropriate communication between the flight crew, the cabin crew and the passengers is
Ph
essential for a fast and organized response. The flight and cabin crew coordination will have a high
impact on the success of a planned ditching.
29
A report of the Civil Aviation Authority of the Philippines referred that the statistical chances of
:
12
surviving a ditching were high as it was estimated from UK and USA data that 88% of controlled
4
ditching result in few injuries to flight crew or passengers

02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 10/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
THE EMERGENCY CHECKLIST

THE LIFE VEST
Crewmembers should simultaneously don their life vest and demonstrate to the
passengers, as follows:
29
• Remove the life vest from the pouch
2:
• Unfold the life vest and hold it up for the passengers to see
41
• Don the life vest
2
20
• Secure straps
4/
0
• Identify light (if applicable)
9/
• Identify whistle (if applicable)
-2
9-
If an adult life vest is to be used for a child, adapt it accordingly. If available, distribute and
y2
explain to passengers how to use other flotation equipment, such as baby survival cots.
àM
During demonstration for the use of the life vest, the purser must emphasize that passengers
Tr
must only inflate the life vest when leaving the aircraft.
ạm
If the life vest is inflated before leaving the aircraft, it may:

Ph
• Be punctured more easily

• Make movement more difficult
9
:2
• Impair the brace position.

12
THE BRACE POSITION

4
02
/2
It is a protective position that passengers must adopt before the impact of the aircraft on ground
04
or water. It is one of the most important items in preparing for an emergency.

9/
-2
This position has a dual function. Firstly, it reduces the extent of body flailing, as passengers
must lean or bend over their legs. Secondly, it protects the head from hitting a surface.
9-
y2
EMERGENCY EXIT
àM
Cabin crew will point out the location of the nearest emergency exits and the floor proximity exit
Tr
path lighting.
ạm
Ph
OVERWING EXIT
The cabin crew should demonstrate how to evacuate an overwing exit. As the overwing exits
29
do not have flotation aids, the cabin crew should indicate the location of the nearest slide/raft to
:
12
passengers that are seated at overwing exits.

4
02
LOOSE ITEMS
/2
04
Some items can become projectiles in the cabin during landing if they are not stowed:
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 11/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
• Carry on baggage
• Shoes without laces or heeled shoes
• Handbags
• Laptops
• Briefcases.
29
2:
41
The International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) defines able-bodied passengers as
2
20
“passengers selected by crewmembers to assist in managing emergency situations if
4/
and as required”.
0
9/
The selection of Able Bodied Passengers may be based on their ability to understand
-2
instructions, their physical ability, and their ability to stay calm.
9-
y2
They can be chosen from people such as:
• Deadheading crewmembers àM
Tr
• Military personnel
ạm
• Police
Ph
• Fire personnel
• Medical personnel
9
• People who respond to instruction.

:2
12
The ABP should be reseated at exits. The reseating action should not separate families, as the
4
02
ABP will be more concerned about their family than about the aircraft evacuation.
/2
04
The crewmembers should select three ABPs for each exit and they should be briefed as
9/
follows:
-2
• To replace the cabin crewmember in case the crewmember becomes incapacitated

9-
• How to assess conditions outside the aircraft, for example, identify exit usable/unusable
y2
(determined by water level)

àM
• How to open the exit

Tr
• How to protect oneself from going overboard, and to remain in the assist space
ạm
• To manually inflate the slide /slideraft

Ph
• Commands to be used during evacuation,

• How to board the slide/ slideraft and distribute passengers evenly
29
• How to disconnect the slide/slideraft

:
12
• How to cut the mooring line to release the slide/slideraft from the aircraft.
4
02
If additional rafts are carried on board, the ABPs should be briefed on how to:
/2
04
• Take the raft to the exit

9/
• Use the mooring line to attach the raft to a fixed part of the aircraft, for example, a passenger
-2
seat
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 12/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
• Launch the slide/slideraft (the raft must be thrown outside the aircraft)
• Manually-inflate the slide/slideraft, in case it does not inflate.
• Board the slide/slideraft and distribute passengers evenly.
Disabled, Elderly, Unaccompanied minors, People traveling alone with more than one child.
29
2:
PLANNED DITCHING BRIEFING
412
THE FLIGHT CREW/CABIN CREW BRIEFING
20
4/
The Flight crew will deliver the following information to the Purser:
0
9/
• Nature of the emergency (ditching)
-2
• Time available (check watch)
9-
• Special instructions
y2
• Brace signal. àM
In the event of a planned ditching the flight crew will not give the instruction to remain seated
Tr
ạm
to the Purser. As the aircraft may sink rapidly after impact everyone will have to evacuate
Ph
immediately.
THE PURSER/CABIN CREW BRIEFING
9
:2
The Purser will note the time in order to prepare the cabin according to the time available before
12
the aircraft ditching.

4
02
/2
The Purser will transmit the information given by the flight crew and will instruct the
04
crewmember to:
9/
-2
• Take their position

• Be prepared for the emergency announcement and demonstration.
9-
y2
THE CABIN CREW/PASSENGER BRIEFING

àM
The situation should be announced to passengers. The flight crew should make the
Tr
announcement but in case of workload in the cockpit it may be delegated to the Purser.
ạm
Ph
The Purser informs passengers about:

• The nature of the emergency
29
• The coming preparation of the cabin

:
12
• The attention and respect of passengers to cabin crewmembers instructions.

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 13/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
When the instructions and demonstrations are performed some conditions should be
respected:
• The cabin dividers should be open
• The cabin lighting should be turned to bright
• The entertainment system switched off.
29
2:
The cabin crew should be ready to demonstrate the Emergency Briefing in their assigned area.
41
The crewmembers must have their own life vest before starting the briefing.
2
20
In order to deliver an effective briefing, the crewmembers should respect some
4/
conditions:
0
9/
-2
• Stay in the assigned area
• Ensure all passengers can see the demonstration
9-
• Do not talk during the announcements
y2
• Coordinate the demonstration with the announcement. àM
Tr
When reading the announcement, the Purser should speak slowly, distinctly and pause at key
ạm
points in order to give cabin crewmembers time to don their life vests, demonstrate, and check
Ph
passenger compliance.
FINAL CABIN SECURE
9
:2
12
After the passenger briefing, the cabin crew must perform a final cabin secure. They must
4
ensure that:
02
/2
‐ All seat belts are fastened

04
‐ The seat backs are in the upright position

9/
-2
‐ The seat backs are in the upright position

‐ The armrests are down
9-
y2
‐ All carry-on baggage is stowed and secure

àM
‐ The overhead bins are closed and latched

‐ The aisles are clear from obstruction
Tr
ạm
‐ All service items are cleared

Ph
‐ The cabin dividers are open

‐ The lavatories should be vacated and locked and the galley equipment should be secured as
follow
: 29
‐ the galley equipment should be secured: containers and trolleys are closed, stowed and
12
locked, switch off all galley power and pull all galley circuit breakers
4
02
/2
When all the checklist items are complete, the Purser will notify the flight crew, receive updates
04
on the situation, and confirm how much time remains.

9/
-2
After this, the Purser (or any crewmember) should switch on the emergency lights and switch off
the cabin lights.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 14/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
All cabin crew should take their seats, adjust the harness, begin a Silent Review and prepare
to brace. The command to brace comes from the flight crew, approximately 1 minute before
ditching.
SIGNAL TO EVACUATE
The flight crew will initiate the evacuation with commands via PA (e.g.: “Evacuate, Evacuate”),
29
and/or the EVAC COMMAND alert.
2:
41
Note: In the event of a planned ditching the flight crew will not give the instruction to remain
2
seated to the Purser. As the aircraft may sink rapidly after impact everyone will have to
20
4/
evacuate immediately.
0
9/
CABIN EVACUATION PROCESS
-2
The evacuation must begin immediately after the evacuation signal. Positive and assertive
9-
y2
actions and commands from the cabin crew will directly affect the flow of passengers to the exits
and down the slides. àM
For additional information, please refer to:
Tr
ạm
‐ Refer to 14-030 Managing Exits during an Evacuation

Ph
‐ Refer to 14-030 Dried Up Exit

‐ Refer to 14-030 Congested Exits
9
‐
:2
Refer to 14-030 Exit Bypass

4 12
02
PRE-CABIN CREW EVACUATION:

/2
04
When the flow of passengers to the exit begins to slow down, the cabin crew should call remaining
9/
passengers to the exits.

-2
9-

y2
When the assigned area is empty, or it is no longer safe to remain onboard the aircraft, the cabin
àM
crew should evacuate through the most appropriate usable exit.

Tr
If an evacuation occurs away from an airfield, the cabin crew should take their assigned
ạm
emergency equipment from the aircraft, if the situation permits.

Ph
Note: Cabin crew should consider taking a megaphone from the aircraft to assist with crowd
management post evacuation.
: 29
12
POST-CABIN CREW EVACUATION:

4
02
/2
The cabin crew will be responsible for the passengers until they are assisted by the rescue and
04
emergency services personnel.

9/
When the cabin crew have evacuated the aircraft they must :
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 15/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
‐ Ensure passengers and crewmembers keep their life vests on

‐ Install the canopy (to prevent hypothermia or excessive heat, and to assist rescue services to
locate the sliderafts)
‐ Provide treatment to passengers with injuries (if necessary)
29
‐ Ensure that passenger weight is balanced in the slideraft
2:
41
‐ Keep the raft clean and dry to prevent illness and infection
2
20
‐ Use the survival kit equipment to indicate location.
4/
0
9/
-2
FACTORS AFFECTING THE OPERATIONAL STANDARDS
9-
Analysis of events reveal that the operational standards can be ineffective or non applicable in the
y2
following situations:
àM
• Incorrect application of the procedure:
Tr
− The cabin crew disarm the slide before opening the door as they believe that the slide would
ạm
float upward and block the exit due to the closeness of the water
Ph
• Lack of training:
− The cabin crew have difficulty to put a capsized raft in the right position
9
• Inadequate airline policy:

:2
12
− The aircraft is equipped with seat cushions as flotation aids instead of live vests, but the
4
passenger briefing cards describe the use of life vest and there is a placard on each seat stating
02
/2
‘life vest under your seat’

04
• The cabin crew do not know what procedure to apply to a particular situation:
9/
-2
− The exit door is under the level of water

• Ineffective communication with flight crew:
9-
− The flight crew notify the purser to prepare the cabin for ditching. The purser does not
y2
understand that it will be the only warning and assumes the flight crew will give further instructions
àM
before the aircraft hits the water.

Tr
ạm
Ph
It is impossible to prevent an unexpected event such as an unplanned ditching.

29
However the following prevention strategies should be developed for a planned ditching:
:
12
‐ The preflight safety demonstration will review the appropriate amendments (the use of life vest
4
02
and flotation-seat cushions) to the normal safety demonstration.

/2
‐ The passengers will know the appropriate Brace Position and when and how to operate the
04
overwing exits in case of an emergency event by means of the safety instruction card
9/
-2
‐ Awareness of how important assertive commands and consistent body language are
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 16/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
‐ Cabin crew should be regularly trained to on the evacuation procedures, location and function of
emergency equipment, in the case of planned and unplanned ditching
‐ Good communication between flight and cabin crew will enable the crewmembers to perform an
effective cabin preparation if an emergency event occurs
‐ Detailed documented procedures should be provided to cabin crew by the airline
29
2:
SURVIVAL
41
2
20
Applicable to: ALL
4/
0
EVACUATION AT OR NEAR AN AIRFIELD
9/
-2
If an evacuation happens at or near an airfield, assistance and rescue will not be far away.
9-
However, the cabin crew must remain in control of the situation and keep passengers together.
y2
GROUND EVACUATION àM
When the evacuation is completed, the cabin crew should advise the passengers to remain in
Tr
groups, at a safe distance from the aircraft. They should also advise the passengers not to block
ạm
or stay in the way of emergency vehicles in transit to the location of the aircraft.
Ph
DITCHING
9
:2
When the evacuation is completed, the crew must put in place all necessary actions to make
12
sure all passengers are safe until rescue is available.

4
02
/2
EVACUATION FAR FROM AN AIRFIELD

04
9/
If an evacuation occurs far from an airfield (e.g.: the jungle, the desert, or the ocean), it is essential
-2
to use everything available, in order to survive.

9-
While the crew and passengers wait for rescue, it is important to:
y2
àM
‐ Protect from environment

‐ Find a source of potable water
Tr
ạm
‐ Find food
Ph
‐ Indicate location in a clear and visible way

‐ Maintain a positive attitude.
29
:
12
The FAA recommends the use of the STOP method to deal with the immediate effects of the
4
event. This plan will help the crew to transition into action:
02
/2
‐ Sit
04
‐ Think
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 17/24

à
Tr
ạm
Ph
A321
‐ Observe
‐ Plan
Several factors may affect a positive attitude
Shock
‐ After the crew provides treatment to the passengers, they should use the STOP method to
29
2:
analyze the situation. This action will minimize the risk of shock.
41
No Food and Water
2
20
‐ In order to work normally, the body needs food and water. Because the body has a normal meal
4/
0
routine, if this routine is disturbed, its reaction may be difficult to manage.
9/
-2
Cold and Hot Environment
9-
‐ Sun, rain and snow are examples of environmental hazards. The main aim of the crew and the
y2
passengers is to stay protected from them. àM
Fatigue and No Sleep
Tr
ạm
‐ Physical or psychological fatigue can accelerate negative attitudes. Regular pauses from
Ph
work avoid physical fatigue. Sufficient rest and sleep keep stress away from the mind and the
muscles.
9
:2
Negative Attitude
12
‐ After an emergency, people may have a negative state of mind. This occurs after the body
4
02
receives what it needs (food and water). It is very important to keep the mind occupied to avoid
/2
this
04
9/
Fear and Stress

-2
‐ It is normal that fear and stress occur. If not managed, the fear (of what is known and what
9-
is not known) may continue to increase. These feelings are simultaneously physical and
y2
psychological and may lead to a “fight or flight” reaction.

àM
Behavior in a group can multiply rapidly. This is why it is important to try to understand the
Tr
reason behind behaviors that are not usual and to manage them.
ạm
Ph
SURVIVAL PRIORITIES
29
The four basic principles for survival are:

:
12
▪ PROTECTION
4
02
▪ LOCATION
/2
▪ WATER
04
▪ FOOD
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 18/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
PROTECTION
‐ The canopy will protect the occupants of the slideraft from the elements and prevent
hypothermia. In addition, the canopy will help the air rescue services to locate the sliderafts.
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 19/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
LOCATION
‐ One of the most important elements for search and rescue is signaling
On commercial aircraft, survival kits may be stowed onboard to increase the probability of
survival in post-crash situations. Survival kits often include day/night flares, signal mirrors and
whistles.
29
Devices used for signaling are divided into four categories:
2:
41
• Pyrotechnics (fires, etc.)
2
20
• Electronic (radios, flashlights ELTs, etc.)
4/
• Other Signaling Devices (water activated lights, signal mirror, etc.)
0
9/
• Created Signaling Devices (all others).
-2
Pyrotechnics
9-
y2
‐ The most usual signaling device in commercial aviation is the combined smoke and flare
device. àM
Tr
Pyrotechnics can be divided into two categories:
ạm
• Daylight devices
Ph
• Night devices
9
Because these devices can only be used one time, the crew should not use them unless they
:2
12
see or hear a boat/aircraft.

4
These devices can generate heat and start a fire, if they fall. Therefore, it is essential that, when
02
/2
in use, the crew hold them at arm’s length.

04
Wind can have an impact on the distance the flare travels. If there is no wind, the crew can aim
9/
-2
the flare directly above their head. However, if there is a light to moderate wind, they need to
aim the flare slightly into the wind.
9-
The smoke flare should be used in a clear area, without any trees, to avoid loss of smoke.
y2
Electronic
àM
Devices, like radios, ELTs and mobile and satellite phones, can transmit signals over distance.
Tr
ạm
‐ The aircraft radio system is the initial source of signal. If there is an emergency onboard, the
Ph
pilots use it to inform ATC

Emergencies are classified into different degrees. For example, urgent situations that
29
require immediate attention, but are not a threat to life, start by the use of the expression
:
12
“PAN-PAN” (repeated three times).

4
If the emergency is a threat to life, the highest priority distress signal is used. The expression
02
“MAYDAY” (repeated three times) means imminent danger. A “MAYDAY” message should be
/2
04
followed by necessary information. For example: aircraft identification and type, nature of the
9/
emergency, pilots’ intentions, fuel remaining, etc.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 20/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
The aircrafts’ radio system may still work after the crash. However, the crew should wait for
the aircraft to cool down, to ensure that it is safe they try to enter.
‐ The ELT works on three frequencies:
• 121.5 MHz is the previous international distress frequency. This signal can be monitored by
commercial aircraft, but it has not been monitored by satellite since 2009
29
• 243 MHz is the military emergency frequency
2:
• 406 MHz is the satellite-based global distress frequency since 2010.
412
20
Other Signaling Devices
4/
0
‐ Signal mirrors: they are a simple, yet effective signal source. To create a signal, the crew
9/
-2
need to make sweeping motions towards the horizon. Watches, holograms on a credit cards
or CDs can be used in the same way.
9-
y2
‐ Lights in passenger and crew life vests: they are activated when they are in contact with
water. àM
Tr
Created Signaling Devices

ạm
Objects found in the aircraft or in the crash site can be useful to create signaling devices. For
Ph
example:
‐ Smoke and fire
9
:2
A fire gets attention and can help with passengers’ state of mind. Three to form a triangle, or
12
in a straight row next to a river, are global distress signals.

4
02
However, the environment in which the survivors are must be considered:

/2
04
• Fires and smoke signals in natural open areas or along the edges of rivers and streams are
9/
better. Signals in dense tree areas are not visible

-2
• If smoke is used, the primary concern is that it must contrast with the environment. Black
9-
smoke (burning of tires) in a snow environment and white smoke (burning of dry leaves) in
y2
a dark area are more visible

àM
• The warmer the fire, the higher the smoke will rise and therefore increase the signal.
Tr
ạm
Other Objects
Ph
• It is possible to communicate a specific message to an aircraft that flies overhead without

a radio. This may involve a piece of cloth, an emergency blanket, rocks, branches or
29
anything else that may be changed into various forms.

:
12
Here is a list of standard signs:

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 21/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
12
When the crew creates a sign or signaling device, the main purpose is that it gets attention.
4
02
FAA recommends the CCLAS checklist to make sure this is achieved:

/2
04
‐ Contrast: it should be different from the environment

9/
‐ Condition: keep the signal in good state and consider weather conditions
-2
‐ Location: the signal should be visible from 360 degrees

9-
‐ Angularity: keep angles sharp

y2
‐ Size: the sign must be large (minimum 5 m (18 ft) by 1 m (3 ft))

àM
Tr
WATER
ạm
Water is the most important element. It is possible to live on just water for over 10 days. When
Ph
the water supply is limited and cannot be restored, it should be used carefully.
Potable water supplies should be protected from sea water to avoid contamination
29
At night, if water is in short supply, the canopy can be folded up at the side to collect
:
12
condensation with a sponge or a cloth.

4
02
The distribution of water should take into account the available quantity and the number of
/2
passengers and crew.

04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 22/24

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
FOOD
The general rule is: if you do not have water, do not eat. Water is necessary to assist with
digestion.
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 23/24

à
Tr
CCOM ←C 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-10 P 24/24

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL TURBULENCE THREAT AWARENESS
TURBULENCE THREAT AWARENESS

Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Turbulence is the leading cause of injury to passengers and cabin crew in non-fatal accidents.
29
Initiatives can be taken to reduce turbulence-related injuries, with little or no financial cost to the
2:
operator.
41
The aim of this operational awareness is to:
2
20
Increase cabin crew awareness of the hazards of turbulence
4/
0
Provide strategies to enable the cabin crew to effectively manage the cabin during turbulence
9/
-2
Help cabin crew to ensure safety in the cabin and reduce turbulence-related injuries.
9-
y2
Injuries to cabin crew during turbulence occur much more frequently than turbulence-related
àM
injuries to passengers, because cabin crew are constantly working in the cabin.
Tr
IATA, Safety Trend Evaluation, Analysis and Data Exchange System (STEADES) performed a
ạm
study of turbulence-related injuries to cabin crew.

Ph
st st
Analysis revealed that from January 1 2004 to December 31 2004 there were 232 reported
9
cases of turbulence-related injuries to cabin crew and that:

:2
12
‐ 64 % of the injuries were due to cabin crew not being secured during turbulence
4
‐ 44 % of the injuries occurred in the galley

02
/2
‐ 9 % of these incidents resulted in serious injury to cabin crew.

04
9/
In the majority of these cases, cabin crew were lifted off the floor, or lost their balance, resulting in
-2
foot, ankle and back/spinal injuries. Other cabin crew injuries were due to loose items in the cabin,
9-
such as trolleys.
y2
TURBULENCE DEFINITIONS
àM
Tr
The levels of turbulence are defined and described as follows:

ạm
‐ Light Turbulence:
Ph
Light turbulence momentarily causes slight, erratic changes in the aircraft altitude or attitude:
Passengers may feel a slight strain against seat belts
29
:
Liquids are shaking but are not splashing out of cups

12
Trolleys can be maneuvered with little difficulty.

4
02
/2
‐ Moderate Turbulence:
04
Moderate turbulence, causes rapid bumps or jolts:

9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-20 P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 04 SEP 13
ạm
Ph
A321
Passengers feel definite strain against seat belts

Liquids splash out of cups
Trolleys are difficult to maneuver − It is difficult to walk or stand in the cabin.
‐ Severe Turbulence:
Severe turbulence causes large abrupt changes in the aircraft altitude and attitude:
29
2:
‐ Passengers are forced violently against their seatbelts
41
‐ Items fall or lift off the floor
2
20
‐ Loose items are tossed about the cabin
4/
‐ It is impossible to walk.
0
9/
-2
9-
Refer to 14-055 TURBULENCE MANAGEMENT
y2
CREW COMMUNICATION AND COORDINATION àM
Tr
Two-way communication between the cabin crew and the flight crew is necessary in order to
ạm
manage turbulence and prevent turbulence-related injuries. There are Standard Operating
Ph
Procedures (SOPs) that can be implemented to enable the flight crew and the cabin crew to
improve communication and effectively manage the aircraft and the cabin during turbulence.
9
For example, use common terminology when communicating the severity of turbulence:
:2
12
• Light Turbulence
4
02
• Moderate Turbulence
/2
• Severe Turbulence
04
9/
Using common terminology ensures that the flight crew and the cabin crew share a common
-2
understanding of the level of turbulence expected. This enables the cabin crew to perform the
9-
appropriate actions and duties, to effectively manage the cabin during turbulence.
y2
àM
Note: On large aircraft, it is possible that the forward section of the aircraft will experience
less turbulence than the aft section of the aircraft. Therefore, the flight crew may not be
Tr
ạm
aware of the level of turbulence experienced in the aft section of the cabin.
Ph
It is important that the cabin crew inform the flight crew of turbulent conditions in the
cabin during the flight.
29
ANTICIPATED TURBULENCE
:
412
Refer to 14-055 ANTICIPATED TURBULENCE PROCEDURES

02
/2
SUDDEN TURBULENCE
04
9/
Refer to 14-055 UNANTICIPATED TURBULENCE PROCEDURES

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-20 P 2/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←A→ 04 SEP 13

ạm
Ph
A321
POST TURBULENCE
Refer to 14-055 POST TURBULENCE DUTIES
OPERATIONAL AND HUMAN FACTORS INVOLVED IN A TURBULENCE ENCOUNTER
Analysis of in-service events has revealed that the operational standards are not always effective
29
or applied.
2:
For example:
412
‐ The cabin crew do not follow the flight crew instructions to be seated during turbulence
20
‐ The cabin crew do not have sufficient training to understand the hazards associated with
4/
0
turbulence
9/
-2
‐ Communication between the flight crew and the cabin crew is not effective: The cabin crew and
the flight crew do not use the same terminology, resulting in information that is not accurate
9-
y2
which may lead to errors in communication
àM
‐ Ineffective communication with passengers: The cabin crew do not stress to passengers the
importance of complying with the seat belt sign during turbulence.
Tr
ạm
TURBULENCE-RELATED INJURIES - PREVENTION STRATEGIES

Ph
Operators can apply the following prevention strategies in order to help reduce the risk of
turbulence-related injuries:
9
:2
• Develop Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs), that include:

4 12
‐ Communication between the flight crew, the cabin crew and passengers
02
‐ Specific procedures for anticipated and sudden turbulence encounters

/2
04
‐ The duties of the cabin crew before, during and after a turbulence encounter.
9/
-2
• Emphasize the importance of the flight crew and cabin crew preflight briefing, that should include
the following subjects:
9-
y2
‐ Anticipated areas of turbulence during the flight

àM
‐ The importance of keeping the flight crew informed of the conditions in the cabin.
Tr
• Use standard terminology (Light, Moderate, Severe) when referring to the level of a turbulence
ạm
Ph
encounter to ensure that all cabin crew and flight crew understand the meaning and the required
actions
• Encourage the use of seat belts. During the after takeoff passenger announcement, the
:29
cabin crew should advise passengers to use their seat belts during the flight, and request that
12
passengers keep their seat belts fastened at all times when seated.
4
02
• Provide effective training for cabin crew on how to increase their personal safety and passenger
/2
safety during turbulence

04
9/
• Increase cabin crew awareness regarding the use and location of handrails throughout the cabin,
-2
or equipment that cabin crew could use to hold on to in the event of turbulence
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-20 P 3/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←A→ 04 SEP 13

ạm
Ph
A321
• Train cabin crew to effectively use the PA system and other types of communication with
passengers during turbulence to ensure safety.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-20 P 4/4

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 04 SEP 13
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION AWARENESS
CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION AWARENESS

Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Aircraft have cabin air systems that control pressurization, airflow, air filtration and temperature.
29
The purpose of these systems is to provide a safe and comfortable cabin environment and to
2:
protect all cabin occupants from the physiological risks associated with depressurization at high
41
altitudes.
2
20
In the case of a depressurization, there is a risk that not enough oxygen will be supplied to the
4/
body. This condition, hypoxia (lack of oxygen), is the greatest threat to both crewmembers and
0
9/
passengers.
-2
The objectives of this guidance are therefore to:
9-
y2
• Review the different types of depressurization
àM
• Enhance cabin and flight crew awareness of the importance of rapidly taking appropriate action
to successfully manage depressurization.
Tr
ạm
TYPES OF DEPRESSURIZATION
Ph
The risk of a pressurized cabin is the potential for cabin depressurization. This can occur due to
a pressurization system malfunction or damage to the aircraft that results in a break in the aircraft
9
:2
structure or the loss of a window. This causes cabin air to escape outside the aircraft.
12
The loss of pressurization can be slow - in case of a small air leak - while a Rapid or Explosive
4
02
depressurization occurs suddenly, usually within a few seconds.

/2
The consequences of depressurization and its impact on cabin occupants depends on a number of
04
9/
factors including:
-2
• The size of the cabin:

9-
• The damage to the aircraft structure: The larger the opening, the faster the depressurization
y2
time
àM
• The pressure differential: The greater the pressure differential between the cabin pressure
Tr
and the external environmental pressure, the more forceful the depressurization.
ạm
Ph
When cabin pressure decreases, the cabin occupants are no longer protected from the dangers of
high altitudes and there is an increased risk of hypoxia, depressurization, illness and hypothermia.
It is, therefore, important that cabin crew recognize the different types of depressurization and
29
:
react effectively to overcome the difficulties associated with a loss in cabin pressure.
412
RAPID OR EXPLOSIVE DEPRESSURIZATION

02
/2
Rapid/Explosive depressurization results in a sudden loss in cabin pressure and can be

04
9/
recognized by the following signs:

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-30 P 1/8

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
A321
‐ A loud bang, thump or clap that is the result of the sudden contact between the internal and
external masses of air
‐ Cloud of fog or misting in the cabin that is due to the drop in temperature and the change of
humidity
‐ Rush of air, as the air exits the cabin
29
‐ A decrease in temperature, as the cabin temperature equalizes with the outside air
2:
temperature
41
‐ The release of the cabin oxygen masks, when the cabin altitude reaches 14 000 feet.
2
20
4/
If a break in the aircraft structure is the cause of the depressurization:
0
9/
‐ Unsecured items in the immediate area are ejected from the aircraft
-2
‐ Debris may fly around the cabin
9-
‐ Loose items may become projectiles
y2
‐ Dust particles may limit visibility. àM
In the case of rapid/explosive depressurization, there may be a lot of confusion due to the high
Tr
noise level and fog that makes it difficult to communicate in the cabin.
ạm
Ph
SLOW OR INSIDIOUS DEPRESSURIZATION

Slow/Insidious depressurization involves a very gradual decrease in cabin pressure.
9
:2
Slow depressurization may be the result of a faulty door seal, a malfunction in the
12
pressurization system or a cracked window.

4
02
Slow depressurization may not always be obvious. The cabin crew may not notice the changes
/2
in the cabin, until the oxygen masks drop down from the Passenger Service Units (PSUs).
04
9/
Therefore, the cabin crew must be aware of signs that could indicate a slow depressurization.
-2
One of the first physiological indications of a slow depressurization may be ear discomfort or
9-
‘popping’, joint pain or stomach pain due to gas expansion.

y2
The insidious nature of Hypoxia causes a subtle decrease in individual performance, followed
àM
by incapacitation. Therefore the symptoms may not be identified until it is too late.
Tr
HYPOXIA
ạm
Ph
As mentioned, the greatest danger during depressurization is hypoxia. The effects of hypoxia
cannot be over emphasized. It is important for the cabin crew to realize that even mild hypoxia,
though not fatal, can have fatal results. This is because hypoxia can significantly reduce the ability
29
:
of the cabin crew to perform, and consequently lead to errors that may be fatal. It is therefore
12
important that cabin crew continuously observe and monitor each other and the passengers for
4
02
signs and symptoms of hypoxia.

/2
04
The most common type of aviation hypoxia is "hypoxic hypoxia", that occurs due to low partial
9/
pressure of oxygen in the arterial blood. If oxygen is not used immediately in hypoxia cases,
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-30 P 2/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
it is possible that occupants become incapacitated and lose consciousness in a very short
time.
PHYSIOLOGICAL AND PSYCHOLOGICAL EFFECTS OF HYPOXIA
It is important that cabin crew can recognize the symptoms of hypoxia in themselves and in
others. During a depressurization some passengers may show signs of hypoxia and may not
29
even attempt to put their masks on.
2:
41
It is necessary to remember that each person may not react in the same way and that the
2
symptoms of hypoxia may manifest themselves differently in each individual.
20
4/
0
‐ Stomach pain due to gas expansion
9/
-2
‐ Tingling sensation in the hands and feet
‐ Cyanosis (blue discoloration of the lips and fingernails)
9-
‐ Increased rate of breathing
y2
‐ Headache
‐ Nausea àM
INITIAL SIGNS OF HYPOXIA INCLUDE
Tr
‐ Light-headedness
‐ Dizziness
ạm
‐ Sweating
Ph
‐ Irritability
‐ Euphoria
9
‐ Ear discomfort
:2
4 12
‐ Impaired vision
02
‐ Impaired judgment
/2
THESE SYMPTOMS BECOME MORE ‐ Impaired motor skills (not able to coordinate body movements)
04
PRONOUNCED AS THE LACK OF OXYGEN ‐ Drowsiness

9/
-2
INCREASES ‐ Slurred speech

‐ Memory loss
9-
‐ Difficulty to concentrate.
y2
àM
Hypoxia can cause a false sense of well-being. It is possible for a person to be hypoxic and
Tr
not be aware of their condition. Therefore, it is important that the cabin crew recognize the
ạm
signs of hypoxia and provide oxygen as soon as possible in order to prevent a loss of
Ph
consciousness.
The affected passenger or cabin crew will usually recover a few minutes after receiving oxygen.
29
However, they may not be aware of having lost consciousness.

:
12
TIME OF USEFUL CONSCIOUSNESS

4
02
The TUC refers to the time available to individuals to perform their tasks after they have been
/2
04
deprived of oxygen, but are still aware of their environment and capable of controlling their
9/
actions.
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-30 P 3/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
It is important for the cabin crew to realize that the time of useful consciousness is different for
each individual, and depends on the:
‐ Altitude
‐ Duration at Altitude
‐ Temperature
29
‐ Physical Exertion
2:
‐ Emotional State
41
‐ Amount of activity.
2
20
4/
The cabin crew must remember that in cases of continued physical activity, the time of useful
0
9/
consciousness (Table 1) is significantly reduced.
-2
The Time of Useful Consciousness
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
It is important to emphasize that this table is only a guideline, and provides average values
Ph
that can increase or decrease, depending on the skills needed to accomplish a task, on the
individual’s health, and on the amount of activity. For example, the time of useful consciousness
29
:
for cabin crew involved in moderate activity is significantly less compared to a passenger that is
12
sitting quietly
4
02
The following are some other factors that can contribute to reducing the time of useful
/2
consciousness:
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-30 P 4/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
‐ Fatigue: A person who is physically or mentally fatigued will have an increased risk of
hypoxia
‐ Physical effort: During physical activity, there is an increased need for oxygen, an increased
risk of hypoxia and, as a result, a decrease in the amount of useful consciousness time
‐ Alcohol: Alcohol can significantly affect behavior and can increase the risk of hypoxia in
29
addition to aggravating some of the behavioral changes resulting from hypoxia.
2:
41
CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION
2
20
IMMEDIATE ACTIONS
4/
0
In the case of depressurization the immediate use of oxygen is critical.
9/
-2
Therefore, the first actions to be performed by the cabin crew are:
9-
• Immediately don the nearest oxygen mask
y2
• Contact the Flight Crew – the cabin crew should as soon as possible, by the most
àM
appropriate means, contact the flight crew and confirm that the flight crew are wearing
Tr
their oxygen masks

ạm
• Sit down fasten seat belt, or grasp a fixed object.

Ph
Refer to 14-050 CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION

If the cabin crew cannot sit down or grasp a fixed object, they should wedge themselves
9
:2
between passengers and ask passengers for assistance. For example, in one cabin
12
depressurization event, a cabin crew was saved from ejection out of the aircraft because a
4
02
passenger was holding on to the cabin crew's ankle.

/2
The priority of the cabin crew is to consider their personal safety.

04
9/
POST DEPRESSURIZATION
-2
When advised by the flight crew that a safe altitude has been reached, the cabin crew should
9-
y2
transfer to the portable oxygen cylinders and consider their post depressurization oxygen needs.
àM
When deciding to remove their oxygen masks, cabin crew must use good judgment and be alert to
Tr
any signs of hypoxia.

ạm
After cabin Depressurization, the cabin crew should:

Ph
‐ Check on the flight crew, and be prepared to assist in the case of pilot incapacitation
‐ Check passengers for any injuries
29
‐ Check the cabin for any damage

:
12
‐ Provide first-aid and oxygen, as necessary

4
‐ Report the cabin status to the flight crew.

02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-30 P 5/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
OXYGEN SYSTEMS
When the cabin altitude reaches 14 000 ft , the oxygen masks stored above the passenger seats,
in the lavatories, galleys, and crew stations will deploy automatically. The oxygen mask system
can also be deployed manually by the flight crew.
A minimum of two oxygen masks are stowed in each Passenger Service Unit (PSU). Each mask
29
has a lanyard attached to a pull pin. Pulling one mask (or pull flag) will remove the pin and activate
2:
the flow of oxygen to all the masks in the unit
41
The following two types of oxygen are available on the aircraft:
2
20
4/
1. DECENTRALISED (CHEMICAL or GASEOUS)
0
9/
2. CENTRALISED (GASEOUS)
-2
DECENTRALISED OXYGEN SYSTEM
9-
y2
The oxygen is provided by chemical generators (DCOS) or oxygen bottle (DGOS) in each PSU.
àM
As soon as an oxygen mask is pulled down, and the release pin is removed, oxygen begins to
flow to the mask. It is not possible to stop the flow of oxygen after it has started.
Tr
The chemical generator creates heat, and therefore results in a burning odor where dust has
ạm
Ph
gathered. This is normal, however, passengers may become concerned with the smell of
burning associated with the oxygen generators.
Therefore, the cabin crew should make a passenger announcement, when it is safe to do so,
9
:2
that there is a possibility of a smell of burning associated with the normal operation of chemical
12
oxygen generator systems.

4
02
Containers with gaseous oxygen have a depletion mechanism. This mechanism indicates that
/2
04
oxygen is not available, due to failure, and consists of a red string in the test port.
9/
CENTRALISED OXYGEN SYSTEM

-2
9-
The oxygen is provided by gaseous cylinders stowed in the cargo compartment. The activation
y2
of the gaseous system depends on cabin altitude.

àM
This system does not generate a burning odor, because no heat is generated.
Tr
FACTORS AFFECTING COMPLIANCE WITH OPERATIONAL STANDARDS

ạm
Ph
The analysis of in-service events has revealed that operating standards may not be effective or
applicable in the following situations:
29
‐ The cabin crew do not recognize the indications of a slow depressurization, and continue to
:
12
perform their tasks in the cabin as usual

4
‐ The cabin crew do not have sufficient information or training

02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-30 P 6/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
‐ There is a lack of cabin crew procedures, applicable to a loss cabin pressure, oxygen mask
deployment and altitude of the aircraft. Sometimes the procedures do not sufficiently emphasize
the importance of immediately donning the nearest oxygen mask
‐ The cabin crew do not apply the procedures correctly. For example, oxygen masks are removed
too soon during depressurization causing incapacitation.
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-30 P 7/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-30 P 8/8

à
Tr
CCOM 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL CABIN SMOKE/FUMES AWARENESS
CABIN SMOKE/FUMES AWARENESS

Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
It is important that cabin crew are aware of indications of smoke/fumes, respond to them
29
appropriately and report them to the flight crew. All crewmembers must take any report of
2:
smoke/fumes in the cabin seriously. They must immediately identify the source of smoke/fumes
41
and take the appropriate action in order to significantly minimize the risk of fire onboard the
2
20
aircraft.
4/
It is important to treat a smoke/fumes occurrence as potential fire, until it has been proven
0
9/
otherwise.
-2
The cabin crews must remember that the development of smoke/fumes, takes some time before it
9-
can be detected.
y2
However only communicate ‘Smoke/fumes’ if it has been detected – do not mention ‘Fire’ if no
àM
flames are visible.
Tr
Additional information on how to deal with in-flight fire events is provided in :

ạm
Ph
‐ Refer to 14-080-60 MANAGING IN-FLIGHT FIRES

‐ Refer to 14-020 AWARENESS TO SMOKE IN HIDDEN AREAS
9
DEFINITIONS
:2
12
SMOKE : The product of burning materials made visible by the presence

4
02
of small particles (ICAO).

/2
04
FUMES : Gaseous compounds which are not visible (ICAO).

9/
-2
9-
Analysis of in-service events involving smoke/fumes in the cabin has shown:

y2
• Cases where the cabin crew detected the source of smoke/fumes easily
àM
• Cases where the cabin crew detected the source of smoke/fumes with difficulty.
Tr
ạm
In most cases, the cabin crew reported that the source of smoke/fumes was easily identified.
Ph
The following are the areas where the cabin crewmembers can easily detect the source of
smoke/fumes:
29
• Galley equipment (ovens, coffeemakers) represented the most common source of

:
12
smoke/fumes
4
02
• Cabin equipment (i.e. a seat screen or seat control malfunction)

/2
• Lavatories.
04
9/
The following are areas where it is difficult for the cabin crewmembers to detect the source of
-2
smoke/fumes:
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-50 P 1/8

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
A321
• Air conditioning
• Sidewall panels
• Ceiling panels.
Smoke/fumes coming from the ceiling areas may be attributed to:
29
• The Auxiliary Power Unit (APU)
2:
• Cabin recirculation fans
41
• Crew Rest Compartments
2
20
• Electrical wiring
4/
• Engine Air Bleed.(e.g Bird ingestion, ....)
0
9/
-2
Sometimes human error is a contributing factor to some smoke/fumes occurrences, such as:
9-
• Putting a flammable item in an oven (e.g. plastic wrapping left on food during the cooking cycle,
y2
…)
àM
• Leaving an empty coffeemaker on a hot plate
Tr
• Placing a flammable item close to a source of heat (e.g. plastic cups next to a hot oven)
ạm
• Forgetting to complete a pre-flight check of the ovens for cleanliness (i.e. papers or food grease
Ph
left in the oven)

• Smoking in the lavatories.
9
:2
If it is not possible for the cabin crew to immediately detect the source of smoke/fumes, the
12
following consequences may occur:

4
02
• Fire
/2
04
• Emergency evacuation
9/
• Hospitalization of cabin crew and/or passengers due to smoke inhalation

-2
• Flight delays, In-flight turn back, diversions.

9-
y2
OPERATIONAL STANDARDS FOR A SMOKE/FUMES OCCURRENCE

àM
When cabin crew identify and locate smoke/fumes, they must apply the appropriate procedures in
Tr
order to stop the smoke/fumes and prevent a fire.

ạm
Smoke/fumes can from different areas of the aircraft.

Ph
These areas can be identified as either “EASY” or “DIFFICULT” sources of smoke/fumes.

THE “EASY” SOURCES OF SMOKE/FUMES
:29
12
The cabin crew must take the following action:

4
02
‐ Shut off the electrical power by pulling the corresponding circuit breaker and shutting off the
/2
power, if applicable.
04
9/
‐ Inform the flight crew immediately.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-50 P 2/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
‐ Closely monitor the situation.

‐ Prepare a fire extinguisher, Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE) and fire gloves in case the
situation deteriorates.
THE “DIFFICULT” SOURCES OF SMOKE/FUMES
The cabin crew may have limited or no access to areas such as sidewall and ceiling panels or
29
air conditioning, and may have no way of visually monitoring them.
2:
41
If smoke/fumes comes from any of these areas, the cabin crew must take the following action:
2
20
‐ Inform the flight crew.
4/
‐ Closely monitor the situation.
0
9/
‐ Search for hot spots using the back of the hand.
-2
‐ Prepare a fire extinguisher, Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE) and fire gloves in case the
9-
situation deteriorates.
y2
PROTECTION FROM SMOKE/FUMES àM
Tr
Smoke/fumes can impair judgment and affect performance. When inhaled, even in small
ạm
quantities, it can be fatal depending on an individual’s level of tolerance.

Ph
Materials that are used in the cabin release toxic fumes when smoldering, such as:
‐ Carbon monoxide (CO)
9
:2
‐ Hydrogen cyanide
12
‐ Hydrogen chloride and Acrolein.

4
02
The cabin crew must take the following action, in order to protect everyone on board from the
/2
04
negative effects and consequences of smoke inhalation:

9/
-2
• Do not open the cockpit door, unless it is necessary. Take necessary action to prevent smoke
and fumes from contaminating the cockpit.
9-
y2
• Move passengers away from the smoke source area. If this is not possible, encourage the
àM
passengers to bend forward and remain at a low level where the air is clearer.
Tr
• Use wet towels, a wet cloth, or a head rest cover to reduce some of the effects of smoke
ạm
inhalation. Instruct passengers to hold the wet towel/cloth over their nose and mouth and
Ph
breathe through it.

In addition, the cabin crew should use Protective Breathing Equipment (PBEs) to protect
29
themselves.
:
12
USE OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS

4
02
/2
Circuit breakers perform a dual function in aircraft electrical systems. Their primary function
04
is to provide protection from overheating. This can occur if there is an overload or a fault on a
9/
piece of electrical equipment which may result in the total or partial deactivation of the electrical
-2
system.
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-50 P 3/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
The secondary function is to facilitate the isolation of specific circuits that do not have an
individual ON/OFF switch.
The likely reason for a circuit breaker to trip (release) is due to a fault in the electrical load, or in
the associated wiring. A circuit breaker will open, when a predetermined current is detected.
The cabin crew should pull the circuit breaker related to equipment if they see smoke coming
from this equipment.
29
Pulling a circuit breaker will cut off the power source to an electrical item. A circuit breaker that
2:
41
is pulled or has tripped automatically, must never be re-engaged by the cabin crew.
2
If a circuit breaker trips, this may indicate a problem. In addition, this problem may be located in
20
4/
an area that is not visible.
0
9/
Re-engaging a tripped circuit breaker may cause more electrical damage and increase the risk
-2
of damage to other equipment.
9-
The cabin crewmembers must never use circuit breakers as ON/OFF switches for
y2
equipment.
àM
OPERATIONAL AND HUMAN FACTORS INVOLVED IN THE DETECTION OF SMOKE/FUMES
Tr
ạm
When smoke/fumes is detected in the cabin, the cabin crew must immediately try to identify the
Ph
source.
Some areas are equipped with smoke detection devices which will alert both the flight crew and
9
the cabin crew when smoke is detected.

:2
12
SMOKE DETECTORS
4
02
There is a smoke detector in all lavatories. If smoke enters into the measuring chamber of a
/2
04
smoke detector, a visual and aural warning is transmitted to the cabin and cockpit.
9/
VISUAL INDICATIONS IN THE CABIN

-2
9-
Visual indicators appear on the following systems in order to notify to the cabin crew that smoke
y2
is detected:
àM
‐ All Attendant Indication Panels (AIP)

Tr
‐ The applicable Area Call Panel (ACP)

ạm
‐ The associated lavatory wall light

Ph
‐ The Forward Attendant Panel (FAP).

‐ The Aft Attendant Panel (AAP)
29
:
AURAL INDICATIONS IN THE CABIN

412
The following aural indicators will simultaneously trigger, with the visual indicators:
02
/2
‐ A repetitive chime from all the cabin loudspeakers and all attendant station loudspeakers or,
04
9/
‐ A repetitive chime from all attendant station loudspeakers.

-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-50 P 4/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
HUMAN FACTORS INVOLVED IN THE DETECTION OF SMOKE/FUMES (SITUATIONAL

AWARENESS)
The cabin crew must also use their senses (Hearing, Touch, Smell, Vision) to detect
smoke/fumes. Sometimes, the cabin crew may not see any smoke/fumes, but may recognize
such indications as:
29
‐ An abnormal noise in the cabin
2:
41
‐ An abnormally warm surface
2
‐ An unusual odor.
20
4/
Cabin crew and passengers may hear abnormal (snapping, crackling) noises and should
0
9/
Sense Hearing report them.
-2
These noises could be caused by electrical arcing of wiring.
9-
When trying to find the source of smoke/fumes, the cabin crew should use the back of their
Sense of Touch
y2
hands to check the temperature and/or heat of the various panels and/or doors.
Sense of Vision
àM
The different panels (Attendant Indication Panels, Area Call Panel…) located throughout the
cabin will help the cabin crew to detect the presence of smoke in the aircraft.
Tr
ạm
Sense of Smell The following abnormal odors may indicate the presence of smoke/fumes
Ph
Descriptions of odors Primary cause

(Most Reported listed First )
Electrical Equipment/IFE
Acrid Chemical
Engine Oil Leak
9
:2
Electrical Equipment
12
Burning Galley Equipment

4
02
Bird Ingestion
/2
Contaminated Bleed Ducts

04
Chemical
APU Ingestion
9/
Smoke hood
-2
Chlorine
Blocked Door Area Drain
9-
Electrical Electrical Equipment

y2
Dirty Socks APU or Engine Oil Leaks

àM
Foul Lavatories
Tr
Fuel APU FCU/Fuel Line

ạm
Oil Engine or APU oil Leak

Ph
Skydrol Engine Hydraulic

Wiring
Sulphur Avionics Filter Water Contamination
29
Light Bulb
:
12
OPERATIONAL AND HUMAN FACTORS AFFECTING OPERATIONAL STANDARDS

4
02
/2
The analysis of in-service events shows that operational standards may not be effective or may
04
not be applicable due to the following:

9/
-2
• Ineffective detection of smoke:

-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-50 P 5/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
‐ Fumes with or without odors or smoke may take some time to develop before it can be detected
‐ Recirculation of smoke/fumes through air conditioning.
• Inadequate procedures:
‐ The procedures do not include all the factors involved in smoke/fumes detection
29
• Incorrect application of the procedure:
2:
41
‐ Cabin crew reset a tripped circuit breaker without informing the flight crew about the incident
2
20
• Lack of training:
4/
0
9/
‐ The cabin crew are not proficient enough to accurately perform their respective duties in the
-2
event of smoke/fumes
9-
‐ The cabin crew are not proactive or hesitant to apply the required procedure
y2
‐ The cabin crew do not know what procedure should be applied (e.g. The crewmember opens
the door of an oven that is emitting smoke/fumes, …). àM
Tr
• Lack of Operator policy:

ạm
Ph
‐ The Operator does not have a policy regarding the use of circuit breakers.
• Ineffective communication with flight crew:
9
:2
‐ The cabin crew do not accurately communicate with the flight crew and inform them of a fire
12
without having seen flames. It may cause the flight crew to decide to perform an unnecessary
4
02
emergency landing
/2
04
‐ Important information from the cabin crew and passengers may not always be taken into
9/
account by the flight crew (odors, noises…).

-2
9-
y2
It is important to remember that the source of smoke/fumes may quickly develop into an on-board
àM
fire if left undetected. Therefore, both the operator and the cabin crew should take the following
Tr
preventative actions:
ạm
‐ Perform a complete pre-flight check including ovens and galleys to ensure that they are clean
Ph
(papers or any flammable items left in it)

‐ Frequently monitor the cabin, galleys (ovens) and lavatories (waste bins)
29
‐ The cabin crew should have good knowledge of the cabin configuration and of all smoke/fumes
:
12
procedures.
4
02
‐ Operators should provide training and documentation about all smoke-related procedures
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-50 P 6/8

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
‐ Operators should ensure that cabin crew are medically fit for the flight (e.g. cabin crew do not
have a cold that may affect their ability to detect the odor of smoke/fumes
‐ Finally, operators should have a policy about tripped circuit breakers which prevents cabin crew
from resetting tripped circuit breakers in any circumstance. The policy should also encourage
cabin crew to immediately report tripped circuit breakers to the flight crew. Tripped circuit
breakers indicate the existence of an abnormal electrical situation, and the possible existence of
29
smoke/fumes and/or fire.
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-50 P 7/8

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-50 P 8/8

à
Tr
CCOM 10 OCT 23
ạm
Ph
A321
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL MANAGING IN-FLIGHT FIRES
MANAGING IN-FLIGHT FIRES

Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
An in-flight fire is probably the most serious in-flight emergency and must be brought under control
29
as soon as possible. Considering the crucial role that time plays in this type of emergency, it is
2:
imperative that no time is lost when attempting to extinguish the fire.
412
STATISTICAL DATA – BACKGROUND INFORMATION
20
4/
A study conducted by the Transportation Safety Board of Canada revealed that the average
0
9/
elapsed time between the discovery of an in-flight fire and the actual landing of the aircraft is 17
-2
minutes.
9-
Any fire, no matter how small, may rapidly become out of control, if not dealt with quickly.
y2
The first priority will always be TO PUT IT OUT.
àM
BASIC FIRE CHEMISTRY
Tr
ạm
To enable cabin crew to effectively fight an in-flight fire, it is important for cabin crew to have
Ph
a basic knowledge of fire chemistry. This will help cabin crew to understand the importance of
selecting the correct fire extinguisher in a given fire situation.
9
The key to fire prevention is keeping fuel and ignition sources separate.
:2
12
Combustion consists of three elements: Oxygen, Heat and Fuel

4
Together, these elements create a chemical chain reaction and result in a fire.
02
The goal of firefighting is to eliminate at least one element from the fire, in order to extinguish it.
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
The Fire Triangle

02
/2
A fire will continue unless:

04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-60 P 1/6

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
A321
• The fuel supply has been cut off

• There is no more oxygen available
• The temperature has been cooled below the flammability temperature.
Note: For the purpose of this document, “fuel” refers to any flammable material.
29
FIRE CLASSIFICATION
2:
41
Fires are classified into four types: those in solids, those in flammable liquids, those in electrical
2
20
equipment, and those in flammable metals. These are called, respectively, class A, B, C, and D
4/
fires.
0
9/
Refer to 14-020 CLASSES OF FIRE
-2
Class A and C fires are the most commonly encountered fires onboard aircraft. It is important for
9-
the cabin crew to select an appropriate fire extinguisher, according to the class of fire.
y2
FIREFIGHTER EQUIPMENT àM
Tr
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
ạm
Hand-held fire extinguishers discharge an extinguishing agent for 8 to 25 seconds, depending

Ph
on their type and capacity. Due to this short period, it is essential to select and use the
appropriate fire extinguisher immediately.
9
:2
There are different types of fire extinguishers:

4 12
‐ Halon : is the generic name for the group of '' bromochlorodifluoromethane '' (BCF)
02
extinguishers that can be used for class A, B, and C fires

/2
04
‐ Carbon dioxide (CO2) for class B and C fires

9/
‐ Dry powder (DP) for class D fires

-2
‐ Dry chemicals for class A, B, and C fires

9-
‐ Water solution (H2O) for class A fires.

y2
àM
HOW TO USE A FIRE EXTINGUISHER

Tr
Note: This can also be easily remembered by using the word P A S S

ạm
Ph
‐ Pull the pin or turn the handle as appropriate. For some water extinguishers, the handle
must be turned in a clockwise direction, in order to pierce the carbon dioxide cartridge and to
29
pressurize the extinguisher

:
12
‐ Aim the fire extinguisher at the base of the fire. The best firefighting results are achieved by
4
02
attacking the base of the fire at the closest edge of the fire, and progressing toward the back.
/2
If possible test the fire extinguisher before aiming it at the fire

04
‐ Squeeze the top handle or lever

9/
-2
‐ Sweep the fire extinguisher nozzle from side to side in a sweeping motion
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-60 P 2/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
Do not direct the initial extinguishing agent discharge at close range onto burning material. The
high speed of the stream of extinguishing agent may cause the extinguishing agent to splash
and/or scatter burning material. Stay at least five to eight feet away from the fire
Hand-held fire extinguishers should always be used in an upright position.
Note: There are only a limited number of fire extinguishers onboard the aircraft.
29
Ensure that an extinguisher has been fully discharged before using another.
2:
41
PORTABLE BREATHING EQUIPMENT
2
20
Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE) is designed to protect the cabin crew from smoke, toxic
4/
fumes and gases. The cabin crew can still communicate amongst themselves, and with the
0
9/
flight crew via the interphone.
-2
CRASH AXE
9-
y2
A crash axe can be used to lever panels, to enable cabin crew to insert the nozzle of the fire
àM
extinguisher behind a panel. The crash axe may also be used for moving burning material for
Tr
example, burnt wiring. The crash axe has an insulated handle and is resistant to high voltages.
ạm
Only use the hook end of the crash axe and use small tapping motions to make a hole in an
Ph
area that is difficult to access. The hook end can then be used to make the hole bigger as
required.
9
:2
FIRE GLOVES
4 12
Fire gloves are fire retardant. These gloves give protection to hands and arms against heat.
02
/2
USE OF NON STANDARD EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT

04
9/
Cabin crew need to be resourceful when fighting an in-flight fire. Be prepared to improvise by
-2
using other equipment such as pots of coffee/tea, to fight a visible fire for example, a waste bin
9-
fire.
y2
àM
OPERATIONAL STANDARDS FOR AN IN-FLIGHT FIRE

Tr
CREW COMMUNICATION AND COORDINATION

ạm
In the event of an in-flight fire, communication between the cabin crew and flight crew is
Ph
essential. If a fire is discovered in the cabin, the cabin crew must inform the flight crew
immediately.
29
The firefighting effort requires coordination between the cabin crew. The duties are divided into
:
12
three main roles, the Firefighter, the Communicator and the Assistant Firefighter. All other cabin
4
02
crew play a supporting role.

/2
After any fire or smoke/fumes occurrence, one cabin crewmember should be responsible for
04
9/
monitoring the affected area for the remainder of the flight, and for regularly reporting to the
-2
Purser. Then the Purser will report to the flight crew.

-
Refer to 14-020 FIRE FIGHTING ROLE DEFINITION

29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-60 P 3/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
AWARENESS TO SMOKE/FUMES AND FIRE HIDDEN AREAS

Refer to 14-020 AWARENESS TO SMOKE IN HIDDEN AREAS
AREA SPECIFIC FIRES
Refer to 14-020 AREA SPECIFIC FIRES
29
OVEN FIRES/SMOKE/FUMES
2:
41
Refer to 14-020 OVEN SMOKE
2
20
WASTE BIN FIRE
4/
0
9/
If there is a fire in the waste bin, the fire extinguisher operates automatically. When a
-2
predetermined temperature has been reached, the fusible plug at the end of the discharge tube
9-
melts, and enables the extinguishing agent to flow into the waste bin.
y2
Cabin crew should ensure that a preflight check of the pressure gauge is conducted, to ensure
that the waste bin fire extinguisher is functional. àM
Tr
Regular checks of the lavatories should be conducted in-flight as part of the cabin crew duties.
ạm
LITHIUM BATTERY FIRE

Ph
Refer to 14-020 LITHIUM BATTERY FIRES

9
:2
OPERATIONAL AND HUMAN FACTORS INVOLVED IN IN-FLIGHT FIRES MANAGEMENT

12
HUMAN FACTORS (SITUATIONAL AWARENESS)

4
02
/2
Cabin crew should always be alert to any sight, odor or sound that may indicate the presence of
04
fire, including:
9/
-2
‐ Fumes or unusual odors

9-
‐ Electrical malfunctions, for example, tripped circuit breakers

y2
‐ Noises, such as popping, snapping or crackling that may indicate electrical arcing
àM
‐ Hot spots on sidewalls, floors, and panels.

Tr
if passenger and/or crewmembers suddenly develop:

ạm
Ph
‐ Eye irritation
‐ Sore throats
29
‐ Headaches.
:
12
This may indicate that fumes are present, before smoke or fire is visible. The cabin crew must
4
02
immediately investigate any reports from passengers, in order to locate and extinguish the fire in
/2
its early stages.

04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-60 P 4/6

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
FACTORS AFFECTING OPERATIONAL STANDARDS

Analysis of in-service events has demonstrated that operational standards can be ineffective or
not applicable in the following situations
▸ Ineffective detection of fire:
• Passenger tampers with lavatory smoke detector and drops cigarette end in the waste bin.
29
2:
▸ Incorrect application of the procedure:
412
• A crewmember opens the lavatory doors without checking it for heat with the back of their
20
hand, and a flash fire occurs.
4/
0
9/
▸ Lack of training:
-2
• The cabin crew do not immediately react to the fire
9-
• A cabin crewmember notices the fire, but loses time in locating the nearest fire extinguisher in
y2
the cabin àM
• The cabin crew do not have adequate firefighting skills
Tr
• Cabin crew do not coordinate their firefighting efforts.

ạm
Ph
▸ Lack of Operator procedures and policy:

• The Operator does not have adequate procedures and policies for cabin crew to effectively
9
:2
deal with onboard fires.

4 12
▸ Ineffective communication with the flight crew:

02
/2
• The communicator underestimates the severity of the fire to the flight crew, the flight crew
04
think it’s a smoke/fumes incident.

9/
-2
9-
Fire prevention should be practiced by cabin crew as part of their daily duties. Cabin crew should
y2
maintain continuous vigilance and be alert to any indication of a smoke/fumes/fire.

àM
Some of the fire prevention duties of the cabin crew can include:
Tr
ạm
1. Frequently monitoring of the lavatories during the flight

Ph
2. Performing a complete pre-flight check of the ovens and galleys to ensure that they are clean
and serviceable
29
3. Ensuring that all passengers and crew comply with the NO SMOKING policy.
:
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-60 P 5/6

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-080-60 P 6/6

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JAN 22
ạm
Ph
ADDITIONAL ABNORMAL/EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
A321
SLIDE RAFT TRANSPORTATION

Applicable to: ALL
Only after ditching, if one cabin door is inoperative, its corresponding slide raft can be disconnected,
transported and operated from another cabin door, which has already been operated and the slide
raft disconnected.
29
2:
PRIOR TO STEP 1
41
2
INOPERATIVE DOOR
20
4/
The slide raft arming lever of the inoperative door must be in the armed position.
0
9/
-2
SURVIVAL KIT
9-
The survival kits are located in a stowage adjacent to the slide rafts. Survival kits must be
y2
attached to the slide rafts using the white lanyard located under the slide pack.
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-090 P 1/16

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
A321
Survival Kit Connection 1 Survival Kit Connection 2
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-090 P 2/16

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
REMOVAL OF THE DECORATIVE COVER

Removal of the Decorative Cover
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
1. Release straps underneath the cover

:
12
2. Unlock the latches on the top of the cover.

4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-090 P 3/16

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
Decorative Cover
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
Remove the decorative cover.

/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-090 P 4/16

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
INSTRUCTION LABELS
Instruction Label Positions
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-090 P 5/16

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
Instruction Label A
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
Instruction label step 1 to 5, located above the lacing cover.

/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-090 P 6/16

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
Instruction Label B
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
Instruction label step 6 to 12, located on the backside of the pack board.
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-090 P 7/16

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
STEP 1
STEP 1
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
To release the girt bar, firmly pull the yellow lanyard located below the pack in a direction of 45°
9/
AFT.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-090 P 8/16

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
STEP 2
STEP 2
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
Pull the red handles (LH and RH) on the top of the slide pack.
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-090 P 9/16

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
STEP 3
STEP 3
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
Grab slides of slide pack and lift unit off door mounting.
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-090 P 10/16

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
STEP 4
STEP 4
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
Disconnect the wire harness behind pack board by turning the connector counterclockwise.
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-090 P 11/16

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
STEP 5 - 6 - 7
STEP 5 - 6 - 7
29
2:
412
20
04/
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
‐ Invert the unit by placing the slide raft on floor with pack facing up
9/
‐ Place the girt bar and the survival kit on the slide pack.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-090 P 12/16

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
STEP 8 AND 9
STEP 8 and 9
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
‐ Carry the unit to the alternative door

9/
‐ Place in front of door, pack board facing up, arrows pointing outboard
-2
‐ Place the survival kit on the floor.

9-
STEP 10
y2
àM
Step 10
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-090 P 13/16

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
Remove the other girt bar remaining at alternate door.

STEP 11
STEP 11
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
Insert the girt bar into the fittings.

9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-090 P 14/16

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
STEP 12 AND 13
Step 12 STEP 13
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
‐ Roll the unit out of the door
àM
‐ Pull the red manual inflation handle to inflate the slide raft.
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-090 P 15/16

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 14-090 P 16/16

à
Tr
CCOM 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
CABIN CREW BULLETINS
Ph
ạm
Tr
à My
29
-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:29
Ph
ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
04
/2
02
4 12
:2
9
Ph

ạm
Tr
àM
y2
9-
-2
9/
0 4/
20
2 41
2:
29
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
17-010 Introduction
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................A
17-CCB1 Spurious FAP Message

Spurious FAP Message...........................................................................................................................................A
29
2:
17-CCB3 Loss Of The I-PRAM Audio Sound
2 41
Loss Of The I-PRAM Audio Sound......................................................................................................................... A
20
4/
17-CCB4 Anomalies On The FAP Pages
0
9/
-2
Anomalies On The FAP Pages............................................................................................................................... A
9-
17-CCB5 No Automatic Cabin Illumination in Case of Excessive Cabin Altitude or Cabin
y2
Decompression àM
No Automatic Cabin Illumination in Case of Excessive Cabin Altitude or Cabin Decompression........................... A
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
PRELIMINARY PAGES
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 11 JUL 23
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
DEFINITION
A Cabin Crew Bulletin (CCB) is issued to rapidly inform operators of any deviations from
29
initial design objectives that have a significant impact on cabin operations. A CCB provides the
2:
operators with technical information and temporary operational procedures that address these
41
deviations.
2
20
TYPE OF CCB
4/
0
9/
CCBs can either be red or white, depending on their level of priority.
-2
Red CCBs : Are issued to indicate that non-compliance with the recommended
9-
procedures may have a significant impact on the safe operation of the
y2
cabin. àM
Withe CCBs : Are issued to indicate that non-compliance with the recommended
Tr
procedures may have a significant impact on the operation of the cabin.

ạm
Airbus strongly recommends that all Operators rapidly apply the CCB corrective actions as soon
Ph
as they become available, particularly for red CCBs.

The information in the CCB is recommended by Airbus, but may not be approved by Airworthiness
9
:2
Authorities. If the procedures contained in the CCB differs from the procedures in the AFM, the
12
approved AFM remains the reference.

4
02
/2
CCB CONTENT AND MANAGEMENT

04
9/
A CCB:
-2
‐ Is a part of the Cabin Crew Operating Manual (CCOM)

9-
‐ Is temporary and usually focuses on one operational subject only

y2
‐ Remains applicable until the appropriate corrective actions are completed

àM
‐ Is filed in numerical order.

Tr
The content of each CCB includes:

ạm
Ph
‐ The reason for issue

‐ Technical explanations of the deviation from the initial design objectives
‐ The CCB operational procedure(s) to be applied
29
:
‐ The corrective actions that cancel the CCB , if available when the CCB is issued.
412
CCB NUMBERING
02
/2
CCBs are fully integrated in the CCOM from December 2008, therefore the CCB numbering has
04
9/
been modified.
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 17-010 P 1/2

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
INTRODUCTION
A321
From December 2008, 5 CCBs remain applicable (depending on aircraft configuration) for the
entire fleet.
TITLE OLD NUMBERING NEW NUMBERING APPROVAL DATE
Spurious FAP Message 030/2 1 issue 1.0 SEP 28/07
Inadvertent FAP Reset 031/2 2 issue 1.0 SEP 28/07
29
Loss of the I-PRAM Audio Sound 034/2 3 issue 1.0 SEP 28/07
2:
Anomalies on the FAP Pages 035/2 4 issue 1.0 SEP 28/07
41
No Automatic Cabin Illumination in Case 042/2 5 issue 1.0 SEP 28/07
2
of Excessive Cabin Altitude or Cabin
20
4/
Decompression
0
9/
DISTRIBUTION
-2
Airbus provides all affected operators with CCBs. It is operators responsibility to ensure the
9-
distribution of all CCBs to all their applicable cabin crew.
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 17-010 P 2/2

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 03 JUL 19
ạm
Ph
SPURIOUS FAP MESSAGE
A321

CCB1 Issue 1
SPURIOUS FAP MESSAGE - APPROVAL
29
Ident.: 17-CCB1-CCB1-00006267.0001001 / 28 SEP 07
2:
41
2
APPROVAL REFERENCE
20
4/
APPROVED BY: Head of Flight Operations Support and Services
0
Approval date: 28 SEP 07
9/
-2
Approval reference: Head of Flight Operations Support and Services
9-
Approved by: Head of Flight Operations Support and Services
y2
àM
- This CCB covers a significant operational issue. Non-compliance with this CCB may have a
Tr
significant impact on the operations of the cabin. Airbus recommends that the operators apply this
ạm
CCB within 30 days from the date of issue of this CCB.

Ph
- Airbus recommends that all operators rapidly incorporate the corrective Service Bulletins that
cancel this CCB when they become available.
9
:2
12
Reason for issue: Spurious FAP message, displayed on the system info page of the
4
02
Forward Attendant Panel (FAP) after system power-up or power

/2
transfer.
04
The purpose of this CCB is to provide cabin crew with operational

9/
-2
recommendations regarding an erroneous FAP message on the system

info page.
9-
y2
àM
Applicable to: A318, A319/A320/A321 aircraft with enhanced CIDS (Mod 33100):
CIDS software PN Z064H000030D/30E/30F/31A/31B/31C/31D
Tr
ạm
Ph
Note: The interchangeability code, given in the Illustrated Part Catalog (IPC), indicates the conditions for interchangeability
of equipment. After installation of corrective modification(s)/SB(s), if an Operator reinstalls any equipment affected by this
29
CCB, it is the Operator's responsibility to ensure that the recommendations given in this CCB are applied again for the
:
12
applicable aircraft.
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My
HVN A321 FLEET 17-CCB1 P 1/4

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
A321
CCBs are issued by Airbus, as the need arises, to rapidly inform operators of any deviations from
initial design objectives that have a significant operational impact related to cabin.
Airbus distributes CCBs to all CCOM holders.
Authorities.
29
2:
If the procedures contained in this CCB differ from the procedures in the AFM, the approved AFM
41
remains the reference.
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
M Localization T DU Title DU identification DU date

17-CCB1 Spurious FAP Message NG00560
17-CCB1 Spurious FAP Message - Approval 00006267.0001001 28 SEP 07
Criteria: K8400
17-CCB1 Spurious FAP Message - Desc - Bulletin 00006268.0001001 16 OCT 08
29
Criteria: K8400
2:
41
17-CCB1 Spurious FAP Message - Proc - Bulletin 00006269.0001001 16 OCT 08
2
Criteria: K8400
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
EXPLANATION
During CIDS power-up, the message “CHECK ATTENDANT AND PAX RELATED FUNCTIONS
[PA/INTPH/SIGNS/PAX CALL/LIGHTS]” may appear on the FAP system info page.
PROCEDURE
29
2:
The validity of the fault message can be checked by selecting the FAP status page.
41
FAP STATUS PAGE...................................................................................... SELECT AND CHECK
2
20
CABIN CREW.........................................................................COORDINATE WITH FLIGHT CREW
4/
0
9/
If no anomaly is noticed, the correct FAP indication can be recovered by a reset of the Directors
-2
via C/Bs located on 49VU and 121VU in the cockpit
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
LOSS OF THE I-PRAM AUDIO SOUND
A321

CCB3 Issue 1
LOSS OF THE I-PRAM AUDIO SOUND - APPROVAL
29
Ident.: 17-CCB3-CCB3-00006272.0001001 / 28 SEP 07
2:
41
2
20
APPROVAL REFERENCE
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph

9

:2
412
Reason for issue: The purpose of this CCB is to provide cabin crew with operational
02
/2
recommendations regarding loss of I-PRAM audio sound.

04
9/
-2
CIDS software PN Z064H000030D/30E/30F/31A/31B/31C/31D.
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
4

02
/2
04
Authorities.
9/
-2

-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
A321

17-CCB3 Loss Of The I-PRAM Audio Sound NG00562
17-CCB3 Loss Of The I-PRAM Audio Sound - 00006272.0001001 28 SEP 07
Approval
Criteria: K8400
29
17-CCB3 Loss Of The I-PRAM Audio Sound - 00006273.0001001 16 OCT 08
2:
desc - Bulletin
41
Criteria: K8400
2
20
17-CCB3 Loss Of The I-PRAM Audio Sound - 00006274.0001001 16 OCT 08
4/
Proc - Bulletin
0
9/
Criteria: K8400
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
EXPLANATION
Although the handling of the FAP audio page appears to be normal, no sound can be heard in the
cabin when an announcement or the boarding music is selected.
29
2:
PROCEDURE
412
20
CABIN CREW...................................................................... COORDINATE WITH FLIGHT CREW
04/
The I-PRAM functionality can be recovered by a reset of the Directors via C/Bs located on 49VU
9/
and 121VU in the cockpit.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
ANOMALIES ON THE FAP PAGES
A321

CCB4 Issue 1
ANOMALIES ON THE FAP PAGES - APPROVAL
29
Ident.: 17-CCB4-CCB4-00006277.0001001 / 28 SEP 07
2:
41
2
20
APPROVAL REFERENCE
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph

9

:2
412
Reason for issue: The purpose of this CCB is to provide cabin crew with operational
02
/2
recommendations regarding possible anomaly on the FAP Pages.

04
9/
-2
CIDS software PN Z064H000030D/30E/30F/31A/31B/31C/31D
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
12
4

02
/2
04
Authorities.
9/
-2

-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
A321

17-CCB4 Anomalies On The FAP Pages NG00564
17-CCB4 Anomalies On The FAP Pages - 00006277.0001001 28 SEP 07
Approval
Criteria: K8400
29
17-CCB4 Anomalies On The FAP Pages - Desc - 00006278.0001001 16 OCT 08
2:
Bulletin
41
Criteria: K8400
2
20
17-CCB4 Anomalies On The FAP Pages - Proc - 00006279.0001001 16 OCT 08
4/
Bulletin
0
9/
Criteria: K8400
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
EXPLANATION
It may happen that display and operation anomalies may be experienced on the FAP pages
(Mostly audio or Lighting page).
29
2:
PROCEDURE
412
20
CABIN CREW...................................................................... COORDINATE WITH FLIGHT CREW
04/
The correct FAP indication or the FAP operation can be recovered by a reset of the Directors via
9/
C/Bs located on 49VU and 121VU in the cockpit.
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
A321
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2

412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM 02 MAR 20
ạm
Ph
NO AUTOMATIC CABIN ILLUMINATION IN CASE OF
EXCESSIVE CABIN ALTITUDE OR CABIN DECOMPRESSION
A321

CCB5 Issue 1
NO AUTOMATIC CABIN ILLUMINATION - APPROVAL
29
2:
41
Ident.: 17-CCB5-CCB5-00006275.0001001 / 28 SEP 07
2
20
4/
APPROVAL REFERENCE
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph

9
:2

412
02
Reason for issue: The purpose of this CCB is to inform cabin crews that the cabin
/2
lights may remain off in case of excessive cabin altitude or cabin

04
9/
decompression
-2
9-
y2
CIDS software P/N Z064H000032A.

àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
29
:
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM A→ 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph
A321
Authorities.
29
2:
41
2
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321

17-CCB5 No Automatic Cabin Illumination in Case NG00563
of Excessive Cabin Altitude or Cabin
Decompression
17-CCB5 No Automatic Cabin Illumination - 00006275.0001001 28 SEP 07
Approval
29
2:
412
20
4/
0
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
4 12
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
: 29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr

ạm
Ph
A321
EXPLANATION
If the cabin lights are set to the off position (window and aisle pushbuttons set to off), in the event
of an excessive cabin altitude or a decompression the cabin lights will not automatically come on
(normally 100 %).
29
PROCEDURE
2:
41
For night flight, the cabin lights should be set to DIM2 (window and/or aisle) to avoid the above
2
described anomaly.
20
Otherwise, during an event (Decompression or excessive cabin altitude) the cabin lights can be
4/
0
turned on manually by pressing the appropriate pushbuttons on the FAP/AAP.
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
9
:2
412
02
/2
04
9/
-2
9-
y2
àM
Tr
ạm
Ph
:29
12
4
02
/2
04
9/
-2
-
29
My

à
Tr
CCOM ←A 08 JAN 20
ạm
Ph

Airbus Inf - Ccom - A321 - R - 10oct23

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Airbus Inf - Ccom - A321 - R - 10oct23

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A321

© AIRBUS 2005. All rights reserved.

REFERENCE: HVN A321 FLEET CCOM ISSUE DATE: 10 OCT 23

Intentionally left blank

Issue date: 10 OCT 23

HVN A321 FLEET TRL P 1/2

Intentionally left blank

HVN A321 FLEET TRL P 2/2

Please incorporate this revision as follow:

Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS)

03-100 - Baby Bassinet ALL

Emergency Equipment Preflight Inspection

SLIDE DISARMING PROCEDURE

HVN A321 FLEET FI P 1/2

Continued from the previous page

HVN A321 FLEET FI P 2/2

Intentionally left blank

HVN A321 FLEET PLP-LECCB P 1/2

Intentionally left blank

HVN A321 FLEET PLP-LECCB P 2/2

00A CABIN INSTRUCTIONS AND LIMITATIONS

08 IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT (IFE)

09 DOORS AND SLIDES

10 EVACUATION (EVAC) AND ALERT (ECAS) SYSTEMS

13 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

17 CABIN CREW BULLETINS

HVN A321 FLEET PLP-TOC P 1/2

Intentionally left blank

HVN A321 FLEET PLP-TOC P 2/2

01-080 CABIN DOORS 12 APR 22

02-010 INTRODUCTION 03 JUL 19

02-040-20 Location 03 JUL 19

02-040-30 Description and Operation 01 APR 20

02-050 ESCAPE ROPE 03 JUL 19

02-060 COCKPIT DOOR 12 APR 22

02-090-10 Fixed Oxygen - Description 12 APR 22

02-090-20 Fixed Oxygen - Location 20 JAN 20

02-090-30 Fixed Oxygen - Operation 11 JAN 22

02-090-40 Portable Oxygen - PBE 20 JAN 20

03-010-10 Deck Configuration 12 APR 22

03-010-30 Business Class Seat 06 JAN 21

03-010-40 Economy Class Seat 06 OCT 20

03-040-10 Location 03 JUL 19

03-040-20 Description 12 APR 22

03-050-30-10 Cabin Crew Stations 12 APR 22

03-050-30-20 Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS) 10 OCT 23

03-060-10 General 08 JAN 20

03-060-20 Description and Operation 10 JAN 23

03-070-10 Galley General 08 JAN 20

03-070-20 Location 12 APR 22

HVN A321 FLEET PLP-LESS P 1/6

Continued from the previous page

03-100-20 Capability for Stretcher Loading 06 JAN 21

04-010 CIDS INTRODUCTION 03 JUL 19

04-020-20-A Attendant Indication Panel (AIP) 03 JUL 19

04-020-20-B Area Call Panel (ACP) 03 JUL 19

04-020-20-C Passenger Service Unit (PSU) 08 JAN 20

04-020-20-D Passenger Signs 08 JAN 20

04-025 VISUAL AND AURAL ALERTS 10 OCT 23

04-030-10 CIDS Configuration 03 JUL 19

04-030-20 Cabin Programming 03 JUL 19

04-030-30 Layout Selection 03 JUL 19

04-030-40 Level Adjustment 03 JUL 19